Ansys 14 Element Reference

ANSYS Mechanical APDL Element Reference
ANSYS, Inc. Release 14.0

Southpointe November 2011
275 Technology Drive
Canonsburg, PA 15317 ANSYS, Inc. is
[email protected] certified to ISO
http://www.ansys.com 9001:2008.
(T) 724-746-3304
(F) 724-514-9494
Copyright and Trademark Information
© 2011 SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Unauthorized use, distribution or duplication is prohibited.
ANSYS, ANSYS Workbench, Ansoft, AUTODYN, EKM, Engineering Knowledge Manager, CFX, FLUENT, HFSS and any
and all ANSYS, Inc. brand, product, service and feature names, logos and slogans are registered trademarks or
trademarks of ANSYS, Inc. or its subsidiaries in the United States or other countries. ICEM CFD is a trademark used
by ANSYS, Inc. under license. CFX is a trademark of Sony Corporation in Japan. All other brand, product, service
and feature names or trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
Disclaimer Notice
THIS ANSYS SOFTWARE PRODUCT AND PROGRAM DOCUMENTATION INCLUDE TRADE SECRETS AND ARE CONFID-
ENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY PRODUCTS OF ANSYS, INC., ITS SUBSIDIARIES, OR LICENSORS. The software products
and documentation are furnished by ANSYS, Inc., its subsidiaries, or affiliates under a software license agreement
that contains provisions concerning non-disclosure, copying, length and nature of use, compliance with exporting
laws, warranties, disclaimers, limitations of liability, and remedies, and other provisions. The software products
and documentation may be used, disclosed, transferred, or copied only in accordance with the terms and conditions
of that software license agreement.
ANSYS, Inc. is certified to ISO 9001:2008.
U.S. Government Rights

For U.S. Government users, except as specifically granted by the ANSYS, Inc. software license agreement, the use,
duplication, or disclosure by the United States Government is subject to restrictions stated in the ANSYS, Inc.
software license agreement and FAR 12.212 (for non-DOD licenses).
Third-Party Software
See the legal information in the product help files for the complete Legal Notice for ANSYS proprietary software
and third-party software. If you are unable to access the Legal Notice, please contact ANSYS, Inc.
Published in the U.S.A.

Table of Contents
1. About This Reference .............................................................................................................................. 1
1.1. Overview .......................................................................................................................................... 1
1.2. Conventions Used in This Reference .................................................................................................. 1
1.2.1. Applicable Products ................................................................................................................. 2
1.2.2. Product Codes ......................................................................................................................... 3
1.3. Product Capabilities .......................................................................................................................... 3
2. Element Classifications ........................................................................................................................... 5
2.1. Overview of Element Characteristics ................................................................................................. 5
2.1.1. Identifying Element Types ........................................................................................................ 5
2.1.2. 2-D vs. 3-D Elements ................................................................................................................. 5
2.1.3. Element Shape Characteristics .................................................................................................. 6
2.1.4. Element Degrees of Freedom and Discipline ............................................................................. 6
2.1.5. User-Defined Elements ............................................................................................................. 6
2.2. Summary of Element Types ............................................................................................................... 6
2.3. Selecting Elements for Your Analysis ................................................................................................ 22
2.4. Current-Technology Elements ......................................................................................................... 38
2.4.1. Legacy vs. Current Element Technologies ................................................................................ 39
2.5. Degenerated Shape Elements ......................................................................................................... 39
2.5.1. Obtaining the Best Results from Degenerated Shape Elements ............................................... 40
2.5.2. Degenerated Triangular 2-D Solid and Shell Elements ............................................................. 40
2.5.2.1. Triangular Shell Elements Are Preferred in Some Cases ................................................... 40
2.5.3. Degenerated Triangular Prism Elements ................................................................................. 41
2.5.4. Degenerated Tetrahedral Elements ......................................................................................... 41
2.5.5. Surface Stresses on Condensed Element Faces ........................................................................ 41
2.6. Special-Purpose Elements ............................................................................................................... 41
2.6.1. Superelements ....................................................................................................................... 41
2.6.2. User-Defined Elements ........................................................................................................... 42
2.7. GUI-Inaccessible Elements .............................................................................................................. 42
3. General Element Features ..................................................................................................................... 43
3.1. Element Input ................................................................................................................................. 43
3.1.1. Element Name ....................................................................................................................... 43
3.1.2. Nodes .................................................................................................................................... 43
3.1.2.1. Internal nodes ............................................................................................................... 44
3.1.3. Degrees of Freedom ............................................................................................................... 44
3.1.4. Material Properties ................................................................................................................. 44
3.1.5. Sections ................................................................................................................................. 45
3.1.6. Real Constants ....................................................................................................................... 45
3.1.7. Element Loading .................................................................................................................... 45
3.1.7.1. Surface Loads ................................................................................................................ 46
3.1.7.1.1. Applying Surface Loads ......................................................................................... 47
3.1.7.1.2. Multiple Surface Loads .......................................................................................... 47
3.1.7.1.3. Surface Load Labels and Keys ................................................................................ 47
3.1.7.1.4. Tapered Surface Load ............................................................................................ 47
3.1.7.2. Body Loads .................................................................................................................... 47
3.1.7.2.1. Applying Body loads ............................................................................................. 48
3.1.7.2.2. Temperature Body Loads ....................................................................................... 48
3.1.7.3. Inertial Loads ................................................................................................................. 48
3.1.7.4. Initial Stresses ................................................................................................................ 48
3.1.8. Nodal Loading ....................................................................................................................... 49
3.1.9. Element Properties and Controls (KEYOPTs) ............................................................................ 49
Release 14.0 - © SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. iii
3.1.9.1. Element KEYOPT Defaults .............................................................................................. 49

3.1.9.1.1. Consider Automatic Element Selection .................................................................. 49
3.1.9.1.2. KEYOPT Settings May Vary Between Products ........................................................ 49
3.1.10. Special Element Features ...................................................................................................... 50
3.2. Solution Output .............................................................................................................................. 50
3.2.1. Output File Contents .............................................................................................................. 50
3.2.2. Results File and Database Contents ......................................................................................... 50
3.2.3. Nodal Solution ....................................................................................................................... 51
3.2.4. Element Solution .................................................................................................................... 51
3.2.4.1. The Element Output Definitions Table ............................................................................ 52
3.2.4.2. The Item and Sequence Number Table ........................................................................... 52
3.2.4.3. Surface Loads ................................................................................................................ 52
3.2.4.4. Integration Point Solution (Output Listing Only) ............................................................. 53
3.2.4.5. Centroidal Solution (Output Listing Only) ....................................................................... 53
3.2.4.6. Element Nodal Solution ................................................................................................. 53
3.2.4.7. Element Nodal Loads ..................................................................................................... 53
3.2.4.8. Nonlinear Solutions ....................................................................................................... 54
3.2.4.9. 2-D and Axisymmetric Solutions .................................................................................... 54
3.2.4.10. Member Force Solution ................................................................................................ 54
3.2.4.11. Failure Criteria ............................................................................................................. 54
3.3. Coordinate Systems ........................................................................................................................ 56
3.3.1. Understanding the Element Coordinate System ...................................................................... 56
3.3.1.1. Modifying the Element Orientation ................................................................................ 57
3.3.2. Elements That Operate in the Nodal Coordinate System .......................................................... 58
3.3.3. Solution Coordinate Systems .................................................................................................. 58
4. Elements for Stress Analysis ................................................................................................................. 61
4.1. Continuum Stress Elements ............................................................................................................. 61
4.1.1. Stress States in 2-D Continuum Elements ................................................................................ 61
4.1.1.1. Plane Stress ................................................................................................................... 62
4.1.1.2. Plane Strain ................................................................................................................... 62
4.1.1.3. Generalized Plane Strain ................................................................................................ 62
4.1.1.4. Axisymmetric ................................................................................................................ 62
4.1.1.5. General Axisymmetric .................................................................................................... 62
4.1.1.5.1. Alternate General Axisymmetric Method for Linear Problems ................................. 63
4.1.2. Element Technologies ............................................................................................................ 63
4.1.2.1. Technologies for Lower-Order Quad and Brick Elements ................................................. 63
4.1.2.1.1. B-bar Method (Selective Reduced Integration) ....................................................... 64
4.1.2.1.2. Enhanced Strain Formulation ................................................................................ 64
4.1.2.1.3. Simplified Enhanced Strain Formulation ................................................................ 64
4.1.2.1.4. Uniform Reduced Integration ................................................................................ 64
4.1.2.2. Technologies for Lower-Order Tetrahedron Elements ...................................................... 65
4.1.2.3. Technologies for Higher-Order Quad or Brick Elements ................................................... 65
4.1.2.4. Technologies for Higher-Order Triangle or Tetrahedron Elements .................................... 65
4.1.3. Mixed u-P Formulation ........................................................................................................... 65
4.1.3.1. Overview of Mixed u-P Element Technologies ................................................................ 65
4.1.3.2. Mixed u-P Element Summary ......................................................................................... 66
4.1.3.3. Applications of Mixed u-P Formulations ......................................................................... 67
4.1.3.4. Mixed u-P Models and Overconstraint or No Unique Solution ......................................... 68
4.1.4. Generalized Plane Strain Options ............................................................................................ 68
4.1.5. Axisymmetric Elements with Nonaxisymmetric Loads ............................................................. 70
4.1.5.1. General Axisymmetric Elements ..................................................................................... 70
4.1.5.1.1. Example: 3-D General Axisymmetric Model ............................................................ 73
iv of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
4.1.5.2. Harmonic Axisymmetric Elements .................................................................................. 76

4.1.5.2.1. Harmonic Axisymmetric Elements with Nonaxisymmetric Loads ............................ 77
4.2. Shell Elements ................................................................................................................................ 81
4.2.1. Shell Shear and Warping ......................................................................................................... 81
4.2.2. Shell Element Coordinate System ........................................................................................... 81
4.2.3. Shell Element Nodes .............................................................................................................. 82
4.3. Beam and Link (Truss) Elements ...................................................................................................... 82
4.4. Pipe Elements ................................................................................................................................. 82
4.5. Reinforcing Elements ...................................................................................................................... 83
4.5.1. Discrete Reinforcing ............................................................................................................... 83
4.5.2. Smeared Reinforcing .............................................................................................................. 83
4.6. Surface Elements ............................................................................................................................ 84
4.7. Automatic Selection of Element Technologies and Formulations ...................................................... 84
4.8. Elements Under Linear Perturbation ................................................................................................ 87
4.8.1. Material Properties of Structural Elements in Linear Perturbation ............................................ 88
4.8.1.1. Specifying Material Behavior in Linear Perturbation ........................................................ 88
4.8.2. Interpretation of Structural Element Results After a Linear Perturbation Analysis ..................... 89
4.8.3. Loads, Initial Conditions, and Other Limitations in Linear Perturbation ..................................... 89
5. Elements for Multiphysics Analysis ....................................................................................................... 91
5.1. Elements for Coupled-Physics Analysis ............................................................................................ 91
5.1.1. Coupled-Field Element Classifications ..................................................................................... 91
5.1.2. Selecting Elements for Coupled-Physics Analysis ..................................................................... 92
5.2. Elements for Thermal Analysis ......................................................................................................... 94
5.2.1. Thermal Elements for the Structural Region ............................................................................ 94
5.2.2. Thermal Elements for the Fluid Region .................................................................................... 95
5.2.3. Thermal Loading Elements ..................................................................................................... 95
5.2.3.1. Using Thermal Surface-Loading Elements ....................................................................... 95
5.2.3.2. Using Contact Elements to Load Thermal Models ........................................................... 96
5.2.4. Thermal Control Element ........................................................................................................ 96
5.2.5. Other Elements Useful in a Thermal Analysis ........................................................................... 96
5.3. Elements for Acoustic Analysis ........................................................................................................ 96
5.4. Elements for Electric and Magnetic Analysis .................................................................................... 97
6. Element Library ................................................................................................................................... 101
I. Element Library .................................................................................................................................... 103
SOLID5: 3-D Coupled-Field Solid .......................................................................................................... 105
INFIN9: 2-D Infinite Boundary .............................................................................................................. 115
LINK11: Linear Actuator ....................................................................................................................... 119
PLANE13: 2-D Coupled-Field Solid ....................................................................................................... 123
COMBIN14: Spring-Damper ................................................................................................................. 133
MASS21: Structural Mass ..................................................................................................................... 139
PLANE25: Axisymmetric-Harmonic 4-Node Structural Solid .................................................................. 143
MATRIX27: Stiffness, Damping, or Mass Matrix ...................................................................................... 151
SHELL28: Shear/Twist Panel ................................................................................................................. 157
FLUID29: 2-D Axisymmetric Harmonic Acoustic Fluid ........................................................................... 163
FLUID30: 3-D Acoustic Fluid ................................................................................................................. 169
LINK31: Radiation Link ......................................................................................................................... 175
LINK33: 3-D Conduction Bar ................................................................................................................ 179
LINK34: Convection Link ...................................................................................................................... 183
PLANE35: 2-D 6-Node Triangular Thermal Solid .................................................................................... 187
SOURC36: Current Source .................................................................................................................... 191
COMBIN37: Control ............................................................................................................................. 195
FLUID38: Dynamic Fluid Coupling ....................................................................................................... 205
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. v
COMBIN39: Nonlinear Spring ............................................................................................................... 209

COMBIN40: Combination .................................................................................................................... 217
SHELL41: Membrane Shell ................................................................................................................... 225
INFIN47: 3-D Infinite Boundary ............................................................................................................ 233
MATRIX50: Superelement (or Substructure) ......................................................................................... 237
PLANE53: 2-D 8-Node Magnetic Solid .................................................................................................. 241
PLANE55: 2-D Thermal Solid ................................................................................................................ 251
SHELL61: Axisymmetric-Harmonic Structural Shell ............................................................................... 257
SOLID62: 3-D Magneto-Structural Solid ............................................................................................... 273
SOLID65: 3-D Reinforced Concrete Solid .............................................................................................. 283
LINK68: Coupled Thermal-Electric Line ................................................................................................. 293
SOLID70: 3-D Thermal Solid ................................................................................................................. 297
MASS71: Thermal Mass ........................................................................................................................ 303
PLANE75: Axisymmetric-Harmonic 4-Node Thermal Solid .................................................................... 307
PLANE77: 2-D 8-Node Thermal Solid .................................................................................................... 313
PLANE78: Axisymmetric-Harmonic 8-Node Thermal Solid .................................................................... 319
FLUID79: 2-D Contained Fluid .............................................................................................................. 325
FLUID80: 3-D Contained Fluid .............................................................................................................. 329
FLUID81: Axisymmetric-Harmonic Contained Fluid .............................................................................. 335
PLANE83: Axisymmetric-Harmonic 8-Node Structural Solid .................................................................. 341
SOLID87: 3-D 10-Node Tetrahedral Thermal Solid ................................................................................. 349
SOLID90: 3-D 20-Node Thermal Solid ................................................................................................... 353
CIRCU94: Piezoelectric Circuit .............................................................................................................. 359
SOLID96: 3-D Magnetic Scalar Solid ..................................................................................................... 367
SOLID97: 3-D Magnetic Solid ............................................................................................................... 373
SOLID98: Tetrahedral Coupled-Field Solid ............................................................................................ 385
INFIN110: 2-D Infinite Solid .................................................................................................................. 395
INFIN111: 3-D Infinite Solid .................................................................................................................. 401
INTER115: 3-D Magnetic Interface ........................................................................................................ 407
FLUID116: Coupled Thermal-Fluid Pipe ................................................................................................ 411
HF118: 2-D High-Frequency Quadrilateral Solid ................................................................................... 421
HF119: 3-D High-Frequency Tetrahedral Solid ...................................................................................... 427
HF120: 3-D High-Frequency Brick Solid ................................................................................................ 435
PLANE121: 2-D 8-Node Electrostatic Solid ............................................................................................ 443
SOLID122: 3-D 20-Node Electrostatic Solid ........................................................................................... 449
SOLID123: 3-D 10-Node Tetrahedral Electrostatic Solid ......................................................................... 455
CIRCU124: Electric Circuit .................................................................................................................... 461
CIRCU125: Diode ................................................................................................................................. 473
TRANS126: Electromechanical Transducer ............................................................................................ 479
FLUID129: 2-D Infinite Acoustic ............................................................................................................ 489
FLUID130: 3-D Infinite Acoustic ............................................................................................................ 493
SHELL131: 4-Node Thermal Shell ......................................................................................................... 497
SHELL132: 8-Node Thermal Shell ......................................................................................................... 505
FLUID136: 3-D Squeeze Film Fluid Element .......................................................................................... 513
FLUID138: 3-D Viscous Fluid Link Element ............................................................................................ 523
FLUID139: 3-D Slide Film Fluid Element ................................................................................................ 527
FLUID141: 2-D Fluid-Thermal ............................................................................................................... 533
FLUID142: 3-D Fluid-Thermal ............................................................................................................... 543
ROM144: Reduced Order Electrostatic-Structural ................................................................................. 553
SURF151: 2-D Thermal Surface Effect ................................................................................................... 557
SURF152: 3-D Thermal Surface Effect ................................................................................................... 567
SURF153: 2-D Structural Surface Effect ................................................................................................. 577
vi of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
SURF154: 3-D Structural Surface Effect ................................................................................................. 585

SURF156: 3-D Structural Surface Line Load Effect ................................................................................. 593
SHELL157: Thermal-Electric Shell ......................................................................................................... 599
SURF159: General Axisymmetric Surface .............................................................................................. 605
LINK160: Explicit 3-D Spar (or Truss) ..................................................................................................... 615
BEAM161: Explicit 3-D Beam ................................................................................................................ 619
PLANE162: Explicit 2-D Structural Solid ................................................................................................ 633
SHELL163: Explicit Thin Structural Shell ................................................................................................ 639
SOLID164: Explicit 3-D Structural Solid ................................................................................................. 651
COMBI165: Explicit Spring-Damper ...................................................................................................... 657
MASS166: Explicit 3-D Structural Mass ................................................................................................. 661
LINK167: Explicit Tension-Only Spar ..................................................................................................... 663
SOLID168: Explicit 3-D 10-Node Tetrahedral Structural Solid ................................................................. 667
TARGE169: 2-D Target Segment ........................................................................................................... 671
TARGE170: 3-D Target Segment ........................................................................................................... 679
CONTA171: 2-D 2-Node Surface-to-Surface Contact ............................................................................. 691
CONTA172: 2-D 3-Node Surface-to-Surface Contact ............................................................................ 707
CONTA175: 2-D/3-D Node-to-Surface Contact ...................................................................................... 759
CONTA176: 3-D Line-to-Line Contact ................................................................................................... 777
CONTA177: 3-D Line-to-Surface Contact .............................................................................................. 793
CONTA178: 3-D Node-to-Node Contact ............................................................................................... 805
PRETS179: Pretension .......................................................................................................................... 819
LINK180: 3-D Spar (or Truss) ................................................................................................................. 823
SHELL181: 4-Node Structural Shell ....................................................................................................... 829
PLANE182: 2-D 4-Node Structural Solid ................................................................................................ 845
PLANE183: 2-D 8-Node or 6-Node Structural Solid ............................................................................... 853
MPC184: Multipoint Constraint Element .............................................................................................. 861
MPC184-Link/Beam: Multipoint Constraint Element: Rigid Link or Rigid Beam ....................................... 867
MPC184-Slider: Multipoint Constraint Element: Slider ........................................................................... 873
MPC184-Revolute: Multipoint Constraint Element: Revolute Joint ......................................................... 877
MPC184-Universal: Multipoint Constraint Element: Universal Joint ....................................................... 887
MPC184-Slot: Multipoint Constraint Element: Slot Joint ........................................................................ 897
MPC184-Point: Multipoint Constraint Element: Point-in-plane Joint ...................................................... 905
MPC184-Trans: Multipoint Constraint Element: Translational Joint ........................................................ 913
MPC184-Cylin: Multipoint Constraint Element: Cylindrical Joint ............................................................ 921
MPC184-Planar: Multipoint Constraint Element: Planar Joint ................................................................ 933
MPC184-Weld: Multipoint Constraint Element: Weld Joint .................................................................... 945
MPC184-Orient: Multipoint Constraint Element: Orient Joint ................................................................ 951
MPC184-Spherical: Multipoint Constraint Element: Spherical Joint ....................................................... 957
MPC184-General: Multipoint Constraint Element: General Joint ............................................................ 963
MPC184-Screw: Multipoint Constraint Element: Screw Joint ................................................................. 973
SOLID185: 3-D 8-Node Structural Solid ................................................................................................ 983
SOLID186: 3-D 20-Node Structural Solid .............................................................................................. 999
SOLID187: 3-D 10-Node Tetrahedral Structural Solid ........................................................................... 1015
BEAM188: 3-D 2-Node Beam .............................................................................................................. 1021
BEAM189: 3-D 3-Node Beam .............................................................................................................. 1039
SOLSH190: 3-D 8-Node Structural Solid Shell ..................................................................................... 1055
INTER192: 2-D 4-Node Gasket ............................................................................................................ 1065
INTER194: 3-D 16-Node Gasket .......................................................................................................... 1073
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. vii

MESH200: Meshing Facet .................................................................................................................. 1081
FOLLW201: Follower Load ................................................................................................................. 1085
INTER202: 2-D 4-Node Cohesive ........................................................................................................ 1089
INTER204: 3-D 16-Node Cohesive ....................................................................................................... 1097
SHELL208: 2-Node Axisymmetric Shell ............................................................................................... 1105
SHELL209: 3-Node Axisymmetric Shell ............................................................................................... 1115
CPT212: 2-D 4-Node Coupled Pore-Pressure Mechanical Solid ............................................................ 1125
COMBI214: 2-D Spring-Damper Bearing ............................................................................................. 1137
CPT216: 3-D 20-Node Coupled Pore-Pressure Mechanical Solid ......................................................... 1149
CPT217: 3-D 10-Node Coupled Pore-Pressure Mechanical Solid .......................................................... 1155
FLUID220: 3-D Acoustic Fluid 20-Node Solid Element ......................................................................... 1161
FLUID221: 3-D Acoustic Fluid 10-Node Solid Element ......................................................................... 1167
PLANE223: 2-D 8-Node Coupled-Field Solid ....................................................................................... 1173
SOLID226: 3-D 20-Node Coupled-Field Solid ...................................................................................... 1187
SOLID227: 3-D 10-Node Coupled-Field Solid ...................................................................................... 1201
PLANE230: 2-D 8-Node Electric Solid ................................................................................................. 1215
SOLID231: 3-D 20-Node Electric Solid ................................................................................................ 1221
SOLID232: 3-D 10-Node Tetrahedral Electric Solid .............................................................................. 1227
PLANE233: 2-D 8-Node Electromagnetic Solid ................................................................................... 1231
SOLID236: 3-D 20-Node Electromagnetic Solid .................................................................................. 1239
SOLID237: 3-D 10-Node Electromagnetic Solid .................................................................................. 1249
HSFLD241: 2-D Hydrostatic Fluid ....................................................................................................... 1257
HSFLD242: 3-D Hydrostatic Fluid ....................................................................................................... 1263
SURF251: 2-D Radiosity Surface ......................................................................................................... 1269
SURF252: 3-D Radiosity Surface ......................................................................................................... 1273
REINF263: 2-D Smeared Reinforcing ................................................................................................... 1277
REINF264: 3-D Discrete Reinforcing .................................................................................................... 1285
REINF265: 3-D Smeared Reinforcing ................................................................................................... 1293
SOLID272: General Axisymmetric Solid with 4 Base Nodes .................................................................. 1301
SOLID273: General Axisymmetric Solid with 8 Base Nodes .................................................................. 1309
SOLID278: 3-D 8-Node Thermal Solid ................................................................................................. 1317
SOLID279: 3-D 20-Node Thermal Solid ............................................................................................... 1327
SHELL281: 8-Node Structural Shell ..................................................................................................... 1339
SOLID285: 3-D 4-Node Tetrahedral Structural Solid with Nodal Pressures ............................................ 1353
PIPE288: 3-D 2-Node Pipe .................................................................................................................. 1359
PIPE289: 3-D 3-Node Pipe ................................................................................................................. 1377
ELBOW290: 3-D 3-Node Elbow ........................................................................................................... 1393
USER300: User-Defined Element ........................................................................................................ 1409
Bibliography ........................................................................................................................................... 1411
Index ...................................................................................................................................................... 1413
List of Figures
4.1. Generalized Plane Strain Deformation ................................................................................................... 69
4.2. General Axisymmetric Elements and Their Coordinate Systems (KEYOPT(2) = 3) ...................................... 71
4.3. Axisymmetric Radial, Axial, Torsion and Moment Loadings ..................................................................... 78
viii of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
4.4. Bending and Shear Loading (ISYM = 1) .................................................................................................. 79

4.5. Uniform Lateral Loadings ...................................................................................................................... 80
4.6. Bending and Shear Loading (ISYM = -1) ................................................................................................. 80
4.7. Displacement and Force Loading Associated with MODE = 2 and ISYM = 1 ............................................. 80
List of Tables
3.1. Surface Loads Available in Each Discipline ............................................................................................. 46
3.2. Body Loads Available in Each Discipline ................................................................................................. 47
3.3. Orthotropic Material Failure Criteria Data .............................................................................................. 54
4.1. Number of Independent Pressure Degrees of Freedom in One Element .................................................. 66
4.2. Fourier Terms for General Axisymmetric Elements .................................................................................. 72
4.3. Recommendation Criteria for Element Technology (Linear Material) ....................................................... 85
4.4. Recommendation Criteria for Element Technology (Nonlinear Materials) ................................................ 86
4.5. Elements Supporting Linear Perturbation Analysis ................................................................................. 87
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. ix
x of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 1: About This Reference
Welcome to the Element Reference. The following topics are available to introduce you to ANSYS, Inc.
element technology:
1.1. Overview
1.2. Conventions Used in This Reference
1.3. Product Capabilities
1.1. Overview
The purpose this reference is to help you understand, select, and use elements for your analysis.
The reference begins with a general description of the elements, focusing on common features or
properties, and including information about how elements, loads, coordinate systems, and output are
defined. See "General Element Features".
Elements are then introduced by classifications based on dimensions, application or discipline, and
elements with special properties and shapes. See "Element Classifications".
Subsequent documentation includes specific information about each element class, such as continuum
stress, shells, beams, pipes, and others. Basic assumptions, advantages, and limitations of each element
class are discussed. Common formulation and element usage techniques are also described.
Finally, a complete library of detailed element descriptions, arranged in order by element number, is
presented. The element library is the definitive reference for element documentation. See Part I, Element
Library.
This reference is not a primary source of conceptual or procedural information. See the appropriate
analysis guides for that information.
1.2. Conventions Used in This Reference

This reference uses the following conventions to help you identify various types of information:
Type style or Indicates

text
UPPERCASE or Uppercase indicates an element name (such as SOLID273 or
UPPERCASE ELBOW290).
Bold uppercase indicates a command name (such as K or

DDELE).
Bold> Bold Bold text in mixed case indicates a menu path within the
graphical user interface (GUI), a series of menu options for
accessing a command from the GUI.
One or more angle brackets (>) separate menu items in a menu

path.
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1
Chapter 1: About This Reference
Type style or Indicates

text
A command shown in the text is sometimes followed by its
GUI equivalent in parentheses, as shown in this example: *GET
command (Utility Menu> Parameters> Get Scalar Data).
ITALICS Uppercase italic letters (such as VALUE, INC, TIME) generally
indicate command arguments for numeric values.
In some cases (where indicated in the documentation), non-

numeric convenience labels (for example, ALL and P) can also
be entered for these arguments.
Italics Mixed case italic letters (such as Lab or Fname) indicate command
arguments for alphanumeric values.
COURIER A courier font indicates command input or output.
Any mention of a given element implies a reference (link) to the appropriate element documentation,
where you can find detailed information about that element.
1.2.1. Applicable Products

This reference applies to the following family of products:
ANSYS Multiphysics (includes all structural, thermal, electromagnetics, and computational fluid dy-
namics (CFD) capabilities, excludes explicit dynamics)
ANSYS Mechanical (includes all structural and thermal capabilities; excludes electromagnetics, CFD,
and explicit dynamics capabilities)
ANSYS Structural (includes all structural linear and nonlinear capabilities)
ANSYS Professional (Nonlinear Thermal and Nonlinear Structural)
ANSYS Emag (Low Frequency and High Frequency)
ANSYS FLOTRAN
ANSYS LS-DYNA
ANSYS PrepPost
ANSYS ED
ANSYS Mechanical/ANSYS Emag (combination of All Mechanical and Emag capabilities)
ANSYS Mechanical/CFX-Flo (combination of All Mechanical and CFX-Flo capabilities)
Element Option Availability
Even if an element is available in a particular product, some of its options may not be. Most element
descriptions include a Product Restrictions section which details any specific restrictions the element
may have in each of the products.
ANSYS Multiphysics
Some element key option (KEYOPT) settings have defaults in the derived products that differ from those
in ANSYS Multiphysics. Such cases are clearly documented under the Product Restrictions section of
the documentation for the element. If you intend to use your derived product input file in ANSYS Mul-
tiphysics, you should explicitly input these settings in the derived product, rather than letting them
default; otherwise, behavior in ANSYS Multiphysics will differ.
Connections and High Performance Computing
2 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Product Capabilities
While connection capabilities and High Performance Computing are included as part of the release
distribution, they are separately-licensed products. Contact your ASD if you want to install and run any
of the separately-licensed products at your site.
1.2.2. Product Codes

A list of product codes appears near the top of the first page of each element description. The codes
represent individual products in the ANSYS family of products. The element is valid only for the product
codes listed.
An element that is valid within the entire set of products has the following list of product codes:
MP ME ST PR PRN DS DSS FL EM EH DY PP VT EME MFS
The codes represent each of the products in the ANSYS family of products:
Code Product
MP ANSYS Multiphysics
ME ANSYS Mechanical
ST ANSYS Structural
PR ANSYS Professional - Nonlinear Thermal
PRN ANSYS Professional - Nonlinear Structural
DS ANSYS DesignSpace
DSS ANSYS DesignSpace - Structural
FL ANSYS FLOTRAN
EM ANSYS Emag - Low Frequency
EH ANSYS Emag - High Frequency
DY ANSYS LS-DYNA
PP ANSYS PrepPost
VT ANSYS DesignXplorer
EME ANSYS Mechanical/ANSYS Emag
MFS ANSYS Mechanical/CFX-Flo
If the code for a given product appears, an element is valid for that product. Exceptions are noted under
Product Restrictions in the documentation for that element.
In most cases, elements valid in ANSYS Multiphysics are also valid in the ANSYS ED and ANSYS Multiphys-
ics 1, 2, and 3 products. (ANSYS ED and ANSYS Multiphysics 1, 2, and 3 are not listed as separate product
codes.
1.3. Product Capabilities

A complete list of engineering capabilities available in the various ANSYS, Inc. products is available on
the ANSYS, Inc. Web site at http://www.ansys.com/assets/brochures/capabilities-brochure.pdf.
Chapter 2: Element Classifications
A large library of element types is available for use in your analysis. To help you select elements for
your analysis, basic characteristics of the element types, and their groupings, are described here.
The following topics related to element types and classifications are available:
2.1. Overview of Element Characteristics
2.2. Summary of Element Types
2.3. Selecting Elements for Your Analysis
2.4. Current-Technology Elements
2.5. Degenerated Shape Elements
2.6. Special-Purpose Elements
2.7. GUI-Inaccessible Elements
Detailed descriptions for each element type are given in Element Library (p. 101).
2.1. Overview of Element Characteristics

The following element overview topics are available:
2.1.1. Identifying Element Types
2.1.2. 2-D vs. 3-D Elements
2.1.3. Element Shape Characteristics
2.1.4. Element Degrees of Freedom and Discipline
2.1.5. User-Defined Elements
2.1.1. Identifying Element Types

An element type is identified by a name (eight characters maximum), such as PIPE288, consisting of a
group label (PIPE) and a unique identifying number (288).
The element descriptions in Element Library (p. 101) are arranged in order of these identification numbers.
The element is selected from the library for use in the analysis by inputting its name on the element
type command (ET).
2.1.2. 2-D vs. 3-D Elements

Models may be either 2-D or 3-D depending upon the element types used.
A 2-D model must be defined in an X-Y plane. They are easier to set up, and run faster than equivalent
3-D models. Axisymmetric models are also considered to be 2-D.
If any 3-D element type is included in the element type (ET ) set, the model becomes 3-D. Some element
types (such as COMBIN14) may be 2-D or 3-D, depending upon the KEYOPT value selected. Other element
types (such as COMBIN40) have no influence in determining the model dimensions. A 2-D element type
may be used (with caution) in 3-D models.
2.1.3. Element Shape Characteristics

In general, four shapes are possible: point, line, area, or volume.
• A point element is typically defined by one node, such as a mass element.

• A line element is typically represented by a line or arc connecting two or three nodes. Examples are
beams, spars, pipes, and axisymmetric shells.
• An area element has a triangular or quadrilateral shape and may be a 2-D solid element or a shell element.
• A volume element has a tetrahedral or brick shape and is usually a 3-D solid element.
2.1.4. Element Degrees of Freedom and Discipline

The degrees of freedom of the element determine the discipline for which the element is applicable:
structural, thermal, fluid, electric, magnetic, or coupled-field.
Select an element type with the necessary degrees of freedom characterize the model's response.
Including unnecessary degrees of freedom increases the solution memory requirements and running
time. Similarly, selecting element types with unnecessary features--for example, using an element type
with plastic capability in an elastic solution--also increases the analysis run time.

You can create your own element type and use it in an analysis as a user-defined element.
User-defined elements are described in Creating a New Element in the Guide to ANSYS User Programmable
Features.
2.2. Summary of Element Types

The following tables show elements listed by group label in numerical order, along with a description
and graphical representation for each.
BEAM Elements HF Elements MESH Elements SHELL Elements

CIRCU Elements HSFLD Elements MPC Elements SOLID Elements
COMBIN Elements INFIN Elements PIPE Elements SOLSH Elements
CONTAC Elements INTER Elements PLANE Elements SOURC Elements
CPT Elements LINK Elements PRETS Elements SURF Elements
FLUID Elements MASS Elements REINF Elements TARGE Elements
FOLLW Elements MATRIX Elements ROM Elements TRANS Elements
BEAM Elements Graphic Pictorials

BEAM161
Explicit 3-D Beam
3 nodes 3-D space
DOF: UX, UY, UZ, ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ, VX,
VY, AX, AY, AZ
Summary of Element Types
BEAM Elements Graphic Pictorials

BEAM188
Structural 3-D 2-Node Beam
2 nodes 3-D space
DOF: UX, UY, UZ, ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ
BEAM189
Structural 3-D 3-Node Beam
3 nodes 3-D space
CIRCU Elements Graphic Pictorials

CIRCU94
Coupled-Field Piezoelectric Circuit
2 or 3 nodes 2-D space
DOF: VOLT, CURR
CIRCU124
Magnetic Electric Circuit
2-6 nodes 3-D space
DOF: VOLT, CURR, EMF
CIRCU125
Magnetic Electric Diode
2 nodes 3-D space
DOF: VOLT
COMBIN Elements Graphic Pictorials

COMBIN14
Combination Spring-Damper
2 nodes 3-D space
COMBIN37
Combination Control
4 nodes 3-D space
DOF: UX, UY, UZ, ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ, PRES,
TEMP
COMBIN39
Combination Nonlinear Spring
2 nodes 3-D space
TEMP
COMBIN40
Combination
2 nodes 3-D space
TEMP
COMBIN Elements Graphic Pictorials

COMBI165
Explicit Dynamics Spring-Damper
2 nodes 3-D space
DOF: UX, UY, UZ, ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ, VX,
VY, VZ, AX, AV, AZ
COMBI214
Combination Spring-Damper Bearing
2 nodes 2-D space
DOF: UX, UY, UZ,
CONTAC Elements Graphic Pictorials

CONTA171
2-D 2-Node Surface-to-Surface Contact
2 nodes 2-D space
DOF: UX, UY, TEMP, VOLT, AZ
CONTA172
3 nodes 2-D space
DOF: UX, UY, TEMP, VOLT, AZ
CONTA173
4 nodes 3-D space
DOF: UX, UY, UZ, TEMP, VOLT, MAG
CONTA174
8 nodes 3-D space
CONTA175
2-D/3-D Node-to-Surface Contact
1 node 2-D/3-D space
DOF: UX, UY, UZ, TEMP, VOLT, AX, MAG
CONTA176
3-D Line-to-Line Contact
3 nodes 3-D space
DOF: UX, UY, UZ
CONTA177
3-D Line-to-Surface Contact
3 nodes 3-D space
DOF: UX, UY, UZ
CONTA178
3-D Node-to-Node Contact
2 nodes 3-D space
DOF: UX, UY, UZ
CPT Elements Graphic Pictorials

CPT212
2-D 4-Node Coupled Pore-Pressure Mech-
anical Solid
4 nodes 2-D space
DOF: UX, UY, PRES
CPT213
anical Solid
8 nodes 2-D space
DOF: UX, UY, PRES
CPT215
anical Solid
8 nodes 3-D space
DOF: UX, UY, UZ, PRES
CPT216
3-D 20-Node Coupled Pore-Pressure
Mechanical Solid
20 nodes 3-D space
CPT217
3-D 10-Node Coupled Pore-Pressure
Mechanical Solid
10 nodes 3-D space
FLUID Elements Graphic Pictorials

FLUID29
2-D Acoustic Fluid
4 nodes 2-D space
DOF: UX, UY, PRES
FLUID30
3-D Acoustic Fluid
8 nodes 3-D space
FLUID38
Dynamic Fluid Coupling
2 nodes 3-D space
DOF: UX, UY, UZ
FLUID79
2-D Contained Fluid
4 nodes 2-D space
DOF: UX, UY

FLUID80
3-D Contained Fluid
8 nodes 3-D space
DOF: UX, UY, UZ
FLUID81
Axisymmetric-Harmonic Contained Fluid
4 nodes 2-D space
DOF: UX, UY, UZ
FLUID116
Coupled Thermal-Fluid Pipe
2 nodes 3-D space
DOF: PRES, TEMP
FLUID129
2-D Infinite Acoustic
2 nodes 2-D space
DOF: PRES
FLUID130
4 nodes 3-D space
DOF: PRES
FLUID136
3-D Squeeze Film Fluid
4, 8 nodes 3-D space
DOF: PRES
FLUID138
3-D Viscous Fluid Link
2 nodes 3-D space
DOF: PRES
FLUID139
3-D Slide Film Fluid
2, 32 nodes 3-D space
DOF: UX, UY, UZ
FLUID141
2-D Fluid-Thermal
4 nodes 2-D space
DOF: VX, VY, VZ, PRES, TEMP, ENKE, ENDS
FLUID142
3-D Fluid-Thermal
8 nodes 3-D space
DOF: VX, VY, VZ, PRES, TEMP, ENKE, ENDS

FLUID220
3-D Acoustic Fluid
20 nodes 3-D space
FLUID221
3-D Acoustic Fluid
10 nodes 3-D space
FOLLW Elements Graphic Pictorials

FOLLW201
3-D Follower Load
1 node 3-D space
HF Elements Graphic Pictorials

HF118
2-D High-Frequency Magnetic Electric
Quadrilateral Solid
8 nodes 2-D space
DOF: AX
HF119
3-D High-Frequency Magnetic Electric Tet-
rahedral Solid
10 nodes 3-D space
DOF: AX
HF120
3-D High-Frequency Magnetic Electric Brick
Solid
20 nodes 3-D space
DOF: AX
HSFLD Elements Graphic Pictorials

HSFLD241
2-D Hydrostatic Fluid
4 nodes 2-D space
DOF: UX, UY, HDSP, PRES
HSFLD242
9 nodes 3-D space
DOF: UX, UY, UZ, HDSP, PRES
INFIN Elements Graphic Pictorials

INFIN9
2-D Infinite Boundary
2 nodes 2-D space
DOF: AZ, TEMP
INFIN47
4 nodes 3-D space
DOF: MAG, TEMP
INFIN110
2-D Infinite Solid
8
DOF: AZ, VOLT, TEMP
8
INFIN111
3-D Infinite Solid
DOF: MAG, AX, AY, AZ, VOLT, TEMP
INTER Elements Graphic Pictorials

INTER115
3-D Magnetic Electric Interface
4 nodes 3-D space
DOF: AX, AY, AZ, MAG
INTER192
Structural 2-D Interface 4-Node Gasket
4 nodes 2-D space
DOF: UX, UY
INTER193
6 nodes 2-D space
DOF: UX, UY
INTER194
16 nodes 3-D space
DOF: UX, UY, UZ
INTER195
8 nodes 3-D space
DOF: UX, UY, UZ
INTER202
Structural 2-D Interface 4-Node Cohesive
4 nodes 2-D space
DOF: UX, UY
INTER203
6 nodes 2-D space
INTER Elements Graphic Pictorials

DOF: UX, UY
INTER204
16 nodes 3-D space
DOF: UX, UY, UZ
INTER205
8 nodes 3-D space
DOF: UX, UY, UZ
LINK Elements Graphic Pictorials

LINK11
Structural 3-D Linear Actuator
2 nodes 3-D space
DOF: UX, UY, UZ
LINK31
Radiation Link
2 nodes 3-D space
DOF: TEMP
LINK33
Thermal 3-D Conduction Bar
2 nodes 3-D space
DOF: TEMP
LINK34
Convection Link
2 nodes 3-D space
DOF: TEMP
LINK68
Coupled Thermal-Electric Line
2 nodes 3-D space
DOF: TEMP, VOLT
LINK160
Explicit 3-D Spar (or Truss)
3 nodes 3-D space
DOF: UX, UY, UZ, VX, VY, VZ, AX, AY, AZ
LINK167
Explicit Tension-Only Spar
3 nodes 3-D space
LINK180
Structural 3-D Spar (or Truss)
2 nodes 3-D space
DOF: UX, UY, UZ
MASS Elements Graphic Pictorials

MASS21
Structural Mass
1 node 3-D space
MASS71
Thermal Mass
1 node 3-D space
DOF: TEMP
MASS166
Explicit 3-D Structural Mass
1 node 3-D space
MATRIX Elements Graphic Pictorials

MATRIX27
Stiffness, Damping, or Mass Matrix
2 nodes 3-D space
MATRIX50
Superelement (or Substructure)
2-D or 3-D space
DOF: Determined from included element
types
MESH Elements Graphic Pictorials

MESH200
Meshing Facet
2-20 nodes 2-D/3-D space
DOF: None
KEYOPT Dependent
MPC Elements Graphic Pictorials

MPC184
Structural Multipoint Constraint
KEYOPT Dependent
PIPE Elements Graphic Pictorials

PIPE288
3-D 2-Node Pipe
2 nodes 3-D space
PIPE289
3-D 3-Node Pipe
3 nodes 3-D space
PIPE Elements Graphic Pictorials

ELBOW290
3-D 3-Node Elbow
3 nodes 3-D space
PLANE Elements Graphic Pictorials

PLANE13
2-D Coupled-Field Solid
4 nodes 2-D space
DOF: TEMP, AZ, UX, UY, VOLT
PLANE25
Axisymmetric-Harmonic 4-Node Structural
Solid
4 nodes 2-D space
DOF: UX, UY, UZ
PLANE35
2-D 6-Node Triangular Thermal Solid
6 nodes 2-D space
DOF: TEMP
PLANE53
2-D 8-Node Magnetic Solid
8 nodes 2-D space
DOF: VOLT, AZ, CURR, EMF
PLANE55
2-D 4-Node Thermal Solid
4 nodes 2-D space
DOF: TEMP
PLANE75
2-D Axisymmetric-Harmonic 4-Node
Thermal Solid
4 nodes 2-D space
DOF: TEMP
PLANE77
8 nodes 2-D space
DOF: TEMP
PLANE78
2-D Axisymmetric-Harmonic 8-Node
Thermal Solid
8 nodes 2-D space
DOF: TEMP
PLANE83
2-D Axisymmetric - Harmonic 8-Node
Structural Solid
8 nodes 2-D space
DOF: UX, UY, UZ
PLANE Elements Graphic Pictorials

PLANE121
2-D 8-Node Electrostatic Solid
8 nodes 2-D space
DOF: VOLT
PLANE162
Explicit 2-D Structural Solid
4 nodes 2-D space
DOF: UX, UY, VX, VY, AX, AY
PLANE182
2-D 4-Node Structural Solid
4 nodes 2-D space
DOF: UX, UY
PLANE183
8 nodes 2-D space
DOF: UX, UY
PLANE223
2-D 8-Node Coupled-Field Solid
8 nodes 2-D space
DOF: UX, UY, TEMP, VOLT
PLANE230
2-D 8-Node Electric Solid
8 nodes 2-D space
DOF: VOLT
PLANE233
2-D 8-Node Electromagnetic Solid
8 nodes 2-D space
DOF: AZ, VOLT
PRETS Elements Graphic Pictorials

PRETS179
2-D/3-D Pretension Combination
3 nodes 2-D/3-D space
DOF: UX
REINF Elements Graphic Pictorials

REINF263
2-D Smeared Reinforcing
Up to 8 nodes 2-D space
DOF: UX, UY, UZ, ROTZ
REINF Elements Graphic Pictorials

REINF264
3-D Discrete Reinforcing
REINF265
ROM Elements Graphic Pictorials

ROM144
Reduced-Order Electrostatic-Structural
Coupled-Field
DOF: EMF, VOLT, UX
SHELL Elements Graphic Pictorials

SHELL28
Structural 3-D Shear/Twist Panel
4 nodes 3-D space
SHELL41
Structural 3-D Membrane Shell
4 nodes 3-D space
DOF: UX, UY, UZ
SHELL61
2-D Axisymmetric-Harmonic Structural Shell
2 nodes 2-D space
DOF: UX, UY, UZ, ROTZ
SHELL131
4-Node Thermal Shell
4 nodes 3-D space
DOF: TBOT, TE2, TE3, TE4, . . . TTOP
SHELL132
8 nodes 3-D space
DOF: TBOT, TE2, TE3, TE4, . . . TTOP
SHELL157
Thermal-Electric Shell
4 nodes 3-D space
DOF: TEMP, VOLT
SHELL Elements Graphic Pictorials

SHELL163
Explicit Thin Structural Shell
4 nodes 3-D space
DOF: UX, UY, UZ, VX, VY, VZ, AX, AY, AZ,
ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ,
SHELL181
4-Node Structural Shell
4 nodes 3-D space
SHELL208
2-Node Axisymmetric Shell
2 nodes 2-D space
DOF: UX, UY, ROTZ
SHELL209
3 nodes 2-D space
DOF: UX, UY, ROTZ
SHELL281
8 nodes 3-D space
SOLID Elements Graphic Pictorials

SOLID5
8 nodes 3-D space
SOLID62
3-D Magneto-Structural Coupled-Field Solid
8 nodes 3-D space
DOF: UX, UY, UZ, AX, AY, AZ, VOLT
SOLID65
3-D Reinforced Concrete Structural Solid
8 nodes 3-D space
DOF: UX, UY, UZ
SOLID70
3-D Thermal Solid
8 nodes 3-D space
DOF: TEMP
SOLID87
3-D 10-Node Tetrahedral Thermal Solid
10 nodes 3-D space
DOF: TEMP

SOLID90
20 nodes 3-D space
DOF: TEMP
SOLID96
3-D Magnetic Scalar Solid
8 nodes 3-D space
DOF: MAG
SOLID97
3-D Magnetic Solid
8 nodes 3-D space
DOF: AX, AY, AZ, VOLT, CURR, EMF
SOLID98
Tetrahedral Coupled-Field Solid
10 nodes 3-D space
SOLID122
20 nodes 3-D space
DOF: VOLT
SOLID123
3-D 10-Node Tetrahedral Electrostatic Solid
10 nodes 3-D space
DOF: VOLT
SOLID164
8 nodes 3-D space
SOLID168
Explicit 3-D 10-Node Tetrahedral Structural
Solid
10 nodes 3-D space
SOLID185
8 nodes 3-D space
DOF: UX, UY, UZ
SOLID186
20 nodes 3-D space
DOF: UX, UY, UZ

SOLID187
3-D 10-Node Tetrahedral Structural Solid
10 nodes 3-D space
DOF: UX, UY, UZ
SOLID226
20 nodes 3-D space
DOF: UX, UY, UZ, TEMP, VOLT
SOLID227
10 nodes 3-D space
DOF: UX, UY, UZ, TEMP, VOLT
SOLID231
20 nodes 3-D space
DOF: VOLT
SOLID232
3-D 10-Node Tetrahedral Electric Solid
10 nodes 3-D space
DOF: VOLT
SOLID236
20 nodes 3-D space
DOF: AZ, VOLT
SOLID237
10 nodes 3-D space
DOF: AZ, VOLT
SOLID272
4- to 48-Node General Axisymmetric Solid
(KEYOPT(2) = 3)
DOF: UX, UY, UZ
SOLID273
8- to 96-Node General Axisymmetric Solid
(KEYOPT(2) = 3)
DOF: UX, UY, UZ
SOLID278
8 nodes 3-D space
DOF: TEMP

SOLID279
20 nodes 3-D space
DOF: TEMP
SOLID285
with Nodal Pressure
4 nodes 3-D space
DOF: UX, UY, UZ, HDSP
SOLSH Elements Graphic Pictorials

SOLSH190
Structural Solid Shell
8 nodes 3-D space
DOF: UX, UY, UZ
SOURC Elements Graphic Pictorials

SOURC36
Magnetic Electric Current Source
3 nodes 3-D space
DOF: None
SURF Elements Graphic Pictorials

SURF151
2-D Thermal Surface Effect
DOF: TEMP
SURF152
4 to 10 nodes 3-D space
DOF: TEMP
SURF153
2-D Structural Surface Effect
DOF: UX, UY
SURF154
DOF: UX, UY, UZ
SURF156
3-D Structural Surface Line Load
DOF: UX, UY, UZ
SURF Elements Graphic Pictorials

SURF159
3-D General Axisymmetric Surface
DOF: UX, UY, UZ
SURF251
2-D Radiosity Surface
2 nodes 2-D space
SURF252
3-D Thermal Radiosity Surface
3 or 4 nodes, 3-D space
TARGE Elements Graphic Pictorials

TARGE169
Contact 2-D Target Segment
3 nodes 2-D space
DOF: UX, UY, ROTZ, TEMP
TARGE170
Contact 3-D Target Segment
8 nodes 3-D space
DOF: UX, UY, UZ, TEMP
TRANS Elements Graphic Pictorials

TRANS126
Electromechanical Transducer
2 nodes 3-D space
DOF: UX-VOLT, UY-VOLT, UZ-VOLT
2.3. Selecting Elements for Your Analysis

Use this list of elements sorted by application to select the best elements for your analysis. Primary
applications are as follows:
Structural Explicit Dynam- Thermal Acoustic

ics
Fluid Magnetic Electric Electric Circuit Coupled-Field
Contact Combination Matrix Infinite
Load Meshing Reinforcing User-Defined
Within each element category, the elements appear in order of shape function (topology). Current-
technology elements take precedence.
Structural
Selecting Elements for Your Analysis
Type Dimen- Element Pictorial

sion
Structural 3-D SOLID185 8-Node Structural Solid
Solid
SOLID186 20-Node Structural Sol-

id
SOLID187 10-Node Tetrahedral

Structural Solid

Structural Solid with Nodal Pres-
sures
SOLID65 8-Node Reinforced Con-

crete Structural Solid
2-D PLANE182 4-Node Structural Solid
PLANE183 8-Node Structural Solid
PLANE25 4-Node Axisymmetric-

Harmonic Structural Solid

Harmonic Structural Solid
General SOLID272 4- to 48-Node General

Axisym- Axisymmetric Solid
metric
SOLID273 8- to 96-Node General

Axisymmetric Solid
Structural 3-D SOLSH190 8-Node Structural Solid

Solid Shell Shell
Structural 3-D SHELL181 4-Node Structural Shell

Shell
SHELL281 8-Node Structural Shell
SHELL28 4-Node Structural

Shear/Twist Panel
SHELL41 4-Node Structural Mem-

brane Shell
2-D SHELL208 2-Node Axisymmetric

Shell
SHELL209 3-Node Axisymmetric

Shell
SHELL61 2-Node Axisymmetric-

Harmonic Structural Shell
Structural 3-D SOLID185 8-Node Layered Solid

Layered
Composite
SOLID186 20-Node Layered

Structural Solid
SOLSH190 8-Node Solid Shell
Structural 3-D BEAM188 2-Node Structural Beam

Beam
BEAM189 3-Node Structural Beam
Structural 3-D PIPE288 2-Node Pipe

Pipe
PIPE289 3-Node Pipe
ELBOW290 3-Node Elbow
Structural 3-D LINK180 2-Node Structural 3-D

Line Spar (or Truss)
LINK11 2-Node Structural Linear

Actuator
Structural 3-D MASS21 1-Node Structural Mass

Point
Structural 3-D INTER194 Interface 16-Node Gas-
Interface ket
INTER195 Interface 8-Node Gasket
INTER204 Interface 16-Node Co-

hesive
INTER205 Interface 8-Node Cohes-

ive
2-D INTER192 Interface 4-Node Gasket
INTER193 Interface 6-Node Gasket

ive
ive
Structural 3-D MPC184

Multipoint
Constraint
MPC184-Link/Beam
MPC184-Slider
MPC184-Revolute
MPC184-Universal
MPC184-Slot
MPC184-Point
MPC184Translational
MPC184Cylindrical
MPC184-Planar
MPC184-Weld
MPC184-Orient
MPC184-Spherical
MPC184-General
MPC184-Screw
Explicit Dynamics (Explicit dynamics analyses can use only explicit dynamic elements.)
sion
Explicit Sol- 3-D SOLID164 8-Node Explicit Structur-
id al Solid
SOLID16810-Node Explicit Tetra-

hedral Structural Solid
2-D PLANE162 4-Node Explicit Solid
Explicit 3-D SHELL163 4-Node Explicit Thin

Shell Structural Shell
Explicit 3-D BEAM161 3-Node Explicit Beam

Beam
Explicit 3-D LINK160 3-Node Explicit Spar (or

Line Truss)
LINK167 3-Node Explicit Tension-

Only Spar
COMBI165 2-Node Explicit Spring-

Damper
Explicit 3-D MASS166 1-Node Explicit Structur-

Point al Mass
Thermal
sion
Thermal 3-D SOLID278 8-Node Thermal Solid

Solid
SOLID279 20-Node Thermal Solid

Thermal Solid
2-D PLANE35 6-Node Triangular

Thermal Solid
PLANE55 4-Node Thermal Solid

Harmonic Thermal Solid
PLANE77 8-Node Thermal Solid

Harmonic Thermal Solid
Thermal 3-D SOLID278 8-Node Thermal Solid

Layered
Solid
Thermal 3-D SHELL131 4-Node Thermal Shell

Shell
SHELL132 8-Node Thermal Shell
Thermal 3-D LINK31 2-Node Radiation Link

Line
LINK33 2-Node Thermal Conduc-

tion Bar
LINK34 2-Node Convection Link
Thermal 3-D MASS71 1-Node Thermal Mass

Point
Thermal 3-D LINK68 2-Node Coupled Thermal-
Electric Electric Line
SHELL157 4-Node Thermal-Electric

Shell
Acoustic
sion
Acoustic 3-D FLUID30 8-Node Acoustic Fluid
Volume
FLUID220 20-Node Acoustic Fluid
FLUID221 10-Node Acoustic Fluid
2-D FLUID29 4-Node Acoustic Fluid
Acoustic 3-D FLUID130 4-Node Infinite Acoustic

Planar
Acoustic 2-D FLUID129 2-Node Infinite Acoustic

Line
Fluid
sion
Fluid 3-D FLUID80 8-Node Contained Fluid
Volume
HSFLD242 9-Node Hydrostatic

Fluid
2-D FLUID79 4-Node Contained Fluid
FLUID81 4-Node Axisymmetric-

Harmonic Contained Fluid
HSFLD241 4-Node Hydrostatic

Fluid
Fluid CFD 3-D FLUID142 8-Node Fluid-Thermal
2-D FLUID141 4-Node Fluid-Thermal
Fluid - Gap 3-D FLUID38 2-Node Dynamic Fluid

Coupling
FLUID136 4- or 8-Node Squeeze

Film Fluid
FLUID138 2-Node Viscous Fluid

Link
FLUID139 2- or 32-Node Slide Film

Fluid
Fluid Pipe 3-D FLUID116 2-Node Coupled

Thermal-Fluid Pipe
Magnetic Electric
sion
--- 3-D SOLID96 8-Node Magnetic Scalar
Solid
SOLID97 8-Node Magnetic Solid
INTER115 4-Node Magnetic Elec-

tric Interface
HF119 10-Node High-Frequency

Magnetic Electric Tetrahedral Solid

Magnetic Electric Brick Solid
SOLID122 20-Node Electrostatic

Solid

Electrostatic Solid
SOLID231 20-Node Electric Solid

Electric Solid
SOLID236 20-Node Electromagnet-

ic Solid
SOLID237 10-Node Electromagnet-

ic Solid
2-D PLANE53 8-Node Magnetic Solid

Magnetic Electric Quadrilateral
Solid
PLANE121 8-Node Electrostatic

Solid
PLANE230 8-Node Electric Solid
PLANE233 8-Node Electromagnet-

ic Solid
Electric Circuit
sion
--- 3-D SOURC36 3-Node Magnetic Elec-

tric Current Source
CIRCU124 2- to 6-Node Magnetic

Electric Circuit
CIRCU125 2-Node Magnetic Elec-

tric Diode
2-D CIRCU94 2- or 3-Node Coupled-

Field Piezoelectric Circuit
Coupled-Field
sion
--- 3-D SOLID226 20-Node Coupled-Field
Solid
SOLID227 10-Node Coupled-Field

Solid
SOLID5 8-Node Coupled-Field

Solid
SOLID62 3-D Magneto-Structural

Solid
LINK68 2-Node-Coupled Thermal-

Electric Line

Coupled-Field Solid
ROM144 20- or 30-Node Reduced-

Order Electrostatic-Structural
Coupled-Field
SHELL157 4-Node Thermal-Electric

Shell
CPT215 8-Node Coupled Pore-

Pressure Mechanical Solid


2-D PLANE223 8-Node Coupled-Field

Solid
PLANE13 4-Node Coupled-Field

Solid


Contact
sion
--- 3-D TARGE170 8-Node Contact 3-D
Target Segment
CONTA173 4-Node Surface-to-

Surface Contact

Surface Contact
CONTA176 3-Node Line-to-Line

Contact
CONTA177 3-Node Line-to-Surface

Contact
CONTA178 2-Node Node-to-Node

Contact
2-D/3-D CONTA175 1-Node Node-to-Sur-

face Contact
2-D TARGE169 3-Node Contact 2-D
Target Segment

Surface Contact

Surface Contact
Combination
sion
--- 3-D COMBIN14 2-Node Combination
Spring-Damper
COMBIN37 4-Node Combination

Control

Nonlinear Spring
2-D/3-D PRETS179 3-Node Pretension

Combination
2-D COMBI214 2-Node Combination

Spring-Damper Bearing
Matrix
sion
--- 3-D MATRIX27 2-Node Stiffness,
Damping, or Mass Matrix
2-D/3-D MATRIX50 Superelement (or Sub-

structure)
Infinite
sion
--- 3-D INFIN47 4-Node Infinite Boundary
INFIN111 8- or 20-Node Infinite

Solid 8
2-D INFIN9 2-Node Infinite Boundary
INFIN110 4- or 8-Node Infinite

8
Solid
Load
sion
--- 3-D SURF152 4- to 10-Node Thermal
Surface Effect
SURF154 4- to 8-Node Structural

Surface Effect
SURF156 3- or 4-Node Structural

Surface Line Load
SURF159 2- to 36-Node General

Axisymmetric Surface
FOLLW201 1-Node Follower Load

SURF252 3- or 4-Node Thermal
Radiosity Surface
2-D SURF151 2- or 4-Node Thermal

Surface Effect
SURF153 2- or 3-Node Structural

Surface Effect
SURF251 2-Node Radiosity Surface
Meshing
sion
--- 2-D/3-D MESH200 2- to 20-Node Meshing
Facet
Reinforcing
sion
--- 3-D REINF264 2- to 20-Node Discrete
Reinforcing
REINF265 2- to 20-Node Smeared

Reinforcing
2-D REINF263 2- to 8-Node Smeared

Reinforcing
User-Defined
sion
--- --- USER300 ---
2.4. Current-Technology Elements

As technology advances, ANSYS, Inc. continues to develop robust new element types using the most
current technologies available. Current-technology elements are more advanced and feature-rich than
legacy elements. For example, support for the following capabilities is available only in applicable current-
technology elements:
• A vast array of material constitutive options (such as anisotropic hyperelasticity, cast iron plasticity, en-
hanced Drucker-Prager plasticity, Hill plasticity, hyperelasticity, shape memory alloy, plasticity, rate-de-
pendent plasticity, viscoelasticity, and others).
• Association of a single element with several material constitutive options (such as a combination of
hyperelasticity and viscoelasticity with Prony series expansion).
• A curve-fitting tool (TBFT) for calibrating material parameters through experimental data, which currently
supports creep, hyperelasticity, and viscoelasticity.
• Fracture mechanics parameter calculation (CINT), which uses the domain-integration approach to cal-
culate the J-Integrals for both linear and elastoplastic material behavior at a designated tip location (2-
D) or at specific location along the crack front (3-D) through a structure component.
• Variational Technology for optimization analysis, which quickly evaluates response surfaces for various
type of applications (such as structural and frequency sweep analysis).
• Initial state conditions (INISTATE) that may exist in the structure (available in the elements listed in
Initial State Element Support).
• Custom user-defined material models created via the UserMat subroutine.
• 3-D smeared reinforcing, provided by elements such as REINF265 when used with 3-D solid and shell
elements (referred to as the base elements) to achieve the effect of extra reinforcement to those elements.
• Nonlinear stabilization, a viscous-based algorithm for improving convergence behavior when instabilities
are expected.
• Rezoning for solid elements.
• Linear perturbation based on nonlinear analysis.
• Precise control of the element technologies (ETCONTROL) used in element formulation for applicable
elements.
• A layered-section option (via SECDATA and other section commands) for shell and solid elements.
In Selecting Elements for Your Analysis (p. 22), current-technology elements appear first. You can readily
identify them, as they are not typically associated with specific material types, nor do they specify re-
strictions such as “linear.” Most of the elements listed are current-technology elements in the sense
that they are the best technologies that ANSYS, Inc. is able to offer at the current product release.
A few legacy elements are still supported to meet the needs of longtime users who have input files
containing those elements. Legacy elements may eventually be replaced by new elements.
Degenerated Shape Elements
2.4.1. Legacy vs. Current Element Technologies

It is good practice to use current-technology elements rather than legacy elements in your analysis
wherever possible.
The following table lists the remaining legacy elements and suggests current-technology elements to
use instead. In some cases, an element KEYOPT setting, degree-of-freedom constraint, or command
may be necessary to more precisely reproduce the behavior of a given legacy element.
Suggested Setting(s) to Approximate Legacy Element

Suggested Cur- Behavior [3]
Legacy Element
rent Element
Type [1] Element KEY- Comments
Type [2]
OPT
FLUID141 ANSYS CFX-Flo --- ---
FLUID142 ANSYS CFX-Flo --- ---
INFIN9 INFIN110 --- ---
INFIN47 INFIN111 --- ---
PLANE13 PLANE223 --- ---
PLANE25 SOLID272 KEYOPT(6) = 0
PLANE53 PLANE233 --- See the Low-Frequency Electromagnetic
Analysis Guide
PLANE83 SOLID273 KEYOPT(6) = 0 ---
SHELL41 SHELL181 KEYOPT(1) = 1, ---
KEYOPT(3) = 2
SOLID5 SOLID226 --- ---
1. After considering element redundancy and consistency issues, ANSYS, Inc. may in future releases move
legacy element documentation to the Feature Archive or undocument those elements altogether;
however, the table does not imply that all legacy elements listed are immediate targets for such action.
2. The table is not a definitive listing of legacy-to-current element equivalents in terms of either formulation
or use of shape functions; for example, a suggested current element may require a more refined mesh
in some cases, or may require adaptation via appropriate constraints for specific 2-D analyses.
3. While a given KEYOPT setting can allow you to approximate the behavior of a legacy element, it may
not be the most desirable KEYOPT for the current element. For structural-only analyses, try the ETCON-
TROL command for element and KEYOPT recommendations. For more information, see Automatic Se-
lection of Element Technologies and Formulations (p. 84).
2.5. Degenerated Shape Elements

A degenerated element is an element whose characteristic face shape is quadrilateral, but is modeled
with at least one triangular face.
Degenerated elements are often used for modeling transition regions between fine and coarse meshes,
or for modeling irregular and warped surfaces.
The following topics concerning degenerated shape elements are available:

2.5.1. Obtaining the Best Results from Degenerated Shape Elements
2.5.2. Degenerated Triangular 2-D Solid and Shell Elements
2.5.3. Degenerated Triangular Prism Elements

2.5.4. Degenerated Tetrahedral Elements
2.5.5. Surface Stresses on Condensed Element Faces
2.5.1. Obtaining the Best Results from Degenerated Shape Elements

Use degenerated shape elements with caution.
Degenerated elements formed from quadrilateral and brick elements without midside nodes are much
less accurate than those formed from elements with midside nodes and should not be used in high-
stress gradient regions.
When using triangular elements in a rectangular array of nodes, best results are obtained from an element
pattern having alternating diagonal directions.
For shell elements, because the element coordinate system is relative to the I-J line, the stress results
are most easily interpreted if the I-J lines of the elements are all parallel.
2.5.2. Degenerated Triangular 2-D Solid and Shell Elements

Degenerated triangular 2-D solid and shell elements may be formed from 4-node quadrilateral elements
by defining duplicate node numbers for the third and fourth (K and L) node locations.
The node pattern then becomes I, J, K, K. If the L node is not input, it defaults to node K. If extra shape
functions are included in the element, they are automatically suppressed (degenerating the element
to a lower order). Element loads specified on a nodal basis should have the same loads specified at the
duplicate node locations.
When forming a degenerated triangular element by repeating node numbers, the face numbering remains
the same. Face 3, however, condenses to a point. The centroid location printed for a degenerated trian-
gular element is usually at the geometric centroid of the element.
Elements should be oriented with alternating diagonals, if possible.
2.5.2.1. Triangular Shell Elements Are Preferred in Some Cases

Triangular shell elements are preferred for severely skewed or warped elements.
Quadrilateral shaped elements should not be skewed such that the included angle between two adjacent
faces is outside the range of 90° ± 45° for non-midside-node elements or 90° ± 60° for midside-node
elements.
Warping occurs when the four nodes of a quadrilateral shell element (or solid element face) are not in
the same plane, either at input or during large deflection. Warping is measured by the relative angle
between the normals to the face at the nodes. A flat face (no warping) has all normals parallel (zero
relative angle). A warning message is output if warping is beyond a small, but tolerable value. If warping
is excessive, the analysis terminates.
See the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for element warping details and other element checking details.
Triangular (or prism) elements should be used in place of a quadrilateral (or brick) element with large
warping.
Special-Purpose Elements
2.5.3. Degenerated Triangular Prism Elements

Degenerated triangular prism elements may be formed from 8-node 3-D solid elements by defining
duplicate node numbers for the third and fourth (K and L) and the seventh and eighth (O and P) node
locations.
The node pattern then becomes I, J, K, K, M, N, O, O. When forming a degenerated prism element by
repeating node numbers, the face numbering remains the same. Face 4, however, condenses to a line.
The centroid location printed for a degenerated element is not at the geometric centroid but is at an
average nodal location. The integration points are proportionately rearranged within the element.
Elements should be oriented with alternating diagonals, if possible. If extra shape functions are included
in the element, they are partially suppressed.
Element loads should have the same loads specified at the duplicate node locations.
2.5.4. Degenerated Tetrahedral Elements

A degenerated tetrahedral element may be formed from a triangular prism element by a further con-
densation of face 6 to a point.
The input node pattern should be I, J, K, K, M, M, M, M. If extra shape functions are included in the
element, they are automatically suppressed. Element nodal loads should have the same loads specified
at the duplicate node locations.
2.5.5. Surface Stresses on Condensed Element Faces

Surface stress (or convection heat flow) printout should not be requested on a condensed face.
Pressures (or convection conditions) should not be defined on a condensed face.
2.6. Special-Purpose Elements

Two special element types are available:
2.6.1. Superelements
2.6.1. Superelements
You can combine existing linear elements into a superelement (or substructure) named MATRIX50. This
capability is especially useful when you are repeating the same action many times in the model, or using
the same group of elements over a large number of load steps. In such cases, using superelements
typically results in greater solution efficiency.
For further information, see:
• "Substructuring" in the Advanced Analysis Techniques Guide to learn how to perform an analysis using
superelements
• Substructuring Analysis in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for a discussion of the substructure
matrix procedure

You can create a custom element, of virtually any type, named USER300.
For more information, see the documentation for the USER300 element. For detailed instructions, see
Creating a New Element via the User-Defined Element API in the Guide to ANSYS User Programmable
Features, available on the product-distribution media.
2.7. GUI-Inaccessible Elements

These elements are available via the ET family of commands only and are inaccessible from within the
GUI:
REINF263 2-D Smeared Reinforcing

REINF264 3-D Discrete Reinforcing
REINF265 3-D Smeared Reinforcing
SURF251 2-D Radiosity Surface
SURF252 3-D Thermal Radiosity Surface
Chapter 3: General Element Features
The element library offers many element formulations or types. Many features are common to all elements
in the library. The following topics address the common features:
3.1. Element Input
3.2. Solution Output
3.3. Coordinate Systems
Some element features, or even element types, may be unavailable based on the product-licensing
options in effect at your site. Any restrictions for an element are documented in the "Product Restrictions"
section for that element.
3.1. Element Input

Element Library (p. 101) includes a summary table of element input. The table usually contains information
about the following:
3.1.1. Element Name
3.1.2. Nodes
3.1.3. Degrees of Freedom
3.1.4. Material Properties
3.1.5. Sections
3.1.6. Real Constants
3.1.7. Element Loading
3.1.8. Nodal Loading
3.1.9. Element Properties and Controls (KEYOPTs)
3.1.10. Special Element Features
3.1.1. Element Name

An element type is identified by a name (eight characters maximum), such as SOLID285, consisting of
a group label (SOLID) and a unique, identifying number (285). The element descriptions in Element
Library (p. 101) are arranged in order of these identification numbers. The element is selected from the
library for use in the analysis by inputting its name on the element type command (ET). See Element
Classifications (p. 5) for a list of all available elements.
3.1.2. Nodes
The nodes associated with the element are listed as I, J, K, and so on. Elements are connected to the
nodes in the sequence and orientation shown on the input figure for each element type.
Connectivity can be defined by automatic meshing, or can be input directly (E). The node numbers
must correspond to the order indicated in the "Nodes" list. The I node is the first node of the element.
The node order determines the element coordinate system orientation for some element types. See
Coordinate Systems (p. 56) for a description of the element coordinate system.
3.1.2.1. Internal nodes

The program also uses internal nodes for elements with Lagrangian multiplier in their formulations,
such as the mixed u-P formulation of PLANE182, MPC184 and Lagrangian-multiplier-based contact ele-
ments, and other elements such as BEAM188, SHELL208 and PIPE288 with quadratic and cubic options.
Internal nodes are generated automatically during the solution phase of an analysis to make more degrees
of freedom available for the elements.
Internal nodes are inaccessible and require no input from you or any other action on your part.
3.1.3. Degrees of Freedom

Each element type has a degree of freedom set, which constitute the primary nodal unknowns to be
determined by the analysis. They may be displacements, rotations, temperatures, pressures, voltages,
etc. Derived results, such as stresses, heat flows, etc., are computed from these degree of freedom results.
Degrees of freedom are not defined on the nodes explicitly by the user, but rather are implied by the
element types attached to them. The choice of element types is therefore, an important one in any
analysis.
3.1.4. Material Properties

Most element types use various material properties. Typical material properties include Young's modulus
(of elasticity), density, coefficient of thermal expansion, and thermal conductivity. Each property is ref-
erenced by a label: EX, EY, and EZ for the directional components of Young's modulus, DENS for density,
and so on. All material properties can be input as functions of temperature.
Linear Material Properties
Some properties for non-thermal analyses are called linear properties because typical solutions with
these properties require only a single iteration. A basic description of the linear material properties is
given in Linear Material Properties in the Material Reference.
Nonlinear Material Properties
Properties such as stress-strain data and B-H curves are called nonlinear because an analysis with these
properties usually requires an iterative solution. A basic description of the nonlinear material properties
is given in "Material Models" in the Material Reference.
Material Property Input
Typically, linear material properties are input via the MP family of commands.
Nonlinear material properties are input via the TB family of commands.
The TB family of commands can, however, be used for some linear material properties (such as aniso-
tropic elasticity, material structural damping, piezoelectric matrix, and piezoresistivity).
Some elements require other special data which must be input in tabular form. Such data are also input
via the TB family of commands and are described with the element in Element Library (p. 101), or in
"Material Models" in the Material Reference if they apply to a family of elements.
Materials for Explicit Dynamic Analyses
Element Input
Material models used in explicit dynamic analyses are discussed in Material Models in the ANSYS LS-
DYNA User's Guide.
3.1.5. Sections
Sections are generally used to describe the geometry in the missing direction(s) of an idealized model.
By idealizing a structure and capturing calculations that are common to many elements, sections may
significantly reduce the number of degrees of freedom and lower computational requirements.
Following are common section types:
• Beam Sections -- A beam cross section defines the geometry of the beam in a plane perpendicular to
the element axial direction.
• Shell Sections -- A shell cross section defines the geometry of the shell in a plane parallel to the shell
x-y plane.
• Reinforcing Sections -- Reinforcing sections allow you to describe the reinforcing fibers collectively
within an existing structure rather than model each fiber individually.
• Axisymmetric Sections -- An axis of symmetry around which a plane of general axisymmetric solid
elements is revolved.
Special section types are also available. For example, rather than describing a missing dimension of the
model, a contact section corrects the geometry of a meshed circle, sphere, or cylinder.
For a complete list of available section types, see the SECTYPE command.
3.1.6. Real Constants

Data required for the calculation of the element matrices and load vectors, but which cannot be determ-
ined by other means, are input as real constants. Typical real constants include hourglass stiffness,
contact parameters, stranded coil parameters, and plane thicknesses.
With each element type that supports them, a description of the real constants is given in the "Real
Constants" list. The real constant values that you input (R and RMORE) must correspond to the order
indicated in the list.
To learn more about how real constants are used within each element type, see the description of each
element type in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference.
3.1.7. Element Loading

Element loads are surface loads, body loads, and inertial loads. Element loads are always associated
with a particular element (even if the input is at the nodes). Certain elements may also have flags.
Flags are not actually loads, but are used to indicate that a certain type of calculation is to be performed.
For example, when the FSI (fluid-structure interaction) flag is active, a specified face of an acoustic element
is treated as an interface between a fluid portion and a structural portion of the model. Similarly, MXWF
and MVDI are flags used to trigger magnetic force (Maxwell surface) and Jacobian force (virtual displace-
ment) calculations, respectively, in certain magnetics elements. Details about flags are discussed under
the applicable elements in Element Library (p. 101).
Flags are associated either with a surface (FSI and MXWF) and are applied as surface loads (below), or
with an element (MVDI) and are applied as body loads (below). For the FSI and MXWF flags, values have
no meaning - these flags are simply turned on by specifying their label on the appropriate command.
For the MVDI flag, its value (which can range from zero to one) is specified, along with the label, on
the appropriate command. Flags are always step-applied (i.e., the KBC command does not affect them).
The following topics related to element loading are available:

3.1.7.1. Surface Loads
3.1.7.2. Body Loads
3.1.7.3. Inertial Loads
3.1.7.4. Initial Stresses
Also see Nodal Loading (p. 49), which refers to loads defined at the nodes and are not directly related
to the elements.

Some element types allow surface loads. Surface loads are typically pressures for structural element
types, convections or heat fluxes for thermal element types, and so on.
Table 3.1 Surface Loads Available in Each Discipline

Discipline Surface Load Label
Structur- Pressure PRES
al [1 (p. 46)]
[2 (p. 46)]
Thermal Convection CONV
Heat Flux HFLUX
Infinite Surface INF

Magnet- Maxwell Surface MXWF
ic
Electric Maxwell Surface MXWF
Surface Charge Density CHRGS
Temperature TEMP
Fluid Fluid-Structure Inter- FSI
face
IMPD
Impedance
All Superelement Load SELV
Vector
1. Not to be confused with the PRES degree of freedom

2. Buoyancy, wave, current and other ocean loads can be applied to some line and surface
element types. For more information, see OCTYPE and related ocean commands.
Element Input
3.1.7.1.1. Applying Surface Loads

Surface loads (such as pressures for structural elements and convections for thermal element) are typ-
ically input via the SF and SFE commands.
Surface loads may also be input in a nodal format. For example, rather than applying surface loading
to an element face, it may be convenient to apply the loading the face nodes of an element (which are
then processed like face input). For more information, see Nodal Loading (p. 49).
3.1.7.1.2. Multiple Surface Loads

Some elements allow multiple types of surface loads (as shown with the load labels listed under "Surface
Loads" in the input table for each element type). Also, some elements allow multiple loads on a single
element face (as indicated with the load numbers after the load labels).
Load numbers are shown on the element figures (within circles) and point in the direction of positive
load to the face upon which the load acts. A surface load applied on the edge of a shell element is on
a per-unit-length basis, not per-unit area.
3.1.7.1.3. Surface Load Labels and Keys

Surface loads are designated by a label and a key. The label indicates the type of surface load and the
key indicates where on the element the load acts.
The surface load can be defined on element faces via the SFE command by using a key (LKEY), the
load label (Lab), and the load value. The SF command can define surface loads by using nodes to
identify element faces. The CONV load label requires two values, the film coefficient and the bulk tem-
perature.
3.1.7.1.4. Tapered Surface Load

A tapered surface load, which allows different values to be defined at the nodes of an element, can be
entered via the SFE command. Tapered loads are input in the same order that the face nodes are listed.
3.1.7.2. Body Loads

Some element types allow body loads. Body loads are typically temperatures for structural element
types, heat-generation rates for thermal element types, and so on.
Table 3.2 Body Loads Available in Each Discipline

Discipline Body Load Label
Structur- Temperature TEMP
al [1 (p. 48)]
Fluence
FLUE
Thermal Heat Generation Rate HGEN
Magnet- Temperature TEMP
ic [1 (p. 48)]
Current Density
JS
Virtual Displacement
MVDI
Discipline Body Load Label

Voltage Drop VLTG
Electric Temperature TEMP
[1 (p. 48)]
Charge Density
CHRGD
Fluid Heat Generation Rate HGEN
Force Density FORC
1. Not to be confused with the TEMP degree of freedom
3.1.7.2.1. Applying Body loads

Body loads are designated in the "Input Summary" table of each element by a label and a list of load
values at various locations within the element.
Body loads are input via the BF or BFE commands. The load values input on the BFE command must
correspond to the order indicated in the "Body Load" list.
Body loads can also be applied in a nodal format. For more information, see Nodal Loading (p. 49).
3.1.7.2.2. Temperature Body Loads

For some structural elements, the temperature does not contribute to the element load vector but is
only used for material property evaluation. For thermal elements using the diagonalized specified heat
matrix option in a transient analyses, a spatially varying heat generation rate is averaged over the element.
Heat-generation rates are input per-unit-volume unless otherwise noted with the element. The element
format is usually in terms of the element nodes but may be in terms of fictitious corner points as de-
scribed for each element. Corner point numbers are shown on the element figures where applicable.
3.1.7.3. Inertial Loads

Inertial loads (gravity, spinning, etc.), are applicable to all elements with structural degrees of freedom
and having mass (that is, elements having mass as an input real constant or having a density (DENS)
material property).
Inertia loads are typically entered via the ACEL and OMEGA commands.
3.1.7.4. Initial Stresses

Initial stresses can be set as constant or read in from a file for most current-technology beam, link,
plane, solid, and shell element types.
The INISTATE command sets constant initial stress for selected elements and, optionally, only for specified
materials. The command also allows you to read in a file specifying the initial stresses. The stresses
specified in the input file can be applied to the element centroids or element integration points, and
can be applied to the same points for all selected elements or can be applied differently for each element.
The stresses can also be a written to an external file.
For more information about the initial state capability, see the INISTATE command, and Initial State
Loading in the Basic Analysis Guide.
Element Input
3.1.8. Nodal Loading

Unlike element loads, nodal loads are defined at the nodes and are not directly related to the elements.
Nodal loads are associated with the degrees of freedom at the node and are typically entered via the
D and F commands (such as nodal displacement constraints and nodal force loads).
The nodal or element loading format may be used for an element, with the element loading format
taking precedence.
3.1.9. Element Properties and Controls (KEYOPTs)

Elements use KEYOPTs (or key options) to control element behavior, formulation, and output for some
beam and shell elements. The KEYOPT is the most important element input and should be selected
with care.
Depending on the element type, the KEYOPTs can be used to control stress states, degrees of freedom,
element technologies, formulation options, element coordinate systems, printout, results file (.rst)
output, loads, temperatures, and so on.
A basic description of each KEYOPT is given with the detailed description of each element type. Because
KEYOPTs can be combined, a great deal of flexibility is available for refining the element type to perfectly
suit a specific problem.
KEYOPTs are identified by number, such as KEYOPT(1), KEYOPT(2), etc.. Each KEYOPT can be set to a
specific value, as follows:
• Values for the first six KEYOPTs (KEYOPT(1) through KEYOPT(6)) can be input via the ET or KEYOPT
command.
• Values for KEYOPT(7) or greater are input via the KEYOPT command.
3.1.9.1. Element KEYOPT Defaults

The following topics concern element KEYOPT defaults:
3.1.9.1.1. Consider Automatic Element Selection
3.1.9.1.2. KEYOPT Settings May Vary Between Products
3.1.9.1.1. Consider Automatic Element Selection

Although element KEYOPT defaults can accommodate many problem types, and KEYOPTs can be adjusted
as needed, it is often more convenient to allow automatic selection of element technologies via the
ETCONTROL command. The command sets element options based on the associated constitutive
models of the element type.
For more information, see Automatic Selection of Element Technologies and Formulations.
3.1.9.1.2. KEYOPT Settings May Vary Between Products

Exercise caution when using the same input for other ANSYS, Inc. products, as some default KEYOPT
settings may vary between products. Such cases are indicated in the "Product Restrictions" section of
the affected elements. If you intend to use an input file in more than one product, it is a good practice
to explicitly input these settings, rather than letting them default; otherwise, element behavior in the
other product may differ.
3.1.10. Special Element Features

The "Special Features" list in the documentation for each element indicates that certain additional
capabilities are available for the element. In most cases, the special features make the element nonlinear
and therefore require an iterative solution.
Special element features can include any of the following:
Adaptive descent Field coupling Magnetic materials Stress stiffening

Birth and death Fluid pressure penetra- Nonlinear Swelling
Cohesive zone materials tion Nonlinear stabilization User-defined friction
Concrete Gasket material Ocean loading User-defined material
Cracking Generalized cross-sec- Orthotropic friction Viscoelasticity
Creep tion Plasticity
Crushing Geometry correction Porous Media
Debonding Hyperelasticity Preintegrated general
Elasticity Initial state shell sections
Element technology Initial stress import Prestress
autoselect Isotropic friction Radiation
Error estimation Large deflection Rezoning
Explicit dynamic analysis Large strain Section definition
Linear perturbation
3.2. Solution Output

Solution output is written to the:
• Output file (Jobname.OUT)

• Results file (Jobname.RST, Jobname.RTH, Jobname.RMG, or Jobname.RFL)
• Program database (Jobname.DB)
The output file is viewable via the GUI. The database and results file data can be postprocessed.
3.2.1. Output File Contents

The output file contains the nodal degree-of-freedom solution, nodal and reaction loads, and the element
solutions, depending on the OUTPR settings.
The element solutions are the solution values at the integration points or centroid. They are controlled
by KEYOPTs in certain elements.
3.2.2. Results File and Database Contents

The results file contains data for all requested (OUTRES) solutions, or load steps. In POST1, the SET
command identifies the load step that you intend to postprocess.
Results items for area and volume elements are generally retrieved from the database via standard
results output commands (such as PRNSOL, PLNSOL, PRESOL, and PLESOL).
The labels on these commands correspond to the labels shown in the input and output description
tables for each element. For example, postprocessing the stress in the material x direction (typically
Solution Output
labeled SX) is identified as item S and component X on the postprocessing commands. Coordinate
locations XC, YC, ZC are identified as item CENT and component X, Y, or Z.
Only items shown both on the given results command and in the element input/output tables are
available for use with that command. (An exception is EPTO, the total strain, which is available for all
structural solid and shell elements even though it is not shown in the output description tables for
those elements.)
Generic labels do not exist for some results data, such as integration point data, all derived data for
structural line elements (such as spars, beams, and pipes) and contact elements, all derived data for
thermal line elements, and layer data for layered elements. Instead, a sequence number identifies those
items.
3.2.3. Nodal Solution

The nodal solution from an analysis consists of:
• the degree-of-freedom solution, such as nodal displacements, temperatures, and pressures

• the reaction solution calculated at constrained nodes - forces at displacement constraints, heat
flows at temperature degree-of-freedom constraints, fluid flows at pressure degree-of-freedom
constraints, and so on.
The degree-of-freedom solution is calculated for all active degrees of freedom in the model, which are
determined by the union of all degree-of-freedom labels associated with all the active element types.
It is output at all degrees of freedom that have a nonzero stiffness or conductivity and can be controlled
by OUTPR,NSOL (for printed output) and OUTRES,NSOL (for results file output).
The reaction solution is calculated at all nodes that are constrained (D, DSYM, etc.). Its output can be
controlled by OUTPR,RSOL and OUTRES,RSOL.
For vector degrees of freedom and corresponding reactions, the output during solution is in the nodal
coordinate system. If a node was input with a rotated nodal coordinate system, the output nodal solution
will also be in the rotated coordinate system. For a node with the rotation θxy = 90°, the printed UX
solution will be in the nodal X direction, which in this case corresponds to the global Y direction. Rota-
tional displacements (ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ) are output in radians, and phase angles from a harmonic
analysis are output in degrees.
3.2.4. Element Solution

The element output items (and their definitions) are shown along with the element type description.
Not all of the items shown in the output table will appear at all times for the element. Normally, items
not appearing are either not applicable to the solution or have all zero results and are suppressed to
save space. However, except for the coupled-field elements PLANE223, SOLID226, and SOLID227, coupled-
field forces appear if they are computed to be zero. The output is, in some cases, dependent on the
input. For example, for thermal elements accepting either surface convection (CONV) or nodal heat flux
(HFLUX), the output will be either in terms of convection or heat flux. Most of the output items shown
appear in the element solution listing. Some items do not appear in the solution listing but are written
to the results file.
Most elements have 2 tables which describe the output data and ways to access that data for the element.
These tables are the "Element Output Definitions" table and the "Item and Sequence Numbers" tables
used for accessing data through the ETABLE and ESOL commands.
3.2.4.1. The Element Output Definitions Table

The first table, "Element Output Definitions," describes possible output for the element. In addition, this
table outlines which data are available for solution printout (Jobname.OUT and/or display to the ter-
minal), and which data are available on the results file (Jobname.RST, Jobname.RTH, Jobname.RMG,
etc.). Only the data which you request with the solution commands (OUTPR and OUTRES) are included
in printout and on the results file, respectively.
As an added convenience, items in the table which are available via the Component Name method of
the ETABLE command are identified by special notation (:) included in the output label.( See The Gen-
eral Postprocessor (POST1) in the Basic Analysis Guide for more information.) The label portion before
the colon corresponds to the Item field on the ETABLE command, and the portion after the colon cor-
responds to the Comp field. For example, S:EQV is defined as equivalent stress, and the ETABLE command
for accessing this data would be:
ETABLE,ABC,S,EQV
where ABC is a user-defined label for future identification on listings and displays. Other data having
labels without colons can be accessed through the Sequence Number method, discussed with the "Item
and Sequence Number" tables below.
In some cases there is more than one label which can be used after the colon, in which case they are
listed and separated by commas. The Definition column defines each label and, in some instances, also
lists the label used on the printout, if different. The O column indicates those items which are written
to the output window and/or the output file. The R column indicates items which are written to the
results file and which can be obtained in postprocessing; if an item is not marked in the R column, it
cannot be stored in the "element table."
3.2.4.2. The Item and Sequence Number Table

Many elements also have a table, or set of tables, that list the Item and sequence number required for
data access using the Sequence Number method of the ETABLE command. (See The General Postpro-
cessor (POST1) in the Basic Analysis Guide for an example.)
The number of columns in each table and the number of tables per element vary depending on the
type of data available and the number of locations on the element where data was calculated.
See Table 2: "PLANE182 Item and Sequence Numbers" for a sample item and sequence number table.
Items listed as SMISC refer to summable miscellaneous items, while NMISC refers to non-summable
miscellaneous items.

Pressure output for structural elements shows the input pressures expanded to the element's full linearly
or bilinearly varying load capability.
See the SF, SFE, and SFBEAM commands for pressure input. Beam elements which allow an offset from
the node on the SFBEAM command an have additional output labeled OFFST.
To save space, pressure output is often omitted when values are zero. Similarly, other surface load items
(such as convection (CONV) and heat flux (HFLUX)), and body load input items (such as temperature
(TEMP), fluence (FLUE), and heat generation (HGEN)), are often omitted when the values are zero (or,
for temperatures, when the T-TREF values are zero).
Solution Output
To save space, surface output is often omitted when all values are zero.
For output of ocean-loading information on supported element types, see the OCTYPE and OCDATA
commands.
3.2.4.4. Integration Point Solution (Output Listing Only)

Integration point output is available in the output listing with most current-technology elements. The
location of the integration point is updated if large deflections are used. See the element descriptions
in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for details about integration point locations and output. Also
the ERESX command may be used to request integration point data to be written as nodal data on the
results file.
3.2.4.5. Centroidal Solution (Output Listing Only)

Output (such as stress, strain, and temperature) in the output listing is given at the centroid (or near
center) of certain elements. The location of the centroid is updated if large deflections are used.
The output quantities are calculated as the average of the integration point values. The component
output directions for vector quantities correspond to the input material directions which, in turn, are a
function of the element coordinate system. For example, the SX stress is in the same direction as EX.
In postprocessing, the ETABLE command can calculate the centroidal solution of each element from
its nodal values.
3.2.4.6. Element Nodal Solution

The term element nodal means element data reported for each element at its nodes. This type of output
is available for 2-D and 3-D solid elements, shell elements, and various other elements.
Element nodal data consist of the element derived data (such as strains, stresses, fluxes, and gradients)
evaluated at each of the element's nodes. These data are usually calculated at the interior integration
points and then extrapolated to the nodes.
Exceptions occur if an element has active (nonzero) plasticity, creep, or swelling at an integration point
or if ERESX,NO is input. In such cases the nodal solution is the value at the integration point nearest
the node.
Output is usually in the element coordinate system. Averaging of the nodal data from adjacent elements
is done within the POST1 postprocessor.
3.2.4.7. Element Nodal Loads

Element nodal loads refer to an element's loads (forces) acting on each of its nodes. They are printed
out at the end of each element output in the nodal coordinate system and are labeled as static loads.
If the problem is dynamic, the damping loads and inertia loads are also printed.
You can control the output of element nodal loads via the OUTPR,NLOAD command (for printed output)
and the OUTRES,NLOAD command (for results file output).
Element nodal loads relate to the reaction solution in the following way: the sum of the static, damping,
and inertia loads at a particular degree of freedom, summed over all elements connected to that degree
of freedom, plus the applied nodal load (F or FK command), is equal to the negative of the reaction
solution at that same degree of freedom.
3.2.4.8. Nonlinear Solutions

For information about nonlinear solutions due to material nonlinearities, see "Structures with Material
Nonlinearities" in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference.
Nonlinear strain data (EPPL, EPCR, EPSW, etc.) are always the value from the nearest integration point.
If creep is present, stresses are computed after the plasticity correction but before the creep correction.
Elastic strains are printed after any creep corrections.
3.2.4.9. 2-D and Axisymmetric Solutions

A 2-D solid analysis is based upon a per-unit-of-depth calculation, and all appropriate output data are
on a per-unit-of-depth basis. Many 2-D solids, however, allow an option to specify the depth (thickness).
An axisymmetric analysis is based on 360°. Calculation and all appropriate output data are on a full 360°
basis. In particular, the total forces for the 360° model are output for an axisymmetric structural analysis
and the total convection heat flow for the 360° model is output for an axisymmetric thermal analysis.
For axisymmetric analyses, the X, Y, Z, and XY stresses and strains correspond to the radial, axial, hoop,
and in-plane shear stresses and strains, respectively. The global Y axis must be the axis of symmetry,
and the structure should be modeled in the +X quadrants.
3.2.4.10. Member Force Solution

Member force output is available with most structural line elements. The listing of this output is activated
via a KEYOPT described with the element and is in addition to the nodal load output.
Member forces are in the element coordinate system and the components correspond to the degrees
of freedom available with the element.
3.2.4.11. Failure Criteria

Failure criteria are commonly used for orthotropic materials. Input failure criteria using the FC command
(and related commands in the FCxxxxxx family) in the POST1 postprocessor.
For temperature-dependent failure data, you can input up to six temperatures. Strains must have absolute
values less than 1.0.
The failure criteria constants entered via the FC command are:
Table 3.3 Orthotropic Material Failure Criteria Data

FC Lab1 Value FC Lab2 Value Constant
EPEL XTEN
( ε xt ) - Failure strain in material x-direction
f
in tension (must be positive).
Solution Output

XCMP f
( ε xc ) - Failure strain in material x-direction

in compression (default = - ε t ) (may not be
positive).
YTEN
ε
( y ) - Failure strain in material y-direction
YCMP
ε
( ) - Failure strain in material y-direction
ε
in compression (default = - ) (may not be
positive).
ZTEN
( ε z ) - Failure strain in material z-direction
ZCMP
(ε ) - Failure strain in material z-direction

in compression (default = - ε ) (may not be
positive).
XY
ε
( ) - Failure strain in material x-y plane
(shear) (must be positive).
YZ
ε
( ) - Failure strain in material y-z plane
XZ
( ε ) - Failure strain in material x-z plane
S XTEN
( σ ) - Failure stress in material x-direction
XCMP
( σ ) - Failure stress in material x-direction
#
in compression (default = - σ !" ) (may not
be positive).
YTEN
σ&
( $% ) - Failure stress in material y-direction
YCMP
σ)
( '( ) - Failure stress in material y-direction
σ,
in compression (default = - *+ ) (may not
be positive).

ZTEN f
( σ zt ) - Failure stress in material z-direction
ZCMP
( σ c ) - Failure stress in material z-direction

in compression (default = - σ ) (may not
be positive).
XY
σ
( xy ) - Failure stress in material x-y plane
YZ
σ
( ) - Failure stress in material y-z plane
XZ
( σ ) - Failure stress in material x-z plane
XYCP *
( ) - x-y coupling coefficient for Tsai-Wu
Theory (default = -1.0).
YZCP
( ) - y-z coupling coefficient for Tsai-Wu
XZCP
( ) - x-z coupling coefficient for Tsai-Wu
Tsai-Wu coupling coefficients must be between -2.0 and 2.0. Values between -1.0 and 0.0 are recom-
σ
mended. For 2-D analysis, set σ , σ , , and σ to a value several orders of magnitude larger
" % σ(
than σ ! , σ #$ , or &' ; and set Cxz and Cyz to zero.
See Specifying Failure Criteria in the Structural Analysis Guide for more information about this material
option.
3.3. Coordinate Systems

The following coordinate system topics are available:
3.3.1. Understanding the Element Coordinate System
3.3.2. Elements That Operate in the Nodal Coordinate System
3.3.3. Solution Coordinate Systems
3.3.1. Understanding the Element Coordinate System

The element coordinate system is used for:
• Orthotropic material input

• Pressure loading input on certain faces of the surface effect elements
Coordinate Systems
• Output of element quantities, such as stresses, strains, and thermal gradients.
A default element coordinate system orientation is associated with each element type. In general, these
systems are described below. Elements departing from this description have their default element co-
ordinate system orientation described in Element Library (p. 101).
Element coordinate systems are right-handed, orthogonal systems.
Line elements For line elements, the default orientation is generally with the x-axis
along the element I-J line.
Solid elements For solid elements (such as PLANE182 or SOLID185), the default ori-
entation is generally parallel to the global Cartesian coordinate system.
General axisymmetric elements For general axisymmetric solid elements (SOLID272

and SOLID273), the general orientation is determined by the cylindrical coordinate system,
with z and the origin defined via SECTYPE and SECDATA commands, and θ = 0 on the
master plane; the r, θ, and z directions adhere to the right-hand rule.
Shell elements For area shell elements (such as SHELL181), the default orientation
generally has the x-axis aligned with element I-J side, the z-axis normal to the shell surface
(with the outward direction determined by the right-hand rule around the element from
node I to J to K), and the y-axis perpendicular to the x and z-axes.
3.3.1.1. Modifying the Element Orientation

Unless otherwise changed, the element coordinate system orientation is the default orientation for that
element type. The orientation may be changed for area and volume elements by making it parallel to
a previously defined local system (ESYS) or, for some elements, by a KEYOPT selection. If both are spe-
cified, the ESYS definition overrides.
A further rotation, relative to the previous orientation, is allowed for some elements by a real constant
angle specification (see, for example, the real constant THETA for SHELL181). If no ESYS or KEYOPT
orientation is specified, the real constant angle rotation (if any) is relative to the default orientation.
The coordinate systems of axisymmetric elements may only be rotated about the global Z-axis; however,
general axisymmetric elements can be rotated about any axis.
Shell elements For shell elements, the ESYS orientation uses the projection of the
local system on the shell surface. The element x-axis is determined from the projection
of the local x-axis on the shell surface. If the projection is a point (or the angle between
the local x-axis and the normal to the shell is 0° (plus a tolerance of 45°)), the local y-
axis projection is used for the element x-axis direction. The z and y-axes are determined
as described for the default orientation.
For non-midside-node shell elements, the projection is evaluated at the element centroid
and is assumed constant in direction throughout the element. For midside-node shell
elements, the projection is evaluated at each integration point and may vary in direction
throughout the element.
Axisymmetric elements For axisymmetric elements, only rotations in the X-Y plane
are valid. Some elements also allow element coordinate system orientations to be defined
by user written subroutines (see the Guide to ANSYS User Programmable Features).
Layered elements Layered elements use the x-axis of the element coordinate system
as a base from which to rotate each layer to the layer coordinate system. The layers are
rotated by the angles input on the SECDATA or RMORE commands. Material properties,
stresses, and strains for layered elements are based on the layer coordinate system, not
the element coordinate system.
All element coordinate systems shown in the element figures assume that no ESYS orientation is specified.
The orientation of output element quantities can be adjusted. See Rotating Results to a Different Co-
ordinate System in the Basic Analysis Guide
Element coordinate systems can be displayed as a triad with the /PSYMB command or as an ESYS
number (if specified) with the /PNUM command. Triad displays do not include the effects of any real
constant angle.
For large-deflection analyses, the element coordinate system rotates from the initial orientation described
above by the amount of rigid body rotation of the element.
3.3.2. Elements That Operate in the Nodal Coordinate System

A few special elements operate solely within the nodal coordinate system:
COMBIN14 Spring-Damper with KEYOPT(2) = 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6

MATRIX27 Stiffness, Damping, or Mass Matrix
COMBIN37 Control Element
FLUID38 Dynamic Fluid Coupling
COMBIN39 Nonlinear Spring with KEYOPT(4) = 0
COMBIN40 Combination Element
TRANS126 Electromechanical Transducer
These elements, defined in the nodal coordinate system, allow for easy directional control, especially
for the case of two-node elements with coincident nodes.
If UX, UY, or UZ degrees of freedom are being used, the nodes are not coincident, and the load is not
acting parallel to the line connecting the two nodes, there is no mechanism for the element to transfer
the resulting moment load, resulting in loss of moment equilibrium. The sole exception is MATRIX27,
which can include moment coupling when appropriate additional terms are added to the matrix.
If any of the nodes have been rotated (NROTAT), consider the following:
• If the nodes of elements containing more than one node are not rotated in precisely the same
way, force equilibrium may not be maintained.
• Accelerations operate normally in the global Cartesian system. Because no transformation is done
between the nodal and global systems, however, the accelerations effectively act on any element
mass in the nodal system, giving unexpected results. It is therefore good practice not to apply ac-
celerations when these elements use rotated nodes.
• Mass and inertia relief calculations will not be correct.
3.3.3. Solution Coordinate Systems

For homogeneous elements, element solution coordinate systems are generally identical to the nodal
or the element coordinate systems adopted by the elements.
Coordinate Systems
For composite elements, solution coordinate systems can be independently defined for different com-
ponents, such as layers in a layered-shell element (SHELL181) and fibers in a discrete reinforcing element
(REINF264). The solution coordinate systems in composite elements are also called layered coordinate
systems, and are specifically identified via the RSYS,LSYS command.
For more information, see Rotating Results to a Different Coordinate System in the Basic Analysis Guide.
Chapter 4: Elements for Stress Analysis
Elements for stress analysis are used primarily in mechanical and civil engineering. Various categories
of elements are available to meet the needs of many types of industries. The element categories can
be identified by how the elements represent the geometry of the structures, the basic deformation
and/or formulation assumptions, and the primary purpose of the elements.
The following related topics are available:

4.1. Continuum Stress Elements
4.2. Shell Elements
4.3. Beam and Link (Truss) Elements
4.4. Pipe Elements
4.5. Reinforcing Elements
4.6. Surface Elements
4.7. Automatic Selection of Element Technologies and Formulations
4.8. Elements Under Linear Perturbation
4.1. Continuum Stress Elements

Continuum stress elements represent the volume of a model used for deflection and stress analysis.
They do not include shell, surface, contact, beam, pipe or other special elements.
Continuum stress elements have few, if any, basic deformation assumptions and are the primary elements
for stress analysis, especially for solid structures.
Elements can be either 2-D or 3-D and are usually obtained by meshing areas or volumes. They can be
used for any structural analysis.
Although continuum stress elements may not be computationally efficient for structures having one
or two dimensions that are much smaller than the remaining dimension(s), they are still useful for
benchmarking purposes, or to obtain more detailed results for such structures.
The following topics related to continuum elements are available:

4.1.1. Stress States in 2-D Continuum Elements
4.1.2. Element Technologies
4.1.3. Mixed u-P Formulation
4.1.4. Generalized Plane Strain Options
4.1.5. Axisymmetric Elements with Nonaxisymmetric Loads
4.1.1. Stress States in 2-D Continuum Elements

The following topics about stress states in continuum elements assumes global Cartesian directions
and applies to the PLANE182 and PLANE183 elements unless otherwise noted:
4.1.1.1. Plane Stress
4.1.1.2. Plane Strain
4.1.1.3. Generalized Plane Strain
4.1.1.4. Axisymmetric
4.1.1.5. General Axisymmetric
4.1.1.1. Plane Stress

Plane stress is a stress state that varies only in the X and Y directions. The stress in the Z direction is
always zero, as are the XZ and YZ shear stresses.
Plane stress is generally used on flat, thin structures, where the deformation is assumed to be solely in
the plane of the structure. For example, flat plates pulled in tension may be analyzed with plane stress.
Although a unit thickness is generally assumed, you can input a thickness as well.
4.1.1.2. Plane Strain

Plane strain is a stress state that varies only in the X and Y directions. The strain in the Z direction is
always zero, as are the XZ and YZ shear strains.
Plane strain is generally used on thick structures such as the cross-section of a dam.
4.1.1.3. Generalized Plane Strain

Generalized plane strain is similar to plane strain, except that the Z direction strain is not required to
be zero. The Z direction strain may vary linearly in the X and Y directions (but not in the Z direction),
removing the implied restriction of plane strain that the model extends without limit in the Z direction.
The model in the Z direction can also have a uniform curvature.
Generalized plane strain can be used for modeling a section of cylindrical geometries, or to model long
structures with a load at the end.
For more information, see Generalized Plane Strain Options (p. 68).
4.1.1.4. Axisymmetric
Axisymmetric geometry is defined in the X-Y plane with positive X values. The geometry can be thought
of as the cross-section, which, when rotated about the global Cartesian Y axis, forms the actual model.
Unless otherwise described, therefore, the model and the loading and deformations are constant around
the circumference.
An axisymmetric analysis can be used for a nuclear containment building under internal pressure or
vertical earthquake.
Besides PLANE182 and PLANE183, SHELL208 and SHELL209 support axisymmetric analyses.
4.1.1.5. General Axisymmetric

General axisymmetric is the same as axisymmetric except that the deformations can be nonaxisymmetric.
ANSYS, Inc. recommends using the SOLID272 and SOLID273 elements to simulate general axisymmetric
characteristics. The general axisymmetric elements offer the following benefits:
• The deformations can be nonaxisymmetric.

• The deformations are modeled internally as a Fourier series, with all terms of the Fourier series solved
simultaneously.
• All nonlinearities are supported.
Continuum Stress Elements
An example general axisymmetric application is simulating threaded pipe connections.
For more information, see General Axisymmetric Elements (p. 70).
4.1.1.5.1. Alternate General Axisymmetric Method for Linear Problems

Alternatively, general axisymmetric can be simulated with harmonic axisymmetric elements when the
problem is linear.
The deformations are modeled as a Fourier series, with each term of the Fourier series solved separately
and then combined in postprocessing, and you must perform both tasks manually. Supported elements
are PLANE25, PLANE83, and SHELL61.
Only linear behavior is supported.
An example axisymmetric-harmonic application is simulating a nuclear containment building subjected

to a horizontal earthquake.
For more information, see Harmonic Axisymmetric Elements (p. 76).
Due to the limitations of axisymmetric-harmonic elements, ANSYS, Inc. recommends using general
axisymmetric elements instead. The method presented here is provided for legacy support only.
4.1.2. Element Technologies

Traditional isoparametric continuum elements have never been sufficiently robust or accurate enough
for general stress analysis.
Even in a linear analysis, lower-order elements are prone to shear locking in bending-dominated problems.
Both lower- and higher-order elements experience volumetric locking when materials are incompressible
or nearly incompressible, yet most nonlinear materials are either nearly or fully incompressible.
Current-technology continuum elements are available to overcome such problems. As technology ad-
vances, ANSYS, Inc. continues to develop robust new element types using the latest technologies
available. Current-technology elements are more advanced and feature-rich than legacy elements.
The following topics concerning current element technologies for general stress analysis are available:
4.1.2.1.Technologies for Lower-Order Quad and Brick Elements
4.1.2.2.Technologies for Lower-Order Tetrahedron Elements
4.1.2.3.Technologies for Higher-Order Quad or Brick Elements
4.1.2.4.Technologies for Higher-Order Triangle or Tetrahedron Elements
4.1.2.1. Technologies for Lower-Order Quad and Brick Elements

The following current technologies are available for lower-order quad and brick elements:
4.1.2.1.1. B-bar Method (Selective Reduced Integration)
4.1.2.1.2. Enhanced Strain Formulation
4.1.2.1.3. Simplified Enhanced Strain Formulation
4.1.2.1.4. Uniform Reduced Integration
4.1.2.1.1. B-bar Method (Selective Reduced Integration)
The B-bar ( B ) method helps to prevent volumetric locking in nearly incompressible cases. It replaces
volumetric strain at the Gauss integration point with the average volumetric strain of the elements.
This method cannot, however, prevent any shear locking in bending-dominated problems. In such cases,
use the enhanced strain formulation of the element. If it is not clear whether the deformation is bending-
dominated, the enhanced strain formulation is still recommended.
This technology can be used with mixed u-P formulations.
4.1.2.1.2. Enhanced Strain Formulation

The enhanced strain formulation prevents shear locking in bending-dominated problems and volumetric
locking in nearly incompressible cases. The formulation introduces certain number of internal (and in-
accessible) degrees of freedom to overcome shear locking, and an additional internal degree of freedom
for volumetric locking (except for the case of plane stress in 2-D elements). All internal degrees of
freedom are introduced automatically at the element level and condensed out during the solution
phase of the analysis.
Because of the extra internal degrees of freedom and static condensation, the enhanced strain formu-
lation option is less efficient than either the method (selective reduced integration) option or the
uniform reduced integration option.
This technology can be used with mixed u-P formulations.
4.1.2.1.3. Simplified Enhanced Strain Formulation

The simplified enhanced strain formulation prevents shear locking in bending-dominated problems.
This formulation is similar to the enhanced strain formulation, except that it introduces only the internal
degrees of freedom necessary to prevent shear locking. For the plane stress state, this formulation is
identical to the enhanced strain formulation.
Because there are no internal degrees of freedom to handle volumetric locking, this formulation is not
ideal when the material is nearly incompressible, except when also using the mixed u-P formulation.
When used with mixed u-P, the simplified enhanced strain formulation yields the same results as the
enhanced strain formulation. All internal degrees of freedom are introduced automatically at the element
level and condensed out during the solution phase of the analysis.
4.1.2.1.4. Uniform Reduced Integration

The uniform reduced integration method helps to prevent shearing locking in bending-dominated
problems and volumetric locking in nearly incompressible cases. Because it has only one integration
point, this option is more efficient than the method (selective reduced integration) and the enhanced
strain formulations. Because the artificial energy introduced to control the hourglass effect can diminish
solution accuracy, however, consider this option last.
When using uniform reduced integration, verify the solution accuracy by comparing the total energy
(SENE label on the ETABLE command) and the artificial energy (AENE label on the ETABLE) introduced
by hourglass control. If the ratio of artificial energy to total energy is less than five percent, the solution
is generally acceptable. If the ratio exceeds five percent, refine the mesh. You can also monitor the total
energy and artificial energy during the solution phase of the analysis (OUTPR,VENG).
4.1.2.2. Technologies for Lower-Order Tetrahedron Elements

Linear tetrahedron elements use mixed u-P formulation with pressure stabilization. The program achieves
stabilization by enhancing the strain field with three internal degrees of freedom (which are condensed
out at the element level). The stabilization allows for a robust and accurate element.
4.1.2.3. Technologies for Higher-Order Quad or Brick Elements

Higher-order elements (actually second-order here) do not have shear locking due to the quadratic
shape functions, but they are prone to volumetric locking if the full-integration scheme is used. To
avoid this problem, higher-order elements use uniform reduced integration as the default or only option.
The hourglass effect is not an issue if the model has at least two elements for 2-D problems, or at least
two elements in each direction for 3-D problems, as it is difficult for hourglass mode to propagate
beyond one element. Hourglass control is therefore not needed.
Uniform reduced integration can be used with mixed u-P formulation.
The full integration option is used primarily for linear analysis, and for nonlinear analysis, uniform reduced
integration is the better choice. If full integration is necessary for an analysis involving nonlinear mater-
ial, use it with mixed u-P formulation to limit the risk of volumetric locking.
4.1.2.4. Technologies for Higher-Order Triangle or Tetrahedron Elements

The second-order elements do not have shear locking, and volumetric locking is generally not an issue.
If you observe volumetric locking, used mixed u-P formulation.
4.1.3. Mixed u-P Formulation

Mixed u-P elements use both displacement and hydrostatic pressure as primary unknown variables.
Mixed u-P formulation is available in SOLID285, and in most other current-technology elements where
KEYOPT(6) > 0, such as: PLANE182, PLANE183, SOLID185, SOLID186, SOLID187, SOLSH190, SOLID272,
and SOLID273.

4.1.3.1. Overview of Mixed u-P Element Technologies
4.1.3.2. Mixed u-P Element Summary
4.1.3.3. Applications of Mixed u-P Formulations
4.1.3.4. Mixed u-P Models and Overconstraint or No Unique Solution
4.1.3.1. Overview of Mixed u-P Element Technologies

Incompressible material behavior may lead to difficulties in numerical simulation, such as volumetric
locking, inaccuracy of solution, checkerboard pattern of stress distributions, or, occasionally, divergence.
Mixed u-P elements are intended to overcome these problems.
Lagrange multiplier based mixed u-P elements (current-technology solid elements with KEYOPT(6) > 0
and SOLID285) can also be used to overcome incompressible material problems. They are designed to
model material behavior with high incompressibility such as fully or nearly incompressible hyperelastic
materials and nearly incompressible elastoplastic materials (high Poisson ratio or undergoing large
plastic strain). Lagrange multipliers extend the internal virtual work so that the volume constraint
equation is included explicitly. This introduces hydrostatic pressure (or volume change rate for nearly
incompressible hyperelastic materials) as a new independent variable. Unlike the hyperelastic elements,
the hydrostatic pressure variables are not condensed on the element level, but are solved at the global
level. See the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for further details.
The mixed u-P formulation of the current-technology solid elements offers options for handling incom-
pressible material behavior. You can combine the mixed u-P formulation with other element technologies
such as the method (also known as the selective reduced integration method) and the uniform reduced
integration method. With current-technology elements, you can combine the mixed u-P formulation
with the enhanced strain formulation method. Furthermore, the mixed u-P formulation is associated
with hyperelastic models, such as Mooney-Rivlin, Neo-Hookean, Ogden, Arruda-Boyce, polynomial form,
and user-defined.
4.1.3.2. Mixed u-P Element Summary

The number of independent hydrostatic pressure degrees of freedom depends on the element type,
element technology, and the value of KEYOPT(6), as shown in Table 4.1: Number of Independent Pressure
Degrees of Freedom in One Element (p. 66).
Table 4.1 Number of Independent Pressure Degrees of Freedom in One Element

Element Basic Element Technology KEYOPT(6) Number Interpolation
of Pres- Function
sure
DOFs
PLANE182 1 1 Constant
method (selective reduced integra-
tion) or uniform reduced integration
PLANE182 Enhanced strain formulation 1 3 Linear
PLANE183 Uniform reduced integration (KEY- 1 3 Linear
OPT(1) = 0)
PLANE183 3-point integration (KEYOPT(1) = 1) 1 3 Linear
SOLID185 1 1 Constant
method (selective reduced integra-
tion) or uniform reduced integration
SOLID185 Enhanced strain formulation 1 4 Linear
SOLID186 Uniform reduced integration 1 4 Linear
SOLID186 Full integration 1 4 Linear
SOLID187 4-point integration 1 1 Constant
SOLID187 4-point integration 2 4 Linear
SOLSH190 Enhanced strain formulation 1 4 Linear
SOLID272 Full integration in the r-z plane. 1 KEY- Constant in
OPT(2) the r-z plane
and Fourier
interpolation
in the circum-
ferential (θ)
direction
SOLID273 Uniform integration in the r-z plane. 1 KEY- Linear in the
OPT(2) x r-z plane and
3 Fourier inter-
Element Basic Element Technology KEYOPT(6) Number Interpolation

of Pres- Function
sure
DOFs
polation in
the circumfer-
ential (θ) direc-
tion
SOLID285 Stabilized pressure formulation --- 4 Linear
The hydrostatic pressure has an interpolation function one order lower than the one for volumetric
strain. Therefore, elastic strain only agrees with stress in an element on the average instead of point-
wise.
For current-technology mixed u-P elements, the volume constraint equation is checked for each element
of a nonlinear analysis. The number of elements in which the constraint equation is not satisfied is re-
ported in the output file. The default tolerance for the volumetric compatibility or volume constraint
check is 1.0 x 10-5. You can change this value if necessary (SOLCONTROL).
For the SOLID285 element, hydrostatic pressure is added as a degree of freedom at each node. The in-
compressibility is therefore checked at each node (similar to forces). For more information, see the
documentation for the CNVTOL command.
The mixed u-P formulation is not needed in plane stress; the incompressibility condition is assumed,
and the thickness is adjusted based on this incompressible assumption. For 2-D elements PLANE182
and PLANE183, using the mixed u-P formulation with either of the plane stress options (KEYOPT(3) = 0
or 3), the program resets any KEYOPT(6) setting to 0 automatically for pure displacement formulation.
4.1.3.3. Applications of Mixed u-P Formulations

Incompressible material behavior can be divided into two categories: fully incompressible materials and
nearly incompressible materials. Typical fully incompressible materials are hyperelastic materials. You
must use a current-technology element with mixed u-P formulation or SOLID285 to model this material
behavior. For element SOLID187, set KEYOPT(6) = 1.
Nearly incompressible materials include hyperelastic materials and elastoplastic materials. The current-
technology elements with mixed u-P formulation and SOLID285 are available for nearly incompressible
hyperelastic materials.
The best element choice varies from problem to problem, as indicated in these general guidelines:
• For material behavior with very small compressibility: Use a current-technology element with
mixed u-P formulation or SOLID285.
• For moderate compressibility: Use PLANE182/SOLID185 with (most efficient), a current-tech-

nology element with mixed u-P formulation, or SOLID285.
• When deformation is highly confined: Use a current-technology element with mixed u-P formu-
lation.
Nearly incompressible elastoplastic materials are materials with Poisson's ratio close to 0.5, or elastoplastic
materials undergoing very large plastic deformation. For such cases, especially when the deformation
is close to being fully incompressible, the mixed u-P formulation of the current-technology elements
and SOLID285 is more robust, yielding better performance. Try pure displacement formulation (KEYOPT(6)
= 0) first, however, because the extra pressure degrees of freedom are involved in mixed formulation.
If you are using mixed formulation with element SOLID187, it is good practice to specify hydrostatic
pressure interpolation (KEYOPT(6) = 2).
4.1.3.4. Mixed u-P Models and Overconstraint or No Unique Solution

Avoid overconstrained models when using current-technology elements with mixed u-P formulation.
An overconstrained model means that globally or locally, the number of displacement degrees of freedom
without any prescribed values (Nd) is less than the number of hydrostatic pressure degrees of freedom
(Np). Np can be calculated by the number of elements times the number of pressure degrees of freedom
within each element. (See Table 4.1: Number of Independent Pressure Degrees of Freedom in One Ele-
ment (p. 66) for the specific numbers used with the current-technology elements.) If different type
elements are included, Np is the summation of the products over each type of mixed formulation element.
The overconstrained problem can be overcome by increasing the number of nodes without any dis-
placement boundary conditions, or by refining the mesh. The optimal values for Np and Nd are Nd/Np
= 2 for 2-D problems and Nd/Np = 3 for 3-D problems.
On the other hand, SOLID285 is not likely to be overconstrained. At each node, it has one pressure degree
of freedom and three degrees of freedom (UX, UY, and UZ). These are the best values for Nd/Np.
When the mixed u-P formulation of the current-technology plane and solid elements is applied to fully
incompressible hyperelastic materials, you must also avoid the “no unique solution” situation. No unique
solution occurs if all boundary nodes have prescribed displacements in each direction and the material
is fully incompressible. Since hydrostatic pressure is independent from deformation, it should be determ-
ined by the force/pressure boundary condition. If no force/pressure boundary condition is applied, the
hydrostatic pressure cannot be determined, or the solution is not unique. In this case, any stress field
in equilibrium would be still in equilibrium and not cause any further deformation by adding an arbitrary
value of hydrostatic pressure. This problem can be solved simply by having at least one node on the
boundary in at least one direction without a prescribed displacement boundary condition. This direction
cannot be the tangential direction of the boundary at this node. That means the solution is the partic-
ular one with zero force at the node in that direction where no displacement is prescribed.
4.1.4. Generalized Plane Strain Options

The generalized plane strain feature assumes a finite deformation domain length in the Z direction,
rather than the infinite value assumed for standard plane strain. Generalized plane strain, therefore,
gives more practical results for deformation problems where the Z-direction dimension is not long
enough. It also offers a more efficient way to simulate certain 3-D deformations using 2-D element op-
tions.
The deformation domain or structure is formed by extruding a plane area along a curve with a constant
curvature, as shown in the following figure:
Figure 4.1 Generalized Plane Strain Deformation
Starting Plane
Starting Point
Ending Plane
X
Fiber Direction
Ending Point
Z
The extrusion begins at the starting (or reference) plane and stops at the ending plane. The curve dir-
ection along the extrusion path is called the fiber direction. The starting and ending planes must be
perpendicular to this fiber direction at the beginning and ending intersections.
If the boundary conditions and loads in the fiber direction do not change over the course of the curve,
and if the starting plane and ending plane remain perpendicular to the fiber direction during deformation,
then the amount of deformation of all cross sections is identical throughout the curve, and does not
vary at any curve position in the fiber direction. Any deformation, therefore, can be represented by the
deformation on the starting plane, and the 3-D deformation can be simulated by solving the deformation
problem on the starting plane. The existing plane strain and axisymmetric options are particular cases
of the generalized plane strain option.
All inputs and outputs are in the global Cartesian coordinate system. The starting plane must be the
X-Y plane, and must be meshed. The applied nodal force on the starting plane is the total force along
the fiber length. The geometry in the fiber direction is specified by the rotation about X and Y of the
ending plane and the fiber length passing through a point that you specify on the starting plane, called
the starting (or reference) point. The starting point creates an ending point on the ending plane through
the extrusion process. The boundary conditions and loads in the fiber direction are specified by applying
displacements or forces at the ending point. This ending point can be different from regular nodes, in
that it is designated by the same X-Y coordinates that are fixed in plane during deformation.
The generalized plane strain option introduces three new degrees of freedom for each element. Two
internal nodes are created automatically at the solution stage for the generalized plane strain option
to carry the extra three degrees of freedom. You can apply boundary conditions and loads and check
the results of the fiber length and rotation angle changes, and reaction forces, using the commands
GSBDATA, GSGDATA, GSSOL, and GSLIST. The results of the fiber length change, rotation angle change,
and reaction forces can also be viewed through OUTPR.
The fiber length change is positive when the fiber length increases. The sign of the rotation angle or
angle change is determined by how the fiber length changes when the coordinates of the ending point
change. If the fiber length decreases when the X coordinate of the ending point increases, the rotation
angle about Y is positive. If the fiber length increases when the Y coordinate of the ending point increases,
the rotation angle about X is positive.
In Eigenvalue analyses, such as Eigen buckling and modal analysis, the generalized plane strain option
usually reports fewer Eigenvalues and Eigenvectors than you would obtain in a 3-D analysis. Because
it reports only homogenous deformation in the fiber direction, generalized plane strain employs only
three degrees of freedom to account for these deformations. The same 3-D analysis would incorporate
many more degrees of freedom in the fiber direction.
Because the mass matrix terms relating to degrees of freedom in the fiber direction are approximated
for modal and transient analyses, you cannot use the lumped mass matrix for these types of analyses,
and the solution may be slightly different from regular 3-D simulations when any of the three designated
degrees of freedom is not restrained.
4.1.5. Axisymmetric Elements with Nonaxisymmetric Loads

Axisymmetric problems should be modeled using axisymmetric elements. An axisymmetric model greatly
reduces the modeling and analysis time compared to that of an equivalent 3-D model.
If loading is also axisymmetric, the analysis is relatively straightforward. However, loading often varies
around the circumference. Two methods are available for handling nonaxisymmetric loading:
• General Axisymmetric Elements -- Support any type of material or loading

• Harmonic Axisymmetric Elements -- Restricted to linear materials and sinusoidal loading.
4.1.5.1. General Axisymmetric Elements

Different from harmonic axisymmetric elements, general axisymmetric elements (SOLID272, SOLID273,
and SURF159) introduce the Fourier series into the interpolation functions to describe the change of
displacements in the circumferential (θ) direction. The elements can therefore apply to any analysis
type, including geometric nonlinear analyses, and can support any load and deformation mode. For
more information, see SOLID272 - General Axisymmetric Solid with 4 Base Nodes and SOLID273 - Gen-
eral Axisymmetric Solid with 8 Base Nodes in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference.
The elements can have any axis as the axisymmetric axis (defined via SECTYPE and SECDATA commands).
You need only define base elements on a flat plane.
General Axisymmetric Element Terminology
The plane on which quadrilaterals or triangles are defined is called the master plane. The quadri-
laterals, triangles, or lines on the master plane are called base elements, and the nodes of the
quadrilaterals, triangles, and lines are called base nodes.
A nodal plane (copied from the master plane) is a radial plane of Fourier nodes. There are n nodal
planes (where KEYOPT(2) = n), equally spaced around the circumference.
An integration plane is a plane which sits equally between any two adjacent nodal planes. Integ-
ration points in the circumferential direction are located on both the nodal and integration planes.
For more information, see SOLID272 - General Axisymmetric Solid with 4 Base Nodes in the
Mechanical APDL Theory Reference.
The NAXIS command automatically creates a full 3-D finite-element model using the base elements,
the axisymmetric axis, and the number of Fourier nodes specified via KEYOPT(2). The axisymmetric axis
must be on the master plane, and the base elements must be on one side of the axis. A base element
or base node must be associated with one axisymmetric axis before issuing the NAXIS command. All
generated nodes are equally distributed circumferentially.
The default element coordinate system is a cylindrical coordinate system having the axisymmetric axis
as z, the origin defined via the SECDATA command, and θ = 0 at the master plane. The right-hand rule
determines the direction of θ, resulting in x(r), y(θ), and z from the right-hand coordinate system, as
shown:
Figure 4.2 General Axisymmetric Elements and Their Coordinate Systems (KEYOPT(2) =
3)
The displacements in the r, θ, and z directions, however, are interpolated by
ui = hi(s,t)(c1 + a1cosθ + b1sinθ + a2cos2θ + b2sin2θ + a3cos3θ + b3sin3θ . . .)
where
i = r, θ, z
and
hi(s,t) is the standard interpolation function for 2-D elements.
The nodes can have their own coordinate systems defined in any direction, as is the case with the nodes
of any other solid element. For more detailed information, see General Axisymmetric Solids in the
Mechanical APDL Theory Reference.
General axisymmetric elements differ from harmonic axisymmetric elements in that you do not specify
the symmetric and unsymmetric terms, input peak values of loads, and solve for each term as one load
step. Instead, you apply all physical loads (forces and displacements) at the nodes and solve the problem
only once to obtain the solution.
The order of hi(s,t) is determined by the element type. (SOLID272 is a lower-order element and SOLID273
is a higher-order element.) The order of Fourier terms is determined by the number of Fourier nodes,
or the number of nodes created in the circumferential direction for one base node (including the base
node itself ). This number is also the number of nodal planes in the circumferential direction, which you
input via the element's KEYOPT(2). The KEYOPT(2) setting, the number of Fourier nodes, and the Fourier
terms are shown in Table 4.2: Fourier Terms for General Axisymmetric Elements (p. 72). Generally, each
Fourier term has different coefficients except when KEYOPT(2) is an even number (in which case the
highest terms of the sine and cosine have the same coefficient).
Table 4.2 Fourier Terms for General Axisymmetric Elements

KEYOPT(2) Number of Fourier Terms Degrees
Value Fourier Between
Nodes (and Nodal
Nodal Planes
Planes)
1 1 c1 360
3 3 c1, a1cosθ, b1sinθ 120
4 4 c1, a1cosθ, b1sinθ, a2cos2θ, 90
a2sin2θ
b2sin2θ
b2sin2θ, a3cos3θ, a3sin3θ
7 7 c1, a1cosθ, b1sinθ, a2cos2θ, 51.43
b2sin2θ, a3cos3θ, b3sin3θ
8 8 c1, a1cosθ, b1sinθ, ... , 45
a4cos4θ, a4sin4θ
9 9 c1, a1cosθ, b1sinθ, ... , 40
a4cos4θ, b4sin4θ
10 10 c1, a1cosθ, b1sinθ, ... , 36
a5cos5θ, a5sin5θ
11 11 c1, a1cosθ, b1sinθ, ... , 32.73
a5cos5θ, b5sin5θ
12 12 c1, a1cosθ, b1sinθ, ... , 30
a6cos6θ, a6sin6θ
For KEYOPT(2) = 1, the deformation is also axisymmetric but, unlike the axisymmetric option of 2-D
elements such as PLANE182, the general axisymmetric elements allow torsion. If no torsion load exists,
it is more efficient to use the axisymmetric elements.
To simulate unsymmetric deformation, set KEYOPT(2) > 1. The greater the number of Fourier nodes,
the more accurate the simulation of complicated deformation modes.
Solve localized deformation problems with a greater number of Fourier nodes (higher-order Fourier
terms). Be aware that the deformation is not as localized as it would be when using standard 3-D solid
elements; with general axisymmetric elements, displacements are interpolated using Fourier terms in
the circumferential direction (rather than being interpolated piecewise using linear/quadratic functions
as in 3-D solid elements).
Contact is usually a local phenomenon. Generally, higher-order Fourier terms are necessary.
The maximum allowed number of Fourier nodes is 12. If more than 12 nodes are necessary, a general
axisymmetric element may not be computationally efficient; therefore, it is better to use a standard 3-
D solid element for such cases.
4.1.5.1.1. Example: 3-D General Axisymmetric Model

The following example input file shows how to use commands and the SOLID272 element to generate
a 3-D general axisymmetric model. The model represents a simple thread connection made of two parts,
a bolt and a nut, both modeled with 12 Fourier nodes (KEYOPT(2) = 12) and the global Y axis as the
axis of symmetry.
/batch,list
/title, Sample input for generating general axisymmetric solid elements
/prep7
!
et,1,272,,12 !define general axisymmetric SOLID272 with 12 nodes along circumferential direction
et,2,272,,12
!
sect,1,axis !define general axisymmetric section
secd,2,0,2 !use pattern 2 with global cartesian coordinate system (0)and y as axis of symmetry (2)
!
mp,ex,1,2.0e5 !define elastic material properties
mp,nuxy,1,0.3
!
!
! Create 2D geometry of thread connection (bolt/nut)
!
k,1,1.0,0
k,2,4.0,0
k,3,4,1.5
k,4,5.0,2.5
k,5,5.0,3.5
k,6,4.0,4.5
k,7,4.0,5.5
k,8,5.0,6.5
k,9,5.0,7.5
k,10,4.0,8.5
k,11,4.0,10
k,12,1.0,10
k,13,7.0,0
k,14,7.0,10
!
k,15,4.0,0
k,16,4,1.5
k,17,5.0,2.5
k,18,5.0,3.5
k,19,4.0,4.5
k,20,4.0,5.5
k,21,5.0,6.5
k,22,5.0,7.5
k,23,4.0,8.5
k,24,4.0,10
!
a,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,11,12
a,15,16,17,18,19,20,21,22,23,24,14,13
!
!
!Mesh 2D geometry
!
esize,0.5
type,1 !use type 1 for bolt component
mat,1
secn,1 !use general axisymmetric section
amesh,1 !generate the master plane nodes and elements for bolt component
!
esize,1 !use different mesh
type,2 !use type 2 for nut component

mat,1
secn,1 !use general axisymmetric section
amesh,2 !generate the master plane nodes and elements for nut component
!
/PNUM,TYPE,1 !display element type numbers
/NUMBER,1 !numbering shown with colors only
eplot !visualise the 2D model
!
!
!Generate full 3D axisymmetric model of bolt and nut using 12 planes
!
naxis
!
/view,1,1,1,1 !isometric view
!
nplot !display the 12 nodal planes along circumferential direction
!
/eshape,1 !display elements with general axisymmetric shape
!
esel,s,type,,1 !display 3D axisymmetric model of bolt
eplot
!
esel,s,type,,2 !display 3D axisymmetric model of nut
eplot
!
esel,all
!
eplot !display full 3D axisymmetric model of bolt and nut
!
fini
The input listing generates the following 2-D and 3-D meshes:
The general axisymmetric elements representing the bolt and nut are shown separately in the figures
below:
4.1.5.2. Harmonic Axisymmetric Elements

An axisymmetric structure can be represented by a plane (X,Y) finite-element model.
ANSYS, Inc. recommends general axisymmetric elements SOLID272 and SOLID273 for such applications
because they can accept any type of load and can support nonlinear analyses. However, you can also
use a special class of axisymmetric elements called harmonic elements: PLANE25, SHELL61, PLANE75,
PLANE78, FLUID81, and PLANE83. The harmonic elements allow a nonaxisymmetric load and support
linear analyses.
Axisymmetric elements are modeled on a 360° basis, so all input and output nodal heat flows, forces,
moments, fluid flows, current flows, electric charges, magnetic fluxes, and magnetic current segments
must be input in this manner. Similarly, input real constants representing volumes, convection areas,
thermal capacitances, heat generations, spring constants, and damping coefficients must also be input
in on a 360° basis.
Unless otherwise stated, the model must be defined in the Z = 0.0 plane. The global Cartesian Y-axis is
assumed to be the axis of symmetry. Further, the model is developed only in the +X quadrants. Hence,
the radial direction is in the +X direction.
The boundary conditions are described in terms of the structural elements. The forces (FX, FY, etc.) and
displacements (UX, UY, etc.) for the structural elements are input and output in the nodal coordinate
system. All nodes along the y-axis centerline (at x = 0.0) should have the radial displacements (UX if
not rotated) specified as zero, unless a pinhole effect is desired. At least one value of UY should be
specified or constrained to prevent rigid body motions. Torsion, while axisymmetric, is available only
for a few element types. If an element type allows torsion, all UZ degrees of freedom should be set to
0.0 on the centerline, and one node with a positive X coordinate must also have a specified or constrained
value of UZ. Pressures and temperatures may be applied directly. Acceleration, if any, is usually input
only in the axial (Y) direction. Similarly, angular velocity, if any, is usually input only about the Y axis.
For more information, see Harmonic Axisymmetric Elements with Nonaxisymmetric Loads (p. 77).
4.1.5.2.1. Harmonic Axisymmetric Elements with Nonaxisymmetric Loads

An axisymmetric structure (defined with the axial direction along the global Y axis and the radial direction
parallel to the global X axis) can be represented by a plane (X, Y) finite-element model. The use of an
axisymmetric model greatly reduces the modeling and analysis time compared to that of an equivalent
3-D model. The harmonic axisymmetric elements allow nonaxisymmetric loads. For these elements
(PLANE25, SHELL61, PLANE75, PLANE78, FLUID81, and PLANE83) , the load is defined as a series of
harmonic functions (Fourier series). For example, a load F is given by:
F(θ) = A0 + A1 cos θ + B1 sin θ + A2 cos 2 θ + B2 sin 2 θ + A3 cos 3 θ + B3 sin 3 θ + ...
Each term of the above series must be defined as a separate load step. A term is defined by the load
coefficient (A ℓ or B ℓ ), the number of harmonic waves ( ℓ ), and the symmetry condition (cos ℓ θ or
sin ℓ θ). The number of harmonic waves, or the mode number, is input with the MODE command. Note
that ℓ = 0 represents the axisymmetric term (A0). θ is the circumferential coordinate implied in the
model. The load coefficient is determined from the standard boundary condition input (i.e., displacements,
forces, pressures, etc.). Input values for temperature, displacement, and pressure should be the peak
value. The input value for force and heat flow should be a number equal to the peak value per unit
length times the circumference. The symmetry condition is determined from the ISYM value also input
on the MODE command. The description of the element given in Element Library (p. 101) and in the
appropriate sections of the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference should be reviewed to see which deform-
ation shape corresponds to the symmetry conditions.
Results of the analysis are written to the results file. The deflections and stresses are output at the peak
value of the sinusoidal function. The results may be scaled and summed at various circumferential (θ)
locations with POST1. This may be done by storing results data at the desired θ location using the ANGLE
argument of the SET command. A load case may be defined with LCWRITE. Repeat for each set of
results, then combine or scale the load cases as desired with LCOPER. Stress (and temperature) contour
displays and distorted shape displays of the combined results can also be made.
Caution should be used if the harmonic elements are mixed with other, nonharmonic elements. The
harmonic elements should not be used in nonlinear analyses, such as large deflection and/or contact
analyses.
The element matrices for harmonic elements are dependent upon the number of harmonic waves
(MODE) and the symmetry condition (ISYM). For this reason, neither the element matrices nor the trian-
gularized matrix is reused in succeeding substeps if the MODE and ISYM parameters are changed. In
addition, a superelement generated with particular MODE and ISYM values must have the same values
in the "use" pass.
For stress stiffened (prestressed) structures, only the stress state of the most recent previous MODE =
0 load case is used, regardless of the current value of MODE.
Loading Cases - The following cases are provided to aid the user in obtaining a physical understanding
of the MODE parameter and the symmetric (ISYM=1) and antisymmetric (ISYM=-1) loading conditions.
The loading cases are described in terms of the structural elements. The forces (FX, FY, etc.) and dis-
placements (UX, UY, etc.) for the structural elements are input and output in the nodal coordinate system.
In all cases illustrated, it is assumed that the nodal coordinate system is parallel to the global Cartesian
coordinate system. The loading description may be extended to any number of modes. The harmonic
thermal elements (PLANE75 and PLANE78) are treated the same as PLANE25 and PLANE83, respectively,
with the following substitutions: UY to TEMP, and FY to HEAT. The effects of UX, UZ, ROTZ, FX, FZ and
MZ are all ignored for thermal elements.
Case A: (MODE = 0, ISYM not used) - This is the case of axisymmetric loading except that torsional effects
are included. Figure 4.3 (p. 78) shows the various axisymmetric loadings. Pressures and temperatures
may be applied directly. Acceleration, if any, is usually input only in the axial (Y) direction. Similarly,
angular velocity, if any, is usually input only about the Y axis.
Figure 4.3 Axisymmetric Radial, Axial, Torsion and Moment Loadings
The total force (F) acting in the axial direction due to an axial input force (FY) is:
2π
= ∫0 (force per unit length)*(increment length)
π
= ∫ FY / πR Rdθ = FY
where FY is on a full 360° basis.
The total applied moment (M) due to a tangential input force (FZ) acting about the global axis is:
π
= ∫ v a
"π
= ∫! −Z π θ = − Z
where FZ is on a full 360° basis. Calculated reaction forces are also on a full 360° basis and the above
expressions may be used to find the total force. Nodes at the centerline (X = 0.0) should have UX and
UZ (and ROTZ, for SHELL61) specified as zero, unless a pinhole effect is desired. At least one value of
UY should be specified or constrained to prevent rigid body motions. Also, one node with a nonzero,
positive X coordinate must have a specified or constrained value of UZ if applicable. When Case A
defines the stress state used in stress stiffened analyses, torsional stress is not allowed.
Case B: (MODE = 1, ISYM=1) - An example of this case is the bending of a pipe. Figure 4.4 (p. 79) shows
the corresponding forces or displacements on a nodal circle. All functions are based on sin θ or cos θ.
The input and output values of UX, FX, etc., represent the peak values of the displacements or forces.
The peak values of UX, UY, FX and FY (and ROTZ and MZ for SHELL61) occur at θ = 0°, whereas the
peak values of UZ and FZ occur at θ = 90°. Pressures and temperatures are applied directly as their
peak values at θ = 0°. The thermal load vector is computed from Tpeak, where Tpeak is the input element
or nodal temperature. The reference temperature for thermal strain calculations (TREF) is internally set
to zero in the thermal strain calculation for the harmonic elements if MODE > 0. Gravity (g) acting in
the global X direction should be input (ACEL) as ACELX = g, ACELY = 0.0, and ACELZ = -g. The peak
values of σx, σ y, σz and σ xy occur at θ = 0° , whereas the peak values of σ yz and σ xz occur at 90 °.
Figure 4.4 Bending and Shear Loading (ISYM = 1)
The total applied force in the global X direction (F) due to both an input radial force (FX) and a tangential
force (FZ) is:
2π
= ∫0 (force per unit length)*(directional cosine)*(increment length)
π
= ∫ FX θ / πR θ + θ π − θ θ
= −
where FX and FZ are the peak forces on a full 360° basis. Calculated reaction forces are also the peak
values on a full 360° basis and the above expression may be used to find the total force. These net
forces are independent of radius so that they may be applied at any radius (including X = 0.0) for the
same net effect.
An applied moment (M) due to an axial input force (FY) for this case can be computed as follows:
π
= ∫ v
π
= ∫ θ π θ θ =
An additional applied moment (M) is generated based on the input moment (MZ):
:π
= ∫9 !"#$ %$" &'+, -$'.,1345+"$#,+!'6- #!7+'$34+'#"$8$', -$'.,13
=∫ π θ θ θ =
If it is desired to impose a uniform lateral displacement (or force) on the cross section of a cylindrical
structure in the global X direction, equal magnitudes of UX and UZ (or FX and FZ) may be combined
as shown in Figure 4.5 (p. 80).
Figure 4.5 Uniform Lateral Loadings
When UX and UZ are input in this manner, the nodal circle moves in an uniform manner. When FX and
FZ are input in this manner, a uniform load is applied about the circumference, but the resulting UX
and UZ are not, in general, of the same magnitude. If it is necessary to have the nodal circle moving in
a rigid manner, it can be done via constraint equations (CE) so that UX = -UZ.
Node points on the centerline (X = 0.0) should have UY specified as zero. Further, UX must equal -UZ
at all points along the centerline, which may be enforced with constraint equations. In practice, however,
it seems necessary to do this only for the harmonic fluid element, FLUID81, since this element has no
static shear stiffness. To prevent rigid body motions, at least one value of UX or UZ, as well as one value
of UY (not at the centerline), or ROTZ, should be specified or constrained in some manner. For SHELL61,
if plane sections (Y = constant) are to remain plane, ROTZ should be related to UY by means of constraint
equations at the loaded nodes.
Case C: (MODE = 1, ISYM = -1) - This case (shown in Figure 4.6 (p. 80)) represents a pipe bending in a
direction 90° to that described in Case B.
Figure 4.6 Bending and Shear Loading (ISYM = -1)
The same description applying to Case B applies also to Case C, except that the negative signs on UZ,
FZ, and the direction cosine are changed to positive signs. Also, the location of the peak values of
various quantities are switched between the 0° and 90° locations.
Case D: (MODE = 2, ISYM = 1) - The displacement and force loadings associated with this case are shown
in Figure 4.7 (p. 80). All functions are based on sin 2 θ and cos 2 θ.
Figure 4.7 Displacement and Force Loading Associated with MODE = 2 and ISYM = 1
Shell Elements
Additional Cases: There is no programmed limit to the value of MODE. Additional cases can be defined.
4.2. Shell Elements

Use shell elements to model thin structures (where one dimension is much smaller than the other two
dimensions). Shell elements decouple the deformation on the surface and the deformation in the normal
direction, allowing for a simple and efficient simulation of a thin structure.
No firm rules exist to indicate when it is best to use shell elements. If the structure acts as a shell, you
can use shell elements.
Shell elements are usually created by meshing a surface representing the position and shape of the
structure, and associating them with section data to represent shell thickness and properties.
Some shell elements have an option allowing them to be used as membrane elements. These elements
allow deformation in the plane of the surface only (that is, stresses do not vary through the thickness).
The following additional topics concerning shell elements are available:

4.2.1. Shell Shear and Warping
4.2.2. Shell Element Coordinate System
4.2.3. Shell Element Nodes
4.2.1. Shell Shear and Warping

The only shear on the free surfaces of a shell element is in-plane. Normals to the shell middle surface
stay straight, but not necessarily normal. As a result, the in-plane strain variation through the thickness
cannot be more complex than linear.
The assumption of linear in-plane strain variation through the thickness is invalid at the edges of layered
composite shell elements that have different material properties at each layer. For accurate stresses in
this area, consider using submodeling.
The program does not verify that the element thickness exceeds its width (or many times its width), as
such an element may be part of a fine mesh of a larger model that acts as a shell.
If the initial shape of the model is curved, then the radius/thickness ratio is important because the strain
distribution through the thickness departs from linear as the ratio decreases. With the exception of
SHELL61, all shell elements allow shear deformation, important for relatively thick shells.
Various shell element types tolerate a different degree of warping before their results become question-
able (as described in Warping Factor in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference). Four-node shell elements
that do not have all of their nodes in the same plane are considered to be warped. Eight-node shell
elements can accept a much greater degree of warping, but unlike other midside-node elements, their
midside nodes cannot be dropped.
The in-plane rotational (drill) stiffness is added at the nodes for solution stability, as shell elements do
not have a true in-plane rotational stiffness; consequently, do not expect the in-plane rotational stiffness
to carry a load.
4.2.2. Shell Element Coordinate System

The element coordinate system for all shell elements has the z-axis normal to the plane. The element
x-axis is in the plane, with its orientation determined by one of the following:
• The ESYS command

• Side I-J of the element
• Real constants
4.2.3. Shell Element Nodes

Nodes are normally located on the center plane of the element. You can offset nodes from the center
plane using one of the following methods:
• The SECOFFSET command

• A rigid link (MPC184) that connects a middle surface node to an out-of-plane node.
Use node offsets with care when modeling initially curved structures with either flat or curved elements.
For curved elements, an increased mesh density in the circumferential direction may improve the results.
4.3. Beam and Link (Truss) Elements

Use beam or link (truss) elements to represent relatively long, thin pieces of structural continua (where
two dimensions are much smaller than the other dimension).
Beam elements assume the direct stresses in the nonaxial direction to be zero, and ignore the deform-
ations in the nonaxial directions (although cross sections can be scaled in a nonlinear analysis). For link
elements, shear stress, stress gradients, and deformation are also ignored.
Simulating beam/truss structures is relatively simple, as elements can be created by meshing lines or
curves representing the position and shape of the structure (rather than by meshing the volumes). The
elements are associated with section data to represent the beam or truss cross sections.
Although beams can be used in cases where link/truss elements suffice, they are not as computationally
efficient as link elements.
The available beam element types are:
• BEAM188, a 3-D two-node beam

• BEAM189, a 3-D three-node beam
Both elements are based on Timoshenko beam theory which includes shear-deformation effects. The
elements can account for unrestrained warping and restrained warping of cross-sections.
Because bending resistances, element loads, or both are normally different in the y and z directions, a
beam element must be oriented about its own axis. Typically, the orientation is accomplished via an
orientation node, a node not lying on its own axis.
If bending resistance is negligible, consider using LINK180, a 3-D spar (or truss).
4.4. Pipe Elements

Use pipe elements to represent straight, slender to moderately stubby/thick pipe structures. The elements
are especially useful in the offshore drilling industry, as their cross-section data includes interior fluid
and outside insulation.
Reinforcing Elements
A pipe element is a special form of beam element. As with beams, pipe elements are created by
meshing lines or curves, and the elements must be associated with section data. A pipe differs from a
beam in the following ways, however:
• A pipe cross-section is normally axisymmetric so that the bending resistance is the same in both direc-
tions.
Element orientation (via an orientation node) is still necessary, however, as the element loads can
differ in the y and z directions.
• A pipe can account for both internal and external pressures.
• A pipe element has support for many nonlinear material models.
The available pipe element types are:
• PIPE288, a 3-D two-node pipe

• PIPE289, a 3-D three-node pipe
Both elements are based on Timoshenko beam theory which includes shear-deformation effects.
Also available is ELBOW290, a special 3-D three-node pipe used for modeling curved pipes. The element
can account for cross-sectional distortion.
4.5. Reinforcing Elements

Reinforced materials are used extensively in civil engineering construction and composite structures.
Use reinforcing elements to model reinforcement in either of two forms: cable (such as steel rebar in
reinforced concrete) or fiber (such as the carbon fiber in fiber-reinforced composites).
Two methods are supported for modeling reinforcing cables or fibers:

4.5.1. Discrete Reinforcing
4.5.2. Smeared Reinforcing
For further information, see the documentation for the reinforcing elements (REINFnnn).
4.5.1. Discrete Reinforcing

The discrete reinforcing method allows reinforcing fibers to be accounted for individually. This method
is suitable for modeling sparsely placed fibers, or fibers with nonuniform properties, such as cross-section
area, material, spacing, and orientation.
The discrete reinforcing element REINF264 is used to add individual fibers to 3-D link, beam, shell and
solid elements. Multiple reinforcing fibers are allowed in a single element.
4.5.2. Smeared Reinforcing

The smeared reinforcing method is suitable for modeling clusters of reinforcing fibers appearing in
layer or sheet form. Each layer of fibers is simplified as a homogenous membrane having unidirectional
stiffness.
Fibers in the same layer must have uniform cross-section, material, spacing, and orientation.
The smeared reinforcing elements are:
• REINF263 -- Used with 2-D solids such as plane stress, plane strain, axisymmetric and generalized plane
strain, and axisymmetric shell elements.
• REINF265 -- Used with 3-D solid and shell elements.
4.6. Surface Elements

As its name implies, a surface element (SURFnnn) is normally attached to the surface of a solid element.
By using a surface element, you can include a number of specialized surface effects without having to
apply them individually to the solid elements in your model.
Examples of surface effects include:
• Hydrostatic pressure
• Ocean loading
• Directed pressure
• Radiation
• Surface mass
• Thermal connection with FLUID116
• Surface tension
• Foundation stiffness
Not all effects are available with all surface elements.
4.7. Automatic Selection of Element Technologies and Formulations

With the variety of technologies available in many elements, choosing the best settings to solve your
problem efficiently can be challenging. Particularly in the newer structural and solid elements for stress
analysis, an element might offer two to four technologies.
The program can offer suggestions (or reset the technology settings) to help you achieve the best
solution via the ETCONTROL command. The command helps you to select the appropriate element
technologies by considering the stress state, the options set on the element type, and the associated
constitutive models of the element type. ETCONTROL supports all applicable current-technology ele-
ments.
The materials associated with each element type are detected at the solution stage and are classified
as:
• Elastoplastic materials, including:

– Linear elastic materials with Poisson's ratio <= 0.49
– Linear elastic materials with Poisson's ratio > 0.49
– Anisotropic materials
– Elastoplastic materials (other nonlinear materials except hyperelastic materials)
• Hyperelastic materials, including:
– Nearly incompressible hyperelastic materials
– Fully incompressible hyperelastic materials
Automatic Selection of Element Technologies and Formulations
In practical application, one element type could be associated with more than one constitutive model,
for example, linear elastic and elastoplastic materials. For this case, the suggestions/resettings are based
on elastoplastic materials, which need more complicated element technology. The list of constitutive
models above is organized in order of complexity, with the bottom ones more difficult to solve numer-
ically. When an element type is associated with multiple constitutive models, the more complex one is
used in the automatic selection of the element technology.
When using ETCONTROL, the suggestions given or settings changed are described in the tables below.
Table 4.3 Recommendation Criteria for Element Technology (Linear Material)

Linear Materials Only
Element Stress State / Op- Poisson's ratio (ν) <= Poisson's ratio (ν) > 0.49
tion 0.49 (or anisotropic materi-
als)
SHELL181 Default KEYOPT(3) = 2 for higher accuracy of membrane stress,
otherwise, KEYOPT(3) = 0; KEYOPT(8) = 2 for all cases
Membrane-only op- KEYOPT(3) = 2 for higher accuracy of stress, otherwise,
tion (KEYOPT(1) = 1) KEYOPT(3) = 0; KEYOPT(8) = 0 for all cases
SOLID272 KEYOPT(6) = 0 KEYOPT(6) = 1
SOLID273 No change. (Default element settings are best.)
PLANE182 Plane stress KEYOPT(1) = 2
Not plane stress KEYOPT(1) = 3 KEYOPT(1) = 2
PLANE183 Plane stress No change. (Default element settings are best.)
Not plane stress No change. (Default element settings are best.)
SOLID185 KEYOPT(2) = 3 KEYOPT(2) = 2
SOLID186 KEYOPT(2) = 0
BEAM188 KEYOPT(3) = 2, KEYOPT(1) = 1[1]
BEAM189 KEYOPT(1) = 1[1]
SHELL208 KEYOPT(8) = 2
SHELL209 KEYOPT(8) = 2
SHELL281 No change. (Default element settings are best.)
PIPE288 KEYOPT(3) = 2 KEYOPT(3) = 2
KEYOPT(4) = 2 KEYOPT(4) = 1
KEYOPT(15) = KEYOPT(15) =
1[2 (p. 86)] 1[2 (p. 86)]
PIPE289 KEYOPT(4) = 2 KEYOPT(4) = 1
KEYOPT(15) = KEYOPT(15) =
1[2 (p. 86)] 1[2 (p. 86)]
1. Only when the element section is not circular; otherwise, KEYOPT(1) = 0
2. Only when the element cross section is composite; otherwise, KEYOPT(15) = 0
Table 4.4 Recommendation Criteria for Element Technology (Nonlinear Materials)

Nonlinear Materials
Element Stress State / Op- Elastoplastic mater- Hyperelastic materials only
tion ials (may also have
hyperelastic materi-
als)
SHELL181 Default KEYOPT(3) = 2 for KEYOPT(3) = 0, KEYOPT(8) = 0
higher accuracy of
membrane stress,
otherwise, KEYOPT(3)
= 0; KEYOPT(8) = 2
for all cases
Membrane-only op- KEYOPT(3) = 2 for KEYOPT(3) = 0, KEYOPT(8) = 0
tion (KEYOPT(1) = 1) higher accuracy of
stress, otherwise,
KEYOPT(3) = 0; KEY-
OPT(8) = 0 for all
cases
PLANE182 Plane stress KEYOPT(1) = 2 KEYOPT(1) = 0
Not plane stress KEYOPT(1) = 2[1] KEYOPT(1) = 0[1]
PLANE183 Plane stress No change. (Default element settings are best.)
Not plane stress no change (default element settings are best)[1]
SOLID185 KEYOPT(2) = 2[1] KEYOPT(2) = 0[1]
SOLID186 KEYOPT(2) = 0[1]
SOLID187 No change. (Default element settings are best.)[1]
SOLID272 KEYOPT(6) = 1
SOLID273 No change. (Default element settings are best.)[1]
BEAM188 KEYOPT(3) = 2, KEYOPT(1) = 1[2]
BEAM189 KEYOPT(1) = 1[2]
SHELL208 KEYOPT(8) = 2 KEYOPT(8) = 0
SHELL209 KEYOPT(8) = 2 KEYOPT(8) = 0
SHELL281 No change. (Default element settings are best.)
PIPE288 KEYOPT(3) = 2
KEYOPT(4) = 2
KEYOPT(15) = 1[3 (p. 87)]
PIPE289 KEYOPT(4) = 2
KEYOPT(15) = 1[3 (p. 87)]
1. If even one of your hyperelastic materials is fully incompressible, then KEYOPT(6) = 1 is required.
Therefore, ANSYS, Inc. recommends using a different element type for such materials to avoid
using the more costly mixed u-P formulation where it is not needed.
2. Only when the element section is not circular, otherwise KEYOPT(1) = 0.
Elements Under Linear Perturbation
3. Only when the element cross section is composite; otherwise, KEYOPT(15) = 0
For the solid elements listed above, ETCONTROL provides suggestions or resets the KEYOPTs for the
element technology settings (i.e., KEYOPT(1) for PLANE182, KEYOPT(2) for SOLID185 and SOLID186).
The Mixed u-P formulation KEYOPT(6) is reset when necessary; that is, when fully incompressible hyper-
elastic materials are associated with non-plane stress states.
For BEAM188 and BEAM189, KEYOPT(1) is always suggested for non-circular cross section beams and
should be reset when ETCONTROL,SET,.. is issued. However, the KEYOPT setting changes the number
of degrees of freedom at each node, so it must be set before you issue any D, DK, DA, and similar
commands. Because the ETCONTROL reset is done at the beginning of the solution stage, a message
appears indicating stating that you should change KEYOPT(1) to 1, but the change does not occur
automatically.
For SHELL181, the setting for KEYOPT(3) depends on your problem and your purpose if the element
type is associated with any non-hyperelastic materials. In this case, the program cannot reset it auto-
matically, but it displays a message with the recommended setting (even if you used ETCONTROL,SET,..).
You should reset this manually if the defined criteria matches your problem.
For the coupled-field elements PLANE223, SOLID226, and SOLID227, see the individual element descrip-
tions in the Element Reference for information on ETCONTROL suggestions/resettings.
If an element type is defined but not associated with any material, no suggestions or resets are done
for that element type. The stress states and options are mentioned only when they affect the suggestions
or settings. The suggestions are available in output.
All nonlinear stress/strain data should be input as true-stress/true-(logarithmic-) strain. Accordingly, all
output data is also indicated as true-stress/true-strain. For small strains, the true-stress/true-strain data
and engineering-stress/engineering-strain data are essentially identical.
4.8. Elements Under Linear Perturbation

Most current-technology elements support linear perturbation analysis.
Because linear perturbation is based on a solution at a particular time from a linear or nonlinear analysis,
known as the base (or prior) analysis, the element behaviors are based on the properties and behavior
of the base analysis, but are different from the base analysis.
The following elements can be used in a linear perturbation analysis as well as any downstream analyses:
Table 4.5 Elements Supporting Linear Perturbation Analysis

Category Element Name(s)
Spars LINK180
Beams BEAM188, BEAM189
Pipes PIPE288, PIPE289
2-D Solids PLANE182, PLANE183
3-D Solids SOLID185, SOLID186, SOLID187, SOLID285
Shells SHELL181, SHELL208, SHELL209, SHELL281
Solid-Shell SOLSH190
Interface INTER192, INTER193, INTER194, INTER195
Category Element Name(s)

Contact TARGE169, TARGE170, CONTA171, CONTA172, CONTA173, CONTA174,
CONTA175, CONTA176, CONTA177, CONTA178
Specialty COMBIN14, MASS21, MATRIX27, SURF153, SURF154, SURF156, PRETS179,
MPC184, MESH200, FOLLW201, COMBI214, HSFLD241, HSFLD242
4.8.1. Material Properties of Structural Elements in Linear Perturbation

The base analysis of the linear perturbation can be a nonlinear analysis with nonlinear materials, geo-
metric nonlinearity, or contact elements included in the model. In the linear perturbation analysis, the
geometric nonlinearity at the substep where linear perturbation is initiated is completely inherited in

  of Equation 17–198 in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference. This includes large deformation,
large rotation, and contact effects. The linear perturbation analysis can be understood as an iteration
in the nonlinear base analysis. In the linear perturbation analysis, all of the nonlinear effects are taken
into consideration and “frozen” so that the loading and deformation is linear. The nonlinear effects are
also carried to the stress expansion pass and the following downstream analysis, if any.
4.8.1.1. Specifying Material Behavior in Linear Perturbation

Any nonlinear material must behave linearly in the linear perturbation analysis. For all materials, the
same material properties used in the linear perturbation are also used in the stress-expansion pass and
in all subsequent downstream analyses, if any.
Linear Materials
For pure linear elastic materials used in the base analysis, the same properties are used in the linear
perturbation. Because the material constitutive curve is a line, the tangent is the same as the line. The
material-handling key (MatKey) specified via the PERTURB command is ignored.
Hyperelastic Materials
For hyperelastic materials used in the base analysis, the material properties are assumed to be linear
elastic. The program obtains the material property data (material Jacobian) based on the tangent of
the hyperelastic material's constitutive law at the point where restart or linear perturbation occurs. The
material-handling key (MatKey) specified via the PERTURB command is ignored.
Nonlinear Materials Other Than Hyperelastic Materials
For any nonlinear materials other than hyperelastic materials used in the base analysis, the material
properties are assumed to be linear elastic. The program determines the material properties based on
the material-handling key (MatKey) specified via the PERTURB command, as follows:
• If the default automatic material-handling behavior (MatKey = AUTO) is in effect, the program uses
the linear portion of the nonlinear materials (that is, the parts defined via MP commands) for the linear
perturbation.
• If the tangent option (MatKey = TANGENT) is in effect, the program uses the consistent tangent on
the material constitutive curve for the linear perturbation. The program obtains the consistent tangent
at the point where restart or linear perturbation occurs.
For most materials, the tangent option gives different material properties than those given by the
automatic option. It is possible, however, that they could be identical or very similar if a.) the material
Elements Under Linear Perturbation
is elasto-plastic rate-independent and is unloading (or has neutral loading) at the restart point, or b.)
the material is rate-dependent, depending on the material properties and loading conditions.
4.8.2. Interpretation of Structural Element Results After a Linear Perturbation

Analysis
After a linear perturbation analysis, the reported stress, elastic strain, and thermal strains are the values
due to the linear perturbation analysis; for example, for linear perturbation modal analysis, the stress
and elastic strain are the values due to the mode shapes. As discussed above, the effects of any geo-
metric nonlinearity are taken into consideration in the stress expansion.
Because a linear perturbation analysis can be understood as an extra iteration of a base analysis, all
history-dependent results of the base analysis are inherited in the results of the linear perturbation
analysis. Therefore, any plastic strains, creep strains, swelling strains, and contact results from the base
analysis are available in the results data of the linear perturbation analysis.
The total strain is the sum of all strains (for example, PLNSOL,EPTO). The nonlinear solution quantities
such as equivalent stress, stress state ratio, and plastic state variable (for example, PLESOL,NL,...) are
also available. The one exception is that hydrostatic pressure is the value from the linear perturbation
analysis instead of from the base analysis.
For hyperelastic materials, the strain after the linear perturbation analysis is the elastic strain due to the
linear perturbation analysis, and the total strain is the same as the elastic strain. For plane stress cases,
the direct strain in the Z direction is calculated with the incompressible condition for hyperelastic ma-
terials, and with linear elastic material properties for any material other than hyperelastic materials.
The energy densities (for example, PLESOL,SEND,...) are inherited from the base analysis, except for the
elastic energy density which is energy density calculated in the linear perturbation analysis. However,
the reported strain energy (for example, PRESOL,SENE) includes the elastic part due to linear perturbation
and others inherited from the base analysis (if any).
If the base analysis includes geometric nonlinearity, the Euler angles or the geometric nonlinear effects
of the base analysis are available in the results file. Thus, all the output quantities of the linear perturb-
ation analysis are reported consistently in global, local, and rotated local coordinate systems, as in the
base analysis.
Temperatures saved in the linear perturbation results (Jobname.rstp) are the temperatures which
have been modified during the second phase of the linear perturbation procedure (that is, as the per-
turbation load). This is only applicable to linear perturbation eigenvalue buckling analysis.
4.8.3. Loads, Initial Conditions, and Other Limitations in Linear Perturbation

The following restrictions apply to linear perturbation analysis:
• Perturbation loads cannot be non-mechanical loading, such as initial conditions (INISTATE command)
or swelling effects. These loads cannot be modified or deleted during the linear perturbation analysis.
• For a linear perturbation eigenvalue buckling analysis, a thermal load can be modified by specifying a
new temperature in the second phase of the linear perturbation procedure. In a linear perturbation
buckling analysis, the reference temperature is the temperature from which the linear perturbation
analysis is restarted (and not the reference temperature [TREF] from the base analysis).
• No element can be activated or deactivated using the birth and death feature during the second phase
of a linear perturbation analysis; however, this is allowed in the first phase of linear perturbation.
• Linear perturbation analyses do not support user-defined materials (user subroutine UserMat).
Chapter 5: Elements for Multiphysics Analysis
Many elements are available for creating models for analyses that involve various physics and that are
not strictly structural in nature.

5.1. Elements for Coupled-Physics Analysis
5.2. Elements for Thermal Analysis
5.3. Elements for Acoustic Analysis
5.4. Elements for Electric and Magnetic Analysis
5.1. Elements for Coupled-Physics Analysis

Coupled-field elements are available for combining various types of physics. A coupled-field element
has all necessary degrees of freedom necessary for solving a coupled-field problem. When a coupled-
field element is used, the multiple physics are solved simultaneously (in a single analysis with a single
mesh and model).
The program handles coupling between the physics by calculating the necessary element matrices or
element load vectors.
Coupled-field elements are recommended for strongly coupled physics such as piezoelectric, thermo-
electric, electromagnetic, and highly nonlinear coupled-field analyses that include material and geometric
nonlinearities, temperature-dependent material properties, and multiphysics contact.
The following additional topics are available:

5.1.1. Coupled-Field Element Classifications
5.1.2. Selecting Elements for Coupled-Physics Analysis
For more information, see the Coupled-Field Analysis Guide.
5.1.1. Coupled-Field Element Classifications

The following types of coupled-field elements are available:
• Continuum Elements
– General purpose coupled-field elements
– Coupled pore-pressure mechanical elements
– Thermal-electric link and shell elements
– Magneto-structural element
– Electromagnetic elements
– Fluid elements
• Reduced-Order Elements
• Contact Elements
5.1.2. Selecting Elements for Coupled-Physics Analysis

Continuum Elements
General Purpose Coupled- Degrees of Freedom Coupled-Physics Capabilities
Field
PLANE223 -- Higher-order UX, UY, TEMP, Structural-thermal
quadrilateral VOLT, CONC Piezoresistive
SOLID226 -- Higher-order UX, UY, UZ, TEMP, Electroelastic
hexahedral VOLT, CONC Piezoelectric
Thermal-electric
SOLID227 -- Higher-order Structural-thermo-electric
tetrahedral Thermo-piezoelectric
Thermo-diffusion
Structural-diffusion
Structural-thermo-diffusion
SOLID5 -- Lower-order UX, UY, UZ, TEMP, Structural-thermo-electro-mag-
hexahedral VOLT, MAG netic
Thermo-electro-magnetic
Piezoelectric
PLANE13 -- Lower-order UX, UY, TEMP, Structural-thermo-electro-mag-
quadrilateral VOLT, AZ netic
Piezoelectric
Electromagnetic
SOLID98 -- Higher-order UX, UY, UZ, TEMP, Structural-thermo-electro-mag-
tetrahedral VOLT, MAG netic
Thermo-electro-magnetic
Piezoelectric
Coupled Pore-Pressure Degrees of Free- Coupled-Physics Capabilities
Mechanical dom
CPT212 --Lower-order UX, UY, PRES Pore-pressure
quadrilateral
CPT213 -- Higher-order
quadrilateral
CPT215 -- Lower-order UX, UY, UZ, PRES
hexahedral
CPT216 -- Higher-order
hexahedral
CPT217 -- Higher-order tet-
rahedral
Thermal-Electric Degrees of Free- Coupled-Physics Capabilities
dom
LINK68 -- Lower-order line TEMP, VOLT Thermal-electric
SHELL157 -- Lower-order
shell
Magneto-Structural Degrees of Free- Coupled-Physics Capabilities
dom
Elements for Coupled-Physics Analysis
Continuum Elements
SOLID62 -- Lower-order UX, UY, UZ, AX, AY, Structural-electromagnetic
hexahedral AZ, VOLT
Electromagnetic Degrees of Free- Coupled-Physics Capabilities
dom
PLANE233 -- Higher-order AZ, VOLT, EMF Electromagnetic
quadrilateral Stranded coil
SOLID236 -- Edge-based
mixed-order hexahedral
mixed-order tetrahedral
PLANE53 -- Higher-order AZ, VOLT, CURR, Electromagnetic
quadrilateral EMF Stranded coil
SOLID97 -- Lower-order AX, AY, AZ, VOLT, Circuit-coupled stranded coil
hexahedral CURR, EMF Circuit-coupled electromagnetic
Fluid Degrees of Free- Coupled-Physics Capabilities
dom
FLUID29 -- Lower-order UX, UY, PRES Acoustic fluid-structure interac-
quadrilateral [1 (p. 94)] tion
FLUID30 -- Lower-order UX, UY, UZ, PRES
hexahedral
FLUID116 -- Lower-order PRES, TEMP Thermal-fluid
pipe [2 (p. 94)]
FLUID136 -- Low-order and UX, UY, UZ, PRES Squeeze film fluid-structure in-
high-order quadrilateral teraction
FLUID220 -- Higher-order UX, UY, UZ, PRES Acoustic fluid-structure interac-
hexahedral [1 (p. 94)] tion
FLUID221 -- Higher-order
tetrahedral [1 (p. 94)]
Reduced-Order Elements
TRANS126 -- Electromechan- UX (UY, UZ), VOLT Reduced-order electrostatic-
ical transducer structural
ROM144 -- Reduced-order EMF, VOLT, UX
electrostatic-structural
Contact Elements
CONTA171 -- 2-D lower-or- UX, UY, TEMP, VOLT Structural-thermal
der surface-to-surface con- Structural-thermo-electric
tact Thermal-electric
CONTA172 -- 2-D higher- Structural-electric
order surface-to-surface
contact
CONTA173 -- 3-D lower-or- UX, UY, UZ, TEMP,
der surface-to-surface con- VOLT
tact
Continuum Elements
CONTA174 -- 3-D higher-
contact
CONTA175 -- 2-D / 3-D UX, UY, (UZ), TEMP,
node-to-surface contact VOLT
Use the following table to select coupled-field elements:
1. See Elements for Acoustic Analysis (p. 96) for more information
2. See Elements for Thermal Analysis (p. 94) for more information
For related information, see Selecting Elements for Your Analysis.
5.2. Elements for Thermal Analysis

When performing a thermal analysis, consider the dimensionality of the problem as well as the loads
required. Use the following information to select elements for modeling various regions as well as ele-
ments to apply loads:
5.2.1.Thermal Elements for the Structural Region
5.2.2.Thermal Elements for the Fluid Region
5.2.3.Thermal Loading Elements
5.2.4.Thermal Control Element
5.2.5. Other Elements Useful in a Thermal Analysis
A complex thermal model often has a combination of all or most of the element types described.
For more information, see the Thermal Analysis Guide.
5.2.1. Thermal Elements for the Structural Region

Typically, the solid region should be meshed with 2-D or 3-D continuum elements. 1-D elements serve
to couple these regions. The 0-D element can be used to represent a lumped mass (that is, a reduced-
order model of a continuum region).
Use the following table to select thermal elements for the structural region:
Continuum Application Elements

3-D Modeling homogeneous materials SOLID278 -- Lower-order element that can
and layered solids / composites degenerate
SOLID279 -- Higher-order element that can
degenerate
Modeling homogeneous materials SOLID70 -- Lower-order thermal solid that can
degenerate
SOLID87 -- Higher-order tetrahedral-only
thermal solid
SOLID90 -- Higher-order, accurate thermal
solid that can degenerate
Elements for Thermal Analysis
Continuum Application Elements

2.5-D Analyzing the in-plane temperature SHELL131 -- 3-D lower-order shell with in-
distribution of thin structures such as plane and through-thickness thermal conduc-
plates or shells. [1] tion capability
SHELL132 -- 3-D higher-order shell with in-
plane and through-thickness thermal conduc-
tion
2-D Modeling irregular meshes PLANE35 -- Triangular thermal solid (compat-
ible with PLANE77)
Modeling a plane or an axisymmetric PLANE55 -- Thermal solid with 2-D thermal
ring conduction
Modeling curved boundaries PLANE77 -- Higher-order thermal solid
1-D Conduction link between regions LINK33 -- Uniaxial 3-D conduction bar [2]
Convection link between regions LINK34 -- Uniaxial convection link [2]
Radiation link between regions LINK31 -- Uniaxial radiation link [2]
0-D Representing a body having thermal MASS71 -- Thermal mass point element
capacitance but with no significant
temperature gradients
1. If the model containing the conducting shell element is to be analyzed structurally, use
an equivalent structural shell element (such as SHELL281) instead.
2. In most cases, contact elements can be used in place of this element.
For related information, see Selecting Elements for Your Analysis.
5.2.2. Thermal Elements for the Fluid Region

For the 1-D continuum, use FLUID116, a reduced-order coupled thermal-fluid pipe, to represent fluid
temperature for flow-through pipes/internal channels. The element can be connected to nodes in the
structural region.
5.2.3. Thermal Loading Elements

Two methods are available for applying loads to thermal elements:
5.2.3.1. Using Thermal Surface-Loading Elements
5.2.3.2. Using Contact Elements to Load Thermal Models
5.2.3.1. Using Thermal Surface-Loading Elements

In a thermal model, the surface loads can consist of convection, heat flux, or radiation. Although you
can apply the loads directly on the continuum elements, it is more convenient to apply them via surface-
effect elements, which are overlaid onto other thermal elements.
Use these surface-effect elements to apply convection, heat flux, and radiation (to a point) on solid re-
gions:
• SURF151 -- 2-D thermal surface effect

• SURF152 -- 3-D thermal surface effect
Use these surface-radiosity elements to apply grey body radiation (where view factors are unknown):
• SURF251 -- 2-D radiosity surface

• SURF252 -- 3-D radiosity surface
5.2.3.2. Using Contact Elements to Load Thermal Models

Besides surface loads, it is also possible to load thermal models via contact elements.
When two or more structural regions are in close vicinity or contact, it is sometimes necessary to account
for convection, conduction, or radiation between the regions. Frictional forces between the contacting
surfaces can also be a source of heat generation.
Use these contact elements between solid regions:
2-D Contact Elements
• CONTA171 -- Lower-order surface-to-surface contact element pasted on the surface of a region

• CONTA172 -- Higher-order surface-to-surface contact element pasted on the surface of a region
• TARGE169 -- Target segment, used with CONTA171 and CONTA172, which must be pasted on the target
region
3-D Contact Elements
• CONTA173 -- Lower-order surface-to-surface contact element pasted on the surface of a region

• CONTA174 -- Higher-order surface-to-surface contact element pasted on the surface of a region
• TARGE170 -- Target segment, used with CONTA173 and CONTA174, which must be pasted on the target
region
A special 2-D/3-D node-to-surface contact element, CONTA175, is also available. You can use it with
either TARGE169 or TARGE170.
5.2.4. Thermal Control Element

Use the COMBIN37 control element to enable or disable heat flow between two points when the tem-
perature (or other control parameters) reach a specified threshold value.
5.2.5. Other Elements Useful in a Thermal Analysis

In addition to the thermal and related loading elements described here, also consider coupled-physics
elements, which can couple thermal and other physics.
You can also create a custom element via USER300 to model special physics, or combine a group of
linear thermal elements into a MATRIX50 superelement for greater solution efficiency.
5.3. Elements for Acoustic Analysis

An acoustic analysis calculates either the propagation properties of pure acoustic waves in the given
environment or the coupled acoustic structural interaction (FSI).
Support is available for time-harmonic, modal and transient acoustic analysis.
Use the following fluid elements to simulate 2-D acoustic or coupled acoustic problems:
Elements for Electric and Magnetic Analysis
• FLUID29 -- Axisymmetric harmonic acoustic fluid

• FLUID129 -- Infinite acoustic
This element is a companion to FLUID29. It is used to envelope a model made of FLUID29 finite
elements.
Use these fluid elements for 3-D simulation:
• FLUID30 -- Acoustic fluid

• FLUID220 -- Higher-order acoustic fluid 20-node solid
• FLUID221 -- Higher-order acoustic fluid 10-node solid
For more information, see "Acoustics" in the Fluids Analysis Guide.
5.4. Elements for Electric and Magnetic Analysis

Elements available for modeling electromagnetic phenomena are classified as follows:
• Continuum:
Electrostatic
Electric
Magnetic
Electromagnetic
Infinite
• Source
• Circuit
• Contact
Use the following table to select an appropriate element for your application. For more details about
the elements used for electromagnetic analyses, see the Low-Frequency Electromagnetic Analysis Guide.
Electric and Magnetic Analyses

Electrostatic Degrees of Freedom Application
PLANE121 -- Higher-order VOLT Charge-based static and time-
quadrilateral harmonic quasistatic electric
SOLID122 -- High-order field analyses
hexahedral
SOLID123 -- High-order
tetrahedral
Electric Degrees of Free- Application
dom
PLANE230 -- Higher-order VOLT Current-based static, time-tran-
quadrilateral sient and time-harmonic quasi-
SOLID231 -- High-order static electric field analyses
hexahedral
SOLID232 -- High-order
tetrahedral
Electric and Magnetic Analyses

Magnetic Degrees of Free- Application
dom
SOLID96 -- Low-order MAG Magnetostatic analysis
hexahedral
Electromagnetic Degrees of Free- Application
dom
PLANE53 -- Higher-order AZ, VOLT, CURR, Static, transient or harmonic
quadrilateral EMF electromagnetic, stranded coil,
SOLID97 -- Lower-order AX, AY, AZ, VOLT, circuit-coupled stranded coil,
hexahedral CURR, EMF circuit-coupled electromagnetic
analyses
PLANE233 -- Higher-order AZ, VOLT, EMF Static, transient or harmonic
quadrilateral electromagnetic and stranded
SOLID236 -- Edge-based coil analyses
mixed-order hexahedral
mixed-order tetrahedral
Infinite Degrees of Free- Application
dom
INFIN110 AZ, VOLT Open boundary for an unboun-
INFIN111 MAG, AX, AY, AZ, ded electric or magnetic field
VOLT problem
Source Degrees of Free- Application
dom
SOURC36 --- Current source primitive (coil,
bar, arc) for magnetostatic
analysis
Circuit Degrees of Free- Application

dom
CIRCU94 VOLT, CURR Resistor, capacitor, inductor,
current source, voltage source
for a piezoelectric-circuit and
charge-based transient and
harmonic analyses
CIRCU124 VOLT, CURR, EMF Resistor, capacitor, inductor,
current source, voltage source,
stranded coil, 2-D massive coil,
3-D massive coil, mutual induct-
or, controlled sources for a
current-based static, transient
and harmonic analyses
CIRCU125 VOLT Diode for electric circuit analys-
is
Contact Degrees of Free- Application
dom
Elements for Electric and Magnetic Analysis
CONTA171 -- 2-D lower-or- AZ, VOLT Electric and magnetic contact

der surface-to-surface con-
tact
contact
CONTA173 -- 3-D lower-or- MAG, VOLT
der surface-to-surface con-
tact
contact
CONTA175 -- 2-D / 3-D AZ, MAG,VOLT
node-to-surface contact
Chapter 6: Element Library
Following are descriptions of each element, which appear in numerical order.
Descriptions common to several elements appear in separate sections of General Element Features (p. 43)
and are referenced where applicable.
Please read About This Reference (p. 1) and General Element Features (p. 43) before examining the
element descriptions in Part I:Element Library (p. 103).
More detailed information about each element is available in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference,
which describes how the element input items (such as the real constants, material properties, KEYOPT
switches, etc.) are used to produce the element output.
Element Library
SOLID5
MP ME <> <> <> <> <> <> EM <> <> PP <> EME MFS
Product Restrictions
SOLID5 Element Description

Although this legacy element is available for use in your analysis, ANSYS recommends using a current-tech-
nology element such as SOLID226.
SOLID5 has a 3-D magnetic, thermal, electric, piezoelectric, and structural field capability with limited
coupling between the fields. The element has eight nodes with up to six degrees of freedom at each
node. Scalar potential formulations (reduced RSP, difference DSP, or general GSP) are available for
modeling magnetostatic fields in a static analysis. When used in structural and piezoelectric analyses,
SOLID5 has large deflection and stress stiffening capabilities. See SOLID5 in the Mechanical APDL Theory
Reference for more details about this element. Coupled field elements with similar field capabilities are
PLANE13, SOLID62, and SOLID98.
Figure 1 SOLID5 Geometry
4
P M O,P
5
O
N
I K,L
6
J
M
N (Prism Option)
3
K
Z 2
I
Y 1
X J
SOLID5 Input Data

The geometry, node locations, and the coordinate system for this element are shown in Figure 1 (p. 105).
The element is defined by eight nodes and the material properties. The type of units (MKS or user
defined) is specified through the EMUNIT command. EMUNIT also determines the value of MUZERO.
The EMUNIT defaults are MKS units and MUZERO = 4 π x 10-7 Henries/meter. In addition to MUZERO,
orthotropic relative permeability is specified through the MURX, MURY, and MURZ material property
labels.
MGXX, MGYY, and MGZZ represent vector components of the coercive force for permanent magnet
materials. The magnitude of the coercive force is the square root of the sum of the squares of the
components. The direction of polarization is determined by the components MGXX, MGYY, and MGZZ.
SOLID5
Permanent magnet polarization directions correspond to the element coordinate directions. Orthotropic
material directions correspond to the element coordinate directions. The element coordinate system
orientation is as described in Coordinate Systems (p. 56). Nonlinear magnetic, piezoelectric, and aniso-
tropic elastic properties are entered with the TB command as described in "Material Models" in the
Material Reference. Nonlinear orthotropic magnetic properties may be specified with a combination of
a B-H curve and linear relative permeability. The B-H curve will be used in each element coordinate
direction where a zero value of relative permeability is specified. Only one B-H curve may be specified
per material.
Various combinations of nodal loading are available for this element (depending upon the KEYOPT(1)
value). Nodal loads are defined with the D and the F commands. With the D command, the Lab variable
corresponds to the degree of freedom (UX, UY, UZ, TEMP, VOLT, MAG) and VALUE corresponds to the
value (displacements, temperature, voltage, scalar magnetic potential). With the F command, the Lab
variable corresponds to the force (FX, FY, FZ, HEAT, AMPS, FLUX) and VALUE corresponds to the value
(force, heat flow, current or charge, magnetic flux).
Element loads are described in Nodal Loading (p. 49). Pressure, convection or heat flux (but not both),
radiation, and Maxwell force flags may be input on the element faces indicated by the circled numbers
in Figure 1 (p. 105) using the SF and SFE commands. Positive pressures act into the element. Surfaces
at which magnetic forces are to be calculated may be identified by using the MXWF label on the surface
load commands (no value is required.) A maxwell stress tensor calculation is performed at these surfaces
to obtain the magnetic forces. These forces are applied in solution as structural loads. The surface flag
should be applied to "air" elements adjacent to the body for which forces are required. Deleting the
MXWF specification removes the flag.
The body loads, temperature, heat generation rate and magnetic virtual displacement may be input
based on their value at the element's nodes or as a single element value [BF and BFE]. When the tem-
perature degree of freedom is active (KEYOPT(1) = 0,1 or 8), applied body force temperatures [BF, BFE]
are ignored. In general, unspecified nodal values of temperature and heat generation rate default to
the uniform value specified with the BFUNIF or TUNIF commands. Calculated Joule heating (JHEAT) is
applied in subsequent iterations as heat generation rate.
If the temperature degree of freedom is present, the calculated temperatures override any input nodal
temperatures.
Air elements in which Local Jacobian forces are to be calculated may be identified by using nodal values
of 1 and 0 for the MVDI label [BF]. See the Low-Frequency Electromagnetic Analysis Guide for details.
These forces are not applied in solution as structural loads.
Current for the scalar magnetic potential options is defined with the SOURC36 element the command
macro RACE, or through electromagnetic coupling. The various types of scalar magnetic potential
solution options are defined with the MAGOPT command.
A summary of the element input is given in "SOLID5 Input Summary" (p. 106). A general description of
element input is given in Element Input (p. 43).
SOLID5 Input Summary

Nodes
I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P
SOLID5
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, UZ, TEMP, VOLT, MAG if KEYOPT (1) = 0

TEMP, VOLT, MAG if KEYOPT (1) = 1
UX, UY, UZ if KEYOPT (1) = 2
UX, UY, UZ, VOLT if KEYOPT(1) = 3
TEMP if KEYOPT (1) = 8
VOLT if KEYOPT (1) = 9
MAG if KEYOPT (1) = 10
Real Constants
None
Material Properties
EX, EY, EZ, (PRXY, PRYZ, PRXZ or NUXY, NUYZ, NUXZ),

ALPX, ALPY, ALPZ (or CTEX, CTEY, CTEZ or THSX, THSY, THSZ),
DENS, GXY, GYZ, GXZ, ALPD, BETD, KXX, KYY, KZZ, C,
ENTH, MUZERO, MURX, MURY, MURZ, RSVX, RSVY, RSVZ,
MGXX, MGYY, MGZZ, PERX, PERY, PERZ, plus BH, ANEL, and PIEZ data tables (see "Material Models"
in the Material Reference)
Surface Loads
Pressure, Convection or Heat Flux (but not both), Radiation (using Lab = RDSF), and Maxwell Force
Flags --
face 1 (J-I-L-K), face 2 (I-J-N-M), face 3 (J-K-O-N),

face 4 (K-L-P-O), face 5 (L-I-M-P), face 6 (M-N-O-P)
Body Loads
Temperatures --
T(I), T(J), T(K), T(L), T(M), T(N), T(O), T(P)
Heat Generations --
HG(I), HG(J), HG(K), HG(L), HG(M), HG(N), HG(O), HG(P)
Magnetic Virtual Displacements --
VD(I), VD(J), VD(K), VD(L), VD(M), VD(N), VD(O), VD(P)
Electric Field --
EFX, EFY, EFZ. See "SOLID5 Assumptions and Restrictions" (p. 112).
Special Features
Adaptive descent
Birth and death
Large deflection
Stress stiffening
KEYOPT(1)
Element degrees of freedom:
0 --
UX, UY, UZ, TEMP, VOLT, MAG
1 --
TEMP, VOLT, MAG
SOLID5
2 --
UX, UY, UZ
3 --
UX, UY, UZ, VOLT
8 --
TEMP
9 --
VOLT
10 --
MAG
KEYOPT(3)
Extra shapes:
0 --
Include extra shapes
1 --
Do not include extra shapes
KEYOPT(5)
Extra element output:
0 --
Basic element printout
2 --
Nodal stress or magnetic field printout
SOLID5 Output Data

The solution output associated with the element is in two forms
• Nodal degree of freedom results included in the overall nodal solution

• Additional element output as shown in Table 1: SOLID5 Element Output Definitions (p. 109).
Several items are illustrated in Figure 2 (p. 109). The element stress directions are parallel to the element
coordinate system. The reaction forces, heat flow, current, and magnetic flux at the nodes can be printed
with the OUTPR command. A general description of solution output is given in Solution Output (p. 50).
See the Basic Analysis Guide for ways to view results.
SOLID5
Figure 2 SOLID5 Element Output
P
O
SZ, BZ, etc.
M N

L SY, BY, etc.
K
Z SX, BX, etc.
I
Y
X J
The Element Output Definitions table uses the following notation:
A colon (:) in the Name column indicates that the item can be accessed by the Component Name
method (ETABLE, ESOL). The O column indicates the availability of the items in the file Jobname.OUT.
The R column indicates the availability of the items in the results file.
In either the O or R columns, “Y” indicates that the item is always available, a number refers to a table
footnote that describes when the item is conditionally available, and “-” indicates that the item is not
available.
Table 1 SOLID5 Element Output Definitions

Name Definition O R
EL Element Number Y Y
NODES Element nodes - I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P Y Y
MAT Element material number Y Y
VOLU: Element volume Y Y
XC, YC, ZC Location where results are reported Y 3
PRES P1 at nodes J, I, L, K; P2 at I, J, N, M; P3 at J, K, O, N; Y Y
P4 at K, L, P, O; P5 at L, I, M, P; P6 at M, N, O, P
TEMP Input Temperatures: T(I), T(J), T(K), T(L), T(M), T(N), Y Y
T(O), T(P)
HGEN Input Heat Generations: HG(I), HG(J), HG(K), HG(L), Y Y
HG(M), HG(N), HG(O), HG(P)
S:X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ Component stresses 1 1
S:1, 2, 3 Principal stresses 1 1
S:INT Stress intensity 1 1
S:EQV Equivalent stress 1 1
EPEL:X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, Elastic strains 1 1
XZ
EPEL:1, 2, 3 Principal elastic strains 1 -
EPEL:EQV Equivalent elastic strains [4] 1 1
SOLID5
Name Definition O R
EPTH:X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, Thermal strains 1 1
XZ
EPTH:EQV Equivalent thermal strains [4] 1 1
LOC Output location (X, Y, Z) 1 1
MUX, MUY, MUZ Magnetic permeability 1 1
H: X, Y, Z Magnetic field intensity components 1 1
H:SUM Vector magnitude of H 1 1
B:X, Y, Z Magnetic flux density components 1 1
B:SUM Vector magnitude of B 1 1
FJB Lorentz magnetic force components (X, Y, Z) 1 -
FMX Maxwell magnetic force components (X, Y, Z) 1 -
FVW Virtual work force components (X, Y, Z) 1 1
FMAG:X, Y, Z Combined (FJB or FMX) force components - 1
EF:X, Y, Z Electric field components (X, Y, Z) 1 1
EF:SUM Vector magnitude of EF 1 1
JS:X, Y, Z Source current density components 1 1
JSSUM Vector magnitude of JS 1 1
JHEAT: Joule heat generation per unit volume 1 1
D:X, Y, Z Electric flux density components 1 1
D:SUM Vector magnitude of D 1 1
UE, UD, UM Elastic (UE), dielectric (UD), and electromechanical 1 1
coupled (UM) energies
TG:X, Y, Z Thermal gradient components 1 1
TG:SUM Vector magnitude of TG 1 1
TF:X, Y, Z Thermal flux components 1 1
TF:SUM Vector magnitude of TF (heat flow rate/unit cross- 1 1
section area)
FACE Face label 2 2
AREA Face area 2 2
NODES Face nodes 2 -
HFILM Film coefficient at each node of face 2 -
TBULK Bulk temperature at each node of face 2 -
TAVG Average face temperature 2 2
HEAT RATE Heat flow rate across face by convection 2 2
HEAT RATE/AREA Heat flow rate per unit area across face by convec- 2 -
tion
HFLUX Heat flux at each node of face 2 -
HFAVG Average film coefficient of the face 2 2
TBAVG Average face bulk temperature - 2
SOLID5
Name Definition O R
HFLXAVG Heat flow rate per unit area across face caused by - 2
input heat flux
1. Element solution at the centroid printed out only if calculated (based on input data).
2. Nodal stress or magnetic field solution (only if KEYOPT(5) = 2). The solution results are repeated at
each node and only if a surface load is input.
3. Available only at centroid as a *GET item.
4. The equivalent strains use an effective Poisson's ratio: for elastic and thermal this value is set by the
user (MP,PRXY).
Table 2: SOLID5 Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 111) lists output available through the ETABLE command
using the Sequence Number method. The following notation is used in Table 2: SOLID5 Item and Sequence
Numbers (p. 111):
Name
output quantity as defined in the Table 1: SOLID5 Element Output Definitions (p. 109)
Item
predetermined Item label for ETABLE command
E
sequence number for single-valued or constant element data
I,J,...,P
sequence number for data at nodes I,J,...,P
FCn
sequence number for solution items for element Face n
Table 2 SOLID5 Item and Sequence Numbers

Output ETABLE and ESOL Command Input
Quant- Item E I J K L M N O P
ity
Name
P1 SMISC - 2 1 4 3 - - - -
P2 SMISC - 5 6 - - 8 7 - -
P3 SMISC - - 9 10 - - 12 11 -
P4 SMISC - - - 13 14 - - 16 15
P5 SMISC - 18 - - 17 19 - - 20
P6 SMISC - - - - - 21 22 23 24
MUX NMISC 1 - - - - - - - -
MUY NMISC 2 - - - - - - - -
MUZ NMISC 3 - - - - - - - -
FVWX NMISC 4 - - - - - - - -
FVWY NMISC 5 - - - - - - - -
FVWZ NMISC 6 - - - - - - - -
SOLID5

ity
Name
FVWSUM NMISC 7 - - - - - - - -
UE NMISC 16 - - - - - - - -
UD NMISC 17 - - - - - - - -
UM NMISC 18 - - - - - - - -

Quantity FC1 FC2 FC3 FC4 FC5 FC6
Name Item
AREA NMISC 19 25 31 37 43 49
HFAVG NMISC 20 26 32 38 44 50
TAVG NMISC 21 27 33 39 45 51
TBAVG NMISC 22 28 34 40 46 52
HEAT RATE NMISC 23 29 35 41 47 53
HFLXAVG NMISC 24 30 36 42 48 54
SOLID5 Assumptions and Restrictions

• The element requires an iterative solution for field coupling (displacement, temperature, electric, mag-
netic, but not piezoelectric)
• When using SOLID5 with SOURC36 elements, the source elements must be placed so that the resulting
Hs field fulfills boundary conditions for the total field.
• The element must not have a zero volume or a zero length side. This occurs most frequently when the
element is not numbered properly.
• Elements may be numbered either as shown in Figure 1 (p. 105) or may have the planes IJKL and MNOP
interchanged.
• A prism shaped element may be formed by defining duplicate node numbers as described in Degenerated
Shape Elements (p. 39).
• The difference scalar magnetic potential option is restricted to singly-connected permeable regions, so
that as µ → ∞ in these regions, the resulting field H → 0. The reduced scalar and general scalar potential
options do not have this restriction.
• At a free surface of the element (i.e., not adjacent to another element and not subjected to a boundary
constraint), the normal component of magnetic flux density (B) is assumed to be zero.
• Temperatures and heat generation rates, if internally calculated, include any user defined heat generation
rates.
• The thermal, electrical, magnetic, and structural terms are coupled through an iterative procedure.
• Large deflection capabilities available for KEYOPT(1) = 2 and 3 are not available for KEYOPT(1) = 0.
• Stress stiffening is available for KEYOPT(1) = 0, 2, and 3.
• Do not constrain all VOLT DOFs to the same value in a piezoelectric analysis (KEYOPT(1) = 0 or 3). Perform
a pure structural analysis instead (KEYOPT(1) = 2).
SOLID5
• This element may not be compatible with other elements with the VOLT degree of freedom. To be
compatible, the elements must have the same reaction solution for the VOLT DOF. Elements that have
an electric charge reaction solution must all have the same electric charge reaction sign. For more in-
formation, see Element Compatibility in the Low-Frequency Electromagnetic Analysis Guide.
• The electric field body load is not used during solution and is applicable only to POST1 charged particle
tracing.
• In an MSP analysis, avoid using a closed domain and use an open domain, closed with natural flux
parallel boundary conditions on the MAG degree of freedom, or infinite elements. If you use a closed
domain, you may see incorrect results when the formulation is applied using SOLID5, SOLID96, or SOLID98
elements and the boundary conditions are not satisfied by the Hs field load calculated by the Biot-
Savart procedure based on SOURC36 current source primitive input.
• If you used the MAG degree of freedom, you cannot restart a job in ANSYS Mechanical using Job-
name.DB and Jobname.ESAV files that were created by ANSYS Multiphysics.
• This element cannot be used in a distributed solution.
SOLID5 Product Restrictions

When used in the product(s) listed below, the stated product-specific restrictions apply to this element
in addition to the general assumptions and restrictions given in the previous section.
ANSYS Mechanical
Unless the Emag option is enabled, the following restrictions apply:
• This element does not have magnetic capability.

• The MAG degree of freedom is not active.
• KEYOPT(1) cannot be set to 10. If KEYOPT(1) = 0 (default) or 1, the MAG degree of freedom is inactive.
• The magnetic material properties (MUZERO, MUR_, MG__, and the BH data table) are not allowed.
• The Maxwell force flags and magnetic virtual displacements body loads are not applicable.
ANSYS Emag
• This element has only magnetic and electric field capability, and does not have structural, thermal,
or piezoelectric capability.
• The only active degrees of freedom are MAG and VOLT.
• KEYOPT(1) settings of 0, 1, 2, 3 and 8 are invalid.
• The only allowable material properties are the magnetic and electric properties (MUZRO through
PERZ, plus the BH data table).
• The only applicable surface loads are Maxwell force flags. The only applicable body loads are tem-
peratures (for material property evaluation only) and magnetic virtual displacements.
• The element does not have stress stiffening or birth and death features.
• KEYOPT(3) is not applicable.
INFIN9
MP ME <> <> <> <> <> <> EM <> <> PP <> EME <>
INFIN9 Element Description

nology element such as INFIN110.
INFIN9 is used to model an open boundary of a 2-D planar unbounded field problem. The element has
two nodes with a magnetic vector potential or temperature degree of freedom at each node. The en-
closed element type can be the PLANE13 or PLANE53 magnetic elements, or the PLANE55, PLANE77,
and PLANE35 thermal elements. With the magnetic degree of freedom (AZ) the analysis may be linear
or nonlinear, static or dynamic. With the thermal degree of freedom steady-state or transient analysis
(linear or nonlinear) may be done. See INFIN9 in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for more details
about this element.
Figure 1 INFIN9 Geometry
∞
Semi-infinite
Boundary Element Domain
Finite
∞
Element J x
Y Domain
INFIN9 Input Data

The geometry, node locations, and the coordinate system for this element are shown in Figure 1 (p. 115),
and a typical application is shown in Figure 2 (p. 117). The element is defined by two nodes and the
material properties. Nonzero material properties must be defined. The element x-axis is oriented along
the length of the element from node I toward node J.
The coefficient matrix of this boundary element is, in general, unsymmetric. The matrix is made sym-
metric by averaging the off-diagonal terms to take advantage of a symmetric solution with a slight
decrease in accuracy. KEYOPT(2) can be used to prevent an unsymmetric matrix from being made
symmetric.
A summary of the element input is given in "INFIN9 Input Summary" (p. 116). A general description of
INFIN9
INFIN9 Input Summary

Nodes
I, J
Degrees of Freedom
AZ if KEYOPT (1) = 0
TEMP if KEYOPT (1) = 1
Real Constants
None
Material Properties
MUZRO if KEYOPT (1) = 0 (has default value for MKS units or can be set with the EMUNIT command)
KXX if KEYOPT (1) = 1
Surface Loads
None
Body Loads
None
Special Features
None
KEYOPT(1)
Element degree of freedom:
0 --
Magnetic option (AZ degree of freedom)
1 --
Thermal option (TEMP degree of freedom)
KEYOPT(2)
Coefficient matrix formation:
0 --
Make the coefficient matrix symmetric
1 --
Coefficient matrix is used as generated (symmetric or unsymmetric, depending on the problem)
INFIN9 Output Data

The boundary element has no output of its own since it is used only to provide a semi-infinite boundary
condition to a model consisting of other elements.
INFIN9
Figure 2 INFIN9 Element Usage
Magnetic Core (PLANE13) Air (PLANE13)
Boundary Elements (INFIN9)
INFIN9 Assumptions and Restrictions

• The boundary element assumes a straight line segment, the length of which must be nonzero.
• The semi-infinite sector is assumed to be bound on three sides by the boundary element, by a semi-
infinite radial line from the global coordinate system origin through node I, and by a semi-infinite radial
line from the global coordinate system origin through node J. The boundary element should be as
normal as possible to the radial lines.
• Acute or wide intersection angles should be avoided by "filling-in" the model with the other elements
so that the line of boundary elements around the model is smooth and concave when viewed from the
global coordinate system origin.
• The boundary element must lie "against" an enclosed element (that is, share the same nodes).
• The origin of the global coordinate system must be inside the model and as centrally located as possible.
• The line of boundary elements should be located away from the region of interest of the enclosed ele-
ments for better accuracy.
• The line of boundary elements need not totally surround the model.
• The exterior semi-infinite domain is assumed to be homogeneous, isotropic, and linear without containing
any sources or sinks.
• An axisymmetric option is not available.
• The element cannot be deactivated with the EKILL command.
• The element assumes that the degree of freedom (DOF) value at infinity is always zero (0.0). That is, the
DOF value at infinity is not affected by TUNIF, D, or other load commands.
• When used in a model with the higher-order elements PLANE53, PLANE77, or PLANE35, the midside
nodes of these elements must be removed at the interface with INFIN9 [EMID].
• If KEYOPT(2) = 1, the matrices are presumed to be unsymmetric.
INFIN9
INFIN9 Product Restrictions

ANSYS Mechanical
• This element does not have magnetic field capability.

• The AZ degree of freedom is not active.
• KEYOPT(1) defaults to 1 (TEMP) instead of 0 and cannot be changed.
• The material property MUZRO is not allowed.
ANSYS Emag
• This element has only magnetic field capability, and does not have thermal capability.
• The only active degree of freedom is AZ.
• The only allowable material property is MUZERO.
• KEYOPT(1) can only be set to 0 (default).
LINK11
Linear Actuator
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS
LINK11 Element Description

LINK11 may be used to model hydraulic cylinders and other applications undergoing large rotations.
The element is a uniaxial tension-compression element with three degrees of freedom at each node:
translations in the nodal x, y, and z directions. No bending or twist loads are considered. See LINK11 in
the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for more details about this element.
Figure 1 LINK11 Geometry
Lo + MSTROKE
K
I J
M/2 M/2
C
LINK11 Input Data

The geometry and node locations for the element are shown in Figure 1 (p. 119). The element is defined
by two nodes, a stiffness, viscous damping, and mass. The element initial length Lo and orientation are
determined from the node locations.
Element loads are described in Nodal Loading (p. 49). The stroke (length) is defined through the surface
load input using the PRES label. The stroke is relative to the zero force position of the element. A force
may be defined in the same manner as an alternate to the stroke.
A summary of the element input is given below. A general description of element input is given in
Element Input (p. 43).
LINK11 Input Summary

Nodes
I, J
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, UZ
Real Constants
K - Stiffness (force/length)
C - Viscous damping coefficient (force*time/length)
M - Mass (force*time2/length)
Material Properties
BETD, ALPD
LINK11
Surface Loads
Pressures --
face 1 - Stroke
face 2 - Axial Force
Body Loads
None
Special Features
Birth and death

Large deflection
Stress stiffening
KEYOPTs
None
LINK11 Output Data

The solution output associated with the element is in two forms:
• Nodal displacements included in the overall nodal displacement solution

• Additional element output as shown in Table 1: LINK11 Element Output Definitions (p. 120).
A general description of solution output is given in Solution Output (p. 50). See the Basic Analysis Guide
for ways to view results.
available.
Table 1 LINK11 Element Output Definitions

Name Definition O R
NODES Nodes - I, J Y Y
ILEN Initial element length Y Y
CLEN Current element length (this time step) Y Y
FORCE Axial force (spring force) Y Y
DFORCE Damping force Y Y
STROKE Applied stroke (element load) Y Y
MSTROKE Measured stroke Y Y
LINK11
Table 2: LINK11 Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 121) lists output available through the ETABLE command
using the Sequence Number method. The following notation is used in Table 2: LINK11 Item and Sequence
Numbers (p. 121):
Name
output quantity as defined in Table 1: LINK11 Element Output Definitions (p. 120)
Item
E
Table 2 LINK11 Item and Sequence Numbers
Output ETABLE and

Quant- ESOL Command
ity Input
Name Item E
FORCE SMISC 1
ILEN NMISC 1
CLEN NMISC 2
STROKE NMISC 3
MSTROKE NMISC 4
DFORCE NMISC 5
LINK11 Assumptions and Restrictions

• The element must not have a zero length.
• The element assumes a straight line, axially loaded at the ends.
• A twist (torsion) about the element x-axis (defined from node I to node J) has no effect.
• No bending of the element is considered, as in a pin-jointed structure.
• The mass is equally divided between the nodes.
• Only the lumped mass matrix is available.
• Surface load pressure indicators are not displayed for element or node plots.
LINK11 Product Restrictions

There are no product-specific restrictions for this element.
PLANE13
MP ME <> <> <> <> <> <> EM <> <> PP <> EME MFS
PLANE13 Element Description

nology element such as PLANE223.
PLANE13 has a 2-D magnetic, thermal, electrical, piezoelectric, and structural field capability with limited
coupling between the fields. PLANE13 is defined by four nodes with up to four degrees of freedom per
node. The element has nonlinear magnetic capability for modeling B-H curves or permanent magnet
demagnetization curves. PLANE13 has large deflection and stress stiffening capabilities. When used in
purely structural analyses, PLANE13 also has large strain capabilities. See PLANE13 in the Mechanical
APDL Theory Reference for more details about this element. Other coupled-field elements are SOLID5,
SOLID98, and SOLID62.
Figure 1 PLANE13 Geometry
3 K K,L
L
4 I
Element coordinate
system (shown for 2 J
KEYOPT(4) = 1) (Triangle option - not
x
recommended for structural
I
applications)
1 J
X
PLANE13 Input Data

The element input data includes four nodes and magnetic, thermal, electrical, and structural material
properties. The type of units (MKS or user defined) is specified through the EMUNIT command. EMUNIT
also determines the value of MUZERO. The EMUNIT defaults are MKS units and MUZRO = 4 π x 10-7
henries/meter. In addition to MUZERO, orthotropic relative permeability is specified through the MURX
and MURY material property labels.
MGXX and MGYY represent vector components of the coercive force for permanent magnet materials.
The magnitude of the coercive force is the square root of the sum of the squares of the components.
The direction of polarization is determined by the components MGXX and MGYY. Permanent magnet
polarization and orthotropic material directions correspond to the element coordinate directions. The
element coordinate system orientation is as described in Coordinate Systems (p. 56). Nonlinear magnetic
B-H, piezoelectric, and anisotropic elastic properties are entered with the TB command as described in
"Material Models" in the Material Reference. Nonlinear orthotropic magnetic properties may be specified
with a combination of a B-H curve and linear relative permeability. The B-H curve will be used in each
PLANE13
element coordinate direction where a zero value of relative permeability is specified. Only one B-H curve
may be specified per material.
value). Nodal loads are defined with the D and the F commands. Nodal forces, if any, should be input
per unit of depth for a plane analysis and on a full 360° basis for an axisymmetric analysis.
at which magnetic forces are to be calculated are identified by using the MXWF label on the surface
load commands (no value is required). A maxwell stress tensor calculation is performed at these surfaces
Body loads - temperature, heat generation rate, and magnetic virtual displacement - may be input at
the element's nodes or as a single element value [BF, BFE]. Source current density loads may be applied
to an area [BFA] or input as an element value [BFE]. When the temperature degree of freedom is active
(KEYOPT(1) = 2 or 4), applied body force temperatures [BF, BFE] are ignored. In general, unspecified
nodal temperatures and heat generation rates default to the uniform value specified with the BFUNIF
or TUNIF command. Heat generation from Joule heating is applied in Solution as thermal loading for
static and transient analyses.
temperatures.
Air elements in which local Jacobian forces are to be calculated may be identified by using nodal values
A summary of the element input is given in "PLANE13 Input Summary" (p. 124). A general description of
element input is given in Element Input (p. 43). For axisymmetric applications see Harmonic Axisymmetric
Elements (p. 76).
PLANE13 Input Summary

Nodes
I, J, K, L
Degrees of Freedom
AZ if KEYOPT (1) = 0
TEMP if KEYOPT (1 ) = 2
UX, UY if KEYOPT (1) = 3
UX, UY, TEMP, AZ if KEYOPT (1) = 4
VOLT, AZ if KEYOPT (1) = 6
UX, UY, VOLT if KEYOPT (1) = 7
Real Constants
None
Material Properties
PLANE13
ALPX, ALPY, ALPZ, (or CTEX, CTEY,CTEZ or THSX, THSY,THSZ),

DENS, GXY, BETD, ALPD,
KXX, KYY, C, ENTH, MUZERO, MURX,
MURY, RSVZ, MGXX, MGYY, PERX, PERY,
plus BH, ANEL, and Piezoelectric data tables (see "Material Models" in the Material Reference)
Surface Loads
Flags--
face 1 (J-I), face 2 (K-J), face 3 (L-K), face 4 (I-L)
Body Loads
Temperatures --
T(I), T(J), T(K), T(L)
Heat Generations --
HG(I), HG(J), HG(K), HG(L)
Magnetic Virtual Displacements --
VD(I), VD(J), VD(K), VD(L)
Source Current Density --
spare, spare, JSZ(I), PHASE(I), spare, spare,

JSZ(J), PHASE(J), spare, spare, JSZ(K), PHASE(K),
spare, spare, JSZ(L), PHASE(L)
Special Features
Adaptive descent
Birth and death
Large deflection
Large strain
Stress stiffening
KEYOPT(1)
0 --
AZ degree of freedom
2 --
TEMP degree of freedom
3 --
UX, UY degrees of freedom
4 --
UX, UY, TEMP, AZ degrees of freedom
6 --
VOLT, AZ degrees of freedom
7 --
UX, UY, VOLT degrees of freedom
KEYOPT(2)
Extra shapes:
PLANE13
0 --
Include extra shapes
1 --
Do not include extra shapes
KEYOPT(3)
Element behavior:
0 --
Plane strain (with structural degrees of freedom)
1 --
Axisymmetric
2 --
Plane stress (with structural degrees of freedom)
KEYOPT(4)
Element coordinate system defined:
0 --
Element coordinate system is parallel to the global coordinate system
1 --
Element coordinate system is based on the element I-J side
KEYOPT(5)
0 --
1 --
Repeat basic solution for all integration points
2 --
Nodal stress printout
PLANE13 Output Data

• Nodal degrees of freedom included in the overall nodal solution
• Additional element output as shown in Table 1: PLANE13 Element Output Definitions (p. 127).
Several items are illustrated in Figure 2 (p. 127). The element output directions are parallel to the element
coordinate system. A general description of solution output is given in Solution Output (p. 50). See the
Basic Analysis Guide for ways to view results.
PLANE13
Figure 2 PLANE13 Element Output
K
L
S, B, etc.

E ement utput
ectns shwn
e f KEOPT4 = 0

Y S , B , etc.
(or axial)
X (or radial) J
Because of different sign conventions for Cartesian and polar coordinate systems, magnetic flux density
vectors point in opposite directions for planar (KEYOPT(3) = 0) and axisymmetric (KEYOPT(3) =1) analyses.
available.
Table 1 PLANE13 Element Output Definitions

Name Definition O R
NODES Nodes - I, J, K, L Y Y
MAT Material number Y Y
VOLU: Volume Y Y
XC, YC Location where results are reported Y 3
PRES P1 at nodes J, I; P2 at K, J; P3 at L, K; P4 at I, L Y Y
TEMP Input temperatures T(I), T(J), T(K), T(L) Y Y
HGEN Input heat generations HG(I), HG(J), HG(K), HG(L) Y -
S:X, Y, Z, XY Stresses (SZ = 0.0 for plane stress elements) 1 1
EPEL:X, Y, Z, XY Elastic strains 1 1
EPEL:EQV Equivalent elastic strain [4] - 1
EPTH:X, Y, Z, XY Average thermal strains 1 1
EPTH:EQV Equivalent thermal strain [4] - 1
PLANE13
Name Definition O R
TG:X, Y, SUM Thermal gradient components and vector sum 1 1
TF:X, Y, SUM Thermal flux (heat flow rate/cross-sectional area) com- 1 1
ponents and vector sum
EF:X, Y Electric field components (X, Y) 1 1
D:X, Y Electric flux density components (X, Y) 1 1
UE, UD, UM Elastic (UE), dielectric (UD), and electromechanical 1 1
LOC Output location (X, Y) 1 -
MUX, MUY Magnetic permeability 1 1
H:X, Y Magnetic field intensity components 1 1
B:X, Y Magnetic flux density components 1 1
JSZ Source current density, available for static analysis only 1 1
JTZ Total current density 1 1
FJB(X, Y) Lorentz force components 1 1
FMX(X, Y) Maxwell force components 1 1
FVW(X, Y) Virtual work force components 1 1
FMAG:X, Y Combined (FJB and FMX) force components - 1
FACE Face label 2 2
AREA Face area 2 2
HEAT Heat flow rate per unit area across face by convection 2 -
RATE/AREA
HFLXAVG Heat flow rate per unit area across face caused by input - 2
heat flux
TJB(Z) Lorentz torque about global Cartesian +Z axis 1 1
TMX(Z) Maxwell torque about global Cartesian +Z axis 1 1
TVW(Z) Virtual work torque about global Cartesian +Z axis 1 1
PLANE13
1. Solution values are output only if calculated (based on input data).
For harmonic analysis, joule losses (JHEAT), forces (FJB(X, Y), FMX(X, Y), FVW(X, Y)), and torque
(TJB(Z), TMX(Z), TVW(Z)) represent time-average values. These values are stored in the "Real" data
set. The macros POWERH, FMAGSUM, and TORQSUM can be used to retrieve this data.
2. Available only if a surface load is input.
user (MP,PRXY).
Table 2 PLANE13 Miscellaneous Element Output

Description Names of Items Output O R
Integration Pt. Solution SINT, SEQV, EPEL, S, MUX, MUY, H, HSUM, B, 1 -
BSUM
Nodal Solution SINT, SEQV, S, H, HSUM, B, BSUM 2 -
1. Output at each integration point, if KEYOPT(5) = 1.

2. Output at each node, if KEYOPT(5) = 2.
Note
JT represents the total measurable current density in a conductor, including eddy current
effects, and velocity effects if calculated.
For axisymmetric solutions with KEYOPT(4) = 0, the X and Y directions correspond to the
radial and axial directions, respectively. The X, Y, Z, and XY stress output correspond to the
radial, axial, hoop, and in-plane shear stresses, respectively.
For harmonic analysis, joule losses (JHEAT), forces (FJB(X, Y), FMX(X, Y), FVW(X, Y)), and torque
(TJB(Z), TMX(Z), TVW(Z)) represent time-average values. These values are stored in the "Real"
data set. The macros POWERH, FMAGSUM, and TORQSUM can be used to retrieve this data.
Table 3: PLANE13 Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 130) lists output available through the ETABLE command
using the Sequence Number method. See The General Postprocessor (POST1) of the Basic Analysis Guide
and The Item and Sequence Number Table (p. 52) of this manual for more information. The following
notation is used in Table 3: PLANE13 Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 130):
Name
output quantity as defined in the Table 1: PLANE13 Element Output Definitions (p. 127)
Item
E
I,J,K,L
sequence number for data at nodes I, J, K, L
PLANE13
FCN
sequence number for solution items for element Face N
Table 3 PLANE13 Item and Sequence Numbers

Quantity Item E I J K L
Name
JSZ SMISC 1 - - - -
P1 SMISC - 4 3 - -
P2 SMISC - - 6 5 -
P3 SMISC - - - 8 7
P4 SMISC - 9 - - 10
MUX NMISC 1 - - - -
MUY NMISC 2 - - - -
FVWX NMISC 3 - - - -
FVWY NMISC 4 - - - -
FVWSUM NMISC 5 - - - -
JTZ NMISC 7 - - - -
UE NMISC 8 - - - -
UD NMISC 9 - - - -
UM NMISC 10 - - - -
TJB(Z) NMISC 35 - - - -
TMX(Z) NMISC 36 - - - -
TVW(Z) NMISC 37 - - - -

Quantity FC1 FC2 FC3 FC4
Name Item
AREA NMISC 11 17 23 29
HFAVG NMISC 12 18 24 30
TAVG NMISC 13 19 25 31
TBAVG NMISC 14 20 26 32
HEAT RATE NMISC 15 21 27 33
HFLXAVG NMISC 16 22 28 34
PLANE13 Assumptions and Restrictions

• The area of the element must be positive.
• The element must lie in a global X-Y plane as shown in Figure 1 (p. 123) and the Y-axis must be the axis
of symmetry for axisymmetric analyses.
PLANE13
• An axisymmetric structure should be modeled in the +X quadrants.

• For structural and piezoelectric problems, the extra displacement and VOLT shapes are automatically
deleted for triangular elements so that a constant strain element results.
• Transient magnetic analyses should be performed in a nonlinear transient dynamic analysis.
• A skin-effect analysis (where eddy current formation is permitted in conducting regions with impressed
current loading) is performed by using KEYOPT(1) = 6, specifying a resistivity, and coupling all VOLT
degrees of freedom for elements in each of such regions. This is valid for both planar and axisymmetric
models.
• Current density loading (BFE,,JS) is only valid for the AZ option (KEYOPT(1) = 0). For the VOLT, AZ option
(KEYOPT(1) = 6) use F,,AMPS.
• When this element does not have the VOLT degree of freedom (KEYOPT(1) = 4), for a harmonic or
transient analysis, its behavior depends on the applied load. For a BFE,,JS load, the element acts as a
stranded conductor. Without BFE,,JS loads, it acts as a solid conductor modeling eddy current effects.
In this respect, PLANE13 (and PLANE53) are not like the 3-D elements SOLID97 and SOLID237. When
SOLID97, SOLID236, and SOLID237 do not have the VOLT degree of freedom, they act as stranded
conductors.
• Do not constrain all VOLT DOFs to the same value in a piezoelectric analysis (KEYOPT(1) = 7). Perform
a pure structural analysis instead (KEYOPT(1) = 3).
• Permanent magnets are not permitted in a harmonic analysis.
• If a model has at least one element with piezoelectric degrees of freedom (displacements and VOLT)
activated, then all elements where a VOLT degree of freedom is needed must be one of the piezoelectric
types, and they must all have the piezoelectric degrees of freedom activated. If the piezoelectric effect
is not desired in these elements, simply define very small piezoelectric material properties for them.
PLANE13 Product Restrictions

ANSYS Mechanical
• This element has only structural, thermal, or piezoelectric capability, and does not have magnetic
capability.
• The AZ degree of freedom is not active.
• KEYOPT(1) defaults to 4 (UX, UY, TEMP) instead of 0, and cannot be set to 0. If set to 4 or 6, the AZ
degree of freedom is not active.
• The magnetic and electric material properties (MUZERO, MUR_, MG__, and the BH data table) are
not allowed.
PLANE13
• The Maxwell force flags surface loads are not applicable.
ANSYS Emag
• The only active degrees of freedom are AZ and VOLT.
PERY, plus the BH data table).
• The only applicable surface loads are Maxwell force flags. The heat generation body loads are not
applicable. The temperature body load is only used for material property evaluation.
• The element does not allow any special features.
• KEYOPT(1) can only be set to 0 (default) or 6. KEYOPT(3) = 2 is not applicable.
COMBIN14
Spring-Damper
MP ME ST PR PRN DS DSS <> <> <> <> PP VT EME MFS
COMBIN14 Element Description

COMBIN14 has longitudinal or torsional capability in 1-D, 2-D, or 3-D applications. The longitudinal
spring-damper option is a uniaxial tension-compression element with up to three degrees of freedom
at each node: translations in the nodal x, y, and z directions. No bending or torsion is considered. The
torsional spring-damper option is a purely rotational element with three degrees of freedom at each
node: rotations about the nodal x, y, and z axes. No bending or axial loads are considered.
The spring-damper element has no mass. Masses can be added by using the appropriate mass element
(see MASS21). The spring or the damping capability may be removed from the element. See COMBIN14
in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for more details about this element. A general spring or damper
is also available in the stiffness matrix element (MATRIX27). Another spring-damper element (having its
direction of action determined by the nodal coordinate directions) is COMBIN40.
Figure 1 COMBIN14 Geometry
Cv
Torque
J
k
Z
,
I
Y
X
2-D elements must lie in a z = constant plane
COMBIN14 Input Data

The element is defined by two nodes, a spring constant (k) and damping coefficients (cv)1 and (cv)2. The
damping capability is not used for static or undamped modal analyses. The longitudinal spring constant
should have units of Force / Length, the damping coefficient units are Force * Time / Length. The tor-
sional spring constant and damping coefficient have units of Force * Length / Radian and Force * Length
* Time / Radian, respectively. For a 2-D axisymmetric analysis, these values should be on a full 360°
basis.
The damping portion of the element contributes only damping coefficients to the structural damping
matrix. The damping force (F) or torque (T) is computed as:
Fx = - cvdux/dt or Tθ = - cvd θ/dt
where cv is the damping coefficient given by cv = (cv)1 + (cv)2v.
COMBIN14
v is the velocity calculated in the previous substep. The second damping coefficient (cv)2 is available to
produce a nonlinear damping effect characteristic of some fluid environments. If (cv)2 is input (as real
constant CV2), KEYOPT(1) must be set to 1.
KEYOPT(2) = 1 through 6 is used for defining the element as a one-dimensional element. With these
options, the element operates in the nodal coordinate system (see Elements That Operate in the Nodal
Coordinate System (p. 58)). The KEYOPT(2) = 7 and 8 options allow the element to be used in a thermal
or pressure analysis.
A preload in the spring may be specified in one of two ways, either through an initial (force-free) length
(ILENGTH) or an initial force (IFORCE) input. Only one of the input options may be used to define the
preload. If the initial length is different than the input length defined by the nodal coordinates, a preload
is presumed to exist. If an initial force is given, a negative value indicates the spring is initially in com-
pression and a positive value indicates tension. For the 3-D torsional spring option (KEYOPT(3) = 1),
ILENGTH is interpreted as the initial number of turns (rotations) in the spring (the spring is pre-wound)
and IFORCE is the torque preload in the spring. The right-hand rule from node I to node J is used to
define positive and negative turns as well as positive and negative torque. In a nonlinear analysis, the
preload is ramped in the first load step if KBC,0 is set.
A summary of the element input is given in "COMBIN14 Input Summary" (p. 134). A general description
of element input is given in Element Input (p. 43).
COMBIN14 Input Summary

Nodes
I, J
Degrees of Freedom

ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ if KEYOPT (3) = 1
see list below if KEYOPT(2) > 0
Real Constants
K, CV1, CV2, (Blank), (Blank), ILENGTH, IFORCE
See Table 1: COMBIN14 Real Constants (p. 135) for a description of the real constants.
Material Properties
BETD
Surface Loads
None
Body Loads
None
Special Features
Birth and death

Large deflection
Linear perturbation
Nonlinear (if CV2 is not zero)
Stress stiffening
COMBIN14
KEYOPT(1)
Solution type:
0 --
Linear Solution (default)
1 --
Nonlinear solution (required if CV2 is nonzero)
KEYOPT(2)
Degree-of-freedom selection for 1-D behavior:
0 --
Use KEYOPT(3) options
1 --
1-D longitudinal spring-damper (UX degree of freedom)
2 --
1-D longitudinal spring-damper (UY degree of freedom)
3 --
1-D longitudinal spring-damper (UZ degree of freedom)
4 --
1-D Torsional spring-damper (ROTX degree of freedom)
5 --
1-D Torsional spring-damper (ROTY degree of freedom)
6 --
1-D Torsional spring-damper (ROTZ degree of freedom)
7 --
Pressure degree of freedom element
8 --
Temperature degree of freedom element
Note
KEYOPT(2) overrides KEYOPT(3)
KEYOPT(3)
Degree-of-freedom selection for 2-D and 3-D behavior:
0 --
3-D longitudinal spring-damper
1 --
3-D torsional spring-damper
2 --
2-D longitudinal spring-damper (2-D elements must lie in an X-Y plane)
Table 1 COMBIN14 Real Constants

No. Name Description
1 K Spring constant
COMBIN14

2 CV1 Damping coefficient
3 CV2 Damping coefficient (KEYOPT(1) must be set to 1)
4, 5 (Blank) --
6 ILENGTH Initial force-free length (Initial number of turns if torsional
spring (KEYOPT(3) = 1))
7 IFORCE Initial force (or torque if torsional spring (KEYOPT(3) = 1))
COMBIN14 Output Data

• Nodal displacements included in the overall nodal solution

• Additional element output as shown in Table 2: COMBIN14 Element Output Definitions (p. 136).
Several items are illustrated in Figure 2 (p. 136). A general description of solution output is given in
Solution Output (p. 50). See the Basic Analysis Guide for ways to view results.
Figure 2 COMBIN14 Stress Output
Force
Stretch
Twist
Torque
Z
J
I
Y
X
available.
Table 2 COMBIN14 Element Output Definitions

Name Definition O R
COMBIN14
Name Definition O R
FORC or TORQ Spring force or moment Y Y
STRETCH or Stretch of spring or twist of spring (radians) Y Y
TWIST
RATE Spring constant Y Y
VELOCITY Velocity - Y
DAMPING Damping force or moment (zero unless AN- Y Y
FORCE or TYPE,TRANS and damping present)
TORQUE
Table 3: COMBIN14 Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 137) lists output available through the ETABLE command
notation is used in Table 3: COMBIN14 Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 137):
Name
output quantity as defined in the Table 2: COMBIN14 Element Output Definitions (p. 136)
Item
E
Table 3 COMBIN14 Item and Sequence Numbers

ETABLE and
Output ESOL Command
Quantity Input
Name
Item E
FORC SMISC 1
STRETCH NMISC 1
VELOCITY NMISC 2
DAMPING NMISC 3
FORCE
COMBIN14 Assumptions and Restrictions

• If KEYOPT(2) is zero, the length of the spring-damper element must not be zero (that is, nodes I and J
should not be coincident, since the node locations determine the spring orientation).
• The longitudinal spring element stiffness acts only along its length. The torsion spring element stiffness
acts only about its length, as in a torsion bar.
• The element allows only a uniform stress in the spring.
• In a thermal analysis, the temperature or pressure degree of freedom acts in a manner analogous to
the displacement.
COMBIN14
• Only the KEYOPT(2) = 0 option supports stress stiffening or large deflection. Also, if KEYOPT(3) = 1
(torsion) is used with large deflection, the coordinates will not be updated.
• The spring or the damping capability may be deleted from the element by setting K or CV equal to
zero, respectively.
• If CV2 is not zero, the element is nonlinear and requires an iterative solution (KEYOPT(1) = 1).
• The preload may not change after the first load step. Any changes are ignored.
The restrictions described below only apply if KEYOPT(2) is greater than zero.
• If KEYOPT(2) is greater than zero, the element has only one degree of freedom. This degree of freedom
is specified in the nodal coordinate system and is the same for both nodes (see Elements That Operate
in the Nodal Coordinate System (p. 58)). If the nodal coordinate systems are rotated relative to each
other, the same degree of freedom may be in different directions (thereby giving possibly unexpected
results). The element, however, assumes only a 1-D action. Nodes I and J, then, may be anywhere in
space (preferably coincident).
• For noncoincident nodes and KEYOPT(2) = 1, 2, or 3, no moment effects are included. That is, if the
nodes are offset from the line of action, moment equilibrium may not be satisfied.
• The element is defined such that a positive displacement of node J relative to node I tends to stretch
the spring. If, for a given set of conditions, nodes I and J are interchanged, a positive displacement of
node J relative to node I tends to compress the spring.
COMBIN14 Product Restrictions

ANSYS Professional
Structural Analysis:
• No damping capability; CV1 and CV2 are not allowed.

• Only stress stiffening and large deflections are allowed.
• KEYOPT(2) = 7 or 8 is not allowed.
• The BETD material property is not allowed.
ANSYS Professional
Thermal Analysis:
• KEYOPT(2) defaults to 8.
DesignSpace
• KEYOPT(2) = 7 is not applicable.

• In the Mechanical application, KEYOPT(2) = 7 and KEYOPT(2) = 8 are not applicable .
MASS21
Structural Mass
MASS21 Element Description

MASS21 is a point element having up to six degrees of freedom: translations in the nodal x, y, and z
directions and rotations about the nodal x, y, and z axes. A different mass and rotary inertia may be
assigned to each coordinate direction. See MASS21 in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for more
details about this element.
Another element with a full mass matrix capability (off-diagonal terms) is MATRIX27.
Figure 1 MASS21 Geometry
z Mx, My, Mz
Ixx, Iyy, Izz
Z
x y
I
Y Element coordinate system
X shown for KE OPT(2) = 1
MASS21 Input Data

The mass element is defined by a single node, concentrated mass components (Force*Time2/Length)
in the element coordinate directions, and rotary inertias (Force*Length*Time2) about the element co-
ordinate axes. The element coordinate system may be initially parallel to the global Cartesian coordinate
system or to the nodal coordinate system (KEYOPT(2)). The element coordinate system rotates with the
nodal coordinate rotations during a large deflection analysis. Options are available to exclude the rotary
inertia effects and to reduce the element to a 2-D capability (KEYOPT(3)). If the element requires only
one mass input, it is assumed to act in all appropriate coordinate directions. The coordinate system for
this element is shown in Figure 1 (p. 139).
KEYOPT(1) = 1 defines the mass in volume*density form, which allows plotting of the mass using
/ESHAPE, as well as the use of a temperature-dependent density.
A summary of the element input is given in "MASS21 Input Summary" (p. 139). Element Input (p. 43) gives
a general description of element input.
MASS21 Input Summary

Nodes
I
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, UZ, ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ if KEYOPT (3) = 0

UX, UY, ROTZ if KEYOPT (3) = 3
MASS21

(degrees of freedom are in the nodal coordinate system)
Real Constants
MASSX, MASSY, MASSZ, IXX, IYY, IZZ, if KEYOPT (3) = 0

MASS, if KEYOPT (3) = 2
MASS, IZZ, if KEYOPT (3) = 3
MASS, if KEYOPT (3) = 4
(MASSX, MASSY, and MASSZ are concentrated mass components in the element coordinate directions.
IXX, IYY, and IZZ are rotary inertias about the element coordinate axes. See also KEYOPT(2)).
Material Properties
DENS (if KEYOPT(1) = 1), ALPD
Surface Loads
None
Body Loads
None
Special Features
Birth and death

Large deflection
Linear perturbation
KEYOPT(1)
Real constant interpretation (mass/volume or rotary inertia/density):
0 --
Interpret real constants as masses and rotary inertias
1 --
Interpret real constants as volumes and rotary inertias/density (Density must be input as a material
property)
KEYOPT(2)
Initial element coordinate system:
0 --
Element coordinate system is initially parallel to the global Cartesian coordinate system
1 --
Element coordinate system is initially parallel to the nodal coordinate system
KEYOPT(3)
Rotary inertia options:
0 --
3-D mass with rotary inertia
2 --
3-D mass without rotary inertia
3 --
2-D mass with rotary inertia
4 --
2-D mass without rotary inertia
MASS21
MASS21 Output Data

Nodal displacements are included in the overall displacement solution. There is no element solution
output associated with the element unless element reaction forces and/or energies are requested.
MASS21 Assumptions and Restrictions

• 2-D elements are assumed to be in a global Cartesian Z = constant plane.
• The mass element has no effect on the static analysis solution unless acceleration or rotation is
present, or inertial relief is selected [IRLF].
• The standard mass summary printout is based on the average of MASSX, MASSY, and MASSZ if
(KEYOPT(3) = 0).
• In an inertial relief analysis, the full matrix is used. All terms are used during the analysis.
MASS21 Product Restrictions

ANSYS Professional
• The only special feature allowed is large deflection.
PLANE25
Axisymmetric-Harmonic 4-Node Structural Solid
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS

nology element such as SOLID272 (KEYOPT(6) = 0).
PLANE25 is used for 2-D modeling of axisymmetric structures with nonaxisymmetric loading. Examples
of such loading are bending, shear, or torsion. The element is defined by four nodes having three degrees
of freedom per node: translations in the nodal x, y, and z direction. For unrotated nodal coordinates,
these directions correspond to the radial, axial, and tangential directions, respectively.
See Harmonic Axisymmetric Elements with Nonaxisymmetric Loads (p. 77) for a description of various
loading cases. See PLANE25 in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for more details about this element.
See PLANE83 for a multi-node version of this element.
L 3
K ,
4
2

y
(Triangular Option)
x I J
1
Element coordinate system
X (shown for EYOPT(1) = 1)
PLANE25 Input Data

The element input data includes four nodes, the number of harmonic waves (MODE on the MODE
command), the symmetry condition (ISYM on the MODE command) and the orthotropic material
properties. The MODE and ISYM parameters are discussed in detail in Harmonic Axisymmetric Elements
with Nonaxisymmetric Loads (p. 77).
The material may be orthotropic, with directions corresponding to the element coordinate directions.
The element coordinate system orientation is as described in Coordinate Systems (p. 56). Harmonically
varying nodal forces, if any, should be input on a full 360° basis.
PLANE25
Element loads are described in Nodal Loading (p. 49). Harmonically varying pressures may be input as
surface loads on the element faces as shown by the circled numbers on Figure 1 (p. 143). Positive pressures
act into the element.
Harmonically varying temperatures may be input as element body loads at the nodes. The node I
temperature T(I) defaults to TUNIF. If all other temperatures are unspecified, they default to T(I). For any
other input pattern, unspecified temperatures default to TUNIF.
KEYOPT(2) is used to include or suppress the extra displacement shapes. KEYOPT(3) is used for temper-
ature loading with MODE greater than zero and temperature-dependent material properties. Material
properties may only be evaluated at a constant (nonharmonically varying) temperature. If MODE equals
zero, material properties are always evaluated at the average element temperature.
KEYOPT(4), (5), and (6) provide various element printout options (see Element Solution (p. 51)).
A summary of the element input is given in "PLANE25 Input Summary" (p. 144). Element Input (p. 43)
gives a general description of element input.

Nodes
I, J, K, L
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, UZ
Real Constants
None
Material Properties
EX, EY, EZ, PRXY, PRYZ, PRXZ (or NUXY, NUYZ, NUXZ),
ALPX, ALPY, ALPZ (or CTEX, CTEY, CTEZ or THSX, THSY, THSZ), DENS, GXY, GYZ, GXZ, BETD, ALPD
Surface Loads
Pressures --
Body Loads
Temperatures --
T(I), T(J), T(K), T(L)
Mode Number
Number of harmonic waves around the circumference (MODE)
Loading Condition
Symmetry condition (MODE)
Special Features
Birth and death

Stress stiffening
KEYOPT(1)
Element coordinate system:
PLANE25
0 --
1 --
Element coordinate system is based on the element I-J side.
KEYOPT(2)
Extra displacement shapes:
0 --
Include extra displacement shapes
1 --
Suppress extra displacement shapes
KEYOPT(3)
If MODE is greater than zero, use temperatures for:
0 --
Use temperatures only for thermal bending (evaluate material properties at TREF)
1 --
Use temperatures only for material property evaluation (thermal strains are not computed)
KEYOPT(4)
Extra stress output:
0 --
Basic element solution
1 --
2 --
Nodal Stress Solution
KEYOPT(5)
Combined stress output:
0 --
No combined stress solution
1 --
Combined stress solution at centroid and nodes
KEYOPT(6)
Include extra surface output (surface solution valid only for isotropic materials):
0 --
1 --
Surface solution for face I-J also
2 --
Surface solution for both faces I-J and K-L also
PLANE25 Output Data

PLANE25
Several items are illustrated in Figure 2 (p. 146).
In the displacement printout, the UZ component is out-of-phase with the UX and UY components. For
example, in the MODE = 1, ISYM = 1 loading case, UX and UY are the peak values at θ = 0° and UZ is
the peak value at θ = 90°. The same occurs for the reaction forces (FX, FY, etc.). The element stress dir-
ections are parallel to the element coordinate system. We recommend that you always use the angle
field on the SET command when postprocessing the results. For more information about harmonic
elements, see Harmonic Axisymmetric Elements with Nonaxisymmetric Loads (p. 77)
The sign convention on the surface shears is such that for a rectangular element that is lined up parallel
to the axes with node J in the positive Y direction from node I, the shear stresses on surfaces I-J and
K-L are analogous to the centroidal SYZ in both definition and sign. Stress components which are inher-
ently zero for a load case are printed for clarity. Solution Output (p. 50) gives a general description of
solution output. See the Basic Analysis Guide for ways to view results.
Figure 2 PLANE25 Stress Output
S
L K
S Z
S
SZ
SZ
Y
(or axial) Stess ectns shwn
I e f E OPT1 = 0
J
X (or radial)
available.

Name Definition O R
PLANE25
Name Definition O R
ISYM Loading key: 1 = symmetric, -1 = antisymmetric Y -
MODE Number of waves in loading Y -
VOLU: Volume Y Y
PRES Pressure P1 at nodes J,I; P2 at K,J; P3 at L,K; P4 at I,L Y Y
TEMP Temperatures T(I), T(J), T(K), T(L) Y Y
PK ANG Angle where component stresses have peak values: Y Y
0 and 90/MODE degrees. Blank if MODE = 0.
S:X, Y, Z Direct stresses (radial, axial, hoop) at PK ANG loca- Y Y
tions
S:XY, YZ, XZ Shear stresses (radial-axial, axial-hoop, radial-hoop) Y Y
at PK ANG locations
S:1, 2, 3 Principal stresses at both PK ANG locations as well 1 1
as where extreme occurs (EXTR); if MODE = 0, only
one location is given.
S:INT Stress intensity at both PK ANG locations as well as 1 1
where extreme occurs (EXTR); if MODE = 0, only one
location is given.
S:EQV Equivalent stress at both PK ANG locations as well 1 1
EPEL:X, Y, Z, XY Elastic strain Y Y
EPEL:EQV Equivalent elastic strain [4] - Y
EPTH:X, Y, Z, XY Average thermal strains 1 1
FACE Face label 2 2
TEMP Surface average temperature 2 2
EPEL(PAR, PER, Z, Surface strains (parallel, perpendicular, hoop, shear) 2 2
SH) at PK ANG locations and where extreme occurs (EX-
TR)
S(PAR, PER, Z, SH) Surface stresses (parallel, perpendicular, hoop, shear) 2 2
at PK ANG locations and where extreme occurs (EX-
TR)
1. These items are output only if KEYOPT(5) = 1.

2. These items are printed only if KEYOPT(6) is greater than zero.
user (MP,PRXY).
PLANE25
and The Item and Sequence Number Table (p. 52) for more information. The following notation is used
in Table 2: PLANE25 Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 148):
Name
Item
E
I,J,K,L
sequence number for data at nodes I,J,K,L

Quant- Item I J K L
ity
Name
P1 SMISC 2 1 - -
P2 SMISC - 4 3 -
P3 SMISC - - 6 5
P4 SMISC 7 - - 8
THETA = 0
S1 NMISC 1 16 31 46
S2 NMISC 2 17 32 47
S3 NMISC 3 18 33 48
SINT NMISC 4 19 34 49
SEQV NMISC 5 20 35 50
THETA = 90/MODE
S1 NMISC 6 21 36 51
S2 NMISC 7 22 37 52
S3 NMISC 8 23 38 53
EXTR Values
S1 NMISC 11 26 41 56
S2 NMISC 12 27 42 57
S3 NMISC 13 28 43 58
PLANE25
Note
The NMISC items (1 thru 60) in the above table represent the combined stress solution,
KEYOPT(5) = 1. If MODE = 0, their values are zero at THETA = 90/MODE and at EXTR.
See Surface Solution for the item and sequence numbers for surface output for the ETABLE command.

• The element must be defined in the global X-Y plane as shown in Figure 1 (p. 143) and the global
X-axis must be the radial direction. Negative X coordinates should not be used.
• The element assumes a linear elastic material. Post-analysis superposition of results is valid only
with other linear elastic solutions. The element should not be used with the large deflection option.
• A triangular element may be formed by defining duplicate K and L node numbers (see Degenerated
Shape Elements (p. 39)). The extra shapes are automatically deleted for triangular elements so that
a constant strain element results.
• Surface stress printout is valid only if the conditions described in Element Solution (p. 51) are met.
• You can use only axisymmetric (MODE,0) loads without significant torsional stresses to generate
the stress state used for stress stiffened modal analyses using this element.
• This element does not support spectrum analysis.
• Modeling hint: If shear effects are important in a shell-like structure, you should use at least two
elements through the thickness.

MATRIX27
Stiffness, Damping, or Mass Matrix
MP ME ST PR PRN <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS
MATRIX27 Element Description

MATRIX27 represents an arbitrary element whose geometry is undefined but whose elastic kinematic
response can be specified by stiffness, damping, or mass coefficients in matrix form. The matrix is assumed
to relate two nodes, each with six degrees of freedom per node: translations in the nodal x, y, and z
directions and rotations about the nodal x, y, and z axes. See MATRIX27 in the Mechanical APDL Theory
Reference for more details about this element. Other similar, but less general, elements are the spring-
damper element (COMBIN14), and the mass element (MASS21).
Figure 1 MATRIX27 Schematic
Z
[K], [C], or [M]
I
MATRIX27 Input Data

The node locations and the coordinate system for this element are shown in Figure 1 (p. 151). The element
is defined by two nodes and the matrix coefficients. The stiffness, damping, or mass matrix constants
are input as real constants. The units of the stiffness constants are Force/Length or Force*Length/Radian
and the damping constants, Force*Time/Length and Force*Length*Time/Radian. The mass constants
should have units of Force*Time2/Length or Force*Time2*Length/Radian.
All matrices generated by this element are 12 by 12. The degrees of freedom are ordered as UX, UY,
UZ, ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ for node I followed by the same for node J. If one node is not used, simply let
all rows and columns relating to that node default to zero.
A structural matrix that combines the effects of many elements is normally positive or zero definite, as
are the element matrices that contribute to it. There may be unusual circumstances where an element
matrix is negative definite, and this is okay if there are other matrices connected to the same nodes
that are positive definite, resulting in a final system of equations is still positive or zero definite. A simple
example of such a circumstance is a beam element loaded with half of the buckling load. The stress
stiffness matrix is negative definite, but the combined regular and stress stiffness matrix is positive
definite.
When using MATRIX27 with symmetric element matrices (KEYOPT(2) = 0), positive or zero definite
matrices should be input using KEYOPT(1) = 0, the default. If it is desired to input a negative definite
element matrix, the user should set KEYOPT(1) = 1 so that the negative definite checking will be bypassed.
However, when using an unsymmetric or skew-symmetric element matrix, (KEYOPT(2) = 2 or 3), there
are no limits on the form of the matrix, as the unsymmetric solvers are designed to solve any system
of equations, as long as it is not singular.
MATRIX27
The matrix constants should be input according to the matrix diagrams shown in "MATRIX27 Output
Data" (p. 153). For example, if a simple spring of stiffness K in the nodal x direction is desired, the input
constants would be C1 = C58 = K and C7 = -K for KEYOPT(2) = 0 and KEYOPT(3) = 4.
A summary of the element input is given in "MATRIX27 Input Summary" (p. 152). Element Input (p. 43)
gives a general description of element input.
MATRIX27 Input Summary

Nodes
I, J
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, UZ, ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ
Real Constants
C1, C2, ... C78 - Define the upper triangular portion of the symmetric matrix (if KEYOPT(2) = 0)
C1, C2, ... C144 - Define all terms of the unsymmetric matrix (if KEYOPT(2) = 2)
C1, C2, ... C66 - Define upper triangular portion (less diagonal terms) if skew symmetric (KEYOPT(2)
= 3)
Material Properties
BETD, ALPD
Surface Loads
None
Body Loads
None
Special Features
Birth and death

Linear perturbation
KEYOPT(1)
Matrix form (only works with KEYOPT(2) = 0):
0 --
Input positive or zero definite matrices only
1 --
Input positive, zero, or negative definite matrices
KEYOPT(2)
Matrix formulation:
0 --
Symmetric matrices (78 constants required)
2 --
Unsymmetric matrices(144 constants required)
3 --
Skew symmetric matrices (66 constants required)
KEYOPT(3)
Real constant input data:
MATRIX27
2 --
Defines a 12 x 12 mass matrix
4 --
Defines a 12 x 12 stiffness matrix
5 --
Defines a 12 x 12 damping matrix
KEYOPT(4)
Element matrix output:
0 --
Do not print element matrix
1 --
Print element matrix at beginning of solution phase
MATRIX27 Output Data

The solution output associated with the element consists of node displacements included in the overall
nodal solution. There is no element solution output associated with the element unless element reaction
forces and/or energies are requested. KEYOPT(4) = 1 causes the element matrix to be printed (for the
first substep of the first load step only). Solution Output (p. 50) gives a general description of solution
output.
For KEYOPT(2) = 0, the symmetric matrix has the form:

C1 C2 C3 . . . . . . . . C12
C13 C14 . . . . . . . . C23
C24 . . . . . . . . .
C34 . . . . . . . .
C43 . . . . . . .
C51 . . . . . .
C58 . . . . .
C64 . . . .
C69 . . .
Symmetric
C73 . .
C76 .
C78
For KEYOPT(2) = 2, the unsymmetric matrix has the form:
MATRIX27
C1 C2 C3 . . . . . . . . C12
C13 C14 C15 . . . . . . . . C24
C25 C26 C27 . . . . . . . . C36
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
C133 C134 C135 . . . . . . . . C144
For KEYOPT(2) = 3, the skew symmetric matrix has the form:

0

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Skew Symmetric
0
0
0
MATRIX27 Assumptions and Restrictions

• Nodes may be coincident or noncoincident.
MATRIX27
• Since element matrices should normally not be negative definite, a note is printed for those cases
where this can be easily detected.
• With a lumped mass matrix [LUMPM,ON] all off-diagonal terms must be zero.
• The matrix terms are associated with the nodal degrees of freedom and are assumed to act in the
nodal coordinate directions (see Elements That Operate in the Nodal Coordinate System (p. 58)).
MATRIX27 Product Restrictions

ANSYS Professional
• Damping and unsymmetric matrices are not allowed.

• Real constants C79 through C144, for unsymmetric matrices, are not applicable.
• The birth and death special feature is not allowed.
• KEYOPT(2) can only be set to 0 (default). KEYOPT(3) = 5 is not allowed.
SHELL28
Shear/Twist Panel
SHELL28 Element Description

SHELL28 is used to carry shear load in a frame structure. The element has three degrees of freedom at
each node: translations in the nodal x, y, and z directions, or rotations about the nodal x, y, and z axes.
See SHELL28 in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for more details about this element.
Figure 1 SHELL28 Geometry
L
z
y THCK
I
x K
Z
Y
X J
SHELL28 Input Data
The element is defined by four nodes, a thickness, and material properties. The only material properties
actually used are GXY and DENS. GXY may be entered directly or calculated from EX and either NUXY
or PRXY. Also, EX must be input, whether or not GXY is entered. The element coordinate system orient-
ation is as described in Coordinate Systems (p. 56). Real constant SULT is the ultimate shear stress used
for the margin of safety calculation. ADMSUA is the added mass per unit area. KEYOPT(1) is used to
select whether the element should be used as a shear panel or as a twist panel. Only the lumped mass
matrix is available.
Element loads are described in Nodal Loading (p. 49). Temperatures may be input as element body
loads at the nodes. The node I temperature T(I) defaults to TUNIF. If all other temperatures are unspecified,
they default to T(I). For any other input pattern, unspecified temperatures default to TUNIF. Temperatures
are used only for material property evaluation.
A summary of the element input is given in "SHELL28 Input Summary" (p. 157). Element Input (p. 43) gives
SHELL28 Input Summary

Nodes
I, J, K, L
SHELL28
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, UZ if KEYOPT(1) = 0

ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ if KEYOPT(1) = 1
Real Constants
THCK - Panel thickness

SULT - Ultimate shear stress
ADMSUA - Added mass/unit area
Material Properties
EX, PRXY (or NUXY), GXY, DENS, BETD, ALPD
Surface Loads
None
Body Loads
Temperatures --
T(I), T(J), T(K), T(L)
Special Features
Stress stiffening
KEYOPT(1)
Element behavior:
0 --
Shear panel
1 --
Twist panel
SHELL28 Output Data


• Additional element output as shown in Table 1: SHELL28 Element Output Definitions (p. 159)
Several items are illustrated in Figure 2 (p. 159). Solution Output (p. 50) gives a general description of
solution output. See the Basic Analysis Guide for ways to view results.
SHELL28
Figure 2 SHELL28 Stress Output
L FKL SFLKL FLK

FIL K
SFLLI FJK
Z FLI SFLJK
I
FKJ
Y FJI SFLIJ J
X FIJ
available.
Table 1 SHELL28 Element Output Definitions

Name Definition O R
VOLU: Volume Y Y
SXY Average of four corner shear stresses Y Y
SXY(I,J,K,L) Shear stresses at corner nodes Y Y
SXY(MAX) Maximum of four corner shear stresses Y Y
SMARGN Margin of safety on shear Y Y
FDIK, FDJL Forces along diagonals I-K and J-L 1 1
FLI, FJI Forces at node I from node L and node J 1 1
FIJ, FKJ Forces at node J from node I and node K 1 1
FJK, FLK Forces at node K from node J and node L 1 1
FKL, FIL Forces at node L from node K and node I 1 1
SFLIJ Shear flow on edge I - J 1 1
SFLJK Shear flow on edge J - K 1 1
SFLKL Shear flow on edge K - L 1 1
SHELL28
Name Definition O R
SFLLI Shear flow on edge L - I 1 1
FZI Z - Force at node I 1 1
FZJ Z - Force at node J 1 1
FZK Z - Force at node K 1 1
FZL Z - Force at node L 1 1
MDIK, MDJL Moments about diagonals I-K and J-L 2 2
1. The values are output only if KEYOPT(1) = 0

2. The values are output in place of FDIK and FDJL only if KEYOPT(1) = 1
Table 2: SHELL28 Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 160) lists output available through the ETABLE command
using the Sequence Number method. See The General Postprocessor (POST1) in the Basic Analysis Guide
notation is used in Table 2: SHELL28 Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 160):
Name
output quantity as defined in the Table 1: SHELL28 Element Output Definitions (p. 159)
Item
E
Table 2 SHELL28 Item and Sequence Numbers

ETABLE and
Output ESOL Command
Quantity Input
Name
Item E
FDIK (MDIK) SMISC 1
FDJL (MDJL) SMISC 2
FLI SMISC 3
FJI SMISC 4
FIJ SMISC 5
FKJ SMISC 6
FJK SMISC 7
FLK SMISC 8
FKL SMISC 9
FIL SMISC 10
FZI SMISC 11
FZJ SMISC 12
FZK SMISC 13
SHELL28
ETABLE and
Output ESOL Command
Quantity Input
Name
Item E
FZL SMISC 14
SXY SMISC 15
SXYI SMISC 16
SXYJ SMISC 17
SXYK SMISC 18
SXYL SMISC 19
SXYMAX SMISC 20
SMARGN SMISC 21
SFLIJ SMISC 22
SFLJK SMISC 23
SFLKL SMISC 24
SFLLI SMISC 25
SHELL28 Assumptions and Restrictions

• Zero area elements are not allowed. This condition occurs most often when the elements are
numbered improperly.
• This element is most often used with a latticework of beam or spar elements. If this element is
used alone it is almost always unstable, because it carries only shear (and not tension or compression)
loading.
• This element is not recommended for general use. Its use should be restricted to applications which
have historically used such an element. For all other applications, you should use other shell elements
such as SHELL41, SHELL181, and SHELL281, which automatically combine tension, compression,
bending, shear, and twisting effects.
• This element is based on the premise of having only shear, but no normal stress along the edges.
Since this is possible only for rectangles, you can expect the accuracy of the element to degrade
if nonrectangular shapes are used.
SHELL28 Product Restrictions

ANSYS Professional
FLUID29
2-D Axisymmetric Harmonic Acoustic Fluid
MP ME <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS
FLUID29 Element Description

FLUID29 is used for modeling the fluid medium and the interface in fluid/structure interaction problems.
Typical applications include sound wave propagation and submerged structure dynamics. The governing
equation for acoustics, namely the 2-D wave equation, has been discretized taking into account the
coupling of acoustic pressure and structural motion at the interface. The element has four corner nodes
with three degrees of freedom per node: translations in the nodal x and y directions and pressure. The
translations, however, are applicable only at nodes that are on the interface. Acceleration effects, such
as in sloshing problems, may be included.
The element has the capability to include damping of sound absorbing material at the interface. The
element can be used with other 2-D structural elements to perform unsymmetric or damped modal,
full harmonic and full transient method analyses (see the description of the TRNOPT command). When
there is no structural motion, the element is also applicable to static, modal and reduced harmonic
analyses. See FLUID29 in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for more details about this element.
Figure 1 FLUID29 Geometry
3
L K
K, L
4
I
Y
(or axial) J
I
1 J Tngu Optn
X (or radial)
FLUID29 Input Data

The element is defined by four nodes, the number of harmonic waves (MODE on the MODE command),
the symmetry condition (ISYM on the MODE command), a reference pressure, and the isotropic mater-
ial properties. The MODE and ISYM parameters are discussed in detail in Harmonic Axisymmetric Elements
with Nonaxisymmetric Loads (p. 77). The reference pressure (PREF) is used to calculate the element
k/ρ
sound pressure level (defaults to 20x10-6 N/m2). The speed of sound ( ) in the fluid is input by
SONC where k is the bulk modulus of the fluid (Force/Area) and ρo is the mean fluid density
(Mass/Volume) (input as DENS). The dissipative effect due to fluid viscosity is neglected, but absorption
of sound at the interface is accounted for by generating a damping matrix using the surface area and
boundary admittance at the interface. Experimentally measured values of the boundary admittance for
the sound absorbing material may be input as material property MU. We recommend MU values from
FLUID29
0.0 to 1.0; however, values greater than 1.0 are allowed. MU = 0.0 represents no sound absorption and
MU = 1.0 represents full sound absorption. DENS, SONC and MU are evaluated at the average of the
nodal temperatures.
Nodal flow rates, if any, may be specified using the F command where both the real and imaginary
components may be applied. Nodal flow rates should be input per unit of depth for a plane analysis
and on a 360° basis for an axisymmetric analysis.
Element loads are described in Nodal Loading (p. 49). Fluid-structure interfaces (FSI) may be flagged by
surface loads at the element faces as shown by the circled numbers on Figure 1 (p. 163). Specifying the
FSI label (without a value) [SF, SFA, SFE] will couple the structural motion and fluid pressure at the in-
terface. Deleting the FSI specification [SFDELE, SFADELE, SFEDELE] removes the flag. The flag specific-
ation should be on the fluid elements at the interface. See Acoustics in the Coupled-Field Analysis Guide
for more information on the use of the fluid-structure interaction flag. The surface load label IMPD with
a value of unity should be used to include damping that may be present at a structural boundary with
a sound absorption lining. A zero value of IMPD removes the damping calculation. The displacement
degrees of freedom (UX and UY) at the element nodes not on the interface should be set to zero to
avoid zero-pivot warning messages.
Temperatures may be input as element body loads at the nodes. The node I temperature T(I) defaults
to TUNIF. If all other temperatures are unspecified, they default to T(I). For any other input pattern,
unspecified temperatures default to TUNIF.
KEYOPT(2) is used to specify the absence of a structure at the interface and, therefore, the absence of
coupling between the fluid and structure. Since the absence of coupling produces symmetric element
matrices, a symmetric eigensolver [MODOPT] may be used within the modal analysis. However, for the
coupled (unsymmetric) problem, a corresponding unsymmetric eigensolver [MODOPT] must be used.
Vertical acceleration (ACELY on the ACEL command) is needed for the gravity regardless of the value
of MODE, even for a modal analysis.
A summary of the element input is given in "FLUID29 Input Summary" (p. 164). A general description of
Elements (p. 76).
FLUID29 Input Summary

Nodes
I, J, K, L
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, PRES if KEYOPT (2) = 0

PRES if KEYOPT (2) = 1
Real Constants
PREF - Reference pressure
Material Properties
DENS, SONC, MU
Surface Loads
Fluid-structure Interface Flag --
FLUID29
Impedance --
Mode Number
Input mode number on MODE command
Loading Condition
Input for ISYM on MODE command
1 --
Symmetric loading
-1 --
Antisymmetric loading
Special Features
None
KEYOPT(2)
Structure at element interface:
0 --
Structure present at interface (unsymmetric element matrix)
1 --
No structure at interface (symmetric element matrix)
KEYOPT(3)
Element behavior:
0 --
Planar
1 --
Axisymmetric
2 --
Axiharmonic
KEYOPT(7)
Free surface effect:
0 --
Do not include sloshing effect
1 --
Include sloshing effect on face of elements located on Y = 0.0 plane (elements must not have positive
Y coordinates)
FLUID29 Output Data

• Nodal displacements and pressures included in the overall nodal solution

• Additional element output as shown in Table 1: FLUID29 Element Output Definitions (p. 166).
Solution Output (p. 50) gives a general description of solution output. See the Basic Analysis Guide for
ways to view results.
FLUID29
available.
Table 1 FLUID29 Element Output Definitions

Name Definition O R
VOLU: Volume Y Y
PRESSURE Average pressure Y Y
PG( X, Y, SUM) Pressure gradient components and vector sum Y Y
VL( X, Y, SUM) Fluid velocity components and vector sum 1 1
SOUND Sound pressure level (in decibels) 1 1
PR.LEVEL
1. Output only if ANTYPE,HARMIC

Table 2: FLUID29 Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 166) lists output available through the ETABLE command
notation is used in Table 2: FLUID29 Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 166):
Name
output quantity as defined in the Table 1: FLUID29 Element Output Definitions (p. 166)
Item
E
Table 2 FLUID29 Item and Sequence Numbers

ETABLE and
Output Quant- ESOL Command
ity Name Input
Item E
PGX SMISC 1
PGY SMISC 2
FLUID29
ETABLE and
ity Name Input
Item E
VLX SMISC 3
VLY SMISC 4
PRESSURE NMISC 1
PGSUM NMISC 2
VLSUM NMISC 3
SOUND PR. NMISC 4
LEVEL
FLUID29 Assumptions and Restrictions

• The element must lie in a global X-Y plane as shown in Figure 1 (p. 163).
• All elements must have 4 nodes. A triangular element may be formed by defining duplicate K and
L nodes (see Degenerated Shape Elements (p. 39)).
• The acoustic pressure in the fluid medium is determined by the wave equation with the following
assumptions:
– The fluid is compressible (density changes due to pressure variations).
– Inviscid fluid (no dissipative effect due to viscosity).
– There is no mean flow of the fluid.
– The mean density and pressure are uniform throughout the fluid. Note that the acoustic pressure
is the excess pressure from the mean pressure.
– Analyses are limited to relatively small acoustic pressures so that the changes in density are
small compared with the mean density.
The lumped mass matrix formulation [LUMPM,ON] is not allowed for this element.
FLUID29 Product Restrictions

FLUID30
3-D Acoustic Fluid
MP ME <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS

FLUID30 is used for modeling the fluid medium and the interface in fluid/structure interaction problems.
Typical applications include sound wave propagation and submerged structure dynamics. The governing
coupling of acoustic pressure and structural motion at the interface. The element has eight corner nodes
with four degrees of freedom per node: translations in the nodal x, y and z directions and pressure. The
translations, however, are applicable only at nodes that are on the interface. Acceleration effects, such
as in sloshing problems, may be included.
The element has the capability to include damping of sound absorbing material at the interface as well
as damping within the fluid. The element can be used with other 3-D structural elements to perform
unsymmetric or damped modal, full harmonic and full transient method analyses (see the description
of the TRNOPT command). When there is no structural motion, the element is also applicable to modal
and reduced harmonic analyses. See FLUID30 in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for more details
about this element. See FLUID220 for a higher order hexahedral option and FLUID221 for a higher order
tetrahedral option
M,N,O,P
4
I
P
5 K,L
O
J
6 Tetrahedral Option
M
N M O,P
2 3
N
y L
I K,L
K
J
Z Wedge Option
x
I
1
Y J M,N,O,P
X
Surface Coordinate System L K
I
J
Pyramid Option
FLUID30
FLUID30 Input Data

The element is defined by eight nodes, a reference pressure, and the isotropic material properties. The
reference pressure (PREF) is used to calculate the element sound pressure level (defaults to 20x10-6
N/m2). The speed of sound ( ρ ) in the fluid is input by SONC where k is the bulk modulus of the
k / o
fluid (Force/Area) and ρo is the mean fluid density (Mass/Volume) (input as DENS). The dissipative effect
due to fluid viscosity can be included (input as MP,VISC). DENS, SONC, and VISC are evaluated at the
average of the nodal temperatures.
Nodal flow rates may be specified using the F command where both the real and imaginary components
may be applied.
Element loads are described in Nodal Loading (p. 49). Fluid-structure interfaces (FSI) may be flagged by
surface loads at the element faces as shown by the circled numbers on Figure 1 (p. 169). Specifying the
FSI label (without a value) [SF, SFA, SFE] will couple the structural motion and fluid pressure at the in-
terface. Deleting the FSI specification [SFDELE, SFADELE, SFEDELE] removes the flag. The flag specific-
ation should be on the fluid elements at the interface. See Acoustics in the Coupled-Field Analysis Guide
for more information on the use of the fluid-structure interaction flag.
The FSI interface may be automatically flagged if acoustic elements are adjacent to solid structural
elements (except for shell elements) and FSI interfaces have not been flagged manually. The surface
load label IMPD with a given complex impedance value can be used to include damping that may be
present at a structural boundary with a sound absorption lining. These impedance boundary conditions
may also be applied to a flagged FSI interface. A zero value of IMPD removes the damping calculation.
The displacement degrees of freedom (UX, UY and UZ) at the element nodes not on the interface should
be set to zero to avoid zero-pivot warning messages. The surface load label SHLD with a given amplitude
and initial phase angle is used to define a normal sound speed on the exterior surface. The sloshing
surface can be flagged by the surface load label FREE. The sloshing surface must be parallel to the z-
plane of the global Cartesian system. When near or far field parameters are required, the surface load
label MXWF should be applied to the equivalent source surface. The label MXWF may be automatically
applied to a PML-acoustic medium interface or exterior surface with the label INF, if MXWF surfaces
have not been flagged manually.
Mass sources may be specified using the BF, BFL, BFA or BFV command with the label JS (in units of
mass/length^3/time). Both the amplitude and initial phase may be applied so that the inhomogeneous
Helmholtz equation is solved. The impedance sheet inside a fluid may be defined using the BF or BFA
command with the label IMPD. For a non-uniform acoustic medium, the reference temperature T0 (TREF
command) and the reference static pressure (real constant PSREF) should be defined. PSREF defaults
to 101325, which is standard atmospheric pressure in units of N/m2. Nodal temperatures may be input
by body load commands. The nodal static pressure can also be input by the BF command with the Lab
= CHRGD.
KEYOPT(2)=1 is used to specify the absence of a structure at the interface and the absence of coupling
between the fluid and structure. Since the absence of coupling produces symmetric element matrices,
a symmetric eigensolver (MODOPT) may be used within the modal analysis. KEYOPT(2)=0 (the default)
specifies a coupled (unsymmetric) problem, which requires a corresponding unsymmetric eigensolver
FLUID30
(MODOPT).. If KEYOPT(2)=2 or 3, specifying symmetric algorithms in the presence of FSI coupling, a

symmetric eigensolver may also be used for modal analysis (MODOPT) and a symmetric linear equation
solver may be used for full harmonic analysis.
KEYOPT(4) is used to specify the existence of perfectly matched layers (PML) to absorb the outgoing
sound waves. Refer to Perfectly Matched Layers (PML) in the Mechanical APDL High-Frequency Electro-
magnetic Analysis Guide for more information about using PML.
Vertical acceleration (ACELZ on the ACEL command) is needed to specify gravity, even for a modal
analysis, if free surface effects are present (SF command with the FREE flag).
For acoustic scattering analysis, acoustic incident waves may be specified outside of the model by using
the AWAVE command. These incident waves can be combined with a PML or Robin boundary surface
(SF command with the INF flag). Either the total field or pure scattered field formulation may be used
(HFSCAT command). The acoustic near- and far-field parameters may be calculated by PRNEAR, PLNEAR,
PRFAR, or PLFAR. When the pure scattered formulation is used (HFSCAT), acoustic incident waves may
also be specified inside of the model by using the AWAVE command.

Nodes
I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, UZ, PRES if KEYOPT (2) = 0, 2, or 3

Real Constants

PSREF - Reference static pressure
Material Properties
DENS, SONC, VISC
Surface Loads
Fluid-structure interface flag (FSI), impedance (IMPD), normal speed (SHLD), sloshing surface (FREE),
equivalent source surface (MXWF), and Robin boundary surface (INF):

Body Loads
Mass source (JS), static pressure (CHRGD), impedance (IMPD), temperature (TEMP)
Special Features
None
KEYOPT(2)
FLUID30
0 --
FSI interfaces present (unsymmetric element matrix)
1 --
Acoustic analysis without FSI interface (symmetric element matrix)
2 --
FSI interfaces present for modal analysis (symmetric element matrix)
3 --
FSI interfaces present for full harmonic analysis (symmetric element matrix)
KEYOPT(4)
PML absorbing condition:
0 --
Do not include PML absorbing condition
1 --
Include PML absorbing condition
FLUID30 Output Data

The solution output associated with the element consists of the following:

• Nodal velocity for modal and full harmonic or nodal pressure gradient for transient analysis is in-
cluded in the element nodal solution via standard results output commands with Item = PG (for
example, PRNSOL, PLVECT, PRESOL, and PLESOL).
• Nodal sound pressure level (SPL)
available.

Name Definition O R
NODES Nodes - I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P Y Y
VOLU: Volume Y Y
FLUID30
Name Definition O R
TEMP T(I), T(J), T(K), T(L), T(M), T(N), T(O), T(P) Y Y
PG(X,Y,Z,SUM) Velocity components and vector sum for modal Y Y
and harmonic analysis or pressure gradient
components and vector sum for transient ana-
lysis
VL(X,Y,Z,SUM) Fluid velocity components and vector sum 1 1
SOUND PR. Sound pressure level (in decibels) 1 1
LEVEL
PL2 Square of the L2 norm of pressure over element 1 1
volume

Name
Item
E

ETABLE and
ity Name Input
Item E
PGX SMISC 1
PGY SMISC 2
PGZ SMISC 3
VLX SMISC 4
VLY SMISC 5
VLZ SMISC 6
PL2 SMICS 7
PRESSURE NMISC 1
PGSUM NMISC 2
VLSUM NMISC 3
FLUID30
ETABLE and
ity Name Input
Item E
SOUND PR. NMISC 4
LEVEL

• The element must not have a zero volume.
• Element nodes may be numbered either as shown in Figure 1 (p. 169) or may have planes IJKL and
MNOP interchanged.
• The element may not be twisted such that it has two separate volumes. This occurs usually when
the element nodes are not in the correct sequence.
• All elements must have 8 nodes. A prism-shaped element may be formed by defining duplicate K
and L and duplicate O and P nodes (see Degenerated Shape Elements (p. 39)). A tetrahedron or
pyramid shape is also available.
assumptions:
– Note that the acoustic pressure is the excess pressure from the mean pressure.
• The lumped mass matrix formulation [LUMPM,ON] is not allowed for this element.
• The symmetric matrix formulation (KEYOPT(2) = 2) is not allowed for coupled modal analysis with
viscous material.

LINK31
Radiation Link
MP ME <> PR PRN <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS

LINK31 is a uniaxial element which models the radiation heat flow rate between two points in space.
The link has a single degree of freedom, temperature, at each node. The radiation element is applicable
to a 2-D (plane or axisymmetric) or 3-D, steady-state or transient thermal analysis.
An empirical relationship allowing the form factor and area to multiply the temperatures independently
is also available. The emissivity may be temperature dependent. If the model containing the radiation
element is also to be analyzed structurally, the radiation element should be replaced by an equivalent
(or null) structural element. See LINK31 in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for more details about
this element.
Z J
Y
I
X
LINK31 Input Data

The geometry, node locations, and the coordinate system for this radiation element are shown in Figure
1 (p. 175). The element is defined by two nodes, a radiating surface area, a geometric form factor, the
emissivity, and the Stefan-Boltzmann constant (SBC). For axisymmetric problems, the radiation area
should be input on a full 360° basis.
The emissivity may be constant or temperature (absolute) dependent. If it is constant, the value is input
as a real constant. If it is temperature dependent, the values are input for the material property EMIS
and the real constant value is used only to identify the material property number. In this case the MAT
value associated with element is not used. EMIS defaults to 1.0.
The standard radiation function is defined as follows:
q = σ εFA(T(I)4 - T(J)4)
where:
σ = Stefan-Boltzmann Constant (SBC)

(defaults to 0.119 x 10-10 (BTU/Hr*in2* °R4)
ε = emissivity
F = geometric form factor
A = area (Length)2
q = heat flow rate (Heat/Time)
LINK31
The nonlinear temperature equation is solved by a Newton-Raphson iterative solution based on the
form:
[(T(I)2 + T(J)2)(T(I) + T(J))]p(T(I) - T(J))
where the [ ]p term is evaluated at the temperature of the previous substep. The initial temperature
should be near the anticipated solution and should not be zero (i.e., both TUNIF and TOFFST should
not be zero).
An empirical radiation function of the following form may also be selected with KEYOPT(3):
q = σ ε(FT(I)4 - AT(J)4)
where F and A are arbitrary input constants.
A summary of the element input is given in "LINK31 Input Summary" (p. 176). A general description of

Nodes
I, J
Degrees of Freedom
TEMP
Real Constants
AREA - Radiating surface area

FORM FACTOR - Geometric form factor
EMISSIVITY - Emissivity (If EMISSIVITY = -n, use material n for emissivity vs. temperature definition)
SBC - Stefan-Boltzmann constant
Material Properties
EMIS (required only if EMISSIVITY = -N)
Surface Loads
None
Body Loads
None
Special Features
Birth and death

Nonlinear
KEYOPT(3)
Radiation equation:
0 --
Use standard radiation equation
1 --
Use empirical radiation equation
LINK31
The Stefan-Boltzmann constant (SBC) defaults to 0.1190E-10 with units of Btu, hr, in, °R (or °F if TOFFST
is used)
LINK31 Output Data

• Nodal temperatures included in the overall nodal solution

• Additional element output as shown in Table 1: LINK31 Element Output Definitions (p. 177)
The heat flow rate is positive from node I to node J. A general description of solution output is given
in Solution Output (p. 50). See the Basic Analysis Guide for ways to view results.
available.

Name Definition O R
AREA AREA Y Y
EMIS(I, J) Emissivity - I, J Y Y
TEMP(I, J) Temperatures - I, J Y Y
HEAT RATE Heat flow rate from node I to node J Y Y
notation is used in Table 2: LINK31 Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 178):
Name
output quantity as defined in the Table 1: LINK31 Element Output Definitions (p. 177)
Item
LINK31
E

ETABLE and
Output ESOL Command
Quantity Input
Name
Item E
HEAT RATE SMISC 1
TEMPI SMISC 2
TEMPJ SMISC 3
EMISI NMISC 1
EMISJ NMISC 2
AREA NMISC 3
FORM NMISC 4
FACTOR

• If the default Stefan-Boltzmann constant is used, the units associated with this element are Btu, inches,
hours and °R (or °F + TOFFST). Other data input for this analysis must be consistent with this set of units
or an appropriate conversion factor should be included in the radiation element's real constants.
• Nodes may or may not be coincident.
• An iterative solution is required with this element.

LINK33
3-D Conduction Bar
MP ME <> PR PRN DS <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS

LINK33 is a uniaxial element with the ability to conduct heat between its nodes. The element has a
single degree of freedom, temperature, at each node point. The conducting bar is applicable to a steady-
state or transient thermal analysis.
If the model containing the conducting bar element is also to be analyzed structurally, the bar element
should be replaced by an equivalent structural element. See LINK33 in the Mechanical APDL Theory
Reference for more details about this element.
x
Z
LINK33 Input Data

The geometry, node locations, and the coordinate system for this conducting bar are shown in Figure
1 (p. 179). The element is defined by two nodes, a cross-sectional area, and the material properties.
Specific heat and density are ignored for steady-state solutions. The thermal conductivity is in the element
longitudinal direction.
Element loads are described in Nodal Loading (p. 49). Heat generation rates may be input as element
body loads at the nodes. The node J heat generation rate HG(J) defaults to the node I heat generation
rate HG(I).

Nodes
I, J
LINK33
Degrees of Freedom
TEMP
Real Constants
AREA - Cross-sectional area
Material Properties
KXX, DENS, C, ENTH
Surface Loads
None
Body Loads
Heat Generation --
HG(I), HG(J)
Special Features
Birth and death
KEYOPTS
None
LINK33 Output Data


The heat flow rate is in units of Heat/Time and is positive from node I to node J. A general description
of solution output is given in Solution Output (p. 50). See the Basic Analysis Guide for ways to view results.
available.

Name Definition O R
VOLU: Volume Y Y
LENGTH Length Y Y
AREA Input area Y Y
LINK33
Name Definition O R
TEMP(I, J) Temperatures - I, J Y Y
THERMAL FLUX Thermal flux (heat flow rate/cross-sectional area) Y Y
Name
Item
E

ETABLE and
ity Name Input
Item E
HEAT RATE SMISC 1
TEMPI SMISC 2
TEMPJ SMISC 3
THERMAL FLUX SMISC 4
LENGTH NMISC 1
AREA NMISC 2

• Heat is assumed to flow only in the longitudinal element direction.
• The element must not have a zero length, so nodes I and J must not be coincident.
• A free end of the element (i.e., not adjacent to another element and not subjected to a boundary con-
straint) is assumed to be adiabatic.

ANSYS Professional
LINK34
Convection Link

LINK34 is a uniaxial element with the ability to convect heat between its nodes. The element has a
single degree of freedom, temperature, at each node point. The convection element is applicable to a
2-D (plane or axisymmetric) or 3-D, steady-state or transient thermal analysis.
If the model containing the convection element is also to be analyzed structurally, the convection element
should be replaced by an equivalent (or null) structural element. The element may have a nonlinear
film coefficient which may also be a function of temperature or time. See LINK34 in the Mechanical
APDL Theory Reference for more details about this element.
Z J
Y
I
X
LINK34 Input Data

The geometry and node locations for this convection element are shown in Figure 1 (p. 183). The element
is defined by two nodes, a convection surface area, two empirical terms, and a film coefficient. In an
axisymmetric analysis the convection area must be expressed on a full 360° basis. The empirical terms
n (input as EN) and CC determine the form of the convection equation in conjunction with KEYOPT(3).
The convection function is defined as follows:
q = hf*A*E*(T(I) - T(J))
where:
q = heat flow rate (Heat/Time)

hf = film coefficient (Heat/Length2*Time*Deg)
A = area (Length2)
T = temperature (this substep) (Deg)
E = empirical convection term = F*ITp(I) - Tp(J)In + CC/hf
Tp = temperature (previous substep) (Deg)
n = empirical coefficient (EN)
CC = input constant
LINK34
Note
E = F if n and CC = 0.0. F = 1.0 unless KEYOPT(3) = 2. If KEYOPT(3) = 3, E equals the larger

of ITp(I) - Tp(J)In or CC/hf.
A special option obtained with KEYOPT(3) = 2 allows an alternate input for hf and an input scale factor
(F). This option uses the VAL1 field of the SFE command with KVAL = 0 for the hf value and KVAL = 2
for the F value. If the hf value is zero (or blank), the HF material property is used for hf. If the F value is
zero (or blank) or negative, a value of 1.0 is assumed for F. Note, the F value input in this field will ramp
within a load step if KBC = 0. An SFE command must be included (even if the values are left blank) for
all LINK34 elements having KEYOPT(3) = 2.
Heat generation rates may be input as element body loads at the nodes. The node J heat generation
rate HG(J) defaults to the node I heat generation rate HG(I).

Nodes
I, J
Degrees of Freedom
TEMP
Real Constants
AREA - Convection surface area

EN - Empirical coefficient
CC - Input constant
Material Properties
HF
Surface Loads
Convections --
1 - Alternate input of HF and F if KEYOPT(3) = 2 (see text above)
Body Loads
Heat Generation --
HG(I), HG(J)
Special Features
Birth and death

Nonlinear if real constant EN is not equal to zero or if KEYOPT(3) = 3
KEYOPT(2)
Evaluation of film coefficient:
0 --
Use average of T(I) and T(J) to evaluate HF
LINK34
1 --
Use greater of T(I) or T(J) to evaluate HF
2 --
Use lesser of T(I) or T(J) to evaluate HF
3 --
Use differential |T(I) - T(J)| to evaluate HF
KEYOPT(3)
Film coefficient and scale factor:
0 --
Standard element input and empirical term
2 --
Use alternate input for HF and F (input with SFE command)
3 --
Use discontinuous empirical term
LINK34 Output Data


The heat flow rate is in units of Heat/Time and is positive from node I to node J. In an axisymmetric
analysis, the heat flow is on a full 360° basis. A general description of solution output is given in Solution
Output (p. 50). See the Basic Analysis Guide for ways to view results.
available.

Name Definition O R
H Film coefficient (includes empirical term) Y Y
AREA Input area Y Y
TEMP Temperature at node I and node J Y Y
LINK34
Name
Item
E
I,J
sequence number for data at nodes I and J
Output ETABLE and ESOL Command

Quantity Input
Name Item E I J
HEAT RATE SMISC 1 - -
TEMP SMISC - 2 3
H NMISC 1 - -
AREA NMISC 2 - -

• If Tp(I) = Tp(J) and n are nonzero, the first term of E is defined to be zero.
• Since all unspecified nodal temperatures are initially set to the uniform temperature, a nonzero value
of n may result in no heat flowing through the element in the first substep of a thermal solution.
• Nodes may or may not be coincident.
• The element is nonlinear if n is nonzero or KEYOPT(3) = 3. However, the solver always assumes the
element is nonlinear and, therefore, always performs an iterative solution. (Only 2 iterations are performed
if the element is linear.)

ANSYS Professional
PLANE35
2-D 6-Node Triangular Thermal Solid

PLANE35 is a 6-node triangular element compatible with the 8-node PLANE77 element. The triangular
shape makes it well suited to model irregular meshes (such as produced from various CAD/CAM systems).
The element has one degree of freedom, temperature, at each node.
The 6-node thermal element is applicable to a 2-D, steady-state or transient thermal analysis. If the
model containing this element is also to be analyzed structurally, the element should be replaced by
an equivalent structural element (such as PLANE183). The element may be used as a plane element or
as an axisymmetric ring element. See PLANE35 in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for more details
about this element.
2
3
N M
Y
(or axial) L
I
1
X (or radial) J
PLANE35 Input Data

Orthotropic material directions correspond to the element coordinate directions. The element coordinate
system orientation is as described in Coordinate Systems (p. 56). Specific heat and density are ignored
for steady-state solutions. Properties not input default as described in Linear Material Properties in the
Material Reference.
Element loads are described in Nodal Loading (p. 49). Convection or heat flux (but not both) and radiation
may be input as surface loads at the element faces as shown by the circled numbers on Figure 1 (p. 187).
Heat generation rates may be input as element body loads at the nodes. If the node I heat generation
rate HG(I) is input, and all others are unspecified, they default to HG(I). If all corner node heat generation
rates are specified, each midside node heat generation rate defaults to the average heat generation
rate of its adjacent corner nodes. An edge with a removed midside node implies that the temperature
varies linearly, rather than parabolically, along that edge. See Quadratic Elements (Midside Nodes) in
the Modeling and Meshing Guide for more information about the use of midside nodes.
PLANE35
Elements (p. 76).

Nodes
I, J, K, L, M, N
Degrees of Freedom
TEMP
Real Constants
None
Material Properties
KXX, KYY, DENS, C, ENTH
Surface Loads
Convection or Heat Flux (but not both) and Radiation (using Lab = RDSF) --
face 1 (J-I), face 2 (K-J), face 3 (I-K)
Body Loads
Heat Generations --
HG(I), HG(J), HG(K), HG(L), HG(M), HG(N)
Special Features
Birth and death
KEYOPT(1)
Specific heat matrix:
0 --
Consistent specific heat matrix
1 --
Diagonalized specific heat matrix
KEYOPT(3)
Element behavior:
0 --
Plane
1 --
Axisymmetric
PLANE35 Output Data


• Additional element output as shown in Table 1: PLANE35 Element Output Definitions (p. 189)
For an axisymmetric analysis the face area and the heat flow rate are on a full 360° basis. Convection
heat flux is positive out of the element; applied heat flux is positive into the element. The element
output directions are parallel to the element coordinate system. A general description of solution output
is given in Solution Output (p. 50). See the Basic Analysis Guide for ways to view results.
PLANE35
available.

Name Definition O R
NODES Nodes - I, J, K, L, M, N Y Y
VOLU: Volume Y Y
HGEN Heat generations HG(I), HG(J), HG(K), HG(L), HG(M), Y -
HG(N)
TG:X, Y, SUM Thermal gradient components and vector sum at Y Y
centroid
TF:X, Y, SUM Thermal flux (heat flow rate/cross-sectional area) com- Y Y
ponents and vector sum at centroid
FACE Face label 1 1
AREA Face area 1 1
NODES Face nodes 1 1
HFILM Film coefficient 1 1
TBULK Fluid bulk temperature 1 -
RATE/AREA
HFAVG Average film coefficient of the face - 1
heat flux
1. If a surface load has been input

PLANE35
Name
Item
FCN
sequence number for solution items for element Face N

Quantity Input
Name Item FC1 FC2 FC3
AREA NMISC 1 7 13
HFAVG NMISC 2 8 14
TAVG NMISC 3 9 15
TBAVG NMISC 4 10 16
HEAT RATE NMISC 5 11 17
HFLXAVG NMISC 6 12 18

• The element must lie in an X-Y plane as shown in Figure 1 (p. 187) and the Y-axis must be the axis of
symmetry for axisymmetric analyses.
• A face with a removed midside node implies that the temperature varies linearly, rather than parabolically,
along that face.
• The specific heat and enthalpy are evaluated at each integration point to allow for abrupt changes
(such as melting) within a coarse grid of elements.
• A free surface of the element (i.e., not adjacent to another element and not subjected to a boundary
constraint) is assumed to be adiabatic.
• Thermal transients having a fine integration time step and a severe thermal gradient at the surface will
require a fine mesh at the surface.

ANSYS Professional
SOURC36
Current Source
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> EM <> <> PP <> EME <>
SOURC36 Element Description

SOURC36 is a primitive (consisting of predefined geometries) used to supply current source data to
magnetic field problems. The element represents a distribution of current in a model employing a
scalar potential formulation (degree of freedom MAG). The currents are used to calculate a source
magnetic field intensity (Hs) using a numerical integration technique involving the Biot-Savart law. The
Hs term is used in the formulation as a magnetic load on the model. See SOURC36 in the Mechanical
APDL Theory Reference for more details about this element.
Figure 1 SOURC36 Geometry
y y
x
CUR x
J
J
I
DY z
I K
K z
DY CUR
DZ
DZ
a) Type 1 - Coil b) Type 2 - Bar
y DY
CUR
J x
K
DZ z
c) Type 3 - Arc
SOURC36 Input Data

The element input data includes three nodes and the following real constants (see "SOURC36 Input
Summary" (p. 192)):
TYPE
Source type - use 1 for Coil, 2 for Bar, 3 for Arc.
CUR
Total current flowing through source (i.e., number of turns times current per turn).
SOURC36
DY
Characteristic y dimension for source type.
DZ
Characteristic z dimension for source type.
EPS
Convergence criterion for source field (Hs) calculations for arc and coils. Defaults to 0.001. EPS rep-
resents the relative maximum difference in the field Hs calculated at any node during the iterative
calculation of the source field. EPS does not apply for bar sources.
Characteristic dimensions described above are in the element coordinate system. In the case of circular
sources (coils, arcs) the radius is determined from the first and third nodes (I, K). For bar sources, the
length is determined from the first two nodes (I, J).
As a modeling aid, a magnetic command macro, RACE, is available within the ANSYS command set.
This macro enables the user to build a racetrack conductor from SOURC36 primitives. The macro is
discussed in further detail in the Command Reference and in the Low-Frequency Electromagnetic Analysis
Guide.
A summary of the element input is given in "SOURC36 Input Summary" (p. 192). A general description of
SOURC36 Input Summary

Nodes
I, J, K (nodes I, J and K define the characteristic length, current flow direction, and orient the source)
Degrees of Freedom
None
Real Constants
TYPE, CUR, DY, DZ, (Blank), (Blank),

(Blank), (Blank), EPS
See Table 1: SOURC36 Real Constants (p. 192) for a description of the real constants.
Material Properties
None
Surface Loads
None
Body Loads
None
Special Features
None
KEYOPTS
None
Table 1 SOURC36 Real Constants

1 TYPE Source type
SOURC36

2 CUR Total current through source
3 DY Characteristic Y dimension
4 DZ Characteristic Z dimension
5 ... 8 (Blank)
9 EPS Convergence criteria for Hs calculations
As a modeling aid, a magnetic command macro, RACE, is available within the ANSYS command set.
This macro enables the user to build a racetrack conductor from SOURC36 primitives. The macro is
discussed in further detail in the Command Reference and in the Low-Frequency Electromagnetic Analysis
Guide.
SOURC36 Output Data

The source element has no output of its own since it is used only to supply current source data to
magnetic field problems.
SOURC36 Assumptions and Restrictions

• The source element must have characteristic DY or DZ values that are greater than zero.
• The third node must not be colinear with the first two nodes.
• The nodes for this element need not be attached to any other elements.
• For the coil and the arc (types 1 and 3), the K-I line determines the radius (and the x axis) and the J
node orients the x-y plane.
• For the arc (type 3) the subtended angle must be less than 180°. When you specify an arc using three
points, ANSYS will always use the angle that is less than 180°.
• All source element nodes should be located a least 1E-6 units apart.
• Source element cannot have a zero inside radius (Radius ≠ DY/2 for types 1 and 3).
• The EPS convergence criterion is a measure of the relative difference in the calculated Hs field used
during an iterative numerical integration procedure for coil and arc source primitives. The default value
(.001) provides for good accuracy in regions outside of the source primitive location. For highly accurate
calculations within the source primitive domain, the criteria may have to be tightened (i.e., a factor of
20 increase would be represented by EPS = .00005).
• Tightening the convergence criteria will significantly increase the solution run time.
• Users concerned with accurate calculations within the coil and arc source primitive domain should ex-
periment with the criteria until satisfied with the degree of accuracy obtained.
• All currents for a magnetostatic model employing the scalar potential formulation must be specified.
Whereas symmetry conditions on the finite element model may be employed, no symmetry may be
employed on the current source elements.
SOURC36 Product Restrictions

COMBIN37
Control
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS

COMBIN37 is a unidirectional element with the capability of turning on and off during an analysis. The
element has one degree of freedom at each node, either a translation in a nodal coordinate direction,
rotation about a nodal coordinate axis, pressure, or temperature. Similar unidirectional elements (without
remote control capability) are COMBIN14, COMBIN39, and COMBIN40. The element has many applications,
such as controlling heat flow as a function of temperature (thermostat), controlling damping as a
function of velocity (mechanical snubber), controlling flow resistance as a function of pressure (relief
valve), controlling friction as a function of displacement (friction clutch), etc. See COMBIN37 in the
Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for more details about this element.
FSLIDE
I ORC J
Z MASI MASJ
K
Y P L } ontrol Nodes
X Opa i a c i a y m
OPT(3) = 2 h w
COMBIN37 Input Data

The functioning of this element is shown in Figure 1 (p. 195). The element is defined by two pairs of
nodes, these being active nodes (I, J) and optional control nodes (K, L). Generally in the cases using UX,
UY, or UZ as the active degrees of freedom, it is recommended to have the active nodes be coincident
as this eliminates the possibility of moment disequilibrium. However, for visualization purposes, it may
be useful to give node J a slightly greater coordinate value than node I. The element is defined such
that a positive displacement of node J relative to node I will stretch the spring. Thus, if nodes I and J
are interchanged, the same nodal motions will compress the spring.
Certain parameters associated with the control nodes are used to determine whether the control element
is part of the structure (on) or not (off ) and, thus, can be used to disconnect regions of the model during
time dependent or iterative analyses. Other input values are stiffness (STIF), damping coefficient (DAMP),
concentrated nodal masses (MASI, MASJ), on/off control values (ONVAL, OFFVAL), element load (AFORCE:
positive pulls node I in the positive nodal coordinate direction, and pulls node J in the negative nodal
coordinate direction), initial on/off element status (START: -1 if explicitly off, 0 if determined from
starting value of control parameter, 1 if explicitly on), several nonlinear constants (C1, C2, C3, C4), and
a limiting sliding force (FSLIDE).
COMBIN37
The FSLIDE value represents the absolute value of the spring force that must be exceeded before sliding
occurs. If FSLIDE is 0.0, the sliding capability of the element is removed, that is, a rigid connection is
assumed. For structural analyses, units are force/length or moment/rotation for stiffness, force*time/length
or moment*time/rotation for damping, force*time2/length or moment*time2/rotation for mass, and
force or moment for element load. For thermal analyses with temperature degrees of freedom, stiffness
represents conductance and has units of heat/time*degrees, mass represents thermal capacitance with
units of heat/degrees, and element load represents heat flow with units of heat/time. Also, in analyses
with pressure degrees of freedom, stiffness represents flow conductance with units of length2/time.
Stiffness, damping, mass, and element load should be defined on a full 360° basis for axisymmetric
analyses.
The active nodes (I, J) have only one degree of freedom each, selected with the KEYOPT(3) option. The
control nodes (K, L) can have the same, or a different, degree of freedom as specified with KEYOPT(2).
The KEYOPT(1) option assigns to the parameters of the control nodes either the value of the degree of
freedom, the first or second derivative of the value, the integral of the value, or time, for example:
K L
K L
2 2
K L
t
∫ K L
o
Control nodes need not be connected to any other element. If node L is not defined, the control para-
meter is based only upon node K. If time is the control parameter (KEYOPT(1)), control nodes K and L
need not be defined.
When the element is active and used in structural analyses, the element acts like any other
spring/damper/mass element (such as COMBIN14, MASS21, and COMBIN40). In addition, the element
can exhibit nonlinear behavior according to the function: RVMOD = RVAL + C1|CPAR|C2 + C3|CPAR|C4,
where RVMOD is the modified value of an input real constant value RVAL (identified by KEYOPT(6)), C1
through C4 are other real constants, and CPAR is the control parameter (see KEYOPT(1)). RVMOD may
also be defined by user subroutine USERRC and is accessed by KEYOPT(9) = 1. Note, FSLIDE modified
to a negative value is set to zero. In a field analysis, the temperature or pressure degree of freedom
acts in a manner analogous to the displacement.
As illustrated in Figure 2 (p. 200), the KEYOPT(4) and KEYOPT(5) options, when used in combination with
ONVAL and OFFVAL, set the control behavior of the element. The element is either on or off depending
on the position of the control parameter with respect to the values of ONVAL and OFFVAL. Also, note
that when KEYOPT(4) = 0 and the control parameter (CPAR) is within the ONVAL/OFFVAL interval, the
element's status depends on the direction of the CPAR (i.e., on going from on to off, and vice-versa). If
ONVAL = OFFVAL = 0.0 (or blank), the on/off capability is ignored and the element is always active.
COMBIN37

Nodes
I, J, K, L (or I, J, K or I, J)
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, UZ, ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ, PRESS, or TEMP (depending on KEYOPT(2) and KEYOPT (3) below)
Real Constants
STIF, DAMP, MASJ, ONVAL, OFFVAL, AFORCE,

MASI, START, C1, C2, C3, C4,
FSLIDE
See Table 1: COMBIN37 Real Constants (p. 199) for a description of the real constants
Material Properties
ALPD, BETD
Surface Loads
None
Body Loads
None
Special Features
Adaptive descent
Nonlinear
KEYOPT(1)
Control parameter:
0, 1 --
Control on value (UK-UL) (or UK if L not defined)
2 --
Control on first derivative of value with respect to time
3 --
Control on second derivative of value with respect to time
4 --
Control on integral of value with respect to time (zero initial condition assumed)
5 --
Control on time value (KEYOPT(2) and nodes K and L ignored)
KEYOPT(2)
Degree of freedom for control nodes (K and L):
N --
Use degree of freedom N as listed for KEYOPT(3) (defaults to KEYOPT(3))
KEYOPT(3)
Degree of freedom for active nodes (I and J):
0, 1 --
UX (Displacement along nodal X axes)
2 --
UY (along nodal Y)
COMBIN37
3 --
UZ (along nodal Z)
4 --
ROTX (rotation about nodal X axes)
5 --
ROTY (about nodal Y)
6 --
ROTZ (about nodal Z)
7 --
PRESS
8 --
TEMP
KEYOPT(4)
ON-OFF range behavior (see Figure 2 (p. 200)):
0 --
Overlapping ranges
1 --
Unique ranges
KEYOPT(5)
ON-OFF position behavior (see Figure 2 (p. 200)):
0 --
OFF-either-ON (or OFF-ON-OFF if unique)
1 --
ON-either-OFF (or ON-OFF-ON if unique)
KEYOPT(6)
Real constants used for RVMOD function (used if C1 or C3 is not equal to zero; see "COMBIN37 Input
Data" (p. 195)):
0, 1 --
Use STIF for nonlinear function. (Both STIF and FSLIDE cannot be zero).
2 --
Use DAMP
3 --
Use MASJ
4 --
Use ONVAL
5 --
Use OFFVAL
6 --
Use AFORCE
7 --
Use MASI
8 --
Use FSLIDE
COMBIN37
KEYOPT(9)
Method to define nonlinear behavior:
0 --
Use RVMOD expression for real constant modifications
1 --
Real constants modified by user subroutine USERRC
Note
See the Guide to ANSYS User Programmable Features information about user written sub-
routines

1 STIF Spring stiffness
2 DAMP Damping coefficient
3 MASJ Nodal mass at node J
4 ONVAL "ON" control value
5 OFFVAL "OFF" control value
6 AFORCE Element load
7 MASI Nodal mass at node I
8 START Initial on/off element status
9 C1 First scalar in RVMOD equation
10 C2 First exponent in RVMOD equation
11 C3 Second scalar in RVMOD equation
12 C4 Second exponent in RVMOD equation
13 FSLIDE Limiting sliding force


• Additional element output as shown in Table 2: COMBIN37 Element Output Definitions (p. 201).
The active nodal displacements and forces correspond to the degree of freedom selected with the
KEYOPT(3) option. For axisymmetric analysis, the element forces are expressed on a full 360° basis.
The element value STRETCH is the relative deflection at the end of the substep less the amount of
sliding (e.g., UJ-UI-SLIDE). STATUS and OLDST indicate if the element is on or off at the end of the current
and previous substeps, respectively. A general description of solution output is given in Solution Out-
put (p. 50). See the Basic Analysis Guide for ways to view results.
COMBIN37
Figure 2 COMBIN37 Behavior as a Function of Control Parameter
KEY PT(4) = 0 and KEY PT(5) = 0

ON ON
OFF ON OFF ON
OFF OFF
OFFVAL ONVAL CAR ONVAL OFFVAL

Cse of OFFVAL ≤ ONVAL Cse of OFFVAL > ONVAL
KEY PT(4) = 0 and KEY PT(5) = 1

ON ON
ON OFF ON OFF
OFF OFF
OFFVAL ONVAL CAR ONVAL OFFVAL CAR

Cse of OFFVAL ≤ ONVAL Cse of OFFVAL > ONVAL
KEY PT(4) = 1 and KEY PT(5) = 0 KEY PT(4) = 1 and KEY PT(5) = 1
OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON
OFFVAL ONVAL CAR OFFVAL ONVAL CAR

or ONVAL or OFFVAL or ONVAL or OFFVAL
COMBIN37
available.

Name Definition O R
ACTIVE NODES Nodes - I, J Y Y
CONTROL Nodes - K, L Y Y
NODES
CONTROL CPAR value (see KEYOPT(1)) of the control nodes Y Y
PARAM
STAT Element status 1 1
OLDST STAT value of the previous time step 1 1
UI Displacement of node I 2 2
UJ Displacement of node J 2 2
UK Displacement of node K 2 2
UL Displacement of node L 2 2
STRETCH Relative displacement 2 2
SFORCE Spring force in element 2 2
AFORCE Applied force in the element 2 2
SLSTAT Sliding status 3 3
OLDSLS Sliding status value of the previous time step 3 3
SLIDE Amount of sliding 4 4
1. If the value of the element status is:
0 - OFF
1 - ON
2. For the thermal and fluid options, analogous items are output. Thermal option output items TEMPI,
TEMPJ, TEMPK, TEMPL, DELTEMP, SHEAT, and AHEAT and fluid option output items PRESI, PRESJ, PRESK,
PRESL, DELPRES, SFLOW, and AFLOW are respectively analogous to output items UI, UJ, UK, UL, STRETCH,
SFORCE, and AFORCE.
3. Output only if FSLIDE is greater than zero. If the value of the sliding status is:
0 - No sliding
1 - Sliding right (node J moving to right of node I)
-1- Sliding left (node J moving to left of node I)

4. If FSLIDE is greater than zero
COMBIN37
Name
Item
E
Output ETABLE and

Quant- ESOL Command
ity Input
Name Item E
SFORCE SMISC 1
AFORCE SMISC 2
STAT NMISC 1
OLDST NMISC 2
SLSTAT NMISC 3
OLDSLS NMISC 4
STRETCH NMISC 5
UI NMISC 6
UJ NMISC 7
UK NMISC 8
UL NMISC 9
CPAR NMISC 10
SLIDE NMISC 11
Analogous thermal and fluid option output items use the same item and sequence numbers. See footnote
2 (p. 201) of Table 2: COMBIN37 Element Output Definitions (p. 201).

• The element may have only one degree of freedom per node which is specified in the nodal coordinate
system (see Elements That Operate in the Nodal Coordinate System (p. 58)).
• The element assumes only a one-dimensional action.
• Nodes I and J may be anywhere in space (preferably coincident).
• No moment effects are included due to noncoincident nodes. That is, if the nodes are offset from the
line of action, moment equilibrium may not be satisfied.
• The nonlinear capabilities of the element operate only in static and nonlinear transient dynamic analyses.
• If used in other analysis types, the element maintains its initial status (on or off ), throughout the analysis.
COMBIN37
• The real constants for this element are not allowed to be changed from their initial values.
• The element can not be deactivated with the EKILL command.

ANSYS Structural
• KEYOPT(2) = 8 is not allowed.

• KEYOPT(3) = 8 is not allowed.
FLUID38
Dynamic Fluid Coupling
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS

FLUID38 is used to represent a dynamic coupling between two points of a structure. The coupling is
based on the dynamic response of two points connected by a constrained mass of fluid. The points
represent the centerlines of concentric cylinders. The fluid is contained in the annular space between
the cylinders. The cylinders may be circular or have an arbitrary cross-section. The element has two
degrees of freedom per node: for example, translations in the nodal x and z directions. The axes of the
cylinders are then assumed to be in the nodal y directions. The element may be used in any structural
dynamic analysis. For certain cases the axisymmetric harmonic fluid element, FLUID81 (with MODE =
1), can also be used. See FLUID38 in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for more details about this
element.
Boundary 1
Fluid Region
Boundary 2
y y
R1
R2
x x
Y
I, J I, J
z z
X
Z Circular cross-section Arbitrary cross-section
FLUID38 Input Data

The node locations and the coordinate system for this element are shown in Figure 1 (p. 205). The element
is defined by two nodes and several real constants. The real constants are defined in Table 1: FLUID38
Real Constants (p. 207).
KEYOPT(3) is used to select the form of the fluid coupling element. The form of the element determines
the real constants required, the material properties (if any), and the matrices calculated. The density is
input as material property DENS and is evaluated at the average of the two node temperatures. The
damping matrix is calculated only if F is nonzero. KEYOPT(6) is used to select the direction of operation
for the element. If KEYOPT(6) = 1, the X and Y labels used in this description should be interchanged.
Similarly, if KEYOPT(6) = 3, interchange the Z and Y labels.
FLUID38

Nodes
I, J
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UZ if KEYOPT(6) = 0 or 2, or
UY, UZ if KEYOPT(6) = 1, or
UX, UY if KEYOPT(6) = 3
Real Constants
If KEYOPT(3) = 0:
R2, R1, L, F, DX, DZ,

WX, WZ
If KEYOPT(3) = 2:
M2, M1, MHX, MHZ, DX, DZ,

WX, WZ, CX, CZ
See Table 1: FLUID38 Real Constants (p. 207) for a description of the real constants
Material Properties
DENS if KEYOPT (3) = 0

None if KEYOPT (3) = 2
Surface Loads
None
Body Loads
Temperature --
T(I), T(J)
Special Features
None
KEYOPT(3)
Cross-section of cylinders:
0 --
Concentric circular cylinders
2 --
Concentric arbitrary cylinders
KEYOPT(6)
Flow axis parallel to:
0, 2 --
Nodal Y axis (UX, UZ degrees of freedom)
1 --
Nodal X axis (UX, UZ degrees of freedom)
FLUID38
3 --
Flow axis parallel to nodal Z axis (UX, UY degrees of freedom)
Table 1 FLUID38 Real Constants

Concentric Circular Cylinders: KEYOPT(3) = 0
1 R2 Radius of outer cylinder (length); node J refers to outer boundary
2 R1 Radius of inner cylinder (length); node I refers to inner boundary
3 L Length of cylinders
4 F Darcy friction factor for turbulent flow
5 DX Estimate of maximum relative amplitude DX
6 DZ Estimate of maximum relative amplitude DZ
7 WX Estimate of resonant X frequency (Rad/Time)
8 WZ Estimate of resonant Z frequency (Rad/Time)
Concentric Arbitrary Cylinders: KEYOPT(3) = 2
1 M2 Mass of fluid that could be contained within the outer boundary
(Boundary 2) in absence of inner boundary.
2 M1 Mass of fluid displaced by the inner boundary (Boundary 1)
3 MHX Hydrodynamic mass in X direction
4 MHZ Hydrodynamic mass in Z direction
5 DX Estimate of maximum relative amplitude DX
6 DZ Estimate of maximum relative amplitude DZ
7 WX Estimate of resonant X frequency (Rad/Time)
8 WZ Estimate of resonant Z frequency (Rad/Time)
9 CX Flow and geometry constant for X motion (mass/lenght)
10 CZ Flow and geometry constant for Z motion (mass/length)
FLUID38 Output Data

There is no element solution output associated with the element unless element reaction forces and/or
energies are requested.

• The element operates in the nodal coordinate system (see Elements That Operate in the Nodal Coordinate
System (p. 58)).
• No fluid coupling exists in the flow axis direction.
• The element has no nodal coordinate system transformation to account for nonparallel nodal coordinate
systems.
• Nodes I and J may be located anywhere in space (preferably coincident).
• The lumped mass option [LUMPM] is not available with this element.
FLUID38

COMBIN39
Nonlinear Spring
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS

COMBIN39 is a unidirectional element with nonlinear generalized force-deflection capability that can
be used in any analysis. The element has longitudinal or torsional capability in 1-D, 2-D, or 3-D applica-
tions. The longitudinal option is a uniaxial tension-compression element with up to three degrees of
freedom at each node: translations in the nodal x, y, and z directions. No bending or torsion is considered.
The torsional option is a purely rotational element with three degrees of freedom at each node: rotations
about the nodal x, y, and z axes. No bending or axial loads are considered.
The element has large displacement capability for which there can be two or three degrees of freedom
at each node.
See COMBIN39 in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for more details about this element. The element
has no mass or thermal capacitance. These may be added by using the appropriate elements (see
MASS21 and MASS71). A bilinear force-deflection element with damping and gaps is also available
(COMBIN40).
F
STAT 99
3 4 5
(DN, FN)
2
0
1
SLOPE
D
-1
I J -2
Z -3
-99 (D1, F1)
Y
X
If KE OPT(4) = 0, operates in nodal coordinate system
COMBIN39 Input Data

The element is defined by two (preferably coincident) node points and a generalized force-deflection
curve. The points on this curve (D1, F1, etc.) represent force (or moment) versus relative translation (or
rotation) for structural analyses, and heat (or flow) rate versus temperature (or pressure) difference for
a thermal analyses. The loads should be defined on a full 360° basis for an axisymmetric analysis.
COMBIN39
The force-deflection curve should be input such that deflections are increasing from the third (compres-
sion) to the first (tension) quadrants. Adjacent deflections should not be nearer than 1E-7 times total
input deflection range. The last input deflection must be positive. Segments tending towards vertical
should be avoided. If the force-deflection curve is exceeded, the last defined slope is maintained, and
the status remains equal to the last segment number. If the compressive region of the force-deflection
curve is explicitly defined (and not reflected), then at least one point should also be at the origin (0,0)
and one point in the first (tension) quadrant. If KEYOPT(2) = 1 (no compressive resistance), the force-
deflection curve should not extend into the third quadrant. Note that this tension-only behavior can
cause convergence difficulties similar to those that can be experienced by contact elements. See the
Contact Technology Guide, as well as various contact element descriptions, for guidelines on overcoming
convergence difficulties. Note that the number of points defining the loading curve (20 points) can be
effectively doubled by using the reflective option.
Slopes of segments may be either positive or negative, except that the slopes at the origin must be
positive and, if KEYOPT(1) = 1, slopes at the ends may not be negative. Also, if KEYOPT(1) = 1, force-
deflection points may not be defined in the second or fourth quadrants and the slope of any segment
may not be greater than the slope of the segment at the origin in that quadrant.
The KEYOPT(1) option allows either unloading along the same loading curve or unloading along the
line parallel to the slope at the origin of the curve. This second option allows modeling of hysteretic
effects. As illustrated in Figure 2 (p. 213), the KEYOPT(2) option provides several loading curve capabilities.
The KEYOPT(3) option selects one degree of freedom. This may be a translation, a rotation, a pressure
or a temperature.
Alternately, the element may have more than one type of degree of freedom (KEYOPT(4) > 0). The two
nodes defining the element should not be coincident, since the load direction is colinear with the line
joining the nodes. The longitudinal option (KEYOPT(4) = 1 or 3) creates a uniaxial tension-compression
element with two or three translational degrees of freedom at each node. No bending or torsion is
considered. The torsional option (KEYOPT(4) = 2) creates a purely rotational element with three rotational
degrees of freedom at each node. No bending or axial loads are considered. The stress stiffening cap-
ability is applicable when forces are applied, but not when torsional loads are applied.
The element has large displacement capability with two or three degrees of freedom for each node
when you use KEYOPT(4) = 1 or 3 in combination with NLGEOM,ON.
Convergence difficulties caused by moving through rapid changes of the slope (tangent) of the force-
deflection diagram are sometimes helped by use of line search (LNSRCH,ON).

Nodes
I, J
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, UZ, ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ, PRES, or TEMP.

Make 1-D choices with KEYOPT(3).
Make limited 2- or 3-D choices with KEYOPT(4).
COMBIN39
Real Constants
D1, F1, D2, F2, D3, F3,

D4, F4, ..., D20, F20
See Table 1: COMBIN39 Real Constants (p. 212) for a description of the real constants
Material Properties
BETD
Surface Loads
None
Body Loads
None
Special Features
Large displacement
Nonlinear
Stress stiffening
KEYOPT(1)
Unloading path:
0 --
Unload along same loading curve
1 --
Unload along line parallel to slope at origin of loading curve
KEYOPT(2)
Element behavior under compressive load:
0 --
Compressive loading follows defined compressive curve (or reflected tensile curve if not defined)
1 --
Element offers no resistance to compressive loading
2 --
Loading initially follows tensile curve then follows compressive curve after buckling (zero or negative
stiffness)
KEYOPT(3)
Element degrees of freedom (1-D) (KEYOPT(4) overrides KEYOPT(3)):
0, 1 --
2 --
UY (Displacement along nodal Y axes)
3 --
UZ (Displacement along nodal Z axes)
4 --
ROTX (Rotation about nodal X axes)
5 --
ROTY (Rotation about nodal Y axes)
COMBIN39
6 --
ROTZ (Rotation about nodal Z axes)
7 --
PRES
8 --
TEMP
KEYOPT(4)
Element degrees of freedom (2-D or 3-D):
0 --
Use any KEYOPT(3) option
1 --
3-D longitudinal element (UX, UY and UZ)
2 --
3-D torsional element (ROTX, ROTY and ROTZ)
3 --
2-D longitudinal element. (UX and UY) Element must lie in an X-Y plane
KEYOPT(6)
Element output:
0 --
1 --
Also print force-deflection table for each element (only at first iteration of problem)

1 D1 D value for the first point on force-deflection curve
2 F1 F value for the first point on force-deflection curve
3 D2 D value for the second point on force-deflection curve
4 F2 F value for the second point on force-deflection curve
5, ... 40 D3, F3, Continue input of D and F values up to a maximum of 20 points on
etc. the force-deflection curve


• Additional element output as shown in Table 2: COMBIN39 Element Output Definitions (p. 214)
The nodal displacements and forces correspond to the degrees of freedom selected with KEYOPT(3).
For an axisymmetric analysis, the element forces are expressed on a full 360° basis. The element value
STRETCH is the relative deflection at the end of the substep (e.g., UX(J) - UX(I) - UORIG, etc.). STAT and
OLDST describe the curve segment number at the end of the current and previous substeps, respectively.
STAT or OLDST = 0 indicates nonconservative unloading (KEYOPT(1) = 1). A status of 99 or -99 (as shown
COMBIN39
in Figure 1 (p. 209)) indicates that the active load point on the curve is outside of the supplied data. The
slope of the last segment that is provided is simply continued beyond the last data point.
Figure 2 COMBIN39 Force-Deflection Curves
F F F
(a) (b) (c)
D D D
reflected or
defined
KEYOPT(1) = 0 (conservative) KEYOPT(1) = 0 KEYOPT(1) = 0

KEYOPT(2) = 0 KEYOPT(2) = 1 KEYOPT(2) = 2
for initial
F F F loading
(a) (b) (c)
D D D
reflected
KEYOPT(1) = 1 (nonconservative) KEYOPT(1) = 1 KEYOPT(1) = 1

KEYOPT(2) = 0 KEYOPT(2) = 1 KEYOPT(2) = 2
COMBIN39
available.

Name Definition O R
UORIG Origin shift upon reversed loading 1 1
FORCE Force in element Y Y
STRETCH Relative displacement (includes origin shift) Y Y
STAT Status at end of this time step 2 2
OLDST Same as STAT except status assumed at beginning of 2 2
this time step
UI Displacement of node I Y Y
UJ Displacement of node J Y Y
CRUSH Status of the force deflection curve after buckling 3 -
SLOPE Current slope Y -
1. If KEYOPT(1) = 1
2. If the value of STAT is:
0 - Indicates nonconservative unloading
1-20 - Curve segment number at end of time step
99 - Beyond last segment (last segment is extrapolated) (negative STAT values indicate compressive
segments)
3. If KEYOPT(2) = 2 and if the value of CRUSH is:
0 - Use defined tensile curve
1 - Use reflected compressive curve in tension (element has been compressed)

Name
Item
COMBIN39
E
Output ETABLE and

Quant- ESOL Command
ity Input
Name Item E
FORCE SMISC 1
STRETCH NMISC 1
UI NMISC 2
UJ NMISC 3
UORIG NMISC 4
STAT NMISC 5
OLDST NMISC 6

• If you specify KEYOPT(4) = 0, the element has only one degree of freedom per node. This degree of
freedom defined by KEYOPT(3), is specified in the nodal coordinate system and is the same for both
nodes (see Elements That Operate in the Nodal Coordinate System (p. 58)). KEYOPT(3) also defines the
direction of the force. Nodes I and J may be anywhere in space (preferably coincident).
• If you specify KEYOPT(4) ≠ 0, the element has two or three displacement degrees of freedom per node.
Nodes I and J should not be coincident, since the line joining the nodes defines the direction of the
force.
• The element is defined such that a positive displacement of node J relative to node I tends to put the
element in tension.
• The element is nonlinear and requires an iterative solution.
• The nonlinear behavior of the element operates only in static and nonlinear transient dynamic analyses.
• As with most nonlinear elements, loading and unloading should occur gradually.
• When the element is also nonconservative, loads should be applied along the actual load history path
and in the proper sequence.
• The real constants for this element can not be changed from their initial values.
• Whenever the force that the element carries changes sign, UORIG is reset, and the origin of the force-
deflection curve effectively shifts over to the point where the force changed sign. If KEYOPT(2) = 1 and
the force tends to become negative, the element "breaks" and no force is transmitted until the force
tends to become positive again.
• When KEYOPT(1) = 1, the element is both nonlinear and nonconservative.
• In a thermal analysis, the temperature or pressure degree of freedom acts in a manner analogous to
the displacement.
COMBIN39

ANSYS Structural
• KEYOPT(3) = 8 (temperature DOF) is not allowed.
COMBIN40
Combination
MP ME ST PR PRN DS <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS

COMBIN40 is a combination of a spring-slider and damper in parallel, coupled to a gap in series. A mass
can be associated with one or both nodal points. The element has one degree of freedom at each node,
either a nodal translation, rotation, pressure, or temperature. The mass, springs, slider, damper, and/or
the gap may be removed from the element. The element may be used in any analysis. See COMBIN40
in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for more details about this element. Other elements having
damper, slider, or gap capabilities are COMBIN14, MATRIX27, COMBIN37, and COMBIN39.
K1
FSLIDE
M or M/2 K2 GAP M or M/2
I J
Z
C
Y
X
Ope ates in ndal c dinate system
COMBIN40 Input Data

The combination element is shown in Figure 1 (p. 217). The element is defined by two nodes, two spring
constants K1 and K2 (Force/Length), a damping coefficient C (Force*Time/Length), a mass M
(Force*Time2/Length), a gap size GAP (Length), and a limiting sliding force FSLIDE (Force). (Units listed
here apply only to KEYOPT(3) = 0, 1, 2, or 3.)
If the element is used in an axisymmetric analysis, these values (except GAP) should be on a full 360°
basis. A spring constant of 0.0 (for either K1 or K2, but not both) or a damping coefficient of 0.0 will
remove these capabilities from the element. The mass, if any, may be applied at node I or node J or it
may be equally distributed between the nodes.
The gap size is defined by the fourth element real constant. If positive, a gap of this size exists. If neg-
ative, an initial interference of this amount exists. If GAP = 0.0, the gap capability is removed from the
element. The FSLIDE value represents the absolute value of the spring force that must be exceeded
before sliding occurs. If FSLIDE is 0.0, the sliding capability of the element is removed, that is, a rigid
connection is assumed.
A "breakaway" feature is available to allow the element stiffness (K1) to drop to zero once a limiting
force |FSLIDE| has been reached. The limit is input as -|FSLIDE| and is applicable to both tensile breaking
and compressive crushing. A "lockup" feature may be selected with KEYOPT(1). This feature removes
the gap opening capability once the gap has closed.
COMBIN40
The force-deflection relationship for the combination element is as shown in Figure 2 (p. 220) (for no
damping). If the initial gap is identically zero, the element responds as a spring-damper-slider element
having both tension and compression capability. If the gap is not initially zero, the element responds
as follows: when the spring force (F1+F2) is negative (compression), the gap remains closed and the
element responds as a spring-damper parallel combination. As the spring force (F1) increases beyond
the FSLIDE value, the element slides and the F1 component of the spring force remains constant. If
FSLIDE is input with a negative sign, the stiffness drops to zero and the element moves with no resisting
F1 spring force. If the spring force becomes positive (tension), the gap opens and no force is transmitted.
In a thermal analysis, the temperature or pressure degree of freedom acts in a manner analogous to
the displacement.
The element has only the degrees of freedom selected with KEYOPT(3). The KEYOPT(3) = 7 and 8 options
(pressure and temperature DOFs) allow the element to be used in a thermal analysis (with thermal
equivalent real constants).

Nodes
I, J
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, UZ, ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ, PRES, or TEMP (depending on KEYOPT(3) below)
Real Constants
Units for real constants will depend on the KEYOPT(3) setting.
K1 - Spring constant
C - Damping coefficient
M - Mass
GAP - Gap size
FSLIDE - Limiting sliding force
K2 - Spring constant (par to slide)
Note
If GAP is exactly zero, the interface cannot open. If GAP is negative, there is an initial in-
terference. If FSLIDE is exactly zero, the sliding capability is removed. If FSLIDE is negative,
the "breakaway" feature is used.
Material Properties
ALPD, BETD
Surface Loads
None
Body Loads
None
Special Features
Adaptive descent
COMBIN40
Nonlinear (unless both GAP and FSLIDE equal zero)

KEYOPT(1)
Gap behavior:
0 --
Standard gap capability
1 --
Gap remains closed after initial contact ("lockup")
KEYOPT(3)
0, 1 --
2 --
UY (Displacement along nodal Y axes)
3 --
UZ (Displacement along nodal Z axes)
4 --
ROTX (Rotation about nodal X axes)
5 --
ROTY (Rotation about nodal Y axes)
6 --
ROTZ (Rotation about nodal Z axes)
7 --
PRES
8 --
TEMP
KEYOPT(4)
Element output:
0 --
Produce element printout for all status conditions
1 --
Suppress element printout if gap is open (STAT = 3)
KEYOPT(6)
Mass location:
0 --
Mass at node I
1 --
Mass equally distributed between nodes I and J
2 --
Mass at node J

COMBIN40

• Additional element output as shown in Figure 2 (p. 220)
Several items are illustrated in Figure 2 (p. 220). The displacement direction corresponds to the nodal
coordinate direction selected with KEYOPT(3). The value STR is the spring displacement at the end of
this substep, STR = U(J)-U(I)+GAP-SLIDE. This value is used in determining the spring force. For an
axisymmetric analysis, the element forces are expressed on a full 360° basis. The value SLIDE is the ac-
cumulated amount of sliding at the end of this substep relative to the starting location.
STAT describes the status of the element at the end of this substep for use in the next substep. If STAT
= 1, the gap is closed and no sliding occurs. If STAT = 3, the gap is open. If STAT = 3 at the end of a
substep, an element stiffness of zero is being used. A value of STAT = +2 indicates that node J moves
to the right of node I. STAT = -2 indicates a negative slide. A general description of solution output is
given in Solution Output (p. 50). See the Basic Analysis Guide for ways to view results.
Figure 2 COMBIN40 Behavior
F1
FSL DE
If I positive
If GAP = 0.0
If I negative
(u)J - (u)I + GAP
k for C = K2 = 0.0,
1
FSL DE and initial loading
available.

Name Definition O R
COMBIN40
Name Definition O R
SLIDE Amount of sliding Y Y
F1 Force in spring 1 Y Y
STR1 Relative displacement of spring 1 Y Y
OLDST STAT value of the previous time step 1 1
UI Displacement of node I Y Y
UJ Displacement of node J Y Y
F2 Force in spring 2 Y Y
STR2 Relative displacement of spring 2 Y Y
1 - Gap closed (no sliding)
2 - Sliding right (node J moving to right of node I)
-2 - Sliding left (node J moving to left of node I)
3 - Gap open
Name
Item
E
Output ETABLE and

Quant- ESOL Command
ity Input
Name Item E
F1 SMISC 1
F2 SMISC 2
STAT NMISC 1
OLDST NMISC 2
STR1 NMISC 3
STR2 NMISC 4
COMBIN40
Output ETABLE and

Quant- ESOL Command
ity Input
Name Item E
UI NMISC 5
UJ NMISC 6
SLIDE NMISC 7

• The element has only one degree of freedom per node which is specified in the nodal coordinate system
(see Elements That Operate in the Nodal Coordinate System (p. 58)).
• The element assumes only a 1-D action.
• Nodes I and J may be anywhere in space (preferably coincident).
• The element is defined such that a positive displacement of node J relative to node I tends to open the
gap. If, for a given set of conditions, nodes I and J are interchanged, the gap element acts as a hook
element, i.e., the gap closes as the nodes separate.
• The real constants for this element can not be changed from their initial values.
• The nonlinear options of the element operate only in static and nonlinear transient dynamic
(TRNOPT,FULL) analyses.
• If used in other analysis types, the element maintains its initial status throughout the analysis.
• A 0.0 value for GAP or FSLIDE removes the gap or sliding capability, respectively, from the element.
• The mass, if any, is 1-D.
• The element requires an iterative solution if GAP and/or FSLIDE are nonzero.
• A stiffness (K1 or K2) must be defined if the gap capability is used. Unreasonably high stiffness values
should be avoided.
• The rate of convergence may decrease as the stiffness increases. If FSLIDE is not equal to zero, the element
is nonconservative as well as nonlinear. Nonconservative elements require that the load be applied very
gradually, along the actual load history path, and in the proper sequence (if multiple loadings exist).

ANSYS Professional
• No damping capability; CV1 and CV2 are not allowed.

• KEYOPT(3) = 7 or 8 is not allowed.
COMBIN40

• FSLIDE and K2 not allowed.
ANSYS Structural
• KEYOPT(3) = 7 and 8 (pressure and temperature DOFs) are not allowed.
SHELL41
Membrane Shell

nology element such as SHELL181 (KEYOPT(1) = 1 or KEYOPT(3) = 2).
SHELL41 is a 3-D element having membrane (in-plane) stiffness but no bending (out-of-plane) stiffness.
It is intended for shell structures where bending of the elements is of secondary importance. The element
has three degrees of freedom at each node: translations in the nodal x, y, and z directions.
The element has variable thickness, stress stiffening, large deflection, and a cloth option. See SHELL41
in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for more details about this element.
zIJ
2 5
K
L
y yIJ
6
4 K,L
Z x

Y xIJ
X 3 1 Triangular Option
xIJ = Element x-axis if ESYS is not supplied.
x = Element x-axis if ESYS is supplied.
SHELL41 Input Data

The element is defined by four nodes, four thicknesses, a material direction angle and the orthotropic
material properties. Orthotropic material directions correspond to the element coordinate directions.
The element coordinate system orientation is as described in Coordinate Systems (p. 56). The element
x-axis may be rotated by an angle THETA (in degrees).
SHELL41
The element may have variable thickness. The thickness is assumed to vary smoothly over the area of
the element, with the thickness input at the four nodes. If the element has a constant thickness, only
TK(I) need be input. If the thickness is not constant, all four thicknesses must be input. The elastic
foundation stiffness (EFS) is defined as the pressure required to produce a unit normal deflection of the
foundation. The elastic foundation capability is bypassed if EFS is less than, or equal to, zero. ADMSUA
is the added mass per unit area.
Element loads are described in Nodal Loading (p. 49). Pressures may be input as surface loads on the
element faces as shown by the circled numbers on Figure 1 (p. 225). Positive pressures act into the element.
Because shell edge pressures are input on a per-unit-length basis, per-unit-area quantities must be
multiplied by the shell thickness. The pressure loading is converted to equivalent element loads applied
at the nodes. Temperatures may be input as element body loads at the nodes. The node I temperature
T(I) defaults to TUNIF. If all other temperatures are unspecified, they default to T(I). For any other input
pattern, unspecified temperatures default to TUNIF.
Use KEYOPT(1) for a tension-only option. This nonlinear option acts like a cloth in that tension loads
will be supported but compression loads will cause the element to wrinkle.
You should not use this “cloth” option to model cloth materials, since real cloth materials do contain
some bending stiffness. You can use the cloth option to efficiently model regions where wrinkling is
to be approximated, such as for shear panels in aircraft structures. Wrinkling for this type of application
may be in one (or both) orthogonal directions. If you do need to model a real cloth material, you can
use the cloth option to simulate the tension part of the loading, but you will need to superimpose a
very thin regular shell element to include a bending stiffness for the material. Superimposing a thin
shell may also aid solution stability.
Any out-of-planeness within the element or round off-error in nodal location may cause an instability
in the displacement solution. To counteract this, a slight normal stiffness may be added to the element
with the EFS real constant. KEYOPT(2) is used to include or suppress the extra displacement shapes.
KEYOPT(4) provides various element printout options (see Element Solution (p. 51)).
A summary of the element input is given in "SHELL41 Input Summary" (p. 226). A general description of

Nodes
I, J, K, L
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, UZ
Real Constants
TK(I), TK(J), TK(K), TK(L), THETA, EFS,

ADMSUA
See Table 1: SHELL41 Real Constants (p. 228) for a description of the real constants
Material Properties
EX, EY, PRXY or NUXY, ALPX, ALPY (or CTEX, CTEY or THSX,THSY), DENS, GXY, ALPD, BETD (X-direction
defined by THETA real constant)
SHELL41
Surface Loads
Pressures --
face 1 (I-J-K-L) (bottom, in +Z direction), face 2 (I-J-K-L) (top, in -Z direction),

Body Loads
Temperatures --
T(I), T(J), T(K), T(L)
Special Features
Adaptive descent
Birth and death
Large deflection
Nonlinear (if KEYOPT(1) = 2)
Stress stiffening
KEYOPT(1)
Element stiffness behavior:
0 --
Stiffness acts in both tension and compression
2 --
Stiffness acts in tension, collapses in compression ("cloth" option)
KEYOPT(2)
0 --
1 --
Suppress extra displacement shape
KEYOPT(4)
0 --
1 --
Repeat basic printout at integration points
2 --
KEYOPT(5)
Member force output:
0 --
No member force printout
1 --
Print member forces in the element coordinate system
KEYOPT(6)
Edge output (isotropic material):
SHELL41
0 --
No edge printout
1 --
Edge printout for midpoint of side I-J
2 --
Edge printout for midpoints of both sides I-J and K-L
Note
Edge printout valid only for isotropic materials
Table 1 SHELL41 Real Constants

1 TK(I) Shell thickness at node I
2 TK(J) Shell thickness at node J (defaults to TK(I))
3 TK(K) Shell thickness at node K (defaults to TK(I))
4 TK(L) Shell thickness at node L (defaults to TK(I))
5 THETA Element x-axis rotation
6 EFS Elastic foundation stiffness
7 ADMSUA Added mass/unit area
SHELL41 Output Data


Several items are illustrated in Figure 2 (p. 229). The element stress directions correspond to the element
coordinate directions. Edge stresses are defined parallel and perpendicular to the IJ edge (and the KL
edge). A general description of solution output is given in Solution Output (p. 50). See the Basic Analysis
Guide for ways to view results.
SHELL41
zIJ
L
K
SY
y yu
SX
I J
xIJ
xIJ = Element x-axis if ESYS is not supplied.
available.

Name Definition O R
AREA Surface area Y Y
PRES Pressures P1 at nodes I, J, K, L; P2 at I, J, K, L; P3 Y Y
at J, I; P4 at K, J; P5 at L, K; P6 at I, L
S:X, Y, Z, XY Stresses Y Y
S:1, 2, 3 Principal stress Y Y
S:INT Stress intensity Y Y
S:EQV Equivalent stress Y Y
EPEL:X, Y, Z, XY Average elastic strain Y Y
EPEL:EQV Equivalent elastic strain Y Y
SHELL41
Name Definition O R
EPTH:X, Y, Z, XY Average thermal strain Y Y
EPTH:EQV Equivalent thermal strain Y Y
ANGLES Diagonal tension angles (degrees) between 1 1
element x-axis and tensile stress directions
CURRENT STATS. Element statuses at end of this time step 2 2
OLD STATUSES Element statuses at end of previous time step 2 2
TEMP Edge average temperature 3 3
EPEL(PAR, PER, Z) Edge elastic strains (parallel, perpendicular, Z) 3 3
S(PAR, PER, Z) Edge stresses (parallel, perpendicular, Z) 3 3
SINT Edge stress intensity 3 3
SEQV Edge equivalent stress 3 3
FX, FY, FZ Nodal forces - Y
1. Output at the integration points only if KEYOPT(1) = 2 (meaningful only if STAT = 1)

2. Output at the integration points only if KEYOPT(1) = 2. The element status is given by the following
values:
0 - Tension in both (orthogonal) directions
1 - Tension in one direction, collapse in other direction
2 - Collapse in both directions

3. Edge I-J output, if KEYOPT(6) is greater than zero.
Table 3 SHELL41 Miscellaneous Element Output

Integration Point Stress TEMP, S(X, Y, Z, XY), SINT, 1 -
Solution SEQV
Nodal Stress Solution TEMP, S(X, Y, Z, XY), SINT, 2 -
SEQV
Edge K-L TEMP, EPEL(PAR, PER, Z), 3 -
S(PAR, PER, Z), SINT, SEQV
Member Forces FX, FY, FZ 4 -
1. Output at each integration point, if KEYOPT(4) = 1

2. Output at each node, if KEYOPT(4) = 2
3. Output if KEYOPT(6) = 2
4. Output at each node (in the element coordinate system) if KEYOPT(5) = 1
SHELL41
Name
Item
I,J,K,L

Quant- Item I J K L
ity
Name
FX SMISC 1 4 7 10
FY SMISC 2 5 8 11
FZ SMISC 3 6 9 12
P1 SMISC 13 14 15 16
P2 SMISC 17 18 19 20
P3 SMISC 22 21 - -
P4 SMISC - 24 23 -
P5 SMISC - - 26 25
P6 SMISC 27 - - 28
S:1 NMISC 1 6 11 16
S:2 NMISC 2 7 12 17
S:3 NMISC 3 8 13 18
S:INT NMISC 4 9 14 19
S:EQV NMISC 5 10 15 20

Quant- Item Corner Location
ity
Name 1 2 3 4
ANGLE NMISC 21 23 25 27
STAT NMISC 22 24 26 28

• The four nodes defining the element should lie in an exact flat plane; however, a small out-of-plane
tolerance is permitted so that the element may have a slightly warped shape.
• A slightly warped element will produce a warning message. If the warping is too severe, a fatal message
results and a triangular element should be used (see Degenerated Shape Elements (p. 39)).
• Zero area elements are not allowed.
SHELL41
• TK(I) must not be zero.

• The element must not taper down to a zero thickness at any corner.
Shape Elements (p. 39)).
• The extra shapes are automatically deleted for triangular elements so that a constant strain element
results.
• The triangular shape is required for large deflection analyses since a four-node element may warp during
deflection.
• Edge stress printout is valid only if the conditions described in Element Solution (p. 51) are met.
Modeling hints:
• An assembly of SHELL41 elements describing a flat plane should be exactly flat; otherwise singular-
ities may develop in the direction perpendicular to the plane.
• Stress stiffening will help stabilize the solution after the first substep if the membrane element is
in a tension field.
• An assemblage of flat elements can produce an approximation to a curved surface, but each flat
element should not extend over more than a 15° arc.

INFIN47
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> EM <> <> PP <> EME MFS

nology element such as INFIN111.
INFIN47 is used to model an open boundary of a 3-D unbounded field problem. The element may be
a 4-node quadrilateral or a 3-node triangle with a magnetic potential or temperature degree of freedom
at each node. The enveloped (or enclosed) element types may be the SOLID5, SOLID96, or SOLID98
magnetic elements or the SOLID70, SOLID90 or SOLID87 thermal solid elements. With the magnetic
degree of freedom the analysis may be linear or nonlinear static. With the thermal degree of freedom
steady-state or transient analyses (linear or nonlinear) may be done. See INFIN47 in the Mechanical APDL
Theory Reference for more details about this element.
,
∞
∞
∞
K Triangular Option
Y L J
∞
I
X
Z
INFIN47 Input Data

The element is defined by 4 nodes, and the material properties. Nonzero material properties must be
defined. A triangular element may be formed by defining duplicate K and L node numbers as described
in Degenerated Shape Elements (p. 39). The element x-axis is parallel to the I-J side of the element.
The coefficient matrix of this boundary element is, in general, unsymmetric. The matrix is made sym-
metric by averaging the off-diagonal terms to take advantage of a symmetric solution with a slight
decrease in accuracy. KEYOPT(2) can be used to keep an unsymmetric matrix from being made symmetric.
INFIN47

Nodes
I, J, K, L
Degrees of Freedom
MAG if KEYOPT(1) = 0
TEMP if KEYOPT(1) = 1
Real Constants
None
Material Properties
MUZRO if KEYOPT(1) = 0, (has default value for MKS units or can be set with the EMUNIT command).
KXX if KEYOPT(1) = 1
Surface Loads
None
Body Loads
None
Element Printout
None
Special Features
None
KEYOPT(1)
Element degree(s) of freedom:
0 --
Magnetic option
1 --
Thermal option
KEYOPT(2)
Coefficient matrix:
0 --
Make the coefficient matrix symmetric
1 --
Coefficient matrix is used as generated (symmetric or unsymmetric, depending on the problem)
INFIN47 Output Data

The boundary element has no output of its own since it is used only to provide a semi-infinite boundary
condition to a model consisting of other elements.

• The 4 nodes defining the element should lie as close as possible to a flat plane; however, a moderate
out-of-plane tolerance is permitted so that the element may have a somewhat warped shape.
• An excessively warped element will produce a warning message. In the case of warping errors, triangular
elements should be used (see Degenerated Shape Elements (p. 39)).
INFIN47
• Shell element warping is described in detail in Warping Factor in Mechanical APDL Theory Reference.
• Zero area elements are not allowed.
• The semi-infinite volume is assumed to be bound on five sides (four, if triangular) by the boundary
element and by four semi-infinite radial surfaces (three, if triangular) defined from the global coordinate
system origin through nodes I and J, J and K, K and L, and L and I (nodes I and J, J and K, and K and I
if triangular).
• The boundary element should be as normal as possible to the radial surfaces.
• Acute or wide intersection angles should be avoided by "filling-in" the model with the other elements
so that the line of boundary elements around the model is smooth and concave when viewed from the
global coordinate system origin.
• The boundary element must lie "against" an enclosed element (that is, share the same nodes).
• The exterior semi-infinite domain is assumed to be homogeneous, isotropic, and linear without containing
any sources or sinks.
• The origin of the global coordinate system must be inside the model and as centrally located as possible.
• The surface of boundary elements should be located away from the region of interest of the enclosed
elements for better accuracy. The surface of boundary elements need not totally surround the model.
• The element may not be deactivated with the EKILL command.
• When used in a model with higher order elements SOLID90, SOLID87, and SOLID98, the midside nodes
of these elements must be removed at the interface with INFIN47 [EMID].
• If KEYOPT(2) = 1, the matrices are presumed to be unsymmetric.

ANSYS Mechanical
• This element does not have magnetic field capability.

• KEYOPT(1) defaults to 1 (TEMP) instead of 0 and cannot be changed.
• The material property MUZRO is not allowed.
ANSYS Emag
• This element has only magnetic field capability, and does not have thermal capability.
• The only active degree of freedom is MAG.
• The only allowable material property is MUZERO.
• KEYOPT(1) can only be set to 0 (default).
MATRIX50
Superelement (or Substructure)
MP ME ST PR PRN <> <> <> EM <> <> PP <> EME MFS
MATRIX50 Element Description

MATRIX50 is a group of previously assembled ANSYS elements that is treated as a single element. The
superelement, once generated, may be included in any ANSYS model and used in any analysis type for
which it is applicable. The superelement can greatly decrease the cost of many analyses. Once the su-
perelement matrices have been formed, they are stored in a file and can be used in other analyses the
same way any other ANSYS elements are used. Multiple load vectors may also be stored with the super-
element matrices, thereby allowing various loading options. See MATRIX50 in the Mechanical APDL
Figure 1 MATRIX50 Schematic
Degree of Freedom
[K], [M], [C]
MATRIX50 Input Data

The superelement, which is a mathematical matrix representation of an arbitrary structure, has no fixed
geometrical identity and is conceptually shown in Figure 1 (p. 237). Any analysis using a superelement
as one of its element types is called a superelement use pass (or run). The degrees of freedom are the
master degrees of freedom specified during the generation pass.
The element name is MATRIX50 (the number 50 or the name MATRIX50 should be input for the variable
ENAME on the ET command). The SE command is used to define a superelement. SE reads the supere-
lement from Jobname.SUB (defaults to File.SUB) in the working directory. The material number
[MAT] is only used when material dependent damping [MP,BETD] or electrical permittivity [MP,PERX]
is an input. The real constant table number [REAL] is not used. However, the appropriate element type
number [TYPE] must be entered.
An element load vector is generated along with the element at each load step of the superelement
generation pass. Up to 31 load vectors may be generated. Load vectors may be proportionately scaled
in the use pass. The scale factor is input on the element surface load command [SFE]. The load label is
input as SELV, the load key is the load vector number, KVAL determines whether the load vector is real
or imaginary, and the load value is the scale factor. The load vector number is determined from the
load step number associated with the superelement generation. If a superelement load vector has a
zero scale factor (or is not scaled at all), this load vector is not included in the analysis. Any number of
load vector-scale factor combinations may be used in the use pass.
MATRIX50
In a large rotation analysis (NLGEOM,ON), you can use KEYOPT(3) to specify whether the load vectors
associated with this element type rotates with the element (as you would for a pressure load) or remains
in the original (unrotated) direction (as you would for a non-follower force load); all load vectors (if
multiple load vectors) are rotated or left unrotated. You can use KEYOPT(4) to indicate that the supere-
lement was generated with constraints (D) so that it cannot translate or rotate freely in the use pass as
expected (although you can apply constraints in the use pass to the master degrees of freedom to
prevent such motion.)
The KEYOPT(1) option is for the special case where the superelement is to be used with a T4 nonlinearity,
such as for radiation. The File.SUB for this case may be constructed directly by the user or may be
generated by AUX12, the radiation matrix generator.
A summary of the element input is given in "MATRIX50 Input Summary" (p. 238). A general description
MATRIX50 Input Summary

Nodes
None input (supplied by element)
Degrees of Freedom
As determined from the included element types (a mixture of multi-field degrees of freedom is not al-
lowed)
Real Constants
None
Material Properties
ALPD, BETD, PERX
Surface Loads
Surface load effects may be applied through a generated load vector and scale factors. Use the SFE
command to supply scale factors with LAB = SELV, LKEY = load vector number (31 maximum), KVAL =
real or imaginary, and VAL1 = scale factor.
Body Loads
Body loads may be applied through a generated load vector and scale factors as described for surface
loads.
Special Features
Large rotation
Radiation (if KEYOPT(1) = 1)
KEYOPT(1)
Element behavior:
0 --
Normal substructure
1 --
Special radiation substructure
KEYOPT(3)
Load vector update with large rotations (NLGEOM,ON):
0 --
Load vector(s) rotate with the substructure as it rotates
MATRIX50
1 --
Load vector(s) do not rotate and remain in their original direction
KEYOPT(4)
Constrained substructure with large rotations (NLGEOM,ON):
0 --
Substructure was unconstrained in the generation pass
1 --
Substructure was constrained in the generation pass
KEYOPT(6)
Nodal force output:
0 --
Do not print nodal forces
1 --
Print nodal forces
MATRIX50 Output Data

Displacements and forces may be printed for each (master) degree of freedom in a structural superele-
ment in the "use" pass. Energies are also available when requested. The nodal forces may be output if
KEYOPT(6) = 1. The stress distribution within the superelement and the expanded nodal displacements
can be obtained from a subsequent stress pass. In addition to the database and substructure files from
the generation run, File.DSUB must be saved from the superelement "use" pass and input to the
expansion pass (if an expansion pass is desired). A general description of solution output is given in
Solution Output (p. 50).
MATRIX50 Assumptions and Restrictions

• A superelement may contain elements of any type except Lagrange multiplier-based elements (such as
MPC184, PLANE182 with KEYOPT(6) = 1, and CONTA171 with KEYOPT(2) = 3).
• See the D command for degree of freedom field groups.
• Superelements of different field types may be mixed within the use run.
• The nonlinear portion of any element included in a superelement will be ignored and any bilinear element
will maintain its initial status throughout the analysis.
• Superelements may contain other superelements.
• The relative locations of the superelement attachment points in the nonsuperelement portion of the
model (if any) should match the initial superelement geometry.
• If the superelement contains a mass matrix, acceleration [ACEL] defined in the use run will be applied
to the superelement.
• If a load vector containing acceleration effects is also applied in the use run, both accelerations (the
ACEL command and the load vector) will be applied to the superelement.
• Similarly, if the superelement contains a damping matrix (as specified in the generation run) and α and
β damping multipliers [ALPHA and BETA] are defined in the use run, additional damping effects will
be applied to the superelement.
• You should be careful to avoid duplicating acceleration and damping effects.
• Pressure and thermal effects may be included in a superelement only through its load vectors.
MATRIX50
• The dimensionality of the superelement corresponds to the maximum dimensionality of any element
used in its generation. A 2-D superelement should only be used in 2-D analyses, and 3-D superelements
in 3-D analyses.
• See Substructuring Analysis in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for a discussion of the substructure
matrix procedure.
MATRIX50 Product Restrictions

ANSYS Structural
• KEYOPT(1) = 0
• The PERX material property is not applicable.
ANSYS Professional
• This element may be used as a radiation substructure only. KEYOPT(1) defaults to 1 instead of 0
and cannot be changed.
• The BETD material property, PERX material property, surface loads, and body loads are not applicable.
• The large rotation special feature is not applicable.
ANSYS Emag
• The BETD material property is not applicable.

• The large rotation special feature is not applicable.
PLANE53
2-D 8-Node Magnetic Solid
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> EM <> <> PP <> EME <>

nology element such as PLANE233.
PLANE53 models 2-D (planar and axisymmetric) magnetic fields. The element is defined by 8 nodes and
has up to 4 degrees of freedom per node: z component of the magnetic vector potential (AZ), time-in-
tegrated electric scalar potential (VOLT), electric current (CURR), and electromotive force (EMF). PLANE53
is based on the magnetic vector potential formulation and is applicable to the following low-frequency
magnetic field analyses: magnetostatics, eddy currents (AC time harmonic and transient analyses),
voltage forced magnetic fields (static, AC time harmonic and transient analyses), and electromagnetic-
circuit coupled fields (static, AC time harmonic and transient analyses). The element has nonlinear
magnetic capability for modeling B-H curves or permanent magnet demagnetization curves. See PLANE53
in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for more details about this element. A similar 4 node element
(without voltage forced and magnetic-circuit coupled capability) is PLANE13.
Degree of freedom and force labels for this element are shown in the following table.
Table 1 DOF and Force Labels

Degree of Freedom Force (reaction solution)
Label Label Description Label Label Description
AZ [1] Magnetic Vector Potential CSGZ [2] Magnetic Current Segment
VOLT Voltage AMPS Current Flow
CURR Current Flow VLTG Voltage Drop
EMF Electromotive Force CURT Current Flow
1. The label used with the CNVTOL command is A.

2. The label used with the CNVTOL command is CSG.
L
3
K K, L, O
O
4
Y P P N
( axal) 2
N I
M
I
X ( adal) M Tri Option
J
1
PLANE53
PLANE53 Input Data

The element input data includes 8 nodes and the magnetic material properties. The type of units (MKS
or user defined) is specified through the EMUNIT command. EMUNIT also determines the value of
MUZRO. The EMUNIT defaults are MKS units and MUZRO = 4 π x 10-7 henries/meter. In addition to
MUZRO, orthotropic relative permeability is specified through the MURX and MURY material property
labels.
polarization and orthotropic material directions correspond to the element coordinate directions. The
element coordinate system orientation is as described in Coordinate Systems (p. 56). Properties not input
default as described in Linear Material Properties in the Material Reference. Nonlinear magnetic B-H
properties are entered with the TB command as described in "Material Models" in the Material Reference.
Nonlinear orthotropic magnetic properties may be specified with a combination of a B-H curve and
linear relative permeability. The B-H curve will be used in each element coordinate direction where a
zero value of relative permeability is specified. Only one B-H curve may be specified per material.
Various combinations of nodal loading are available for this element, depending upon the KEYOPT(1)
value. Nodal loads are defined with the D and the F commands. With the D command, the Lab variable
corresponds to the degree of freedom (VOLT or AZ) and VALUE corresponds to the value (time-integrated
electric scalar potential or vector magnetic potential). With the F command, the Lab variable corresponds
to the force (AMPS or CSGZ) and VALUE corresponds to the value (current or magnetic current segment).
The nodal forces, if any, should be input per unit of depth for a plane analysis and on a full 360° basis
for an axisymmetric analysis.
Element loads are described in Nodal Loading (p. 49). Maxwell force flags may be input on the element
faces indicated by the circled numbers in Figure 1 (p. 241) using the SF and SFE commands. Surfaces at
which magnetic forces are to be calculated may be identified by using the MXWF label on the surface
load commands (no value is required.) A Maxwell stress tensor calculation is performed at these surfaces
to obtain the magnetic forces. The surface flag should be applied to "air" elements adjacent to the body
for which forces are required. Deleting the MXWF specification removes the flag. Lorentz and Maxwell
forces may be made available for a subsequent structural analysis with companion elements [LDREAD].
The temperature (for material property evaluation only) and magnetic virtual displacement body loads
may be input based on their value at the element's nodes or as a single element value [BF, BFE]. Source
current density and voltage body loads may be applied to an area [BFA] or input as an element value
[BFE]. In general, unspecified nodal values of temperatures default to the uniform value specified with
the BFUNIF or TUNIF commands. Calculated Joule heating (JHEAT) may be made available for a sub-
sequent thermal analysis with companion elements [LDREAD].
Air elements in which local Jacobian forces are to be calculated may be identified by using nodal values
Elements (p. 76).
PLANE53

Nodes
I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P
Degrees of Freedom
AZ if KEYOPT(1) = 0
AZ, VOLT if KEYOPT(1) = 1
AZ, CURR if KEYOPT(1) = 2
AZ, CURR, EMF if KEYOPT(1) = 3 or 4
Real Constants
CARE, TURN, LENG, DIRZ, FILL, VELOX,

VELOY, OMEGAZ, XLOC, YLOC
See Table 2: PLANE53 Real Constants (p. 245) for descriptions of the real constants.
Material Properties
MUZERO, MURX, MURY, RSVX, MGXX, MGYY, plus BH data table (see "Material Models" in the Material
Reference)
Surface Loads
Maxwell Force flag --
Body Loads
Temperature --
Magnetic Virtual Displacement --
VD(I), VD(J), VD(K), VD(L), VD(M), VD(N),

VD(O), VD(P)
Source Current Density, if KEYOPT(1) = 0 --
spare, spare, JSZ(I), PHASE(I), spare, spare,

JSZ(J), PHASE(J), spare, spare, JSZ(K), PHASE(K),
spare, spare, JSZ(L), PHASE(L) spare, spare,
JSZ(M), PHASE(M), spare, spare, JSZ(N), PHASE(N),
spare, spare, JSZ(O), PHASE(O), spare, spare,
JSZ(P), PHASE(P)
Voltage Loading, if KEYOPT(1) = 2 --
VLTG(I), PHASE(I), VLTG(J), PHASE(J), VLTG(K), PHASE(K),

VLTG(L), PHASE(L), VLTG(M), PHASE(M), VLTG(N), PHASE(N),
VLTG(O), PHASE(O), VLTG(P), PHASE(P)
Special Features
Adaptive descent
Birth and death
PLANE53
KEYOPT(1)
0 --
AZ degree of freedom: static domain, induced eddy current domain
1 --
AZ, VOLT degrees of freedom: current-fed massive conductor
2 --
AZ, CURR degrees of freedom: voltage-fed stranded coil
3 --
AZ, CURR, EMF degrees of freedom: circuit-coupled stranded coil
4 --
AZ, CURR, EMF degrees of freedom: circuit-coupled massive conductor
KEYOPT(2)
Element conventional velocity:
0 --
Velocity effects ignored
1 --
Conventional velocity formulation (not available if KEYOPT(1) = 2, 3, or 4)
KEYOPT(3)
Element behavior:
0 --
Plane
1 --
Axisymmetric
KEYOPT(4)
0 --
1 --
KEYOPT(5)
0 --
1 --
Integration point printout
2 --
Nodal magnetic field printout
KEYOPT(7)
Store magnetic forces for coupling with elements:
0 --
Midside node (higher-order) structural elements
PLANE53
1 --
Non-midside node structural elements
Table 2 PLANE53 Real Constants

KEYOPT(1) ≥ 2 - voltage forced or electromagnetic-circuit coupled analyses (coils or
massive conductors)
1 CARE Coil cross-sectional area; required when KEYOPT(1) = 2, 3, 4
2 TURN Total number of coil turns (stranded coil only), default is 1; KEY-
OPT(1) = 2, 3
3 LENG Coil length in Z-direction, (required for planar models only), de-
fault is 1 meter; KEYOPT(1) = 2, 3, 4
4 DIRZ 1 for current in positive z-axis, -1 for current in negative z-axis;
KEYOPT(1) = 2, 3, 4
5 FILL Coil fill factor *; KEYOPT(1) = 2, 3
KEYOPT(2) = 1 (and KEYOPT(1) = 0 or 1) - Velocity effects of a conducting body
6 VELOX Velocity component in X-direction (global Cartesian)
7 VELOY Velocity component in Y-direction (global Cartesian)
8 OMEGAZ Angular (rotational) velocity (Hz, cycles/sec) about the Z-axis
(global Cartesian), at the pivot point
9 XLOC Pivot point X-location (global Cartesian coordinate)
10 YLOC Pivot point Y-location (global Cartesian coordinate)
* The ratio between the actual conductor area and the area of the coil or element geometry. Often, the
element approximation will differ from the profile of the conductor, especially in multi-strand coils.
PLANE53 Output Data

PLANE53
Figure 2 PLANE53 Magnetic Element Output
L O K
y
P B ,H
N
B, H
Y I
(or axial) J
M
Eement utput ectns
X (or radial) shwn e f KE OPT 4 = 0
Because of different sign conventions for Cartesian and polar coordinate systems, magnetic flux density
vectors point in opposite directions for planar (KEYOPT(3) = 0) and axisymmetric (KEYOPT(3) = 1) analyses.
available.

Name Definition O R
VOLU: Volume Y Y
CENT:X, Y Global location XC, YC Y Y
TEMP Temperatures T(I), T(J), T(K), T(L), T(M), T(N), T(O), T(P) Y Y
MUX, MUY Magnetic secant permeability 1 1
H:X, Y Magnetic field intensity components 1 1
B:X, Y Magnetic flux density components (X, Y) 1 1
JSZ Source current density, valid for static analysis only 1 1
JTZ Total current density 1 1
PLANE53
Name Definition O R
FJB(X, Y) Lorentz force components 1 1
FMX(X, Y) Maxwell force components 1 1
FVW(X, Y, SUM) Virtual work force components 1 1
FMAG:X, Y Combined (FJB or FMX) force components - 1
ERES Element resistance value (for stranded coils only) - 1
EIND Element inductance value (for stranded coils only) - 1
DMUXX, DMUYY Differential permeability 1 1
V:X, Y, SUM Velocity components 1 1
MRE Magnetic Reynolds number 1 1
TJB(Z) Lorentz torque about global Cartesian +Z-axis 1 1
TMX(Z) Maxwell torque about global Cartesian +Z-axis 1 1
TVW(Z) Virtual work torque about global Cartesian +Z-axis 1 1
1. The solution value is output only if calculated (based upon input data). The element solution is at the
centroid.
Note
For axisymmetric solutions with KEYOPT(4) = 0, the X and Y directions correspond to

the radial and axial directions, respectively.
For harmonic analysis, Joule losses (JHEAT), forces (FJB(X, Y), FMX(X, Y), FVW(X, Y)), and
torque (TJB(Z), TMX(Z), TVW(Z)) represent time-average values. These values are stored
in both the "Real" and “Imaginary” data sets. The macros POWERH, FMAGSUM, and
TORQSUM can be used to retrieve this data.
Inductance values (EIND) obtained for KEYOPT(1) = 2, 3, or 4 are only valid under the
following conditions: the problem is linear (constant permeability), there are no per-
manent magnets in the model, and only a single coil exists in the model.
For KEYOPT(1)=2 and 3, JT represents the effective current density (including non-
conducting material represented by the FILL factor). JHEAT represents the effective
Joule heat generation rate (including non-conducting material represented by the FILL
factor).
PLANE53

Nodal Solution H, HSUM, B, BSUM, FJB, FMX, 1 -
V, VSUM
Name
Item
E
Output ETABLE and

Quant- ESOL Command
ity Input
Name Item E
JSZ SMISC 1
MUX NMISC 1
MUY NMISC 2
FVWX NMISC 3
FVWY NMISC 4
FVWSUM NMISC 5
JTZ NMISC 7
ERES NMISC 8
EIND NMISC 9
DMUXX NMISC 10
DMUYY NMISC 11
VX NMISC 12
VY NMISC 13
MRE NMISC 15
TJB(X Y) NMISC 16
TMX(X, NMISC 17
Y)
PLANE53
Output ETABLE and

Quant- ESOL Command
ity Input
Name Item E
TVW(X, NMISC 18
Y)

• The element must lie in a global X-Y plane as shown in Figure 1 (p. 241), and the Y-axis must be the axis
of symmetry for axisymmetric analyses. An axisymmetric structure should be modeled in the +X quadrants.
• A face with a removed midside node implies that the potential varies linearly, rather than parabolically,
along that face. See Quadratic Elements (Midside Nodes) in the Modeling and Meshing Guide for more
information about the use of midside nodes.
• Current density loading (BFE,,JS) is only valid for the AZ option (KEYOPT(1) = 0). For the VOLT, AZ option
(KEYOPT(1) = 1) use F,,AMPS.
• When this element does not have the VOLT degree of freedom (KEYOPT(1) = 0), for a harmonic or
transient analysis, its behavior depends on the applied load. For a BFE,,JS load, the element acts as a
stranded conductor. Without BFE,,JS loads, it acts as a solid conductor modeling eddy current effects.
– In this respect, PLANE53 (and PLANE13) are not like the 3-D elements SOLID97, SOLID236, and
SOLID237. When SOLID97, SOLID236 and SOLID237 do not have the VOLT degree of freedom, they
act as stranded conductors.
• For magnetostatic analyses, the VOLT, AZ option is not allowed.
• For harmonic and transient (time-varying) analyses, the ANSYS product does not support the analysis
of coupled velocity and circuit effects.
• Reduced transient methods cannot be used. A 2-D planar or axisymmetric skin-effect analysis (where
eddy current formation is permitted in conducting regions with impressed current loading) is performed
by setting KEYOPT(1) = 1, specifying a resistivity, and coupling all VOLT degrees of freedom for elements
in each of such regions.
• For voltage forced magnetic field (KEYOPT(1) = 2) and circuit coupled problems (KEYOPT(1) = 3,4), note
the following additional restrictions:
– Only MKS units are allowed.
– The permeability and conductivity are isotropic and constant.
– All CURR degrees of freedom in a coil region must be coupled (CP command).
– All EMF degrees of freedom in a coil region must be coupled (CP command).
• For circuit coupled transient analyses, use THETA = 1.0, the default value, on the TINTP command to
specify the backward Euler method. For more information, refer to the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference,
as well as the description of the TINTP command in the Command Reference.
For velocity effects (KEYOPT(2) = 1), note the following restrictions:
• Velocity effects are valid only for AZ or AZ-VOLT DOF options.
PLANE53
• Isotropic resistivity.
• Solution accuracy may degrade if the element magnetic Reynolds number is much greater than
1.0. (See the discussion of magnetic field analysis in the Low-Frequency Electromagnetic Analysis
Guide.)
• If KEYOPT(1) ≥ 2 or KEYOPT(2) ≥ 1, unsymmetric matrices are produced.
• This element may not be compatible with other elements with the VOLT degree of freedom. To
be compatible, the elements must have the same reaction force (see Element Compatibility in the
Low-Frequency Electromagnetic Analysis Guide).

ANSYS Emag
PLANE55
2-D Thermal Solid

PLANE55 can be used as a plane element or as an axisymmetric ring element with a 2-D thermal con-
duction capability. The element has four nodes with a single degree of freedom, temperature, at each
node.
The element is applicable to a 2-D, steady-state or transient thermal analysis. The element can also
compensate for mass transport heat flow from a constant velocity field. If the model containing the
temperature element is also to be analyzed structurally, the element should be replaced by an equivalent
structural element (such as PLANE182).
A similar element with midside node capability is PLANE77. A similar axisymmetric element which accepts
nonaxisymmetric loading is PLANE75.
An option exists that allows the element to model nonlinear steady-state fluid flow through a porous
medium. With this option the thermal parameters are interpreted as analogous fluid flow parameters.
See PLANE55 in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for more details about this element.
3
L K
K, L
4
I
Y
(or axial) J
I
1 J Tngu Optn
X (or radial)
PLANE55 Input Data

The element is defined by four nodes and the orthotropic material properties. Orthotropic material
directions correspond to the element coordinate directions. The element coordinate system orientation
is as described in Coordinate Systems (p. 56). Specific heat and density are ignored for steady-state
solutions. Properties not input default as described in Linear Material Properties in the Material Reference.
rate HG(I) is input, and all others are unspecified, they default to HG(I).
PLANE55
A mass transport option is available with KEYOPT(8). With this option the velocities VX and VY must be
input as real constants (in the element coordinate system). Also, temperatures should be specified along
the entire inlet boundary to assure a stable solution. With mass transport, you should use specific heat
(C) and density (DENS) material properties instead of enthalpy (ENTH).
The nonlinear porous flow option is selected with KEYOPT(9) = 1. For this option, temperature is inter-
preted as pressure and the absolute permeabilities of the medium are input as material properties KXX
and KYY. Properties DENS and VISC are used for the mass density and viscosity of the fluid. See the
Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for a description of the properties C and MU, which are used in cal-
culating the coefficients of permeability, with reference to the Z terms ignored. Temperature boundary
conditions input with the D command are interpreted as pressure boundary conditions, and heat flow
boundary conditions input with the F command are interpreted as mass flow rate (mass/time).
This element can also have a Z-depth specified by KEYOPT(3) and real constant THK. Be careful when
using this option with other physics, especially radiation. Radiation view factors will be based on a unit
Z-depth (only).
Elements (p. 76).

Nodes
I, J, K, L
Degrees of Freedom
TEMP
Real Constants
THK, VX, VY
THK = Thickness (used only if KEYOPT(3) = 3)
VX = Mass transport velocity in X (used only if KEYOPT(8) > 0)
VY = Mass transport velocity in Y (used only if KEYOPT(8) > 0)

Material Properties
KXX, KYY, DENS, C, ENTH, VISC, MU (VISC and MU used only if KEYOPT (9) = 1. Do not use ENTH with
KEYOPT(8) = 1 or 2).
Surface Loads
Body Loads
Heat Generations --
Special Features
Birth and death
KEYOPT(1)
How to evaluate film coefficient:
PLANE55
0 --
Evaluate film coefficient (if any) at average film temperature, (TS + TB)/2
1 --
Evaluate at element surface temperature, TS
2 --
Evaluate at fluid bulk temperature, TB
3 --
Evaluate at differential temperature, |TS - TB|
KEYOPT(3)
Element behavior:
0 --
Plane
1 --
Axisymmetric
3 --
Plane with Z-depth, specified via real constant THK.
KEYOPT(4)
0 --
1 --
Element coordinate system is based on the element I-J side.
KEYOPT(8)
Mass transport effects:
0 --
No mass transport effects
1 --
Mass transport with VX and VY
2 --
Same as 1 but also print mass transport heat flow
KEYOPT(9)
Nonlinear fluid flow option:
0 --
Standard heat transfer element
1 --
Nonlinear steady-state fluid flow analogy element (temperature degree of freedom interpreted as
pressure)
PLANE55 Output Data


PLANE55
For an axisymmetric analysis the face area and the heat flow rate are on a full 360° basis. Convection
heat flux is positive out of the element; applied heat flux is positive into the element. If KEYOPT(9) = 1,
the standard thermal output should be interpreted as the analogous fluid flow output. The element
output directions are parallel to the element coordinate system. A general description of solution output
is given in Solution Output (p. 50) and of postprocessing data in Degenerated Shape Elements (p. 39).
available.

Name Definition O R
VOLU: Volume Y Y
HGEN Heat generations HG(I), HG(J), HG(K), HG(L) Y -
centroid
TF:X, Y, SUM Thermal flux (heat flow rate/cross-sectional area) com- Y Y
FACE Face label 1 -
AREA Face area 1 1
heat flux
RATE/AREA
PLANE55
Name Definition O R
HEAT FLOW BY Heat flow rate across face by mass transport 2 -
MASS TRANS-
PORT
PRESSURE GRAD Total pressure gradient and its X and Y components 3 -
MASS FLUX Mass flow rate per unit cross-sectional area 3 -
FLUID VELOCITY Total fluid velocity and its X and Y components 3 -
1. If a surface load is input

2. If KEYOPT(8) = 2
3. If KEYOPT(9) = 1
Name
Item
FCn

Quantity Item FC1 FC2 FC3 FC4
Name

• The element must not have a negative or a zero area.
• The element must lie in an X-Y plane as shown in Figure 1 (p. 251) and the Y-axis must be the axis
of symmetry for axisymmetric analyses. An axisymmetric structure should be modeled in the +X
quadrants.
• A triangular element may be formed by defining duplicate K and L node numbers as described in
Degenerated Shape Elements (p. 39).
PLANE55
• If the thermal element is to be replaced by a PLANE182 structural element with surface stresses
requested, the thermal element should be oriented with face IJ or face KL as a free surface. A free
surface of the element (that is, not adjacent to another element and not subjected to a boundary
• Thermal transients having a fine integration time step and a severe thermal gradient at the surface
will also require a fine mesh at the surface.
• If KEYOPT(8) > 0, unsymmetric matrices are produced.
• When mass flow is activated (KEYOPT(8)=1 or 2), the element Peclet number should be less than
1:
Pe = ρ*v*L*Cp/(2*k) <1.0
Where L is an element length scale based on the flow direction and element geometry. See
PLANE55 in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for more details.

ANSYS Professional
• This element does not have the mass transport or fluid flow options. KEYOPT(8) and KEYOPT(9) can
only be set to 0 (default).
• The VX and VY real constants are not applicable.
• The VISC and MU material properties are not applicable.
• The element does not have the birth and death feature.
SHELL61
Axisymmetric-Harmonic Structural Shell
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS

SHELL61 has four degrees of freedom at each node: translations in the nodal x, y, and z directions and
a rotation about the nodal z-axis. The loading may be axisymmetric or nonaxisymmetric. Various loading
cases are described in Harmonic Axisymmetric Elements with Nonaxisymmetric Loads (p. 77).
Extreme orientations of the conical shell element result in a cylindrical shell element or an annular disc
element. The shell element may have a linearly varying thickness. See SHELL61 in the Mechanical APDL
4
J
T3

x
Y (a ial) y
X (radial) 1
I 2
SHELL61 Input Data

The element is defined by two nodes, two end thicknesses, the number of harmonic waves (MODE on
the MODE command), a symmetry condition (ISYM on the MODE command), and the orthotropic
material properties. The element coordinate system is shown in Figure 2 (p. 260). θ is in the tangential
(hoop) direction. The MODE or ISYM parameters are discussed in detail in Harmonic Axisymmetric Elements
The material may be orthotropic, with nine elastic constants required for its description. The element
loading may be input as any combination of harmonically varying temperatures and pressures. Harmon-
ically varying nodal forces, if any, should be input on a full 360° basis.
SHELL61
The element may have variable thickness. The thickness is assumed to vary linearly between the nodes.
If the element has a constant thickness, only TK(I) is required. Real constant ADMSUA is used to define
an added mass per unit area.
act into the element. The pressures are applied at the surface of the element rather than at the
centroidal plane so that some thickness effects can be considered. These include the increase or decrease
in size of surface area the load is acting on and (in the case of a nonzero Poisson's ratio) an interaction
effect causing the element to grow longer or shorter under equal pressures on both surfaces. Material
properties EY, PRXY, and PRYZ (or EY, NUXY, and NUYZ) are required for this effect.
Harmonically varying temperatures may be input as element body loads at the four corner locations
shown in Figure 1 (p. 257). The first corner temperature T1 defaults to TUNIF. If all other temperatures
are unspecified, they default to T1. If only T1 and T2 are input, T3 defaults to T2 and T4 defaults to T1.
For any other input pattern, unspecified temperatures default to TUNIF.
KEYOPT(1) is used for temperature loading with MODE greater than zero and temperature-dependent
material properties. Material properties may only be evaluated at a constant (nonharmonically varying)
temperature. If MODE equals zero, the material properties are always evaluated at the average element
temperature. KEYOPT(3) is used to include or suppress the extra displacement shapes.

Nodes
I, J
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, UZ, ROTZ
Real Constants
TK(I) - Shell thickness at node I

TK(J) - Shell thickness at node J (TK(J) defaults to TK(I))
ADMSUA - Added mass/unit area
Material Properties
EX, EY, EZ, PRXY, PRYZ, PRXZ (or NUXY, NUYZ, NUXZ), ALPX, ALPZ (or CTEX, CTEY, CTEZ or THSX, THSY,
THSZ), DENS, GXZ, ALPD, BETD. (X is meridional, Y is through-the-thickness, and Z is circumferential.)
Surface Loads
Pressures --
face 1 (I-J) (top, in -Y direction)

face 2 (I-J) (bottom, in +Y direction)
Body Loads
Temperatures --
T1, T2, T3, T4
Mode Number
SHELL61
Loading Condition
Special Features
Stress stiffening
KEYOPT(1)
0 --
1 --
KEYOPT(3)
0 --
1 --
KEYOPT(4)
Member force and moment output:
0 --
No printout of member forces and moments
1 --
Print out member forces and moments in the element coordinate system
KEYOPT(6)
Location of element solution output:
0 --
Output solution at mid-length only
N --
Output solution at N equally spaced interior points and at end points (where N = 1, 3, 5, 7 or 9)
SHELL61 Output Data


Several items are illustrated in Figure 2 (p. 260). The printout may be displayed at the centroid, at the
end points and at N equally spaced interior points, where N is the KEYOPT(6) value. For example, if N
= 3, printout will be produced at end I, 1/4 length, mid-length (centroid), 3/4 length, and at end J.
Printout location number 1 is always at end I. Stress components which are inherently zero are printed
for clarity.
In the displacement printout, the UZ components are out-of-phase with the UX and UY components.
For example, in the MODE = 1, ISYM = 1 loading case, UX and UY are the peak values at θ = 0° and UZ
is the peak value at θ = 90°. We recommend that you always use the angle field on the SET command
SHELL61
when postprocessing the results. For more information about harmonic elements, see Harmonic
Axisymmetric Elements with Nonaxisymmetric Loads (p. 77)
SM θ (or z)
(Top)
X
SH
SH (Bot)
(Mid) SH
(Top)
SM
Y SM (Mid)
(Bot)
Z

available.

Name Definition O R
LENGTH Distance between node I and node J Y Y
TEMP Temperatures T1, T2, T3, T4 Y Y
PRES Pressures P1 (top) at nodes I,J; P2 (bottom) at nodes I,J Y Y
MODE Number of waves in loading Y Y
ISYM Loading key: 1 = symmetric, -1 = antisymmetric Y Y
SHELL61
Name Definition O R
T(X, Z, XZ) In-plane element X, Z, and XZ forces at KEYOPT(6) loca- Y Y
tion(s)
M(X, Z, XZ) Out-of-plane element X, Z, and XZ moments at KEY- Y Y
OPT(6) location(s)
MFOR(X, Y, Z), Member forces and member moment for each node in 1 Y
MMOMZ the element coordinate system
PK ANG Angle where stresses have peak values: 0 and Y Y
90/MODE°. Blank if MODE = 0.
S(M, THK, H, Stresses (meridional, through-thickness, hoop, meridi- Y Y
MH) onal-hoop) at PK ANG locations, repeated for top,
middle, and bottom of shell
EPEL(M, THK, H, Elastic strains (meridional, through-thickness, hoop, Y Y
MH) meridional-hoop) at PK ANG locations, repeated for top,
EPTH(M, THK, H, Thermal strains (meridional, through-thickness, hoop, Y Y
MH) meridional-hoop) at PK ANG locations, repeated for top,
1. These items are printed only if KEYOPT(4) = 1.

Table 2: SHELL61 Item and Sequence Numbers (KEYOPT(6) = 0 or 1) (p. 261) lists output available through
the ETABLE command using the Sequence Number method. See The General Postprocessor (POST1)
in the Basic Analysis Guide and The Item and Sequence Number Table (p. 52) in this manual for more in-
formation. The following notation is used in Table 2: SHELL61 Item and Sequence Numbers (KEYOPT(6) =
0 or 1) (p. 261):
Name
Item
I,J
ILn
sequence number for data at Intermediate Location n
Table 2 SHELL61 Item and Sequence Numbers (KEYOPT(6) = 0 or 1)

Quant- Input
ity Item I IL1 J
Name
Top
SM LS 1 13 25
STHK LS 2 14 26
SHELL61

Quant- Input
ity Item I IL1 J
Name
SH LS 3 15 27
SMH LS 4 16 28
EPELM LEPEL 1 13 25
EPELTHK LEPEL 2 14 26
EPELH LEPEL 3 15 27
EPELMH LEPEL 4 16 28
EPTHM LEPTH 1 13 25
EPTH- LEPTH 2 14 26
THK
EPTHH LEPTH 3 15 27
EPTHMH LEPTH 4 16 28
Mid
SM LS 5 17 29
STHK LS 6 18 30
SH LS 7 19 31
SMH LS 8 20 32
EPELM LEPEL 5 17 29
EPELH LEPEL 7 19 31
EPTHM LEPTH 5 17 29
EPTH- LEPTH 6 18 30
THK
EPTHH LEPTH 7 19 31
Bot
SM LS 9 21 33
STHK LS 10 22 34
SH LS 11 23 35
SMH LS 12 24 36
EPELM LEPEL 9 21 33
EPELH LEPEL 11 23 35
EPTHM LEPTH 9 21 33
SHELL61

Quant- Input
ity Item I IL1 J
Name
EPTH- LEPTH 10 22 34
THK
EPTHH LEPTH 11 23 35
Element
MFORX SMISC 1 - 7
MFORY SMISC 2 - 8
MFORZ SMISC 3 - 9
MMOMZ SMISC 6 - 12
TX SMISC 13 19 25
TZ SMISC 14 20 26
TXZ SMISC 15 21 27
MX SMISC 16 22 28
MZ SMISC 17 23 29
MXZ SMISC 18 24 30
P1 SMISC 31 - 32
P2 SMISC 35 - 36
Corner Location
1 2 3 4
TEMP LBFE 1 2 3 4
Table 3 SHELL61 Item and Sequence Numbers (KEYOPT(6) = 3)

Quant- Item I IL1 IL2 IL3 J
ity
Name
Top
SM LS 1 13 25 37 49
STHK LS 2 14 26 38 50
SH LS 3 15 27 39 51
SMH LS 4 16 28 40 52
EPELM LEPEL 1 13 25 37 49
EPELTHK LEPEL 2 14 26 38 50
EPELH LEPEL 3 15 27 39 51
EPELMH LEPEL 4 16 28 40 52
EPTHM LEPTH 1 13 25 37 49
SHELL61

ity
Name
EPTH- LEPTH 2 14 26 38 50
THK
EPTHH LEPTH 3 15 27 39 51
EPTHMH LEPTH 4 16 28 40 52
Mid
SM LS 5 17 29 41 53
STHK LS 6 18 30 42 54
SH LS 7 19 31 43 55
SMH LS 8 20 32 44 56
EPELH LEPEL 7 19 31 43 55
EPTH- LEPTH 6 18 30 42 54
THK
EPTHH LEPTH 7 19 31 43 55
Bot
SM LS 9 21 33 45 57
STHK LS 10 22 34 46 58
SH LS 11 23 35 47 59
SMH LS 12 24 36 48 60
EPELH LEPEL 11 23 35 47 59
EPTH- LEPTH 10 22 34 46 58
THK
EPTHH LEPTH 11 23 35 47 59
Element
MFORX SMISC 1 - - - 7
MFORY SMISC 2 - - - 8
MFORZ SMISC 3 - - - 9
SHELL61

ity
Name
MMOMZ SMISC 6 - - - 12
TX SMISC 13 19 25 31 37
TZ SMISC 14 20 26 32 38
TXZ SMISC 15 21 27 33 39
MX SMISC 16 22 28 34 40
MZ SMISC 17 23 29 35 41
MXZ SMISC 18 24 30 36 42
P1 SMISC 43 - - - 44
P2 SMISC 47 - - - 48
Corner Location
1 2 3 4
TEMP LBFE 1 2 3 4

Quant- Item I IL1 IL2 IL3 IL4 IL5 J
ity
Name
Top
SM LS 1 13 25 37 49 61 73
STHK LS 2 14 26 38 50 62 74
SH LS 3 15 27 39 51 63 75
SMH LS 4 16 28 40 52 64 76
EPELM LEPEL 1 13 25 37 49 61 73
EPELTHK LEPEL 2 14 26 38 50 62 74
EPELH LEPEL 3 15 27 39 51 63 75
EPELMH LEPEL 4 16 28 40 52 64 76
EPTHM LEPTH 1 13 25 37 49 61 73
EPTH- LEPTH 2 14 26 38 50 62 74
THK
EPTHH LEPTH 3 15 27 39 51 63 75
EPTHMH LEPTH 4 16 28 40 52 64 76
Mid
SM LS 5 17 29 41 53 65 77
STHK LS 6 18 30 42 54 66 78
SH LS 7 19 31 43 55 67 79
SHELL61

ity
Name
SMH LS 8 20 32 44 56 68 80
EPELM LEPEL 5 17 29 41 53 65 77
EPELTHK LEPEL 6 18 30 42 54 66 78
EPELH LEPEL 7 19 31 43 55 67 79
EPELMH LEPEL 8 20 32 44 56 68 80
EPTHM LEPTH 5 17 29 41 53 65 77
EPTH- LEPTH 6 18 30 42 54 66 78
THK
EPTHH LEPTH 7 19 31 43 55 67 79
EPTHMH LEPTH 8 20 32 44 56 68 80
Bot
SM LS 9 21 33 45 57 69 81
STHK LS 10 22 34 46 58 70 82
SH LS 11 23 35 47 59 71 83
SMH LS 12 24 36 48 60 72 84
EPELM LEPEL 9 21 33 45 57 69 81
EPELTHK LEPEL 10 22 34 46 58 70 82
EPELH LEPEL 11 23 35 47 59 71 83
EPELMH LEPEL 12 24 36 48 60 72 84
EPTHM LEPTH 9 21 33 45 57 69 81
EPTH- LEPTH 10 22 34 46 58 70 82
THK
EPTHH LEPTH 11 23 35 47 59 71 83
EPTHMH LEPTH 12 24 36 48 60 72 84
Element
MFORX SMISC 1 - - - - - 7
MFORY SMISC 2 - - - - - 8
MFORZ SMISC 3 - - - - - 9
MMOMZ SMISC 6 - - - - - 12
TX SMISC 13 19 25 31 37 43 49
TZ SMISC 14 20 26 32 38 44 50
TXZ SMISC 15 21 27 33 39 45 51
MX SMISC 16 22 28 34 40 46 52
MZ SMISC 17 23 29 35 41 47 53
MXZ SMISC 18 24 30 36 42 48 54
P1 SMISC 55 - - - - - 56
SHELL61

ity
Name
P2 SMISC 59 - - - - - 60
Corner Location
1 2 3 4
TEMP LBFE 1 2 3 4

Quant- Item I IL1 IL2 IL3 IL4 IL5 IL6 IL7 J
ity
Name
Top
SM LS 1 13 25 37 49 61 73 85 97
STHK LS 2 14 26 38 50 62 74 86 98
SH LS 3 15 27 39 51 63 75 87 99
SMH LS 4 16 28 40 52 64 76 88 100
EPELM LEPEL 1 13 25 37 49 61 73 85 97
EPELTHK LEPEL 2 14 26 38 50 62 74 86 98
EPELH LEPEL 3 15 27 39 51 63 75 87 99
EPELMH LEPEL 4 16 28 40 52 64 76 88 100
EPTHM LEPTH 1 13 25 37 49 61 73 85 97
EPTH- LEPTH 2 14 26 38 50 62 74 86 98
THK
EPTHH LEPTH 3 15 27 39 51 63 75 87 99
EPTHMH LEPTH 4 16 28 40 52 64 76 88 100
Mid
SM LS 5 17 29 41 53 65 77 89 101
STHK LS 6 18 30 42 54 66 78 90 102
SH LS 7 19 31 43 55 67 79 91 103
SMH LS 8 20 32 44 56 68 80 92 104
EPELM LEPEL 5 17 29 41 53 65 77 89 101
EPELTHK LEPEL 6 18 30 42 54 66 78 90 102
EPELH LEPEL 7 19 31 43 55 67 79 91 103
EPELMH LEPEL 8 20 32 44 56 68 80 92 104
EPTHM LEPTH 5 17 29 41 53 65 77 89 101
EPTH- LEPTH 6 18 30 42 54 66 78 90 102
THK
SHELL61

Quant- Item I IL1 IL2 IL3 IL4 IL5 IL6 IL7 J
ity
Name
EPTHH LEPTH 7 19 31 43 55 67 79 91 103
EPTHMH LEPTH 8 20 32 44 56 68 80 92 104
Bot
SM LS 9 21 33 45 57 69 81 93 105
STHK LS 10 22 34 46 58 70 82 94 106
SH LS 11 23 35 47 59 71 83 95 107
SMH LS 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108
EPELM LEPEL 9 21 33 45 57 69 81 93 105
EPELTHK LEPEL 10 22 34 46 58 70 82 94 106
EPELH LEPEL 11 23 35 47 59 71 83 95 107
EPELMH LEPEL 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108
EPTHM LEPTH 9 21 33 45 57 69 81 93 105
EPTH- LEPTH 10 22 34 46 58 70 82 94 106
THK
EPTHH LEPTH 11 23 35 47 59 71 83 95 107
EPTHMH LEPTH 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108
Element
MFORX SMISC 1 - - - - - - - 7
MFORY SMISC 2 - - - - - - - 8
MFORZ SMISC 3 - - - - - - - 9
MMOMZ SMISC 6 - - - - - - - 12
TX SMISC 13 19 25 31 37 43 49 55 61
TZ SMISC 14 20 26 32 38 44 50 56 62
TXZ SMISC 15 21 27 33 39 45 51 57 63
MX SMISC 16 22 28 34 40 46 52 58 64
MZ SMISC 17 23 29 35 41 47 53 59 65
MXZ SMISC 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66
P1 SMISC 67 - - - - - - - 68
P2 SMISC 71 - - - - - - - 72
SHELL61
Corner Location
1 2 3 4
TEMP LBFE 1 2 3 4

Quant- Item I IL1 IL2 IL3 IL4 IL5 IL6 IL7 IL8 IL9 J
ity La-
bel
Top
SM LS 1 13 25 37 49 61 73 85 97 109 121
STHK LS 2 14 26 38 50 62 74 86 98 110 122
SH LS 3 15 27 39 51 63 75 87 99 111 123
SMH LS 4 16 28 40 52 64 76 88 100 112 124
EPELM LEPEL 1 13 25 37 49 61 73 85 97 109 121
EPELTHK LEPEL 2 14 26 38 50 62 74 86 98 110 122
EPELH LEPEL 3 15 27 39 51 63 75 87 99 111 123
EPELMH LEPEL 4 16 28 40 52 64 76 88 100 112 124
EPTHM LEPTH 1 13 25 37 49 61 73 85 97 109 121
EPTH- LEPTH 2 14 26 38 50 62 74 86 98 110 122
THK
EPTHH LEPTH 3 15 27 39 51 63 75 87 99 111 123
EPTHMH LEPTH 4 16 28 40 52 64 76 88 100 112 124
Mid
SM LS 5 17 29 41 53 65 77 89 101 113 125
STHK LS 6 18 30 42 54 66 78 90 102 114 126
SH LS 7 19 31 43 55 67 79 91 103 115 127
SMH LS 8 20 32 44 56 68 80 92 104 116 128
EPELM LEPEL 5 17 29 41 53 65 77 89 101 113 125
EPELTHK LEPEL 6 18 30 42 54 66 78 90 102 114 126
EPELH LEPEL 7 19 31 43 55 67 79 91 103 115 127
EPELMH LEPEL 8 20 32 44 56 68 80 92 104 116 128
EPTHM LEPTH 5 17 29 41 53 65 77 89 101 113 125
EPTH- LEPTH 6 18 30 42 54 66 78 90 102 114 126
THK
EPTHH LEPTH 7 19 31 43 55 67 79 91 103 115 127
EPTHMH LEPTH 8 20 32 44 56 68 80 92 104 116 128
Bot
SM LS 9 21 33 45 57 69 81 93 105 117 129
STHK LS 10 22 34 46 58 70 82 94 106 118 130
SHELL61

Quant- Item I IL1 IL2 IL3 IL4 IL5 IL6 IL7 IL8 IL9 J
ity La-
bel
SH LS 11 23 35 47 59 71 83 95 107 119 131
SMH LS 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120 132
EPELM LEPEL 9 21 33 45 57 69 81 93 105 117 129
EPELTHK LEPEL 10 22 34 46 58 70 82 94 106 118 130
EPELH LEPEL 11 23 35 47 59 71 83 95 107 119 131
EPELMH LEPEL 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120 132
EPTHM LEPTH 9 21 33 45 57 69 81 93 105 117 129
EPTH- LEPTH 10 22 34 46 58 70 82 94 106 118 130
THK
EPTHH LEPTH 11 23 35 47 59 71 83 95 107 119 131
EPTHMH LEPTH 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120 132
Element
MFORX SMISC 1 - - - - - - - - - 7
MFORY SMISC 2 - - - - - - - - - 8
MFORZ SMISC 3 - - - - - - - - - 9
MMOMZ SMISC 6 - - - - - - - - - 12
TX SMISC 13 19 25 31 37 43 49 55 61 67 73
TZ SMISC 14 20 26 32 38 44 50 56 62 68 74
TXZ SMISC 15 21 27 33 39 45 51 57 63 69 75
MX SMISC 16 22 28 34 40 46 52 58 64 70 76
MZ SMISC 17 23 29 35 41 47 53 59 65 71 77
MXZ SMISC 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78
P1 SMISC 79 - - - - - - - - - 80
P2 SMISC 83 - - - - - - - - - 84
Corner Location
1 2 3 4
TEMP LBFE 1 2 3 4

• The axisymmetric shell element must be defined in the global X-Y plane and must not have a zero
length. Both ends must have nonnegative X coordinate values and the element must not lie along the
global Y-axis.
• If the element has a constant thickness, only TK(I) need be defined. TK(I) must not be zero.
• The element thickness is assumed to vary linearly from node I to node J. Some thick shell effects have
been included in the formulation of SHELL61 but it cannot be properly considered to be a thick shell
element. If these effects are important, it is recommended to use PLANE25.
SHELL61
• The element assumes a linear elastic material.

• Post analysis superposition of results is valid only with other linear elastic solutions.
• Strain energy does not consider thermal effects.
• The element should not be used with the large deflection option.
• You can use only axisymmetric (MODE,0) loads without significant torsional stresses to generate the
stress state used for stress stiffened modal analyses using this element.

There are no product restrictions for this element.
SOLID62
3-D Magneto-Structural Solid
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME <>

SOLID62 has the capability of modeling 3-D coupled magneto-structural fields. The magnetic formulation
uses a vector potential (AX, AY, AZ) in static analysis and a vector potential combined with a time-integ-
rated scalar potential (VOLT) for harmonic and transient analysis. The structural formulation is similar
to that in the SOLID45 element. The element has plasticity, creep, swelling, stress stiffening, large de-
flection, and large strain capabilities. Other elements with magneto-structural capability are PLANE13,
SOLID5, and SOLID98. Magneto-structural coupling is not available for harmonic analysis. See SOLID62
The element has nonlinear magnetic harmonic capability for modeling B-H curves or permanent magnet
demagnetization curves.

I
4
5 P
O
T rah ral
6 M O,P
M N
N I K,L
2 y 3
L J
Wedge Option
K

Z x
I 1
Y J
X Sufce Coodinte Sstem
! "# $%
SOLID62 Input Data

The element is defined by eight nodes and the material properties. A tetrahedral-shaped element may
be formed by defining the same node numbers for nodes M, N, O, and P; and nodes K and L. A wedge-
shaped element and a pyramid-shaped element may also be formed as shown in Figure 1 (p. 273). The
type of units (MKS or user defined) for magnetic field analysis is specified through the EMUNIT command.
EMUNIT also determines the value of MUZRO. The EMUNIT defaults are MKS units and MUZRO = 4 π
SOLID62
x 10-7 henries/meter. In addition to MUZRO, orthotropic relative permeability is available and is specified
through the MURX, MURY, and MURZ material property labels. Orthotropic resistivity is specified through
the RSVX, RSVY, and RSVZ material labels.
Permanent magnet polarization directions correspond to the element coordinate directions. The element
coordinate system orientation is as described in Coordinate Systems (p. 56). Nonlinear magnetic properties
are entered with the TB command as described in "Material Models" in the Material Reference. Nonlinear
orthotropic magnetic properties may be specified with a combination of a B-H curve and linear relative
permeability. The B-H curve will be used in each element coordinate direction where a zero value of
relative permeability is specified. Only one B-H curve may be specified per material.
Nodal loads are defined with the D and the F commands. With the D command, the Lab variable cor-
responds to the degree of freedom (UX, UY, UZ, AX, AY, AZ, VOLT) and VALUE corresponds to the value
(displacement, magnetic vector potential, and time-integrated electric scalar potential). With the F
command, the Lab variable corresponds to the force (FX, FY, FZ, CSGX, CSGY, CSGZ, AMPS) and VALUE
corresponds to the value (force, magnetic current segments, and current).
Element loads are described in Nodal Loading (p. 49). The surface loads; pressure and Maxwell force
flags may be input on the element faces indicated by the circled numbers in Figure 1 (p. 273) using the
SF and SFE commands. Surfaces at which magnetic forces are to be calculated may be identified by
using the MXWF label on the surface load commands (no value is required). A Maxwell stress tensor
calculation is performed at these surfaces to obtain the magnetic forces. These forces are applied in
solution as structural loads. The surface flag should be applied to "air" elements adjacent to the body
for which forces are required. Deleting the MXWF specification removes the flag.
The body loads; temperature (structural), magnetic virtual displacement, fluence, and source current
density may be input based on their value at the element's nodes or as a single element value (BF and
BFE commands.) In general, unspecified nodal values of temperatures and fluence default to the uniform
value specified with the BFUNIF or TUNIF commands. The vector components of the current density
are with respect to the element coordinate system. Calculated Joule heating (JHEAT) may be made
available for a subsequent thermal analysis with companion elements (LDREAD command).
of 1 and 0 for the MVDI (Magnetic Virtual Displacements) label (BF command). See the Low-Frequency
Electromagnetic Analysis Guide for details.

Nodes
I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, UZ, AX, AY, AZ, VOLT
Real Constants
None
SOLID62
Material Properties
MUZERO, MURX, MURY, MURZ, RSVX, RSVY, RSVZ,

MGXX, MGYY, MGZZ plus BH data table (see "Material Models" in the Material Reference),
EX, EY, EZ, ALPX, ALPY, ALPZ (or CTEX, CTEY, CTEZ or THSX, THSY, THSZ),
(PRXY, PRYZ, PRXZ or NUXY, NUYZ, NUXZ),
DENS, GXY, GXZ, GYZ, ALPD, BETD
Surface Loads
Maxwell Force Flags --
face 1 (J-I-L-K), face 2 (I-J-N-M), face 3 (J-K-O-N), face 4 (K-L-P-O), face 5 (L-I-M-P), face 6 (M-N-O-P)
Pressures --
Body Loads
Temperatures --
MVDI --
Fluences --
FL(I), FL(J), FL(K), FL(L), FL(M), FL(N), FL(O), FL(P)
Source Current Density --
JSX(I), JSY(I), JSZ(I), PHASE(I), JSX(J), JSY(J), JSZ(J), PHASE(J), JSX(K), JSY(K), JSZ(K), PHASE(K), JSX(L),
JSY(L), JSZ(L), PHASE(L), JSX(M), JSY(M), JSZ(M), PHASE(M), JSX(N), JSY (N), JSZ(N), PHASE(N), JSX(O),
JSY(O), JSZ(O), PHASE(O), JSX(P), JSY(P), JSZ(P), PHASE(P)
Special Features
Adaptive descent
Birth and death
Creep
Large deflection
Large strain
Plasticity
Stress stiffening
Swelling
KEYOPT(1)
0 --
1 --
KEYOPT(5)
0 --
1 --
SOLID62
2 --
Nodal magnetic field and stress printout
KEYOPT(6)
Extra surface output:
0 --
1 --
Structural surface solution for face I-J-N-M also
2 --
Structural surface solution for face I-J-N-M and face K-L-P-O (Surface solution available for linear
materials only)
3 --
Structural nonlinear solution at each integration point also
4 --
Structural surface solution for faces with nonzero pressure
SOLID62 Output Data

• Nodal displacements and potentials included in the overall nodal solution

• Additional element output as shown in Table 1: SOLID62 Structural Element Output Definitions (p. 276)
The element output directions are parallel to the element coordinate system.
The element stress directions are parallel to the element coordinate system. The surface stress outputs
are in the surface coordinate systems and are available for any face (KEYOPT(6)). The coordinate systems
for faces IJNM and KLPO are shown in Figure 1 (p. 273). The other surface coordinate systems follow
similar orientations as indicated by the pressure face node description. Surface stress printout is valid
only if the conditions described in Element Solution (p. 51) are met. A general description of solution
output is given in Solution Output (p. 50). See the Basic Analysis Guide for ways to view results.
available.
Table 1 SOLID62 Structural Element Output Definitions

Name Definition O R
SOLID62
Name Definition O R
VOLU: Volume Y Y
PRES Pressures P1 at nodes J, I, L, K; P2 at I, J, N, M; P3 at Y Y
J, K, O, N; P4 at K, L, P, O; P5 at L, I, M, P; P6 at M, N,
O, P
TEMP Input temperatures T(I), T(J), T(K), T(L), T(M), T(N), Y Y
T(O), T(P)
FLUEN Input fluences FL(I), FL(J), FL(K), FL(L), FL(M), FL(N), Y -
FL(O), FL(P)
S:X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ Stresses (X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ) Y Y
S:1, 2, 3 Principal stresses Y Y
S:INT Stress intensity Y Y
EPEL:X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, Elastic strains Y Y
XZ
EPEL:1, 2, 3 Principal elastic strains Y -
EPEL:EQV Equivalent elastic strain [4] Y Y
EPTH:X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, Average thermal strains 1 1
XZ
EPTH:EQV Equivalent thermal strain [4] 1 1
EPPL:X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, Average plastic strain 1 1
XZ
EPPL:EQV Equivalent plastic strain [4] 1 1
EPCR:X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, Average creep strain 1 1
XZ
EPCR:EQV Equivalent creep strain [4] 1 1
EPSW: Average swelling strain 1 1
NL:EPEQ Average equivalent plastic strain 1 1
NL:SRAT Ratio of trial stress to stress on yield surface 1 1
NL:SEPL Average equivalent stress from stress-strain curve 1 1
NL:HPRES Hydrostatic pressure - 1
FACE Face label 2 2
AREA Face area 2 2
EPEL(X, Y, XY) Surface elastic strains 2 2
PRESS Surface pressure 2 2
S(X, Y, XY) Surface stresses (X-axis parallel to line defined by 2 2
first two nodes which define the face)
S(1, 2, 3) Surface principal stresses 2 2
SINT Surface stress intensity 2 2
SOLID62
Name Definition O R
SEQV Surface equivalent stress 2 2
1. Nonlinear solution (if the element has a nonlinear material)

2. Face printout (if KEYOPT(6) is 1, 2, or 4)
user (MP,PRXY); for plastic and creep this value is set at 0.5.
Table 2 SOLID62 Miscellaneous Structural Element Output

Nonlinear Integration Pt. Solu- EPPL, EPEQ, SRAT, SEPL, HPRES, EPCR, EPSW 1 -
tion
Integration Point Stress Solution TEMP, S(X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ), SINT, SEQV, EPEL 2 -
Nodal Stress Solution TEMP, S(X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ), SINT, SEQV, EPEL 3 -
1. Output at each of eight integration points, if the element has a nonlinear material and KEYOPT(6) = 3
Table 3 SOLID62 Magnetic Element Output Definitions

Name Definition O R
VOLU: Volume Y Y
CENT: X, Y, Z Global location XC, YC, ZC Y Y
T(O), T(P)
LOC Output location (X, Y, Z) 1 -
MU(X, Y, Z) Magnetic permeability 1 1
H:X, Y, Z Magnetic field intensity components 1 1
JS:X, Y, Z Source current density, valid for static analysis 1 1
only
JT(X, Y, Z) Total current density components 1 1
FJB(X, Y, Z) Lorentz magnetic force components 1 -
SOLID62
Name Definition O R
FMX(X, Y, Z) Maxwell magnetic force components 1 -
FVW(X, Y, Z) Virtual work force components 1 1
Combined (FJB Combined (FJB or FMX) force components - 1
or FMX) force
components
1. The solution value is output only if calculated (based on input data). The element solution is at the
centroid.
Table 4 SOLID62 Miscellaneous Magnetic Element Output

Integration Point Solution LOC, MUX, MUY, MUZ, H, HSUM, B, BSUM 1 -
Nodal Magnetic Field Solu- H, HSUM, B, BSUM 2 -
tion

2. Output at each corner node, if KEYOPT(5) = 2
Note
and The Item and Sequence Number Table (p. 52) in this manual for more information. The following
notation is used in Table 5: SOLID62 Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 279):
Name
output quantity as defined in the Table 1: SOLID62 Structural Element Output Definitions (p. 276)
Item
E
Output ETABLE and

Quant- ESOL Command
ity Input
Name Item E
JSX SMISC 1
JSY SMISC 2
JSZ SMISC 3
JS(SUM) SMISC 4
SOLID62
Output ETABLE and

Quant- ESOL Command
ity Input
Name Item E
MUX NMISC 1
MUY NMISC 2
MUZ NMISC 3
FVWX NMISC 4
FVWY NMISC 5
FVWZ NMISC 6
FVW(SUM) NMISC 7
JTX NMISC 12
JTY NMISC 13
JTZ NMISC 14
JT(SUM) NMISC 15

element is not numbered properly. Elements may be numbered either as shown in Figure 1 (p. 273) or
may have the planes IJKL and MNOP interchanged.
• The PCG solver does not support SOLID62 elements.
• For models containing materials with different permeabilities, the 3-D nodal-based vector potential
formulation (either static or time-dependent) is not recommended. The solution has been found to be
incorrect when the normal component of the vector potential is significant at the interface between
elements of different permeability. To obtain the normal component of the vector potential in postpro-
cessing, issue PLVECT,A or PRVECT,A in a rotated coordinate system [RSYS] that orients one of the
vector potential components normal to the material interface.
• For static analysis, the VOLT degree of freedom is not used.
• For transient analyses, the following restrictions apply: The VOLT degree of freedom is required in all
regions with a specified nonzero resistivity. The VOLT degree of freedom should be set to zero in non-
conducting regions where it is not required. For conducting regions (RSVX ≠ 0), current loading should
be applied as nodal loads (AMPS); current density loading (JS) is not allowed.
• The element requires an iterative solution for magneto-structural coupling.
• No coupling is introduced for harmonic analysis. The magneto-structural coupling is invoked only for
static and transient analyses. No reduced transient analysis capability is available. Structural coupling
is introduced automatically in current carrying conductors (either those with an applied current density,
JS, or induced current density, JT). Structural coupling is also introduced by specifying a Maxwell surface
on the "air" elements adjacent to the structure.
Applying MVDI does not introduce magneto-structural coupling. The coupling is highly nonlinear
if large deflection is involved. Ramp load slowly and converge at intermediate time substeps.
• Degeneration to the form of pyramid should be used with caution. The element sizes, when degenerated,
should be small in order to minimize the stress gradients and field gradients.
SOLID62
• Pyramid elements are best used as filler elements or in meshing transition zones.
compatible, the elements must have the same reaction force (see Element Compatibility in the Low-
Frequency Electromagnetic Analysis Guide).

SOLID65
3-D Reinforced Concrete Solid
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS

SOLID65 is used for the 3-D modeling of solids with or without reinforcing bars (rebar). The solid is
capable of cracking in tension and crushing in compression. In concrete applications, for example, the
solid capability of the element may be used to model the concrete while the rebar capability is available
for modeling reinforcement behavior. Other cases for which the element is also applicable would be
reinforced composites (such as fiberglass), and geological materials (such as rock). The element is defined
by eight nodes having three degrees of freedom at each node: translations in the nodal x, y, and z dir-
ections. Up to three different rebar specifications may be defined.
The concrete element is similar to a 3-D structural solid but with the addition of special cracking and
crushing capabilities. The most important aspect of this element is the treatment of nonlinear material
properties. The concrete is capable of cracking (in three orthogonal directions), crushing, plastic deform-
ation, and creep. The rebar are capable of tension and compression, but not shear. They are also capable
of plastic deformation and creep. See SOLID65 in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for more details
about this element.
4
5 P
O O,

6
,L
M N Reba
z 3
2 rism Option
L
φ
y
K
θ
x
Z
I
Y 1
J Teahedal
X ( eceded)
SOLID65 Input Data
The element is defined by eight nodes and the isotropic material properties. The element has one solid
material and up to three rebar materials. Use the MAT command to input the concrete material prop-
erties. Rebar specifications, which are input as real constants, include the material number (MAT), the
SOLID65
volume ratio (VR), and the orientation angles (THETA, PHI). The rebar orientations can be graphically
verified with the /ESHAPE command.
The volume ratio is defined as the rebar volume divided by the total element volume. The orientation
is defined by two angles (in degrees) from the element coordinate system. The element coordinate
system orientation is as described in Coordinate Systems (p. 56). A rebar material number of zero or
equal to the element material number removes that rebar capability.
Additional concrete material data, such as the shear transfer coefficients, tensile stresses, and compressive
stresses are input in the data table, for convenience, as described in Table 1: SOLID65 Concrete Material
Data (p. 287). Typical shear transfer coefficients range from 0.0 to 1.0, with 0.0 representing a smooth
crack (complete loss of shear transfer) and 1.0 representing a rough crack (no loss of shear transfer).
This specification may be made for both the closed and open crack. When the element is cracked or
crushed, a small amount of stiffness is added to the element for numerical stability. The stiffness multi-
plier CSTIF is used across a cracked face or for a crushed element, and defaults to 1.0E-6.
Temperatures and fluences may be input as element body loads at the nodes. The node I temperature
T(I) defaults to TUNIF. If all other temperatures are unspecified, they default to T(I). For any other input
pattern, unspecified temperatures default to TUNIF. Similar defaults occurs for fluence except that zero
is used instead of TUNIF.
Use the BETAD command to specify the global value of damping. If MP,BETD is defined for the mater-
ial number of the element (assigned with the MAT command), it is summed with the value from the
BETAD command. Similarly, use the TREF command to supply the global value of reference temperature.
If MP,REFT is defined for the material number of the element, it is used for the element instead of the
value from the TREF command. But if MP,REFT is defined for the material number of the rebar, it is
used instead of either the global or element value.
KEYOPT(1) is used to include or suppress the extra displacement shapes. KEYOPT(5) and KEYOPT(6)
provide various element printout options (see Element Solution (p. 51)).
The stress relaxation associated with KEYOPT(7) = 1 is used only to help accelerate convergence of the
calculations when cracking is imminent. (A multiplier for the amount of tensile stress relaxation can be
input as constant C9 in the data table; see Table 1: SOLID65 Concrete Material Data (p. 287)) The relaxation
does not represent a revised stress-strain relationship for post-cracking behavior. After the solution
converges to the cracked state, the modulus normal to the crack face is set to zero. Thus, the stiffness
is zero normal to the crack face. See the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for details.
The program warns when each unreinforced element crushes at all integration points. If this warning
is unwanted, it can be suppressed with KEYOPT(8) = 1.
If solution convergence is a problem, it is recommended to set KEYOPT(3) = 2 and apply the load in
very small load increments.
You can include the effects of pressure load stiffness in a geometric nonlinear analysis using SOLCON-
TROL,,,INCP. Pressure load stiffness effects are included in linear eigenvalue buckling automatically. If
an unsymmetric matrix is needed for pressure load stiffness effects, use NROPT,UNSYM.
SOLID65

Nodes
I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, UZ
Real Constants
MAT1, VR1, THETA1, PHI1, MAT2, VR2,

THETA2, PHI2, MAT3, VR3, THETA3, PHI3, CSTIF
(where MATn is material number, VRn is volume ratio, and THETAn and PHIn are orientation angles
for up to 3 rebar materials)
Material Properties
EX, ALPX (or CTEX or THSX), PRXY or NUXY, DENS (for concrete)
EX, ALPX (or CTEX or THSX), DENS (for each rebar), ALPD
Specify BETD only once for the element (use MAT command to assign material property set). REFT
may be supplied once for the element, or may be assigned on a per rebar basis. See the discussion
in "SOLID65 Input Data" (p. 283) for more details.
Surface Loads
Pressures --

Body Loads
Temperatures --
Fluences --
FL(I), FL(J), FL(K), FL(L), FL(M), FL(N), FL(O), FL(P)
Special Features
Adaptive descent
Birth and death
Concrete
Cracking
Creep
Crushing
Elasticity
Large deflection
Large strain
Plasticity
Stress stiffening
Swelling
User-defined material
KEYOPT(1)
SOLID65
0 --
1 --
KEYOPT(3)
Behavior of totally crushed unreinforced elements:
0 --
Base
1 --
Suppress mass and applied loads, and warning message (see KEYOPT(8))
2 --
Features of 1 and apply consistent Newton-Raphson load vector.
KEYOPT(5)
Concrete linear solution output:
0 --
Print concrete linear solution only at centroid
1 --
Repeat solution at each integration point
2 --
KEYOPT(6)
Concrete nonlinear solution output:
0 --
Print concrete nonlinear solution only at centroid
3 --
Print solution also at each integration point
KEYOPT(7)
Stress relaxation after cracking:
0 --
No tensile stress relaxation after cracking
1 --
Include tensile stress relaxation after cracking to help convergence
KEYOPT(8)
Warning message for totally crushed unreinforced element:
0 --
Print the warning
1 --
Suppress the warning
SOLID65 Concrete Information

The data listed in Table 1: SOLID65 Concrete Material Data (p. 287) is entered in the data table with the
TB commands. Data not input are assumed to be zero, except for defaults described below. The constant
table is started by using the TBcommand (with Lab = CONCR). Up to eight constants may be defined
SOLID65
with the TBDATA commands following a temperature definition on the TBTEMP command. Up to six
temperatures (NTEMP = 6 maximum on the TB command) may be defined with the TBTEMP commands.
The constants (C1-C9) entered on the TBDATA commands (6 per command), after each TBTEMP com-
mand, are:
Table 1 SOLID65 Concrete Material Data

Constant Meaning
1 Shear transfer coefficients for an open crack.
2 Shear transfer coefficients for a closed crack.
3 Uniaxial tensile cracking stress.
4 Uniaxial crushing stress (positive).
5 Biaxial crushing stress (positive).
6 Ambient hydrostatic stress state for use with constants 7 and 8.
7 Biaxial crushing stress (positive) under the ambient hydrostatic stress state
(constant 6).
8 Uniaxial crushing stress (positive) under the ambient hydrostatic stress
state (constant 6).
9 Stiffness multiplier for cracked tensile condition, used if KEYOPT(7) = 1
(defaults to 0.6).
Absence of the data table removes the cracking and crushing capability. A value of -1 for constant 3
or 4 also removes the cracking or crushing capability, respectively. If constants 1-4 are input and constants
5-8 are omitted, the latter constants default as discussed in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference. If
any one of Constants 5-8 are input, there are no defaults and all 8 constants must be input.
SOLID65 Output Data


• Additional element output as shown in Table 2: SOLID65 Element Output Definitions (p. 288)
coordinate system. Nonlinear material printout appears only if nonlinear properties are specified. Rebar
printout appears only for the rebar defined. If cracking or crushing is possible, printout for the concrete
is also at the integration points, since cracking or crushing may occur at any integration point. The
PLCRACK command can be used in POST1 to display the status of the integration points. A general
description of solution output is given in Solution Output (p. 50). See the Basic Analysis Guide for ways
to view results.
SOLID65
Figure 2 SOLID65 Stress Output
Crack lane
P
O
M θcr φcr
S N
S(rebar)
L S
S K
Z
I
Y J
X
available.

Name Definition O R
EL Element number Y Y
NREINF Number of rebar Y -
VOLU: Volume Y Y
PRES Pressures P1 at nodes J, I, L, K; P2 at I, J, N, M; P3 at Y Y
O, P
FLUEN Fluences FL(I), FL(J), FL(K), FL(L), FL(M), FL(N), FL(O), Y Y
FL(P)
S:X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ Stresses 1 1
SOLID65
Name Definition O R
XZ
EPTH:X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, Average thermal strains 1 1
XZ
EPPL:X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, Average plastic strains 4 4
XZ
EPPL:EQV Equivalent plastic strains [7] 4 4
EPCR:X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, Average creep strains 4 4
XZ
EPCR:EQV Equivalent creep strains [7] 4 4
NL:EPEQ Average equivalent plastic strain 4 4
NL:SRAT Ratio of trial stress to stress on yield surface 4 4
NL:SEPL Average equivalent stress from stress-strain curve 4 4
THETCR, PHICR THETA and PHI angle orientations of the normal to 1 1
the crack plane
STATUS Element status 2 2
IRF Rebar number 3 -
MAT Material number 3 -
VR Volume ratio 3 -
THETA Angle of orientation in X-Y plane 3 -
PHI Angle of orientation out of X-Y plane 3 -
EPEL Uniaxial elastic strain 3 -
S Uniaxial stress 3 -
EPEL Average uniaxial elastic strain 5 5
EPPL Average uniaxial plastic strain 5 5
SEPL Average equivalent stress from stress-strain curve 5 5
EPCR Average uniaxial creep strain 5 5
1. Concrete solution item (output for each integration point (if KEYOPT(5) = 1) and the centroid)
2. The element status table (Table 4: SOLID65 Element Status Table (p. 290)) uses the following terms:
• Crushed - solid is crushed.
• Open - solid is cracked and the crack is open.
• Closed - solid is cracked but the crack is closed.
SOLID65
• Neither - solid is neither crushed nor cracked.

3. Rebar solution item repeats for each rebar
4. Concrete nonlinear integration point solution (if KEYOPT(6) = 3 and the element has a nonlinear ma-
terial)
5. Rebar nonlinear integration point solution (if KEYOPT(6) = 3 and the rebar has a nonlinear material)
Table 3 SOLID65 Miscellaneous Element Output

Nodal Stress Solution TEMP, S(X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ), SINT, 1 -
SEQV
Table 4 SOLID65 Element Status Table

Status Status in Direction Status in Direction Status in Direction
1 2 3
1 Crushed Crushed Crushed
2 Open Neither Neither
3 Closed Neither Neither
4 Open Open Neither
5 Open Open Open
6 Closed Open Open
7 Closed Open Neither
8 Open Closed Open
9 Closed Closed Open
10 Open Closed Neither
11 Open Open Closed
12 Closed Open Closed
13 Closed Closed Neither
14 Open Closed Closed
15 Closed Closed Closed
16 Neither Neither Neither
SOLID65
Name
Item
I,J,...,P
IP
sequence number for Integration Point solution items

Quant- Item Rebar Rebar Rebar
ity 1 2 3
Name
EPEL SMISC 1 3 5
SIG SMISC 2 4 6
EPPL NMISC 41 45 49
EPCR NMISC 42 46 50
SEPL NMISC 43 47 51
SRAT NMISC 44 48 52

Quant- Item I J K L M N O P
ity
Name
P1 SMISC 8 7 10 9 - - - -
P2 SMISC 11 12 - - 14 13 - -
P3 SMISC - 15 16 - - 18 17 -
P4 SMISC - - 19 20 - - 22 21
P5 SMISC 24 - - 23 25 - - 26
P6 SMISC - - - - 27 28 29 30
S:1 NMISC 1 6 11 16 21 26 31 36
S:2 NMISC 2 7 12 17 22 27 32 37
S:3 NMISC 3 8 13 18 23 28 33 38
S:INT NMISC 4 9 14 19 24 29 34 39
S:EQV NMISC 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40
FLUEN NMISC 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116

Quantity Integration Point
Name Item
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
STATUS NMISC 53 60 67 74 81 88 95 102
SOLID65

Quantity Integration Point
Name Item
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
THETCR NMISC 54 61 68 75 82 89 96 103
Dir 1
PHICR NMISC 55 62 69 76 83 90 97 104
THETCR NMISC 56 63 70 77 84 91 98 105
Dir 2
PHICR NMISC 57 64 71 78 85 92 99 106
THETCR NMISC 58 65 72 79 86 93 100 107
Dir 3
PHICR NMISC 59 66 73 80 87 94 101 108

• Zero volume elements are not allowed.
interchanged. Also, the element may not be twisted such that the element has two separate volumes.
This occurs most frequently when the elements are not numbered properly.
• All elements must have eight nodes.
• A prism-shaped element may be formed by defining duplicate K and L and duplicate O and P node
numbers (see Degenerated Shape Elements (p. 39)). A tetrahedron shape is also available. The extra
shapes are automatically deleted for tetrahedron elements.
• Whenever the rebar capability of the element is used, the rebar are assumed to be "smeared"
throughout the element. The sum of the volume ratios for all rebar must not be greater than 1.0.
• When both cracking and crushing are used together, care must be taken to apply the load slowly to
prevent possible fictitious crushing of the concrete before proper load transfer can occur through a
closed crack. This usually happens when excessive cracking strains are coupled to the orthogonal un-
cracked directions through Poisson's effect. Also, at those integration points where crushing has occurred,
the output plastic and creep strains are from the previous converged substep. Furthermore, when
cracking has occurred, the elastic strain output includes the cracking strain. The lost shear resistance of
cracked and/or crushed elements cannot be transferred to the rebar, which have no shear stiffness.
• The following two options are not recommended if cracking or crushing nonlinearities are present:
– Stress-stiffening effects.
– Large strain and large deflection. Results may not converge or may be incorrect, especially if signi-
ficantly large rotation is involved.

LINK68
Coupled Thermal-Electric Line

LINK68 is a uniaxial element in 3-D space with the ability to conduct heat and electrical current between
its nodes. Joule heat generated by the current flow is also included in the heat balance. The element
has two degrees of freedom, temperature and voltage, at each node. The thermal-electrical line element
may be used in a steady-state or transient thermal analysis, although no transient electrical capacitance
or inductance effects are included in the element.
The element is linear but requires an iterative solution to include the Joule heating effect in the thermal
solution. If no electrical effects are present, the conducting bar element (LINK33) may be used. If the
model containing the thermal-electrical element is also to be analyzed structurally, the element should
be replaced by an equivalent structural element. See LINK68 in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference
for more details about this element.
x
Z
LINK68 Input Data

The geometry, node locations, and the coordinate system for this thermal-electrical line element are
shown in Figure 1 (p. 293). The element is defined by two nodes, the cross-sectional area, and the mater-
ial properties. In an axisymmetric analysis the area should be input on a full 360° basis. The thermal
conductivity and electrical resistivity are in the element longitudinal direction. The specific heat and
density may be assigned any values for steady-state solutions.
The electrical material property, RSVX, is the resistivity of the material. The resistance of the element is
calculated from RSVX*length/AREA. The resistivity, like any other material property, may be input as a
function of temperature. Properties not input default as described in Linear Material Properties in the
Material Reference.
LINK68
The word VOLT should be input for the Lab variable on the D command and the voltage input for the
value. The word AMPS should be input for the Lab variable on the F command and the current into
the node input for the value.
Element loads are described in Nodal Loading (p. 49). Element body loads may be input as heat gener-
ation rates at the nodes. The node J heat generation rate HG(J) defaults to the node I heat generation
rate HG(I). This rate is in addition to the Joule heat generated by the current flow.
The current being calculated via this element can be directly coupled into a 3-D magnetostatic analysis
[BIOT].

Nodes
I, J
Degrees of Freedom
TEMP, VOLT
Real Constants
Material Properties
KXX, DENS, C, ENTH, RSVX
Surface Loads
None
Body Loads
Heat Generations --
HG(I), HG(J)
Special Features
Birth and death

KEYOPTS
None
LINK68 Output Data

• Nodal temperatures and voltages included in the overall nodal solution

The heat flow and the current flow into the nodes may be printed with the OUTPR command. The
Joule heat generated this substep is used to determine the temperature distribution calculated for the
next substep. A general description of solution output is given in Solution Output (p. 50). See the Basic
Analysis Guide for ways to view results.
LINK68
available.

Name Definition O R
VOLU: Volume Y Y
HGEN Heat generations HG(I), HG(J) Y -
TG Thermal gradient at centroid Y Y
TF Thermal flux at centroid (heat flow/cross-section- Y Y
al area)
EF Electric field (voltage gradient) Y Y
JS Current density (voltage flux) Y Y
CUR Current Y Y
JHEAT: Joule heat generation per unit volume Y Y
Name
Item
E
Output ETABLE and

Quant- ESOL Command
ity Input
Name Item E
TG NMISC 1
TF NMISC 2
LINK68
Output ETABLE and

Quant- ESOL Command
ity Input
Name Item E
EF NMISC 3
JS NMISC 4
CUR NMISC 5

• Heat and current are assumed to flow only in the element longitudinal direction.
• The element must not have a zero length, that is, nodes I and J may not be coincident.
• A free end of the element (that is, not adjacent to another element and not subjected to a boundary
constraint) is assumed to adiabatic.
• No conversion is included between electrical heat units and mechanical heat units.
• The resistivity may be divided by a conversion factor, such as 3.415 Btu/Hr per Watt, to get Joule heat
in mechanical units. Current (input and output) should also be converted for consistent units.
• If a current is specified at the same node that a voltage is specified, the current is ignored.
• The electrical and thermal solutions are coupled via an iterative procedure.
• There is no conversion required when consistent units are used.

ANSYS Professional
ANSYS Emag 3-D
• This element has only electric field capability, and does not have thermal capability.
• The element may only be used in a steady-state electric analysis.
• The only active degree of freedom is VOLT.
• The only allowable material property is RSVX.
• No body loads are applicable.
SOLID70
3-D Thermal Solid
MP ME <> PR PRN DS <> <> <> <> <> PP VT EME MFS

SOLID70 has a 3-D thermal conduction capability. The element has eight nodes with a single degree
of freedom, temperature, at each node. The element is applicable to a 3-D, steady-state or transient
thermal analysis. The element also can compensate for mass transport heat flow from a constant velocity
field. If the model containing the conducting solid element is also to be analyzed structurally, the element
should be replaced by an equivalent structural element (such as SOLID185). See SOLID90 for a similar
thermal element, with mid-edge node capability.
An option exists that allows the element to model nonlinear steady-state fluid flow through a porous
medium. With this option, the thermal parameters are interpreted as analogous fluid flow parameters.
For example, the temperature degree of freedom becomes equivalent to a pressure degree of freedom.
See SOLID70 in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for more details about this element.
M O,P
4 N
5 P I K,L
O
J
6 Prism Option

M I
N
2 3
L

K Te ahed al
Z

I 1
Y
X J

y
SOLID70 Input Data

The element is defined by eight nodes and the orthotropic material properties. A prism-shaped element,
a tetrahedral-shaped element, and a pyramid-shaped element may also be formed as shown in Figure
1 (p. 297). Orthotropic material directions correspond to the element coordinate directions. The element
SOLID70
coordinate system orientation is as described in Coordinate Systems (p. 56). Specific heat and density
are ignored for steady-state solutions. Properties not input default as described in Linear Material
Properties in the Material Reference.
The nonlinear porous flow option is selected with KEYOPT(7) = 1. For this option, temperature is inter-
preted as pressure and the absolute permeability of the medium are input as material properties KXX,
KYY, and KZZ. Properties DENS and VISC are used for the mass density and viscosity of the fluid. Prop-
erties C and MU are used in calculating the coefficients of permeability as described in the Mechanical
APDL Theory Reference. Temperature boundary conditions input with the D command are interpreted
as pressure boundary conditions, and heat flow boundary conditions input with the F command are
interpreted as mass flow rate (mass/time).
A mass transport option is available with KEYOPT(8). With this option the velocities VX, VY, and VZ must
be input as real constants (in the element coordinate system). Also, temperatures should be specified
along the entire inlet boundary to assure a stable solution. With mass transport, you should use specific
heat (C) and density (DENS) material properties instead of enthalpy (ENTH).

Nodes
I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P
Degrees of Freedom
TEMP
Real Constants
Mass transport effects (KEYOPT(8) = 1):

VX - X direction of mass transport velocity
VY - Y direction of mass transport velocity
VZ - Z direction of mass transport velocity
Material Properties
KXX, KYY, KZZ, DENS, C, ENTH, VISC, MU (VISC and MU used only if KEYOPT(7) = 1. Do not use ENTH with
KEYOPT(8) = 1).
Surface Loads

Body Loads
Heat Generations --
SOLID70
Special Features
Birth and death
KEYOPT(2)
0 --
1 --
2 --
3 --
Evaluate at differential temperature |TS-TB|
KEYOPT(4)
0 --
1 --
KEYOPT(7)
Nonlinear fluid flow option:
0 --
Standard heat transfer element
1 --
Nonlinear steady-state fluid flow analogy element
Note
Temperature degree of freedom interpreted as pressure.
KEYOPT(8)
Mass transport effects:
0 --
No mass transport effects
1 --
Mass transport with VX, VY, VZ
SOLID70 Output Data


Convection heat flux is positive out of the element; applied heat flux is positive into the element. If
KEYOPT(7) = 1, the standard thermal output should be interpreted as the analogous fluid flow output.
SOLID70
The element output directions are parallel to the element coordinate system. A general description of
solution output is given in Solution Output (p. 50). See the Basic Analysis Guide for ways to view results.
available.

Name Definition O R
VOLU: Volume Y Y
HG(N), HG(O), HG(P)
TG:X, Y, Z, SUM Thermal gradient components and vector sum at Y Y
centroid
TF:X, Y, Z, SUM Thermal flux (heat flow rate/cross-sectional area) com- Y Y
FACE Face label 1 -
AREA Face area 1 1
RATE/AREA
heat flux
PRESSURE GRAD Total pressure gradient and its X, Y, and Z components 2 -
MASS FLUX Mass flow rate per unit cross-sectional area 2 -
FLUID VELOCITY Total fluid velocity and its X, Y, and Z components 2 -
SOLID70
1. Output if a surface load is input

2. Output if KEYOPT(7) = 1
Name
Item
FCn

Quantity Item FC1 FC2 FC3 FC4 FC5 FC6
Name
AREA NMISC 1 7 13 19 25 31
HFAVG NMISC 2 8 14 20 26 32
TAVG NMISC 3 9 15 21 27 33
TBAVG NMISC 4 10 16 22 28 34
HEAT RATE NMISC 5 11 17 23 29 35
HFLXAVG NMISC 6 12 18 24 30 36

• The element must not have a zero volume. This occurs most frequently when the element is not
numbered properly.
interchanged.
• A prism or tetrahedron shaped element may be formed by defining duplicate node numbers as described
in Degenerated Shape Elements (p. 39).
(such as for melting) within a coarse grid.
• If the thermal element is to be replaced by a SOLID185 structural element with surface stresses requested,
the thermal element should be oriented such that face I-J-N-M and/or face K-L-P-O is a free surface.
• A free surface of the element (that is, not adjacent to another element and not subjected to a boundary
also require a fine mesh at the surface.
• If KEYOPT(8) > 0, unsymmetric matrices are produced.
SOLID70
• When mass flow is activated (KEYOPT(8)=1), the element Peclet number should be less than 1:
Pe = ρ*v*L*Cp/(2*k) <1.0
Where L is an element length scale based on the element geometry. See SOLID70 in the Mechanical
APDL Theory Reference for more details.

ANSYS Professional
• This element does not have the mass transport or fluid flow options. KEYOPT(7) and KEYOPT(8) can
only be set to 0 (default).
• The VX, VY, and VZ real constants are not applicable.
• The VISC and MU material properties are not applicable.
• The element does not have the birth and death feature.
MASS71
Thermal Mass
MP ME ST PR PRN DS <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS

MASS71 is a point element having one degree of freedom, temperature, at the node. The element may
be used in a transient thermal analysis to represent a body having thermal capacitance capability but
negligible internal thermal resistance, that is, no significant temperature gradients within the body. The
element also has a temperature-dependent heat generation rate capability. The lumped thermal mass
element is applicable to a 1-D, 2-D, or 3-D steady-state or transient thermal analysis. See MASS71 in the
In a steady-state solution the element acts only as a temperature-dependent heat source or sink. Other
elements having special thermal applications are the COMBIN14 and COMBIN40 elements. These elements,
which are normally used in structural models, may be used for thermally analogous situations.
If the model containing the thermal mass element is also to be analyzed structurally, the thermal element
should be replaced by an equivalent structural element (such as MASS21)
Z
I
Y
X
MASS71 Input Data

The lumped thermal mass element is defined by one node (as shown in Figure 1 (p. 303)) and a thermal
capacitance (Heat/Degree). When used with axisymmetric elements, the thermal capacitance should be
input on a full 360° basis. The thermal capacitance (CON1) may be input as a real constant or calculated
(KEYOPT(3)) from the real constant volume (CON1) and either the DENS and C or ENTH material properties.
KEYOPT(3) determines whether CON1 is interpreted as volume or thermal capacitance.
The heat generation is applied directly as a nodal load and is not first multiplied by the volume. Thus,
if KEYOPT(3) = 0 (that is, when using the specific heat matrix), the heat generation rate must be adjusted
to account for the volume. For an axisymmetric analysis the heat generation rate should be input on
a full 360° basis. A temperature-dependent heat generation rate of the following polynomial form may
be input:
ɺɺɺ = 1 + 2 + 3 A 4 + 5 A6
where T is the absolute temperature from the previous substep. The constants, A1 through A6, should
be entered as real constants. If any of the constants A2 through A6 are nonzero, KEYOPT(4) must be set
to 1. Also, if temperatures are not absolute, the offset conversion [TOFFST] must be specified.
MASS71
Alternately, the heat generation expression may be defined as a temperature-dependent material

property (QRATE) with the MP commands. QRATE can be input as numerical values or as tabular inputs
evaluated as a function of temperature, time, and location.
A summary of the element input is given in "MASS71 Input Summary" (p. 304). A general description of
element input is given in Element Input (p. 43). See Harmonic Axisymmetric Elements (p. 76) for more
details.

Nodes
I
Degrees of Freedom
TEMP
Real Constants
CON1, A1, A2, A3, A4, A5

A6
See Table 1: MASS71 Real Constants (p. 304) for a description of the real constants
Material Properties
QRATE, DENS, C, ENTH if KEYOPT(3) = 0, or QRATE if KEYOPT(3) = 1
Surface Loads
None
Body Loads
None (heat generation rates may be defined as a function of temperature by using real constants A1,
A2, ... or by the QRATE material property definition.)
Special Features
Birth and death

Nonlinear if heat generation is defined as a function of temperature
KEYOPT(3)
Interpretation of real constant CON1:
0 --
Interpret CON1 as volume (with either DENS and C or ENTH supplied as material properties)
1 --
Interpret CON1 as thermal capacitance (DENS*C*volume)
KEYOPT(4)
Temperature dependent heat generation:
0 --
No temperature-dependent heat generation (required if all real constants A2-A6 are zero)
1 --
Include temperature-dependent heat generation (required if any real constants A2-A6 are nonzero)
Table 1 MASS71 Real Constants

1 CON1 Volume or thermal capacitance (see KEYOPT(3))
MASS71

2 A1 Constant for temperature function
MASS71 Output Data


• Additional element output as shown in Table 2: MASS71 Element Output Definitions (p. 305)
The heat generation rate is in units of Heat/Time and is positive into the node. A general description
available.
Table 2 MASS71 Element Output Definitions

Name Definition O R
NODE Node I Y Y
TEMP Element (node) temperature Y Y
HEAT RATE Heat generation rate into node Y Y
Table 3: MASS71 Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 306) lists output available through the ETABLE command
notation is used in Table 3: MASS71 Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 306):
Name
output quantity as defined in the Table 2: MASS71 Element Output Definitions (p. 305)
Item
MASS71
E
Table 3 MASS71 Item and Sequence Numbers
Output ETABLE and

Quant- ESOL Command
ity Input
Name Item E
HEAT SMISC 1
RATE
TEMP SMISC 2

• When using the element with a temperature-dependent heat generation rate in a steady-state solution,
an iterative solution is required.
• The heat generation is calculated at the uniform temperature for the first substep.

ANSYS Professional
PLANE75
Axisymmetric-Harmonic 4-Node Thermal Solid
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS

PLANE75 is used as an axisymmetric ring element with a 3-D thermal conduction capability. The element
has four nodes with a single degree of freedom, temperature, at each node. The element is a generaliz-
ation of the axisymmetric version of PLANE55 in that it allows nonaxisymmetric loading. Various loading
cases are described in Harmonic Axisymmetric Elements with Nonaxisymmetric Loads (p. 77).
The element is applicable to an axisymmetric geometry for steady-state or transient thermal analyses.
See PLANE75 in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for more details about this element. If the model
containing the element is also to be analyzed structurally, the element should be replaced by the
equivalent structural element (such as PLANE25). A similar thermal element with midside node capability
is PLANE78.
L 3
K ,
4
2

(Triangular Option)
Y I J
x 1
He f w f e eme s s ve
X d
PLANE75 Input Data

The geometry, node locations, and the coordinate system for this axisymmetric thermal solid element
are shown in Figure 1 (p. 307). The data input is essentially the same as for PLANE55 and is described in
"PLANE55 Input Data" (p. 251). The element input data also includes the number of harmonic waves
(MODE) and the symmetry condition (ISYM) on the MODE command. If MODE = 0 and ISYM = 1, the
element behaves similarly to the axisymmetric case of PLANE55. The MODE and ISYM parameters describe
the type of temperature distribution and are discussed in detail in Harmonic Axisymmetric Elements with
Nonaxisymmetric Loads (p. 77).
PLANE75
Element loads are described in Nodal Loading (p. 49). Harmonically varying bulk temperatures or heat
fluxes (but not both) may be input as surface loads on the element faces as shown by the circled
numbers on Figure 1 (p. 307). Harmonically varying heat generation rates may be input as element body
loads at the nodes. If the node I heat generation rate HG(I) is input and all others are unspecified, they
default to HG(I).

Nodes
I, J, K, L
Degrees of Freedom
TEMP
Real Constants
None
Material Properties
KXX, KYY, KZZ, DENS, C, ENTH
Surface Loads
Convections --
Heat Fluxes --
Body Loads
Heat Generations --
Mode Number
Loading Condition
Special Features
Birth and death
KEYOPTS
None
PLANE75 Output Data


Convection heat flux is positive out of the element; applied heat flux is positive into the element. The
element output directions are parallel to the element coordinate system. The face area and the heat
flow rate are on a full 360° basis. For more information about harmonic elements, see Harmonic
PLANE75
Axisymmetric Elements with Nonaxisymmetric Loads (p. 77). A general description of solution output is
available.

Name Definition O R
VOLU: Volume Y Y
MODE Number of waves in loading Y -
TG:X, Y, SUM, Z Thermal gradient components and vector sum (X and 1 1
Y) at centroid
TF:X, Y, SUM, Z Thermal flux (heat flow rate/cross-sectional area) com- 1 1
ponents and vector sum (X and Y) at centroid
FACE Face label 2 -
AREA Face area 2 2
TAVG, TBULK Average of the two end nodal temperatures evaluated 2 2
at peak value, fluid bulk temperature evaluated at peak
value
RATE/AREA
heat flux
1. Gradient and flux peak at THETA = 0 and THETA = 90 ÷ MODE degrees

PLANE75
Name
Item
FCn

Name

• The element must lie in the global X-Y plane as shown in Figure 1 (p. 307) and the Y-axis must be the
axis of symmetry for axisymmetric analyses.
• A triangular element may be formed by defining duplicate K and L node numbers as described in De-
generated Shape Elements (p. 39).
• If the thermal element is to be replaced by the analogous structural element (PLANE25) with surface
stresses requested, the thermal element should be oriented so that face I-J (and also face K-L, if applicable)
is a free surface.
• A free surface of the element (that is, not adjacent to another element and not subjected to a boundary
• Temperature-dependent material properties (including the film coefficient) are assumed to be axisym-
metric even if the temperature varies harmonically.
• If MODE = 0, properties are evaluated at the temperatures calculated in the previous substep (or at
TUNIF if for the first substep).
• If MODE > 0, properties are evaluated at temperatures calculated from the previous MODE = 0 substep;
if no MODE = 0 substep exists, then evaluation is done at 0.0 degrees.
PLANE75

There are no product restrictions for this element.
PLANE77

PLANE77 is a higher order version of the 2-D, 4-node thermal element (PLANE55). The element has one
degree of freedom, temperature, at each node. The 8-node elements have compatible temperature
shapes and are well suited to model curved boundaries.
The 8-node thermal element is applicable to a 2-D, steady-state or transient thermal analysis. See
PLANE77 in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for more details about this element. If the model
containing this element is also to be analyzed structurally, the element should be replaced by an equi-
valent structural element (such as PLANE183). A similar axisymmetric thermal element which accepts
nonaxisymmetric loading is PLANE78.
L
3
K K, L, O
O
4
Y P P N
( axal) 2
N I
M
I
J
1
PLANE77 Input Data

The element is defined by eight nodes and orthotropic material properties. A triangular-shaped element
may be formed by defining the same node number for nodes K, L and O.
Material Reference.
rate of its adjacent corner nodes.
PLANE77
This element can also have a Z-depth specified by KEYOPT(3) and real constant THK. Be careful when
using this option with other physics, especially radiation. Radiation view factors will be based on a unit
Z-depth (only).
Elements (p. 76).

Nodes
I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P
Degrees of Freedom
TEMP
Real Constants
THK
THK = Thickness (used only if KEYOPT(3) = 3)

Material Properties
KXX, KYY, DENS, C, ENTH
Surface Loads
Body Loads
Heat Generations --
Special Features
Birth and death
KEYOPT(1)
0 --
1 --
KEYOPT(3)
Element behavior:
0 --
Plane
1 --
Axisymmetric
3 --
Plane with Z-depth, specified via real constant THK.
PLANE77 Output Data

PLANE77

The element output directions are parallel to the element coordinate system. For an axisymmetric
analysis the face area and the heat flow rate are on a full 360° basis. Convection heat flux is positive
out of the element; applied heat flux is positive into the element. A general description of solution
available.

Name Definition O R
VOLU: Volume Y Y
HG(N), HG(O), HG(P)
centroid
TF:X, Y, SUM Thermal flux (heat flow rate/cross-sectional area) Y Y
components and vector sum at centroid
FACE Face label 1 -
AREA Face area 1 1
HFILM Film coefficient 1 -
tion
input heat flux
PLANE77
Name Definition O R
1. Output only if a surface load is input

Table 2: PLANE77 Item and Component Labels (p. 316) lists output available through the ETABLE command
notation is used in Table 2: PLANE77 Item and Component Labels (p. 316):
Name
Item
FCn
Table 2 PLANE77 Item and Component Labels

Name

• The 2-D element must lie in an X-Y plane as shown in Figure 1 (p. 313) and the Y-axis must be the axis
(such as melting) within a coarse grid.
• If the thermal element is to be replaced by a PLANE183 structural element with surface stresses requested,
the thermal element may be oriented such that face IJ and/or face KL is a free surface. A free surface
of the element (that is, not adjacent to another element and not subjected to a boundary constraint)
is assumed to be adiabatic.
PLANE77
require a fine mesh at the surface.

ANSYS Professional
PLANE78
Axisymmetric-Harmonic 8-Node Thermal Solid
MP ME <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS

PLANE78 is used as an axisymmetric ring element with a 3-D thermal conduction capability. The element
has one degree of freedom, temperature, at each node. PLANE78 is a generalization of PLANE77 in that
it allows nonaxisymmetric loading. Various loading cases are described in Harmonic Axisymmetric Elements
The 8-node elements have compatible temperature shapes and are well suited to model curved
boundaries.
The element is applicable to an axisymmetric geometry for steady-state or transient thermal analyses.
See PLANE78 in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for more details about this element. If the model
containing the element is also to be analyzed structurally, the element should be replaced by the
equivalent structural element (such as PLANE83).
3
L K,L,O
4 O K
P P N
Y N 2 I
( x) M J
I
M Triangular Option
J
X ( d) 1
PLANE78 Input Data

The geometry, node locations, and the coordinate system for this axisymmetric thermal solid element
are shown in Figure 1 (p. 319). The data input is essentially the same as for PLANE77 and is described in
"PLANE77 Input Data" (p. 313). The element input data also includes the number of harmonic waves
(MODE on the MODE command) and the symmetry condition (ISYM on the MODE command). If MODE
= 0 and ISYM = 1, the element behaves similarly to the axisymmetric case of PLANE77. If MODE equals
1, the temperature is assumed to be 0° along an entire diameter. The MODE and ISYM parameters de-
scribe the type of temperature distribution and are discussed in detail in Harmonic Axisymmetric Elements
Element loads are described in Nodal Loading (p. 49). Harmonically varying bulk temperatures or heat
fluxes (but not both) may be input as surface loads on the element faces as shown by the circled
numbers on Figure 1 (p. 319). Harmonically varying heat generation rates may be input as element body
PLANE78
loads at the nodes. If the node I heat generation rate HG(I) is input and all others are unspecified, they
default to HG(I). If all corner node heat generation rates are specified, each midside node heat generation
rate defaults to the average heat generation rate of its adjacent corner nodes.

Nodes
I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P
Degrees of Freedom
TEMP
Real Constants
None
Material Properties
Surface Loads
Convections --
Heat Fluxes --
Body Loads
Heat Generations --
Mode Number
Special Features
Birth and death
Loading Condition
KEYOPT(1)
0 --
1 --
PLANE78 Output Data


PLANE78
element output directions are parallel to the element coordinate system. The face area and the heat
flow rate are on a full 360° basis. For more information about harmonic elements, see Harmonic
Axisymmetric Elements with Nonaxisymmetric Loads (p. 77). A general description of solution output is
available.

Name Definition O R
VOLU: Volume Y Y
HGEN Heat generations HG(I), HG(J), HG(K), HG(L), HG(M), HG(N), Y -
HG(O), HG(P)
TG:X, Y, SUM, Thermal gradient components and vector sum (X and Y) at 1 1
Z centroid
TF:X, Y, SUM, Thermal flux (heat flow rate/cross-sectional area) compon- 1 1
Z ents and vector sum (X and Y) at centroid
FACE Face label 2 2
AREA Face area 2 2
TAVG, TBULK Average of the two end nodal temperatures evaluated at 2 2
peak value, fluid bulk temperature at peak value
HEAT Heat flow rate per unit area across face by convection 2 2
RATE/AREA
heat flux
HFLUX Heat flux at each node of face 2 2
PLANE78
1. Gradient and flux peak at THETA = 0 and THETA = 90 ÷ Mode degrees

Name
Item
FCn

Name

• The element must lie in the global X-Y plane as shown in Figure 1 (p. 319) and the Y-axis must be the
• If the thermal element is to be replaced by the analogous structural element (PLANE83) with surface
stresses requested, the thermal element should be oriented so that face IJ (and also face KL, if applicable)
is a free surface. A free surface of the element (that is, not adjacent to another element and not subjected
to a boundary constraint) is assumed to be adiabatic.
• Temperature-dependent material properties (including the film coefficient) are assumed to be axisym-
metric even if the temperature varies harmonically.
PLANE78
• If MODE = 0, properties are evaluated at the temperatures calculated in the previous substep (or at
TUNIF if for the first substep).
• If MODE > 0, properties are evaluated at temperatures calculated from the previous MODE = 0 substep;
if no MODE = 0 substep exists, then evaluation is done at 0.0 degrees.

FLUID79
2-D Contained Fluid
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS

FLUID79 is used to model fluids contained within vessels having no net flow rate. Another fluid element
(FLUID116) is available to model fluids flowing in pipes and channels. The fluid element is particularly
well suited for calculating hydrostatic pressures and fluid/solid interactions. Acceleration effects, such
as in sloshing problems, as well as temperature effects, may be included.
The fluid element is defined by four nodes having two degrees of freedom at each node: translation in
the nodal x and y directions. The element may be used in a structural analysis as a plane element or
as an axisymmetric ring element. See FLUID79 in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for more details
about this element. See FLUID80 for a 3-D version of this element.
Note
The reduced method is the only acceptable method for modal analyses using the ANSYS
fluid elements.
Y (axial)
X (radial) 3
L K
4 2
I J
FLUID79 Input Data

The element input data includes four nodes and the isotropic material properties. EX, which is interpreted
as the "fluid elastic modulus", should be the bulk modulus of the fluid (approximately 300,000 psi for
water). The viscosity property (VISC) is used to compute a damping matrix for dynamic analyses (typical
viscosity value for water is 1.639 x 10-7 lb-sec/in2). The use of KEYOPT(2) for gravity springs is discussed
FLUID79
in "FLUID80 Input Data" (p. 329). Vertical acceleration (ACELY on the ACEL command) is needed for the
gravity springs.
Elements (p. 76).

Nodes
I, J, K, L
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY
Real Constants
None
Material Properties
EX, ALPX (or CTEX or THSX), DENS, VISC, ALPD, BETD
Surface Loads
Pressures --
Body Loads
Temperatures --
T(I), T(J), T(K), T(L)
Special Features
None
KEYOPT(2)
Location of gravity springs:
0 --
Place gravity springs on all sides of all elements
1 --
Place gravity springs only on face of elements located on Y = 0.0 plane (elements must not have
positive Y coordinates)
KEYOPT(3)
Element behavior:
0 --
Plane
1 --
Axisymmetric
FLUID79
FLUID79 Output Data

• Degree of freedom results included in the overall nodal solution

• Additional element output as shown in Table 1: FLUID79 Element Output Definitions (p. 327)
The pressure and temperature are evaluated at the element centroid. Nodal forces and reaction forces
are on a full 360° basis for axisymmetric models. A general description of solution output is given in
Solution Output (p. 50). See the Basic Analysis Guide for ways to view results.
available.

Name Definition O R
VOLU: Volume Y Y
PRES Pressures P1 at nodes J, I; P2 at K, J; P3 at L, K; Y Y
P4 at I, L
TAVG Average temperature Y -
PAVG Average pressure Y Y
Name
Item
E
FLUID79
I,J,...,L
sequence number for data at nodes I,J,...,L

Quant- Item E I J K L
ity
Name
PRES SMISC 1 - - - -
P1 SMISC - 3 2 - -
P2 SMISC - - 5 4 -
P3 SMISC - - - 7 6
P4 SMISC - 8 - - 9

• The fluid element must lie in an X-Y plane as shown in Figure 1 (p. 325) and the Y-axis must be the axis
• Radial motion should be constrained at the centerline.
• Usually the Y-axis is oriented in the vertical direction with the top surface at Y = 0.0.
• The element temperature is taken to be the average of the nodal temperatures.
• Elements should be rectangular whenever possible, as results are known to be of lower quality for some
cases using nonrectangular shapes.
• Axisymmetric elements should always be rectangular.
• The nonlinear transient dynamic analysis should be used instead of the linear transient dynamic analysis
for this element.
• A very small stiffness (EX x 1.0E-9) is associated with the shear and rotational strains to ensure static
stability. See FLUID80 for more assumptions and restrictions.

FLUID80
3-D Contained Fluid
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS

FLUID80 is used to model fluids contained within vessels having no net flow rate. Another fluid element
(FLUID116) is available to model fluids flowing in pipes and channels. The fluid element is particularly
well suited for calculating hydrostatic pressures and fluid/solid interactions. Acceleration effects, such
as in sloshing problems, as well as temperature effects, may be included.
The fluid element is defined by eight nodes having three degrees of freedom at each node: translation
in the nodal x, y, and z directions. See FLUID80 in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for more details
about this element. See FLUID79 for a 2-D version of this element.
Note
fluid elements.
Z
P
X 5 O
Y 6
4
M N
L
3
2 K
I
1 J
FLUID80 Input Data

The element input data includes eight nodes and the isotropic material properties. EX, which is interpreted
as the "fluid elastic modulus", should be the bulk modulus of the fluid (approximately 300,000 psi for
water). The viscosity property (VISC) is used to compute a damping matrix for dynamic analyses. A
typical viscosity value for water is 1.639 x 10-7 lb-sec/in2.
FLUID80
The element also includes special surface effects, which may be thought of as gravity springs used to
hold the surface in place. This is performed by adding springs to each node, with the spring constants
being positive on the top of the element, and negative on the bottom. Gravity effects [ACEL] must be
included if a free surface exists. For an interior node, the positive and negative effects cancel out, and
at the bottom, where the fluid must be contained to keep the fluid from leaking out, the negative spring
has no effect (as long as all degrees of freedom on the bottom are fixed). If the bottom consists of a
flexible container, or if the degrees of freedom tangential to a curved surface are released, these negative
springs may cause erroneous results and "negative pivot" messages. In this case, use of KEYOPT(2) = 1
is recommended.
These surface springs, while necessary to keep the free surface in place, artificially reduce the hydrostatic
motion of the free surface. The error for a tank with vertical walls, expressed as a ratio of the computed
answer over the correct answer is 1.0/(1.0 + (bottom pressure/bulk modulus)), which is normally very
close to 1.0. Hydrodynamic results are not affected by this overstiffness.

Nodes
I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, UZ
Real Constants
None
Material Properties
Surface Loads
Pressures --

Body Loads
Temperatures --
Special Features
None
KEYOPT(2)
0 --
FLUID80
1 --
Place gravity springs only on face of elements located on Z = 0.0 plane (elements must not have
positive Z coordinates)
FLUID80 Output Data


The pressure and temperature are evaluated at the element centroid. A general description of solution
available.

Name Definition O R
VOLU: Volume Y Y
PRES Pressures P1 at nodes J, I, L, K; P2 at I, J, N, M; P3 at J, Y Y
K, O, N; P4 at K, L, P, O; P5 at L, I, M, P; P6 at M, N, O, P
Name
Item
FLUID80
E
I,J,...,P

ity
Name
PRES SMISC 1 - - - - - - - -
P1 SMISC - 3 2 5 4 - - - -
P2 SMISC - 6 7 - - 9 8 - -
P3 SMISC - - 10 11 - - 13 12 -
P4 SMISC - - - 14 15 - - 17 16
P5 SMISC - 19 - - 18 20 - - 21
P6 SMISC - - - - - 22 23 24 25

interchanged.
• The element may not be twisted such that the element has two separate volumes. This occurs most
frequently when the elements are not numbered properly.
• Structures are usually modeled with the Z-axis oriented in the vertical direction and the top surface at
Z = 0.0.
• Elements should be rectangular (brick shaped) whenever possible, as results are known to be of lower
quality for some cases using nonrectangular shapes.
for this element.
• For the case of a modal analysis with irregular meshes, one can expect one or more low frequency ei-
genvectors, representing internal fluid motions, without significantly affecting the vertical motion of
the free surface.
• The amount of flow permitted is limited to that which will not cause gross distortions in the element.
• The large deflection option should not be used with this element.
• In a reduced analysis, master degrees of freedom should be selected at all nodes on the free fluid surface
in the direction normal to the free surface. Other master degrees of freedom, if any, should only be se-
lected normal to one or more flat planes within the fluid, with all nodes on these planes being included.
Other selections may produce large internal rotations.
• When used for a static application, the free surface must be input flat. Gravity must be input if there is
a free surface. The element gives valid nodal forces representing hydrostatic pressure and also valid
FLUID80
vertical displacements at the free surface. Other nodal displacements, which may be large, represent
energy-free internal motions of the fluid.
• Fluid element at a boundary should not be attached directly to structural elements but should have
separate, coincident nodes that are coupled only in the direction normal to the interface.
• Arbitrarily small numbers are included to give the element some shear and rotational stability.

FLUID81
Axisymmetric-Harmonic Contained Fluid
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS

FLUID81 is a modification of the axisymmetric structural solid element (PLANE25). The element is used
to model fluids contained within vessels having no net flow rate. It is defined by four nodes having
three degrees of freedom at each node: translations in the nodal x, y, and z directions. The element is
used in a structural analysis as an axisymmetric ring element.
The element is a generalization of the axisymmetric version of FLUID79, the 2-D fluid element, in that
the loading need not be axisymmetric. Various loading cases are described in Harmonic Axisymmetric
Elements with Nonaxisymmetric Loads (p. 77). The fluid element is particularly well suited for calculating
hydrostatic pressures and fluid/solid interactions. Acceleration effects, such as in sloshing problems, as
well as temperature effects, may be included. See FLUID81 in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for
more details about this element. Another fluid element (FLUID116) is available to model fluids flowing
in pipes and channels.
Note
fluid elements.
Y (axial)
X (radial)
3
L K
2
4
I J
1
FLUID81 Input Data

The element input data includes four nodes, the number of harmonic waves (MODE on the MODE
command), the symmetry condition (ISYM on the MODE command), and the isotropic material properties.
FLUID81
If MODE = 0 and ISYM = 1, the element behaves similar to the axisymmetric case of FLUID79. The MODE
and ISYM parameters are discussed in detail in Harmonic Axisymmetric Elements with Nonaxisymmetric
Loads (p. 77). EX, which is interpreted as the "fluid elastic modulus," should be the bulk modulus of the
fluid (approximately 300,000 psi for water). The viscosity property (VISC) is used to compute a damping
matrix for dynamic analyses. A typical viscosity value for water is 1.639 x 10-7 lb-sec/in2. Density (DENS)
must be input as a positive number.
The use of KEYOPT(2) for gravity springs is discussed in "FLUID80 Input Data" (p. 329). Vertical acceleration
(ACELY on the ACEL command) is needed for the gravity springs regardless of the value of MODE, even
for a modal analysis. Harmonically varying nodal forces, if any, should be input on a full 360° basis.
act into the element.
Harmonically varying temperatures may be input as element body loads at the nodes. The node I
temperature T(I) defaults to TUNIF. If all other temperatures are unspecified, they default to T(I). For any
other input pattern, unspecified temperatures default to TUNIF.

Nodes
I, J, K, L
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, UZ
Real Constants
None
Material Properties
Surface Loads
Pressures --
Body Loads
Temperatures --
T(I), T(J), T(K), T(L)
Mode Number
Loading Condition
Special Features
None
KEYOPT(2)
FLUID81
0 --
1 --
Place gravity springs only on face of elements located on Y = 0.0 plane (element must not have
positive Y coordinates)
FLUID81 Output Data


The pressure and temperature are evaluated at the element centroid. Nodal forces and reaction forces
are on a full 360° basis.
the peak value at θ = 90°. Printout for combined loading cases may be obtained from the POST1 routine.
We recommend that you always use the angle field on the SET command when postprocessing the
results. For more information about harmonic elements, see Harmonic Axisymmetric Elements with Non-
axisymmetric Loads (p. 77).
The following notation is used in Table 1: FLUID81 Element Output Definitions (p. 337):
available.

Name Definition O R
ISYM Loading Key 1 1
VOLU: Volume Y Y
FLUID81
Name Definition O R
PRES Pressures P1 at nodes J,I; P2 at K,J; P3 at L,K; P4 Y Y
at I,L
1. If ISYM is:
1 - Symmetric loading
-1 - Antisymmetric loading
Name
Item
E
I,J,...,L

ity
Name
PRES SMISC 1 - - - -
P1 SMISC - 3 2 - -
P2 SMISC - - 5 4 -
P3 SMISC - - - 7 6
P4 SMISC - 8 - - 9

• The fluid element must lie in an X-Y plane as shown in Figure 1 (p. 335) and the Y-axis must be the axis
FLUID81
• The Y-axis should be oriented in the vertical direction and the top surface is usually at Y = 0.0.
• Temperature-dependent material properties, if any, are evaluated at the reference temperature [TREF].
• Elements should be rectangular since results are known to be of lower quality for nonrectangular shapes.
for this element.
• A lumped mass matrix may be obtained for this element with the LUMPM command.
• See FLUID80 for more assumptions and restrictions.

PLANE83
Axisymmetric-Harmonic 8-Node Structural Solid
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS

nology element such as SOLID273 (KEYOPT(6) = 0).
PLANE83 is used for 2-D modeling of axisymmetric structures with nonaxisymmetric loading. Examples
of such loading are bending, shear, or torsion. The element has three degrees of freedom per node:
translations in the nodal x, y, and z directions. For unrotated nodal coordinates, these directions corres-
pond to the radial, axial, and tangential directions, respectively.
This element is a higher order version of the 2-D, four-node element (PLANE25). It provides more accurate
results for mixed (quadrilateral-triangular) automatic meshes and can tolerate irregular shapes without
as much loss of accuracy. The loading need not be axisymmetric. Various loading cases are described
in Harmonic Axisymmetric Elements with Nonaxisymmetric Loads (p. 77).
The 8-node elements have compatible displacement shapes and are well suited to model curved
boundaries. See PLANE83 in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for more details about this element.
3
L K,L,O
4 O K
y P P N
N 2 I
M J
Y I
M Triangular Option
( x) J
1
Eeme c e sysem
X ( d) sh w f E1 = 0
PLANE83 Input Data

system orientation is as described in Coordinate Systems (p. 56). Z-direction material properties (EZ,
ALPZ, etc.) may be input. MODE and ISYM are used to describe the harmonic loading condition. (See
Harmonic Axisymmetric Elements with Nonaxisymmetric Loads (p. 77) for more details.)
PLANE83
act into the element. Harmonically varying temperatures may be input as element body loads at the
nodes. The node I temperature T(I) defaults to TUNIF. If all other temperatures are unspecified, they
default to T(I). If all corner node temperatures are specified, each midside node temperature defaults
to the average temperature of its adjacent corner nodes. For any other input temperature pattern, un-
specified temperatures default to TUNIF.
The KEYOPT(3) parameter is used for temperature loading with MODE greater than zero and temperature-
dependent material properties. Material properties may only be evaluated at a constant (nonharmonically
varying) temperature. If MODE equals zero, the material properties are always evaluated at the average
element temperature. KEYOPT(4), (5), and (6) provide various element printout options (see Element
Solution (p. 51)).

Nodes
I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, UZ
Real Constants
None
Material Properties
ALPX, ALPY, ALPZ (or CTEX, CTEY, CTEZ or THSX, THSY, THSZ), DENS, GXY, GYZ, GXZ, ALPD, BETD
Surface Loads
Pressures --
Body Loads
Temperatures --
Mode Number
Loading Condition
Special Features
Birth and death

Stress stiffening
KEYOPT(1)
0 --
PLANE83
1 --
KEYOPT(3)
0 --
1 --
KEYOPT(4)
0 --
Basic element solution (not extra output)
1 --
2 --
Nodal stress solution
KEYOPT(5)
Combined stress output:
0 --
No combined stress solution
1 --
Combined stress solution at centroid and nodes
KEYOPT(6)
Extra surface output (surface solution is valid only for isotropic materials):
0 --
Basic element solution (no extra output)
1 --
Surface solution for face I-J also
2 --
Surface solution for both faces I-J and K-L also
PLANE83 Output Data


the peak value at θ = 90°. The same occurs for the reaction forces (FX, FY, etc.). We recommend that
you always use the angle field on the SET command when postprocessing the results. For more inform-
ation about harmonic elements, see Harmonic Axisymmetric Elements with Nonaxisymmetric Loads (p. 77).
PLANE83
The element stress directions are parallel to the element coordinate system. The sign convention on
the surface shears is such that for a rectangular element that is lined up parallel to the axes with node
J in the positive Y direction from node I, the shear stresses on surfaces I-J and K-L are analogous to the
centroidal SYZ in both definition and sign. Stress components which are inherently zero for a load case
are printed for clarity. A general description of solution output is given in Solution Output (p. 50). See
the Basic Analysis Guide for ways to view results.
S
3
L

4 O K S Z
P S
SZ
Y N 2
(or axial) SZ
I M
X (or radial) 1 J
available.

Name Definition O R
NODES Corner nodes - I, J, K, L Y Y
ISYM Loading key: 1 = symmetric, -1 = antisymmetric Y -
VOLU: Volume Y Y
PRES Pressures P1 at nodes J,I; P2 at K,J; P3 at L,K; P4 at Y Y
I,L
S:X, Y, Z Direct stresses (radial, axial, hoop) at PK ANG loca- Y Y
tions
PLANE83
Name Definition O R
S:XY, YZ, XZ Shear stresses (radial-axial, axial-hoop, radial-hoop) Y Y
at PK ANG locations
S:1, 2, 3 Principal stresses at both PK ANG locations as well 1 1
S:INT Stress intensity at both PK ANG locations as well as 1 1
where extreme occurs (EXTR); if MODE = 0, only one
location is given.
S:EQV Equivalent stress at both PK ANG locations as well 1 1
EPEL:X, Y, Z, XY Elastic strain Y Y
EPTH:X, Y, Z, XY Average thermal strains Y Y
EPTH:EQV Equivalent thermal strain [4] - Y
PK ANG Angle where stresses have peak values: 0 and Y Y
90/MODE°. Blank if MODE = 0.
FACE Face label 2 2
EPEL(PAR, PER, Z, Surface strains (parallel, perpendicular, hoop, shear) 2 2
SH) at PK ANG locations and where extreme occurs (EX-
TR)
S(PAR, PER, Z, SH) Surface stresses (parallel, perpendicular, hoop, shear) 2 2
at PK ANG locations and where extreme occurs (EX-
TR)
1. These items are output only if KEYOPT(5) = 1.

2. These items are printed only if KEYOPT(6) is greater than zero.
user (MP,PRXY).
using the Sequence Number method. See Creating an Element Table in the Basic Analysis Guide and
The Item and Sequence Number Table (p. 52) in this manual for more information. The following notation
is used in Table 2: PLANE83 Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 346):
Name
Item
PLANE83
I,J,K,L

Quant- Item I J K L
ity
Name
P1 SMISC 2 1 - -
P2 SMISC - 4 3 -
P3 SMISC - - 6 5
P4 SMISC 7 - - 8
THETA = 0
S1 NMISC 1 16 31 46
S2 NMISC 2 17 32 47
S3 NMISC 3 18 33 48
THETA = 90/MODE
S1 NMISC 6 21 36 51
S2 NMISC 7 22 37 52
S3 NMISC 8 23 38 53
EXTR Values
S1 NMISC 11 26 41 56
S2 NMISC 12 27 42 57
S3 NMISC 13 28 43 58
The NMISC items (1 thru 60) in the above table represent the combined stress solution, KEYOPT(5) = 1.
If MODE = 0, their values are zero at THETA = 90/MODE and at EXTR.
See Surface Solution for the item and sequence numbers for surface output for the ETABLE command.

• The element must be defined in the global X-Y plane as shown in Figure 1 (p. 341) and the Y-axis must
be the axis of symmetry for axisymmetric analyses. An axisymmetric structure should be modeled in
the +X quadrants.
PLANE83
• A face with a removed midside node implies that the displacement varies linearly, rather than parabol-
ically, along that face. See Quadratic Elements (Midside Nodes) in the Modeling and Meshing Guide for
more information about the use of midside nodes.
• The element assumes a linear elastic material.
• Post-analysis superposition of results is valid only with other linear elastic solutions.
• The element should not be used with the large deflection option.
• Surface stress printout is valid only if the conditions described in Element Solution (p. 51) are met.
Modeling hints:
• If shear effects are important in a shell-like structure, at least two elements through the thickness
should be used.
• You can use only axisymmetric (MODE,0) loads without significant torsional stresses to generate
the stress state used for stress stiffened modal analyses using this element.

SOLID87
3-D 10-Node Tetrahedral Thermal Solid

SOLID87 is well suited to model irregular meshes (such as produced from various CAD/CAM systems).
The element has one degree of freedom, temperature, at each node.
The element is applicable to a 3-D, steady-state or transient thermal analysis. See SOLID87 in the
Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for more details about this element. If the model containing this
element is also to be analyzed structurally, the element should be replaced by the equivalent structural
element (such as SOLID187). A 20-node thermal solid element, SOLID90, is also available.
4
R
P
Q 3
Y 2
O K
X I M N
Z
1
J
SOLID87 Input Data

Material Reference.
For phase change problems, use KEYOPT(1) = 1 (diagonalized specific heat matrix). For convection regions
with strong thermal gradients, use KEYOPT(5) = 1 (consistent convection matrix).
SOLID87

Nodes
I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P, Q, R
Degrees of Freedom
TEMP
Real Constants
None
Material Properties
Surface Loads
face 1 (J-I-K), face 2 (I-J-L), face 3 (J-K-L), face 4 (K-I-L)
Body Loads
Heat Generations --
HG(I), HG(J), HG(K), HG(L), HG(M), HG(N), HG(O), HG(P), HG(Q), HG(R)
Special Features
Birth and death
KEYOPT(1)
0 --
1 --
KEYOPT(5)
Surface convection matrix:
0 --
Diagonalized convection matrix
1 --
Consistent convection matrix
SOLID87 Output Data


element output directions are parallel to the element coordinate system. A general description of
SOLID87
available.

Name Definition O R
NODES Nodes - I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P, Q, R Y Y
VOLU: Volume Y Y
HGEN Heat generations HG(I), HG(J), HG(K), HG(L), Y -
HG(M), HG(N), HG(O), HG(P), HG(Q), HG(R)
TG:X, Y, Z, SUM Thermal gradient components and vector sum Y Y
at centroid
TF:X, Y, Z, SUM Thermal flux (heat flow rate/cross-sectional area) Y Y
FACE Convection face label 1 -
NODES Convection face corner nodes 1 -
AREA Convection face area 1 1
HEAT Heat flow rate per unit area across face by 1 -
RATE/AREA convection
HFLXAVG Heat flow rate per unit area across face caused - 1
by input heat flux

The Item and Sequence Number Table (p. 52) of this manual for more information. The following notation
is used in Table 2: SOLID87 Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 352):
SOLID87
Name
Item
FCn

Quantity FC1 FC2 FC3 FC4
Name Item

• Elements may be numbered either as shown in Figure 1 (p. 349) or may have node L below the IJK plane.
• An edge with a removed midside node implies that the temperature varies linearly, rather than parabol-
ically, along that edge.
• See Quadratic Elements (Midside Nodes) in the Modeling and Meshing Guide for more information about
the use of midside nodes.

ANSYS Professional
SOLID90

SOLID90 is a higher order version of the 3-D eight node thermal element (SOLID70). The element has
20 nodes with a single degree of freedom, temperature, at each node. The 20-node elements have
compatible temperature shapes and are well suited to model curved boundaries.
The 20-node thermal element is applicable to a 3-D, steady-state or transient thermal analysis. See
SOLID90 in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for more details about this element. If the model
containing this element is also to be analyzed structurally, the element should be replaced by the
equivalent structural element (such as SOLID186).
,,,,,V, ,
,

,,

5 P 4
W
X etrahedral ption
6 O ,,,,,V, ,
M
B V
U
N
A
Y 2 3
L S
T Z yramid ption
K
I ,,
R
Q J 1 V ,

,,

rism ption
SOLID90 Input Data

The element is defined by 20 node points and the material properties. A prism-shaped element may
be formed by defining duplicate K, L, and S; A and B; and O, P, and W node numbers. A tetrahedral-
shaped element and a pyramid-shaped element may also be formed as shown in Figure 1 (p. 353).
SOLID90
Material Reference.
For phase change problems, use KEYOPT(1) = 1 (diagonalized specific heat matrix).

Nodes
I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P, Q, R, S, T, U, V, W, X, Y, Z, A, B
Degrees of Freedom
TEMP
Real Constants
None
Material Properties
Surface Loads

Body Loads
Heat Generations --
HG(I), HG(J), HG(K), HG(L), HG(M), HG(N), HG(O), HG(P), HG(Q), HG(R),
HG(S), HG(T), HG(U), HG(V), HG(W), HG(X), HG(Y), HG(Z), HG(A), HG(B)
Special Features
Birth and death
KEYOPT(1)
0 --
1 --
SOLID90
SOLID90 Output Data


available.

Label Definition O R
VOLU: Volume Y Y
HG(N), HG(O), HG(P), HG(Q), ..., HG(Z), HG(A), HG(B)
TG:X, Y, Z, SUM Thermal gradient components and vector sum at Y Y
centroid
TF:X, Y, Z, SUM Thermal flux (heat flow rate/cross-sectional area) com- Y Y
FACE Face label 1 -
NODES Corner nodes on this face 1 -
AREA Face area 1 1
RATE/AREA
SOLID90
heat flux

The Item and Sequence Number Table (p. 52) of this manual for more information. The following notation
Name
Item
FCn

Name
AREA NMISC 1 7 13 19 25 31
HFAVG NMISC 2 8 14 20 26 32
TAVG NMISC 3 9 15 21 27 33
TBAVG NMISC 4 10 16 22 28 34

numbered properly.
interchanged.
• The condensed face of a prism-shaped element should not be defined as a convection face.
• If the thermal element is to be replaced by a SOLID186 structural element with surface stresses requested,
the thermal element should be oriented such that face IJNM and/or face KLPO is a free surface.
SOLID90
• An edge with a removed midside node implies that the temperature varies linearly, rather than parabol-
ically, along that edge.
• See Quadratic Elements (Midside Nodes) in the Modeling and Meshing Guide for more information about
the use of midside nodes.
• For transient solutions using the THOPT,QUASI option, the program removes the midside nodes from
any face with a convection load. A temperature solution is not available for them. Do not use the midside
nodes on these faces in constraint equations or with contact. If you use these faces for those situations,
remove the midside nodes first.
• Degeneration to the form of pyramid should be used with caution.
• The element sizes, when degenerated, should be small in order to minimize the field gradients.

ANSYS Professional
• No Birth and Death.
CIRCU94
Piezoelectric Circuit
MP ME <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS
CIRCU94 Element Description

CIRCU94 is a circuit element for use in piezoelectric-circuit analyses. The element has two or three nodes
to define the circuit component and one or two degrees of freedom to model the circuit response. The
element may interface with the following piezoelectric elements:
PLANE13, KEYOPT(1) = 7 coupled-field quadrilateral solid

SOLID5, KEYOPT(1) = 0 or 3 coupled-field brick
SOLID98, KEYOPT(1) = 0 or 3 coupled-field tetrahedron
PLANE223, KEYOPT(1) = 1001, coupled-field 8-node quadrilateral
SOLID226, KEYOPT(1) = 1001, coupled-field 20-node brick
SOLID227, KEYOPT(1) = 1001, coupled-field 10-node tetrahedron
CIRCU94 is applicable to full harmonic and transient analyses. For these types of analyses, you can also
use CIRCU94 as a general circuit element. See CIRCU94 in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for
more details about this element.
CIRCU94 Input Data

The geometry, node definition, and degree of freedom options are shown in Figure 1 (p. 360) . Active
nodes I and J define the resistor, inductor, capacitor and independent current source. They are connected
to the electric circuit. Active nodes I and J and a passive node K define the independent voltage source.
The passive node is not connected to the electric circuit. It is associated with the CURR degree of freedom
(which represents electric charge for this element).
KEYOPT(1) settings and the corresponding real constants define the circuit components. Real constant
input is dependent on the element circuit option used. A summary of the element input options is
given in "CIRCU94 Input Summary" (p. 360). Real constants 15 (Graphical offset, GOFFST) and 16 (Element
identification number, ID) are created for all components.
CIRCU94
Figure 1 CIRCU94 Circuit Options
Resistor nductor Capacitor
VI VI VI
VJ VJ VJ
EYOPT(1) = 0 EYOPT(1) = 1 EYOPT(1) = 2

DOF = VOLT DOF = VOLT DOF = VOLT
ndependent ndependent
Current Source Voltage Source
VI VI
+ -qK
VJ VJ
EYOPT(1) = 3 EYOPT(1) = 4
DOF = VOLT DOF = VOLT ( ,), CURR ()
The independent current and voltage sources (KEYOPT(1) = 3 or 4) may be excited by constant load
(transient) or constant amplitude load (harmonic), sinusoidal, pulse, exponential, or piecewise linear
load functions as defined by KEYOPT(2); see Figure 2 (p. 362).
The time-step size for a transient analysis is controlled by the DELTIM or NSUBST commands. The
CIRCU94 element does not respond to automatic time stepping (AUTOTS command), but AUTOTS can
be used as a mechanism for ramping the time step to its final value.
CIRCU94 is only compatible with elements having a VOLT DOF and an electric charge reaction solution.
Electric charge reactions must all be positive or negative. KEYOPT(6) sets the electric charge reaction
sign. See Element Compatibility in the Low-Frequency Electromagnetic Analysis Guide for more information.
CIRCU94 Input Summary

Nodes
I, J, K
Degrees of Freedom
VOLT, CURR (charge) (see Figure 1 (p. 360))
Real Constants
Dependent on KEYOPT(1) and KEYOPT(2) settings. See Table 1: CIRCU94 Real Constants (p. 362) for details.
CIRCU94
Material Properties
None
Surface Loads
None
Body Loads
See KEYOPT(2)
Special Features
This element works with the large deflection and stress stiffening capabilities of PLANE13, SOLID5, SOLID98,
PLANE223, SOLID226, and SOLID227.
KEYOPT(1)
Circuit component type:
0 --
Resistor
1 --
Inductor
2 --
Capacitor
3 --
Independent Current Source
4 --
Independent Voltage Source
KEYOPT(2)
Body loads (only used for KEYOPT(1) = 3 and 4):
0 --
Constant load (transient) or constant amplitude load (harmonic)
1 --
Sinusoidal load
2 --
Pulse load
3 --
Exponential load
4 --
Piecewise Linear load
KEYOPT(6)
Electric charge reaction sign:
0 --
Negative
CIRCU94
1 --
Positive
Table 1 CIRCU94 Real Constants

Circuit Component and KEYOPT(1) Real Constants
Graphics Label
Resistor (R) 0 R1 = Resistance (RES)
Inductor (L) 1 R1 = Inductance (IND)
R2 = Initial inductor current (ILO)
Capacitor (C) 2 R1 = Capacitance (CAP)
R2 = Initial Capacitor Voltage (VCO)
Independent Current Source 3 For KEYOPT(2) = 0:
(I)
R1 = Amplitude (AMPL)
R2 = Phase angle (PHAS)
For KEYOPT(2) > 0, see Figure 2.
Independent Voltage Source 4 For KEYOPT(2) = 0:
(V)
For KEYOPT(2) > 0, see Figure 2.
Note
For all above Circuit options, the GOFFST and ID real constants (numbers 15 and 16) are
created by the Circuit Builder automatically:
Figure 2 Load Functions and Corresponding Real Constants for Independent Current and
Voltage Sources
(R1) OFFS = Voltage or Current Offset

(R2) VA = Voltage or Current Amplitude
Load
(R3) FREQ = Frequency in Hz
(R4) TD = Delay Time
EXPD (R5) PHD = Phase Delay
(R6) EXPD = Exponential Decay Factor
OFFS AMPL VA
TD Time
(a) Sinusoidal load, KEYOPT(2) = 1
CIRCU94
Load
(R1) VL = Low Voltage or Current
PER (R2) VH = High Voltage or Current
TW (R3) TD = Delay Time
(R4) TR = Rise Time
(R5) TF = Fall Time
VH (R6) TW = Pulse Width
(R7) PER = Period
V Time
TD
TR TF
(b) Pulse load, KEYOPT(2) = 2
! "# "$%&'* "+ -.++*/%
0 8 ! 89': "$%&'* "+ -.++*/%
; <> ! 9?* >*$&@ <9A*
B <- ! 9?* <9A*G-"/?%&/%
I <J> ! J&$$ >*$&@ <9A*
8 M <J- ! J&$$ <9A*G-"/?%&/%
N QS ! Q*+9"UX U*f&.$%? %"
<> Z 0 <J>G<>

c xp
qvz{ _| } _`jk~\` z
qv{ | } \] k \ k ] `jk~\` z
qv{ _ } _`jk~\`
[\]^ qv{ } \] k \ k ] `jk~\`

_ _

_|| qvzz{ _ } _`jk~\`
_ qvz{ } \] k \ k ] `jk~\`
_`jk
q^{ `kk`k `k] \]^ _q{ }
CIRCU94 Output Data

The element output for this element is dependent on the circuit option selected. Table 2: CIRCU94 Element
Output Definitions (p. 364) summarizes the element output data.
CIRCU94
available.
Table 2 CIRCU94 Element Output Definitions

Name Definition O R
For KEYOPT(1) = 0: Resistor
NODES Nodes-I,J Y Y
RES Resistance Y Y
VOLTAGE Voltage drop between node I and node J Y Y
CURRENT Current Y Y
POWER Power loss Y Y
For KEYOPT(1) = 1: Inductor
NODES Nodes-I,J Y Y
IND Inductance Y Y
IL0 Initial current Y Y
CURRENT Current Y Y
POWER Power absorption Y Y
For KEYOPT(1) = 2: Capacitor
NODES Nodes-I,J Y Y
CAP Capacitance Y Y
VC0 Initial voltage Y Y
CURRENT Current Y Y
For KEYOPT(1) = 3: Independent Current Source
NODES Nodes-I,J Y Y
CURRENT Real or imaginary component of applied current Y Y
SOURCE
CURRENT Current Y Y
POWER Power (loss if positive, output if negative) Y Y
CIRCU94
Name Definition O R
For KEYOPT(1) = 4: Independent Voltage Source
NODES Nodes-I,J,K Y Y
VOLTAGE Real or imaginary component of applied voltage Y Y
SOURCE
CURRENT Current at node K Y Y
Table 3: CIRCU94 Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 365) lists output available through the ETABLE command
notation is used in Table 3: CIRCU94 Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 365):
Name
output quantity as defined in Table 2: CIRCU94 Element Output Definitions (p. 364)
Item
E
Table 3 CIRCU94 Item and Sequence Numbers

ETABLE and
Output Quantity ESOL Command
Name Input
Item E
VOLTAGE SMISC 1
CURRENT SMISC 2
POWER NMISC 1
SOURCE (real) NMISC 2
SOURCE (imaginary) NMISC 3
CIRCU94 Assumptions and Restrictions

• CIRCU94 is applicable only to full harmonic and transient analyses. You cannot use CIRCU94 in a static
analysis or in a transient analysis with time integration effects turned off (TIMINT,OFF).
• Only MKS units are allowed (EMUNIT command).
• Only the sparse solver is available for problems using the independent voltage source circuit option.
• This element may not be compatible with other elements with the VOLT degree of freedom. For example,
it is not compatible with CIRCU124 or CIRCU125. To be compatible, the elements must have the same
reaction solution for the VOLT DOF. Elements that have an electric charge reaction solution must all
have the same electric charge reaction sign. For more information, see Element Compatibility in the
Low-Frequency Electromagnetic Analysis Guide.
CIRCU94
CIRCU94 Product Restrictions

SOLID96
3-D Magnetic Scalar Solid
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> EM <> <> PP <> EME <>

SOLID96 has the capability of modeling 3-D magnetic fields. Scalar potential formulations (reduced
(RSP), difference (DSP), or general (GSP)) are available [MAGOPT] for modeling magnetic fields in a
static analysis. See SOLID96 in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for more details about this element.

I
4
5 P
O
T rah ral
6 M O,P
M N
N I K,L
2 3
L J
Wedge Option
K

Z
I 1
Y J
X
ym
SOLID96 Input Data

type of units (MKS or user defined) is specified through the EMUNIT command. EMUNIT also determines
the value of MUZRO. The EMUNIT defaults are MKS units and MUZRO = 4π x 10-7 henries/meter. In
addition to MUZRO, orthotropic relative permeability is available and is specified through the MURX,
MURY, and MURZ material options.
SOLID96
coordinate system orientation is as described in Coordinate Systems (p. 56). Nonlinear magnetic B-H
responds to the degree of freedom (MAG) and VALUE corresponds to the value (magnetic scalar potential).
With the F command, the Lab variable corresponds to the force (FLUX) and VALUE corresponds to the
value (magnetic flux).
load commands (no value is required.) A maxwell stress tensor calculation is performed at these surfaces
for which forces are required. Deleting the MXWF specification removes the flag. Maxwell forces may
be made available for a subsequent structural analysis with companion elements (LDREAD command).
may be input based on their value at the element's nodes or as a single element value [BF and BFE].
In general, unspecified nodal values of temperature default to the uniform value specified with the
BFUNIF or TUNIF commands.
Current for the magnetic scalar potential options are defined with the SOURC36 element, the command
macro RACE, or through electromagnetic coupling. The various types of magnetic scalar potential
solution options are defined with the MAGOPT command.

Nodes
I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P
Degrees of Freedom
MAG
Real Constants
None
Material Properties
MUZERO, MURX, MURY, MURZ, MGXX, MGYY, MGZZ plus BH data table (see "Material Models" in the
Material Reference)
Surface Loads
SOLID96
Body Loads
Temperatures --
T(I), T(J), T(K), T(L), T (M), T(N), T(O), T(P)
MVDI --
EF --
Special Features
Adaptive descent
Birth and death
KEYOPT(5)
0 --
1 --
2 --
SOLID96 Output Data

• Nodal potentials included in the overall nodal solution

available.

Name Definition O R
VOLU: Volume Y Y
SOLID96
Name Definition O R
Combined (FJB or Combined force components - 1
FMX) force compon-
ents
1. The solution value is printed only if calculated (based upon input data). The element solution is at the
centroid.

Integration Point Solution LOC, MUX, MUY, MUZ, H, HSUM, B, 1 -
BSUM
Nodal Magnetic Field Solution H, HSUM, B, BSUM 2 -

Name
output quantity as defined in Table 1: SOLID96 Element Output Definitions (p. 369)
Item
SOLID96
E
Output ETABLE and

Quant- ESOL Command
ity Input
Name Item E
MUX NMISC 1
MUY NMISC 2
MUZ NMISC 3
FVWX NMISC 4
FVWY NMISC 5
FVWZ NMISC 6
FVWSUM NMISC 7

• The element requires an iterative solution if nonlinear material properties are defined.
• The difference magnetic scalar potential option is restricted to singly-connected permeable regions, so
that as µ → ∞ in these regions, the resulting field H → 0. The reduced scalar, and general scalar potential
should be small in order to minimize the field gradients. Pyramid elements are best used as filler elements
or in meshing transition zones.
• The solenoidal current density is required for a solution, or for any postprocessing operations.
tracing.

ANSYS Emag
SOLID96
SOLID97
3-D Magnetic Solid
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> EM <> <> PP <> EME <>

SOLID97 models 3-D magnetic fields. The element is defined by eight nodes, and has up to five degrees
of freedom per node out of six defined DOFs; that is, the magnetic vector potential (AX, AY, AZ), the
time-integrated electric potential (VOLT - classical formulation) or the electric potential (VOLT - solen-
oidal formulation), the electric current (CURR), and the electromotive force (EMF). SOLID97 is based on
the magnetic vector potential formulation with the Coulomb gauge, and is applicable to the following
low-frequency magnetic field analyses: magnetostatics, eddy currents (AC time harmonic and transient
analyses), voltage forced magnetic fields (static, AC time harmonic and transient analyses), and electro-
magnetic-circuit coupled fields (static, AC time harmonic and transient analyses). The element has
nonlinear magnetic capability for modeling B-H curves or permanent magnet demagnetization curves.
See SOLID97 in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for details about this element. Elements with
similar capability are PLANE53, SOLID62 (but without voltage forced and magnetic-circuit coupled
capability), SOLID236, and SOLID237.
Degree of freedom and force labels for this element are shown in the following table.
Table 1 DOF and Force Labels

Degree of Freedom Force (reaction solution)
Label Label Description Label Label Description
AX, AY, AZ [1] Magnetic Vector Poten- CSGX, CSGY, CSGZ Magnetic Current Seg-
tial [2] ment
VOLT Voltage AMPS Current Flow
CURR Current Flow VLTG Voltage Drop
EMF Electromotive Force CURT Current Flow
1. The label used with the CNVTOL command is A.

2. The label used with the CNVTOL command is CSG.
Formulations
SOLID97 has two formulation options: classical and solenoidal. The classical formulation requires you
to specify current density for current source loading. You must ensure that solenoidal conditions (div
J = 0) are satisfied, otherwise an erroneous solution might develop. The solenoidal formulation automat-
ically satisfies the solenoidal condition by directly solving for current (density) using a coupled current
conduction and electromagnetic field solution. The solenoidal formulation is applicable to sources that
are eddy current free (such as stranded coils).
SOLID97
Note
Both formulations may be used simultaneously, depending on the physics requirements of

the model. See 3-D Nodal-Based Analyses (Static, Harmonic, and Transient) in the Low-Fre-
quency Electromagnetic Analysis Guide for information on applying these formulations to dif-
ferent physics regions of a model.
The SOLID97 solenoidal option is compatible with CIRCU124, CIRCU125, and TRANS126 elements allowing
circuit coupling. The nonlinear symmetric solenoidal formulation is applicable to static and transient
analyses. The linear unsymmetric solenoidal formulation is applicable to harmonic analysis. For more
information, see 3-D Circuit Coupled Solid Source Conductor in the Coupled-Field Analysis Guide

I
4
5 P
O
T rah ral
6 M O,P
M N
N I K,L
2 3
L J
Wedge Option
K

Z
I 1
Y J
X
ym
SOLID97 Input Data

type of units (MKS or user defined) is specified through the EMUNIT command. EMUNIT also determines
the value of MUZRO. The EMUNIT defaults are MKS units and MUZRO = 4π x 10-7 henries/meter. In
addition to MUZRO, orthotropic relative permeability is available and is specified through the MURX,
MURY, and MURZ material options. Orthotropic resistivity is specified through RSVX, RSVY, and RSVZ
material property labels.
SOLID97
coordinate system orientation is as described in Coordinate Systems (p. 56). Nonlinear magnetic B-H
When SOLID97 is used for voltage forced or magnetic-circuit coupled analyses, the following real con-
stants apply for coils or massive conductors:
CARE
Coil cross-sectional area.
TURN
Total number of coil turns, required for stranded coil only. Defaults to 1.
VOLU
Modeled coil volume, required for stranded coil only.
DIRX, DIRY, DIRZ
x, y, and z components of a unit vector (in the element coordinate system) representing the direction
of current. Required for a stranded coil only.
CSYM
Coil symmetry factor: CSYM*VOLU = total volume of the coil. Required for stranded coil only. Defaults
to 1.
FILL
Coil fill factor, required for stranded coil only. Defaults to 1.
When velocity effects of a conducting body (KEYOPT(2) = 1) are considered, the following real constants
apply:
VELOX, VELOY, VELOZ

Velocity components in the Global Cartesian Coordinate system X, Y, and Z direction respectively.
OMEGAX, OMEGAY, OMEGAZ
Angular (rotational) velocity (Hz, cycles/sec) about the Global Cartesian system X, Y, and Z-axes re-
spectively, located at the pivot point location (XLOC, YLOC, ZLOC).
XLOC, YLOC, ZLOC
Global Cartesian coordinate point locations of the rotating body in the X, Y, and Z directions respect-
ively.
responds to the degree of freedom (A_ and VOLT) and VALUE corresponds to the value (vector magnetic
potential or the time-integrated electric potential (classical formulation) or the electric potential
(solenoidal formulation). The electric potential may or may not be time integrated depending on the
KEYOPT(1) selection. With the F command, the Lab variable corresponds to the force (CSG or Amps)
and VALUE corresponds to the value (magnetic current segment or current).
SOLID97
for which forces are required. Deleting the MXWF specification removes the flag. Lorentz and Maxwell
forces may be made available for a subsequent structural analysis with companion elements [LDREAD].
may be input based on their value at the element's nodes or as a single element value [BF and BFE].
Source current density (classical formulation) and voltage body loads may be applied to an area or
volume [BFA or BFV] or input as an element value [BFE]. In general, unspecified nodal values of tem-
peratures default to the uniform value specified with the BFUNIF or TUNIF commands. The vector
components of the current density are with respect to the element coordinate system (see "SOLID97
Assumptions and Restrictions" (p. 382) for solenoidal restriction). Joule heating may be made available
for a subsequent thermal analysis with companion elements [LDREAD].

Nodes
I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P
Degrees of Freedom
See KEYOPT(1)
Real Constants
None if KEYOPT(1) = 0 and KEYOPT(2) = 0.
For KEYOPT(1) = 2, 3, 5, or 6, and KEYOPT(2) = 0:
CARE, TURN, VOLU, DIRX, DIRY, DIRZ,

CSYM, FILL
For KEYOPT(1) = 4 and KEYOPT(2) = 0:
CARE - Coil cross-sectional area
For KEYOPT(1) = 0 or 1 and KEYOPT(2) = 1:
(blank), (blank), (blank), (blank), (blank), (blank),

(blank), (blank), VELOX, VELOY, VELOZ, OMEGAX,
OMEGAY OMEGAZ, XLOC, YLOC, ZLOC
See Table 2: SOLID97 Real Constants (p. 378) for a description of the real constants.
Material Properties
MUZERO, MURX, MURY, MURZ, RSVX, RSVY, RSVZ, MGXX, MGYY, MGZZ plus BH data table (see "Material
Models" in the Material Reference)
Surface Loads

SOLID97
Magnetic-Circuit Interface Flags, if KEYOPT(1) = 4:

Body Loads
Temperatures --
MVDI --
VD(I), VD(J), VD(K), VD(L), VD(M), VD(N),

VD(O), VD(P)
Source Current Density, if KEYOPT(1) = 0 (See "SOLID97 Assumptions and Restrictions" (p. 382) for
solenoidal restriction) --
JSX(I), JSY(I), JSZ(I), PHASE(I), JSX(J), JSY(J), JSZ(J), PHASE(J), JSX(K), JSY(K), JSZ(K), PHASE(K),
JSX(L), JSY(L), JSZ(L), PHASE(L), JSX(M), JSY(M), JSZ(M), PHASE(M), JSX(N), JSY(N), JSZ(N), PHASE(N),
JSX(O), JSY(O), JSZ(O), PHASE(O), JSX(P), JSY(P), JSZ(P), PHASE(P)
Voltage Loading, if KEYOPT(1) = 2 --
VLTG(I), PHASE(I), VLTG(J), PHASE(J), VLTG(K), PHASE(K), VLTG(L), PHASE(L),

VLTG(M), PHASE(M), VLTG(N), PHASE(N), VLTG(O), PHASE(O), VLTG(P), PHASE(P)
EF --
Special Features
Adaptive descent
Birth and death
KEYOPT(1)
Element degrees of freedom and formulation selection:
Classical Formulation
0 --
AX, AY, AZ degrees of freedom: static domain, source domain
1 --
AX, AY, AZ, VOLT degrees of freedom: eddy current domain, velocity effect domain
2 --
AX, AY, AZ, CURR degrees of freedom: voltage-fed stranded coil
3 --
AX, AY, AZ, CURR, EMF degrees of freedom: circuit-coupled stranded coil
4 --
AX, AY, AZ, VOLT, CURR degrees of freedom: circuit-coupled massive conductor
Solenoidal Formulation
5 --
AX, AY, AZ, VOLT degrees of freedom: nonlinear symmetric solenoidal formulation applicable to
static and transient analyses
SOLID97
6 --
AX, AY, AZ, VOLT degrees of freedom: linear unsymmetric solenoidal formulation applicable to har-
monic analyses
Note
For KEYOPT(1) = 1 and 4, the VOLT degree of freedom is time integrated (classical formu-
lation). For KEYOPT(1) = 5 and 6, the VOLT degree of freedom is not time integrated
(solenoidal formulation).
KEYOPT(2)
Element conventional velocity:
0 --
Velocity effects ignored
1 --
Conventional velocity formulation (not available if KEYOPT(1) = 2, 3, or 4)
KEYOPT(5)
0 --
1 --
2 --
Table 2 SOLID97 Real Constants

KEYOPT(1) = 2, 3, 5, 6 and KEYOPT(2) = 0
1 CARE Coil cross-sectional area
2 TURN Total number of coil turns
3 VOLU Modeled coil volume
4 DIRX Directional cosine for X component of the current
5 DIRY Directional cosine for Y component of the current
6 DIRZ Directional cosine for Z component of the current
7 CSYM Coil symmetry factor
8 FILL Coil fill factor *
KEYOPT(1) = 0 or 1 and KEYOPT(2) = 1
1, ..., 8 (blank) Unused for these settings
9, 10, 11 VELOX, VE- Velocity specification in the x, y, and z directions
LOY, VELOZ
12, 13, OMEGAX, Angular velocity about the X, Y, and Z axes
14 OMEGAY,
OMEGAZ
SOLID97

15, 16, XLOC, YLOC, Pivot point location (x, y, z)
17 ZLOC
* The ratio between the actual conductor area and the area of the coil or element geometry. Often, the
element approximation will differ from that of the conductor, especially in multi-strand coils.
SOLID97 Output Data


available.

Name Definition O R
VOLU: Volume Y Y
T(O), T(P)
MUX, MUY, MUZ Magnetic secant permeability 1 1
JS:X, Y, Z Source current density components in the global 1 1
Cartesian coordinate system, valid for static analysis
only
SOLID97
Name Definition O R
JT(X, Y, Z) Total current density components in the global 1 1
Cartesian coordinate system.
FJB(X, Y, Z) Lorentz magnetic force components 1 -
FMX(X, Y, Z) Maxwell magnetic force components 1 -
FVW(X, Y, Z) Virtual work force components 1 1
Combined (FJB or Combined (FJB or FMX) force components - 1
FMX) force compon-
ents
ERES Element resistance value (for stranded coils only) - 1
EIND Element inductance value (for stranded coils only) - 1
DMUXX, DMUYY, Differential permeability 1 1
DMUZZ
V:X, Y, Z Velocity components 1 1
V:SUM Vector magnitude of V 1 -
MRE Magnetic Reynolds number 1 1
centroid.
Note
For harmonic analysis, Joule losses (JHEAT) and forces (FJB(X, Y, Z), FMX(X, Y, Z), FVW(X,
Y, Z)) represent time-average values. These values are stored in both the "Real" and
“Imaginary” data sets. The macros POWERH and FMAGSUM can be used to retrieve
this data.
Inductance values (EIND) obtained for KEYOPT(1) = 2, 3, or 4 are only valid under the
following conditions: the problem is linear (constant permeability), there are no per-
manent magnets in the model, and only a single coil exists in the model.
For KEYOPT(1)=2 and 3, JT represents the effective current density (including non-
conducting material represented by the FILL factor). JHEAT reprsents the effective Joule
heat generation rate (including non-conducting material represented by the FILL factor).

Integration Point Solution LOC, MUX, MUY, MUZ, H, HSUM, B, 1 -
BSUM
SOLID97

1. Output at each integration point, if (KEYOPT(5) = 1)

2. Output at each corner node, if (KEYOPT(5) = 2)
Name
Item
E
Output ETABLE and

Quant- ESOL Command
ity Input
Name Item E
JSX SMISC 1
JSY SMISC 2
JSZ SMISC 3
JSSUM SMISC 4
MUX NMISC 1
MUY NMISC 2
MUZ NMISC 3
FVWX NMISC 4
FVWY NMISC 5
FVWZ NMISC 6
FVWSUM NMISC 7
JTX NMISC 12
JTY NMISC 13
JTZ NMISC 14
JTSUM NMISC 15
ERES NMISC 16
EIND NMISC 17
DMUXX NMISC 18
DMUYY NMISC 19
SOLID97
Output ETABLE and

Quant- ESOL Command
ity Input
Name Item E
DMUZZ NMISC 20
VX NMISC 21
VY NMISC 22
VZ NMISC 23
MRE NMISC 28

• The element requires an iterative solution if nonlinear material properties are defined.
• The continuity equation must be satisfied for a proper electromagnetic analysis as explained in the
Mechanical APDL Theory Reference. For this reason the source current density, JS, must be solenoidal
(that is, ∇ · JS = 0). You should verify that this condition is satisfied when prescribing the source current
density load. If this condition is not satisfied SOLID97 can produce erroneous solutions without warning.
Refer to Source Current Density (JS) in the Low-Frequency Electromagnetic Analysis Guide for information
on how to obtain solenoidal currents when the source current density is not constant. To have ANSYS
compute the current density for voltage or circuit coupled problems, apply the solenoidal formulation
(KEYOPT(1) = 5 or 6).
• For models containing materials with different permeabilities, the 3-D nodal-based vector potential
formulation (either static or time-dependent) is not recommended. The solution has been found to be
inaccurate when the normal component of the vector potential is significant at the interface between
elements of different permeability. To obtain the normal component of the vector potential in postpro-
cessing, issue PLVECT,A or PRVECT,A in a rotated coordinate system [RSYS] that orients one of the
vector potential components normal to the material interface.
• Current density loading (BFE,,JS) is only valid for the AX, AY, AZ option (KEYOPT(1) = 0). For the AX, AY,
AZ, VOLT option (KEYOPT(1) = 1, 5, or 6) use F,,AMPS. Solenoidal loading is recommended. For more
information, see 3-D Magnetostatics and Fundamentals of Edge-Based Analysis and 3-D Nodal-Based
Analyses (Static, Harmonic, and Transient) in the Low-Frequency Electromagnetic Analysis Guide.
• When this element does not have the VOLT degree of freedom, for a harmonic or transient analysis, it
acts as a stranded conductor.
• You cannot use this element in a nonlinear harmonic analysis.
• The VOLT degree of freedom (KEYOPT(1) = 1) is required in all non-source regions with a specified non-
zero resistivity. This allows eddy currents to be computed.
• For source conducting regions (RSVX ≠ 0), current loading should be applied as nodal loads (AMPS)
using the solenoidal formulation. Current density loading (JS) is allowed (classical formulation), but
SOLID97
solenoidal loading is recommended. Node coupling of the VOLT DOF may be required at symmetry
planes and locations where the current is applied.
• The ANSYS product does not support the analysis of coupled velocity and circuit effects.
• For voltage forced magnetic field (KEYOPT(1) = 2) and circuit coupled problems (KEYOPT(1) = 3,4), note
the following additional restrictions:
– Only MKS units are allowed.
– The permeability and conductivity are isotropic and constant.
– The element coordinate system is used for specifying the current direction vector (DIRX, DIRY, DIRZ)
for a stranded coil. Also, the cross sectional area of the stranded coil should not change.
– For (KEYOPT(1) = 2 or 3), all CURR degrees of freedom in a coil region must be coupled (CP command),
and all EMF degrees of freedom in a coil region must be coupled.
– For (KEYOPT(1) = 4), all CURR degrees of freedom on the input face and output face of a massive
conductor must be coupled.
• For circuit coupled transient analyses, use THETA = 1.0, the default value, on the TINTP command to
specify the backward Euler method. For more information, refer to the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference,
as well as the description of the TINTP command in the Command Reference.
• For velocity effects (KEYOPT(2) = 1), note the following restrictions:
– Velocity effects are valid only for the AX, AY, AZ, VOLT DOF option.
– Velocity effects cannot be included in a static analysis. To simulate a static analysis, execute a har-
monic analysis at a very low frequency and retrieve the "real" results for the solution.
– Velocity effects are available only in a linear analysis.
– Isotropic resistivity.
– Solution accuracy may degrade if the element magnetic Reynolds number is much greater than 1.0.
(See the discussion of magnetic fields in the Low-Frequency Electromagnetic Analysis Guide.)
• If (KEYOPT(1) = 2, 3,4, or 6) or (KEYOPT(2) ≥ 1), unsymmetric matrices are produced.
• The solenoidal formulations do not model eddy current effects.
tracing.

ANSYS Emag
SOLID98
Tetrahedral Coupled-Field Solid
MP ME <> <> <> <> <> <> EM <> <> PP <> EME MFS

nology element such as SOLID227.
SOLID98 is a 10-node tetrahedral version of the 8-node SOLID5 element. The element has a quadratic
displacement behavior and is well suited to model irregular meshes (such as produced from various
CAD/CAM systems). When used in structural and piezoelectric analyses, SOLID98 has large deflection
and stress stiffening capabilities.
The element is defined by ten nodes with up to six degrees of freedom at each node (see KEYOPT(1)).
See SOLID98 in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for more details about this element. The 3-D
magnetic, thermal, electric, piezoelectric, and structural field capability is similar to that described for
SOLID5.
4
R
P
Q 3
Y 2
O K
X I M N
Z
1
J
SOLID98 Input Data

The element input data is essentially the same as for SOLID5 except that there are 10 nodes instead of
8.
value). Nodal loads are defined with the D and the F commands. With the D command, the Lab variable
corresponds to the degree of freedom (UX, UY, UZ, TEMP, VOLT, MAG) and VALUE corresponds to the
value (displacements, temperature, voltage, scalar magnetic potential). With the F command, the Lab
variable corresponds to the force (FX, FY, FZ, HEAT, AMPS, FLUX) and VALUE corresponds to the value
(force, heat flow, current or charge, magnetic flux). Nonlinear magnetic B-H, piezoelectric, and anisotropic
elastic properties are entered with the TB command as described in "Material Models" in the Material
SOLID98
Reference. Nonlinear orthotropic magnetic properties may be specified with a combination of a B-H
curve and linear relative permeability. The B-H curve will be used in each element coordinate direction
where a zero value of relative permeability is specified. Only one B-H curve may be specified per mater-
ial.
at which magnetic forces are to be calculated may be identified by using the MXWF label on the surface
The body loads; temperature, heat generation rate and magnetic virtual displacement may be input
based on their value at the element's nodes or as a single element value [BF and BFE]. When the tem-
perature degree of freedom is active (KEYOPT(1) = 0, 1 or 8), applied body force temperatures [BF, BFE]
are ignored. In general, unspecified nodal values of temperatures and heat generation rate default to
the uniform value specified with the BFUNIF or TUNIF commands. Calculated Joule heating (JHEAT) is
applied in subsequent iterations as heat generation rate loading.
temperatures.

Nodes
I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P, Q, R
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, UZ, TEMP, VOLT, MAG if KEYOPT(1) = 0

TEMP, VOLT, MAG if KEYOPT(1) = 1
UX, UY, UZ, VOLT if KEYOPT(1) = 3
VOLT if KEYOPT(1) = 9
MAG if KEYOPT(1) = 10
Real Constants
None
Material Properties

ALPX, ALPY, ALPZ (or CTEX, CTEY, CTEZ or THSX, THSY, THSZ), DENS, GXY, GYZ, GXZ, ALPD, BETD,
KXX, KYY, KZZ, C,
SOLID98
ENTH, MUZERO, MURX, MURY, MURZ, RSVX, RSVY, RSVZ,

MGXX, MGYY, MGZZ, PERX, PERY, PERZ, plus BH, ANEL, and PIEZ data tables (see "Material Models"
in the Material Reference)
Surface Loads
Flags --
Body Loads
Temperatures --
T(I), T(J), T(K), T(L), T(M), T(N), T(O), T(P), T(Q), T(R)
Heat Generations --
HG(I), HG(J), HG(K), HG(L), HG(M), HG(N), HG(O), HG(P), HG(Q), HG(R)
MVDI --
VD(I), VD(J), VD(K), VD(L), VD(M), VD(N), VD(O), VD(P), VD(Q), VD(R)
EF --
Special Features
Adaptive descent
Birth and death
Large deflection
Stress stiffening
KEYOPT(1)
Degree of freedom selection:
0 --
UX, UY, UZ, TEMP, VOLT, MAG
1 --
TEMP, VOLT, MAG
2 --
UX, UY, UZ
3 --
UX, UY, UZ, VOLT
8 --
TEMP
9 --
VOLT
10 --
MAG
KEYOPT(3)
0 --
SOLID98
1 --
KEYOPT(5)
0 --
2 --
Nodal stress or magnetic field printout
SOLID98 Output Data


Several items are illustrated in Figure 2 (p. 388). The component output directions are parallel to the
element coordinate system. The reaction forces, heat flow, current, and magnetic flux at the nodes can
be printed with the OUTPR command. A general description of solution output is given in Solution
Figure 2 SOLID98 Element Output
P SY,BY, R
etc. X
Q SX,BX,
Z S,B, etc. K
etc.
O
Y I M N
X
SOLID98
available.

Name Definition O R
NODES Corner nodes - I, J, K, L Y Y
VOLU: Volume Y Y
PRES Pressures P1 at nodes J, I, K; P2 at I, J, L; P3 at J, K, Y Y
L; P4 at K, I, L
TEMP(INPUT) Temperatures T(I), T(J), T(K), T(L), T(M), T(N), T(O), Y Y
T(P), T(Q), T(R)
HGEN(INPUT) Heat generations HG(I), HG(J), HG(K), HG(L), HG(M), Y -
HG(N), HG(O), HG(P), HG(Q), HG(R)
XZ
XZ
FJB Lorentz magnetic force components (X, Y, Z) 1 -
Combined (FJB or Combined (FJB or FMX) force components - 1
FMX) force compon-
ents
EF:X, Y, Z Electric field components 1 1
SOLID98
Name Definition O R
JS:X, Y, Z Source current density components 1 1
JSSUM Vector magnitude of JS 1 1
U(E, D, M) Elastic (UE), dielectric (UD), and electromechanical 1 1
TG:X, Y, Z Thermal gradient components 1 1
TG:SUM Vector magnitude of TG 1 1
TF:X, Y, Z Thermal flux components 1 1
TF:SUM Vector magnitude of TF (Heat flow rate/unit cross- 1 1
section area)
FACE Face label 2 2
AREA Face area 2 2
tion
input heat flux
centroid.
2. Output only if a surface load is input.
user (MP,PRXY).

Nodal Stress Solution LOC, SINT, SEQV, EPEL(X, Y, Z, XY, 1 -
YZ, XZ), EPEL(1, 2, 3), S(X, Y, Z, XY,
YZ, XZ), S(1, 2, 3)
SOLID98

1. Output at each vertex node, if KEYOPT(5) = 2 and structural DOF

2. Output at each vertex node, if KEYOPT(5) = 2 and magnetic DOF
Name
Item
E
I,J,...,L
FCn -

ity
Name
P1 SMISC - 2 1 3 -
P2 SMISC - 4 5 - 6
P3 SMISC - - 7 8 9
P4 SMISC - 11 - 10 12
MUX NMISC 1 - - - -
MUY NMISC 2 - - - -
MUZ NMISC 3 - - - -
FVWX NMISC 4 - - - -
FVWY NMISC 5 - - - -
FVWZ NMISC 6 - - - -
FVWSUM NMISC 7 - - - -
UE NMISC 16 - - - -
UD NMISC 17 - - - -
UM NMISC 18 - - - -
SOLID98

Name

• The element must not have a zero volume. Elements may be numbered either as shown in Figure
1 (p. 385) or may have node L below the IJK plane. in the Modeling and Meshing Guide
• An edge with a removed midside node implies that the displacement varies linearly, rather than para-
bolically, along that edge. See Quadratic Elements (Midside Nodes) for more information about the use
of midside nodes.
• The difference scalar magnetic potential option is restricted to singly-connected permeable regions, so
that as µ → ∞ in these regions, the resulting field H → 0. The reduced scalar and general scalar potential
• Temperatures and heat generation rates, if internally calculated, include any user defined heat generation
rates.
• Large-deflection capabilities available for KEYOPT(1) = 2 and 3 are not available for KEYOPT(1) = 0. Stress
stiffening is available for KEYOPT(1) = 0, 2, and 3.
tracing.
• If you used the MAG degree of freedom, you cannot restart a job in ANSYS Mechanical using Job-
name.DB and Jobname.ESAV files that were created by ANSYS Multiphysics.
SOLID98

ANSYS Mechanical
• This element does not have magnetic capability.

• KEYOPT(1) cannot be set to 10. If KEYOPT(1) = 0 (default) or 1, the MAG degree of freedom is inactive.
• The magnetic material properties (MUZERO, MUR_, MG__, and the BH data table) are not allowed.
• The Maxwell force flags and magnetic virtual displacements body loads are not applicable.
ANSYS Emag
• The only active degrees of freedom are MAG and VOLT.
• If KEYOPT(1) = 1, the TEMP degree of freedom is inactive. KEYOPT(1) settings of 0, 2, 3 and 8 are
not allowed.
PERZ, plus the BH data table).
• The only applicable surface loads are Maxwell force flags. The only applicable body loads are tem-
peratures (for material property evaluation only) and magnetic virtual displacements.
• The element does not have stress stiffening or birth and death features.
INFIN110
2-D Infinite Solid
MP ME <> <> <> <> <> <> EM <> <> PP <> EME <>

INFIN110 models an open boundary of a 2-D unbounded field problem. A single layer of elements is
used to represent an exterior sub-domain of semi-infinite extent. The layer models the effect of far-field
decay in magnetic, electrostatic, thermal, or electric current conduction analyses. For information about
enclosed elements and analysis types, see Table 1: INFIN110 Analyses (p. 397). INFIN110 may be used for
planar and axisymmetric analyses. See INFIN110 in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for more details
about this element.
L
L
INFIN110 ISE Domain 4
(KEYOPT(2) = 1) P 3
I
I Y
O (or Axial) K
M J
J X (or Radial) INFIN110

O
(KEYOPT(2) = 0)
K N
FE Domain
INFIN110 Input Data

The geometry, node locations, and the coordinate system for the element are shown in Figure 1 (p. 395).
KEYOPT(1) specifies the degree of freedom to be used. KEYOPT(2) specifies whether a 4-node or 8-node
element is used.
Only one layer of INFIN110 elements should be used between the finite element model and the exterior
(infinite) surface. The nodes may be input starting at any corner node, but the face opposite of the finite
element model (the exterior face) must be flagged as an infinite surface. This is usually done by selecting
the nodes at the outer surface and issuing the SF,all,INF command. The other faces have no meaning.
For best results, edges connecting the inner and outer surfaces of the infinite element should be radial
from the center of the model.
Elements (p. 76).
INFIN110

Nodes
I, J, K, L (if KEYOPT(2) = 0)
I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P (if KEYOPT(2) = 1)
Degrees of Freedom
Set by KEYOPT(1). See Table 1: INFIN110 Analyses (p. 397).
Real Constants
None
Material Properties
See Table 2: INFIN110 Material Properties (p. 397).
Surface Loads
Infinite Surface Flags --
Body Loads
None
Special Features
None
KEYOPT(1)
Element degrees of freedom. See Table 1: INFIN110 Analyses (p. 397).
KEYOPT(2)
Element definition:
0 --
4-node quadrilateral
1 --
KEYOPT(3)
Element behavior:
0 --
Plane
1 --
Axisymmetric
KEYOPT(6)
0 --
Positive
1 --
Negative
INFIN110
Analysis categories are shown in the following table. KEYOPT(1) specifies the element degree of freedom.
Table 1 INFIN110 Analyses

Analysis KEY- DOF La- Reaction Solu- Enclosed Ele- Analysis
Category OPT(1) bel tion ments Type
Magnetic 0 AZ Magnetic PLANE13 Static
Current
Segment PLANE53 Harmon-
ic
(F label =
CSG) Transi-
ent
Electrostatic 1 VOLT Electric PLANE121 Static
Charge
Harmon-
(F label = ic
CHRG)
Thermal 2 TEMP Heat Flow PLANE35 Steady-
state
(F label = PLANE55
HEAT) Transi-
PLANE77 ent
Electric Cur- 3 VOLT Electric Cur- PLANE230 Steady-
rent Conduc- rent state
tion
(F label = Harmon-
AMPS) ic
Transi-
ent
INFIN110 material properties are shown in the following table. Nonzero material properties must be
defined. Material properties are defined with the MP, MPDATA and EMUNIT commands.
Table 2 INFIN110 Material Properties

Analysis Category KEYOPT(1) Material Properties
Magnetic 0 MUZERO
Electrostatic 1 PERX, PERY, LSST, RSVX, RSVY
Thermal 2 KXX, KYY, DENS, C
Electric Current Conduction 3 RSVX, RSVY, LSST, PERX, PERY
INFIN110 Output Data


• Additional element output as shown in Table 3: Element Output Definitions (p. 398)
INFIN110
Figure 2 INFIN110 Element Output
K
L
y
Element output directions

Y
( axa)
I
J
X ( aa)
The following notation is used in Table 3: Element Output Definitions (p. 398):
available.
Table 3 Element Output Definitions

Name Definition O R
NODES Nodes - I, J, K, L (KEYOPT(2) = 0) Y Y
Nodes - I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P (KEYOPT(2) = 1)

VOLU: Volume Y Y
MUZERO Magnetic permeability of free space 1 1
PERX, PERY Electric relative permittivity (element coordinates) 2 2
KXX, KYY Thermal conductivity (element coordinates) 3 3
1. If KEYOPT(1) = 0
2. If KEYOPT(1) = 1
3. If KEYOPT(1) = 2
INFIN110
Table 4: INFIN110 Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 399) lists output available through the ETABLE command
notation is used in Table 4: INFIN110 Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 399):
Name
output quantity as defined in the Table 3: Element Output Definitions (p. 398)
Item
E
Table 4 INFIN110 Item and Sequence Numbers
Output ETABLE and

Quant- ESOL Command
ity Input
Name Item E
MUZERO NMISC 1
PERX NMISC 1
PERY NMISC 2
KXX NMISC 1
KYY NMISC 2

• The area of the quadrilateral infinite element must be nonzero.
• The element cannot degenerate to a triangle.
• The exterior surface (for example, KL or KOL in Figure 1 (p. 395)) of the element must be flagged using
the INF option on the SF family of commands.
• Only one layer of infinite elements can be used on the exterior boundary of the finite element model.
• The lines JK and IL of the infinite element IJKL (in Figure 2 (p. 398)) should either be parallel or divergent
from each other. That is, the enclosed surface should be convex and the infinite domain must be rep-
resented by one layer of infinite elements without overlap or gap. Ideally, the length OJ should equal
JK, and OI should equal IL. The point "O" is the "pole" of mapping for the infinite element. The pole is
chosen arbitrarily, and may or may not coincide with the origin of the coordinate system. For best results,
the poles should be placed at the centers of disturbances (loads). There can be multiple poles for a
problem. See the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for more about poles.
• Although this element can have 8 nodes (KEYOPT(2) = 1), for theoretical reasons (see the Mechanical
APDL Theory Reference), only 5 nodes are included in the solution.
• The infinite elements are not included in solution result displays but may be viewed in element displays
[EPLOT].
INFIN110
• There are considerations in the application of INFIN110 that will lead to optimal performance in the
analysis of your model. These consideration are covered in detail in the Low-Frequency Electromagnetic
Analysis Guide.
• When used in a model with the higher-order elements PLANE35, PLANE53, PLANE77, PLANE121, and
PLANE230 use the higher-order setting for INFIN110 (KEYOPT(2) = 1).
compatible, elements must have the same reaction solution for the VOLT DOF. Elements that have an
electric charge reaction solution must all have the same electric charge reaction sign. KEYOPT(6) sets
the electric charge reaction sign. For more information, see Element Compatibility in the Low-Frequency
Electromagnetic Analysis Guide.

ANSYS Mechanical
These restrictions apply unless the Emag option is enabled.
• This element does not have magnetic, electrostatic, or electric current conduction capability.
• The AZ and VOLT degrees of freedom are not active. KEYOPT(1) defaults to 2 (TEMP) instead of 0
and cannot be changed.
• The material properties MUZERO, PERX, PERY, RSVX, RSVY, and LSST are not allowed.
ANSYS Emag
• This element has only magnetic, electrostatic, and electric current conduction capability, and does
not have thermal capability.
• The only active degrees of freedom are AZ and VOLT. KEYOPT(1) can only be set to 0 or 1.
• The only allowable material properties are MUZERO, PERX, PERY, RSVX, RSVY, and LSST.
INFIN111
3-D Infinite Solid
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> EM <> <> PP <> EME MFS

INFIN111 models an open boundary of a 3-D unbounded field problem. A single layer of elements is
used to represent an exterior sub-domain of semi-infinite extent. The layer models the effect of far-field
decay in magnetic, electrostatic, thermal, or electric current conduction analyses. For information about
enclosed elements and analysis types, see Table 1: INFIN111 Analyses (p. 402). See INFIN111 in the Mech-
anical APDL Theory Reference for more details about this element.
6
O,P,W
P W
O V
X N
X V
U U
M
N A,B
B M
5 A 3
4 Y
Z
Y Z
S K,L,S (Prism option)
K 2 R
L
T
T 1 R J
I Q
I
Q J
INFIN111 Input Data

The geometry, node locations, and the coordinate system for the element are shown in Figure 1 (p. 401).
KEYOPT(1) specifies the degree(s) of freedom to be used. KEYOPT(2) specifies whether a 8-node or 20-
node element is used.
Only one layer of INFIN111 elements should be used between the finite element model and the exterior
(infinite) surface. The nodes may be input starting at any corner node, but the face opposite of the finite
element model (the exterior face) must be flagged as an infinite surface. This is usually done by selecting
the nodes at the outer surface and issuing the SF,all,INF command. The other faces have no meaning.
For best results, edges connecting the inner and outer surfaces of the infinite element should be radial
from the center of the model.
INFIN111

Nodes
I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P (if KEYOPT(2) = 0)
I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P, Q, R, S, T, U, V, W, X, Y, Z, A, B (if KEYOPT(2) = 1)
Degrees of Freedom
Set by KEYOPT(1). See Table 1: INFIN111 Analyses (p. 402).
Real Constants
None
Material Properties
See Table 2: INFIN111 Material Properties (p. 403).
Surface Loads
Infinite Surface Flags --

Body Loads
None
Special Features
None
KEYOPT(1)
Element degree of freedom. See Table 1: INFIN111 Analyses (p. 402).
KEYOPT(2)
Element definition:
0 --
8-node brick
1 --
20-node brick
KEYOPT(6)
0 --
Negative
1 --
Positive
Analysis categories are shown in the following table. KEYOPT(1) specifies the element degree of freedom.
Table 1 INFIN111 Analyses

Analysis Category KEY- DOF La- Reaction Solu- Enclosed Ele- Analysis
OPT(1) bel tion ments Type
Magnetic 0 MAG Magnetic SOLID5 Static
Flux
SOLID96
INFIN111
Analysis Category KEY- DOF La- Reaction Solu- Enclosed Ele- Analysis
OPT(1) bel tion ments Type
(F label = SOLID98
FLUX)
Magnetic 1 AX, AY, Magnetic SOLID62 Static
AZ Current
Segments SOLID97 Harmon-
ic
(F label =
CSG) Transi-
ent
Electrostatic 2 VOLT Electric SOLID122 Static
Charge
SOLID123 Harmon-
(F label = ic
CHRG)
Thermal 3 TEMP Heat Flow SOLID70 Steady-
state
(F label = SOLID87
HEAT) Transi-
SOLID90 ent
Electric Current 4 VOLT Electric Cur- SOLID231 Steady-
Conduction rent state
SOLID232
(F label = Harmon-
AMPS) ic
Transi-
ent
INFIN111 material properties are shown in the following table. Nonzero material properties must be
defined. Material properties are defined with the MP, MPDATA and EMUNIT commands.
Table 2 INFIN111 Material Properties

Analysis Category KEYOPT(1) Material Properties
Magnetic 0 MUZERO
Magnetic 1 MUZERO
Electrostatic 2 PERX, PERY, PERZ, LSST, RSVX, RSVY, RSVZ
Thermal 3 KXX, KYY, KZZ, DENS, C
Electric Current Conduction 4 RSVX, RSVY, RSVZ, LSST, PERX, PERY, PERZ
INFIN111 Output Data


• Additional element output as shown in Table 3: INFIN111 Element Output Definitions (p. 404)
INFIN111
available.
Table 3 INFIN111 Element Output Definitions

Name Definition O R
NODES Nodes - I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P (if KEYOPT(2) = 0); Nodes - Y Y
I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P, Q, R, S, T, U, V, W, X, Y, Z, A, B (if
KEYOPT(2) = 1)
VOLU: Volume Y Y
MUZERO Magnetic permeability of free space 1 1
PERX, PERY, Electric relative permittivity 2 2
PERZ
KXX, KYY, KZZ Thermal conductivity 3 3
1. If KEYOPT(1) = 0 or 1
2. If KEYOPT(1) = 2
3. If KEYOPT(1) = 3
Table 4: INFIN111 Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 405) lists output available through the ETABLE command
notation is used in Table 4: INFIN111 Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 405):
Name
output quantity as defined in the Table 3: INFIN111 Element Output Definitions (p. 404)
Item
INFIN111
E
Table 4 INFIN111 Item and Sequence Numbers
Output ETABLE and

Quant- ESOL Command
ity Input
Name Item E
MUZERO NMISC 1
PERX NMISC 1
PERY NMISC 2
PERZ NMISC 3
KXX NMISC 1
KYY NMISC 2
KZZ NMISC 3

• Assumptions and restrictions listed for INFIN110 elements also apply to INFIN111 elements (see INFIN110
Assumptions and Restrictions).
• There are considerations in the application of INFIN111 that will lead to optimal performance in the
analysis of your model. These consideration are covered in detail in the Low-Frequency Electromagnetic
Analysis Guide.
• When used in a model with the higher-order elements SOLID87, SOLID90, SOLID98, SOLID122, SOLID123,
SOLID231, and SOLID232, use the higher-order setting for INFIN111 (KEYOPT(2) = 1).
compatible, elements must have the same reaction solution for the VOLT DOF. Elements that have an
electric charge reaction solution must all have the same electric charge reaction sign. KEYOPT(6) sets
the electric charge reaction sign. For more information, see Element Compatibility in the Low-Frequency
Electromagnetic Analysis Guide.

ANSYS Mechanical
These restrictions apply unless the Emag option is enabled.
• This element does not have magnetic, electrostatic, or electric current conduction capability.
• The MAG, AX, AY, AZ, and VOLT degrees of freedom are not active. KEYOPT(1) defaults to 3 (TEMP)
instead of 0 and cannot be changed.
• The material properties MUZERO, PERX, PERY, PERZ, RSVX, RSVY, RSVZ, and LSST are not allowed.
ANSYS Emag
INFIN111
• This element has only magnetic, electrostatic, and electric current conduction capability, and does
not have thermal capability.
• TEMP is not allowed as a degree of freedom. KEYOPT(1) can only be set to 0, 1 or 2.
• The only allowable material properties are MUZERO, PERX, PERY, PERZ, RSVX, RSVY, RSVZ, and LSST.
INTER115
3-D Magnetic Interface
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> EM <> <> PP <> EME <>
INTER115 Element Description

INTER115 is used to couple magnetic vector and scalar potentials in the same analysis. It is a 4-node
interface element, capable of collapsing to a 3-node interface element, that is defined on the interface
between vector and scalar potential finite element regions. The element has four degrees of freedom
per node: AX, AY, AZ and MAG. The element does not have a thickness. It can be used with scalar ele-
ments SOLID5, SOLID96, SOLID98, and vector element SOLID97. All of these are 3-D magnetic elements
which are used to perform linear, nonlinear, static and dynamic analyses, and coupled field analysis.
See INTER115 in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for more details about this element.
Figure 1 INTER115 Geometry
z y
K
I
x
K,L
Y
Z I
J J
X
INTER115 Input Data

The geometry, node locations, and the coordinate system for this element are shown in the Figure
1 (p. 407). The element is defined by four nodes and no material property is required. The element x-
axis is oriented along the length of the element from node I toward node J.
A summary of the element input is given in "INTER115 Input Summary" (p. 407). A general description of
INTER115 Input Summary

Nodes
I, J, K, L
Degrees of Freedom
AX, AY, AZ, MAG
Real Constants
None
INTER115
Material Properties
None
Surface Loads
None
Special Features
None
KEYOPTS
None
INTER115 Output Data

The interface element has no output of its own since it is used only to couple vector and scalar potential
finite element regions.
INTER115 Assumptions and Restrictions

• The element should not be located at the interface of an air-iron boundary. Such a placement will lead
to inaccurate coupling across the vector/scalar potential interface leading to a loss of accuracy in the
solution. It is recommended that the interface between vector/scalar domains occur within a single
homogenous material (for example, air).
• The normal component of the vector potential at the vector/scalar interface, where the INTER115 element
is located, should be set to zero. By setting A x n = 0 at the interface, the Coulomb gauge condition is
satisfied and the vector potential solution is assured to be unique. Node rotation [NROTAT] can be
easily achieved for Cartesian, cylindrical, spherical, and toroidal boundaries from which the normal
component can be set to zero.
• In the vector potential region, if a multiply-connected conductor exits, it may not be "cut" by a vec-
tor/scalar interface. For example, a closed loop conductor is multiply-connected. The air "hole" inside
the conductor cannot contain a vector/scalar interface. In this case, enclose the entire conductor and
"hole" region with vector potential elements, then encase the entire region with a scalar domain.
• The INTER115 element cannot lie on a free-surface; however, an element edge may exist at a free-surface.
• When using a scalar source primitive (SOURC36), it is recommended that a small cushion of air surround
the primitive before interfacing to a vector potential domain. Having the primitive boundary located
at the vector/scalar interface boundary can lead to solution inaccuracies.
• The scalar potential region of a problem using an INTER115 boundary is limited to the Reduced Scalar
Potential (RSP) formulation [MAGOPT,0]. For accurate solutions, this region should be free from high
permeability materials (that is, iron).
• Zero area elements are not allowed. This occurs most often if the elements are not numbered properly.
• The 4 nodes defining the element should lie as close as possible to a flat plane; however, a moderate
out-of-plane tolerance is permitted so that the element may have a somewhat warped shape. An ex-
cessively warped element will produce a warning message. In the case of warping errors, triangular
elements should be used (see Degenerated Shape Elements (p. 39)).
• Shell element warping is described in detail in Warping Factor in Mechanical APDL Theory Reference.
INTER115
• All units used in INTER115 must be expressed in the MKS system.

INTER115 Product Restrictions

FLUID116
Coupled Thermal-Fluid Pipe

FLUID116 is a 3-D element with the ability to conduct heat and transmit fluid between its two primary
nodes. Heat flow is due to the conduction within the fluid and the mass transport of the fluid. Convection
may be accounted for either with additional nodes and convection areas or with surface elements
SURF151 and SURF152. In both cases, the film coefficient may be related to the fluid flow rate. The
element may have two different types of degrees of freedom, temperature and/or pressure.
The thermal-flow element may be used in a steady-state or transient thermal analysis. If the model
containing the thermal-flow element is also to be analyzed structurally, the element should be replaced
by an equivalent (or null) structural element. See FLUID116 in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for
L (optional)
K (optional)
s
Z
I
FLUID116 Input Data

The geometry, node locations, and the coordinate system for this thermal-flow pipe element are shown
in Figure 1 (p. 411). The element is defined by two primary nodes, two additional nodes if convection is
desired, several real constants (see Table 1: FLUID116 Element Real Constants (p. 415)), and the material
properties. The length L of the element is determined from the two primary node locations.
The material properties can be input as numerical values or as tabular inputs evaluated as a function
of pressure, temperature, velocity, time, and location. If temperature or pressure, you need to activate
the appropriate pressure or temperature degrees of freedom. Tabular material properties are calculated
before the first iteration (i.e., using initial values [IC]).
The fluid mass density ρ (Mass/Length3) is input as property DENS or computed following the ideal gas
law if the real constant Rgas is present. If KEYOPT(2) = 2, 3, or 4, the convection film coefficient hf
FLUID116
(Heat/Length2*Time*Deg) is input by the options defined by KEYOPT(4). If KEYOPT(2) = 1, convection

surfaces using FLUID116 velocities and other information are stored and can be used by SURF151 or
SURF152 and optionally the user programmable feature USRSURF116 in order to determine film coeffi-
cients and bulk temperatures as a function of velocities and other parameters. The input tables are ex-
plained in detail in Table 2: FLUID116 Empirical Data Table (Optional) (p. 417). The thermal conductivity
kxx (Heat/Length*time*Deg) acts in the element longitudinal direction and is input as property KXX.
The specific heat cp (Heat/Mass*Deg or Heat*Length/Force*Time2*Deg) is input as property C. The fluid
viscosity µ is input as property VISC. In an axisymmetric analysis, such as for annular flow, the flow area,
the convection areas, and all other input should be on a full 360° basis.
KEYOPT(2) = 3 and 4 are variations of KEYOPT(2) = 2 used to avoid an artificial reduction of the change
in temperature in the last element next to an inlet or outlet with no specified temperature. If such an
inlet or outlet is at node I, use KEYOPT(2) = 3 and if it is at node J, use KEYOPT(2) = 4. All elements of
a run of pipe should use the same KEYOPT, not just the end one. For networks where the usage of
KEYOPT(2) is not obvious and the detailed temperature distribution is important, use KEYOPT(2) = 2
with a relatively fine mesh (small elements). The effect of KEYOPT(2) = 3 and 4 could be alternatively
achieved by adjusting the convection areas (Real Constants 7 and 8) but it is not as convenient.
The coefficient of friction (input as property MU) is the starting value of the Moody friction factor (f ).
The friction factor for the first iteration is always assumed to be MU. The smooth-pipe empirical correl-
ations are a function of Reynolds number (Re) and depend on whether the flow is laminar or turbulent
(Re>2500). If a friction table is supplied (TB,FCON), the friction factor is recomputed each substep from
the table (using linear interpolation where necessary). The table is also explained in detail in
Table 2: FLUID116 Empirical Data Table (Optional) (p. 417).
The word PRES (or TEMP) should be input for the Lab variable on the D command and the pressure (or
temperature) value input for the value. If a nodal heat (or fluid) flow rate is defined with the F command,
input the word HEAT (or FLOW) for the Lab variable and input the flow rate for the value. If temperature
is the only degree of freedom, (KEYOPT(1) = 1), you can input a known flow rate in units of mass/time
via an SFE,,,HFLUX command (rather than F,,FLOW). Fluid weight effects are activated by specifying a
nonzero acceleration and/or rotation vector [ACEL and/or OMEGA].
When using the rotational speed and slip factor real constants (real constants 7-10 in Table 1: FLUID116
Element Real Constants (p. 415)), you can specify either numerical values or table inputs. If specifying
table inputs, enclose the table name in % signs (for example, %tabname%). Also, if using table inputs
for rotational speed, either both real constants 7 and 8 should have the same table name reference, or
real constant 8 should be unspecified. Similarly, if using table inputs for slip factor, either both real
constants 9 and 10 should have the same table name reference, or real constant 10 should be unspecified.
Both rotational speed and the slip factor can vary with time and location.
If tabular real constants are used, then any node in a FLUID116 network must refer to a single table
name. For correct results, at any node, the table names from different elements must all be the same
and a table name cannot be used along with any numerical real constant from a different element.
See Steady-State Thermal Analysis in the Thermal Analysis Guide for more information on using table
inputs.
Element loads are described in Nodal Loading (p. 49). Element body loads may be input as heat gener-
ation rates at the nodes. The node J heat generation rate HG(J) defaults to the node I heat generation
rate HG(I).
FLUID116
KEYOPT(8) is used for inputting flow losses (see Table 1: FLUID116 Element Real Constants (p. 415)). Mo-
mentum losses in pipes due to bends, elbows, joints, valves, etc., may be represented by a fictitious
(equivalent) length of pipe La.This equivalent length may be input directly or calculated from an input
constant K, the hydraulic diameter D, and the friction factor f.
FLUID116 elements can be used to model fluid flow between hydrostatic fluid elements, (HSFLD241 or
HSFLD242). A single FLUID116 element connecting the pressure nodes of two different hydrostatic fluid
elements is sufficient to model the flow. However, more FLUID116 elements can be added if the actual
geometry of the connection needs to be modeled. For FLUID116 elements that are directly or indirectly
connected to hydrostatic fluid element, you must set KEYOPT(1) = 3 to convert the fluid element mass
flow rate to volume change (for compatibility with the hydrostatic fluid elements).

Nodes
I, J or I, J, K, L (see KEYOPT(2))
Degrees of Freedom
PRES, TEMP if KEYOPT(1) = 0

PRES if KEYOPT(1) = 2 or 3
Real Constants
See Table 1: FLUID116 Element Real Constants (p. 415)
Material Properties
KXX, C, DENS, MU, VISC, HF
Surface Loads
You can specify imposed mass flow via an SFE,,,HFLUX command. Valid only when KEYOPT(1) = 1.
Body Loads
Heat Generations --
HG(I), HG(J)
Special Features
Nonlinear
KEYOPT(1)
Pressure and temperature degrees of freedom:
0 --
PRES and TEMP degrees of freedom
1 --
TEMP degrees of freedom only
2 --
PRES degrees of freedom only. This option is not valid when FLUID116 is connected to HSFLD241
or HSFLD242.
3 --
PRES degrees of freedom only. This option is only valid when FLUID116 is directly or indirectly con-
nected to HSFLD241 or HSFLD242.
FLUID116
KEYOPT(2) (used only if KEYOPT(1) = 0 or 1)

0 --
2 nodes and no convection surface or convection information
1 --
2 nodes and convection information passed to SURF151/SURF152
2 --
4 nodes and convection surface logic included with this element, convection area shared between
nodes I and J
3 --
4 nodes and convection surface logic included with this element, convection area only at node I
4 --
4 nodes and convection surface logic included with this element, convection area only at node J
KEYOPT(4) (used only if KEYOPT(2) = 2, 3, or 4)
Film coefficient (hf) definition
0 --
Use MP,HF
1 --
Use real constants 9 thru 12 (see Table 1: FLUID116 Element Real Constants (p. 415))
2 --
Use TB,HFLM for hf as a function of temperature and average velocity
3 --
Use TB,HFLM for hf as a function of temperature and Reynold's number
4 --
Use TB,HFLM for Nu as a function of temperature and Reynold's number (hf = Kxx*Nu/diam)
5 --
Use call to User116Hf
KEYOPT(5) (used only if KEYOPT(4) = 0, 2, 3, 4, or 5)
0 --
Average fluid temperature (TI + TJ)/2
1 --
Average wall temperature (TK +TL)/2
2 --
Average film temperature (TI + TJ + TK + TL)/4
3 --
Differential temperature (TI + TJ)/2 - (TK + TL)/2
KEYOPT(6) (used only if KEYOPT(1) = 0 or 2)
Fluid conductance coefficient definition:
0 --
Use conductance formula
1 --
Use real constant C
FLUID116
2 --
Use TB,FCON as a function of temperature and average velocity
3 --
Use TB,FCON as a function of temperature and Reynold's number
4 --
Use call to User116Cond
KEYOPT(7) (used only if KEYOPT(6) = 0)
Friction factor calculation:
0 --
Use smooth pipe empirical correlations
1 --
Use MP,MU
2 --
Use TB,FCON with friction factor being a function of temperature and average velocity
3 --
Use TB,FCON with friction factor being a function of temperature and Reynold's number
KEYOPT(8) (used only if KEYOPT(6) = 0)
Flow losses specified by input:
0 --
Use real constant La as the additional length
1 --
Use real constant K as loss coefficient
KEYOPT(9)
Discretization scheme:
0 --
Upwind difference linear shape function (default). This scheme has lower order accuracy than the
other schemes.
1 --
Central difference linear shape function. This scheme has higher order accuracy but it can lead to
oscillations near bends.
2 --
Upwind difference exponential shape function. This scheme has high accuracy and does not produce
oscillations near bends.
Table 1 FLUID116 Element Real Constants

(Given in the order required for input in the real constant table)
No. Name Definition Units
1 D Hydraulic diameter. Length
2 A Flow cross-sectional area. Length2
3 Nc Number of flow channels (defaults to 1). If greater than 1,
real constants and element output are on a per channel
basis.
4-6 not currently used
FLUID116
7 (An)I If KEYOPT(2) = 1, angular velocity associated with node Length2
I.
If KEYOPT(2) = 2, 3, or 4, convection area between
nodes I and K. Defaults to πDL/2 if KEYOPT(2) = 2, de-
faults to πDL if KEYOPT(2) = 3
where:
L = element length
8 (An)J If KEYOPT(2) = 1, angular velocity associated with node Length2
J. Defaults to value at node I.
If KEYOPT(2) = 2, 3, or 4, convection area between
nodes J and L. Defaults to πDL/2 if KEYOPT(2) = 2, de-
faults to πDL if KEYOPT(2) = 4
9 SLIPFAI If KEYOPT(2) = 1, slip factor at node I.
10 SLIPFAJ If KEYOPT(2) = 1, slip factor at node J. Defaults to value at
node I.
9-12 N1, N2, (Used if KEYOPT(4) = 1 and KEYOPT(2) = 2, 3, or 4)
N3, N4 Nu = N1 + N2 Re N3 PrN4
where:
Re = Reynolds number (WD/ µA)
Pr = Prandtl number (Cpµ/KXX)
Cp = specific heat
For example, the Dittus-Boelter correlation for full-de-
veloped turbulent flow in smooth pipes may be input
with N1 = 0.0, N2 = 0.023, N3 = 0.8, and N4 = 0.4
(heating).
13 Pp Pump pressure. Force /
Length2
14 Used to compute conductance coefficient C
where:
W =C ∆p
∆p = pressure drop
Cr If KEYOPT(6) = 1, conductance coefficient is used to calcu-
= r
late flow. Hence,
La If KEYOPT(6) = 0, and KEYOPT(8) = 0, additional Length
of pipe to account for flow losses (for example, valves,
=A 2ρ D /(F(L + La ))
orifices, etc.) Hence,
where:
ρ = DENS
F = friction coefficient
FLUID116
K If KEYOPT(6) = 0 and KEYOPT(8) = 1, this real constant is
C=A 2ρ D /(FL + KD)
the loss coefficient K. Hence,
15-18 not currently used
19 Rgas Gas constant in ideal gas law (ρ = p/(RgasTabs)), where Tabs Length2 /
is the absolute temperature and p = average pressure. If Deg * Time2
zero, use ρ as specified by the DENS material property.
20 VDF Viscous damping multiplier. Default 0.0
21 Cver Units conversion factor for viscous damping. Default = 1.0
Qv = VDFCverFπVISC(VELOC)2L = viscous heating for element,
with F = 8.0 for laminar and 0.21420 for turbulent flow.
Note
Real constants 7 through 12 and 20 and 21 are used only if KEYOPT(1) = 0 or 1 and real
constants 13 through 19 are used only if KEYOPT(1) = 0 or 2.
The data in Table 2: FLUID116 Empirical Data Table (Optional) (p. 417) is entered in the data table with
the TB commands. The curves are initialized by using the TB command. The temperature for the first
curve is input with the TBTEMP command, followed by TBPT commands for up to 100 points. Up to
20 temperature-dependent curves (NTEMP = 20 maximum on the TB command) may be defined in this
manner. The constants (X, Y) entered on the TBPT command (two per command).
Table 2 FLUID116 Empirical Data Table (Optional)

Con- Meaning
stant
Film Coefficient The film coefficient table is initialized with the TB,HFLM command. The
TBPT data are:
X Velocity (Length/Time)
Y Film Coefficient (Heat/(time*area*temp) The velocity may be replaced with the
Reynold's number, and the film coefficient may be replaced with the Nusselt
number, depending on KEYOPT(4).
Fluid Conductance/Friction Factor The fluid conductance/friction factor is initialized with
the TB,FCON command. The TBPT data are:
X Velocity (Length/Time)
Y Corresponding friction factor value (Dimensionless)
The velocity may be replaced with the Reynold's number, and the friction factor may be
replaced with the fluid conductance, depending on KEYOPT(6) and KEYOPT(7).
FLUID116 Output Data

FLUID116
The fluid flow rate is expressed in units of Mass/Time and is positive from node I to node J. In an
axisymmetric analysis these flow rates and all other output are on a full 360° basis. The fluid flow rate
and the heat flow rate at the nodes may be printed with the OUTPR command. A general description
The following notation is used in Table 3: FLUID116 Element Output Definitions (p. 418):
available.

Name Definition O R
VELOC Average velocity Y Y
RE Reynolds number Y Y
FLOW RATE Flow rate from node I to node J Y Y
HT COND RATE Heat flow rate from node I to node J due to conduc- 1 1
tion
HT TRANSP RATE Heat flow rate at node I due to mass transport 1 1
CONV AREAS (I, J) Convection areas at nodes I and J 3 3
NUS Nusselt number 3 3
PR Prandtl number 3 3
HT CONV RATES Heat flow rates from nodes I to K and from nodes J 3 3
(I, J) to L due to convection
HGVD Heat generation due to direct input and viscous 1 1
damping
TEMP Temperature - 1
PUMP PR Pump pressure 2 2
FRICTION Friction factor 2 2
PRES Pressure - 2
FLUID116
3. If KEYOPT(2) = 2, 3, or 4
Name
Item
E
I,J,K,L
Output Quant- ETABLE and ESOL Command Input

ity Name Item E I J K L
VELOC NMISC 1 - - - -
RE NMISC 2 - - - -
FLOW RATE NMISC 3 - - - -
HEAT COND NMISC 4 - - - -
RATE
HEAT TRANSP NMISC 5 - - - -
RATE
CONV AREA NMISC - 6 7 - -
HFILM NMISC 8 - - - -
NUS NMISC 9 - - - -
PR NMISC 10 - - - -
HEAT CONV NMISC - 11 12 - -
RATE
HGVD NMISC - 13 14 - -
TEMP NMISC - 15 16 17 18
PUMP PR NMISC 19 - - - -
FRICTION NMISC 20 - - - -
PRES NMISC - 21 22 - -

• The element must not have a zero length, so nodes I and J must not be coincident.
FLUID116
• Nodes K and L may be located anywhere in space, even coincident with I and J, respectively.
• D must always be nonzero.
• A defaults to πD2/4.0 and is assumed to remain constant for the element.

• Compressibility and flow inertia effects of the fluid are not included in the element formulation.
• If temperatures are degrees of freedom, the resulting unsymmetric matrix requires twice as much
memory storage for the solution as other ANSYS elements.
• HF must be nonzero for the four node element.
• MU and DENS must be nonzero if a flow solution is desired and KEYOPT(6) is not zero.
• If the flow is specified at a node also having a specified pressure, the flow constraint is ignored.
• In general, flow is usually specified at the inlet, pressure at the outlet.
• For problems involving pressure specification on inlets and outlets, the solution may converge too soon
(i.e., the PRES degree of freedom has converged but FLOW has not due to a loose convergence criterion).
Be sure to check your results carefully. To force more iterations, you can tighten the convergence criteria
(i.e., CNVTOL,flow,,1e-30 ), or you can specify a nonzero initial condition on pressure, which could be
an average of the specified inlet and outlet pressures (i.e., IC,all,pres,pavg). You can use both options
together; however, ANSYS recommends using a nonzero initial condition. Tightening the convergence
requires you to estimate a suitable tolerance.
• More substeps are required for convergence as the flow approaches zero.
• See the CNVTOL command for convergence control.
• If pressure is a degree of freedom, the element is nonlinear and requires an iterative solution.

ANSYS Professional
These restrictions apply when using this element with the ANSYS Professional product.
• The PRES degree of freedom (KEYOPT (1) = 0, 2) is not available with the ANSYS Professional product.
HF118
2-D High-Frequency Quadrilateral Solid
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> EH <> PP <> <> <>
HF118 Element Description

HF118 is a high-frequency element which models 2-D electromagnetic fields and waves governed by
the full set of Maxwell's equations in linear media. It is based on a full-wave formulation of Maxwell's
equations in terms of the time-harmonic electric field E (exponent jωt dependence assumed). See High-
Frequency Electromagnetic Field Simulation in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for more information
on Maxwell's equations and full-wave formulations, respectively.
HF118 applies only to modal analyses. You can use it to compute dispersion characteristics of high-
frequency transmission lines, including cutoff frequencies and propagating constants for multiple modes.
It is a mixed node-scalar edge-vector element. Physically the AX DOF mean the projection of the electric
field E on edges and faces. The AX DOF also represents the Ez component of the electric field E at the
nodes.
Figure 1 HF118 Geometry
3
L K
K, L, O
4
P
N P
2
N
Y M J
I M
1 J (Triangular Option)
A first order or second order element option is available using KEYOPT(1). The first order quadrilateral
and triangular elements have one AX DOF on each edge and at each corner node. The total number
of DOFs is 8 for a first order quadrilateral element {1 (4 edges) + 1 (4 corner nodes)} and 6 for a first
order triangular element {1 (3 edges) + 1 (3 corner nodes)}.
HF118
Figure 2 HF118 First Order Element
The second order quadrilateral element has two AX DOFs on each edge, four AX DOFs on the face for
the tangential component of the electric field E, and one AX DOF at each corner and midside node.
The total number of DOFs is 20 for a second order quadrilateral element {2 (4 edges) + 4 (1 face) + 1
(8 nodes)}. The second order triangular element has two AX DOFs on each edge, two AX DOFs on the
face for the tangential component of the electric field E, and one AX DOF at each corner and midside
node. The total number of DOFs is 14 for a second order triangular element {2 (3 edges) + 2 (1 face) +
1 (6 nodes)}.
Figure 3 HF118 Second Order Element
HF118 Input Data

Figure 1 (p. 421) shows the geometries, node locations, and the coordinate system for the element. The
element supports two geometric shapes: a quadrilateral shape with a degeneracy to a triangular shape.
The only unit system supported for high-frequency analysis is the MKS unit, where the free-space per-
meability MUZRO = 4π x 10-7 H/m and the free-space permittivity EPZERO = 8.854 x 10-12 F/m (see the
EMUNIT command).
HF118 requires two sets of material constants; that is, relative permeability and permittivity tensors (in
the element coordinate system if any). To specify a diagonal relative permeability tensor use the MURX,
MURY, and MURZ labels on the MP command. Use the TB,MUR and TBDATA commands to specify the
HF118
terms of an anisotropic permeability matrix. To specify a diagonal relative permittivity tensor use the
PERX, PERY, and PERZ labels on the MP command. Use the TB,DPER and TBDATA commands to specify
the terms of an anisotropic permittivity matrix.
To define nodal constraints on geometric nodes, use the D command. With the D command, the Lab
variable corresponds to the only degree of freedom AX and the VALUE corresponds to the AX value.
AX is not the x component in the global Cartesian coordinate system. In most cases, the AX value is
zero, which corresponds to a perfect electric conductor or "Electric Wall" (tangential component of
= 0) condition. If both end nodes and the mid-node on an element edge are constrained, DOFs on the
edge are also constrained. Similarly, if all edges on an element face are constrained, DOFs on the face
are also constrained. If you leave the nodes on a surface unspecified, the boundary assumes a "Magnetic
Wall" condition (tangential component of = 0).
To define constraints on lines, use the DL command. The Lab variable corresponds to the degree of
freedom AX and the Value1 corresponds to the AX value. Upon initiation of the solution calculations
(SOLVE), the solid model DOF constraints transfer automatically to the finite element model.
"HF118 Input Summary" (p. 423) summarizes the element input. Element Input (p. 43) in the Element Ref-
erence provides a general description of element input.
HF118 Input Summary

Nodes
I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P
Degrees of Freedom
AX
Real Constants
None
Material Properties
MUZERO, MURX, MURY, MURZ, EPZRO, PERX, PERY, PERZ,

MUR, DPER
Surface Loads
None
Body Loads
None
Special Features
None
KEYOPT(1)
Element polynomial order selection:
0,1 --
First order element
2 --
Second order element
KEYOPT(5)
HF118
0 --
1 --
Centroid point printout
2 --
Nodal field printout
HF118 Solution Considerations

For modal analysis, choose a frequency shift point just below the anticipated eigenfrequency of interest
(via the MODOPT command). Select an upper end frequency as well. Use the Method argument to
choose the Block Lanczos solver. To visualize the electric and magnetic field modes, use the MXPAND
command to expand the mode shapes.
HF118 Output Data

The solution output associated with this element is in two forms:
• Degrees of freedom (AX) included in the overall nodal solution

• Additional element output as shown in Table 1: HF118 Element Output Definitions (p. 424)
The element output direction is parallel to the element coordinate system (if any). Solution Output (p. 50)
in the Element Reference provides a general description of solution output. See the Basic Analysis Guide
available.
Table 1 HF118 Element Output Definitions

Name Definition O R
NODES Nodes - I, J, ..., B Y Y
VOLU Volume Y Y
LOC Output location 1 -
MURX, MURY, Relative permeability 1 -
MURZ
PERX, PERY, Relative permittivity 1 -
PERZ
HF118
Name Definition O R
EF:X, Y, Z Electric field intensity E 1 Y
EF:SUM Magnitude of E 1 -
H:X, Y, Z Magnetic field intensity H 1 Y
H:SUM Magnitude of H 1 -
JHEAT Joule heat generation per unit volume (time-average - -
value)
PX, PY, PZ Pointing vector (time-average value) - Y
ALPHA Real part of propagating constant - Y
BETA Imaginary part of propagating constant - Y
PF Poynting flow through cross-section - Y
centroid.
2. Available only at centroid as a *GET command item.
Table 2 HF118 Miscellaneous Element Output

Centroid Point Solution LOC, MUX, MUY, MUZ, PERX, PERY, 1 -
PERZ, E, ESUM, H, HSUM
Nodal Electric and Magnetic Field Solutions E, ESUM, H, HSUM 2 -
1. Output at each centroid point, if KEYOPT(5) = 1

Table 3: HF118 Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 425) lists output available through the ETABLE command
notation is used in Table 3: HF120 Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 441):
Name
output quantity as defined in Table 1: HF120 Element Output Definitions (p. 439)
Item
E
Table 3 HF118 Item and Sequence Numbers

Output ETABLE Com-
Quant- mand Input
ity Item I
Name
PX NMISC 1
PY NMISC 2
HF118
Output ETABLE Com-

Quant- mand Input
ity Item I
Name
PZ NMISC 3
ALPHA NMISC 4
BETA NMISC 5
PF NMISC 6
HF118 Assumptions and Restrictions

• HF118 is only applicable to modal analyses.
• The required material properties (MURX, MURY, MURZ, PERX, PERY, PERZ) must be input as relative
values.
• Midside nodes must not be removed from this element. See Quadratic Elements (Midside Nodes) in the
Modeling and Meshing Guide for more information on the use of midside nodes.
• The second order element is not available for the solution of propagating constant with fixed frequency.
• Distributed ANSYS is only available for the first order element.
HF118 Product Restrictions

HF119
3-D High-Frequency Tetrahedral Solid
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> EH <> PP <> <> <>

HF119 is a high-frequency tetrahedral element which models 3-D electromagnetic fields and waves
governed by the full set of Maxwell's equations in linear media. It is based on a full-wave formulation
of Maxwell's equations in terms of the time-harmonic electric field E (exponent jωt dependence assumed).
A companion brick element, HF120, has similar full-wave capability. See HF119 in the Mechanical APDL
Theory Reference for more information on Maxwell's equations and full-wave formulations, respectively.
HF119 applies to the full-harmonic and modal analysis types, but not to the transient analysis type. It
is defined by up to 10 geometric nodes with AX DOF on element edges and faces. The physical meaning
of the AX DOF in this element is a projection of the electric field E on edges and faces.
4
R
P
Q 3
Y 2
O K
X I M N
Z
1
J
A first order or second order element option is available using KEYOPT(1). The first order element has
one AX DOF on each edge for a total of 6 DOFs.
Figure 2 HF119 First Order Element
s
t
HF119
The second order element has two AX DOFs on each edge and face for a total of 20 DOFs {2(6 edges)
+ 2(4 faces)}.
Figure 3 HF119 Second Order Element
HF119 Input Data

Figure 1 (p. 427) shows the geometries, node locations, and the coordinate system for the element.
EMUNIT command).
KEYOPT(4) provides options for the element formulation. KEYOPT(4) = 0 activates the normal full-wave
formulation, which solves for the total field. KEYOPT(4) = 1 activates the perfectly matched layers (PML)
formulation, which absorbs the field at the open boundary or at the port of a waveguide. KEYOPT(4) =
2 activates the scattering formulation, which is only required in the regions of a domain receiving a
reflected wave from an imposed soft source magnetic field excitation (BF,,H option).
You can specify an optional diagonal resistivity tensor (inverse of the conductivity tensor) using the
RSVX, RSVY, and RSVZ labels on the MP command. To specify the terms of an anisotropic electric current
conductivity tensor or anisotropic magnetic current conductivity tensor use TBDATA and TB,CNDE or
TB,CNDM, respectively.
For an isotropic lossy material, you can define the lossy characteristics of the material by either the
electric loss tangent (MP,LSST) or magnetic loss tangent (MP,LSSM). To calculate a specific absorption
rate (SAR), you must input a mass density using the DENS label on the MP command.
zero, which corresponds to a perfect electric conductor (PEC) or "Electric Wall" (tangential component
of = 0) condition. If both end nodes and the mid-node on an element edge are constrained, DOFs
on the edge are also constrained. Similarly, if all edges on an element face are constrained, DOFs on
HF119
the face are also constrained. The DOFs based on volume are not constrained. If you leave the nodes
on a surface unspecified, the boundary assumes a perfect magnetic conductor (PMC) or "Magnetic Wall"
condition (tangential component of = 0).
To define constraints on lines and areas, use the DL and DA commands, respectively. The Lab variable
corresponds to the degree of freedom AX and the Value1 corresponds to the AX value.
Nodal Loading (p. 49) describes element loads. You can specify an exterior waveguide port, surface
impedance boundary conditions, infinite boundary surface flags, and Maxwell surface flags on the element
faces indicated by the circled numbers in Figure 1 (p. 427) using the SF and SFE commands or on the
solid model using the SFA command. You can use the infinite boundary surface flag for a radiating
open boundary in lieu of PML elements. You should use the Maxwell surface flag to determine an
equivalent source surface for near and far field calculations performed in POST1.
You can apply current density, magnetic field, and electric field body loads to the finite element model
using the BF and BFE commands or to the solid model using the BFK. BFL, BFA, and BFV commands.
To specify an interior waveguide port, use the BF and BFA commands.
You can input the temperature (for material property evaluation only) body loads based on their value
at the element's nodes or as a single element value [BF and BFE]. In general, unspecified nodal values
of temperatures default to the uniform value specified with the BFUNIF and TUNIF commands. Element
heat loss (JHEAT) represents the time-average Joule heat generation rate (W/m3), and may be made
available for a subsequent thermal analysis with companion elements (See the discussion of the LDREAD
command).
Upon initiation of the solution calculations (SOLVE), the solid model loads and boundary conditions
transfer automatically to the finite element model.
HF119 Input Summary

Nodes
I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P, Q, R
Degrees of Freedom
AX
Real Constants
None
Material Properties

RSVX, RSVY, RSVZ, MUR, DPER, CNDE, CNDM,
LSST, LSSM, DENS
Surface Loads
Waveguide Port Surface Loads --
Impedance Surface Loads --
Infinite Boundary Surface Flags --
HF119
Maxwell Surface Flags for Equivalent Source Surface --

Body Loads
Temperature --
T(I), T(J), ..., T(R)
Current Density, Magnetic Field, Electric Field, and Waveguide Port --
JS, H, EF, PORT
Special Features
None
KEYOPT(1)
Used for element polynomial order selection:
0, 1 --
First order element
2 --
KEYOPT(4)
Used for element type selection:
0 --
Normal element
1 --
Perfectly matched layers (PML) element
2 --
Scattering region element behind a soft source magnetic field excitation
KEYOPT(5)
0 --
1 --
2 --

To choose the modal or full harmonic analysis type, issue the ANTYPE command.
In a harmonic analysis, the ANSYS program performs a complex solution and computes two sets of
results data: real and imaginary. The measurable field quantities can be computed as the real step with
a cosine time change and the imaginary set with a sine time change. You can set the frequency of the
time change via the HARFRQ command. The measurable power terms and Joule losses are computed
as rms (time-average) values and are stored with the real data set. You can choose a solver via the
EQSLV command (the ICCG or sparse solvers are recommended).
HF119
choose the Block Lanczos solver (the default). To visualize the electric and magnetic field modes, use
the MXPAND command to expand the mode shapes.
"HF119 Input Summary" (p. 429) summarizes the element input. Element Input (p. 43) of the Element Ref-
erence gives a general description of element input.
HF119 Output Data


in the Element Reference provides a general description of solution output.See the Basic Analysis Guide
Table 1: HF119 Element Output Definitions (p. 431) uses the following notation:
available.

Name Definition O R
VOLU Volume Y Y
TEMP Input temperatures T(I), T(J), ..., T(R) Y Y
MURZ
PERX, PERY, Relative permittivity 1 -
PERZ
CNDX, CNDY, Conductivity 1 -
CNDZ
HF119
Name Definition O R
JC:X, Y, Z Current density JC 1 Y
JC:SUM Magnitude of JC 1 -
value)
PSCT Reflected or transmitted power (time-average value) 1 -
PINC Input power (time-average value) - -
VLOSS Volumetric Joule losses (time-average value) - -
SFLOSS Surface Joule losses (time-average value) - -
ENERGY Stored energy (time-average value) - -
FACE1 1st element face number containing heat flux - 2
HFLXAVG1 Heat flux across FACE1 caused by surface losses - 2
FACE2 2nd element face number containing heat flux - 2
FACE3 3rd element face number containing heat flux - 2
HFLXAVG3 Heat flux across FACE3 caused by surface loses - 2
ETINCR Real part of tangential incident electric field - 2
ETINCI Imaginary part of tangential incident electric field - 2
ETOUTR Real part of tangential outgoing electric field - 2
ETOUTI Imaginary part of tangential outgoing electric field - 2
ETDOT Dot product of waveguide eigen tangential electric field - 2
SAR Specific absorption rate - 2
RADPAVG1 Radiation pressure across FACE1 with surface losses - 2
centroid.
2. The solution value is output only if calculated.

Nodal Electric and Magnetic Field Solutions E, ESUM, H, HSUM 2 -
1. Output at each centroid point, if KEYOPT(5) = 1
HF119
Name
Item
E
Output ETABLE Com-

Quantity mand Input
Name Item E
RADPAVG1 SMISC 1
RADPAVG2 SMISC 2
RADPAVG3 SMISC 3
PX NMISC 1
PY NMISC 2
PZ NMISC 3
PSCT NMISC 4
PINC NMISC 5
ENERGY NMISC 6
VLOSS NMISC 7
SFLOSS NMISC 8
FACE1 NMISC 9
HFLXAVG1 NMISC 10
FACE2 NMISC 11
HFLXAVG2 NMISC 12
FACE3 NMISC 13
HFLXAVG3 NMISC 14
ETINCR NMISC 15
ETINCI NMISC 16
ETOUTR NMISC 17
ETOUTI NMISC 18
ETDOT NMISC 19
SAR NMISC 20
HF119

• The element may be numbered either as shown in Figure 1 (p. 427) or may have the plane IJKL and
MNOP interchanged.
values.
• You cannot use the element in a transient analysis.
Modeling and Meshing Guide for more information about the use of midside nodes.

HF120
3-D High-Frequency Brick Solid
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> EH <> PP <> <> <>

HF120 is a high-frequency brick element which models 3-D electromagnetic fields and waves governed
by the full set of Maxwell's equations in linear media. It is based on a full-wave formulation of Maxwell's
equations in terms of the time-harmonic electric field E (exponent jωt dependence assumed). A com-
panion tetrahedral element, HF119, has similar full-wave capability. See HF120 in the Mechanical APDL
Theory Reference for more information on Maxwell's equations and full-wave formulations, respectively.
HF120 applies to the full-harmonic and modal analysis types, but not to the transient analysis type. It
is defined by up to 20 geometric nodes with AX DOF on element edges and faces and inside the volume.
The physical meaning of the AX DOF in this element is a projection of the electric field E on edges and
faces, as well as normal components to the element faces.
,,,,,V,,
5 P 4
W
X
O
6
M
B V
U N yramid ption
A
Y 2 3
L ,,
S
T Z ,
K
I ,,

R
Q J 1
rism ption
A first order or second order element option is available for the hexahedral and prism-shaped elements
using KEYOPT(1). The pyramid-shaped element is only available as a first order element. The first order
element has one AX DOF on each edge. The first order hexahedral element has a total of 12 AX DOFs.
HF120
Figure 2 HF120 First Order Hexahedral Element
r t
s
The second order hexahedral element has two AX DOFs on each edge, four AX DOFs on each face, and
six AX DOFs inside the volume for a total of 54 DOFs {2(12 edges) + 4(6 faces) + 6 (1 volume)}.
The first order prism and pyramid elements have a total of 9 AX and 8 AX DOFs, respectively. The second
order prism element has a total of 42 DOFs {2(9 edges) + 4(5 faces) + 4(1 volume)}.
HF120 Input Data

Figure 1 (p. 435) shows the geometries, node locations, and the coordinate system for the element. The
element supports three geometric shapes: a hexahedral (brick) shape defined by twenty geometric
nodes with degeneracies to prism and pyramid shapes.
EMUNIT command).
KEYOPT(4) provides options for the element formulation. KEYOPT(4) = 0 activates the normal full-wave
formulation, which solves for the total field. KEYOPT(4) = 1 activates the perfectly matched layers (PML)
formulation, which absorbs the field at the open boundary or at the port of a waveguide. KEYOPT(4) =
2 activates the scattering formulation, which is only required in the regions of a domain receiving a
reflected wave from an imposed soft source magnetic field excitation (BF,,H option).
You can specify an optional diagonal resistivity tensor (inverse of the conductivity tensor) using the
RSVX, RSVY, and RSVZ labels on the MP command. To specify the terms of an anisotropic electric current
conductivity tensor or anisotropic magnetic current conductivity tensor use TBDATA and TB,CNDE or
TB,CNDM, respectively.
For an isotropic lossy material, you can define the lossy characteristics of the material by either the
electric loss tangent (MP,LSST) or magnetic loss tangent (MP,LSSM). To calculate a specific absorption
rate (SAR), you must input a mass density using the DENS label on the MP command.
HF120
zero, which corresponds to a perfect electric conductor (PEC) or "Electric Wall" (tangential component
of = 0) condition. If both end nodes and the mid-node on an element edge are constrained, DOFs
on the edge are also constrained. Similarly, if all edges on an element face are constrained, DOFs on
the face are also constrained. The DOFs based on volume are not constrained. If you leave the nodes
on a surface unspecified, the boundary assumes a perfect magnetic conductor (PMC) or "Magnetic Wall"
condition (tangential component of H¯ = 0).
To define constraints on lines and areas, use the DL and DA commands, respectively. The Lab variable
corresponds to the degree of freedom AX and the Value1 corresponds to the AX value.
Nodal Loading (p. 49) describes element loads. You can specify an exterior waveguide port, surface
impedance boundary conditions, infinite boundary surface flags, and Maxwell surface flags on the element
faces indicated by the circled numbers in Figure 1 (p. 435) using the SF and SFE commands or on the
solid model using the SFA command. You can use the infinite boundary surface flag for a radiating
open boundary in lieu of PML elements. You should use the Maxwell surface flag to determine an
equivalent source surface for near and far field calculations performed in POST1.
To define surface loads on areas of the model, use the SFA command.
You can apply current density, magnetic field, and electric field body loads to the finite element model
using the BF and BFE commands or to the solid model using the BFK. BFL, BFA, and BFV commands.
To specify an interior waveguide port, use the BF and BFA commands.
You can input the temperature (for material property evaluation only) body loads based on their value
at the element's nodes or as a single element value (BF and BFE commands). In general, unspecified
nodal values of temperatures default to the uniform value specified with the BFUNIF and TUNIF com-
mands. Element heat loss (JHEAT) may be made available for a subsequent thermal analysis with com-
panion elements. (See the description of the LDREAD command.)
Upon initiation of the solution calculations (SOLVE), the solid model loads and boundary conditions
transfer automatically to the finite element model.
HF120 Input Summary

Nodes
Degrees of Freedom
AX
Real Constants
None
Material Properties

RSVX, RSVY, RSVZ, MUR, DPER, CNDE, CNDM,
LSST, LSSM, DENS
Surface Loads
Waveguide Port Surface Loads --

HF120
Impedance Surface Loads --

Infinite Boundary Surface Flags --

Maxwell Surface Flags for Equivalent Source Surface --
Body Loads
Temperatures --
T(I), T(J), ..., T(B)
Current Density, Magnetic Field, Electric Field, and Waveguide Port --
JS, H, EF, PORT
Special Features
None
KEYOPT(1)
Element polynomial order selection:
0, 1 --
First order element
2 --
Note
This option is only available for the hexahedral and prism-shaped elements. The pyramid-
shaped element is only available as a first order element.
KEYOPT(4)
Element description options:
0 --
Normal element
1 --
Perfectly matched layers (PML) element
2 --
Scattering region element behind a soft source magnetic field excitation
KEYOPT(5)
0 --
1 --
HF120
2 --

To choose the modal or full harmonic analysis type, issue the ANTYPE command.
In a harmonic analysis, the ANSYS program performs a complex solution and computes two sets of
results data: real and imaginary. The measurable field quantities can be computed as the real step with
a cosine time change and the imaginary set with a sine time change. You can set the frequency of the
time change via the HARFRQ command. The measurable power terms and Joule losses are computed
as rms (time-average) values and are stored with the real data set. You can choose a solver via the
EQSLV command (the ICCG or sparse solvers are recommended).
choose the Block Lanczos solver (the default). To visualize the electric and magnetic field modes, use
the MXPAND command to expand the mode shapes.
"HF120 Input Summary" (p. 437) summarizes the element input. Element Input (p. 43) in the Element Ref-
erence provides a general description of element input.
HF120 Output Data


in the Element Reference provides a general description of solution output. See the Basic Analysis Guide
Table 1: HF120 Element Output Definitions (p. 439) uses the following notation:
available.

Name Definition O R
HF120
Name Definition O R
VOLU Volume Y Y
TEMP Input temperatures T(I), T(J), ..., T(B) Y Y
MURZ
PERX, PERY, PERZ Relative permittivity 1 -
CNDX, CNDY, Conductivity 1 -
CNDZ
JC:X, Y, Z Current density JC 1 Y
JC:SUM Magnitude of JC 1 -
value)
PSCT Reflected or transmitted power (time-average value) 1 -
PINC Input power (time-average value) - -
VLOSS Volumetric Joule losses (time-average value) - -
SFLOSS Surface Joule losses (time-average value) - -
ENERGY Stored energy (time-average value) - -
FACE1 1st element face number containing heat flux - 2
FACE2 2nd element face number containing heat flux - 2
FACE3 3rd element face number containing heat flux - 2
ETINCR Real part of tangential incident electric field - 2
ETINCI Imaginary part of tangential incident electric field - 2
ETOUTR Real part of tangential outgoing electric field - 2
ETOUTI Imaginary part of tangential outgoing electric field - 2
ETDOT Dot product of waveguide eigen tangential electric - 2
field
SAR Specific absorption rate - 2
HF120
centroid.
2. The solution is output only if calculated.

Nodal Electric and Magnetic Field E, ESUM, H, HSUM 2 -
Solutions

Name
Item
E
Output ETABLE Com-

Quantity mand Input
Name Item I
RADPAVG1 SMISC 1
RADPAVG2 SMISC 2
RADPAVG3 SMISC 3
PX NMISC 1
PY NMISC 2
PZ NMISC 3
PSCT NMISC 4
PINC NMISC 5
ENERGY NMISC 6
VLOSS NMISC 7
SFLOSS NMISC 8
FACE1 NMISC 9
HF120
Output ETABLE Com-

Quantity mand Input
Name Item I
HFLXAVG1 NMISC 10
FACE2 NMISC 11
HFLXAVG2 NMISC 12
FACE3 NMISC 13
HFLXAVG3 NMISC 14
ETINCR NMISC 15
ETINCI NMISC 16
ETOUTR NMISC 17
ETOUTI NMISC 18
ETDOT NMISC 19
SAR NMISC 20

• The element may be numbered either as shown in Figure 1 (p. 435) or may have the plane IJKL and
MNOP interchanged.
values.
• You cannot use the element in a transient analysis.
Modeling and Meshing Guide for more information on the use of midside nodes.

PLANE121
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> EM <> <> PP <> EME <>

PLANE121 is a 2-D, 8-node, charge-based electric element. The element has one degree of freedom,
voltage, at each node. The 8-node elements have compatible voltage shapes and are well suited to
model curved boundaries.
This element is based on the electric scalar potential formulation, and it is applicable to 2-D electrostatic
and time-harmonic quasistatic electric field analyses. Various printout options are also available. See
PLANE121 in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for more details about this element.
L
3
K K, L, O
O
4
Y P P N
( axal) 2
N I
M
I
J
1
PLANE121 Input Data

The element is defined by eight nodes and orthotropic material properties. A triangular-shaped element
system orientation is as described in Coordinate Systems (p. 56). Properties not input default as described
in Linear Material Properties in the Material Reference.
Nodal loads are defined with the D (Lab= VOLT) and F (Lab= CHRG) commands. The nodal forces, if
any, should be input per unit of depth for a plane analysis and on a full 360° basis for an axisymmetric
analysis.
Element loads are described in Nodal Loading (p. 49). Surface charge densities may be input as surface
loads at the element faces as shown by the circled numbers in Figure 1 (p. 443). Charge densities may
be input as element body loads at the nodes. If the node I charge density CHRGD(I) is input, and all
others are unspecified, they default to CHRGD(I). If all corner node charge densities are specified, each
midside node charge density defaults to the average charge density of its adjacent corner nodes.
PLANE121
The temperature (for material property evaluation only) body loads may be input based on their value
at the element's nodes or as a single element value [BF, BFE]. In general, unspecified nodal values of
temperatures default to the uniform value specified with the BFUNIF or TUNIF commands.
A summary of the element input is given in "PLANE121 Input Summary" (p. 444). A general description
of element input is given in Element Input (p. 43). For axisymmetric applications see Harmonic Axisym-
metric Elements (p. 76).

Nodes
I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P
Degrees of Freedom
VOLT
Real Constants
THK - Thickness (used only if KEYOPT(3) = 3)
Material Properties
PERX, PERY, LSST, RSVX, RSVY
Surface Loads
Surface charge densities --
CHRGS face 1 (J-I), face 2 (K-J), face 3 (L-K), face 4 (I-L)
Body Loads
Temperature --
Volume charge densities --
CHRGD(I), CHRGD(J), CHRGD(K), CHRGD(L), CHRGD(M), CHRGD(N), CHRGD(O), CHRGD(P)
Special Features
Birth and death
KEYOPT(3)
Element behavior:
0 --
Plane
1 --
Axisymmetric
3 --
Plane with thickness input, specified via real constant THK.
KEYOPT(4)
0 --
1 --
KEYOPT(5)
PLANE121
0 --
1 --
2 --
Nodal fields printout
KEYOPT(6)
0 --
Positive
1 --
Negative
PLANE121 Output Data


Figure 2 PLANE121 Output
L O K
y
P E ,D
N
E, D
Y I
(or axial) J
M
Eement utput ectns
X (or radial) shwn e f KE OPT 4 = 0
PLANE121
available.

Name Definition O R
VOLU: Volume Y Y
LOC Output location (X, Y) 1 1
PERX, PERY Electric relative permittivity 1 1
EF:X, Y Electric field components 1 1
D:X, Y Electric flux density components 1 1
JS:X, Y, SUM Current density components (in the global Cartesian 1 1
coordinate system) and vector magnitude [3]
JT:X, Y, SUM Conduction current density components and magnitude 1 1
[3]
JHEAT: Joule heat generation rate per unit volume [4] [5] [6] 1 1
SENE: Stored electric energy [6] 1 1
FMAG:X, Y Electrostatic force [7] - 1
CHRGD Applied charge density - Y
centroid.
3. For a time-harmonic analysis, JS represents the sum of element conduction and displacement current
densities. JT represents the element conduction current density. The element displacement current
density (JD) can be derived from JS and JT as JD = JS-JT.
4. For a time-harmonic analysis, calculated Joule heat generation rate per unit volume (JHEAT) includes
conduction heating and dielectric heating due to the loss tangent.
5. Calculated Joule heat generation rate per unit volume (JHEAT) may be made available for a subsequent
thermal analysis with companion elements [LDREAD].
6. For a time-harmonic analysis, Joule losses (JHEAT) and stored energy (SENE) represent time-average
values. These values are stored in both the real and imaginary data sets.
PLANE121
7. Use the EMFT macro to calculate the force distribution over the body. See the discussion on Electro-
static Forces in the Low-Frequency Electromagnetic Analysis Guide.

Integration Point Solution LOC, PERX, PERY, PERZ, EF, EFSUM, D, 1 -
DSUM
Nodal Solution EF, EFSUM, D, DSUM 2 -

Note
For axisymmetric solutions with KEYOPT(4) = 0, the X and Y directions correspond to the
radial and axial directions, respectively.
Name
Item
E
Output ETABLE and

Quant- ESOL Command
ity Input
Name Item E
CHRGD SMISC 1
PERX NMISC 1
PERY NMISC 2
JTX NMISC 4
JTY NMISC 5
JTSUM NMISC 6

PLANE121
• This element is only compatible with elements having a VOLT DOF and an electric charge reaction
solution. Electric charge reactions must all be positive or negative. KEYOPT(6) sets the electric charge
reaction sign. See Element Compatibility in the Low-Frequency Electromagnetic Analysis Guide for more
information.

ANSYS Emag
SOLID122
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> EM <> <> PP <> EME <>

SOLID122 is a 3-D, 20-node, charge-based electric element. The element has one degree of freedom,
voltage, at each node. It can tolerate irregular shapes without much loss of accuracy. SOLID122 elements
have compatible voltage shapes and are well suited to model curved boundaries.
This element is applicable to 3-D electrostatic and time-harmonic quasistatic electric field analyses.
Various printout options are also available. See SOLID122 in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for
,,,,,V, ,
,

,,

5 P 4
W
X etrahedral ption
6 O ,,,,,V, ,
M
B V
U
N
A
Y 2 3
L S
T Z yramid ption
K
I ,,
R
Q J 1 V ,

,,

rism ption
SOLID122 Input Data

be formed by defining duplicate K, L, and S; A and B; and O, P, and W node numbers. A pyramid-shaped
element and a tetrahedral-shaped element may also be formed as shown in Figure 1 (p. 449).
SOLID122
in Linear Material Properties in the Material Reference. Nodal loads are defined with the D (Lab= VOLT)
and F (Lab= CHRG) commands.
loads at the element faces as shown by the circled numbers on Figure 1 (p. 449). Charge density may
be input as element body loads at the nodes. If the node I charge densities CHRGD(I) is input, and all

Nodes
Degrees of Freedom
VOLT
Real Constants
None
Material Properties
PERX, PERY, PERZ, LSST, RSVX, RSVY, RSVZ
Surface Loads
CHRGS face 1 (J-I-L-K), face 2 (I-J-N-M), face 3 (J-K-O-N),

Body Loads
Temperature --
T(I), T(J), ..., T(Z), T(A), T(B)
CHRGD(I), CHRGD(J), ..., CHRGD(Z), CHRGD(A), CHRGD(B)

Special Features
Birth and death
KEYOPT(4)
0 --
1 --
SOLID122
KEYOPT(5)
0 --
1 --
2 --
KEYOPT(6)
0 --
Positive
1 --
Negative
SOLID122 Output Data


available.

Name Definition O R
VOLU: Volume Y Y
TEMP Temperatures T(I), T(J), ..., T(Z), T(A), T(B) Y Y
PERZ
SOLID122
Name Definition O R
EF:X, Y, Z Electric field components 1 1
JS:X, Y, Z, SUM Current density components (in the global Cartesian 1 1
JT:X, Y, Z, SUM Conduction current density components and magnitude 1 1
[3]
FMAG:X, Y, Z Electrostatic force [7] - 1
centroid.
density (JD) can be derived from JS and JT as JD=JS-JT. JS can be used as a source current density for
a subsequent magnetostatic analysis with companion elements [LDREAD].

Integration Point Solution LOC, PERX, PERY, PERZ, EF, EFSUM, 1 -
D, DSUM

SOLID122
Name
Item
E
Output ETABLE and

Quant- ESOL Command
ity Input
Name Item E
CHRGD SMISC 1
EFX SMISC 2
EFY SMISC 3
EFZ SMISC 4
PERX NMISC 1
PERY NMISC 2
PERZ NMISC 3
JTX NMISC 5
JTY NMISC 6
JTZ NMISC 7
JTSUM NMISC 8

in an opposite fashion.
• An edge with a removed midside node implies that the potential varies linearly, rather than parabolically,
along that edge. See Quadratic Elements (Midside Nodes) in the Modeling and Meshing Guide for more
information on the use of midside nodes.
information.
SOLID122

ANSYS Emag
• The Birth and death special feature is not allowed.
SOLID123
3-D 10-Node Tetrahedral Electrostatic Solid
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> EM <> <> PP <> EME <>

SOLID123 is a 3-D, 10-node, charge-based electric element. It is well suited to model irregular meshes
(such as produced from various CAD/CAM systems). The element has one degree of freedom, voltage,
at each node.
This element is applicable to 3-D electrostatic and time-harmonic quasistatic electric field analyses.
Various printout options are also available. See SOLID123 in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for
4
R
P
Q 3
Y 2
O K
X I M N
Z
1
J
SOLID123 Input Data

in Linear Material Properties in the Material Reference. Nodal loads are defined with the D (Lab = VOLT)
and F (Lab = CHRG) commands.
loads at the element faces as shown by the circled numbers on Figure 1 (p. 455). Charge densities may
be input as element body loads at the nodes. If the node I charge density CHRGD(I) is input, and all
SOLID123

Nodes
I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P, Q, R
Degrees of Freedom
VOLT
Real Constants
None
Material Properties
PERX, PERY, PERZ, LSST, RSVX, RSVY, RSVZ
Surface Loads
CHRGS face 1 (J-I-K), face 2 (I-J-L), face 3 (J-K-L), face 4 (K-I-L)
Body Loads
Temperature --
CHRGD(I), CHRGD(J), CHRGD(K), CHRGD(L), CHRGD(M),

CHRGD(N), CHRGD(O), CHRGD(P), CHRGD(Q), CHRGD(R)
Special Features
Birth and death
KEYOPT(4)
0 --
1 --
KEYOPT(5)
0 --
1 --
2 --
KEYOPT(6)
0 --
Positive
SOLID123
1 --
Negative


solution output is given in Solution Output (p. 50) in the Element Reference. See the Basic Analysis Guide
available.

Name Definition O R
VOLU: Volume Y Y
TEMP Temperatures T(I), T(J), T(K), T(L), T(M), T(N), T(O), T(P), Y Y
T(Q), T(R)
PERZ
EF:X, Y, Z Electric field components (X, Y, Z) 1 1
JS:X, Y, Z, SUM Current density components (in the global Cartesian 1 1
JT:X, Y, Z, SUM Conduction current density components and magnitude 1 1
[3]
SOLID123
Name Definition O R
FMAG:X, Y, Z Electrostatic force [7] - 1
centroid.
density (JD) can be derived from JS and JT as JD=JS-JT. JS can be used as a source current density for
a subsequent magnetostatic analysis with companion elements [LDREAD].

Integration Point Solution LOC, PERX, PERY, PERZ, EF, EFSUM, 1 -
D, DSUM

Name
Item
SOLID123
E
Output ETABLE and

Quant- ESOL Command
ity Input
Name Item E
CHRGD SMISC 1
EFX SMISC 2
EFY SMISC 3
EFZ SMISC 4
PERX NMISC 1
PERY NMISC 2
PERZ NMISC 3
JTX NMISC 5
JTY NMISC 6
JTZ NMISC 7
JTSUM NMISC 8

information.

ANSYS Emag 3-D
CIRCU124
Electric Circuit
MP ME <> <> <> <> <> <> EM <> <> PP <> EME MFS

CIRCU124 is a general circuit element applicable to circuit simulation. The element may also interface
with electromagnetic finite elements to simulate coupled electromagnetic-circuit field interaction. The
element has up to 6 nodes to define the circuit component and up to three degrees of freedom per
node to model the circuit response. For electromagnetic-circuit field coupling, the element may interface
with PLANE53 and SOLID97 using coupled circuit source options KEYOPT(1) = 5, 6, or 7 (see Figure
3 (p. 463)). CIRCU124 can be directly coupled to the electromagnetic or stranded coil analysis options
of PLANE233, SOLID236, and SOLID237 through the VOLT degree of freedom. CIRCU124 is applicable
to static, harmonic, and transient analyses.
CIRCU124 Input Data

The geometry, node definition, and degree of freedom options are shown in Figure 1 (p. 462) (circuit
components), Figure 2 (p. 462) (circuit source options), and Figure 3 (p. 463) (coupled circuit source options).
The element is defined by active and passive circuit nodes. Active nodes are those connected to an
overall electric circuit, and passive nodes are those used internally by the element and not connected
to the circuit. For the coupled circuit source options, the passive nodes are actual nodes of a source
conductor modeled in the electromagnetic field domain.
Element circuit components, sources, and coupled sources are defined by KEYOPT(1) settings and its
corresponding real constants. Real constant input is dependent on the element circuit option used. A
summary of the element input options is given in "CIRCU124 Input Summary" (p. 463). Real constants
numbers 15 and 16 are created by the GUI Circuit Builder (see the Modeling and Meshing Guide), and
are not required input for analysis purposes. The element is characterized by up to three degrees of
freedom:
• VOLT (voltage)
• CURR (current)
• EMF (potential drop)
CIRCU124
Figure 1 CIRCU124 Circuit Element Options
Resistor nductor Capacitor Mutual nductor
VI VI VI VI V

VJ VJ VJ VJ V
KEYOPT(1) = 0 KEYOPT(1) = 1 KEYOPT(1) = 2 8

DOF = VOLT DOF = VOLT DOF = VOLT
Figure 2 CIRCU124 Circuit Source Options
g6 6
S S S

.
; ;
N

. :
!"#$%&'* + 3 !"#$%&'* + 9 !"#$%&'* + '7
,#- + #.% ,#- + #.% ,#- + #.% &//./:*/
U55 & /N*
g6 6

g S g S g S

.
.
; ;
N
± ; ± ; ±

: :
!"#$%&'* + 4 !"#$%&'* + '< !"#$%&'* + ''
,#- + #.% &/*/ ,#- + #.% &//./:* ,#- + #.% &//./:*/
U55 & * U55 & * U55 & /N*
CIRCU124
Figure 3 CIRCU124 Coupled Circuit Source Options
Stranded Coil, 2-D or 3-D

FEA Domain

iK, emfK
KEYOPT(1) = 5
DOF = VOLT (I,J), CURR (K), EMF (K)
Massive Conductor, 2-D Massive Conductor, 3-D

FEA Domain

iK, emfK iK
± ±
iL

KEYOPT(1) = 6
DOF = VOLT (I,J), CURR (K), EMF (K) KEYOPT(1) = 7
DOF = VOLT (I,J,K,L), CURR (K,L)
indicates common node
Independent voltage and current sources (KEYOPT(1) = 3 or 4) may be excited by AC/DC, sinusoidal,
pulse, exponential, or piecewise linear load functions as defined by KEYOPT(2); see Figure 4 (p. 466).
The time-step size for a transient analysis is controlled by the DELTIM or NSUBST commands. The
CIRCU124 element does not respond to automatic time stepping (AUTOTS command), but AUTOTS
can be used as a mechanism for ramping the time step to its final value. For coupled electromagnetic-
circuit problems, automatic time stepping may be used if controls are placed on degrees of freedom
other than VOLT, CURR, or EMF, or loads associated with those degrees of freedom.
For problems using the CIRCU124 element, the sparse direct solver is chosen by default.

Nodes
I, J, K, L, M, N
CIRCU124
Degrees of Freedom
VOLT, CURR, EMF (see Figure 1 (p. 462))
Real Constants
Dependent on KEYOPT(1) and KEYOPT(2) settings. See Table 1: CIRCU124 Real Constants (p. 465) for details.
Material Properties
None
Surface Loads
None
Body Loads
See KEYOPT(2)
Special Features
Magnetic field coupling
KEYOPT(1)
Circuit component type:
0 --
Resistor
1 --
Inductor
2 --
Capacitor
3 --
Independent Current Source
4 --
Independent Voltage Source
5 --
Stranded Coil Current Source
6 --
2-D Massive Conductor Voltage Source
7 --
3-D Massive Conductor Voltage Source
8 --
Mutual Inductor
9 --
Voltage-Controlled Current Source
10 --
Voltage-Controlled Voltage Source
11 --
Current-Controlled Voltage Source
12 --
Current-Controlled Current Source
KEYOPT(2)
Body loads available if KEYOPT(1) = 3 or 4:
CIRCU124
0 --
DC or AC Harmonic load
1 --
Sinusoidal load
2 --
Pulse load
3 --
Exponential load
4 --
Piecewise Linear load

Circuit Option and Graph- KEYOPT(1) Real Constants
ics Label
Resistor (R) 0 R1 = Resistance (RES)
Inductor (L) 1 R1 = Inductance (IND)
R2 = Initial inductor current (ILO)
Capacitor (C) 2 R1 = Capacitance (CAP)
R2 = Initial Capacitor Voltage (VCO)
Mutual Inductor (K) 8 R1 = Primary Inductance (IND1)
R2 = Secondary Inductance (IND2)
R3 = Coupling Coefficient (K)
Independent Current Source 3 For KEYOPT(2) = 0:
(I)
For KEYOPT(2) > 0: see Figure 4.
Voltage-Controlled Current 9 R1 = Transconductance (GT)
Source (G)
Current-Controlled Current 12 R1 = Current Gain (AI)
Source (F)
Independent Voltage Source 4 For KEYOPT(2) = 0:
(V)
For KEYOPT(2) > 0: see Figure 4.
Voltage-Controlled Voltage 10 R1 = Voltage Gain (AV)
Source (E)
Current-Controlled Voltage 11 R1 = Transresistance (RT)
Source (H)
Stranded Coil Current 5 [1] R1 = Symmetry Factor (SCAL)
Source (N)
2-D Massive Conductor 6 [1] R1 = Symmetry Factor (SCAL)
Voltage Source (M)
CIRCU124
Circuit Option and Graph- KEYOPT(1) Real Constants

ics Label
3-D Massive Conductor 7 [1] R1 = Symmetry Factor (SCAL)
Voltage Source (P)
1. Applies only to a FEA domain modeled with PLANE53 or SOLID97 elements.
Note
For all above Circuit options, the GOFFST and ID real constants (numbers 15 and 16) are
created by the Circuit Builder automatically:
Figure 4 Load Functions and Corresponding Real Constants for Independent Current and
Voltage Sources
(R1) OFFS = Voltage or Current Offset

(R2) VA = Voltage or Current Amplitude
Load (R3) FREQ = Frequency in Hz
(R4) TD = Delay Time
EXPD (R5) PHD = Phase Delay
(R6) EXPD = Exponential Decay Factor
OFFS AMPL VA
TD Time
(a) Sinusoidal load, KEYOPT(2) = 1

w
!
W

W W
7 !

b " #!$%
CIRCU124
Load 1 V w Vg r urr

VH H gh Vg r urr
s y
4 s - s
TRC 5 y
TFC
VH 6 - s
7 r fus
+ -
Time
V
TRD
TFD
(c) Exponential load, KEYOPT(2) = 3
!" # $ %&'* !
." /# $ /0*8 9 :;99'* * *%&'* !
<" > $ %&'* .

?" /> $ /0*8 9 :;99'* * *%&'* .
@
WM/W XM/X @
@
#M/#
!!" A $ %&'* B
>M/> !." /A $ /0*8 9 :;99'* * *%&'* B

" G:IJ 0'9 0M NQSUG." $ ?
CIRCU124 Output Data

available.

Name Definition O R
For KEYOPT(1) = 0: Resistor
CIRCU124
Name Definition O R
RES Resistance Y Y
CURRENT Current Y Y
For KEYOPT(1) = 1: Inductor
IND Inductance Y Y
IL0 Initial current Y Y
CURRENT Current Y Y
For KEYOPT(1) = 2: Capacitor
CAP Capacitance Y Y
VC0 Initial voltage Y Y
CURRENT Current Y Y
For KEYOPT(1) = 3: Independent Current Source
CURRENT Real or imaginary component of applied current Y Y
SOURCE
CURRENT Current Y Y
For KEYOPT(1) = 4: Independent Voltage Source
NODES Nodes - I, J, K Y Y
VOLTAGE Real or imaginary component of applied voltage Y Y
SOURCE
For KEYOPT(1) = 5: Stranded Coil Current Source
CIRCU124
Name Definition O R
SCAL Scaling factor defining voltage symmetry in 2- Y Y
D or 3-D analyses
POWER Power loss or absorption Y Y
For KEYOPT(1) = 6: 2-D Massive Conductor Voltage Source
D or 3-D analyses
For KEYOPT(1) = 7: 3-D Massive Conductor Voltage Source
D or 3-D analyses
CURRENT Current at node K and L Y Y
CONTROL VOLT Voltage drop between node K and node L Y Y
For KEYOPT(1) = 8: 3-D Mutual Inductor (Transformer)
IND1 Primary inductance Y Y
IND2 Secondary inductance Y Y
INDM Mutual inductance Y Y
CURRENT Current in I-J branch Y Y
CONTROL CURR Current in K-L branch Y Y
For KEYOPT(1) = 9: Voltage Controlled Current Source
GT Transconductance Y Y
CIRCU124
Name Definition O R
CURRENT Current in I-J branch Y Y
For KEYOPT(1) = 10: Voltage Controlled Voltage Source
NODES Nodes - I, J, K, L, M Y Y
AV Voltage gain Y Y
CONTROL VOLT Voltage drop between node L and node M Y Y
For KEYOPT(1) = 11: Current Controlled Voltage Source
GT Transresistance Y Y
CONTROL CURR Current at node N Y Y
For KEYOPT(1) = 12: Current Controlled Current Source
AI Current gain Y Y
CONTROL CURR Current at node N Y Y
Name
output quantity as defined in the Table 2: CIRCU124 Element Output Definitions (p. 467)
Item
CIRCU124
E

ETABLE and
Name Input
Item E
VOLTAGE SMISC 1
CURRENT SMISC 2
CONTROL VOLT SMISC 3
CONTROL CURR SMISC 4
POWER NMISC 1
SOURCE (real) NMISC 2
SOURCE (imaginary) NMISC 3

• For static analyses, a capacitor circuit element is treated as an open-circuit and an inductor circuit element
is treated as a short-circuit.
• The resistor, inductor, capacitor, independent current source, and mutual inductor circuit options produce
symmetric coefficient matrices while the remaining options produce unsymmetric matrices.
• The sparse solver is the default for problems using the CIRCU124 element. Even if you choose a different
solver, ANSYS will switch to the sparse solver when CIRCU124 elements are present.
• KEYOPT(1) = 5, 6 or 7 should not be used with PLANE233, SOLID236, or SOLID227. These elements can
be coupled to CIRCU124 components directly through the VOLT degree of freedom.

CIRCU125
Diode
MP ME <> <> <> <> <> <> EM <> <> PP <> EME MFS

CIRCU125 is a diode element normally used in electric circuit analysis. The element may also interface
with electromagnetic and mechanical finite elements to simulate fully coupled electromechanical analyses
at the lumped parameter level. The element has 2 nodes to define the circuit component and one degree
of freedom per node to model the circuit response. The element may interface with the electric circuit
element CIRCU124, with the mechanical elements MASS21, COMBIN14, and COMBIN39, and with the
electromechanical transducer element TRANS126. CIRCU125 is applicable to static analyses and transient
analyses with restart.
CIRCU125 Input Data

The geometry, node definition, and degree of freedom options are shown in Figure 1 (p. 473).
The diode element is defined by the KEYOPT(1) setting and its corresponding real constants. Real constant
input is dependent on the diode option used. A summary of the element input options is given in
"CIRCU125 Input Summary" (p. 474). Real constants numbers 1 and 2 are created by the GUI Circuit
Builder (see the Modeling and Meshing Guide), and are not required input for analysis purposes. The
element is characterized by one degree of freedom, VOLT (voltage).
Figure 1 CIRCU125 Element Options
Common Diode Zener Diode
I I
J J
KEYOPT (1) = 0 KEYOPT (1) = 1
The I-U characteristics of the diodes are approximated by the piecewise linear functions shown in Figure
2 (p. 474). The characteristic of a common (non-Zener) diode consists of line segments corresponding
to the closed and open states. The characteristic of a Zener diode consists of three segments corres-
ponding to the Zener, closed, and open states. The diode characteristic can be ideal or lossy depending
on the values of the real constants.
CIRCU125
Figure 2 CIRCU125 I-U Characteristics

RESF RES
u u
RESB RESB
Z
VLTF VOLTAGE O AGE
RESZ
(a) Common Diode (b) Zr Dio
Legend
VLTF - Forward voltage
VLTZ - Zener voltage
RESF - Slope is forward resistance
RESB - Slope is blocking resistance
RESZ - Slope is Zener resistance

Nodes
I, J
Degrees of Freedom
VOLT
Real Constants
Dependent on KEYOPT(1) settings.

For KEYOPT(1) = 0:
GOFFST, ID, (blank), RESF, VLTF, RESB,
(blank), (blank)
For KEYOPT(1) = 1:
GOFFST, ID, (blank), RESF, VLTF, RESB,
RESZ, VLTZ
See Table 1: CIRCU125 Real Constants (p. 475).
Material Properties
None
Surface Loads
None
Body Loads
None
CIRCU125
Special Features
None
KEYOPT(1)
Select diode options:
0 --
Common Diode
1 --
Zener Diode
If you are using the Circuit Builder to construct your model, the real constants GOFFST and ID are
provided automatically.
Note
The real constant default values may not be appropriate to analyze micro devices (i.e., devices
with extremely small dimensions) in MKSA units.

Real Name Description
Con-
stant
No.
Common Diode (D) (KEYOPT(1) = 0)
1 GOFFST Graphical offset
2 ID Element identification number
3 -- (blank)
4 RESF Forward resistance (if not entered, defaults to 1.0e-12
Ohm)
5 VLTF Forward voltage (if not entered, defaults to 0.0e0 Volt)
6 RESB Blocking resistance (if not entered, defaults to 1.0e+12
Ohm)
7, 8 -- (blank)
Zener Diode (Z) (KEYOPT(1) = 2) - use real constants 1 through 6 as above, then:
7 RESZ Zener resistance (if not entered, defaults to 1.0e+12 Ohm)
8 VLTZ Zener voltage (if not entered, defaults to 1.0e-12 Volt)
CIRCU125 Solution Considerations

CIRCU125 is a highly nonlinear element. To obtain convergence, you may have to define convergence
criteria, instead of using the default values. Use CNVTOL,VOLT,,0.001,2,1.0E-6 if you need to change the
convergence criteria.
CIRCU125
CIRCU125 Output Data

available.

Name Definition O R
For KEYOPT(1) = 0: Common Diode
REST Tangent Resistance Y Y
CURRENT Current Y Y
STAT Diode status 1 1
DYNRES Dynamic resistance at operating point Y Y
AMPGEN Norton equivalent current generator Y Y
For KEYOPT(1) = 1: Zener Diode
REST Tangent resistance Y Y
CURRENT Current Y Y
STAT Diode status 2 2
DYNRES Dynamic resistance at operating point Y Y
AMPGEN Norton equivalent current generator Y Y
1. Common Diode Status Values
1 - Forward, open
2 - Reverse, blocked
2. Zener Diode Status Values
CIRCU125
1 - Forward, open
2 - Reverse, blocked
3 - Zener, breakdown
Name
output quantity as defined in Table 2: CIRCU125 Element Output Definitions (p. 476)
Item
E
Output ETABLE and

Quant- ESOL Command
ity Input
Name Item E
VOLTAGE SMISC 1
CUR- SMISC 2
RENT
POWER NMISC 1
blank NMISC 2
blank NMISC 3
DYNRES NMISC 4
AMPGEN NMISC 5
STAT NMISC 6

• If either the Zener voltage or Zener resistance is blank or very small, the Zener diode will be replaced
with a common diode, and a warning will be issued.
• If the Zener Voltage is entered as a positive number, the element will negate the value that is entered.
If the Forward Voltage is entered as a negative number, the element will replace it with its absolute
value. All resistance must be positive. Any negative resistance value is replaced by its absolute value.
• The element issues an error message if applied in harmonic analysis.
• This element does not work with the CIRCU94 piezoelectric element.
CIRCU125

TRANS126
Electromechanical Transducer
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME <>
TRANS126 Element Description

TRANS126 represents a transducer element that converts energy from an electrostatic domain into a
structural domain (and vice versa), while also allowing for energy storage. The element fully couples
the electromechanical domains and represents a reduced-order model suitable for use in structural finite
element analysis as well as electromechanical circuit simulation. The element has up to two degrees of
freedom at each node: translation in the nodal x, y, or z direction and electric potential (VOLT). The
element is suitable for simulating the electromechanical response of micro-electromechanical devices
(MEMS) such as electrostatic comb drives, capacitive transducers, and RF switches for example.
The characteristics of the element are derived from electrostatic field simulations of the electromechan-
ical device using the electrostatic elements PLANE121, SOLID122, and SOLID123, as well as the CMATRIX
macro. The TRANS126 element represents the capacitive response of the device to motion in one direc-
tion. Running a series of electrostatic simulations and extracting capacitance (CMATRIX command) as
a function of stroke (or deflection) provides the necessary input for this element. The capacitance versus
stroke represents a "reduced-order" characterization of the device suitable for simulation in this transducer
element. Up to three characterizations (in X, Y, or Z) can be made from sets of electrostatic simulations
to create three independent transducer elements to characterize a full translational response of the
device. See TRANS126 in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for more details about this element.
Figure 1 TRANS126 Geometry
y z
δ = GAP + u - u
GAP J
J
δ>0
I J
y
GAP GAP GAP
x
I J
I x I x
TRANS126 Input Data

Nodes I and J define the element. The nodes need not be coincident. The element may lie along any
TRANS126
one of the three global Cartesian axes as shown in Figure 1 (p. 479), or it may exist in any arbitrary co-
ordinate system as long as the nodes are rotated into the arbitrary coordinate system in such a manner
that one of the axes lies along the element's I-J direction. Use the degree of freedom option (KEYOPT(2))
to select the appropriate structural displacement degree of freedom (corresponding to the element's
I-J direction) and electric potential. Orientation of the element with respect to nodal displacements
(node J relative to node I) is critical. Orient the element such that a positive movement of node J relative
to node I produces a positive displacement (see Figure 1 (p. 479)). Figure 4 (p. 487) illustrates valid and
invalid orientations of the element for a UX-VOLT degree of freedom set.
The capacitance vs. stroke data for the element is entered through the real constant table. Use KEYOPT(3)
to select from two different methods of input. For KEYOPT(3) = 0, the real constant data (R7-R11) rep-
resent the coefficients of an equation (see Figure 2 (p. 480)). Use as many terms as are required to rep-
resent the curve. For KEYOPT(3) = 1, the real constant data (R7-R46) represent discrete pairs of capacitance
and stroke data. Up to 20 pairs of data may be input. The minimum required is 5 data point sets. A
curve is fit to the discrete data sets represented by the equation shown in Figure 2 (p. 480).
Figure 2 TRANS126 Capacitance Relationship

GAPMIN = ___ 2
+ 1 + 2 + 3 + 4
3

C GAP

a

ap
aC
Stroke (or Deflection) (u)

vs. R s
The initial gap distance GAP (R3) represents the initial distance between conducting walls of the elec-
tromechanical device (that is, plates of a parallel capacitor, beams of a comb drive, etc.). The initial gap
value should fall within the range of the capacitance vs. stroke data as shown in Figure 2 (p. 480). The
minimum gap distance GAPMIN (R4) represents the physical location where the gap is closed. If the
gap closes to GAPMIN, the element behaves like a contact element with a normal stiffness KN represented
by real constant R5. GAP and GAPMIN default to near-zero if not defined. Figure 3 (p. 481) illustrates the
force vs. stroke for the transducer element. The curve highlights the capacitive force (which is compressive
and acts to close the gap), and the contact force (which restrains the motion once the gap reaches
TRANS126
GAPMIN). KN defaults to a stiffness represented by the slope from the capacitive force at GAPMIN to
the origin as shown in Figure 3 (p. 481).
Figure 3 TRANS126 Force Relationship
GAPMIN
e
c
r
o
F
piiv s
KN
(dfault)
St k
Cntat f
The element supports nodal voltage and displacements (D) as well as nodal current and force (F). Use
IC to input an initial starting value of voltage or displacement for a transient analysis, or an initial guess
for a static analysis. The element produces an unsymmetric matrix unless you prescribe both nodal
voltages. Prescribing the nodal voltages and setting KEYOPT(4) = 1 produces a symmetric matrix which
can yield more efficient solution run times. The KEYOPT(4) = 1 option is valid for any analysis except a
transient analysis. The element supports static, prestressed harmonic, transient, and prestressed modal
analysis. Prestress effects must be applied for both modal and harmonic analysis (for example, a prestress
static analysis with an applied DC voltage, followed by a small-signal (AC voltage) harmonic analysis,
or a prestress static analysis with an applied DC voltage followed by a modal analysis). The element is
nonlinear for static and transient analysis and requires an iterative solution to converge. The element
supports tension only.
The transducer element by nature has both stable and unstable solutions. If the system stiffness is
negative, convergence problems can occur near unstable solutions. This typically occurs at small gap
distances near GAPMIN. Use KEYOPT(6) = 1 to select the augmented stiffness method if you encounter
TRANS126
convergence problems. In this method, the electrostatic stiffness is set to zero to guarantee a positive
system stiffness. After convergence is reached, the electrostatic stiffness is automatically reestablished
for postprocessing and subsequent analyses.
The next table summarizes the element input. Element Input (p. 43) gives a general description of element
input.
TRANS126 Input Summary

Nodes
I, J
Degrees of Freedom
UX-VOLT, UY-VOLT, OR UZ-VOLT
Real Constants
If KEYOPT(3) = 0, then:
GOFFST, EID, GAP, GAPMIN, KN, (Blank),
C0, C1, C2, C3, C4
If KEYOPT(3) = 1, then:
GOFFST, EID, GAP, GAPMIN, KN, (Blank),
GAP1, CAP1, GAP2, CAP2, ..., GAP20, CAP20
See Table 1: TRANS126 Real Constants (p. 483) for details.

Material Properties
None
Surface Loads
None
Body Loads
None
Special Features
Nonlinear
Prestress
KEYOPT(2)
Select DOF set:
0,1 --
UX-VOLT
2 --
UY-VOLT
3 --
UZ-VOLT
KEYOPT(3)
Capacitance-Gap option:
0 --
Use capacitance-gap curve input coefficients: C0, C1, C2, C3, and C4
TRANS126
1 --
Use capacitance versus gap data points: GAP1, CAP1, GAP2, CAP2 ... GAP20, CAP20
KEYOPT(4)
DC voltage drop option:
0 --
DC voltage drop is unknown (produces unsymmetric matrix)
1 --
DC voltage drop is fully constrained (produces symmetric matrix)
KEYOPT(6)
Stiffness method:
0 --
Full stiffness method (default)
1 --
Augmented stiffness method
The first six real constants for this element are the same, whether you set KEYOPT(3) = 0 or 1. From
number 7 on, the real constants differ between the two settings, as shown in the table below.
Table 1 TRANS126 Real Constants

Number Name Description
Basic Set
1 GOFFST Graphical offset
2 EID ID number
3 GAP Initial gap
4 GAPMIN Minimal gap
5 KN Gap Normal Stiffness
6 (blank) unused
For KEYOPT(3) = 0; Capacitance (Cap) vs. gap (x) function:
Cap = C0/x + C1 + C2*x + C3*x**2 + C4*x**3

7 C0 Equation constant C0
For KEYOPT(3) = 1 (Capacitance-gap curve data)
7 GAP1 Gap 1
8 CAP1 Capacitance 1
9, ..., 46 GAP2, CAP2, ..., Gap2 and Capacitance 2 through Gap 20 and Capacitance
GAP20, CAP20 20
TRANS126
TRANS126 Output Data

The solution output associated with the element is shown in Table 2: TRANS126 Element Output Defini-
tions (p. 484).
If this element is used in a harmonic analysis, all variables will be stored in two-column arrays as complex
variables. The first column will be titled real component and the second column will be titled imaginary
component. If the variable is not complex, the same value will be stored in both columns.
available.
Table 2 TRANS126 Element Output Definitions

Name Definition O R
EFORCE Electrostatic Force Y Y
ESTIFF Electrostatic stiffness (dEFORCE/dU) Y Y
CONDUCT Motion conductance (dCap/dU) (RELVEL) Y Y
DVDT Time rate of change of Voltage (dVOLT/dt) Y Y
RELDISP Relative displacement node I to node J Y Y
RELVEL Relative velocity node I to node J Y Y
CURRENT Current Y Y
CAP Capacitance Y Y
MECHPOWER Mechanical power, (force x velocity) Y Y
ELECPOWER Electrical power, (voltage drop x current) Y Y
CENERGY Electrostatic energy stored in capacitor Y Y
GAP Actual gap, UJ - UI + GAP (nominal) (real constant input) Y Y
KUU Coupled system stiffness, dF/dU Y Y
KUV Coupled system stiffness, dF/dV Y Y
KVU Coupled system stiffness, dI/dU Y Y
KVV Coupled system stiffness, dI/dV Y Y
TRANS126
Name Definition O R
DUU Coupled system damping, dF/dVEL Y Y
DUV Coupled system damping, dF/dVRATE Y Y
DVU Coupled system damping, dI/dVEL Y Y
DVV Coupled system damping, dI/dVRATE Y Y
DISPR, DISPI Real and imaginary components of displacement 1 1
FORCR, FORCI Real and imaginary components of electrostatic force 1 1
VOLTR, VOLTI Real and imaginary components of voltage drop 1 1
CURRR, CURRI Real and imaginary components of current 1 1
1. The item is only available for prestress harmonic analysis.
Table 3: TRANS126 Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 485) lists output available through ETABLE using the
Sequence Number method. See Element Table for Variables Identified By Sequence Number in the Basic
Analysis Guide and The Item and Sequence Number Table (p. 52) in this manual for more information.
The following notation is used in Table 3: TRANS126 Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 485):
Name
output quantity as defined in the Table 3: TRANS126 Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 485)
Item
E
Table 3 TRANS126 Item and Sequence Numbers

ETABLE and
Output ESOL Command
Quantity Input
Name
Item E
MECH- SMISC 1
POWER
ELECPOWER SMISC 2
CENERGY SMISC 3
GAP NMISC 1
RELVEL NMISC 2
EFORCE NMISC 3
VOLTAGE NMISC 4
DVDT NMISC 5
CURRENT NMISC 6
CAP NMISC 7
ESTIFF NMISC 8
UCT NMISC 9
KUU NMISC 10
TRANS126
ETABLE and
Output ESOL Command
Quantity Input
Name
Item E
KUV NMISC 11
KVU NMISC 12
KVV NMISC 13
DUU NMISC 14
DUV NMISC 15
DVU NMISC 16
DVV NMISC 17
DISPR NMISC 18
DISPI NMISC 19
FORCR NMISC 20
FORCI NMISC 21
VOLTR NMISC 22
VOLTI NMISC 23
CURRR NMISC 24
CURRI NMISC 25
TRANS126 Assumptions and Restrictions

• The transducer element must be aligned such that the element I-J direction points along the active
structural degree of freedom in the nodal coordinate system. In addition, a positive movement in the
nodal coordinate system of node J relative to node I should act to open the gap (Stroke = GAP + Uj -
Ui). Figure 4 (p. 487) illustrates valid and invalid orientations of the element for a UX-VOLT degree of
freedom set.
• Nodes I and J may be coincident since the orientation is defined by the relative motion of node J to
node I. No moment effects due to noncoincident nodes are included. That is, if the nodes are offset
from a line perpendicular to the element axis, moment equilibrium may not be satisfied.
• Unreasonable high stiffness (KN) values should be avoided. The rate of convergence decreases as the
stiffness increases.
• The element may not be deactivated with EKILL.
• Harmonic and modal analyses are valid only for small-signal analyses after a static prestress calculation.
• A minimum of two load steps must be used to obtain valid electrostatic force calculations.
TRANS126
Figure 4 TRANS126 Valid/Invalid Orientations
Valid orientations for UX,VOLT DOF set:
y y
I J I J
x x
Invalid orientations for UX,VOLT DOF set:
y y
J I J I
x x
TRANS126 Product Restrictions

The TRANS126 element is only available in the ANSYS Multiphysics, ANSYS ED, and ANSYS PrepPost
products.
FLUID129
MP ME <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS

FLUID129 has been developed as a companion element to FLUID29. It is intended to be used as an
envelope to a model made of FLUID29 finite elements. It simulates the absorbing effects of a fluid domain
that extends to infinity beyond the boundary of FLUID29 finite element domain. FLUID129 realizes a
second-order absorbing boundary condition so that an outgoing pressure wave reaching the boundary
of the model is "absorbed" with minimal reflections back into the fluid domain. The element can be
used to model the boundary of 2-D (planar or axisymmetric) fluid regions and as such, it is a line element;
it has two nodes with one pressure degree of freedom per node. FLUID129 may be used in transient,
harmonic, and modal analyses. Typical applications include structural acoustics, noise control, underwater
acoustics, etc. See FLUID129 in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for more details about this element.
I J
x, r
(xo, yo)
FLUID129 Input Data

The element is defined by two nodes (I, J), the material properties and the real constants (defined in
"FLUID129 Input Summary" (p. 490)). The element must be circular with radius RAD and center located
at or near the center of the structure. The radius RAD should be supplied through the real constants.
The element is characterized by a pair of symmetric stiffness and damping matrices.
In a typical meshing procedure, you should mesh the interior fluid domain that is bounded by a circular
boundary with FLUID29 elements, select the nodes on the circular boundary, select the type associated
with the FLUID129 and then issue the ESURF command. The latter will automatically add the FLUID129
elements on the boundary of the finite domain.
FLUID129

Nodes
I, J
Degrees of Freedom
PRES
Real Constants
RAD - Radius
X0 - Center of enclosing circle, X value
Y0 - Center of enclosing circle, Y value
Material Properties
SONC - velocity of sound
Surface Loads
None
Body Loads
None
Special Features
None
KEYOPT(3)
Element behavior:
0 --
Planar
1 --
Axisymmetric


FLUID129
available.

Name Definition O R
LINE: Length Y Y
SONC Speed of sound Y Y
Name
Item
E
Output ETABLE and

Quant- ESOL Command
ity Input
Name Item E
SONC NMISC 1

• FLUID129 must lie on a boundary circular in shape and should completely enclose the domain meshed
with FLUID29 elements.
• The radius RAD of the circular boundary of the finite domain should be specified as a real constant. If
the coordinates (X0, Y0) of the center of the circle are not supplied through the real constant input, the
center will be assumed to be at the origin. The center of the circle should be as close to the center of
the model as possible.
• It is recommended that the enclosing circular boundary is placed at a distance of at least 0.2*lambda
from the boundary of any structure that may be submerged in the fluid, where lambda = c/f is the
dominant wavelength of the pressure waves; c is the speed of sound (SONC) in the fluid, and f is the
FLUID129
dominant frequency of the pressure wave. For example, in the case of a submerged circular cylindrical
shell of diameter D, the radius of the enclosing boundary, RAD, should be at least (D/2) + 0.2*lambda.
• FLUID129 uses an extra DOF, labeled XTR1, that is not available to the user. This DOF is solely for ANSYS'
internal use, although it may appear in DOF listings or in program messages.
• The only applicable modal analysis method is the Damped method.

FLUID130
MP ME <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS

FLUID130 has been developed as a companion element to FLUID30. It is intended to be used as an
envelope to a model made of FLUID30 finite elements. It simulates the absorbing effects of a fluid domain
that extends to infinity beyond the boundary of the finite element domain that is made of FLUID30
elements. FLUID130 realizes a second-order absorbing boundary condition so that an outgoing pressure
wave reaching the boundary of the model is "absorbed" with minimal reflections back into the fluid
domain. The element can be used to model the boundary of 3-D fluid regions and as such, it is a plane
surface element; it has four nodes with one pressure degrees of freedom per node. FLUID130 may be
used in transient, harmonic, and modal analyses. Typical applications include structural acoustics, noise
control, underwater acoustics, etc. See FLUID130 in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for more details
about this element.
I K
RAD

J
y
x, r
(xo, yo, zo)

z
FLUID130 Input Data

The element is defined by four nodes (I, J, K, L), the material property SONC (speed of sound) and the
real constants shown in "FLUID130 Input Summary" (p. 494). A triangular element may be formed by de-
fining duplicate K and L node numbers. The element must be at the spherical boundary of an acoustic
fluid domain, meshed using FLUID30 elements, with radius RAD and center located at or near the center
of the structure. The radius RAD should be supplied through the real constants.
FLUID130
The element is characterized by a symmetric stiffness and a damping matrix.
In a typical meshing procedure the user should mesh the interior fluid domain that is bounded by a
spherical boundary with FLUID30 elements, select the nodes on the spherical boundary, select the type
associated with the FLUID130 and then issue the ESURF command. The latter will automatically add
the FLUID130 elements on the boundary of the finite domain.

Nodes
I, J, K, L
Degrees of Freedom
PRES
Real Constants
RAD - Radius
X0 - Center of enclosing circle, X value
Y0 - Center of enclosing circle, Y value
Z0 - Center of enclosing circle, Z value
Material Properties
SONC
Surface Loads
None
Body Loads
None
Special Features
None
KEYOPTS
None


FLUID130
available.

Name Definition O R
AREA: AREA Y Y
SONC Speed of sound Y Y
Name
Item
E
Output ETABLE and

Quant- ESOL Command
ity Input
Name Item E
SONC NMISC 1

• FLUID130 must lie on a boundary spherical in shape and should completely enclose the domain meshed
with FLUID30 elements.
• The radius RAD of the spherical boundary of the finite domain should be specified as a real constant.
If the coordinates (X0, Y0, Z0) of the center of the sphere are not supplied through the real constant input,
the center will be assumed to be at the origin of the global coordinate system. The center of the sphere
should be as close to the center of the model as possible.
• It is recommended that the enclosing spherical boundary is placed at a distance of at least 0.2*lambda
from the boundary of any structure that may be submerged in the fluid, where lambda = c/f is the
dominant wavelength of the pressure waves. c is the speed of sound (SONC) in the fluid and f is the
FLUID130
dominant frequency of the pressure wave. For example, in the case of a submerged spherical shell of
diameter D, the radius of the enclosing boundary, RAD, should be at least (D/2) + 0.2*lambda.
• FLUID130 uses extra DOFs, labeled XTR1 and XTR2, that are not available to the user. These DOFs are
solely for ANSYS' internal use, although they may appear in DOF listings or in program messages.
• The only applicable modal analysis method is the Damped method.

SHELL131

SHELL131 is a 3-D layered shell element having in-plane and through-thickness thermal conduction
capability. The element has four nodes with up to 32 temperature degrees of freedom at each node.
The conducting shell element is applicable to a 3-D, steady-state or transient thermal analysis. SHELL131
generates temperatures that can be passed to structural shell elements in order to model thermal
bending. See SHELL131 in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for more details about this element.
If the model containing the conducting shell element is to be analyzed structurally, use an equivalent
structural shell element instead, such as SHELL181 or SHELL281.
K,L
z
o
z
5 I J
Top 2 riangular O in
t K
L
y y x
o
6 s 4
x OP
o
AER E
E Nde
Z I
J cain
AER E
Y
X 3 1 Bottom
O
xo = element x-axis if ESYS is not supplied.
x = element x-axis if ESYS is supplied.
SHELL131 Input Data

The geometry, node locations, and coordinates systems for this element are shown in Figure 1 (p. 497).
The element is defined by four nodes, one thickness per layer, a material angle for each layer, and the
material properties. If the material is uniform and the analysis has no transient effects, only one layer
is needed with a linear temperature variation through the thickness.
The cross-sectional properties are input using the SECTYPE,,SHELL and SECDATA commands. These
properties are the thickness, material number, and orientation of each layer. Tapered thicknesses may
be input using the SECFUNCTION command. The number of integration points from the SECDATA
command is not used; rather it is determined for all layers with KEYOPT(3). In the GUI, the ShellTool
SHELL131
provides a convenient way to define section data for this element (see Shell Analysis and Cross Sections
in the Structural Analysis Guide). Real constants are not used for this element.
Generally, the quadratic variation in temperature through each layer (KEYOPT(3) = 0) is used for transient
analysis or for strongly temperature dependent materials, and the linear variation in temperature through
each layer (KEYOPT(3) = 1) is used for steady state analysis with materials that are either not temperature
dependent or weakly temperature dependent. Layers may be used to model the physical changes of
properties through the thickness or the effect of a through-thickness transient in greater detail.
KEYOPT(4) duplicates the number of layers input on the SECDATA commands. If KEYOPT(4) is 0 or
blank, the program will query each element during definition in PREP7 as to which section information
is being used, and then reassign the element to a different type. More element types are created as
needed. The result can be seen using ETLIST and ELIST after all elements are defined. To ensure that
the program can do this redefinition, the user is required to define the section information before the
element is defined.
If KEYOPT(6) (also referred to as the paint option) is used, TBOT is replaced with TEMP, allowing the
element to be directly attached to an underlying solid to avoid the use of constraint equations. When
this option is used, surface loads cannot be applied to face 1.
As this is a thermal shell element, the direction of the element z-axis and the presence of the
SECOFFSET command have no effect on the solution. However, to get correct plots when using the
/ESHAPE command:
- The element z-axis should be defined with the same care as for a structural shell element.
- If KEYOPT(6) = 1 (the paint option) is set, SECOFFSET,BOT should be input.
(using the RDSF surface load label) may be input as surface loads at the element faces as shown by the
circled numbers on Figure 1 (p. 497). Because shell edge convection and flux loads are input on a per-
unit-length basis, per-unit-area quantities must be multiplied by the total shell thickness. Radiation is
not available on the edges. You can also generate film coefficients and bulk temperatures using the
surface effect element SURF152. SURF152 can also be used with FLUID116.
Heat generation rates may be input as element body loads on a per layer basis. One heat generation
value is applied to the entire layer. If the first layer heat generation rate HG(1) is input, and all others
are unspecified, they default to HG(1). Nodal values are averaged over the entire element.

Nodes
I, J, K, L
Degrees of Freedom
Quadratic:
If KEYOPT(3) = 0
If KEYOPT(4) = 0 or 1: TBOT, TE2, TTOP
If KEYOPT(4) = 2: TBOT, TE2, TE3, TE4, TTOP
If KEYOPT(4) = 3: TBOT, TE2, TE3, TE4, TE5, TE6, TTOP
Etc.
SHELL131
If KEYOPT(4) = 15: TBOT, TE2, TE3, TE4, TE5, TE6, TE7, TE8, TE9, TE10, TE11, TE12, TE13, TE14,
TE15, TE16, TE17, TE18, TE19, TE20, TE21, TE22, TE23, TE24, TE25, TE26, TE27, TE28, TE29, TE30,
TTOP
Linear:
If KEYOPT(3) = 1
If KEYOPT(4) = 0 or 1: TBOT, TTOP
If KEYOPT(4) = 2: TBOT, TE2, TTOP
If KEYOPT(4) = 3: TBOT, TE2, TE3, TTOP
Etc.
TE31, TTOP
Constant:
If KEYOPT(3) = 2: TEMP (one layer only)

Real Constants
None
Material Properties
Surface Loads
Convections --
Face 1 (I-J-K-L) (bottom, -z side)

Face 2 (I-J-K-L) (top, +z side)
Face 3 (J-I), Face 4 (K-J), Face 5 (L-K), Face 6 (I-L)
Heat Fluxes --

Radiation --

Body Loads
Heat Generations --
HG(1), HG(2), HG(3), . . . ., HG(KEYOPT(4))
Special Features
Birth and death
KEYOPT(2)
Film coefficient evaluation (if any):
0 --
Evaluate at an average film temperature, (TS+TB)/2
SHELL131
1 --
2 --
3 --
Evaluate at differential temperature, |TS-TB|
KEYOPT(3)
Temperature variation through layer:
0 --
Quadratic temperature variation through-layer (maximum number of layers = 15)
1 --
Linear temperature variation through-layer (maximum number of layers = 31)
2 --
No temperature variation through-layer (number of layers = 1)
KEYOPT(4)
Number of layers (input a value to match SECDATA commands, or leave blank to default). Maximum
number of layers allowed depends on KEYOPT(3) setting (see above).
KEYOPT(6)
Application:
0 --
Thermal shell application
1 --
Paint application
SHELL131 Output Data


• Additional element output shown in Table 1: SHELL131 Element Output Definitions (p. 501)
Output temperatures may be read by structural shell elements using the LDREAD,TEMP command.
If the structural shell element uses only one temperature through the thickness, such as SHELL41, only
TEMP can be used.
If the structural shell element uses two temperatures through the thickness, such as for SHELL181 (with
only one layer) or SHELL281 (with only one layer), only TBOT and TTOP are used and any internal tem-
peratures such as TE2 are ignored.
If the structural shell element uses more than two temperatures through the thickness, such as for
SHELL181 (with multiple layers), all temperatures are transferred over. In this case, the corner nodes of
each SHELL131 element must have identical temperature degrees of freedom.
The number of temperature points at a node generated in the thermal shell must match the number
of temperature points at a node needed by the structural shell. For example, a two-layer SHELL181
element using the same material and thickness for both layers can get its temperatures from a SHELL131
element using either two layers with KEYOPT(3) = 1 (linear variation) or one layer with KEYOPT(3) = 0
SHELL131
(quadratic variation). Temperatures passed from this element to the stress analysis via LDREAD,TEMP
can be viewed using BFELIST, as opposed to the usual BFLIST.
Heat flowing out of the element is considered to be positive. Heat flows are labeled HBOT, HE2, . . .
HTOP, similar to the temperature labels. Gradient and flux information is provided at the midthickness
of each layer. The element output directions are parallel to the element coordinate system. A general
to view results.
To see the temperature distribution through the thickness for this element as well as all other thermal
elements, use /GRAPHICS,POWER and /ESHAPE,1 followed by PLNSOL,TEMP.
available.

Name Definition O R
MAT Element material number (from MAT command) Y Y
AREA Area of element Y Y
HGEN Heat generations: HG(1), HG(2), HG(3), . . . Y -
TG:X, Y, Z Thermal gradient components at midlayer Y Y
TF:X, Y, Z Thermal flux components at midlayer Y Y
FACE Face label 1 1
AREA Face area (same as element area) 1 1
NODES Face nodes (same as element nodes) 1 1
HFILM Face film coefficient 1 1
HFLXAVG Heat flow rate per unit area across face caused by in- - 1
put heat flux
HEAT RATE/AREA Heat flow rate per unit area across face by convection 1 -
HEAT FLUX Heat flux at each node of the face 1 -
SHELL131
1. If a surface load is input.

2. Available only at the centroid as a *GET item.
notation is used in Table 2: SHELL131 Item and Sequence Numbers for ETABLE and ESOL Command In-
put (p. 502):
Name
output quantity as defined in Table 1: SHELL131 Element Output Definitions (p. 501)
Item
Table 2 SHELL131 Item and Sequence Numbers for ETABLE and ESOL Command Input
Output Face 1 Face 2 I J K L
Quantity Item Bottom Top Corners
Name
AREA NMISC 1 7 -- -- -- --
HFAVG NMISC 2 8 -- -- -- --
TAVG NMISC 3 9 -- -- -- --
TBAVG NMISC 4 10 -- -- -- --
HEAT RATE NMISC 5 11 -- -- -- --
HFLXAVG NMISC 6 12 -- -- -- --
THICKNESS NMISC -- -- 37 38 39 40

• Zero area elements are not allowed. This occurs most frequently when the element is not numbered
properly.
• Zero thickness layers are not allowed.
• The cut boundary interpolation command (CBDOF) does not work with this element.
• When using thermal contact, the TEMP degree of freedom must be present (KEYOPT(3) = 2 or KEYOPT(6)
= 1).
• There should not be a large variation in the ratio of through-thickness conductivity (KZZ) to layer
thickness for all layers within the element. If the highest and lowest values for this ratio differ by a large
factor (for example, 1e5), then the results for the element may be unreliable.
• No check is made to ensure either that the number of layers between adjacent elements match or that
the effective location of a degree of freedom (for example, TE7 from a 10 layer element) between ele-
ments sharing the same node is the same to a tolerance. If this is a concern, study the area using the
/ESHAPE command. For cases where the layering intentionally changes, such as at a joint or at the
runout of a tapered layer, use constraint equations (CE family of commands) with or without double
nodes to connect the two sides.
SHELL131
• The program removes all imposed degrees of freedom and nodal loads (i.e., internally issues DDELE,all,all
and FDELE,all,all commands) when elements that use TTOP, TBOT, etc. as degrees of freedom:
– are defined or redefined using the ET or KEYOPT commands.
– are changed (or deleted) using the ET, ETCHG, or ETDELE commands to an element type that does
not use these degrees of freedom.
If your model contained SHELL131 elements with D and F loads, and you deleted these elements
via ETDELE, the D and F loads will automatically be deleted and reapplied to the new DOF list.
You do, however, need to check other loads and verify if they need to be deleted and reapplied.

ANSYS Professional
ANSYS ED
• Section definitions are not allowed if more than one material is referenced.
SHELL132

SHELL132 is a 3-D layered shell element having in-plane and through-thickness thermal conduction
capability. The element has eight nodes with up to 32 temperature degrees of freedom at each node.
The conducting shell element is applicable to a 3-D, steady-state or transient thermal analysis. SHELL132
generates temperatures that can be passed to structural shell elements in order to model thermal
bending. See SHELL132 in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for more details about this element.
If the model containing the conducting shell element is to be analyzed structurally, use an equivalent
structural shell element instead, such as SHELL281.
K,L,O
z
P N
z
2 8 5
J
I M
L O
Triangular Option
4
y x 7
y K
P
3
6 x s
N TTOP
5 M 4 LAYER 2 TE4
I 6 TE3 Node
Z
1 J Location
2 LAYER 1 TE2
3
Y 1
X TBOT
xo = element x-axis if ESYS is not supplied.
x = element x-axis if ESYS is supplied.
SHELL132 Input Data

The geometry, node locations, and coordinates systems for this element are shown in Figure 1 (p. 505).
The element is defined by four/eight nodes, one thickness per layer, a material angle for each layer,
and the material properties. If the material is uniform and the analysis has no transient effects, only one
layer is needed with a linear temperature variation through the thickness.
The cross-sectional properties are input using the SECTYPE,,SHELL and SECDATA commands. These
properties are the thickness, material number, and orientation of each layer. Tapered thicknesses may
be input using the SECFUNCTION command. The number of integration points from the SECDATA
SHELL132
command is not used; rather it is determined for all layers with KEYOPT(3). In the GUI, the ShellTool
provides a convenient way to define section data for this element (see Shell Analysis and Cross Sections
in the Structural Analysis Guide). Real constants are not used for this element.
Generally, the quadratic variation in temperature through each layer (KEYOPT(3) = 0) is used for transient
analysis or for strongly temperature dependent materials, and the linear variation in temperature through
each layer (KEYOPT(3) = 1) is used for steady state analysis with materials that are either not temperature
dependent or weakly temperature dependent. Layers may be used to model the physical changes of
properties through the thickness or the effect of a thru-thickness transient in greater detail.
KEYOPT(4) duplicates the number of layers input on the SECDATA commands. If KEYOPT(4) is 0 or
blank, the program will query each element during definition in PREP7 as to which section information
is being used, and then reassign the element to a different type. More element types are created as
needed. The result can be seen using ETLIST and ELIST after all elements are defined. To ensure that
the program can do this redefinition, the user is required to define the section information before the
element is defined.
If KEYOPT(6) (also referred to as the paint option) is used, TBOT is replaced with TEMP, allowing the
element to be directly attached to an underlying solid to avoid the use of constraint equations. When
this option is used, surface loads cannot be applied to face 1.
As this is a thermal shell element, the direction of the element z-axis and the presence of the
SECOFFSET command have no effect on the solution. However, to get correct plots when using the
/ESHAPE command:
- The element z-axis should be defined with the same care as for a structural shell element.
- If KEYOPT(6) = 1 (the paint option) is set, SECOFFSET,BOT should be input.
(using the RDSF surface load label) may be input as surface loads at the element faces as shown by the
circled numbers on Figure 1 (p. 505). Because shell edge convection and flux loads are input on a per-
unit-length basis, per-unit-area quantities must be multiplied by the total shell thickness. Radiation is
not available on the edges. You can also generate film coefficients and bulk temperatures using the
surface effect element SURF152. SURF152 can also be used with FLUID116.
are unspecified, they default to HG(1). Nodal values are averaged over the entire element.

Nodes
I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P
Degrees of Freedom
Quadratic:
If KEYOPT(3) = 0
If KEYOPT(4) = 0 or 1: TBOT, TE2, TTOP
If KEYOPT(4) = 2: TBOT, TE2, TE3, TE4, TTOP
If KEYOPT(4) = 3: TBOT, TE2, TE3, TE4, TE5, TE6, TTOP
SHELL132
Etc.
TTOP
Linear:
If KEYOPT(3) = 1
If KEYOPT(4) = 0 or 1: TBOT, TTOP
If KEYOPT(4) = 2: TBOT, TE2, TTOP
If KEYOPT(4) = 3: TBOT, TE2, TE3, TTOP
Etc.
TE31, TTOP
Constant:
If KEYOPT(3) = 2: TEMP (one layer only)

Real Constants
None
Material Properties
Surface Loads
Convections --

Heat Fluxes --

Radiation --

Body Loads
Heat Generations --
HG(1), HG(2), HG(3), ..., HG(KEYOPT(4))
Special Features
Birth and death
KEYOPT(2)
Film coefficient evaluation (if any):
0 --
Evaluate at an average film temperature, (TS+TB)/2
SHELL132
1 --
2 --
3 --
Evaluate at differential temperature, |TS-TB|
KEYOPT(3)
Temperature variation through layer:
0 --
Quadratic temperature variation through layer (maximum number of layers = 15)
1 --
Linear temperature variation through layer (maximum number of layers = 31)
2 --
No temperature variation through layer (number of layers = 1)
KEYOPT(4)
Number of layers (input a value to match SECDATA commands, or leave blank to default). Maximum
number of layers allowed depends on KEYOPT(3) setting (see above).
KEYOPT(6)
Application:
0 --
Thermal shell application
1 --
Paint application


• Additional element output as shown in Table 1: SHELL132 Element Output Definitions (p. 509).
Output nodal temperatures may be read by structural shell elements (such as SHELL281) using the
LDREAD,TEMP capability. If the structural shell element uses two temperatures through the thickness,
only TBOT and TTOP are used, and any internal temperatures such as TE2 are ignored. If the structural
shell element uses more than two temperatures through the thickness, all temperatures are transferred
over. In this case, the corner nodes of each SHELL132 element must have identical temperature degrees
of freedom. Also, the number of temperature points at a node generated in the thermal shell must
match the number of temperature points at a node needed by the structural shell. For example, a two
layer shell element using the same material and thickness for both layers can get its temperatures from
a SHELL132 element using either two layers with KEYOPT(3) = 1 (linear variation) or one layer with
KEYOPT(3) = 0 (quadratic variation). Temperatures passed from this element to the stress analysis via
LDREAD,TEMP can be viewed using BFELIST, as opposed to the usual BFLIST.
Heat flowing out of the element is considered to be positive. Heat flows are labeled HBOT, HE2, . . .
HTOP, similar to the temperature labels. Gradient and flux information is provided at the midthickness
of each layer. The element output directions are parallel to the element coordinate system. A general
SHELL132
to view results.
To see the temperature distribution thru the thickness for this element as well as all other thermal ele-
ments, use /GRAPHICS,POWER and /ESHAPE,1 followed by PLNSOLL,TEMP.
available.

Name Definition O R
MAT Element material number (from MAT command) Y Y
AREA Area of element Y Y
HGEN Heat generations: HG(1), HG(2), HG(3), . . . Y -
TG:X, Y, Z Thermal gradient components at midlayer Y Y
TF:X, Y, Z Thermal flux components at midlayer Y Y
FACE Face label 1 1
AREA Face area (same as element area) 1 1
NODES Face nodes (same as element nodes) 1 1
HFILM Face film coefficient 1 1
HFLXAVG Heat flow rate per unit area across face caused by in- - 1
put heat flux
HEAT RATE/AREA Heat flow rate per unit area across face by convection 1 -
HEAT FLUX Heat flux at each node of the face 1 -
1. If a surface load is input.

SHELL132
notation is used in Table 2: SHELL132 Item and Sequence Numbers for ETABLE and ESOL Command In-
put (p. 510):
Name
Item
Table 2 SHELL132 Item and Sequence Numbers for ETABLE and ESOL Command Input
Output Face 1 Face 2 I J K L
Quantity Item Bottom Top Corners
Name
AREA NMISC 1 7 -- -- -- --
HFAVG NMISC 2 8 -- -- -- --
TAVG NMISC 3 9 -- -- -- --
TBAVG NMISC 4 10 -- -- -- --
HEAT RATE NMISC 5 11 -- -- -- --
HFLXAVG NMISC 6 12 -- -- -- --
THICKNESS NMISC -- -- 37 38 39 40

• Zero area elements are not allowed. This occurs most frequently when the element is not numbered
properly.
• Zero thickness layers are not allowed.
• A triangular element may be formed by defining duplicate K, L, and O node numbers as described in
Degenerated Shape Elements (p. 39).
• Midside nodes may not be dropped.
• The cut boundary interpolation command (CBDOF) does not work with this element.
• When using thermal contact, the TEMP degree of freedom must be present (KEYOPT(3) = 2 or KEYOPT(6)
= 1).
• There should not be a large variation in the ratio of through-thickness conductivity (KZZ) to layer
thickness for all layers within the element. If the highest and lowest values for this ratio differ by a large
factor (for example, 1e5), then the results for the element may be unreliable.
• No check is made to ensure either that the number of layers between adjacent elements match or that
the effective location of a degree of freedom (for example, TE7 from a 10 layer element) between ele-
ments sharing the same node is the same to a tolerance. If this is a concern, study the area using the
/ESHAPE command. For cases where the layering intentionally changes, such as at a joint or at the
runout of a tapered layer, use constraint equations (CE family of commands) with or without double
nodes to connect the two sides.
• This element may not be used with THOPT,QUASI if convection or radiation surfaces are present.
SHELL132
• This element may not be used with the /EFACET command for PowerGraphics displays.
• The program removes all imposed degrees of freedom and nodal loads (i.e., internally issues DDELE,all,all
and FDELE,all,all commands) when elements that use TTOP, TBOT, etc. as degrees of freedom:
– are defined or redefined using the ET or KEYOPT commands.
– are changed (or deleted) using the ET, ETCHG, or ETDELE commands to an element type that does
not use these degrees of freedom.
If your model contained SHELL132 elements with D and F loads, and you deleted these elements
via ETDELE, the D and F loads will automatically be deleted and reapplied to the new DOF list.
You do, however, need to check other loads and verify if they need to be deleted and reapplied.

ANSYS Professional
ANSYS ED
• Section definitions are not allowed if more than one material is referenced.
FLUID136
3-D Squeeze Film Fluid Element
MP ME <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS

FLUID136 models viscous fluid flow behavior in small gaps between fixed surfaces and structures
moving perpendicular to the fixed surfaces. The element behavior is based on the Reynolds squeeze
film theory and the theory of rarefied gases. As such, it is limited to structures with lateral dimensions
much greater than the gap size. In addition, the pressure change must be small relative to the ambient
pressure, and any viscous heating is neglected. FLUID136 is particularly applicable to modeling squeeze-
film effects in microstructures. However, it can also model thin-film fluid behavior in macrostructures.
As a fluid-only element (PRES dof ), the element can be used to determine the stiffening and damping
effects that a fluid exerts on a moving structure by applying a known normal velocity. The velocity
normal to the element surface is specified as a body force. If the velocity of the moving surface is not
known, FLUID136 can determine the fluid response from the eigenmodes of the structure using the
Modal Projection Method.
FLUID136 is applicable to static, harmonic, and transient analyses. A static analysis is used to determine
the damping effects for low operating frequencies where fluid stiffening effects are negligible. A har-
monic analysis is used to determine the fluid stiffening and damping effects for high operating frequen-
cies where fluid stiffening effects are not negligible. A transient analysis is used to determine the fluid
stiffening and damping effects for non-harmonic loadings. The Modal Projection Method can also be
used to extract frequency-dependent damping ratios for use with the MDAMP and DMPRAT commands;
and Alpha and Beta damping parameters for use with the ALPHAD and BETAD commands.
As a fluid-structure element (PRES, UX, UY, UZ), the element can be combined with solid structural
elements in a coupled-field solution where pressure effects are computed from the structure's motion.
In this mode, the element is applicable to a static or transient analysis. Compressibility options are
available when considering large displacements and/or large pressure changes. Contact options are
also available when the structural degrees of freedom are active in order to model opening and closing
contact conditions.
FLUID136 can be used to model three different flow regimes: continuum theory, high Knudsen number,
and high Knudsen number with accommodation factors.
See FLUID136 in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for more details about this element.
FLUID136 Input Data

The element is defined by four corner nodes with an option to include mid-side nodes (KEYOPT(2) =
1). The element should be oriented such that the element normal is pointing toward the fluid domain.
If solid elements are used for the structural domain, the fluid element normal vector is automatically
computed. If necessary, the fluid element normal vector can be flipped using ENSYM.
FLUID136
L L
O
P
K K
I I N
K, L M J K, L, O
Z J
P N
I J
I J
X M
KEYOPT (1) specifies the flow regime. The Knudsen number can be calculated from the mean free fluid
path at a reference pressure, the operating or absolute pressure, and the gap.
For a PRES degree of freedom (KEYOPT(3) = 0) and a linearized Reynolds equation (KEYOPT(4) = 0 or
2),
Kn = (MFP*PREF) / (PAMB*GAP)
For PRES, UX, UY, UZ degrees of freedom (KEYOPT(3) = 1 or 2) and a nonlinear Reynolds equation
(KEYOPT(4) = 1),
Kn = (MFP*PREF) / (Pabs*GAP) if Pabs > minpabs
Kn = (MFP*PREF) / (minpabs*GAP) if Pabs < minpabs
where:
Pabs = PAMB + PRES

minpabs = minimum absolute pressure determined by real constant MINPABSF
For continuum theory to be valid (KEYOPT(1) = 0), the Knudsen number should be less than 0.01. If the
Knudsen number is greater than 0.01 (KEYOPT(1) = 1 or 2), the dynamic viscosity is adjusted to account
for the slip flow boundary. See Flow Regime Considerations in the Fluids Analysis Guide for a complete
discussion of flow regimes and calculation of the Knudsen number.
The type of reflection of the gas molecules at the wall interface is specified using accommodation
factors. Squeeze film models assume diffuse reflection of the gas molecules at the wall interface (accom-
modation factor = 1). This assumption is valid for most metals, but is less accurate for micromachined
surfaces, particularly those fabricated from silicon. Materials, such as silicon, cause specular reflection.
Typical accommodation factors for silicon are between 0.80 and 0.90.
KEYOPT (3) sets the element degrees of freedom. Setting KEYOPT (3) to 1 or 2 activates the displacement
degrees of freedom. When displacement DOFs are active both fluidic and mechanical contact pressures
can be generated. FLUID136 can only be used for static and transient analyses when the displacement
DOFs are activated.
FLUID136
If KEYOPT(5) = 2, the element is ignored from a fluid pressure standpoint when the fluid gap goes below
a specified minimum fluid gap (fluid_mingap). If KEYOPT(6) = 1 or 2, mechanical contact pressure is
applied to a structure if the fluid height goes below a specified minimum mechanical gap (mech_mingap).
For the fluid-only option (PRES dof ), the fluid velocity normal to the surface may be specified using
nodal or element loading with the FLUE body load label on the BF or BFE commands. If FLUID136 is
used in conjunction with the Modal Projection Method, the fluid velocities are obtained from the
modal displacements and applied using the DMPEXT command.

Nodes
I, J, K, L (KEYOPT(2) = 0)
I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P (KEYOPT(2) = 1)
Degrees of Freedom
See KEYOPT(3)
Real Constants
See Table 1: FLUID136 Real Constants (p. 517).
Material Properties
VISC - dynamic viscosity
Surface Loads
None
Body Loads
FLUE (velocity) (For KEYOPT(3) = 0 only)
Special Features
None
KEYOPT(1)
Continuous flow options
0 --
Continuum theory
1 --
High Knudsen numbers (greater than 0.01)
2 --
High Knudsen numbers and accommodation factors
KEYOPT(2)
Element geometry
0 --
Four node element
1 --
Eight node element (not available if KEYOPT(3) = 1 or 2)
KEYOPT(3)
Degrees of Freedom
0 --
PRES (Valid for static, harmonic, and transient analyses.)
FLUID136
1 --
PRES, UX, UY, UZ - explicit treatment of cross-coupling terms. Produces a symmetric matrix. Valid for
static and transient analyses only. Convergence issues may be experienced if the fluid gap approaches
zero.
2 --
PRES, UX, UY, UZ - implicit treatment of cross-coupling terms. Produces an unsymmetric matrix.
Valid for static and transient analyses only.
KEYOPT(4)
Compressibility. If PRES is the only degree of freedom (KEYOPT(3) = 0), the compressible linearized
Reynold equation is used (KEYOPT(4) = 0). The following are valid when degrees of freedom are PRES,
UX, UY, and UZ (KEYOPT(3) = 1 or 2).
0 --
Compressible linearized Reynolds equation. (large displacement and small pressure changes)
1 --
Compressible nonlinear Reynolds equation. (large displacement and large pressure changes)
2 --
Incompressible linearized Reynolds equation. (large displacement and small pressure changes)
For more information on the linearized Reynolds equation, refer to Flow Between Flat Surfaces in
the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference.
KEYOPT(5)
If the element gap goes below fluid_mingap:
0 --
Trap it as an error.
1 --
Reset it to fluid_mingap.
2 --
Ignore this element from a fluid pressure standpoint. This element is considered dead from a fluids
standpoint. However, for postprocessing, a fluid pressure can be specified. See real constants PENP
and SPRES.
For KEYOPT(5) = 1 or 2, mechanical contact may be included by KEYOPT(6) or TARGE170 and CON-
TA174 elements.
If the element gap is above fluid_mingap, fluid pressure is applied on the structure.
KEYOPT(6)
If the element gap goes below mech_mingap:
0 --
Do not apply mechanical contact pressure on the structure. This element is considered mechanically
dead.
1 --
Apply mechanical contact pressure on the structure using the penalty method. Specify a stiffness
parameter (real constant STIFFP). Damping is input by real constant DAMPP and it defaults to zero.
FLUID136
2 --
Apply mechanical contact pressure on the structure using the augmented Lagrangian method. Specify
an initial stiffness (real constant STIFFP) and a penetration tolerance (real constant MPTF). Damping
is input by real constant DAMPP and it defaults to zero.
The fluid environment is defined by the following set of real constants.

1 GAP Element gap separation
2 blank —
3 blank —
4 PAMB Ambient (i.e., surrounding) pressure
5 ACF1 Accommodation factor for top moving sur-
face.
6 ACF2 Accommodation factor for bottom fixed
surface.
7 PREF Reference pressure for the mean free fluid
path
8 MFP Mean free fluid path at reference pressure
PREF
9 GAPX Gap vector global Cartesian component X
10 GAPY Gap vector global Cartesian component Y
11 GAPZ Gap vector global Cartesian component Z
12 MMGF mech_mingapf (minimum mechanical gap
as a fraction of GAP)
13 FMGF fluid_mingapf (minimum fluid gap as a
fraction of GAP)
14 PENP Penalty parameter for fluid dead element
(KEYOPT(5) = 2)
15 SPRES Specified pressure for fluid dead element
(KEYOPT(5) = 2)
16 STIFFP Stiffness parameter for mechanical contact
(KEYOPT(6) = 1 or 2)
17 DAMPP Damping parameter for mechanical contact
(KEYOPT(6) = 1 or 2)
18 MPTF mech_pen_tolf (KEYOPT(6) = 2) (mechanical
penetration tolerance as a fraction of
mech_mingap)
19 MINPABSF minpabsf (minimum absolute pressure as a
fraction of Pamb)
For continuum theory (KEYOPT(1) = 1), GAP and PAMB must be specified.
FLUID136
For high Knudsen numbers (KEYOPT(1) = 1), GAP, PAMB, PREF, and MFP must be specified. PREF and
MFP are used to adjust the dynamic viscosity. ACF1 and ACF2 are assumed to be 1.
For high Knudsen numbers with accommodation factors (KEYOPT(1) = 2), GAP, PAMB, PREF, MFP, ACF1,
and ACF2 must be specified. Different accommodation factors may be specified for each surface.
For small deflections, GAP is assumed to be constant. For the fluid-only option (PRES dof ) and large
deflections, GAP can be updated using SETFGAP.
Real constants GAPX, GAPY, and GAPZ are the unit vector components of the normal gap vector g in
the global Cartesian system (see figure below).
Figure 2 Moving Structure with Thin Film of FLUID136 Elements
U derlyi g slid
FLUID136 eleme ts
do z
g
x
Real constants FMGF and MMGF determine the minimum fluid gap (fluid_mingap) and minimum
mechanical gap (mech_mingap) as shown below:
Figure 3 Minimum Fluid and Minimum Mechanical Gaps
ch_v c
M v u fac
ap
ch_ap
fu_ap
u fac
GAP*G G > 0

= 
 G G < 0
()+,--(. "/ --(. > 2

!"#$%& ' 
 --(. "/ --(. < 2
FLUID136
Real constant MPTF determines the mechanical penetration tolerance as shown below:
Figure 4 Mechanical Penetration
mech_pen_tol Mechanical penetration

mech_mingap
* PTF f PTF > 0

=  PTF f PTF < 0

Figure 5 Fluid Penetration
ud
ud
Real constant MINPABSFA determines the minimum absolute pressure as shown below. The minimum
absolute pressure is used in the definition of Knudson number.
"'() #$IN"ABS% & $IN"ABS% > +
bs!  $IN"ABS% & $IN"ABS% < +

Stiffness is input by real constant STIFFP and it is typically large. Damping is input by real constant
DAMPP and it is typically zero.


A general description of solution output is given in Table 2: FLUID136 Element Output Definitions (p. 520).
FLUID136
available.

Name Definition O R
PRES Pressure change with regard to ambient temperature Y
PG (X, Y, Z) Mid-surface fluid velocity Y Y
AREA: Area Y Y
FLUE Velocity (normal to surface) Y Y
SNORMAL(YX, Y, Components of unit surface normal n - -
Z)Y
VELC(X, Y, Z) Components of mechanical velocity at centroid - -
DISPC(X, Y, Z) Components of displacement at centroid - -
PRESC Fluid pressure at centroid - -
GAPDIR(X, Y, Z) Components of gap vector g - -
FLUIDDEAD Fluid alive or dead (1 = alive; 0 = dead) - -
FLUIDPEN Fluid penetration - -
MECHDEAD Mechanical alive or dead (1 = alive; 0 = dead) - -
MECHPEN Mechanical penetration at centroid - -
STIFF Element stiffness - -
CONTPRES Contact pressure at centroid - -
KN Knudsen number - -
Contact pressure is computed as an element centroidal quantity:
CONTPRES= STIFFP*mech_penetration + DAMPP*mech_velocity
Name
Item
FLUID136
E

ETABLE and
Name Input
Item E
Effective viscosity NMISC 1
GAP NMISC 2
KEYOPT(3) = 1 or 2
AREA NMISC 3
SNORMALX NMISC 4
SNORMALY NMISC 5
SNORMALZ NMISC 6
VELCX NMISC 7
VELCX NMISC 8
VELCX NMISC 9
DISPCX NMISC 10
DISPCY NMISC 11
DISPCZ NMISC 12
PRESC NMISC 13
(Zero if KEY-
OPT(5) = 2)
GAPDIRCX NMISC 14
GAPDIRCY NMISC 15
GAPDIRCZ NMISC 16
FLUIDDEAD NMISC 17
(0 if KEYOPT(5) =
2)
(1 if KEYOPT(5) ≠
2)
FLUIDPEN NMISC 18
(0 if KEYOPT(5) ≠
2)
MECHDEAD NMISC 19
(0 if KEYOPT(6) =
0)
FLUID136
ETABLE and
Name Input
Item E
(1 if KEYOPT(6) ≠
0)
MECHPEN NMISC 20
(0 if KEYOPT(6) =
0)
STIFF NMISC 21
(0 if KEYOPT(6) =
0)
CONTPRES NMISC 22
(0 if KEYOPT(6) =
0)
KN NMISC 23

• Knudsen numbers larger than 880 are not supported.
• The gas flow is assumed to be isothermal.
• The fluid gap is small compared to the lateral width of the underlying structure.
• The element assumes isothermal viscous flow. All the fluid properties are at a constant temperature
(TUNIF) within a load step, even if you specify material properties with temperature dependencies (using
MP). See Squeeze Film Theory in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for more information on the
governing equations.

FLUID138
3-D Viscous Fluid Link Element
MP ME <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS

FLUID138 models the viscous fluid flow behavior through short channels (i.e., holes) in microstructures
moving perpendicular to fixed surfaces. FLUID138 can be used in conjunction with FLUID136 elements
to determine the stiffening and damping effects that the fluid exerts on the moving perforated micro-
structure.
FLUID138 assumes isothermal flow at low Reynolds numbers. The channel length must be small relative
to the acoustic wave length, and the pressure change must be small relative to the ambient pressure.
FLUID138 accounts for gas rarefaction effects and fringe effects due to the short channel length.
As with FLUID136, FLUID138 is applicable to static, harmonic, and transient analyses. FLUID138 can be
used to model two different flow regimes: continuum theory and high Knudsen number.
In contrast to FLUID116, this element is more accurate for channels of rectangular cross section, allows
channel dimensions to be small compared to the mean free path, allows modeling of evacuated systems,
and considers fringe effects at the inlet and outlet. These effects can considerably increase the damping
force in the case of short channel length. See FLUID138 - 3-D Viscous Fluid Link Element in the Mechan-
ical APDL Theory Reference for more details about this element.
FLUID138 Input Data

The element is defined by two nodes. The I node is located at the center of the cross-section of the
hole region on the same plane as the nodes used to model the squeeze film fluid region (FLUID136
elements). The J node is located at the opposite face of the structure through the channel depth.
J KEYOPT(3) = 0 KEYOPT(3) = 1
DIM1
DIM2

DIM1
X
Z
KEYOPT(1) specifies the flow regime. The Knudsen number can be calculated from the mean free fluid
path at a reference pressure, the operating pressure, and the lateral dimensions.
Kn = (MFP*PREF) / (PAMB*DIM)
FLUID138
For rectangular channels, DIM is the smallest lateral dimension. For circular channels, DIM is the radius.
For continuum theory to be valid (KEYOPT(1) = 0), the Knudsen number should be less than 0.01. If the
Knudsen number is greater than 0.01 (KEYOPT(1) = 1 or 2), the dynamic viscosity is adjusted to account
for the slip flow boundary.
The fluid environment is defined by a set of real constants:
For rectangular channels, DIM1 and DIM2 specify the lateral dimensions of the channel. For circular
channels, DIM1 specifies the radius of the channel and DIM2 is not used, PAMB specifies the ambient
(i.e., surrounding) pressure, PREF specifies the reference pressure for the mean free fluid path, and MFP
specifies the mean free fluid path at reference pressure PREF.
For continuum theory (KEYOPT(1) = 1), DIM1, DIM2 (if rectangular channel), and PAMB must be specified.
For high Knudsen numbers (KEYOPT(1) = 1), DIM1, DIM2 (if rectangular channel), PAMB, PREF and MFP
must be specified. PREF and MFP are used to adjust the dynamic viscosity.
FLUID138 does not support any loadings. To preserve the pressure drop through the hole, the PRES
degree of freedom for the nodes of the FLUID136 elements at the periphery of the hole must be coupled
to the PRES degree of freedom for node I of the FLUID138 element representing the hole, and the
pressure degree of freedom for node J must be set to the surrounding ambient pressure.

Nodes
I, J
Degrees of Freedom
PRES
Real Constants
DIM1, DIM2, (blank), PAMB, (blank), (blank),
PREF, MFP
Material Properties
Surface Loads
None
Body Loads
None
Special Features
None
KEYOPT(1)
0 --
Continuum theory
1 --
High Knudsen numbers
FLUID138
KEYOPT(3)
Cross section definition
0 --
Circular cross section
1 --
Rectangular cross section


available.

Name Definition O R
PRES Pressure change with regard to ambient pressure Y
VOL Volume Y Y
FLUE Fluences Y Y
LENGTH Channel Length Y Y
AREA Area Y Y
PRES (I, J) P1 at node I, P2 at node J Y Y
FLOW Flow rate Y
VELOCITY Average velocity Y
FLUID138
Name
Item
E

ETABLE and
Name Input
Item E
Effective length NMISC 2
Fluid resistance NMISC 3
Cross sectional area NMISC 4

• Knudsen numbers larger than 880 are not supported.
• The gas flow is assumed to be isothermal.
• The pressure change must be small compared to ambient pressure.
• The element assumes isothermal viscous flow. All the fluid properties are at a constant temperature
(TUNIF) within a load step, even if you specify material properties with temperature dependencies (using
MP). See Squeeze Film Theory in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for more information on the

FLUID139
3-D Slide Film Fluid Element
MP ME <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS

FLUID139 is a uniaxial element which models the fluid behavior between a sliding surface and a fixed
wall. The viscous flow between surfaces is represented by a series connection of mass-damper elements
whereby each node corresponds to a local fluid layer. The element has applications for modeling the
fluid damping effects in microsystems such as comb drive fingers, large horizontally moving plates in
seismic devices, etc. The element can be used in conjunction with other elements to model complete
structural-fluid damping interaction, or stand-alone to add damping effects in a lumped sense to a
structure. For low frequency applications, Couette flow assumptions is used. At higher frequencies where
inertial effects become important, Stokes flow theory is used. First and second order slip flow models
can be activated for systems which operate at high Knudsen numbers. The element is applicable to
large deflection cases where the surface area exposed to a fixed wall changes with displacement (such
as in comb fingers). See FLUID139 in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for more details about this
element.
FLUID139 Input Data

The element is defined by two nodes. The I node is connected to the first "wall" and the J (or I+32)
node is attached to the second "wall". Either wall may be constrained from moving, or both walls may
move with respect to one another.
FLUID139
KEYOPT(2)=0 and KEYOPT(3)=0
First wall Second wall
TK
I J
Node I Node J

TK
I I+1 I+2 I+3 I+29 I+30 I+31 I+32
Node I Node J
I+32 = J

TK Lm
I I+1 I+2 I+3 I+29 I+30 I+31 I+32
Node I Node J
The 2-node option (KEYOPT(2) = 0) is recommended for systems which operate at frequencies below
the cut-off frequency.
The 32-node option (KEYOPT(2) = 1) is necessary for Stokes flow models where only a small fluid layer
at the wall is accelerated due to fluid inertia. For the 32 node option (KEYOPT(2) = 1), the first node is
node I, and the 32nd node is node J. The intermediate node numbers (2-31) must be defined, but their
location may be arbitrary. The geometric location of node I and J is not important as their separation
distance is computed from the real constant gap separation GAP.
The fluid environment is defined by the real constants.
Gap is the local gap separation (i.e., width of fluid domain). AREA is the surface area. DADU is the change
in the overlap area with respect to the surface displacement. That is, DADU is the first derivative of
AREA with respect to displacement. If the surface area is constant, then DADU is the width of the
overlap surface. PAMB is the ambient (i.e., surrounding) pressure. PREF is the reference pressure for
which the mean free path of the fluid is defined. MFP is the mean free path of the fluid at PREF.
FLUID139 can be used to model continuous flow or slip flow boundary conditions. If the Knudsen
number is less than 0.01, then continuous flow boundary conditions are valid. If the Knudsen number
is greater than 0.01, but not near 1, then first order slip flow boundary conditions are valid. If the
FLUID139
Knudsen number is near 1, then extended slip flow boundary conditions are valid. KEYOPT(3) is used
to specify fluid blow boundary conditions. KEYOPT(3) = 0 specifies continuous flow. KEYOPT(3) = 1
specifies first order slip flow boundary conditions. KEYOPT(3) = 2 specifies extended slip flow boundary
conditions. See Flow Regime Considerations in the Fluids Analysis Guide for a complete discussion of
flow regimes and calculation of the Knudsen number.
FLUID139 can be loaded by nodal displacements at the interface nodes using the D command or by
nodal forces using the F command. A combination of FLUID139 and structural elements allows a simul-
taneous fluid-structure domain simulation.

Nodes
I, J (KEYOPT(2) = 0)
I, J, node 32 (KEYOPT(2) = 1)
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, UZ (Depending on KEYOPT(1))
Real Constants
GAP, AREA, DADU, PAMB, (blank), (blank)
PREF, MFP
Material Properties
DENS - density

Surface Loads
None
Body Loads
None
Special Features
None
KEYOPT(1)
Operating Directions
0,1 --
x-direction (UX DOF)
2 --
y-direction (UY DOF)
3 --
z-direction (UZ DOF)
KEYOPT(2)
Flow model
0 --
2-node element (Couette flow)
1 --
32-node element (Stokes flow)
FLUID139
KEYOPT(3)
0 --
Continuum theory
1 --
First order slip flow
2 --
Extended slip flow theory


available.

Name Definition O R
VOL Volume Y Y
GAP Gap separation Y Y
AREA Area Y Y
PRES (I, J) P1 at node I, P2 at node J Y Y
Name
FLUID139
Item
E

ETABLE and
Name Input
Item E
GAP NMISC 2
AREA NMISC 3

The element assumes isothermal viscous flow. All the fluid properties are at a constant temperature
(TUNIF) within a load step, even if you specify material properties with temperature dependencies
(using MP). See Slide Film Theory in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for more information on the
This element cannot be used in a distributed solution.

FLUID141
2-D Fluid-Thermal
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> FL <> <> <> PP <> <> <>

Although this legacy element is available for use in your analysis, ANSYS recommends using the ANSYS CFX-
Flo product instead.
You can use FLUID141 to model transient or steady state fluid/thermal systems that involve fluid and/or
non-fluid regions. The conservation equations for viscous fluid flow and energy are solved in the fluid
region, while only the energy equation is solved in the non-fluid region. Use this FLOTRAN CFD element
to solve for flow and temperature distributions within a region, as opposed to elements that model a
network of one-dimensional regions hooked together (such as FLUID116). You can also use FLUID141
in a fluid-solid interaction analysis. See FLUID141 in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for more
For the FLOTRAN CFD elements, the velocities are obtained from the conservation of momentum principle,
and the pressure is obtained from the conservation of mass principle. (The temperature, if required, is
obtained from the law of conservation of energy.) A segregated sequential solver algorithm is used;
that is, the matrix system derived from the finite element discretization of the governing equation for
each degree of freedom is solved separately. The flow problem is nonlinear and the governing equations
are coupled together. The sequential solution of all the governing equations, combined with the update
of any temperature- or pressure-dependent properties, constitutes a global iteration. The number of
global iterations required to achieve a converged solution may vary considerably, depending on the
size and stability of the problem. Transport equations are solved for the mass fractions of up to six
species.
You can solve the system of equations in a constant angular velocity rotating coordinate system. The
degrees of freedom are velocities, pressure, and temperature. Two turbulence quantities, the turbulent
kinetic energy and the turbulent kinetic energy dissipation rate, are calculated if you invoke an optional
turbulence model. For axisymmetric models, you can calculate an optional swirl - velocity VZ normal to
the plane. You also can specify swirl at the inlet or a boundary (moving wall).
3
L K
K, L
4
I
Y
(or axial) J
I
1 J Tngu Optn
X (or radial)
FLUID141
FLUID141 Input Data

Figure 1 (p. 533) shows the geometry, node locations, and the coordinate system for this element. The
element is defined by three nodes (triangle) or four nodes (quadrilateral) and by isotropic material
properties. The coordinate system is selected according to the value of KEYOPT(3), and may be either
Cartesian, axisymmetric, or polar.
Nodal Loading (p. 49) describes element loads. For a fluid-solid interaction analysis, you can apply a
fluid-solid interaction flag using the SF family of commands (SF, SFA, SFE, or SFL) and the FSIN surface
load label. You must also apply the same interface number to the solid interface where load transfer
takes place. See Sequentially Coupled Physics Analysis in the Coupled-Field Analysis Guide for more in-
formation on the use of the fluid-solid interaction flag.
The Fluids Analysis Guide includes a discussion of which ANSYS commands are unavailable or inappro-
priate for FLUID141.
FLUID141 Fluid Elements

If the material number [MAT] of a FLUID141 element is 1, it is assumed to be a fluid element. Its prop-
erties - density, viscosity, thermal conductivity and specific heat - are defined with a series of FLDATA
commands. You can analyze only one fluid, and it must be in a single phase. Thermal conductivity and
specific heat are relevant (and necessary) only if the problem is thermal in nature. The properties can
be a function of temperature through relationships specified by the FLDATA7,PROT command or
through a property database (the file floprp.ans). In addition, the density may vary with pressure
(per the ideal gas law) if the fluid is specified to be air or a gas.
Six turbulence models are available. You can activate turbulence modeling with the
FLDATA1,SOLU,TURB,T command. The Standard k-ε Model and the Zero Equation Turbulence Model
are available along with four extensions of the Standard k-ε Model. See Turbulence in the Mechanical
APDL Theory Reference and Turbulence Models in the Fluids Analysis Guide for more information on the
models.
KEYOPT(1) activates multiple species transport, which allows you to track the transport of up to six different
fluids (species) in the main fluid. KEYOPT(4) allows you to use displacement DOFs to specify motion of
boundaries when using the Arbitrary Lagrangian-Eulerian (ALE) formulation.
Real constants, shown in Table 1: FLUID141 Real Constants (p. 537), are required only if a distributed resist-
ance ("FLUID141 Distributed Resistance" (p. 534)), a fan model ("FLUID141 Fan Model" (p. 535)), a wall
roughness ("FLUID141 Wall Roughness" (p. 535)), or an ALE formulation is to be included.
FLUID141 Distributed Resistance

A distributed resistance provides a convenient way to approximate the effect of porous media (such as
a filter) or other such flow domain features without actually modeling the geometry of those features.
It is an artificially imposed, unrecoverable loss associated with geometry not explicitly modeled. Any
fluid element with a distributed resistance will have a real constant set number [REAL] greater than 1
assigned to it.
The resistance to flow, modeled as a distributed resistance, may be due to one or a combination of
these factors: a localized head loss (K), a friction factor (f ), or a permeability (C). The total pressure
gradient is the sum of these three terms, as shown below for the X direction.
FLUID141
∂
= − ρ x + ρ + µ x
∂ resis tan ce h
where:
ρ = is the density (mass/length3)

µ = is the viscosity (mass/(length*time))
RE = is the local value of the Reynolds Number (calculated by the program): RE = (ρ V Dh) / µ
f = is a friction coefficient (calculated by the program): f = a RE-b
C = is the FLOTRAN permeability (1/length2). FLOTRAN permeability is the inverse of the intrinsic
or physical permeability.
If large gradients exist in the velocity field within a distributed resistance region, you should deactivate
the turbulence model by setting ENKE to 0 and ENDS to 1.0 in this region.
Non-Newtonian viscosity models also are available for this element. Currently, ANSYS provides a Power
Law model, a Bingham model, and a Carreau model.
In addition, ANSYS provides a user-definable subroutine to compute viscosity. Viscosity of the Mechan-
ical APDL Theory Reference and Using User-Programmable Subroutines in the Fluids Analysis Guide describe
these models and how to use them. The subroutine, called UserVisLaw, is documented in the Guide to
ANSYS User Programmable Features.
FLUID141 Fan Model

The fan model provides a convenient way to approximate the effect of a fan or pump in the flow domain.
It is an artificially imposed momentum source that provides momentum source terms associated with
a fan or a pump not explicitly modeled.
The pressure rise associated with a fan model is given by the pressure gradient times the flow length
through the elements with the fan model real constants. For a one-directional fan model, (real constant
TYPE = 4), three coefficients are input. The pressure gradient can be treated as a quadratic function of
velocity, as shown below for the X direction.
∂ 2
= 1+ 2 + 3
∂ f
V is the fluid velocity and C1, C2, and C3 are the coefficients specified as real constants. For an arbitrary
direction fan model (real constant TYPE = 5), the three coefficients are the components of the actual
coefficients along a coordinate direction. See also the Fluids Analysis Guide.
FLUID141 Wall Roughness

The FLOTRAN default condition is smooth walls. For information on applying roughness values, see
Flow Boundary Conditions in the Fluids Analysis Guide.
FLUID141 Non-Fluid Elements

If the material number [MAT] of the element is greater than 1, it is assumed to be a non-fluid element.
Only the energy equation is solved in the non-fluid elements. You can define up to 100 different non-
FLUID141
fluid materials. To specify density, specific heat, and thermal conductivity for the non-fluid elements,
use the MP command. Temperature variation of the non-fluid properties is permitted, and you specify
it via the MP or MPDATA commands. Orthotropic variation also is permitted, with the restriction that
the spatial variation is always with respect to the global coordinate system. Note that element real
constants have no meaning for non-fluid FLUID141 elements.
"FLUID141 Input Summary" (p. 536) summarizes the element input. Element Input (p. 43) gives a general
description of element input. For axisymmetric applications see Harmonic Axisymmetric Elements (p. 76).

Nodes
I, J, K, L
Degrees of Freedom
VX, VY, VZ, PRES, TEMP, ENKE, ENDS
Real Constants
See Table 1: FLUID141 Real Constants (p. 537)
Material Properties
Non-fluid: KXX, KYY, C, DENS

Fluid: Density, viscosity, thermal conductivity, specific heat (use FLDATA commands) or MPTEMP
and MPDATA.
Surface Loads
HFLUX, CONV, RAD, RDSF, FSIN
Body Loads
HGEN, FORC
Special Features
Nonlinear
KEYOPT(1)
Number of species:
0 --
Species transport is not activated.
2 - 6 --
Number of species transport equations to be solved.
KEYOPT(3)
0 --
Cartesian coordinates (default)
1 --
Axisymmetric about Y-axis
2 --
Axisymmetric about X-axis
3 --
Polar Coordinates
FLUID141
KEYOPT(4)
Support mesh displacement DOFs:
0 --
Do not include displacement DOFs.
1 --
Include displacement DOFs (UX and UY).

No. Name Definition and Type no. Units
1 TYPE Type of distributed resistance or fan model:
1 = Distributed resistance: isotropic -
2 = Distributed resistance: one-directional -
3 = Distributed resistance: direction-dependent -
4 = Fan model: aligned with a coordinate axis -
5 = Fan model: arbitrary direction -
2 (Blank) 1, 2, 3 - Not used -
DIR 4 - Fan orientation: 1 = X, 2 = Y, 3 = Z -
(Blank) 5 - Not Used -
3 K 1, 2 - Dimensionless head loss / length 1/L
Kx 3 - Head loss in X direction 1/L
C1 4 - Constant term M/L2t2
C1x 5 - Vector component of C1 in X direction M/L2t2
4 C 1, 2 - Permeability 1/L2
Cx 3 - Permeability in X direction 1/L2
C2 4 - Linear coefficient M/L3t
C2x 5 - Vector component of C2 in X direction M/L3t
5 Dh 1, 2 - Hydraulic diameter L
Dhx 3 - Hydraulic diameter in X direction L
C3 4 - Quadratic coefficient M/L4
C3x 5 - Vector component of C3 in X direction M/L4
6 a 1, 2 - Coefficient of Reynolds number, used in fric- -
tion factor calculations
ax 3 - Coefficient a in X direction -
(Blank) 4, 5 - Not Used -
7 b 1, 2 - Exponent of Reynolds number, used in friction -
factor calculations
bx 3 - Exponent b in X direction -
8 (Blank) 1 - Not Used -
FLDIR 2 - Flow direction: 1 = X, 2 = Y, 3 = Z -
FLUID141

Ky 3 - Head loss in Y direction 1/L
C1y 5 - Vector component of C1 in Y direction M/L2t2
9 (Blank) 1, 2 - Not Used -
Cy 3 - Permeability in Y direction 1/L2
C2y 5 - Vector component of C2 in Y direction M/L3t
Dhy 3 - Hydraulic diameter in Y direction L
C3y 5 - Vector component of C3 in Y direction M/L4
ay 3 - Coefficient of Reynolds number in Y direction -
by 3 - Exponent of Reynolds number in Y direction -
Kz 3 - Head loss in Z (swirl) direction 1/L
C1z 5 - Vector component of C1 in Z (swirl) direction M/L2t2
Cz 3 - Permeability in Z (swirl) direction 1/L2
C2z 5 - Vector component of C2 in Z (swirl) direction M/L3t
Dhz 3 - Hydraulic diameter in Z (swirl) direction L
C3z 5 - Vector component of C3 in Z (swirl) direction M/L4
az 3 - Coefficient of Reynolds number in Z (swirl) dir- -
ection
bz 3 - Exponent of Reynolds number in Z (swirl) direc- -
tion
18 BDTOL Element birth/death tolerance L
FLUID141

19 MMFAC Mesh morphing multiplier -
20 Ks Local uniform wall roughness L
21 CKs An empirical dimensionless factor between 0.5 and -
1.0 that specifies the degree of nonuniformity of
the surface.

The solution output associated with the element takes the form of nodal quantities. Additional interme-
diate properties and derived quantities supplement the degrees of freedom. See the Basic Analysis Guide
Table 2: FLUID141 Element Output Definitions (p. 539) describes quantities that are output on a nodal basis.
Some quantities are not output if the relevant options are not activated. Once an option is used, the
relevant DOF quantities are always stored. For example, if a temperature field has been obtained and
upon restart the energy equation is no longer to be solved, the temperatures are stored anyway. You
control the storage of derived properties such as effective viscosity by issuing the FLDATA5,OUTP
command.
The Jobname.PFL file provides additional output. This file contains periodic tabulations of the max-
imum, minimum, and average values of the velocities, pressure, temperature, turbulence quantities,
and properties. The file also records the convergence monitoring parameters calculated at every global
iteration. The Jobname.PFL file also tabulates the mass flow at all the inlets and outlets and the heat
transfer information at all the boundaries.
A wall results file (Jobname.RSW) contains information associated with the boundary faces of wall
elements. Average pressure, temperature, shear stress, Y-plus values and wall heat fluxes are stored,
along with vectors denoting the normal direction from the surface (Normal Vector) and the direction
of the velocity immediately adjacent to the wall (Tangent Vector).
An optional residual file (Jobname.RDF) shows how well the current solution satisfies the implied
matrix equations for each DOF.
A colon (:) in the Name column indicates the item can be accessed by the Component Name method
[ETABLE, ESOL]. The R column indicates the availability of the items in the results file.
A Y in the R column indicates that the item is always available, a number refers to a table footnote that
describes when the item is conditionally available, and a - indicates that the item is not available.

Name Definition R
UX Displacement in the X direction (Cartesian coordinates); Displacement 10
along axis of symmetry (Axisymmetric about X); Displacement in the radial
direction (Axisymmetric about Y)
FLUID141
Name Definition R
UY Displacement in the Y direction (Cartesian coordinates); Displacement 10
along radial direction (Axisymmetric about X); Displacement along the axis
of symmetry (Axisymmetric about Y)
VX: Velocity in the X direction (Cartesian coordinates); Velocity in the radial Y
direction (Polar coordinates); Velocity along axis of symmetry (Axisymmetric
about X); Velocity in the radial direction (Axisymmetric about Y)
VY: Velocity in the Y direction (Cartesian coordinates); Velocity in the tangential Y
direction (Polar coordinates); Velocity in the radial direction (Axisymmetric
about X); Velocity along the axis of symmetry (Axisymmetric about Y)
VZ: Velocity in the swirl direction (Axisymmetric problems) 8
PRES: Relative Pressure Y
ENKE: Turbulent kinetic energy 2
ENDS: Turbulence dissipation rate 2
TEMP: Temperature 1
DENS: Nodal fluid density 8
VISC: Nodal fluid viscosity 8
COND: Nodal fluid thermal conductivity 8
SPHT: Nodal fluid specific heat 8
EVIS: Effective viscosity (includes effects of turbulence) 8
ECON: Effective thermal conductivity (includes the effects of turbulence) 2
CMUV: Turbulent viscosity coefficient 2
TTOT: Stagnation (Total) Temperature (Only relevant to compressible analyses) 7
HFLU: Heat Flux at external surface nodes (per unit area) 1
HFLM: Heat Transfer (film) coefficient at external surface nodes 1
RDFL: Radiation Heat Flux 1
STRM: Stream Function (2-D) Y
MACH: Mach Number (must be requested if incompressible) 6
PTOT: Stagnation (Total) Pressure Y
PCOE: Pressure Coefficient 3
YPLU: Y+ a turbulent law of the wall parameter 3
TAUW: Shear Stress at the wall 3
SP0N: Mass fraction of species N, where N = 1 to 6 (FLOTRAN). If a species is 4
given a user-defined name [MSSPEC], use that name instead of SP0N.
LMDN: Laminar mass diffusion coefficient for species N, where N = 1 to 6. (Not 3
relevant unless species defined.)
EMDN: Effective mass diffusion coefficient for species N, where N = 1 to 6. (Not 2
relevant unless species defined.)
1. Available if thermal is on.

2. Available if turbulence is on.
FLUID141
3. Must be requested.
4. Available if species defined.
5. Available if property is variable.
6. Available if compressible.
7. Available if compressible and thermal.
8. Available if swirl is turned on.
9. For solid material elements in FLOTRAN, when nodes are connected only to solid nodes, the column
for the density (DENS) label within the Jobname.RFL results file, stores the product of the solid ma-
terial's density and its specific heat.
10. Available if KEYOPT(4) = 1.

• You must define the connectivity of an element with the nodes in counterclockwise order.
• The element must lie in the X-Y plane.
• When triangles are formed by duplicating the third node, the FLOTRAN element will ignore the duplicate
node and treat nodes I, J, and K.
• Only linear elements are supported.
• You cannot use FLUID141 with any other ANSYS elements.
• Not all ANSYS commands are relevant to the use of FLUID141. The Fluids Analysis Guide documents
these command usage restrictions.
• FLOTRAN CFD analyses are highly nonlinear.
• In some cases, convergence is difficult to achieve and requires the use of stability and relaxation para-
meters.
• Highly turbulent cases may benefit from preconditioning (the initialization of the flow field with a lam-
inar analysis), particularly if a coarse finite element mesh is being used.
• You must determine if use of the turbulence and/or compressible option is warranted. The turbulence
option requires a fine mesh near the walls and a fine mesh is recommended near any regions where
shock waves occur. If the larger gradients occur in regions with the coarsest mesh, rerun the problems
with adjusted meshes.
• Surface-to-surface radiation (RDSF) is not supported for compressible flow thermal analysis and R-θ and
R-θ-Z coordinate systems.
• The FLOTRAN element must be in counterclockwise order for a 2-D FSI analysis (for Figure 1 (p. 533), I,
J, K, L order) and it must be in positive volume order for a 3-D FSI analysis (for Figure 1 (p. 544), I, J, K,
L, M, N, O order). If the element order is not proper, you will need to recreate the mesh to reverse it.
The following assumptions have been made in the formulation:
• The nodal coordinate system and the global coordinate system must remain the same.
• The problem domain and the finite element mesh may not change during an analysis.
• The fluid is a single phase fluid.
FLUID141
• Non-fluid thermal conductivities can vary with temperature. Orthotropic variation of non-fluid
thermal conductivity also is supported. For more information, see MP, MPDATA, and related
commands in the Command Reference.
• Free surfaces are not permitted.
• The equation of state of gases is the ideal gas law. This is the case regardless of whether the incom-
pressible or compressible algorithm is invoked. The ideal gas law is not valid at Mach numbers
above 5.
• In the incompressible option, work done on the fluid by pressure forces, viscous dissipation, and
kinetic energy terms are neglected in the energy equation. The incompressible energy equation is
a thermal transport equation.
• In the compressible adiabatic case, the stagnation (total) temperature is assumed constant and the
static temperature is calculated from it by subtracting a kinetic energy term.
• Load case operations are not permitted with the FLOTRAN elements.

FLUID142
3-D Fluid-Thermal
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> FL <> <> <> PP <> <> <>

Although this legacy element is available for use in your analysis, ANSYS recommends using the ANSYS CFX-
Flo product instead.
You can use FLUID142 to model transient or steady state fluid/thermal systems that involve fluid and/or
non-fluid regions. The conservation equations for viscous fluid flow and energy are solved in the fluid
region, while only the energy equation is solved in the non-fluid region. Use this FLOTRAN CFD element
to solve for flow and temperature distributions within a region, as opposed to elements that model a
network of one-dimensional regions hooked together (such as FLUID116). You can also use FLUID142
in a fluid-solid interaction analysis. See FLUID142 in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for more
For the FLOTRAN CFD elements, the velocities are obtained from the conservation of momentum principle,
and the pressure is obtained from the conservation of mass principle. (The temperature, if required, is
obtained from the law of conservation of energy.) A segregated sequential solver algorithm is used;
that is, the matrix system derived from the finite element discretization of the governing equation for
each degree of freedom is solved separately. The flow problem is nonlinear and the governing equations
are coupled together. The sequential solution of all the governing equations, combined with the update
of any temperature- or pressure-dependent properties, constitutes a global iteration. The number of
global iterations required to achieve a converged solution may vary considerably, depending on the
size and stability of the problem. Transport equations are solved for the mass fractions of up to six
species.
You can solve the system of equations in a constant angular velocity rotating coordinate system. The
degrees of freedom are velocities, pressure, and temperature. Two turbulence quantities, the turbulent
kinetic energy and the turbulent kinetic energy dissipation rate, are calculated if you invoke an optional
turbulence model.
FLUID142

I
4
5 P
O
T rah ral
6 M O,P
M N
N I K,L
2 3
L J
Wedge Option
K

Z
I 1
Y J
X
ym
FLUID142 Input Data

Figure 1 (p. 544) shows the geometry, node locations, and the coordinate system for this element. The
element is defined by eight nodes and the material properties. A tetrahedral-shaped element may be
formed by defining the same node numbers for nodes M, N, O, and P; and nodes K and L. A wedge-
coordinate system, selected according to the value of KEYOPT(3), may be either Cartesian or cylindrical.
Nodal Loading (p. 49) describes element loads. For a fluid-solid interaction analysis, you can apply a
fluid-solid interaction flag using the SF family of commands (SF, SFA, SFE, or SFL) and the FSIN surface
load label. You must also apply the same interface number to the solid interface where load transfer
takes place. See Sequentially Coupled Physics Analysis in the Coupled-Field Analysis Guide for more in-
formation on the use of the fluid-solid interaction flag.
The Fluids Analysis Guide includes a discussion of which ANSYS commands are unavailable or inappro-
priate for FLUID142.
FLUID142 Fluid Elements

If the material number [MAT] of a FLUID142 element is 1, it is assumed to be a fluid element. You define
its properties - density, viscosity, thermal conductivity and specific heat - with a series of FLDATA
commands. Only one fluid can be analyzed, and it must be in a single phase. Thermal conductivity and
specific heat are relevant (and necessary) only if the problem is thermal in nature. The properties can
be a function of temperature through relationships specified by the FLDATA7,PROT command or
through a property database (the file floprp.ans). In addition, the density may vary with pressure
(per the ideal gas law) if the fluid is specified to be air or a gas.
FLUID142
Six turbulence models are available. You can activate turbulence modeling with the
FLDATA1,SOLU,TURB,T command. The Standard k-ε Model and the Zero Equation Turbulence Model
are available along with four extensions of the Standard k-ε Model. See Turbulence in the Mechanical
APDL Theory Reference and Turbulence Models in the Fluids Analysis Guide for more information on the
models.
KEYOPT(1) activates multiple species transport, which allows you to track the transport of up to six different
fluids (species) in the main fluid. KEYOPT(4) allows you to use displacement DOFs to specify motion of
boundaries when using the Arbitrary Lagrangian-Eulerian (ALE) formulation.
Real constants, shown in Table 1: FLUID142 Real Constants (p. 547), are required only if a distributed resist-
ance ("FLUID142 Distributed Resistance" (p. 545)), a fan model ("FLUID142 Fan Model" (p. 546)), a wall
roughness ("FLUID142 Wall Roughness" (p. 546)), or an ALE formulation is to be included.
FLUID142 Distributed Resistance

A distributed resistance is a convenient way to approximate the effect of porous media (such as a filter)
or other such flow domain features without actually modeling the geometry of those features. It is an
artificially imposed, unrecoverable loss associated with geometry not explicitly modeled. Any fluid element
with a distributed resistance will have a real constant set number greater than 1.
The resistance to flow, modeled as a distributed resistance, may be due to one or a combination of
these factors: a localized head loss (K), a friction factor (f ), or a permeability (C). The total pressure
gradient is the sum of these three terms, as shown below for the X direction.
∂
= − ρ x + ρ + µ x
∂ resis tan ce h
where:
ρ = is the density (mass/length3)

µ = is the viscosity (mass/(length*time))
RE = is the local value of the Reynolds Number (calculated by the program): RE = (ρ V Dh) / µ
f = is a friction coefficient (calculated by the program): f = a RE-b
C = is the FLOTRAN permeability (1/length2). FLOTRAN permeability is the inverse of the intrinsic
or physical permeability.
The ANSYS program also offers non-Newtonian viscosity models for this element. Currently, Power Law,
Bingham, and Carreau models are available.
In addition, ANSYS provides a user-defined subroutine for computing viscosity. Viscosity in the Mechan-
ical APDL Theory Reference and Using User-Programmable Subroutines in the Fluids Analysis Guide describes
these models and how to use them. The Guide to ANSYS User Programmable Features describes how to
use the user-defined subroutine, called UserVisLaw.
If large velocity gradients exist in the velocity field within a distributed resistance region, deactivate
the turbulence model by setting the ENKE DOF to 0 and the ENDS DOF to 1 in this region.
FLUID142
FLUID142 Fan Model

The fan model provides a convenient way to approximate the effect of a fan or pump in the flow domain.
It is an artificially imposed pressure source that provides momentum source terms associated with a
fan or a pump not explicitly modeled.
The pressure rise associated with a fan model is given by the pressure gradient times the flow length
through the elements with the fan model real constants. The pressure gradient can be treated as a
quadratic function of velocity, as shown below for the X direction:
∂ 2
= 1+ 2 x + 3 x
∂ fan
V is the fluid velocity and C1, C2, and C3 are the coefficients specified as real constants. For an arbitrary
direction fan model (real constant TYPE = 5), the three coefficients are the components of the actual
coefficients along a coordinate direction. See also the Fluids Analysis Guide.
FLUID142 Wall Roughness

The FLOTRAN default condition is smooth walls. For information on applying roughness values, see
Flow Boundary Conditions in the Fluids Analysis Guide.
FLUID142 Non-Fluid Elements

If the material number [MAT] of the element is greater than 1, it is assumed to be a non-fluid element.
Only the energy equation is solved in the non-fluid elements. You can define up to 100 different non-
fluid materials. To specify density, specific heat, and thermal conductivity for the non-fluid elements,
issue the MP command. Temperature variation of the non-fluid properties is permitted, and you specify
it using MP or MPDATA. Orthotropic variation also is allowed, with the restriction that the spatial variation
is always with respect to the global coordinate system. Note that element real constants have no
meaning for non-fluid FLUID142 elements.
"FLUID142 Input Summary" (p. 546) summarizes the element input. Element Input (p. 43) gives a general
description of element input.

Nodes
I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P
Degrees of Freedom
VX, VY, VZ, PRES, TEMP, ENKE, ENDS
Real Constants
See Table 1: FLUID142 Real Constants (p. 547)
Material Properties
Non-fluid: KXX, KYY, KZZ, C, DENS

Fluid: Density, viscosity, thermal conductivity, specific heat (use FLDATA commands)
Surface Loads
HFLU, CONV, RAD, RDSF, FSIN
FLUID142
Body Loads
HGEN, FORC
Special Features
Nonlinear
KEYOPT(1)
Number of species:
0 --
Species transport is not activated.
2 - 6 --
Number of species transport equations to be solved.
KEYOPT(3)
0 --
Cartesian coordinates (default)
3 --
Cylindrical coordinates
KEYOPT(4)
Support mesh displacement DOFs:
0 --
Do not include displacement DOFs.
1 --
Include displacement DOFs (UX, UY, and UZ).

1 TYPE Type of distributed resistance or fan model:
1 = Distributed resistance: isotropic -
2 = Distributed resistance: one-directional -
3 = Distributed resistance: direction-dependent -
4 = Fan model: aligned with a coordinate axis -
5 = Fan model: arbitrary direction -
2 (Blank) 1, 2, 3 - Not used -
DIR 4 - Fan orientation: 1 = X, 2 = Y, 3 = Z -
3 K 1, 2 - Dimensionless head loss / length 1/L
Kx 3 - Head loss in X direction 1/L
C1 4 - Constant term M/L2t2
C1x 5 - Vector component of C1 in X direction M/L2t2
4 C 1, 2 - Permeability 1/L2
Cx 3 - Permeability in X direction 1/L2
FLUID142

C2 4 - Linear coefficient M/L3t
C2x 5 - Vector component of C2 in X direction M/L3t
5 Dh 1, 2 - Hydraulic diameter L
Dhx 3 - Hydraulic diameter in X direction L
C3 4 - Quadratic coefficient M/L4
C3x 5 - Vector component of C3 in X direction M/L4
6 a 1, 2 - Coefficient of Reynolds number, used in fric- -
tion factor calculations
ax 3 - Coefficient a in X direction -
7 b 1, 2 - Exponent of Reynolds number, used in friction -
factor calculations
bx 3 - Exponent b in X direction -
8 (Blank) 1 - Not Used -
FLDIR 2 - Flow direction: 1 = X, 2 = Y, 3 = Z -
Ky 3 - Head loss in Y direction 1/L
C1y 5 - Vector component of C1 in Y direction M/L2t2
Cy 3 - Permeability in Y direction 1/L2
C2y 5 - Vector component of C2 in Y direction M/L3t
Dhy 3 - Hydraulic diameter in Y direction L
C3y 5 - Vector component of C3 in Y direction M/L4
ay 3 - Coefficient of Reynolds number in Y direction -
by 3 - Exponent of Reynolds number in Y direction -
Kz 3 - Head loss in Z (swirl) direction 1/L
C1z 5 - Vector component of C1 in Z (swirl) direction M/L2t2
FLUID142

Cz 3 - Permeability in Z (swirl) direction 1/L2
C2z 5 - Vector component of C2 in Z (swirl) direction M/L3t
Dhz 3 - Hydraulic diameter in Z (swirl) direction L
C3z 5 - Vector component of C3 in Z (swirl) direction M/L4
az 3 - Coefficient of Reynolds number in Z (swirl) dir- -
ection
bz 3 - Exponent of Reynolds number in Z (swirl) direc- -
tion
18 BDTOL Element birth/death tolerance L
19 MMFAC Mesh morphing multiplier -
20 Ks Local uniform wall roughness L
21 CKs An empirical dimensionless factor between 0.5 and -
1.0 that specifies the degree of nonuniformity of
the surface.

The solution output associated with the element takes the form of nodal quantities. Additional interme-
diate properties and derived quantities supplement the degrees of freedom. See the Basic Analysis Guide
Table 1: FLUID142 Real Constants (p. 547) describes quantities that are output on a nodal basis. Some
quantities are not output if the relevant options are not activated. Once an option is used, the relevant
DOF quantities are always stored. For example, if a temperature field has been obtained and upon restart
the energy equation is no longer to be solved, the temperatures are stored anyway. You control the
storage of derived properties such as effective viscosity by issuing the FLDATA5,OUTP command.
The Jobname.PFL file provides additional output. This file contains periodic tabulations of the max-
imum, minimum, and average values of the velocities, pressure, temperature, turbulence quantities,
and properties. The file also records the convergence monitoring parameters calculated at every global
iteration. The Jobname.PFL file also tabulates the mass flow at all the inlets and outlets and the heat
transfer information at all the boundaries.
A wall results file (Jobname.RSW) contains information associated with the boundary faces of wall
elements. Average pressure, temperature, shear stress, Y-plus values and wall heat fluxes are stored,
along with vectors denoting the normal direction from the surface (Normal Vector) and the direction
of the velocity immediately adjacent to the wall (Tangent Vector).
FLUID142
An optional residual file (Jobname.RDF) shows how well the current solution satisfies the implied
matrix equations for each DOF.
[ETABLE, ESOL]. The R column indicates the availability of the items in the results file.
A Y in the R column indicates that the item is always available, a number refers to a table footnote that
describes when the item is conditionally available, and a - indicates that the item is not available.

Name Definition R
UX Displacement in the X direction (Cartesian coordinates) 9
UY Displacement in the Y direction (Cartesian coordinates) 9
UZ Displacement in the Z direction (Cartesian coordinates) 9
VX: Velocity in the X direction (Cartesian coordinates); Velocity in the radial Y
direction (Cylindrical coordinates)
VY: Velocity in the Y direction (Cartesian coordinates); Velocity in the tangential Y
VZ: Velocity in the Z direction (Cartesian coordinates); Velocity in the axial Y
PRES: Relative Pressure Y
ENKE: Turbulent kinetic energy 2
ENDS: Turbulence dissipation rate 2
TEMP: Temperature 1
DENS: Nodal fluid density 8
VISC: Nodal fluid viscosity 8
COND: Nodal fluid thermal conductivity 8
SPHT: Nodal fluid specific heat 8
EVIS: Effective viscosity (includes effects of turbulence) 8
ECON: Effective thermal conductivity (includes the effects of turbulence) 2
CMUV: Turbulent viscosity coefficient 2
TTOT: Stagnation (Total) Temperature (Only relevant to compressible analyses) 7
HFLU: Heat Flux at external surfaces nodes (per unit area) 1
HFLM: Heat Transfer (film) coefficient at external surface nodes 1
MACH: Mach Number (must be requested if incompressible) 6
PTOT: Stagnation (Total) Pressure Y
PCOE: Pressure Coefficient 3
YPLU: Y+ a turbulent law of the wall parameter 3
TAUW: Shear Stress at the wall 3
FLUID142
Name Definition R
SP0N: Mass fraction of species N, where N = 1 to 6 (FLOTRAN). If a species is 4
given a user-defined name [MSSPEC], use that name instead of SP0N.
LMDN: Laminar mass diffusion coefficient for species N, where N = 1 to 6. (Only 3
relevant if species defined.)
EMDN: Effective mass diffusion coefficient for species N, where N = 1 to 6. (Only 2
relevant if species defined.)
1. Available if thermal is on.

2. Available if turbulence is on.
3. Must be requested.
4. Available if species defined.
5. Available if compressible.
6. Available if compressible and thermal.
7. For solid material elements in FLOTRAN, when nodes are connected only to solid nodes, the column
for density (DENS) in the Jobname.RFL results file actually stores the product of the solid material's
density and its specific heat.
8. Available if property is variable.
9. Available if KEYOPT(4) = 1.

• The element must not have a negative or a zero volume.
• You must define the connectivity of an element such that the normal defined by the right hand rule
associated with the first four nodes (hexahedral elements) or three nodes (tetrahedral elements) must
point into the element.
• When a tetrahedron is formed by specifying duplicate nodes, the FLOTRAN element will ignore the
duplicate nodes and base the geometry on nodes I, J, K, and M.
• Only linear elements are supported.
• You cannot use FLUID142 with any other ANSYS elements.
• Not all ANSYS commands are relevant to the use of FLUID142. See the Fluids Analysis Guide for a descrip-
tion of the command restrictions.
• FLOTRAN CFD analyses are highly nonlinear.
• In some cases, convergence is difficult to achieve and requires the use of stability and relaxation para-
meters.
• Highly turbulent cases may benefit from preconditioning (the initialization of the flow field with a lam-
inar analysis), particularly if a coarse finite element mesh is being used.
• You must determine if use of the turbulence and/or compressible option is warranted. The turbulence
option requires a fine mesh near the walls and a fine mesh is recommended near any regions where
shock waves occur. If the larger gradients occur in regions with the coarsest mesh, rerun the problems
with adjusted meshes.
• For a flow analysis, especially turbulent, you should not use pyramid elements near the walls because
it may lead to inaccuracies in the solution.
FLUID142
• Surface-to-surface radiation (RDSF) is not supported for compressible flow thermal analysis and R-θ and
R-θ-Z coordinate systems.
• The FLOTRAN element must be in counterclockwise order for a 2-D FSI analysis (for Figure 1 (p. 533), I,
J, K, L order) and it must be in positive volume order for a 3-D FSI analysis (for Figure 1 (p. 544), I, J, K,
L, M, N, O order). If the element order is not proper, you will need to recreate the mesh to reverse it.
The following assumptions have been made in the formulation:
• The nodal coordinate system and the global coordinate system must remain the same.
• The problem domain and the finite element mesh may not change during an analysis.
• The fluid is a single phase fluid.
• Non-fluid thermal conductivities can vary with temperature. Orthotropic variation of non-fluid
thermal conductivity also is supported. For more information, see the descriptions of MP, MPDATA,
and related commands.
• Free surfaces are not permitted.
• The equation of state of gases is the ideal gas law. This is the case regardless of whether the incom-
pressible or compressible algorithm is invoked. The ideal gas law is not valid at Mach numbers
above 5.
• In the incompressible option, work done on the fluid by pressure forces, viscous dissipation, and
kinetic energy terms are neglected in the energy equation. The incompressible energy equation is
a thermal transport equation.
• In the compressible adiabatic case, the stagnation (total) temperature is assumed constant and the
static temperature is calculated from it by subtracting a kinetic energy term.
• Load case operations are not permitted with the FLOTRAN elements.

ROM144
Reduced Order Electrostatic-Structural
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME <>
ROM144 Element Description

ROM144 represents a 2-D or 3-D reduced order model of a coupled electrostatic-structural system. The
element fully couples the electromechanical domains and represents a reduced order model suitable
for use in finite element analysis as well as electromechanical circuit simulations. The element has ten
modal degrees of freedom relating modal forces and modal displacements (EMF), ten voltage degrees
of freedom relating electrical current and potential (VOLT) and, optionally, 10 master nodes relating
nodal forces to nodal displacements (UX). Only nine of the 10 modal degrees of freedom and five of
the 10 voltage degrees of freedom are actually used. The element is suitable for simulating the elec-
tromechanical response of micro-electromechanical devices (MEMS) such as clamped beams, micromirror
actuators, and RF switches.
The element is derived from a series of uncoupled structural and electrostatic domain simulations using
the electrostatic elements (such as PLANE121, SOLID122, SOLID123, and INFIN111) and structural elements
which are compatible with electrostatic elements. The ROM144 element represents a complicated flexible
structure whose nodes move mainly in one direction either X, Y or Z referred to the global Cartesian
axes. For instance, torsional systems with angles less than ten degree or flexible bending of cantilevers
or membranes obey those restrictions (pressure sensors, cantilever for AF microscopy, RF filter). Geomet-
rical nonlinearities caused by stress stiffening or initial prestress are considered as well as multiple
conductor systems. See ROM144 in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for more details about this
element.
Figure 1 ROM144 Schematic
qi Uc
qj Ud
qk Ue
Uf
ql
Ug
qm
Uh
qn Uii
qo Ujj
qp Ukk
qq Ull
Vs Vt Vu Vv Vw
ROM144
ROM144 Input Data

The element is defined by 20 (KEYOPT(1) = 0) or 30 nodes (KEYOPT(1) = 1). A reduced order model file
filename.rom and the appropriate polynomial coefficients for the strain energy and capacitance
functions stored in jobname_ijk.pcs must be available in the working directory. Furthermore, the
model database filename.db and the reduced solution file (.rdsp) generated by the Use Pass are
required to perform an Expansion Pass.
Real constant number 1 (R1) is the element identification number (ID). It is automatically created by
the circuit builder (see Using the Circuit Builder in the Low-Frequency Electromagnetic Analysis Guide),
and is not required input for analysis purposes. The element supports nodal forces F and displacements
D applied at ROM master nodes (21 to 30). The UX degree of freedom must be chosen independent
from the physical direction of the original master node. Electrode current and voltage can be applied
only to the first five active voltage nodes (11–15). Modal displacements may be set by the EMF degree
of freedom using the D command. Element loads defined in the Generation Pass may be scaled and
superimposed by the RMLVSCALE command. ROM144 can be attached to other finite elements such
as COMBIN14 and COMBIN40 at the master DOF. The "reaction force" for the modal displacement degree
of freedom (EMF) is a modal force, labeled CURT, and should be used when defining the solution con-
vergence criteria (CNVTOL command). The "reaction force" for the electric potential degree of freedom
(VOLT) is current, labeled AMPS. The element is compatible with the electric circuit elements CIRCU124
and CIRCU125 and the electromechanical transducer element TRANS126.
Modal damping ratios may be altered by the RMMRANGE command. Save the ROM database before
using the changed data in the Use Pass.
A summary of the element input is given in "ROM144 Input Summary" (p. 554).
ROM144 Input Summary

Nodes
20 nodes if KEYOPT(1) = 0:
I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P, Q, Blank, S, T, U, V, W, Blank, Blank, Blank, Blank, Blank
30 nodes if KEYOPT(1) = 1:
I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P, Q, Blank, S, T, U, V, W, Blank, Blank, Blank, Blank, Blank, C, D, E, F, G, H, II, JJ,

KK, LL
Degrees of Freedom
EMF, VOLT, UX
Real Constants
R1 - Element identification number
Material Properties
None
Surface Loads
via RMLVSCALE command
Body Loads
via RMLVSCALE command
ROM144
Special Features
Nonlinear
Prestress
KEYOPT(1)
Select DOF set:
0 --
No ROM master nodes will be used (default).
1 --
ROM master nodes are used.
KEYOPT(2)
Select matrix option:
0 --
Unsymmetric matrix option (default).
1 --
Symmetric matrix option (must be activated in case of ANTYPE = MODAL).
ROM144 Output Data

• Nodal degrees of freedom included in the overall nodal solution.

• Additional element output as shown in the following table.
Table 1 ROM144 Element Output Definitions

Name Definition
SENG Strain energy
CAP1 First capacitance defined by RMCAP
CAP2 Second capacitance defined by RMCAP
CAP3 Third capacitance defined by RMCAP
CAP4 Forth capacitance defined by RMCAP
CAP5 Fifth capacitance defined by RMCAP
CAP6 Sixth capacitance defined by RMCAP
CAP7 Seventh capacitance defined by RMCAP
CAP8 Eighth capacitance defined by RMCAP
CAP9 Ninth capacitance defined by RMCAP
CAP10 Tenth capacitance defined by RMCAP
Table 2: ROM Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 556) lists output available through the ETABLE command
and The Item and Sequence Number Table in the Element Reference for more information. The following
notation is used in Table 2: ROM Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 556):
Name
output quantity as defined in the Table 1: ROM144 Element Output Definitions (p. 555)
ROM144
Item
E
Table 2 ROM Item and Sequence Numbers
Output Quantity ETABLE and ESOL Command Input

Name Item E
SENG NMISC 1
CAP1 NMISC 2
CAP2 NMISC 3
CAP3 NMISC 4
CAP4 NMISC 5
CAP5 NMISC 6
CAP6 NMISC 7
CAP7 NMISC 8
CAP8 NMISC 9
CAP9 NMISC 10
CAP10 NMISC 11
ROM144 Assumptions and Restrictions

• Modal forces may not be applied to the ROM element.
• Harmonic and modal analyses are valid only for small-signal analyses after a static prestress calculation.
• Using different ROM elements (i.e., based on different ROM database and polynomial coefficient files)
in the same Use Pass is not supported.
ROM144 Product Restrictions

SURF151
SURF151 Element Description

SURF151 may be used for various load and surface effect applications. It may be overlaid onto a face
of any 2-D thermal solid element (except axisymmetric harmonic elements PLANE75 and PLANE78). The
element is applicable to 2-D thermal analyses. Various loads and surface effects may exist simultaneously.
See SURF151 in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for more details about this element.
Figure 1 SURF151 Geometry
(Extra nodes, optional) (Extra nodes, optional)

K L L M
J
J 1
K
1
y x
Y
(or axial) x y
I I
X (or radial)
SURF151 Input Data

The element is defined by two to five node points and the material properties. An extra node (away
from the base element) may be used for convection or radiation effects. Two extra nodes (away from
the base element) may be used to more accurately capture convection effects.
The mass, volume, and heat generation calculations use the in-plane element thicknesses at nodes I
and J (real constants TKI and TKJ, respectively). Thickness TKI defaults to 0.0, and thickness TKJ defaults
to TKI. If KEYOPT(3) = 3, the out-of-plane thickness is input as the real constant TKPS (defaults to 1.0).
The mass calculation uses the density (material property DENS).
See Nodal Loading (p. 49) for a description of element loads. Convections or heat fluxes may be input
as surface loads on the element.
The convection surface conductivity matrix calculation uses the film coefficient (input on the SFE
command with KVAL = 0 and CONV as the label). If the extra node option is used, its temperature becomes
the bulk temperature. If the extra node is not used, the CONV value input with KVAL = 2 becomes the
bulk temperature. The convection surface heat flow vector calculation uses the bulk temperature. On
a given face, either a heat flux or a convection may be specified, but not both simultaneously.
SURF151
For the extra node option (KEYOPT(5) = 1), film effectiveness and free stream temperatures may also
be input for convection surface loads (input on the SFE command with the CONV label and KVAL = 3
and 4, respectively). If film effectiveness is input, bulk temperature is ignored.
Setting KEYOPT(7) = 1 multiplies the evaluated film coefficient by the empirical term ITS-TBIn, where
TS is the element surface temperature, TB is the fluid bulk temperature, and n is an empirical coefficient
(real constant ENN).
If KEYOPT(5) = 1 and flow information is available from FLUID116 with KEYOPT(2) = 1, the bulk temper-
ature may be adjusted to the adiabatic wall temperature using KEYOPT(6) = 1, real constants OMEG
(rotational speed) and NRF (recovery factor), and the logic described in the Mechanical APDL Theory
Reference. For this adjustment, the global Y Cartesian coordinate axis is used as the axis of rotation
(KEYOPT(3) = 1). When using the OMEG real constant, you can specify either numerical values or table
inputs. If specifying table inputs, enclose the table name in % signs (for example, %tabname%). Rota-
tional speed (OMEG) can vary with time and location. Use the *DIM command to dimension the table
and identify the variables. For more information and examples on using table inputs, see Array Parameters
of the ANSYS Parametric Design Language Guide, Applying Loads Using TABLE Type Array Parameters in
the Basic Analysis Guide and Doing a Thermal Analysis Using Tabular Boundary Conditions in the Thermal
Analysis Guide, as well as the description of *DIM in the Command Reference.
A film coefficient specified by the SFE command may be modified by activating the user subroutine
USERCV with the USRCAL command. USERCV may be used to modify the film coefficient of a surface
element with or without an extra node. It may be used if the film coefficient is a function of temperature
and/or location.
If the surface element has an extra node (KEYOPT(5) = 1), the bulk temperature and/or the film coefficient
may be redefined in a general way by user programmable routine USRSURF116. USRSURF116 may be
used if the bulk temperature and/or the film coefficient is a function of fluid properties, velocity and/or
wall temperature. If a bulk temperature is determined by USRSURF116, it overrides any value specified
by SFE or according to KEYOPT(6). Also, if a film coefficient is determined by USRSURF116, it overrides
any values specified by SFE or USRCAL, USERCV. USRSURF116 calculation are activated by modifying
the USRSURF116 subroutine and creating a customized version of ANSYS; there will be no change in
functionality without modifying USRSURF116. For more information, see User-Programmable Features
(UPFs).
Heat generation rates are input on a per unit volume basis and may be input as an element body load
at the nodes, using the BFE command. Element body loads are not applied to other elements connected
at the same nodes. The node I heat generation HG(I) defaults to zero. The node J heat generation defaults
to HG(I). The heat generation load vector calculation uses the heat generation rate values.
As an alternative to using the BFE command, you can specify heat generation rates directly at the nodes
using the BF command. For more information on body loads, see Body Loads in the Basic Analysis Guide.
SURF151 allows for radiation between the surface and the extra node. The emissivity of the surface
(input as material property EMIS for the material number of the element) is used for the radiation surface
conductivity matrix. The form factor FORMF and the Stefan-Boltzmann constant SBCONST are also used
for the radiation surface conductivity matrix. The form factor can be either input as a real constant
(defaults to 1) using KEYOPT(9) = 1 or it can be calculated automatically as a cosine effect using KEYOPT(9)
= 2 or 3. For information on how the cosine effect depends on basic element orientation and the extra
node location, see the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference. There is no distance effect included in the
cosine effect. For axisymmetric analyses, the automatic form factor calculation is used only with the
extra node on the Y-axis. The Stefan-Boltzmann constant defaults to 0.119x10-10 (Btu/hr*in2* °R4).
SURF151
When KEYOPT(4) = 0, an edge with a removed midside node implies that the temperature varies linearly,
rather than parabolically, along that edge. See Quadratic Elements (Midside Nodes) in the Modeling and
Meshing Guide for more information about the use of midside nodes.
If a single PLANE element lies beneath SURF151, you can automatically set the element behavior (plane
stress, axisymmetric, or plane stress with thickness [including TKPS if applicable]) to that of the under-
lying solid element using KEYOPT(3) =10. This option is valid only when a single PLANE element lies
beneath the SURF element. For example, if you apply a SURF151 element over a PLANE77 (thermal)
element whose nodes are also used in the definition of a PLANE183 (structural) element, a warning
appears and the load is not applied to the element.
A summary of the element input is given in "SURF151 Input Summary" (p. 559). A general description of
Elements (p. 76).
SURF151 Input Summary

Nodes
I, J if KEYOPT (4) = 1, and KEYOPT (5) = 0

I, J, K if KEYOPT (4) = 1, and KEYOPT(5) = 1
I, J, K, L if KEYOPT (4) = 1, and KEYOPT(5) = 2
I, J, K if KEYOPT (4) = 0, and KEYOPT(5) = 0
I, J, K, L if KEYOPT (4) = 0, and KEYOPT(5) = 1
I, J, K, L, M if KEYOPT (4) = 0, and KEYOPT(5) = 2
Degrees of Freedom
TEMP
Real Constants
FORMF, SBCONST, (Blank), OMEG, NRF, VABS,

TKI, TKJ, (Blank), (Blank), (Blank), TKPS,
ENN, GC, JC
See Table 1: SURF151 Real Constants (p. 561) for a description of the real constants
Material Properties
DENS (for density)

EMIS (for emissivity, if KEYOPT(9) > 0)
Surface Loads
Convections --
face 1 (I-J) if KEYOPT(8) > 1
Heat Fluxes --
face 1 (I-J) if KEYOPT(8) = 1
Body Loads
Heat Generation --
HG(I), HG(J); also HG(K) if KEYOPT(4) = 0
Special Features
Birth and death
SURF151
KEYOPT(1)
Adiabatic wall temperature option:
0, 1, 2 --
See Adiabatic Wall Temperature as Bulk Temperature for information on these options.
KEYOPT(2)
Recovery factor (FR) option:
0, 1, or 2 --
KEYOPT(3)
Element behavior:
0 --
Plane
1 --
Axisymmetric
3 --
Plane with thickness input (TKPS)
10 --
Use the element behavior--plane, axisymmetric, or plane with thickness input (including TKPS if ap-
plicable)--of the underlying solid element.
KEYOPT(4)
Midside nodes:
0 --
Has midside node (that matches the adjacent solid element)
1 --
No midside node
KEYOPT(5)
Extra node for radiation and/or convection calculations:
0 --
No extra nodes
1 --
Has extra node (optional if KEYOPT(8) > 1; required if KEYOPT(9) > 0)
2 --
Two extra nodes (optional if KEYOPT (8) > 1). Only valid for convection calculations. Use this option if
the bulk temperature is unknown. The extra nodes get bulk temperatures from the two nodes of a
FLUID116 element. This is generally more accurate than the one extra node option.
KEYOPT(6) (used only if KEYOPT(5) = 1 and KEYOPT(8) > 1)
Use of bulk temperatures:
0 --
Extra node temperature used as bulk temperature
1 --
Adiabatic wall temperature used as bulk temperature
KEYOPT(7)
Empirical term:
SURF151
0 --
Do not multiply film coefficient by empirical term.
1 --
Multiply film coefficient by empirical term |TS-TB|n.
KEYOPT(8)
Heat flux and convection loads:
0 --
Ignore heat flux and convection surface loads (if any)
1 --
Include heat flux, ignore convection
Use the following to include convection (ignore heat flux):

2 --
Evaluate film coefficient hf (if any) at average film temperature, (TS +TB)/2
3 --
Evaluate hf at element surface temperature, TS
4 --
Evaluate hf at fluid bulk temperature, TB
5 --
Evaluate hf at differential temperature, | TS - TB |
KEYOPT(9)
Radiation form factor calculation:
0 --
Do not include radiation
1 --
Use radiation with the form factor real constant
2 --
Use radiation with cosine effect computed as an absolute value (ignore real constant)
3 --
Use radiation with cosine effect computed as zero if negative (ignore real constant)
Table 1 SURF151 Real Constants

1 FORMF Form factor
2 SBCONT Stefan-Boltzmann constant
3 (Blank) --
4 OMEGA Angular velocity
5 NRF Recovery factor
6 VABS Absolute value of fluid velocity (KEYOPT(1) = 0)
7 TKI In-plane thickness at node I
8 TKJ In-plane thickness at node J (defaults to TKI)
SURF151

9-11 (Blank) --
12 TKPS Out-of-plane thickness (if KEYOPT(3) = 3)
13 ENN Empirical coefficient
14 GC Gravitational constant used for units consistency
15 JC Joule constant used to convert work units to heat units
SURF151 Output Data


• Additional element output as shown in Table 2: SURF151 Element Output Definitions (p. 562)
Convection heat flux is positive out of the element; applied heat flux is positive into the element. A
general description of solution output is given in Solution Output (p. 50). See the Basic Analysis Guide
available.
Table 2 SURF151 Element Output Definitions

Name Definition O R
SURFACE NODES Nodes - I, J Y Y
EXTRA NODE Extra node (if present) Y Y
VOLU: Volume Y Y
VN(X, Y) Components of unit vector normal to center of ele- - Y
ment
DENSITY Density - 1
MASS Mass of Element - 1
HGEN Heat generations HG(I), HG(J), HG(K) 2 -
HEAT GEN. RATE Heat generation rate over entire element (HGTOT) 2 2
HFLUX Input heat flux at nodes I, J 3 -
SURF151
Name Definition O R
HEAT FLOW RATE Input heat flux heat flow rate over element surface 3 3
area (HFCTOT)
HFILM Film coefficient at each face node 4 4
TBULK Bulk temperature at each face node or temperature 4 4
of extra node
TAVG Average surface temperature 4 4
TAW Adiabatic wall temperature 5 5
RELVEL Relative velocity 5 5
SPHTFL Specific heat of the fluid 5 5
RECFAC Recovery factor 5 5
CONV. HEAT RATE Convection heat flow rate over element surface area 4 4
(HFCTOT)
CONV. HEAT Average convection heat flow rate per unit area 4 -
RATE/AREA
EMISSUR Average emissivity of surface (for element material 6 6
number)
EMISEXT Emissivity of extra node 6 6
TEMPSUR Average temperature of surface 6 6
TEMPEXT Temperature of extra node 6 6
FORM FACTOR Average form factor of element 6 6
RAD. HEAT RATE Radiation heat flow rate over entire element (HRTOT) 6 6
RAD. HEAT Average radiation heat flow rate per unit area 6 -
RATE/AREA
1. If dens > 0
2. If heat generation load is present
3. If KEYOPT(8) = 1
4. If KEYOPT(8) > 1
5. If KEYOPT(6) = 1 and KEYOPT(8) > 1
6. If KEYOPT(9) > 0
Table 3: SURF151 Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 564) lists output available through the ETABLE command
notation is used in Table 3: SURF151 Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 564):
Name
output quantity as defined in Table 2: SURF151 Element Output Definitions (p. 562)
Item
SURF151
E
I,J
Table 3 SURF151 Item and Sequence Numbers
Output ETABLE and

Quant- ESOL Command
ity Input
Name Item E
HGTOT SMISC 1
HFCTOT SMISC 2
HRTOT SMISC 3
AREA NMISC 1
VNX NMISC 2
VNY NMISC 3
HFILM NMISC 5
TAVG NMISC 6
TBULK NMISC 7
TAW NMISC 8
RELVEL NMSC 9
SPHTFL NMSC 10
RECFAC NMSC 11
EMISSUR NMISC 12
EMISEXT NMISC 13
TEMPSUR NMISC 14
TEMPEXT NMISC 15
FORM NMISC 16
FACTOR
DENS NMISC 17
MASS NMISC 18
SURF151 Assumptions and Restrictions

• If KEYOPT(9) > 0 (radiation is used):
– element is nonlinear and requires an iterative solution
– extra node must be present.
– if KEYOPT(4) = 0, midside nodes may not be dropped.
SURF151
SURF151 Product Restrictions

ANSYS Professional
• KEYOPT(3) = 3 is not applicable.

• The TKPS real constant (R12) is not applicable.
• The only allowable material property is EMIS.
• No special features are allowed.
SURF152

SURF152 may be used for various load and surface effect applications. It may be overlaid onto an area
face of any 3-D thermal element. The element is applicable to 3-D thermal analyses. Various loads and
surface effects may exist simultaneously. See SURF152 in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for more
(Extra nodes, optional) (Extra nodes, optional)

Q R M N
1 1
L
O
L
K
P z K
z
y
y
N
I
x
I
Z J
x
M J
Y
X
SURF152 Input Data

The element is defined by four to ten nodes and the material properties. An extra node (away from the
base element) may be used for convection or radiation effects. Two extra nodes (away from the base
element) may be used to more accurately capture convection effects. A triangular element may be
formed by defining duplicate K and L node numbers as described in Degenerated Shape Elements (p. 39).
The element x-axis is parallel to the I-J side of the element.
The mass, volume, and heat-generation calculations use the element thicknesses at node I, J, K, and L
(real constants TKI, TKJ, TKK, and TKL, respectively). Thickness TKI defaults to 0.0, and thicknesses TKJ,
TKK, and TKL default to TKI. The mass calculation uses the density (material property DENS).
See Nodal Loading (p. 49) for a description of element loads. Convections or heat fluxes may be input
as surface loads on the element.
SURF152
The convection surface conductivity matrix calculation uses the film coefficient (input on the SFE
command with KVAL = 0 and CONV as the label). If the extra node is used, its temperature becomes
the bulk temperature. If the extra node is not used, the CONV value input with KVAL = 2 becomes the
bulk temperature. The convection surface heat flow vector calculation uses the bulk temperature. On
a given face, either a heat flux or a convection may be specified, but not both simultaneously.
For the extra node option (KEYOPT(5) = 1), film effectiveness and free stream temperatures may also
be input for convection surface loads (input on the SFE command with the CONV label and KVAL = 3
and 4, respectively). If film effectiveness is input, bulk temperature is ignored.
Setting KEYOPT(7) = 1 multiplies the evaluated film coefficient by the empirical term ITS - TBIn, where
TS is the element surface temperature, TB is the fluid bulk temperature, and n is an empirical coefficient
(real constant ENN).
If KEYOPT(5) = 1 and flow information is available from FLUID116 with KEYOPT(2) = 1, the bulk temper-
ature may be adjusted to the adiabatic wall temperature using KEYOPT(6) = 1, real constants OMEG
(rotational speed) and NRF (recovery factor), and the logic described in the Mechanical APDL Theory
Reference. For this adjustment, the axis of rotation may be defined as the global Cartesian X, Y or Z co-
ordinate axis (KEYOPT(3)). When using the OMEG real constant, you can specify either numerical values
or table inputs. If specifying table inputs, enclose the table name in % signs (for example, %tabname%).
Rotational speed (OMEG) can vary with time and location. Use the *DIM command to dimension the
table and identify the variables. For more information and examples on using table inputs, see Array
Parameters of the ANSYS Parametric Design Language Guide, Applying Loads Using TABLE Type Array
Parameters in the Basic Analysis Guide, and Doing a Thermal Analysis Using Tabular Boundary Conditions
in the Thermal Analysis Guide, as well as the description of the *DIM command in the Command Reference.
A film coefficient specified by the SFE command may be modified by activating the user subroutine
USERCV with the USRCAL command. USERCV may be used to modify the film coefficient of a surface
element with or without an extra node. It may be used if the film coefficient is a function of temperature
and/or location.
If the surface element has an extra node (KEYOPT(5) = 1), the bulk temperature and/or the film coefficient
may be redefined in a general way by user programmable routine USRSURF116. USRSURF116 may be
used if the bulk temperature and/or the film coefficient is a function of fluid properties, velocity and/or
wall temperature. If a bulk temperature is determined by USRSURF116, it overrides any value specified
by SFE or according to KEYOPT(6). Also, if a film coefficient is determined by USRSURF116, it overrides
any values specified by SFE or USRCAL, USERCV. USRSURF116 calculation are activated by modifying
the USRSURF116 subroutine and creating a customized version of ANSYS; there will be no change in
functionality without modifying USRSURF116. For more information, see User-Programmable Features
(UPFs).
Heat generation rates are input on a per unit volume basis and may be input as an element body load
at the nodes, using the BFE command. Element body loads are not applied to other elements connected
at the same nodes. The node I heat generation HG(I) defaults to zero. If all other heat generations are
unspecified, they default to HG(I). If all corner node heat generations are specified, each midside node
heat generation defaults to the average heat generation of its adjacent corner nodes. For any other
input heat generation pattern, unspecified heat generations default to zero. The heat generation load
vector calculation uses the heat generation rate values.
As an alternative to using the BFE command, you can specify heat generation rates directly at the nodes
using the BF command. For more information on body loads, see Body Loads in the Basic Analysis Guide.
SURF152
SURF152 allows for radiation between the surface and the extra node. The emissivity of the surface
(input as material property EMIS for the material number of the element) is used for the radiation surface
conductivity matrix. The form factor FORMF and the Stefan-Boltzmann constant SBCONST are also used
for the radiation surface conductivity matrix. The form factor can be either input as a real constant
(defaults to 1) using KEYOPT(9) = 1 or it can be calculated automatically as a cosine effect using KEYOPT(9)
= 2 or 3. For information on how the cosine effect depends on basic element orientation and the extra
node location, see the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference. There is no distance effect included in the
cosine effect. The Stefan-Boltzmann constant defaults to 0.119x10-10 (Btu/hr*in2* °R4)).
When KEYOPT(4) = 0, an edge with a removed midside node implies that the temperature varies linearly,

Nodes
I, J, K, L if KEYOPT (4) = 1 and KEYOPT (5) = 0

I, J, K, L, M if KEYOPT (4) = 1 and KEYOPT (5) = 1
I, J, K, L, M, N if KEYOPT (4) = 1 and KEYOPT (5) = 2
I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P if KEYOPT (4) = 0 and KEYOPT (5) = 0
I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P, Q if KEYOPT (4) = 0 and KEYOPT (5) = 1
I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P, Q, R if KEYOPT (4) = 0 and KEYOPT (5) = 2
Degrees of Freedom
KEYOPT(11) DOF for all nodes except DOF for extra node(s) (KEY-
Setting extra node(s) OPT(5) = 1 or 2)
0 TEMP TEMP
1 TTOP TEMP
2 TBOT TEMP
Real Constants
FORMF, SBCONST, (Blank), OMEG, NRF, VABS,

TKI, TKJ, TKK, TKL, (Blank), (Blank),
ENN, GC, JC
Material Properties
DENS (for density)

EMIS (for emissivity, if KEYOPT(9) > 0)
Surface Loads
Convections --
face 1 (I-J-K-L) if KEYOPT(8) > 1
Heat Fluxes --
face 1 (I-J-K-L) if KEYOPT(8) = 1
SURF152
Body Loads
Heat Generation --
HG(I), HG(J), HG(K), HG(L), and, if KEYOPT(4) = 0, HG(M), HG(N), HG(O), HG(P)
Special Features
Birth and death
KEYOPT(1)
Adiabatic wall temperature option:
0, 1, 2 --
KEYOPT(2)
Recovery factor (FR) option:
0, 1, or 2 --
KEYOPT(3)
Axis of symmetry:
0 --
OMEG used about global Cartesian X-axis
1 --
OMEG used about global Cartesian Y-axis
2 --
OMEG used about global Cartesian Z-axis
KEYOPT(4)
Midside nodes:
0 --
Has midside nodes (that match the adjacent solid element)
1 --
Does not have midside nodes
KEYOPT(5)
Extra nodes:
0 --
No extra nodes. Use this option if the bulk temperature is known.
1 --
One extra node (optional if KEYOPT (8) > 1; required if KEYOPT (9) > 0). Valid for convection and ra-
diation calculations. Use this option if the bulk temperature is unknown. The extra node gets the
bulk temperature from a FLUID116 element.
2 --
Two extra nodes (optional if KEYOPT (8) > 1). Only valid for convection calculations. Use this option
if the bulk temperature is unknown. The extra nodes get bulk temperatures from the two nodes of
a FLUID116 element. This is generally more accurate than the one extra node option.
KEYOPT(6) (used only if KEYOPT(5) = 1 and KEYOPT(8) > 1)
Use of bulk temperature:
0 --
Extra node temperature used as bulk temperature
SURF152
1 --
Adiabatic wall temperature used as bulk temperature
KEYOPT(7)
Empirical term:
0 --
Do not multiply film coefficient by empirical term.
1 --
Multiply film coefficient by empirical term |TS-TB|n.
KEYOPT(8)
Heat flux and convection loads:
0 --
Ignore heat flux and convection surface loads (if any)
1 --
Include heat flux, ignore convection
Use the following to include convection (ignore heat flux):

2 --
Evaluate film coefficient hf (if any) at average film temperature, (TS +TB)/2
3 --
Evaluate hf at element surface temperature, TS
4 --
Evaluate hf at fluid bulk temperature, TB
5 --
Evaluate hf at differential temperature, | TS - TB |
KEYOPT(9)
Radiation form factor calculation:
0 --
Do not include radiation
1 --
Use radiation with the form factor real constant
2 --
Use radiation with cosine effect calculated as an absolute value (ignore real constant)
3 --
Use radiation with cosine effect calculated as zero if negative (ignore real constant)
KEYOPT(11)
Label used for all nodal degrees of freedom (except for the extra node):
0 --
TEMP
1 --
TTOP
2 --
TBOT
SURF152
The extra node, if requested with KEYOPT(5) = 1, is always TEMP.

1 FORMF Form factor
2 SBCONT Stefan-Boltzmann constant
3 (Blank) --
4 OMEGA Angular velocity (KEYOPT(6) = 1)
5 NRF Recovery factor
6 VABS Absolute value of fluid velocity (KEYOPT(1) = 0)
7 TKI Thickness at node I
8 TKJ Thickness at node J (defaults to TKI)
9 TKK Thickness at node K (defaults to TKI)
10 TKL Thickness at node L (defaults to TKI)
11-12 (Blank) --
13 ENN Empirical coefficient
14 GC Gravitational constant used for units consistency
15 JC Joule constant used to convert work units to heat units
SURF152 Output Data


Convection heat flux is positive out of the element; applied heat flux is positive into the element. A
general description of solution output is given in Solution Output (p. 50). See the Basic Analysis Guide
available.

Name Definition O R
SURFACE NODES Nodes - I, J, K, L Y Y
SURF152
Name Definition O R
VOLU: Volume Y Y
VN(X, Y, Z) Components of unit vector normal to center of ele- - Y
ment
DENSITY Density - 1
MASS Mass of element - 1
HGEN Heat generations HG(I), HG(J), HG(K), HG(L), HG(M), 2 -
HG(N), HG(O), HG(P)
HEAT GEN. RATE Heat generation rate over entire element (HGTOT) 2 2
HFLUX Input heat flux at nodes I, J, K, L 3 -
HEAT FLOW RATE Input heat flux heat flow rate over element surface 3 3
area (HFCTOT)
HFILM Film coefficient at each face node 4 4
TBULK Bulk temperature at each face node or temperature 4 4
of extra node
TAVG Average surface temperature 4 4
TAW Adiabatic wall temperature 5 5
RELVEL Relative velocity 5 5
SPHTFL Specific heat of the fluid 5 5
RECFAC Recovery factor 5 5
CONV. HEAT RATE Convection heat flow rate over element surface area 4 4
(HFCTOT)
CONV. HEAT Average convection heat flow rate per unit area 4 -
RATE/AREA
EMISSUR Average emissivity of surface (for element material 6 6
number)
EMISEXT Emissivity of extra node 6 6
TEMPSUR Average temperature of surface 6 6
TEMPEXT Temperature of extra node 6 6
FORM FACTOR Average form factor of element 6 6
RAD. HEAT RATE Radiation heat flow rate over entire element (HRTOT) 6 6
RAD. HEAT Average radiation heat flow rate per unit area 6 -
RATE/AREA
1. If dens > 0
2. If heat generation load is present
3. If KEYOPT(8) = 1
SURF152
4. If KEYOPT(8) > 1
5. If KEYOPT(6) = 1 and KEYOPT(8) > 1
6. If KEYOPT(9) > 0
Name
output quantity as defined in Table 2: SURF152 Element Output Definitions (p. 572)
Item
E
I,J,K,L
Output ETABLE and

Quant- ESOL Command
ity Input
Name Item E
HGTOT SMISC 1
HFCTOT SMISC 2
HRTOT SMISC 3
AREA NMISC 1
VNX NMISC 2
VNY NMISC 3
VNZ NMISC 4
HFILM NMISC 5
TAVG NMISC 6
TBULK NMISC 7
TAW NMISC 8
RELVEL NMISC 9
SPHTFL NMISC 10
RECFAC NMISC 11
EMISSUR NMISC 12
EMISEXT NMISC 13
TEMPSUR NMISC 14
TEMPEXT NMISC 15
SURF152
Output ETABLE and

Quant- ESOL Command
ity Input
Name Item E
FORM NMISC 16
FACTOR
DENS NMISC 17
MASS NMISC 18

• The element must not have a zero area.
• If KEYOPT(9) > 0 (radiation is used):
– element is nonlinear and requires an iterative solution
– extra node must be present.
– if KEYOPT(4) = 0, midside nodes may not be dropped.

ANSYS Professional
• The only allowable material property is EMIS.

SURF153

SURF153 may be used for various load and surface effect applications. It may be overlaid onto a face
of any 2-D structural solid element (except axisymmetric harmonic elements PLANE25, PLANE83, and
FLUID81). The element is applicable to 2-D structural analyses. See SURF153 in the Mechanical APDL
J
J
K
y
x
Y
x
(or a ial) y
I I
X (or radial)
SURF153 Input Data

The element is defined by two or three node points and the material properties. The element x-axis is
along to the I-J line of the element.
The mass and volume calculations use the in-plane element thicknesses at nodes I and J (real constants
TKI and TKJ, respectively). Thickness TKI defaults to 0.0, and thickness TKJ defaults to TKI. If KEYOPT(3)
= 3, the out-of-plane thickness is input as the real constant TKPS (defaults to 1.0). The mass calculation
uses the density (material property DENS, mass per unit volume) and the real constant ADMSUA, the
added mass per unit area.
The stress stiffness matrix and load vector calculations use the in-plane force per unit length (input as
real constant SURT) and the elastic foundation stiffness (input as real constant EFS); the EFS uses pressure-
per-length (or force-per-length-cubed) units. The foundation stiffness can be damped, either by using
the material property BETD as a multiplier on the stiffness or by directly using the material property
VISC.
See Nodal Loading (p. 49) for a description of element loads. Pressures may be input as surface loads
as force-per-length-squared on the element faces as shown by the circled numbers on Figure 2 (p. 578).
SURF153 allows complex pressure loads.
SURF153
Figure 2 Pressures
Local coordinate s stem

1 2 J 2 J
3
3
y
1
x 4 4
I I
Element coordinate s stem
KEYOPT(2) = 0 KEYOPT(2) =
Faces 1 and 2 [KEYOPT(2) = 0] Positive values of pressure on the first two faces act in the positive
element coordinate directions (except for the normal pressure which acts in the negative z direction).
For face 1, positive or negative values may be removed as requested with KEYOPT(6) to simulate the
discontinuity at the free surface of a contained fluid.
Faces 1 and 2 [KEYOPT(2) = 1] Pressure loads are applied to the element faces according to the
local coordinate system as follows: face 1 in the local x direction and face 2 in the local y direction. A
local coordinate system must be defined, and the element must be set to that coordinate system via
the ESYS command; however, the loads specified in that local coordinate system do not follow the
large displacements and/or rotations of the element. KEYOPT(6) does not apply.
Face 3 The magnitude of the pressure at each integration point is PI + XPJ + YPK, where PI through
PK are input as VAL1 through VAL3 on the SFE command, and X and Y are the global Cartesian coordin-
ates at the current location of the point. No input values can be blank. The SFFUN and SFGRAD com-
mands do not work with face 3.
/
Face 4 The magnitude of the pressure is PI, and the direction is + + where i and
j are unit vectors in the global Cartesian directions. The load magnitude can be adjusted with KEYOPTS(11)
and (12). No input values can be blank. When using the SFFUN or SFGRAD commands, the load direction
is not altered, but the load magnitude is the average of the computed corner node magnitudes.
SFCUM,ADD should be used with caution, as this command also causes the load direction components
to be added.
The effects of pressure load stiffness are automatically included for this element for real pressure on
face 1 if KEYOPT(2) = 0 or on face 3. If an unsymmetric matrix is needed for pressure load stiffness effects,
use NROPT,UNSYM.
Temperatures may be input as element body loads at the nodes. Element body load temperatures are
not applied to other elements connected at the same nodes. The node I temperature T(I) defaults to
TUNIF. The node J temperature defaults to T(I). Temperatures are used for material property evaluation
only.
When KEYOPT(4) = 0, a removed midside node implies that the displacement varies linearly, rather than
parabolically. See Quadratic Elements (Midside Nodes) in the Modeling and Meshing Guide for more in-
formation about the use of midside nodes.
SURF153
If a single PLANE element lies beneath SURF153, you can automatically set the element behavior (plane
stress, axisymmetric, or plane stress with thickness [including TKPS if applicable]) to that of the under-
lying solid element using KEYOPT(3) =10. This option is valid only when a single PLANE element lies
beneath the SURF element. For example, if you apply a SURF153 element over a PLANE77 (thermal)
element whose nodes are also used in the definition of a PLANE183 (structural) element, a warning
appears and the load is not applied to the element.
KEYOPT(7) = 1 is useful when the element is used to represent a force. When KEYOPT(7) = 0, the force
is input as a pressure times an area; however, if the area changes due to large deflections, the force
also changes. When KEYOPT(7) = 1, the force remains unchanged even if the area changes.
Elements (p. 76).
If using SURF153 with VTGEOM parameters, see Element Support.

Nodes
I, J if KEYOPT (4) = 1,
I, J, K if KEYOPT(4) = 0
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY
Real Constants
(Blank), (Blank), (Blank), EFS, SURT, ADMSUA,

TKI, TKJ, (Blank), (Blank), (Blank), TKPS
Material Properties
DENS, VISC, ALPD, BETD
Surface Loads
Pressures --
face 1 (I-J) (in -y normal direction)

face 2 (I-J) (in +x tangential direction)
face 3 (I-J) (in -y normal direction, global taper)
face 4 (I-J) (oriented by input vector)
Body Loads
Temperatures --
T(I), T(J); also T(K) if KEYOPT(4) = 0
Special Features
Birth and death

Large deflection
Linear perturbation
Stress stiffening
SURF153
KEYOPT(2)
Pressure applied to faces 1 and 2 according to coordinate system:
0 --
Apply face loads in the element coordinate system
1 --
Apply face loads in the local coordinate system
KEYOPT(3)
Element behavior:
0 --
Plane stress
1 --
Axisymmetric
2 --
Plane strain
3 --
Plane stress with thickness input (TKPS)
5 --
Generalized plane strain
10 --
Use the element behavior--plane stress, axisymmetric, plain strain, plane stress with thickness input
(including TKPS if applicable), or generalized plane strain--of the underlying solid element.
KEYOPT(4)
Midside nodes:
0 --
Has midside node (that matches the adjacent solid element)
1 --
No midside node
KEYOPT(6)
Applicable only to normal direction pressure (faces 1 and 3):
0 --
Use pressures as calculated (positive and negative)
1 --
Use positive pressures only (negative set to zero)
2 --
Use negative pressures only (positive set to zero)
KEYOPT(7)
Loaded area during large-deflection analyses:
0 --
Use new area
1 --
Use original area
KEYOPT(11)
Pressure applied by vector orientation (face 4):
SURF153
0 --
On projected area and includes tangential component
1 --
On projected area and does not include tangential component
2 --
On full area and includes the tangential component
KEYOPT(12)
Effect of the direction of the element normal (element y-axis) on vector-oriented (face 4) pressure:
0 --
Pressure load is applied regardless of the element normal orientation
1 --
Pressure load is not used if the element normal is oriented in the same general direction as the
pressure vector

1 ... 3 (Blank) --
4 EFS Foundation stiffness
5 SURT Surface tension
9 ... 11 (Blank) --
12 TKPS Out-of-plane thickness if KEYOPT(3) = 3 (defaults to 1.0)
SURF153 Output Data


SURF153
available.

Name Definition O R
SURFACE NODES Nodes - I, J Y Y
VOLU: Volume Y Y
VN(X, Y) Components of unit vector normal to center of element - Y
PRES Pressures P1, P2, P3, P4 at nodes I, J 1 -
PY, PX Pressures at nodes in element coordinate system (P4 - 1
uses an average element coordinate system)
AVG. FACE PRESSURE Average normal pressure (P1AVG), Average tangential 1 1
pressure (P2AVG), Average tapered normal pressure
(P3AVG), Effective value of vector oriented pressure
(P4EFF)
DVX, DVY Direction vector of pressure P4 1 1
TEMP Surface temperatures T(I), T(J), T(K) 2 2
DENSITY Density (input as DENS) 3 3
MASS Mass of Element 3 3
FOUNDATION STIFFNESS Foundation Stiffness (input as EFS) 4 4
FOUNDATION PRESSURE Foundation Pressure 4 4
SURFACE TENSION Surface Tension (input as SURT) 5 5
1. If pressure load
2. If temperature load
3. If DENS > 0
4. If EFS > 0
5. If SURT > 0
Name
output quantity as defined in the Table 2: SURF153 Element Output Definitions (p. 582)
SURF153
Item
E
I,J

ETABLE and ESOL Command
Output Quant- Input
ity Name
Item E I J
PY (real) SMISC - 1 2
PX (real) SMISC - 3 4
PY (imaginary) SMISC 27 28
PX (imaginary) SMISC 29 30
P1AVG (real) SMISC 13 - -
P4EFF (real) SMISC 16 - -
P1AVG (imagin- SMISC 39 - -
ary)
ary)
ary)
P4EFF (imagin- SMISC 42 - -
ary)
FOUNPR SMISC 21 - -
AREA NMISC 1 - -
VNX NMISC 2 - -
VNY NMISC 3 - -
EFS NMISC 5 - -
SURT NMISC 6 - -
DENS NMISC 7 - -
MASS NMISC 8 - -
DVX NMISC 9 - -
DVY NMISC 10 - -

SURF153
• The surface tension load vector acts along the line connecting nodes I and J as a force applied to the
nodes seeking to minimize the length of the line. If the nodes of the element are not coplanar when
using surface tension, equilibrium may be lost.
• For structural large deflection analyses, the loads are applied to the current size of the element, not the
initial size.
• Surface printout and foundation stiffness are not valid for elements deactivated [EKILL] and then react-
ivated [EALIVE]. Surface printout does not include large strain effects.

ANSYS Professional
• The only special features allowed are stress stiffening and large deflections.
• The VISC and BETD material properties are not applicable.
ANSYS Structural
• The only allowable material property is DENS.
SURF154

SURF154 may be used for various load and surface effect applications. It may be overlaid onto an area
face of any 3-D element. The element is applicable to 3-D structural analyses. Various loads and surface
effects may exist simultaneously. See SURF154 in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for more details
about this element.
ij K
z
P L
yij ij K
z
N y
yij
Z x
I

Y ij
J
X
SURF154 Input Data

The element is defined by four to eight nodes and the material properties. A triangular element may
be formed by defining duplicate K and L node numbers as described in Degenerated Shape Ele-
ments (p. 39). The default element x-axis is parallel to the I-J side of the element.
The mass and volume calculations use the element thicknesses at nodes I, J, K, and L (real constants
TKI, TKJ, TKK, and TKL, respectively). Thickness TKI defaults to 0.0, and thicknesses TKJ, TKK, and TKL
default to TKI. The mass calculation uses the density (material property DENS, mass per unit volume)
and the real constant ADMSUA, the added mass per unit area.
VISC.
on the element faces as shown by the circled numbers on Figure 2 (p. 586). SURF154 allows complex
pressure loads.
SURF154
Faces 1, 2, and 3 [KEYOPT(2) = 0] Positive values of pressure on the first three faces act in the pos-
itive element coordinate directions (except for the normal pressure which acts in the negative z direction).
For face 1, positive or negative values may be removed as requested with KEYOPT(6) to simulate the
discontinuity at the free surface of a contained fluid. For faces 2 and 3, the direction of the load is
controlled by the element coordinate system; therefore, the ESYS command is normally needed.
Faces 1, 2, and 3 [KEYOPT(2) = 1] Pressure loads are applied to the element faces according to the
local coordinate system, as follows: face 1 in the local x direction, face 2 in the local y direction, and
face 3 in the local z direction. A local coordinate system must be defined, and the element must be set
to that coordinate system via the ESYS command; however, the loads specified in that local coordinate
system do not follow the large displacements and/or rotations of the element. KEYOPT(6) does not apply.
Figure 2 Pressures

1
L 4
K ocal coordinate sstem
z L
y 3
2 4 K
2 1
x 5
I
J I 3
5
Element coordinate sstem
J
EYOPT(2) = 0 EYOPT(2) =
Face 4 The direction is normal to the element and the magnitude of the pressure at each integration
point is PI + XPJ + YPK + ZPL, where PI through PL are input as VAL1 through VAL4 on the SFE command,
and X, Y, Z are the global Cartesian coordinates at the current location of the point. No input values
can be blank. Positive or negative values may be removed as requested with KEYOPT(6) to simulate the
discontinuity at the free surface of a contained fluid. The SFFUN and SFGRAD commands do not work
with face 4.
/
Face 5 The magnitude of the pressure is PI, and the direction is + + + +
where i, j, and k are unit vectors in the global Cartesian directions. The load magnitude may be adjusted
with KEYOPT(11) and KEYOPT(12). No input values can be blank. When using the SFFUN or SFGRAD
commands, the load direction is not altered but the load magnitude is the average of the computed
corner node magnitudes. SFCUM,ADD should be used with caution, as this command also causes the
load direction components to be added.
face 1 if KEYOPT(2) = 0 or on face 4. If an unsymmetric matrix is needed for pressure load stiffness effects,
issue a NROPT,UNSYM command.
Temperatures may be input as element body loads at the nodes. Element body load temperatures are
not applied to other elements connected at the same nodes. The node I temperature T(I) defaults to
TUNIF. If all other temperatures are unspecified, they default to T(I). If all corner node temperatures are
SURF154
specified, each midside node temperature defaults to the average temperature of its adjacent corner
nodes. For any other input temperature pattern, unspecified temperatures default to TUNIF. Temperatures
are used for material property evaluation only.
When KEYOPT(4) = 0, an edge with a removed midside node implies that the displacement varies linearly,
is input as a pressure times an area; however, if the area changes due to large deflections, the force
also changes. When KEYOPT(7) = 1, the force remains unchanged even if the area changes.
KEYOPT(8) > 0 applies ocean loading on the element.
If using SURF154 with VTGEOM parameters, see Element Support.

Nodes
I, J, K, L if KEYOPT (4) = 1
I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P if KEYOPT (4) = 0
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, UZ
Real Constants

TKI, TKJ, TKK, TKL
Material Properties
Surface Loads
Pressures --
face 1 (I-J-K-L) (in -z normal direction)

face 2 (I-J-K-L) (tangential (+x))
face 3 (I-J-K-L) (tangential (+y))
face 4 (I-J-K-L) (in -z normal direction, global taper)
face 5 (I-J-K-L) (oriented by input vector)
Body Loads
Temperatures --
T(I), T(J), T(K), T(L); also T(M), T(N), T(O), T(P) if KEYOPT(4) = 0
Special Features
Birth and death

Large deflection
Linear perturbation
SURF154
Stress stiffening
KEYOPT(2)
Pressure applied to faces 1, 2, and 3 according to coordinate system:
0 --
1 --
KEYOPT(4)
Midside nodes:
0 --
Has midside nodes (that match the adjacent solid element)
1 --
Does not have midside nodes
KEYOPT(6)
Applicable only to normal direction pressure (faces 1 and 4). This KEYOPT is valid only when KEYOPT(2)
= 0.
0 --
Use pressures as calculated (positive and negative)
1 --
Use positive pressures only (negative set to zero)
2 --
Use negative pressures only (positive set to zero)
KEYOPT(7)
0 --
Use new area
1 --
Use original area
KEYOPT(8)
Specifies whether ocean loading is applied:
0 --
No ocean loading (default).
OCID--
Ocean environment ID associated with the ocean loading (hydrodynamic pressures). This option is
valid when KWAVE = 8 or 101+ on the OCDATA command. For KWAVE = 101+, ocean loading is
applied based on user subroutine userPanelHydFor computations, and KEYOPT(8) is the
oceanID value for the subroutine.
KEYOPT(11)
Pressure applied by vector orientation (face 5):
0 --
On projected area and includes tangential component
1 --
On projected area and does not include tangential component
SURF154
2 --
On full area and includes the tangential component
KEYOPT(12)
Effect of the direction of the element normal (element z-axis) on vector oriented (face 5) pressure:
0 --
Pressure load is applied regardless of the element normal orientation
1 --
pressure vector.

1 ... 3 (Blank) --
7 TKI Thickness at node I
8 TKJ Thickness at node J (defaults to TKI)
9 TKK Thickness at node K (defaults to TKI)
10 TKL Thickness at node L (defaults to TKI)
SURF154 Output Data


available.

Name Definition O R
SURFACE NODES Nodes - I, J, K, L Y Y
SURF154
Name Definition O R
VOLU: Volume Y Y
VN(X, Y, Z) Components of unit vector normal to center of element - Y
PRES Pressures P1, P2, P3, P4, P5 at nodes I, J, K, L 2 -
PZ, PX, PY Pressures at nodes in element coordinate system (P5 - 2
uses an average element coordinate system)
DVX, DVY, DVZ Direction vector of pressure P5 2 2
AVERAGE FACE PRES- Average normal pressure (P1AVG) which includes ocean 2 2
SURE pressure if KEYOPT(8) > 1, Average tangential-X pressure
(P2AVG), Average tangential-Y pressure (P3AVG), Aver-
age tapered normal pressure (P4AVG), Effective value
of vector oriented pressure (P5EFF)
AVERAGE OCEAN PRES- Average normal ocean pressure 3 3
SURE
TEMP Surface temperatures T(I), T(J), T(K), T(L), T(M), T(N), T(O), 4 4
T(P)
DENSITY Density 5 5
MASS Mass of element 5 5
FOUNDATION STIFFNESS Foundation Stiffness (input as EFS) 6 6
FOUNDATION PRESSURE Foundation Pressure 6 6
SURFACE TENSION Surface Tension (input as SURT) 7 7
1. Available only at centroid as a *GET item

2. If pressure load
3. Only if KEYOPT(8) > 0
4. If temperature load
5. If dens > 0
6. If EFS > 0
7. If SURT > 0
using the Sequence Number method. See The General Postprocessor (/POST1) of the Basic Analysis
Guide and The Item and Sequence Number Table (p. 52) of this manual for more information. The following
Name
Item
SURF154
E
I,J,K,L

PZ (real) SMISC - 1 2 3 4
PX (real) SMISC - 5 6 7 8
PY (real) SMISC - 9 10 11 12
PZ (imaginary) SMISC - 27 28 29 30
PX (imaginary) SMISC - 31 32 33 34
PY (imaginary) SMISC - 35 36 37 38
P1AVG (real) SMISC 13 - - - -
P5EFF (real) SMISC 17 - - - -
OCEAN PRESS SMISC 18 - - - -
(real)
P1AVG (imagin- SMISC 39 - - - -
ary)
ary)
ary)
ary)
P5EFF (imagin- SMISC 43 - - - -
ary)
OCEAN PRESS SMISC 44 - - - -
(imaginary)
FOUNPR SMISC 21 - - - -
AREA NMISC 1 - - - -
VNX NMISC 2 - - - -
VNY NMISC 3 - - - -
VNZ NMISC 4 - - - -
EFS NMISC 5 - - - -
SURT NMISC 6 - - - -
DENS NMISC 7 - - - -
SURF154

MASS NMISC 8 - - - -
DVX NMISC 9 - - - -
DVY NMISC 10 - - - -
DVZ NMISC 11 - - - -

• The element must not have a zero area.
• The surface-tension load vector acts in the plane of the element as a constant force applied to the
nodes seeking to minimize the area of the surface. If the nodes of the element are not coplanar when
using surface tension, equilibrium may be lost.
• For structural large-deflection analyses, the loads are applied to the current size of the element, not the
initial size.
• Surface printout and foundation stiffness are not valid for elements deactivated (EKILL) and then react-
ivated (EALIVE). Surface printout does not include large strain effects.

ANSYS Professional
• The VISC and BETD material properties are not applicable.
ANSYS Structural
• The only allowable material property is DENS.
SURF156
3-D Structural Surface Line Load Effect

SURF156 may be used for applying line pressure loads on structures. It may be overlaid onto the edge
of any 3-D element. The element is applicable to 3-D structural analyses. Various loads and surface effects
may exist simultaneously. See SURF156 - 3-D Structural Surface Line Load Effect in the Mechanical APDL
x J
y
y
L x K
I
I
z z
SURF156 Input Data

The element is defined by two to four nodes (KEYOPT(4) = 0 or 1). The orientation node lies in the ele-
ment x-z plane and is required for orientation of the element loads. The element x-axis is parallel to
the line connecting nodes I and J of the element.
on the element faces as shown by the circled numbers on Figure 2 (p. 594). SURF156 allows complex
pressure loads. The input units are force per length.
Faces 1, 2, and 3 [KEYOPT(2)]=0 Positive values of pressure on the first three faces act in the positive
element coordinate directions. For faces 2 and 3, the direction of the load is controlled by the element
coordinate system which is oriented via the orientation node; therefore, the ESYS command has no
effect. When using large deflection (NLGEOM,ON), the orientation of the loads may change based on
the new location of the nodes. If the orientation node is on another element that moves, the orientation
node will move with it. If the orientation node is not on another element, the node cannot move.
Faces 1, 2, and 3 [KEYOPT(2)]=1 Pressure loads are applied to the element faces according to the
local coordinate system, as follows: face 1 in the x direction, face 2 in the local y direction, and face 3
in the local z direction. A local coordinate system must be defined, and the element must be set to that
coordinate system via the ESYS command.
SURF156
Figure 2 Pressures
x Local
2 coordinate
6 sstem 6
Element J z 1 J
coordinate 2
1
sstem y
4 4
x 3
I 3
K K
5 z 5
KEYOPT(2) = 0 KEYOPT(2) =
/
Face 4 The magnitude of the pressure is PI, and the direction is + + + +
where i, j, and k are unit vectors in the global Cartesian directions. No input values can be blank. When
using the SFFUN or SFGRAD commands, the load direction is not altered but the load magnitude is
the average of the computed corner node magnitudes. SFCUM,ADD should be used with caution, as
this command also causes the load direction components to be added.
Face 5 The magnitude of the pressure is PI, the load point is node I, and the direction is the element
x-axis.
Face 6 The magnitude of the pressure is PI, the load point is node J, and the direction is the element
negative x-axis.
faces 2 and 3 if KEYOPT(2) = 0. If an unsymmetric matrix is needed for pressure load stiffness effects,
issue a NROPT,UNSYM command.
is input as a pressure times a unit length; however, if the length changes due to large deflections, the
force also changes. When KEYOPT(7) = 1, the force remains unchanged even if the length changes.

Nodes
I, J, K, L, if KEYOPT (4) = 0 and KEYOPT(5) = 0

I, J, K, if KEYOPT (4) = 1 and KEYOPT(5) = 0, or if KEYOPT(4) = 0 and KEYOPT(5) = 1
I, J, if KEYOPT(4) = 1 and KEYOPT(5) = 1
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, UZ
SURF156
Real Constants
None
Material Properties
None
Surface Loads
Pressures --
face 1 (parallel to x direction)

face 2 (parallel to y direction)
face 3 (parallel to z direction)
face 4 (oriented by input vector)
Body Loads
None
Special Features
Large deflection
Linear perturbation
Stress stiffening
KEYOPT(2)
Pressure applied to faces 1, 2, and 3 according to coordinate system:
0 --
1 --
KEYOPT(4)
Midside node:
0 --
Has a midside node
1 --
Does not have a midside node
KEYOPT(5)
Orientation node:
0 --
Has an orientation node
1 --
Does not have an orientation node. Use only for load on face 1 or face 4.
KEYOPT(7)
0 --
Use new area
1 --
Use original area
SURF156
SURF156 Output Data


available.

Name Definition O R
ORIENTATION Orientation node Y Y
NODE
PRESSURES Pressures P1, P2, P3, P4 at nodes I, J 1 -
VECTOR DIRECTION Direction vector of pressure P4 1 1
1. If pressure load
using the Sequence Number method. See The General Postprocessor (/POST1) of the Basic Analysis
Guide and The Item and Sequence Number Table (p. 52) in this manual for more information. The following
Name
Item
E
SURF156
I, J
sequence number for data at nodes I, J

ETABLE and ESOL Command
Output Quantity Name Input
Item E I J
P1 (real) SMISC - 1 2
P4 (real) SMISC 7 - -
P1 (imaginary) SMISC - 8 9
P4 (imaginary) SMISC 14 - -
P4 (real) VECTOR DIREC- NMISC 1-3 - -
TION
P4 (imaginary) VECTOR NMISC 4-6 - -
DIRECTION

• The element must not have a zero length, and the orientation node (when used) cannot be colinear
with nodes I and J.

ANSYS Professional
SHELL157
Thermal-Electric Shell

SHELL157 is a 3-D element having in-plane thermal and electrical conduction capability. The element
has four nodes with two degrees of freedom, temperature and voltage, at each node. The element applies
to a 3-D, steady-state or transient thermal analysis, although the element includes no transient electrical
capacitance or inductance effects. The element requires an iterative solution to include the Joule heating
effect in the thermal solution. See SHELL157 in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for more details
about this element. If no electrical effects are present, the 3-D thermal shell (SHELL131) may be used.
If the model containing the thermal-electrical element is also to be analyzed structurally, replace the
element with an equivalent structural element (such as SHELL181). If both in-plane and transverse
thermal-electric conduction are needed, use a thermal-electric solid element (SOLID226 with KEYOPT(1)
= 110).
zIJ
2 5
K
L
y yIJ
6
4 K,L
Z x

Y xIJ
SHELL157 Input Data

The geometry, node locations, and coordinate systems for this element are shown in Figure 1 (p. 599).
The element is defined by four nodes, four thicknesses, a material direction angle, and the orthotropic
material properties.
The element may have variable thickness. The thickness is assumed to vary smoothly over the area of
the element, with the thickness input at the four nodes. If the element has a constant thickness, you
need to specify only TK(I) . If the thickness is not constant, you must specify all four thicknesses.
system orientation is as described in Coordinate Systems (p. 56). The element x-axis may be rotated by
an angle THETA (in degrees). You can assign the specific heat and density any values for steady-state
solutions. The electrical material property, RSV_, is the resistivity of the material. You can specify the
SHELL157
resistivity, like any other material property, as a function of temperature. Properties not specified default
as described in Linear Material Properties in the Material Reference.
Specify the word VOLT for the Lab variable on the D command and the voltage input for the value.
Specify the word AMPS for the Lab variable on the F command and the current into the node input for
the value.
may be specified as surface loads at the element faces as shown by the circled numbers on Figure
1 (p. 599). Because shell edge convection and flux loads are input on a per-unit-length basis, per-unit-
area quantities must be multiplied by the shell thickness.
Heat generation rates may be specified as element body loads at the nodes. If the node I heat generation
rate HG(I) is input, and all others are unspecified, they default to HG(I). This rate is in addition to the
Joule heat generated by the current flow.
"SHELL157 Input Summary" (p. 600) summarizes the element input. A general description of element input
appears in Element Input (p. 43).

Nodes
I, J, K, L
Degrees of Freedom
TEMP, VOLT
Real Constants
TK(I) - Shell thickness at node I

TK(J) - Shell thickness at node J; defaults to TK(I)
TK(K) - Shell thickness at node K; defaults to TK(I)
TK(L) - Shell thickness at node L; defaults to TK(I)
THETA - Element X-axis rotation
Material Properties
KXX, KYY, DENS, C, ENTH, RSVX, RSVY
Surface Loads
Convection or Heat Flux (but not both) and Radiation (using Lab = RDSF)--
face 1 (I-J-K-L) (bottom, -Z side), face 2 (I-J-K-L) (top, +Z side),

Body Loads
Heat Generations --
Special Features
Birth and death

KEYOPT(2)
SHELL157
0 --
1 --
2 --
3 --
Evaluate at differential temperature, |TS - TB|

• Nodal temperatures and voltages included in the overall nodal solution

Heat flowing out of the element is considered to be positive. The element output directions are parallel
to the element coordinate system. The heat flow and the current flow into the nodes may be printed
with the OUTPR command. The Joule heat generated this substep is used in the temperature distribution
calculated for the next substep. A general description of solution output is given in Solution Output (p. 50).
See The General Postprocessor (POST1) in the Basic Analysis Guide for ways to view results.
available.

Name Definition O R
AREA Convection face area Y Y
TG:X, Y, SUM Thermal gradient components and vector sum Y Y
at centroid
TF:X, Y, SUM Thermal flux (heat flow rate/cross-sectional area) Y Y
EF:X, Y, SUM Component electric fields and vector sum Y Y
JS:X, Y Component current densities Y Y
SHELL157
Name Definition O R
JSSUM Component current density vector sum Y -
JHEAT: Joule heat generation per unit volume Y Y
FACE Face label 1 1
AREA Face area 1 1
HFLXAVG Heat flow rate across face caused by input heat - 1
flux
HEAT Heat flow rate/area across face by convection 1 -
RATE/AREA
HEAT FLUX Heat flux at each node of face 1 -
1. If a surface load is input

Name
Item

Quant- Item FACE FACE FACE FACE FACE FACE
ity 1 2 3 (J-I) 4 (K- 5 (L- 6 (I-L)
Name (BOT) (TOP) J) K)
AREA NMISC 1 7 13 19 25 31
HFAVG NMISC 2 8 14 20 26 32
TAVG NMISC 3 9 15 21 27 33
TBAVG NMISC 4 10 16 22 28 34
HEAT NMISC 5 11 17 23 29 35
RATE
SHELL157

• The element requires an iterative solution for electrical-thermal coupling.
• Zero area elements are not allowed. This occurs most frequently when the elements are not numbered
properly. The element must not taper down to a zero thickness at any corner. A triangular element may
be formed by defining duplicate K and L node numbers as described in Degenerated Shape Ele-
ments (p. 39). The specific heat and enthalpy are evaluated at each integration point to allow for abrupt
changes (such as for melting) within a coarse grid. If a current is specified at the same node that a
voltage is specified, the current is ignored. The electrical and the thermal solutions are coupled through
an iterative procedure.
• No conversion is included between electrical heat units and mechanical heat units. The resistivity may
be divided by a conversion factor, such as 3.415 BTU/Hr per Watt, to get Joule heat in mechanical units.
Current (input and output) should also be converted for consistent units.

ANSYS Professional
ANSYS Emag
• This element has only electric field capability, and does not have thermal capability.
• The element may only be used in a steady-state electric analysis.
• The only valid degree of freedom is VOLT.
• The only allowable material properties are RSVX and RSVY.
• No surface loads or body loads are applicable.
SURF159
General Axisymmetric Surface
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS

Use SURF159 to model axisymmetric solid surface loads acting on general axisymmetric solid elements
(SOLID272 or SOLID273). The element has linear or quadratic displacement behavior on the master
plane and is well suited to modeling irregular meshes on the master plane. It is defined by two or three
nodes on the master plane, and nodes created automatically in the circumferential direction based on
the master plane nodes. The total number of nodes depends on the number of nodal planes (KEYOPT(2)).
The element area between nodal planes is called a facet. Each node has three degrees of freedom:
translations in the nodal x, y and z directions. Various loads and surface effects can exist simultaneously.
In addition to the SURF159 element information provided here, the following topics are available in the
Mechanical APDL Theory Reference:
• SURF159 - General Axisymmetric Surface with 2 or 3 Nodes

• General Axisymmetric Surfaces
For related information (concerning the elements used with SURF159), see General Axisymmetric Ele-
ments (p. 70) in this document.
Figure 1 SURF159 Geometry (KEYOPT(2) = 3)
J2
J1
K2
J3 U z (W)
Uθ(V)
K1
I2
K3 θ
r
I1 U r (U)
I3
SURF159
SURF159 Input Data

The geometry and node locations for this element (when KEYOPT(2) = 3) are shown in Figure 1 (p. 605).
The element input data includes nodes, real constants, and the material properties. The total number
of nodes is the two or three base nodes times the number of nodal planes. (For information about how
Fourier nodes are generated, see the NAXIS command documentation.) SURF159 elements can be
generated via the ESURF command before generating nodes for general axisymmetric element sections
(NAXIS).
The element has the x-axis as normal to the element surface, the y-axis in the meridional direction, and
the z-axis in the circumferential direction.
The mass and volume calculations use the element thicknesses (real constants TKI, and TKJ). Thickness
TKJ defaults to TKI. The mass calculation uses the density (material property DENS, mass per unit volume)
and the real constant ADMSUA, the added mass per unit area.
VISC.
"SURF159 Input Summary" (p. 608) contains a summary of the element input. See Nodal Loading (p. 49)
for a general description of element input.
Pressure Loads
Pressures must be input as element surface loads (as force-per-length squared) on the element faces
as shown by the circled numbers in Figure 2 (p. 607). For SURF159, applying surface loads to the element
(SFE) or nodes (SF) is very different in comparison to the SOLID272 and SOLID273 elements. An SF
command, if issued, applies loads to faces 1 through K only (where K = KEYOPT(2), the number of
nodal planes).
SURF159 allows complex loads.
Defaults for Pressures on Faces 1 through 3K
If the first pressure for a face is specified (SFE) and the other three remain blank, the other three
pressures default to the first.
If values are specified (and perhaps supplemented by the aforementioned default) to the first face
of each of the three face families (1 through K, K+1 through 2K, or 2K+1 to 3K), the same values
are assigned to all other faces around the circumference. (The SFELIST command does not reflect
this defaulting behavior.)
Example 1 To obtain a uniform pressure across the element and around the circumference,
only one specified pressure is necessary on the first face of the face family.
Example 2 To obtain a pressure that tapers in the radial direction and is constant around the
circumference, all four values must be specified on the first face of the face family.
SURF159
Faces 1 through 3K [KEYOPT(3) = 0] Positive values of pressure on these faces act in the positive
element coordinate directions, as follows: faces 1 through K in the element x (normal) direction, faces
K+1 through 2K in the element y (tangent, meridional) direction, and faces 2K+1 through 3K in the
element z (tangent, circumferential) direction. For faces 1 through K, positive or negative values may
be removed as requested via KEYOPT(6) to simulate the discontinuity at the free surface of a contained
fluid. For faces K+1 through 3K, the direction of the load is controlled by the element coordinate system;
therefore, the ESYS command may be needed.
Faces 1 through 3K [KEYOPT(3) = 1] Pressure loads are applied to the element faces according to
the local coordinate system, as follows: faces 1 through K in the local x direction, faces K+1 through 2K
in the local y direction, and faces 2K+1 through 3K in the local z direction. A local coordinate system
must be defined, and the element must be set to that coordinate system via the ESYS command. KEY-
OPT(6) does not apply.
Figure 2 SURF159 Pressures
J1 J1
Default element coordinate system
J3 J3
y K1 2K K1
3K+2 3K+2
K3 z 3K K K3 K
3K+1 I1 3K 3K+1 I1
x 2K
y
I3 I3
KEYOPT(3)=0 KEYOPT(3)=1 x
z
Specified element coordina
where K = KEYOPT (2)
Face 3K+1 The direction is normal to the element and the magnitude of the pressure at each integ-
ration point is PI + XPJ + YPK + ZPL, where PI through PL are input as VAL1 through VAL4 on the SFE
command, and X, Y, Z are the global Cartesian coordinates at the current location of the integration
point. No input values can be blank. Positive or negative values may be removed as requested with
KEYOPT(6) to simulate the discontinuity at the free surface of a contained fluid. The SFFUN and SFGRAD
commands do not work with face 3K+1.
Face 3K+2 The magnitude of the pressure is PI, and the direction is J + K + L + K2 + L2 1/ 2
2
J
where i, j, and k are unit vectors in the global Cartesian directions. The load magnitude may be adjusted
with KEYOPT(11) and KEYOPT(12). No input values can be blank.
Temperatures may be input as element body loads at the nodes. For the nodes on the master plane,
the node I1 temperature T(I1) defaults to TUNIF. If all other temperatures are unspecified, they default
to T(I1). If both corner node temperatures are specified, the midside node temperature defaults to the
average temperature of the adjacent corner nodes. For any other input pattern, unspecified temperatures
SURF159
default to TUNIF. For the nodes generated in the circumferential direction based on the master node,
if all other temperatures are unspecified, they default to the value of their base nodes (T(I1), T(J1), and
T(K1), depending on their location). For any other input pattern, unspecified temperatures default to
TUNIF.
The effects of pressure load stiffness are automatically included for this element. If an unsymmetric
matrix is needed for pressure load stiffness effects, issue a NROPT,UNSYM command. For a geometric
nonlinear analysis when convergence is an issue, use an unsymmetric matrix.

Nodes
I1, J1, K1, I2, J2, K2, . . . , In, Jn, Kn (where n = KEYOPT(2), the number of nodal planes)
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, UZ
Real Constants

TKI, TKJ
Material Properties
Surface Loads
Pressures --
In the following table, K represents the number of nodal planes (specified via KEYOPT(2)):
Pressure Nodes Pressure Load Type

Face KEYOPT(3) = 0 KEYOPT(3) = 1
face 1 J1, I1, I2, J2
face 2 J2, I2, I3, J3
Normal x direction per ESYS
... ...
face K JK, IK, I1, J1
face K+1 J1, I1, I2, J2
face K+2 J2, I2, I3, J3
Meridional tangent y direction per ESYS
... ...
face 2K JK, IK, I1, J1
face 2K+1 J1, I1, I2, J2
face 2K+2 J2, I2, I3, J3 Circumferential tan-
z direction per ESYS
... ... gent
face 3K JK, IK, I1, J1
face 3K+1 All Global taper
face 3K+2 All Oriented vector
SURF159
Body Loads
Temperatures --
T(I1), T(J1), T(K1), T(I2), T(J2), T(K2), . . . , T(In), T(Jn), T(Kn)
Special Features
Birth and death

Large deflection
Stress stiffening
KEYOPT(2)
Number of Fourier nodes in the circumferential direction (that is, the number of nodal planes):
1 --
Axisymmetric deformation (with or without torsion).
3 - 12 --
General 3-D deformation.
This KEYOPT has no default. You must specify a valid value. (0 is not valid.) The value must match
the KEYOPT(2) value of the underlying SOLID272 or SOLID273 element.
For information about specifying the number Fourier nodes, see General Axisymmetric Elements in
this document.
For information about how Fourier nodes are generated, see the NAXIS command documentation.
KEYOPT(3)
Pressure applied to faces 1 through 3K (3 x KEYOPT(2)), according to the coordinate system:
0 --
Apply face loads in the default element coordinate system (for example, the first K faces act normal
to the surface).
1 --
Apply face loads in the specified element coordinate system (for example, the first K faces act in the
x direction as defined via the ESYS command).
KEYOPT(4)
Midside nodes:
0 --
Has midside nodes. Use with SOLID273. This value is the default.
1 --
No midside nodes. Use with SOLID272.
KEYOPT(6)
Applicable only to normal direction pressure (faces 1 through K and 3K+1):
0 --
Use pressures as calculated (positive and negative).
1 --
Use positive pressures only (negative set to zero).
2 --
Use negative pressures only (positive set to zero).
To use KEYOPT(6), KEYOPT(3) must be set to 0.
SURF159
KEYOPT(7)
0 --
Use new area.
1 --
Use original area.
KEYOPT(11)
Pressure applied by vector orientation (face 3K+2):
0 --
On projected area and includes tangential component.
1 --
On projected area and does not include tangential component.
2 --
On full area and includes the tangential component.
KEYOPT(12)
Effect of the direction of the element normal (element x-axis) on vector oriented (face 3K+2) pressure:
0 --
Pressure load is applied regardless of the element normal orientation.
1 --
pressure vector.

1 ... 3 (Blank) --
SURF159 Output Data


To view 3-D mode shapes for a modal or eigenvalue buckling analysis, expand the modes with element
results calculation active (via the MXPAND command's Elcalc = YES option).
SURF159
available.

Name Definition O R
ELEMID Element number Y Y
NODES Nodes - I, J, . . . , K (nodes in master plane) Y Y
NNP Number of nodal planes Y Y
AREA Total area Y Y
VOLU Total volume Y Y
DENS Density Y Y
ADMSUA Added mass per unit area Y Y
MASS Element mass Y Y
EFS Elastic foundation stiffness Y Y
SURT Surface tension Y Y
PRES Pressures Y Y
Table 3: SURF159 Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 611) lists output available through ETABLE using the
Sequence Number method. See Creating an Element Table in the Basic Analysis Guide and The Item and
Sequence Number Table (p. 52) in this document for more information. The following notation is used
in the output table:
Name
Item
predetermined Item label for ETABLE
I1, J1, I2, J2, . . .
sequence number for data at nodes I1, J1, I2, J2, . . .

Output ETABLE and ESOL Command Input (K = KEYOPT(2))
Quantity Item E I1 J1 I2 J2 I3 J3 ... IK JK
Name
P1 SMISC - 2 1 3 4 - - ... - -
P2 SMISC - - - 6 5 7 8 ... - -
... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
PK SMISC - 4K-1 4K - - - - ... 4K-2 4K-3
SURF159
Output ETABLE and ESOL Command Input (K = KEYOPT(2))

Quantity Item E I1 J1 I2 J2 I3 J3 ... IK JK
Name
PK+1 SMISC - 4K+2 4K+1 4K+3 4K+4 - - ... - -
PK+2 SMISC - - - 4K+6 4K+5 4K+7 4K+8 ... - -
... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
P2K SMISC - 8K-1 8K - - - - ... 8K-2 8K-3
P2K+1 SMISC - 8K+2 8K+1 8K+3 8K+4 - - ... - -
P2K+2 SMISC - - - 8K+6 8K+5 8K+7 8K+8 ... - -
... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ...
P3K SMISC - 12K- 12K - - - - ... 12K- 12K-
1 2 3
P3K+1 (mag- SMISC 12K+1 - - - - - - ... - -
nitude)
X gradient SMISC 12K+2 - - - - - - ... - -
Y gradient SMISC 12K+3 - - - - - - ... - -
Z gradient SMISC 12K+4 - - - - - - ... - -
P3K+2 (mag- SMISC 12K+5 - - - - - - ... - -
nitude)
X compon- SMISC 12K+6 - - - - - - ... - -
ent
Y compon- SMISC 12K+7 - - - - - - ... - -
ent
Z compon- SMISC 12K+8 - - - - - - ... - -
ent
The item and sequence numbers shown are for real pressures. Imaginary pressures are
represented in the same way but have 12K+8 added to them.

• The length of the base element must be nonzero.
• The base element must lie on one side of the axisymmetric axis, and the axisymmetric axis must
be on the same plane as the base element (master plane).
• A base element or base node must be associated with one axisymmetric axis (defined via SECTYPE
and SECDATA commands) before generating nodes for general axisymmetric element sections
(NAXIS) or defining an element by node connectivity (E).
• An edge with a removed midside node implies that the displacement varies linearly, rather than
parabolically, along that edge. For more information about the use of midside nodes, see Quadratic
Elements (Midside Nodes) in the Modeling and Meshing Guide.
• You cannot apply a pressure load by applying a surface load to selected areas (SFA).
• The contribution of the element to the mass moment inertia of the whole model is calculated by
element mass multiplied by the square of the coordinates of the elemental centroid. The moment
of inertia may therefore be inaccurate.
SURF159
• The element does not support the expansion pass of a superelement with large rotation.
• Issuing an /ESHAPE,1 command while PowerGraphics is active causes the program to plot the
elements in 3-D and the results on both nodal planes and all integration planes in the circumferential
direction; otherwise, the program plots the elements in 2-D and the results on the master plane.
• You cannot display surface load symbols (/PSF) for this element.
• When listing the surface loads for elements (SFELIST), only information for the first facet is returned.
• When plotting contour values via /ESHAPE,1, expanded SURF159 elements are assigned zeroes;
you should therefore deselect SURF159 elements when plotting results such as stresses and strains.
• In postprocessing, print commands return the nodal plane results only.
• Stress stiffening is always included in geometrically nonlinear analyses (NLGEOM,ON). Prestress
effects can be activated via the PSTRES command.

No product-specific restrictions exist for this element.
LINK160
Explicit 3-D Spar (or Truss)
<> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> DY <> <> <> <>

LINK160 has three degrees of freedom at each node and carries an axial force.
This element is used in explicit dynamic analyses only. Refer to the LS-DYNA Theoretical Manual for more
information.
I
K
L
J
LINK160 Input Data

The geometry and node locations are shown in Figure 1 (p. 615). Node K determines the initial orientation
of the cross section. For this element, you can choose three materials: isotropic elastic, plastic kinematic,
and bilinear kinematic.
The element is defined by nodes I and J in the global coordinate system. Node K defines a plane (with
I and J) containing the element s-axis. The element r-axis runs parallel to the length of the element and
through nodes I and J. Node K is always required to define the element axis system and it must not be
colinear with nodes I and J. The location of node K is used only to initially orient the element.
Use the EDLOAD command to apply nodal loads (displacements, forces, etc.). Also use EDLOAD to
apply loads on rigid bodies. For more information on how to apply loads in an explicit dynamic analysis,
see Loading in the ANSYS LS-DYNA User's Guide.
LINK160

Nodes
I, J, K (K is the orientation node)
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, UZ, VX, VY, VZ, AX, AY, AZ
Note
For explicit dynamics analyses, V (X, Y, Z) refers to nodal velocity, and A (X, Y, Z) refers
to nodal acceleration. Although V (X, Y, Z) and A (X, Y, Z) appear as DOFs, they are not
actually physical DOFs. However, these quantities are computed as DOF solutions and
stored for postprocessing.
Real Constants
Area - Cross-sectional area
Material Properties
EX, NUXY, DENS, ALPD (MP command), BETD (MP command)

RIGID (EDMP command)
BKIN, PLAW (TB command; see Material Models in the ANSYS LS-DYNA User's Guide)
Surface Loads
None
Body Loads
None
Special Features
All nonlinear features allowed for an explicit dynamic analysis.
KEYOPTS
None
LINK160 Output Data

Output data for LINK160 consists of the following: Axial force
To output the data, you must use the ETABLE command. For the ITEM label, specify SMISC. For the
COMP label, specify 1 for axial force. Then, you can use the PRETAB command to print the output data.

• The spar element assumes a straight bar, axially loaded at its ends with uniform properties from end
to end.
• The length of the spar must be greater than zero, so nodes I and J must not be coincident.
• The cross-sectional area must be greater than zero.
• The displacement shape function implies a uniform stress in the spar.
LINK160

BEAM161
Explicit 3-D Beam
<> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> DY <> <> <> <>
BEAM161 Element Description

BEAM161 has several characteristics:
• It is incrementally objective (rigid body rotations do not generate strains), allowing for the treatment
of finite strains that occur in many practical applications.
• It is simple for computational efficiency and robustness.
• It is compatible with the brick elements.
• It includes finite transverse shear strains. However, the added computations needed to retain this
strain component, compared to those for the assumption of no transverse shear strain, are significant.
The Belytschko beam element formulation (KEYOPT(1) = 2, 4, 5) is part of a family of structural finite
elements that use a "co-rotational technique" for treating large rotation.
information.
Figure 1 BEAM161 Geometry
K
r
2
s
1 t
3
I
BEAM161
BEAM161 Input Data

Node K determines the initial orientation of the cross section.
I and J) containing the element s-axis. The element r-axis runs parallel to the centroidal line of the element
and through nodes I and J. Node K is always required to define the element axis system and it must
not be colinear with nodes I and J. The location of node K is used only to initially orient the element.
(For information about orientation nodes and beam meshing, see Meshing Your Solid Model in the
Modeling and Meshing Guide.)
Use the EDLOAD command to apply nodal loads and other load types described below. For detailed
information on how to apply loads in an explicit dynamic analysis, see the ANSYS LS-DYNA User's Guide.
Pressures can be input as surface loads on the element faces as shown by the circled numbers in Figure
1 (p. 619). Note, however, that pressure is actually a traction load applied to the center line of the element.
Use the EDLOAD command to apply the pressure load, and input the pressure as a force per unit length
value. Positive normal pressures act into the element.
Base accelerations and angular velocities in the x, y, and z directions can be applied at the nodes using
the EDLOAD command. To apply these loads, you need to first select the nodes and create a component.
The load is then applied to that component.
You can also use the EDLOAD command to apply loads (displacements, forces, etc.) on rigid bodies.
You can choose from the following materials when working with BEAM161, with the restrictions as
noted:
• Isotropic Elastic
• Bilinear Kinematic (Except KEYOPT(1) = 2)
• Plastic Kinematic (Except KEYOPT(1) = 2)
• Viscoelastic (KEYOPT(1) = 1 only)
• Power Law Plasticity (KEYOPT(1) = 1 only)
• Piecewise Linear Plasticity (KEYOPT(1) = 1 only)
KEYOPT(1) allows you to specify one of four element formulations for BEAM161 (see "BEAM161 Input
Summary" (p. 623)). For details of real constants to be specified for each element formulation, see
Table 1: BEAM161 Real Constants (p. 624).
KEYOPT(2) is valid only with rectangular element formulations (KEYOPT(1) = 0, 1, 4).
The following illustrations show the valid standard beam cross sections when KEYOPT(4)>0, and KEYOPT(5)
= 2 (standard beam cross section).
BEAM161
Figure 2 Standard Beam Cross Sections
= flange idh
f = flange hickne
d = deph
= eb hickne
ref = locaion of reference urface normal o , Hughe-Liu beam only
ref = locaion of reference urface normal o , Hughe-Liu beam only
T : W s T : C s
t t
t
tw
s
tw
t
T : A s T : T s

t
t
t 1 2 3 4 5
tw 1 6
2 s 7
t 3 4 5 tw 8
9
BEAM161
Figure 3 Standard Beam Cross Sections (continued)
Type 5: Rectangular tubing

t
tf 1 2 3
d s 4 5
tw
6 7 8
Type 6: Z-section
tw
tf 1 2 3
4
d 5
6
7 8 9
Type 7: Trapezoidal section

t
tw
1 2 3
d 4 5 6
7 8 9
KEYOPT(5) is not valid when KEYOPT(1) = 2.
A summary of the element input is given in "BEAM161 Input Summary" (p. 623). Additional information
about real constants for this element is provided in Table 1: BEAM161 Real Constants (p. 624). For more
information about this element, see the ANSYS LS-DYNA User's Guide.
BEAM161
BEAM161 Input Summary

Nodes
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, UZ, VX, VY, VZ, AX, AY, AZ, ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ
Note
For explicit dynamics analyses, V(X, Y, Z) refers to nodal velocity, and A(X, Y, Z) refers to
nodal acceleration. Although V(X, Y, Z) and A(X, Y, Z) appear as DOFs, they are not actually
physical DOFs. However, these quantities are computed as DOF solutions and stored for
postprocessing.
Real Constants
See Table 1: BEAM161 Real Constants (p. 624) for a description of the real constants.
Material Properties
EX, NUXY, DENS, ALPD (MP command), BETD (MP command)

RIGID (KEYOPT(1) = 1,2) (EDMP command)
BKIN, EVISC, PLAW (TB command; see Material Models in the ANSYS LS-DYNA User's Guide)
Surface Loads
Pressure --
face 1 (I-J) (+r tangential direction), face 2 (I-J) (-s normal direction), face 3 (I) (-t normal direction)
Body Loads
None
Special Features
KEYOPT(1)
Element formulation:
0, 1 --
Hughes-Liu with cross section integration (default)
2 --
Belytschko-Schwer resultant beam (resultant)
4 --
Belytschko-Schwer full cross section integration
5 --
Belytschko-Schwer circular beam with cross section integration
KEYOPT(2)
Quadrature rule:
1 --
One integration point
0, 2 --
2 x 2 Gauss quadrature (default)
BEAM161
3 --
3 x 3 Gauss quadrature
4 --
3 x 3 Lobatto quadrature
5 --
4 x 4 Gauss quadrature
Note
KEYOPT(2) is valid only with rectangular element formulations (KEYOPT(1) = 0, 1, 4).
KEYOPT(4)
Integration rule for section:
0 --
Standard integration option
n --
User-defined integration rule ID (valid range: 1 to 9999)
KEYOPT(5)
Cross section type:
0 --
Rectangular cross section
1 --
Circular cross section
2 --
Arbitrary cross section (user defined integration rule) or standard beam cross section, if KEYOPT (4)
> 0.
Table 1 BEAM161 Real Constants

No. Name Description Use if...
1 SHRF Shear factor. KEYOPT (1) = 0,1, 4, or
5
Default = 1.0
Recommended for rectangular

sections = 5/6.
2 TS1 Beam thickness in s direction at KEYOPT (1) = 0, 1, or 4
node 1;
KEYOPT (5) = 0 or 2
if KEYOPT (5) = 2, then use for arbit-
rary cross section only.
3 TS2 Beam thickness in s direction at KEYOPT (1) = 0, 1, or 4
node 2;
KEYOPT (5) = 0 or 2
BEAM161

4 TT1 Beam thickness in t direction at KEYOPT (1) = 0, 1, or 4
node 1;
KEYOPT (5) = 0 or 2
5 TT2 Beam thickness in t direction at KEYOPT (1) = 0, 1, or 4
node 2;
KEYOPT (5) = 0 or 2
2 DS1 Beam outer diameter at node KEYOPT (1) = 0, 1, or 5
1[1 (p. 627)]
KEYOPT (4) = 0
KEYOPT (5) = 1
3 DS2 Beam outer diameter at node KEYOPT (1) = 0, 1, or 5
2[1 (p. 627)]
KEYOPT (4) = 0
KEYOPT (5) = 1
4 DT1 Beam inner diameter at node KEYOPT (1) = 0, 1, or 5
1[1 (p. 627)]
KEYOPT (4) = 0
KEYOPT (5) = 1
5 DT2 Beam inner diameter at node KEYOPT (1) = 0, 1, or 5
2[1 (p. 627)]
KEYOPT (4) = 0
KEYOPT (5) = 1
6 NSLOC Location of reference surface nor- KEYOPT (1) = 0, 1, 4, or
mal to s-axis 5
= 1 side at s = 1 KEYOPT (4) = 0
= 0 center
= -1 side at s = -1
7 NTLOC Location of reference surface nor- KEYOPT (1) = 0, 1, 4, or
mal to t-axis 5
= 1 side at t = 1 KEYOPT (4) = 0
= 0 center
= -1 side at t = -1
8 A Cross sectional area KEYOPT (4) = 0
See Figure 4 (p. 628) KEYOPT (1) = 2
BEAM161

9 ISS Moment of inertia about s-axis KEYOPT (4) = 0

10 ITT Moment of inertia about t-axis KEYOPT (4) = 0

11 IRR Polar moment of inertia KEYOPT (4) = 0

12 SA Shear area KEYOPT (4) = 0

13 NIP Number of integration points KEYOPT (4) > 0 and
KEYOPT (5) = 2
See Figure 6 (p. 629)
14 RA Relative area of cross section; that KEYOPT (4) > 0 and
is, the actual cross-sectional area KEYOPT (5) = 2
divided by the area defined by the
product of the specified thickness
in the s direction and the thickness
in the t direction.
See Figure 5 (p. 629).

15 ICST Standard cross section type. KEYOPT (4) >
0[2 (p. 627)] and KEYOPT
Note (5) = 2 (standard cross
section only)
If this type is nonzero,
then NIP and RA should
be zero.
Cross section types are:
1 - W-section
2 - C-section
3 - Angle section
4 - T-section
5 - Rectangular tubing
6 - Z-section
7 - Trapezoidal section
See Figure 2 (p. 621), Figure

3 (p. 622).
16 W Flange width ICST > 0, and NIP = RA
=0
17 TF Flange thickness ICST > 0, and NIP = RA
=0
BEAM161

18 D Depth ICST > 0, and NIP = RA
=0
19 TW Web thickness ICST > 0, and NIP = RA
=0
20 SREF Location of reference surface nor- ICST > 0, and NIP = RA
mal to s =0
Note
If KEYOPT (1) = 1 only
21 TREF Location of reference surface nor- ICST > 0, and NIP = RA

mal to t =0
Note
If KEYOPT (1) = 1 only
22, 25, S(i) s coordinate of integration point KEYOPT (4) > 0

28, ...79
i = 1, NIP (NIP = 20 max)[3 (p. 627)] KEYOPT (5) = 2, arbit-
rary cross section only
NIP > 0, RA > 0, ICST =

0
23, 26, T(i) t coordinate of integration point KEYOPT (4) > 0
29, ...80
i = 1, NIP (NIP = 20 max)[3 (p. 627)] KEYOPT (5) = 2, arbit-
rary cross section only
NIP > 0, RA > 0, ICST =

0
24, 27, WF(i) Weighting factor; that is, the area KEYOPT (4) > 0
30, ...81 associated with the integration
point divided by the actual cross- KEYOPT (5) = 2, arbit-
section area. rary cross section only
i = 1, NIP (NIP = 20 max)[3 (p. 627)] NIP > 0, RA > 0, ICST =

0
See Figure 4 (p. 628)
1. DS1, DS2, DT1, and DT2 are used only if KEYOPT (5) = 1. If KEYOPT (5) = 0 or 2, then use TS1, TS2, TT1,
and TT2.
2. For KEYOPT (5) = 2, standard cross-section type, the integration point ID (KEYOPT (4) > 0) is not used
since NIP = RA = 0. However, you must provide this input in any case.
3. Specify S(i), T(i), and WF(i) for each integration point. For example, for 20 integration points, specify
S(1), T(1), WF(1), S(2), T(2), WF(2), ... S(20), T(20), WF(20).
BEAM161
Figure 4 Properties of Beam Cross Sections for Several Common Cross Sections
s
π4
= = b
r
π 4
=

= = h
t
=π 2 tw
tf

= ≅π 3  
≅  +
≅ π3  
 
= =  
≅ π ≅  +
 
 

≅
+
=
+
=
+

= +

=

=
 
 
≅ −    − 
   

= =
=
BEAM161
Shear area = =µ
Figure 5 Definition of Relative Area for User Defined Integration Rule
s t

A
Rliv =

npu TT1 o TT2 on comm nd
npu T1 o T2 on comm nd
Figure 6 Definition of Integration Points for User Defined Integration Rule
3 4 5
6
7

8
9
0
BEAM161
BEAM161 Output Data

To store output data for this element, you first need to specify the number of integration points for
which you want output data. Use the EDINT,,BEAMIP command during the solution phase of your
analysis to specify the number of integration points. By default, output is written for 4 integration points.
For the resultant beam formulation (KEYOPT(1) = 2), there is no stress output (regardless of the BEAMIP
setting). If you set BEAMIP = 0, no stress output is written for any of the beam elements. In this case,
the beams will not appear in any POST1 plots because the program assumes they are failed elements.
To display the data for BEAM161, you must use the ETABLE command. Then, you can use the PRETAB
command to print the output data. The RSYS command has no effect when postprocessing output for
this element.
The following items are available on the results file.
Table 2 BEAM161 Element Output Definitions

Name Definition
S (r, rs, rt) Stresses
EPEQ Equivalent plastic strain
EPTO Axial strain
MFORr Member force in the element coordinate system, r direction
N (s, t ) Out-of-plane (s, t) shear
M (s, t ) Element (s, t) moments
TORQ Torsional resultant
For each of these output data, one set of values, given at the centroid, is output for the entire beam.
Table 3: BEAM161 Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 631) lists output available through the ETABLE and
ESOL commands using the Sequence Number method. See The General Postprocessor (POST1) in the
Basic Analysis Guide and The Item and Sequence Number Table (p. 52) in this manual for more information.
The following notation is used in Table 3: BEAM161 Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 631):
Name
output quantity as defined in the Table 2: BEAM161 Element Output Definitions (p. 630)
Item
predetermined Item label for ETABLE or ESOL command
E
1st IP
sequence number for the first integration point
BEAM161
nth IP
sequence number for the nth integration point as defined by the EDINT command.
Table 3 BEAM161 Item and Sequence Numbers

ity Name Item E 1st IP nth IP
MFORr SMISC 1 - -
Ns SMISC 2 - -
Nt SMISC 3 - -
Ms SMISC 4 - -
Mt SMISC 5 - -
TORQ SMISC 6 - -
Sr LS - 1 5 x (n-1) +1
Srs LS - 2 5 x (n-1) +2
Srt LS - 3 5 x (n-1) +3
EPEQ LS - 4 5 x (n-1) +4
EPTO LS - 5 5 x (n-1) +5
1. In this table, n refers to the current integration point for which you want output data.
BEAM161 Assumptions and Restrictions

• The beam must not have a zero length.
• The beam can have any open or single-cell closed cross-sectional shape for which the area and moments
of inertia are nonzero.
• Warping torsion is assumed negligible and the warping moment of inertia is not used in the stiffness
computation.
• Warping of the cross section is unconstrained and is the same for all cross-sections; therefore, the tor-
sional rotation of the cross-section is assumed to vary linearly along the length. However, warping is
not applicable to the resultant beam formulation (KEYOPT(1) = 2).
BEAM161 Product Restrictions

PLANE162
<> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> DY <> <> <> <>

PLANE162 is used for modeling 2-D solid structures in ANSYS LS-DYNA. The element can be used either
as a planer or as an axisymmetric element. The element is defined by four nodes having six degrees of
freedom at each node: translations, velocities, and accelerations in the nodal x and y directions. A three-
node triangle option is also available, but not recommended.
The element is used in explicit dynamic analyses only. When using this element, the model must only
contain PLANE162 elements - you cannot mix 2-D and 3-D explicit elements in the same model. Further-
more, all PLANE162 elements in the model must be the same type (plane stress, plane strain, or
axisymmetric). Refer to the LS-DYNA Theoretical Manual for more information.
3
L K
K, L
4
y 2
I
Y
(or axial) I J
x
1 Tngu Optn -
J
X (or radial) nt ecmmene
PLANE162 Input Data

The geometry, node locations, and coordinate system for this element are shown in Figure 1 (p. 633).
Use KEYOPT(3) to specify whether the element is a plane stress, plane strain, or axisymmetric element.
For the axisymmetric option (KEYOPT(3) = 1), you may also use KEYOPT(2) to specify either area or
volume weighted axisymmetric elements.
KEYOPT(5) defines the element continuum treatment. Two different formulations are available: Lagrangian
(default) and Arbitrary Lagrangian-Eulerian (ALE). In addition to setting KEYOPT(5) = 1, you must also
set appropriate parameters on the EDALE and EDGCALE commands in order for the ALE formulation
to take affect. See Arbitrary Lagrangian-Eulerian Formulation in the ANSYS LS-DYNA User's Guide for more
information.
Use the EDLOAD command to apply nodal loads and other types of loads described below. For detailed
information on how to apply loads in an explicit dynamic analysis, see Loading in the ANSYS LS-DYNA
User's Guide. Note that when the axisymmetric option (KEYOPT(3) = 1) is selected and KEYOPT(2) = 0
(area weighted option), nodal loads should be input per unit length of circumference. Likewise, when
KEYOPT(3) = 1 and KEYOPT(2) = 1 (volume weighted option), nodal loads should be input per radian.
PLANE162
Other aspects of axisymmetric elements are covered in Harmonic Axisymmetric Elements (p. 76). Pressures
are always on a 360° basis, irrespective of the KEYOPT(2) setting.
Pressures can be input as surface loads on the element faces (edges) as shown by the circled numbers
in Figure 1 (p. 633). Positive normal pressures act into the element.
Other loads that can be applied using the EDLOAD command include base accelerations and angular
velocities in the x and y directions, and displacements and forces on rigid bodies.
Several types of temperature loading are also available for this element. See Temperature Loading in
the ANSYS LS-DYNA User's Guide.
The material models available to use with this element will depend on the KEYOPT(3) setting. KEYOPT(3)
controls whether the element is a plane stress, plane strain, or axisymmetric element. For all three of
these options (KEYOPT(3) = 0, 1, or 2), you can choose the following materials:
• Orthotropic Elastic
• Elastic Fluid
• Viscoelastic
• Bilinear Isotropic
• Temperature Dependent Bilinear Isotropic
• Bilinear Kinematic
• Plastic Kinematic
• Power Law Plasticity
• Rate Sensitive Power Law Plasticity
• Strain Rate Dependent Plasticity
• Piecewise Linear Plasticity
• Composite Damage
• Johnson-Cook Plasticity
• Bamman
For the plane stress option (KEYOPT(3) = 0), you can also choose the following materials:
• 3-Parameter Barlat Plasticity

• Barlat Anisotropic Plasticity
• Transversely Anisotropic Elastic Plastic
• Transversely Anisotropic FLD
For the axisymmetric and plane strain options (KEYOPT(3) = 1 or 2), you can also choose the following
materials:
• Blatz-Ko Rubber
• Mooney-Rivlin Rubber
• Elastic-Plastic Hydrodynamic
PLANE162
• Closed Cell Foam

• Low Density Foam
• Crushable Foam
• Honeycomb
• Null
• Zerilli-Armstrong
• Steinberg

Nodes
I, J, K, L
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, VX, VY, AX, AY
Note
For explicit dynamic analyses, V(X, Y) refers to nodal velocity, and A(X, Y) refers to nodal
acceleration. Although V(X, Y) and A(X, Y) appear as DOFs, they are not actually physical
DOFs. However, these quantities are computed as DOF solutions and stored for postpro-
cessing.
Real Constants
None
Material Properties
EX, EY, PRXY or NUXY, ALPX (or CTEX or THSX),

DENS, GXY, ALPD (MP command), BETD (MP command),
RIGID, HGLS, ORTHO, FLUID (EDMP command),
BKIN, BISO, MOONEY, EVISC, PLAW, FOAM, HONEY, COMP, EOS (TB command; see Material Models
in the ANSYS LS-DYNA User's Guide)
Surface Loads
Pressures --
Body Loads
Temperatures (see Temperature Loading in the ANSYS LS-DYNA User's Guide.
Special Features
KEYOPT(2)
Weighting option (used for axisymmetric elements, KEYOPT(3) = 1):
0 --
Area weighted axisymmetric element
1 --
Volume weighted axisymmetric element
PLANE162
KEYOPT(3)
Element behavior:
0 --
Plane stress
1 --
Axisymmetric
2 --
Plane strain (Z strain = 0.0)
KEYOPT(5)
Element continuum treatment:
0 --
Lagrangian (default)
1 --
ALE (Arbitrary Lagrangian-Eulerian)


Several items are illustrated in Figure 2 (p. 636). The element stresses are output in terms of the global
Cartesian coordinate system by default. A general description of solution output is given in Solution
L 3 K
S
4
S 2
Y
(or axial)
I
X (or radial) 1 J
You can rotate stress results for PLANE162 into a defined coordinate system using the RSYS command.
However, RSYS cannot be used to rotate strain results for this element type.

Name Definition
S(X, Y, XY) Stresses
PLANE162
Name Definition
S(1, 2, 3) Principal stresses
SINT Stress intensity
SEQV Equivalent stress
EPTO(X, Y, XY) Total strains
EPTO(1, 2, 3) Total principle strains
EPTO(INT) Total strain intensity
EPTO(EQV) Total equivalent strain
EPEL(X, Y, XY) Elastic strains
EPEL(1, 2, 3) Principle elastic strains
EPEL(INT) Elastic strain intensity
EPEL(EQV) Equivalent elastic strain
EPPL(EQV) Equivalent plastic strain
Note
Stress and total strain are always available. Some components of stress and strain (for example,
yz and zx components) are always zero. The availability of elastic strain and equivalent plastic
strain depends on the material model used for the element (see Element Output Data in the
ANSYS LS-DYNA User's Guide for details).
Name
output quantity
Item
E

ETABLE and
ESOL Command
Output Quantity Name Input
Item E
EPEQ (equivalent plastic NMISC 1
strain)

• The area of the element must be nonzero.
PLANE162
• The element must lie in the global X-Y plane as shown in Figure 1 (p. 633), and the Y-axis must be the
Shape Elements (p. 39)).

SHELL163
Explicit Thin Structural Shell
<> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> DY <> <> <> <>

SHELL163 is a 4-node element with both bending and membrane capabilities. Both in-plane and normal
loads are permitted. The element has 12 degrees of freedom at each node: translations, accelerations,
and velocities in the nodal x, y, and z directions and rotations about the nodal x, y, and z-axes.
information.
L
z 4

I K K,L
1 3
BE A
Y I
2J J
Triangular Option -
Z not recommended
X
Note: x and y are in the plane of the element
SHELL163 Input Data

The following real constants are provided for SHELL163. SHRF is the shear factor. NIP is the number of
integration points through the thickness of the element, up to a maximum of 100. If NIP is input as 0
or blank, ANSYS defaults the value to 2. T1 - T4 indicate the shell thickness at each of the 4 nodes. NLOC
specifies the location of the reference surface for KEYOPT(1) = 1, 6, or 7. The reference surface is used
in the formulation of the element stiffness matrix. (NLOC does not define the location of the contact
surface.) If you set NLOC = 1 or -1 (top or bottom surface), you must set SHNU = -2 on the EDSHELL
command.
ESOP is the option for the spacing of integration points, and can be either 0 or 1. ESOP is used only if
KEYOPT(4) > 0. If you set ESOP = 0, you must define real constants S(i), and WF(i) to define the integration
point locations. If KEYOPT(3) = 1, then you must also define BETA(i) and MAT(i) for each integration
point. Set ESOP = 1 if the integration points are equally spaced through the thickness such that the
shell is subdivided into NIP layers of equal thickness (up to 100 layers).
SHELL163
The thickness is assumed to vary smoothly over the area of the element, with the thickness input at
the 4 nodes. If the element has a constant thickness, only TK(I) need be input. If the thickness is not
constant, all four thicknesses must be input.
If you set ESOP = 0 and define the integration points using S(i), and WF(i), and possibly BETA(i) and
MAT(i), note the following:
• If KEYOPT(1) = 1, 6, 7, or 11, then the thicknesses you define will remain defined through the results
determination.
• If KEYOPT(1) = 2, 3, 4, 5, 8, 9, 10, or 12, then the ANSYS program overrides any thickness values
you specify and averages the thicknesses for the results determination.
S(i) is the relative coordinate of the integration point and must be within the range -1 to 1. WF(i) is the
weighting factor for the i-th integration point. It is calculated by dividing the thickness associated with
the integration point by the actual shell thickness (that is, ∆ti/t); see Figure 2 (p. 640). In the user defined
shell integration rule, the ordering of the integration points is arbitrary. If using these real constants to
define integration points, then S(i) and WF(i) must both be specified for each integration point (maximum
of 100). BETA(i) is the material angle (in degrees) at the i-th integration point and must be specified for
each integration point. The material model (BKIN, MKIN, MISO, etc.) is not allowed to change within an
element, although the material properties (EX, NUXY, etc.), as defined per MAT(i), can change. However,
the density may not vary through the thickness of the shell element. If more than one material is used,
and the densities vary between materials, the density of the material of the first layer will be used for
the entire element.
If KEYOPT(4) = 0, the integration rule is defined by KEYOPT(2). The Gauss rule (KEYOPT(2) = 0) is valid
for up to five layers (integration points). The trapezoidal rule (KEYOPT(2) = 1) allows up to 100 layers,
but is not recommended for less than 20 layers, especially if bending is involved.
Figure 2 Arbitrary Ordering of Integration Points for User Defined Shell Integration
Rule
s = 1
Layer n
∆t
Layer 2
t midsurface
Layer 1
s = -1
information on how to apply loads in an explicit dynamic analysis, see Loading in the ANSYS LS-DYNA
User's Guide.
SHELL163
Pressures can be input as surface loads on the element midsurfaces. Positive normal pressures act into
the element (that is, positive pressure acts in the negative z direction). Note, however, that pressure is
actually applied to the midsurface. See Figure 3 (p. 641).
Figure 3 Nodal Numbering for Pressure Loads (Positive Pressure Acts in Negative Z
Direction)
K,L
L
K
I J
Z
Y
The load is then applied to that component. Each node in the component will have the specified load.
For this element, you can choose from the following materials:
• Blatz-Ko Rubber
• Modified Piecewise Linear Plasticity
SHELL163
• 3-Parameter Barlat Plasticity
• Transversely Anisotropic Elastic Plastic
• Transversely Anisotropic FLD
• Elastic Viscoplastic Thermal
• Bamman
The orthotropic elastic material model does not accept integration point angles (BETA(i)). Therefore, to
model a composite material, you need to use the composite damage material model. If you do not
wish to use the damage features of this material model, just set the required strength values to zero.
KEYOPT(1) allows you to specify 1 of 12 element formulations for SHELL163 (see "SHELL163 Input Sum-
mary" (p. 643)). A brief description about each element formulation follows:
The Hughes-Liu element formulation (KEYOPT(1) = 1) is based on a degenerated continuum formulation.

This formulation results in substantially large computational costs, but it is effective when very large
deformations are expected. This formulation treats warped configurations accurately but does not pass
the patch test. It uses one-point quadrature with the same hourglass control as the Belytschko-Tsay.
The Belytschko-Tsay (default) element formulation (KEYOPT(1) = 0 or 2) is the fastest of the explicit dy-
namics shells. It is based on the Mindlin-Reissner assumption, so transverse shear is included. It does
not treat warped configurations accurately, so it should not be used in coarse mesh models. One-point
quadrature is used with hourglass control. A default value is set for the hourglass parameter. When
hourglassing appears, you should increase this parameter to avoid hourglassing. It does not pass the
patch test.
The BCIZ Triangular Shell element formulation (KEYOPT(1) = 3) is based on a Kirchhoff plate theory and
uses cubic velocity fields. Three sets of quadrature points are used in each element, so it is relatively
slow. It passes the patch test only when the mesh is generated from three sets of parallel lines.
The C0 Triangular Shell element formulation (KEYOPT(1) = 4) is based on a Mindlin-Reissner plate theory
and uses linear velocity fields. One quadrature point is used in the element formulation. This formulation
is rather stiff, so it should not be used for constructing an entire mesh, only to transition between
meshes.
The Belytschko-Tsay membrane element formulation (KEYOPT(1) = 5) is the same as the Belytschko-Tsay
but with no bending stiffness.
The S/R Hughes-Liu element formulation (KEYOPT(1) = 6) is the same as the Hughes-Liu, but instead of
using one-point quadrature with hourglass control, this formulation uses selective reduced integration.
This increases the cost by a factor of 3 to 4, but avoids certain hourglass modes; certain bending
hourglass modes are still possible.
The S/R corotational Hughes-Liu element formulation (KEYOPT(1) = 7) is the same as the S/R Hughes-
Liu except it uses the corotational system.
SHELL163
The Belytschko-Leviathan shell formulation (KEYOPT(1) = 8) is similar to the Belytschko-Wong-Chiang

with one-point quadrature but it uses physical hourglass control, thus no user-set hourglass control
parameters need to be set.
The fully-integrated Belytschko-Tsay membrane element formulation (KEYOPT(1) = 9) is the same as

the Belytschko-Tsay membrane except is uses a 2 x 2 quadrature instead of a one-point quadrature.
This formulation is more robust for warped configurations.
The Belytschko-Wong-Chiang formulation (KEYOPT(1) = 10) is the same as the Belytschko-Tsay except
the shortcomings in warped configuration are avoided. Costs about 10% more.
The fast (corotational) Hughes-Liu formulation (KEYOPT(1) = 11) is the same as the Hughes-Liu except
this formulation uses the corotational system.
The fully-integrated Belytschko-Tsay shell element formulation (KEYOPT(1) = 12) uses a 2 x 2 quadrature
in the shell plane and is about 2.5 times slower than KEYOPT(1) = 2. It is useful in overcoming hourglass
modes. The shear locking is remedied by introducing an assumed strain for the transverse shear.
Of the twelve shell element formulations, only KEYOPT(1) = 1, 2, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, and 12 are valid for
an explicit-to-implicit sequential solution. For metal forming analyses, KEYOPT(1) = 10 and 12 are recom-
mended in order to properly account for warping.
When the Mooney-Rivlin Rubber material model is used with SHELL163 elements, the LS-DYNA code
will automatically use a total Lagrangian modification of the Belytschko-Tsay formulation instead of
using the formulation you specify via KEYOPT(1). This program-chosen formulation is required to address
the special needs of the hyperelastic material.

Nodes
I, J, K, L
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, UZ, VX, VY, VZ, AX, AY, AZ, ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ
Note
For explicit dynamic analyses, V(X, Y, Z) refers to nodal velocity, and A(X, Y, Z) refers to
postprocessing.
Real Constants
SHRF, NIP, T1, T2, T3, T4,

NLOC, ESOP, BETA(i), S(i), WF(i), MAT(i)
(BETA(i), S(i), WF(i), MAT(i) may repeat for each integration point, depending on the keyoption set-
tings.)
Specify NLOC only if KEYOPT(1) = 1, 6, 7, or 11.
See Table 1: SHELL163 Real Constants (p. 645) for descriptions of the real constants.
SHELL163
Material Properties
EX, EY, EZ, NUXY, NUYZ, NUXZ,

PRXY, PRXZ, PRYZ, ALPX (or CTEX or THSX), GXY, GYZ, GXZ,
DENS, ALPD (MP command), BETD (MP command)
RIGID, HGLS (except KEYOPT(1) = 3, 4, 6, 7, 9, and 12), ORTHO (EDMP command)
PLAW, BKIN, BISO, COMPOSITE, MOONEY, EOS (TB command; see Material Models in the ANSYS LS-
DYNA User's Guide)
Surface Loads
Pressure (applied on midsurface)
Body Loads
Special Features
KEYOPT(1)
1 --
Hughes-Liu
0, 2 --
Belytschko-Tsay (default)
3 --
BCIZ triangular shell
4 --
C0 triangular shell
5 --
Belytschko-Tsay membrane
6 --
S/R Hughes-Liu
7 --
S/R corotational Hughes-Liu
8 --
Belytschko-Levithan shell
9 --
Fully integrated Belytschko-Tsay membrane
10 --
Belytschko-Wong-Chiang
11 --
Fast (corotational) Hughes-Liu
12 --
Fully integrated Belytschko-Tsay shell
KEYOPT(2)
Quadrature rule (used for standard integration rules, KEYOPT(4) = 0):
0 --
Gauss rule (up to five integration points are permitted)
SHELL163
1 --
Trapezoidal rule (up to 100 integration points are permitted)
KEYOPT(3)
Flag for layered composite material mode:
0 --
Non-composite material mode
1 --
Composite material mode; a material angle is defined for each through thickness integration point
KEYOPT(4)
Integration rule ID:
0 --
Standard integration option
n --
User-defined integration rule ID (valid range is 1 to 9999; if selected, it overrides the integration rule
set by KEYOPT(2))
Table 1 SHELL163 Real Constants

1 SHRF Shear factor
Suggested value: 5/6; if left blank, defaults to 1

2 NIP Number of integration points
If input as 0 or blank, defaults to 2.

3 T1 Shell thickness at node I
4 T2 Shell thickness at node J
5 T3 Shell thickness at node K
6 T4 Shell thickness at node L
7 NLOC Location of reference surface
= 1, top surface
= 0, middle surface
= -1, bottom surface
Used only if KEYOPT(1) = 1, 6, or 7.

8 ESOP Option for the spacing of integration points:
0 - Integration points are defined using real constants

S(i) and WF(i).
1 - Integration points are equally spaced through the

thickness such that the shell is subdivided into NIP
layers of equal thickness.
SHELL163

9, 13, BETA(i) Material angle at the i-th integration point.[1]
17,...
405
10, 14, S(i) Coordinate of integration point in the range -1 to 1.
18, ...
i = 1, NIP (NIP = 100 max)[1 (p. 646)]
406
11,15, WF(i) Weighting factor; that is, the thickness associated with the
19, ... integration point divided by the actual shell thickness.
407 i = 1, NIP (NIP = 100 max)[1 (p. 646)]

12, 16, MAT(i) Material ID for each layer. [1]
20, ...
408
1. If KEYOPT(3) = 1, then BETA(i), S(i), WF(i), and MAT(i) should be specified for each integration point.
For example, for 20 integration points, you would specify BETA(1), S(1), WF(1), MAT(1), BETA(2), S(2),
WF(2), MAT(2), ..., BETA(20), S(20), WF(20), MAT(20). If KEYOPT(3) = 0, then only S(i) and WF(i) need to
be specified. The material used will be that specified by the MAT command.

To store output data for this element, you must specify the number of output locations for which you
want data using the EDINT,SHELLIP command during solution. To review the stored data for a specified
layer, use the LAYER,NUM command. However, be aware that the output location for this data is always
at the integration point. "Top" and "bottom" refer to the top or bottom integration point, which is not
necessarily the top or bottom surface.
Stress data is always output from the bottom of the shell to the top. See Figure 2 (p. 640).
In all cases (default and otherwise), strain is always output for two layers only: Layer 1 = bottom and
layer 2 = top.
The number of integration points specified by real constant NIP controls the output locations through
the thickness of the shell. If NIP = SHELLIP, then each layer corresponds to an integration point, and
those are the locations where you will get output data. If NIP>SHELLIP, then data is output only at the
SHELLIP number of locations (first bottom layer, then layers 2 through n moving up from the bottom).
If NIP<SHELLIP (but NIP>2), then results are output only for NIP number of layers.
By default, the number of integration points (NIP) is 2, and the number of output locations/layers
(SHELLIP) is 3. In this case, stress data is output in the following order: Layer 1 = bottom, layer 2 =
middle, and layer 3 = top. When SHELLIP = 3, the middle layer will be an interpolated value if NIP is an
even number or an actual value at an integration point if NIP is an odd number.
If NIP = 1, the integration point is at the element midplane, and only one stress and one strain value
are output.
SHELL163
For elements with 2 x 2 integration points in the shell plane (KEYOPT(1) = 6, 7, 9, 12), LS-DYNA performs
an averaging of any data output at those points in every layer so that the output is the same for all
shell formulations.
For the default RSYS setting, strains (EPTO) and generalized stresses (M, T, N) are output in the element
coordinate system, and stresses (S) are output in the global Cartesian system for all formulations asso-
ciated with SHELL163, except the Hughes-Liu formulation. Strain output (EPTO) for the Hughes-Liu for-
mulation (KEYOPT(1) = 1) is output in the global Cartesian system.
You can rotate stress results for this element into another coordinate system using the RSYS command.
However, RSYS has no effect on the stress results for composite SHELL163 elements (KEYOPT(3) = 1).
In addition, RSYS cannot be used to rotate strain results for any of the SHELL163 element formulations.
The following items are available in the results file.

Name Definition
S(X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ) Stresses
S(1, 2, 3) Principle stresses
EPTO(X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ) Total strain
EPEL(X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ) Elastic strains
M(X, Y, XY) Element X, Y, and XY moments
N(X. Y) Out-of-plane X, Y shear
T(X, Y, XY) In-plane element X, Y, and XY forces
Thick Element thickness
Note
Stress and total strain are always available. The availability of elastic strain and equivalent
plastic strain depends on the material model used for the element (see Element Output Data
in the ANSYS LS-DYNA User's Guide for details).
SHELL163
Name
Item
E

ETABLE and
Name Input
Item E
MX SMISC 1
MY SMISC 2
MXY SMISC 3
NX SMISC 4
NY SMISC 5
TX SMISC 6
TY SMISC 7
TXY SMISC 8
EPEQ (top)[1] NMISC 1
EPEQ (middle)[1], NMISC 2
[2]
EPEQ (bottom)[1] NMISC 3
Thick[1] NMISC 4
1. The sequence numbers for NMISC items in this table are based on the assumption that the number
of integration points for output (SHELLIP on the EDINT command) is set to the default value of 3.
2. If the number of integration points (NIP) is even, the middle EPEQ value (NMISC,2) will be an interpolated
value.
The SMISC quantities in the above table are independent of layers (that is, you will get one set of SMISC
quantities output per element). However, the NMISC items are layer-dependent, and the order of the
NMISC items is dependent on the SHELLIP and NIP values. The order shown in the table corresponds
to the default SHELLIP value (SHELLIP = 3). If NIP > 3, it is strongly recommended that you set SHELLIP
= NIP. In this case, the ETABLE output will go from top (NMISC,1) to bottom (NMISC,n where n is the
total number of layers). If SHELLIP is not equal to NIP, the order of NMISC items will vary. Therefore,
you should not use ETABLE to access the NMISC items when NIP > 3 and SHELLIP is not equal to NIP.

• Zero area elements are not allowed. This occurs most often whenever the elements are not numbered
properly.
• Zero thickness elements or elements tapering down to a zero thickness at any corner are not allowed.
SHELL163
generated Shape Elements (p. 39). In this event, the C0 triangular shell element (KEYOPT(1) = 4) will be
used.
• An assemblage of flat shell elements can produce a good approximation to a curved shell surface
provided that each flat element does not extend over more than a 15° arc.

ANSYS ED
• Composite material shell elements are not allowed. KEYOPT(3) defaults to 0.
SOLID164
<> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> DY <> <> <> <>

SOLID164 is used for the 3-D modeling of solid structures. The element is defined by eight nodes having
the following degrees of freedom at each node: translations, velocities, and accelerations in the nodal
x, y, and z directions.
information.
M O,P
N
4 I K,L
5 P
O J
Wedge Option
6
M I
N
2 3
L
T rah ral
K
z
Z !
I x 1
Y J
X
ym
SOLID164 Input Data

The element is defined by eight nodes. Orthotropic material properties may be defined. Use the EDMP
command to specify an orthotropic material and the EDLCS command to define the orthotropic mater-
ial directions.
By default, SOLID164 uses reduced (one point) integration plus viscous hourglass control for faster
element formulation. A fully integrated solid formulation (KEYOPT(1) = 2) is also available.
SOLID164
KEYOPT(5) defines the element continuum treatment. Two different formulations are available: Lagrangian
(default) and Arbitrary Lagrangian-Eulerian (ALE). In addition to setting KEYOPT(5) = 1, you must also
set appropriate parameters on the EDALE and EDGCALE commands in order for the ALE formulation
to take affect. See Arbitrary Lagrangian-Eulerian Formulation in the ANSYS LS-DYNA User's Guide for more
information. Some material models that are normally available for this element type are not supported
when the ALE formulation is used. See the material list below for details.
1 (p. 651). Positive normal pressures act into the element.
For this element, you can choose from the materials listed below. The material models marked by an
asterisk (*) are not supported by the ALE formulation (KEYOPT(5) = 1).
• Orthotropic Elastic*
• Anisotropic Elastic*
• Viscoelastic*
• Blatz-Ko Rubber*
• Composite Damage*
• Concrete Damage*
• Geological Cap
• Piecewise Linear Plasticity*
• Honeycomb*
• Mooney-Rivlin Rubber*
SOLID164

• Closed Cell Foam*
• Viscous Foam*
• Crushable Foam
• Null
• Bamman*
• Steinberg
• Elastic Fluid

Nodes
I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P
Degrees of Freedom
Note
nodal acceleration. AlthoughV (X, Y, Z) and A(X, Y, Z) appear as DOFs, they are not actually
postprocessing.
Real Constants
None
Material Properties

PRXY, PRXZ, PRYZ, ALPX (or CTEX or THSX), GXY, GYZ, GXZ,
DENS, ALPD (MP command), BETD (MP command)
RIGID, HGLS, ORTHO, FLUID (EDMP command)
ANEL, MOONEY, EVISC, BISO, BKIN, PLAW, FOAM, HONEY, COMPOSITE, CONCR, GCAP, EOS (TB
command; see Material Models in the ANSYS LS-DYNA User's Guide)
Surface Loads
Pressures --
Body Loads
Special Features
SOLID164
KEYOPT(1)
0, 1 --
Constant stress solid element (default)
2 --
Fully integrated selectively-reduced solid
KEYOPT(5)
Element continuum treatment:
0 --
Lagrangian (default)
1 --
ALE (Arbitrary Lagrangian-Eulerian)

Output for SOLID164 is listed in Table 1: SOLID164 Element Output Definitions (p. 654). If you issue PRNSOL,
a single set of stress and a single set of strain values is output at all eight nodes; that is, you will get
the same sets of values at each node. If you issue PRESOL, you will get only a single set of values at
the centroid.
You can rotate stress results for SOLID164 into a defined coordinate system using the RSYS command.

Name Definition
S(X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ) Stresses
S(1, 2, 3) Principal stresses
EPTO(X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ) Total strains
EPEL(X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ) Elastic strains
SOLID164
Note

• The element may not be twisted such that it has two separate volumes. This occurs most frequently
when the element is not numbered properly.
• The element must have eight nodes.
• A prism-shaped element may be formed by defining duplicate K and L and duplicate O and P node
numbers (see Degenerated Shape Elements (p. 39)). A tetrahedron shape is also available. When the de-
generated elements are used, be careful in choosing the element formulations. For the tetrahedron
shape, SOLID168 should be considered instead.

COMBI165
Explicit Spring-Damper
<> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> DY <> <> <> <>
COMBI165 Element Description

COMBI165 allows you to model simple spring or damper systems, as well as the response of more
complicated mechanisms such as the energy absorbers used in passenger vehicle bumpers. These
mechanisms are often experimentally characterized in terms of force-displacement curves. This element
provides a variety of discrete element formulations that can be used individually or in combination to
model complex force-displacement relations.
COMBI165 is a two-node, 1-D element. You cannot define both spring and damper properties for the
same element. Separate spring and damper elements are required, but they may use the same nodes
(that is, you can overlay two different COMBI165 elements). A COMBI165 element can be attached to
any of the other explicit elements.
information.
Figure 1 COMBI165 Geometry
Cv
Torque
J
k
Z
,
I
Y
X
Both figures above show two COMBI165 elements (a spring and a damper) attached to the same two
nodes.
COMBI165 Input Data

The real constants Kd to TDL are optional and do not need to be defined.
For example, if Kd, the dynamic magnification factor, is nonzero, the forces computed from the spring
elements are assumed to be the static values and are scaled by an amplification factor to obtain the
dynamic value:
COMBI165
 
dynamic =  + d  static
 0
For example, if it is known that a component shows a dynamic crush force at 15m/s equal to 2.5 times
the static crush force, use Kd = 1.5 and V0 = 15, where V0 is the test velocity.
Here, clearance (CL) defines a compressive displacement which the spring sustains before beginning
the force-displacement relation given by the load curve. If a nonzero clearance is defined, the spring is
compressive only.
The deflection limit in compression (CDL) and tension (TDL) is restricted in its application to no more
than one spring per node subject to this limit, and to deformable bodies only. For example, in the
former case, if three springs are in series, either the center spring or the two end springs may be subject
to a limit, but not all three. When the limiting deflection (FD) is reached, momentum conservation cal-
culations are performed and a common acceleration is computed in the appropriate direction. An error
termination will occur if a rigid body node is used in a spring definition where compression is limited.
For this element, you can choose from the following materials:
• Linear Elastic Spring

• Linear Viscous Damper
• Elastoplastic Spring
• Nonlinear Elastic Spring
• Nonlinear Viscous Damper
• General Nonlinear Spring
• Maxwell Viscoelastic Spring
• Inelastic Tension or Compression-Only Spring
A summary of the element input is given in "COMBI165 Input Summary" (p. 658). A general description
COMBI165 Input Summary

Nodes
I, J
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, UZ, VX, VY, VZ, AX, AY, AZ (KEYOPT(1) = 0)

ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ (KEYOPT(1) = 1)
Note
postprocessing.
COMBI165
Real Constants
Kd - Dynamic magnification factor,

Vo - Test velocity,
CL - Clearance,
FD - Failure deflection,
CDL - Deflection limit (compression),
TDL - Deflection limit (tension)
Material Properties
BETD (MP command), DISCRETE (TB command; see Material Models in the ANSYS LS-DYNA User's Guide)
Surface Loads
None
Body Loads
None
Special Features
KEYOPT(1)
Spring/damper type (translational or torsional):
0 --
The material describes a translational spring/damper
1 --
The material describes a torsional spring/damper
COMBI165 Output Data

Output data for COMBI165 consists of the following:
Table 1 COMBI165 Item and Sequence Numbers

ETABLE and ESOL Command Input
Output Quantity Name[1] Description Item Seq.
No.
MFORX/MMOMX X-component of member force/moment SMISC 1
MFORY/MMOMY Y-component of member force/moment SMISC 2
MFORZ/MMOMZ Z-component of member force/moment SMISC 3
MFORSUM/MMOMSUM Vector sum of X, Y, and Z components SMISC 4
of member force/moment
1. You must specify either force or moment via KEYOPT(1). Note that you cannot specify both force and
moment.
MFOR: KEYOPT(1) = 0
MMOM: KEYOPT(1) = 1
To output the element data in POST1, you must use the ETABLE command. Then, you can use the
PRETAB command to print the output data. The RSYS command has no effect when postprocessing
output for this element.
COMBI165
In POST26, you can postprocess the element data using the ESOL command only when postprocessing
the Jobname.RST file. The element results are not available on the Jobname.HIS file.
COMBI165 Assumptions and Restrictions

• The time step size calculation is approximated by using the instantaneous stiffness and one-half the
nodal mass of the nodes joined by the spring. If the global time step size is controlled by an explicit
spring-damper element, instabilities can develop with the default time step size due to the approximations
in the step size calculation.
• When used to interconnect under-integrated elements, the explicit spring-damper can sometimes excite
the zero-energy hourglass modes.
• To ensure that parts are uniquely defined when using COMBI165, specify a unique set of real constants
(R), the element type (ET), and the material properties (TB) for each part. Defining a unique material
number (MAT) alone is insufficient.
COMBI165 Product Restrictions

MASS166
Explicit 3-D Structural Mass
<> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> DY <> <> <> <>

MASS166 is a point element having up to nine degrees of freedom: translations, velocities, and acceler-
ations in the nodal x, y, and z directions.
Z y
x I
MASS166 Input Data

The mass element is defined by a single node with concentrated mass components (Force*Time2/Length)
in the element coordinate directions about the element coordinate axes. The element also has an option
for rotary inertia (without mass) which allows the definition of lumped rotary inertia at a defined nodal
point. For the inertia option (KEYOPT(1) = 1), six polar moment of inertia values must be input instead
of mass. To include both mass and rotary inertia, you must define two MASS166 elements at the same
node.
A summary of the element input is given in "MASS166 Input Summary" (p. 661). A general description of

Nodes
I
Degrees of Freedom
Note
postprocessing.
MASS166
Real Constants
If KEYOPT(1) = 0:
MASS - Concentrated mass (Force*Time2/Length) (must be > 0)
If KEYOPT(1) = 1:
IXX - Moment of inertia (must be > 0),
IXY - Moment of inertia,
IXZ - Moment of inertia,
IYY - Moment of inertia (must be > 0),
IYZ - Moment of inertia,
IZZ - Moment of inertia (must be > 0)
Material Properties
None, but you must define realistic dummy material properties to make this element behave correctly.
The dummy properties will not be used in any solution.
Surface Loads
None
Body Loads
None
Special Features
KEYOPT(1)
Rotary inertia option:
0 --
3-D mass without rotary inertia (default)
1 --
3-D rotary inertia (no mass)
MASS166 Output Data

Nodal displacements are included in the overall displacement solution. There is no printed or post ele-
ment data output for the mass element.

None.

LINK167
Explicit Tension-Only Spar
<> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> DY <> <> <> <>

LINK167 allows elastic cables to be realistically modeled; thus, no force will develop in compression.
This element is used in explicit dynamic analyses only.
Z J
Y
I
X
LINK167 Input Data

Node K determines the initial orientation of the cross section.
I and J) containing the element s-axis. The element r-axis runs parallel to the length of the element and
through nodes I and J. Node K is always required to define the element axis system and it must not be
colinear with nodes I and J. The location of node K is used only to initially orient the element.
Real constants for this element are link area (AREA) and offset for cable (OFFSET). For a slack element,
the offset should be input as a negative value. For an initial tensile force, the offset should be positive.
The force, F, generated by the link is nonzero if and only if the link is in tension. The force is given by:
F = K · max (∆ L,0.)
where ∆L is the change in length
∆ L = current length - (initial length - offset)
and the stiffness is defined as:
×
=
−
You can use only the material type cable for this element. For this material, you need to define the
density (DENS) and Young's modulus (EX) or load curve ID. If you specify a load curve ID (ED-
MP,CABLE,VAL1, where VAL1 is the load curve ID), the Young's modulus will be ignored and the load
LINK167
curve will be used instead. The points on the load curve are defined as engineering stress versus engin-
eering strain (that is, the change in length over the initial length). Use the EDCURVE command to define
the load curve ID. The unloading behavior follows the loading.
A summary of the element input is given in "LINK167 Input Summary" (p. 664). Additional information
about real constants for this element is provided in Table 1: BEAM161 Real Constants (p. 624). For more
information about this element, see the LS-DYNA Theoretical Manual.

Nodes
Degrees of Freedom
Note
postprocessing.
Real Constants

OFFSET - Offset value for cable
Material Properties
EX (MP command) or Load Curve ID (EDMP command),

DENS (MP command),
ALPD (MP command), BETD (MP command),
CABLE (EDMP command; see Material Models in the ANSYS LS-DYNA User's Guide)
Surface Loads
None
Body Loads
None
Special Features
KEYOPTs
None
LINK167 Output Data

Output for LINK167 consists of the following: Axial force
LINK167
To output the data, you must use the ETABLE command. For the ITEM label, specify SMISC. For the
COMP label, specify 1 for axial force. Then, you can use the PRETAB command to print the output data.

• The sum of the element length plus the offset must be greater than zero.

SOLID168
Explicit 3-D 10-Node Tetrahedral Structural Solid
<> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> DY <> <> <> <>

SOLID168 is a higher order 3-D, 10-node explicit dynamic element. It is well suited to modeling irregular
meshes such as those produced from various CAD/CAM systems. The element is defined by ten nodes
having three degrees of freedom at each node: translations in the nodal x, y, and z directions.
By default, SOLID168 uses a quadratic displacement behavior with five point integration (KEYOPT(1) =
0 or 1). A composite formulation which is an assemblage of linear sub-tetrahedral shapes (KEYOPT(1)
= 2) is also available. This second formulation effectively overcomes the difficulty of lumped mass cal-
culations and volume locking inherent to the quadratic elements.
4
R
P
Q 3
Y 2
O K
X I M N
Z
1
J
SOLID168 Input Data

The element is defined by ten nodes. Orthotropic material properties may be defined. Use the EDMP
command to specify an orthotropic material and the EDLCS command to define the orthotropic mater-
ial directions.
1 (p. 667). Positive normal pressures act into the element.
The load is then applied to that component. You can also use the EDLOAD command to apply loads
(displacements, forces, etc.) on rigid bodies.
SOLID168
the ANSYS LS-DYNA User's Guide. For this element, you can choose from the materials listed below.
• Anisotropic Elastic
• Viscoelastic
• Blatz-Ko Rubber
• Concrete Damage
• Geological Cap
• Honeycomb
• Closed Cell Foam
• Viscous Foam
• Crushable Foam
• Null
• Bamman
• Steinberg
• Elastic Fluid

Nodes
I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P, Q, R
SOLID168
Degrees of Freedom
Note
postprocessing.
Real Constants
None
Material Properties

PRXY, PRXZ, PRYZ, ALPX (or CTEX or THSX),
DENS, ALPD, BETD (MP command)
RIGID, HGLS, ORTHO, FLUID (EDMP command)
ANEL, MOONEY, EVISC, BISO, BKIN, PLAW,
FOAM, HONEY, COMPOSITE, CONCR, GCAP, EOS
(TB command; see "Material Models" in the ANSYS LS-DYNA User's Guide)
Surface Loads
Pressures --
Body Loads
Temperatures --
See Temperature Loading in the ANSYS LS-DYNA User's Guide
Special Features
KEYOPT(1)
0, 1 --
Quadratic interpolation
2 --
Composite (assemblages of linear tetrahedral shapes)

Output for SOLID168 is listed in Table 1: SOLID168 Element Output Definitions (p. 670). If you issue PRNSOL,
a single set of stress and a single set of strain values is output at all ten nodes; that is, you will get the
same sets of values at each node. If you issue PRESOL, you will get only a single set of values at the
centroid.
You can rotate stress results for SOLID168 into a defined coordinate system using the RSYS command.
SOLID168

Name Definition
S:X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ Stresses
S:1, 2, 3 Principal stresses
S:INT Stress intensity
S:EQV Equivalent stress
EPTO:X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, Total strains
XZ
EPTO:1, 2, 3 Total principle strains
EPTO:INT Total strain intensity
EPTO:EQV Total equivalent strain
EPEL:X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, Elastic strains
XZ
EPEL:1, 2, 3 Principal elastic strains
EPEL:INT Elastic strain intensity
EPEL:EQV Equivalent elastic strains
EPPL:EQV Equivalent plastic strains
Note

• The element may not be twisted such that it has two separate volumes. This occurs most frequently
when the element is not numbered properly.
• The element must have ten nodes.

TARGE169
2-D Target Segment
MP ME ST PR PRN DS DSS <> EM <> <> PP <> EME MFS
TARGE169 Element Description

TARGE169 is used to represent various 2-D "target" surfaces for the associated contact elements (CON-
TA171, CONTA172, and CONTA175). The contact elements themselves overlay the solid elements de-
scribing the boundary of a deformable body and are potentially in contact with the target surface,
defined by TARGE169. This target surface is discretized by a set of target segment elements (TARGE169)
and is paired with its associated contact surface via a shared real constant set. You can impose any
translational or rotational displacement, temperature, voltage, and magnetic potential on the target
segment element. You can also impose forces and moments on target elements. See TARGE169 in the
Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for more details about this element. To represent 3-D target surfaces,
use TARGE170, a 3-D target segment element. For rigid targets, these elements can easily model complex
target shapes. For flexible targets, these elements will overlay the solid elements describing the
boundary of the deformable target body.
Figure 1 TARGE169 Geometry
Target Segment
Parabola
I J
K J I K
n
n n
M N L M
Y Surface-to-Surface Node-to-Surface
Contact Element Contact Element
CONTA171 or CONTA172 CONTA175
X
TARGE169 Input Data

The target surface is modeled through a set of target segments, typically, several target segments
comprise one target surface.
The target surface can either be rigid or deformable. For modeling rigid-flexible contact, the rigid surface
must be represented by a target surface. For flexible-flexible contact, one of the deformable surfaces
must be overlayed by a target surface. See the Contact Technology Guide for more information about
designating contact and target surfaces.
The target and associated contact surfaces are identified by a shared real constant set. This real constant
set includes all real constants for both the target and contact elements.
TARGE169
Each target surface can be associated with only one contact surface, and vice-versa. However, several
contact elements could make up the contact surface and thus come in contact with the same target
surface. Likewise, several target elements could make up the target surface and thus come in contact
with the same contact surface. For either the target or contact surfaces, you can put many elements in
a single target or contact surface, or you can localize the contact and target surfaces by splitting the
large surfaces into smaller target and contact surfaces, each of which contain fewer elements.
If one contact surface may contact more than one target surface, you must define duplicate contact
surfaces that share the same geometry but relate to separate targets, that is, have separate real constant
set numbers.
For any target surface definition, the node ordering of the target segment element is critical for proper
detection of contact. The nodes must be ordered so that, for a 2-D surface, the associated contact ele-
ments (CONTA171, CONTA172, or CONTA175) must lie to the right of the target surface when moving
from target node I to target node J. For a rigid 2-D complete circle, contact must occur on the outside
of the circle; internal contacting is not allowed.
Considerations for Rigid Targets

Each target segment is a single element with a specific shape, or segment type. The segment types are
defined by one, two, or three nodes and a target shape code, TSHAP, and are described in
Table 1: TARGE169 2-D Segment Types, Target Shape Codes, and Nodes (p. 672). The TSHAP command in-
dicates the geometry (shape) of the element. The segment dimensions are defined by a real constant
(R1), and the segment location is determined by the nodes. ANSYS supports seven 2-D segment types;
see Table 1: TARGE169 2-D Segment Types, Target Shape Codes, and Nodes (p. 672).
Table 1 TARGE169 2-D Segment Types, Target Shape Codes, and Nodes
TSHAP Segment Type Node1 Node 2 Node 3 R1[2] R2
(DOF) (DOF)[1] (DOF)
LINE Straight line 1st corner pt 2nd corner None None None
(UX, UY) pt (UX, UY)
(TEMP) (TEMP)
(VOLT) (AZ) (VOLT) (AZ)
ARC Arc, clockwise 1st corner pt 2nd corner Circle center None None
(UX, UY) pt (UX, UY) pt (UX, UY)
(TEMP) (TEMP) (TEMP)
(VOLT) (AZ) (VOLT) (AZ) (VOLT) (AZ)
CARC Arc, counter- clock- 1st corner pt 2nd corner Circle center None None
wise (UX, UY) pt (UX, UY) pt (UX, UY)
PARA Parabola 1st corner pt 2nd corner Midside pt None None
(UX, UY) pt (UX, UY) (UX, UY)
CIRC Circle Circle center None None Radius None
pt (UX, UY)
(TEMP)
(VOLT) (AZ)
TARGE169
TSHAP Segment Type Node1 Node 2 Node 3 R1[2] R2

(DOF) (DOF)[1] (DOF)
PILO Pilot node 1st point None None None None
(UX, UY,
ROTZ)
(TEMP)
(VOLT) (AZ)
POINT Point[3] 1st point None None None None
(UX, UY)
1. The DOF available depends on the setting of KEYOPT(1) for the associated contact element. For more
information, see the element documentation for CONTA171, CONTA172, or CONTA175.
2. When creating a circle via direct generation, define the real constant R1 before creating the element.
3. Rigid surface node. This segment type is only used to apply boundary conditions to rigid target surfaces.
Figure 2 TARGE169 2-D Segment Types
Line
I J TSHAP,LINE
rc, clockwise
I K J TSHAP, RC
I K J rc, counterclockwise
TSHAP,C RC
arabola
TSHAP, R BOL
Circle
I TSHAP,CIRCLE
R1 = Radius
ilot node
I TSHAP,ILO

For simple rigid target surfaces, you can define the target segment elements individually by direct
generation. You must first specify the SHAPE argument for the TSHAP command. When creating circles
through direct generation, you must also define the real constant R1 before creating the element. Real
TARGE169
constant R1 (see Table 1: TARGE169 2-D Segment Types, Target Shape Codes, and Nodes (p. 672)) defines
the radius of the target circle.
For general 2-D rigid surfaces, target segment elements can be defined by line meshing (LMESH). You
can also use keypoint meshing (KMESH) to generate the pilot node.
If the TARGE169 elements will be created via automatic meshing (LMESH or KMESH), then the TSHAP
command is ignored and ANSYS chooses the correct shape automatically.
For rigid-to-flexible contact, by default, ANSYS automatically fixes the structural degree of freedom for
rigid target nodes if they aren't explicitly constrained (KEYOPT(2) = 0). If you wish, you can override the
automatic boundary condition settings by setting KEYOPT(2) = 1 for the target elements. For flexible-
to-flexible contact, no special boundary conditions treatment is performed, and the KEYOPT(2) = 0 setting
should be used.
For each rigid-flexible contact pair, you can assign only one pilot node to an entire rigid target surface
(or none if it is not needed). The pilot node, unlike the other segment types, is used to define the degrees
of freedom for the entire target surface. This node can be any of the target surface nodes, but it does
not have to be. All possible rigid motions of the target surface will be a combination of a translation
and a rotation around the pilot node. The pilot node provides a convenient and powerful way to assign
boundary conditions such as rotations, translations, moments, temperature, voltage, and magnetic po-
tential on an entire rigid target surface. By default (KEYOPT(2) = 0), you can assign the boundary condi-
tions only to the pilot node, eliminating the need to assign boundary conditions to individual target
nodes, thus reducing the chance of errors. ANSYS will also automatically fix the structural degrees of
freedom on the pilot node if they aren't explicitly constrained.
By setting KEYOPT(2) = 1 for the target elements, you can apply boundary conditions on any rigid target
nodes rather than only on the pilot node. It is your responsibility to make sure the rigid target surface
is not under-constrained or over-constrained. It is still recommended that you apply all boundary con-
ditions on the pilot node, even when KEYOPT(2) = 1.
Considerations for Deformable Target Surfaces

For general deformable surfaces, you will normally use the ESURF command to overlay the target ele-
ments on the boundary of the existing mesh. Note that the segment types (TSHAP command) should
not be used for this case.
Considerations for Geometry Correction

In general, curved contact and target surfaces can be well approximated by linear or quadratic contact
and target elements when the mesh is sufficiently refined. However, in certain circumstances (for example,
when linear elements are used or when the midside nodes of quadratic elements do not lie exactly on
the initial curved geometry because a third party mesh generator was used), using a straight line in
place of the true curved geometry can significantly affect the accuracy of contact stresses. An optional
geometric correction can be used for a circular (or nearly circular) arc via SECTYPE and SECDATA section
commands. The defined geometry correction can be applied to specific contact elements via a section
ID (SECNUM command). For details, see Geometry Correction for Contact and Target Surfaces in the
Contact Technology Guide.
TARGE169
Considerations for Fluid Penetration Loading

To model fluid penetration loads, use the SFE command to specify the fluid pressure and fluid penetration
starting points. For more information, see Applying Fluid Pressure-Penetration Loads in the Contact
Technology Guide.
Considerations for Thermal Contact Analysis

By default, the temperature is set to the value of TUNIF, and if this has no explicit value the temperature
is set to zero. For thermal contact analysis, such as convection and radiation modeling, the behavior of
a thermal contact surface (whether a “near-field” or “free” surface) is usually based on the contact status.
Contact status affects the behavior of the contact surface as follows:
• If the contact surface is outside the pinball region, its behavior is as a far-field of free surface. In this
instance, convection/radiation occurs with the ambient temperature.
• If the contact surface is inside the pinball region, the behavior is as a near-field surface.
However, the thermal contact surface status is ignored if KEYOPT(3) = 1 is set, and the surface is always
treated as a free surface (see CONTA171, CONTA172, or CONTA175 for details).
A summary of the element input is given in "TARGE169 Input Summary" (p. 675). A general description
TARGE169 Input Summary

Nodes
I, J, K (J and K are not required for all segment types)
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, ROTZ, TEMP, VOLT, AZ (ROTZ is used for the pilot node only )
Real Constants
R1, R2, [the others are defined through the associated CONTA171, CONTA172, or CONTA175 element]
Material Properties
None
Surface Loads
Pressure, Face 1 (I-J) (opposite to target normal direction)
Body Loads
None
Special Features
Birth and death

Fluid pressure penetration
Linear perturbation
Nonlinear
Section definition for geometry correction of spherical and revolute surfaces
KEYOPT(2)
Boundary conditions for rigid target nodes:
0 --
Automatically constrained by ANSYS
TARGE169
1 --
Specified by user
KEYOPT(3)
Behavior of thermal contact surface:
0 --
Based on contact status
1 --
Treated as free-surface
KEYOPT(4)
DOF set to be constrained on dependent DOF for internally-generated multipoint constraints (MPCs).
This option is used for these situations: solid-solid and shell-shell assemblies; surface-based constraints
that use a single pilot node for the target element; and rigid target surfaces that use the KEYOPT(2) =
1 setting.
n --
Enter a three digit value that represents the DOF set to be constrained. The first to third digits rep-
resent ROTZ, UY, UX, respectively. The number 1 (one) indicates the DOF is active, and the number
0 (zero) indicates the DOF is not active. For example, 011 means that UX and UY will be used in the
multipoint constraint. Leading zeros may be omitted; for example, you can enter 1 to indicate that
UX is the only active DOF. If KEYOPT(4) = 0 (which is the default) or 111, all DOF are constrained.
KEYOPT(6)
Symmetry condition of a constrained surface. This option is only used for a force-distributed constraint
that uses a single pilot node for the target element:
1 --
The constrained surface has a symmetry condition with respect to the y axis of the nodal coordinate
system of the pilot node.
10 --
The constrained surface has a symmetry condition with respect to the x axis of the nodal coordinate
system of the pilot node.
Note
Keep the following points in mind when using this symmetry condition:
• When a symmetry condition is used, the pilot node must be defined on the symmetry
axis.
• KEYOPT(6) = 11 is not valid input.
• When the constrained surface is defined on a 2-D axisymmetric model and the pilot
node is located on the y axis of the nodal coordinate system, KEYOPT(6) = 1 will be
set internally. In this case, do not set KEYOPT(6) = 10; otherwise, the initial constraint
equations will be redundant and the solution will be invalid.
TARGE169 Output Data

The solution output associated with the element is shown in Table 2: TARGE169 Element Output Defini-
tions (p. 677). The following notation is used:
TARGE169
available.
Table 2 TARGE169 Element Output Definitions

Name Definition O R
NODES Nodes I, J, and K Y Y
ITRGET Target surface number (assigned by ANSYS) Y Y
TSHAP Segment shape type Y Y
ISEG Segment numbering 1 1
FPRS Actual applied fluid penetration pressure Y Y
1. An internal segment number determined by ANSYS. ISEG for the target element has a different
meaning than ISEG reported for the contact element.
You can display or list the actual fluid pressure applied to the target element through several POST1
postprocessing commands, as shown below:
PLESOL,CONT,FPRS
PLNSOL,CONT,FPRS
PRESOL,CONT
PRNSOL,CONT
Note that only the FPRS (fluid penetration pressure) output item is meaningful when the PRESOL and
PRNSOL commands are used for target elements.
Table 3: TARGE169 Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 678) lists output available through the ETABLE command
is used in Table 3: TARGE169 Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 678):
Name
output quantity as defined in the Table 2: TARGE169 Element Output Definitions (p. 677)
Item
E
TARGE169
I,J
Table 3 TARGE169 Item and Sequence Numbers

Quant- Input
ity Item E I J
Name
FPRS SMISC 3 1 2
TARGE169 Assumptions and Restrictions

• The 2-D segment element must be defined in an X-Y plane.
• For each pilot node, ANSYS automatically defines an internal node and an internal constraint equation.
The rotational DOF of the pilot node is connected to the translational DOF of the internal node by the
internal constraint equation. ANSYS recommends against using external constraint equations or coupling
on pilot nodes; if you do, conflicts may occur, yielding incorrect results.
• For circular arcs, the third node defines the actual center of the circle and must be defined accurately
when the element is generated and must be moved consistently with the other nodes during the de-
formation process. If the third node is not moved consistently with the other nodes, the arc shape will
change with that node's movement. To ensure the correct behavior, apply all boundary conditions to
a pilot node.
• For parabolic segments, the third point must lie at the middle of the parabola.
• Generally speaking, you should not change the R1 real constant between load steps or during restart
stages; otherwise ANSYS assumes the radius of the circle varies between the load steps. When using
direct generation, the real constant R1 for circles may be defined before the input of the element nodes.
If multiple rigid circles are defined, each having a different radius, they must be defined by different
target surfaces.
• For rotation of a rigid body constrained only by a bonded, rigid-flexible contact pair with a pilot node,
use the MPC algorithm or a surface-based constraint as described in "Multipoint Constraints and Assem-
blies" in the Contact Technology Guide. Penalty-based algorithms can create undesirable rotational energies
in this situation.
TARGE169 Product Restrictions

TARGE170
3-D Target Segment
TARGE170 Element Description

TARGE170 is used to represent various 3-D "target" surfaces for the associated contact elements (CON-
TA173, CONTA174, CONTA175, CONTA176, and CONTA177). The contact elements themselves overlay
the solid, shell, or line elements describing the boundary of a deformable body and are potentially in
contact with the target surface, defined by TARGE170. This target surface is discretized by a set of target
segment elements (TARGE170) and is paired with its associated contact surface via a shared real constant
set. You can impose any translational or rotational displacement, temperature, voltage, and magnetic
potential on the target segment element. You can also impose forces and moments on target elements.
See TARGE170 in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for more details about this element. To represent
2-D target surfaces, use TARGE169, a 2-D target segment element.
For rigid target surfaces, these elements can easily model complex target shapes. For flexible targets,
these elements will overlay the solid, shell, or line elements describing the boundary of the deformable
target body.
TARGE170
Figure 1 TARGE170 Geometry
Target Segment Element

K TARGE170 K
I J I J
n n n
Y
X
Node-to-Surface
Contact Element
Surface-to-Surface CONTA175
Contact Element
CONTA173 or CONTA174
K

I J
n
D Li Li
D Li
6

TARGE170 Input Data

The target surface is modeled through a set of target segments, typically, several target segments
comprise one target surface.
The target surface can either be rigid or deformable. For modeling rigid-flexible contact, the rigid surface
must be represented by a target surface. For flexible-flexible contact, one of the deformable surfaces
must be overlayed by a target surface. See the Contact Technology Guide for more information about
designating contact and target surfaces.
The target and associated contact surfaces are identified via a shared real constant set. This real constant
set includes all real constants for both the target and contact elements.
Each target surface can be associated with only one contact surface, and vice-versa. However, several
contact elements could make up the contact surface and thus come in contact with the same target
surface. Likewise, several target elements could make up the target surface and thus come in contact
TARGE170
with the same contact surface. For either the target or contact surfaces, you can put many elements in
a single target or contact surface, or you can localize the contact and target surfaces by splitting the
large surfaces into smaller target and contact surfaces, each of which contain fewer elements.
If a contact surface may contact more than one target surface, you must define duplicate contact surfaces
that share the same geometry but relate to separate targets, that is, that have separate real constant
set numbers.
Figure 2 (p. 683) shows the available segment types for TARGE170. The general 3-D surface segments
(3-node and 6-node triangles, and 4-node and 8-node quadrilaterals) and the primitive segments (cylinder,
cone, and sphere) can be paired with 3-D surface-to-surface contact elements, CONTA173 and CONTA174,
the 3-D node-to-surface contact element, CONTA175, and the 3-D line-to-surface contact element,
CONTA177. The line segments (2-node line and 3-node parabola) can only be paired with the 3-D line-
to-line contact element, CONTA176, to model 3-D beam-to-beam contact.
For any target surface definition, the node ordering of the target segment element is critical for proper
detection of contact. For the general 3-D surface segments (triangle and quadrilateral segment types),
the nodes must be ordered so that the outward normal to the target surface is defined by the right
hand rule (see Figure 2 (p. 683)). Therefore, for the surface target segments, the outward normal by the
right hand rule is consistent to the external normal. For 3-D line segments (straight line and parabolic
line), the nodes must be entered in a sequence that defines a continuous line. For a rigid cylinder, cone,
or sphere, contact must occur on the outside of the elements; internal contacting of these segments
is not allowed.
Considerations for Rigid Target Surfaces

Each target segment of a rigid surface is a single element with a specific shape, or segment type.The
segment types are defined by several nodes and a target shape code, TSHAP, and are described in
Table 1: TARGE170 3-D Segment Types, Target Shape Codes, and Nodes (p. 681). The TSHAP command in-
dicates the geometry (shape) of the element. The segment radii are defined by real constants (R1 and
R2), and the segment location is determined by the nodes. ANSYS supports eleven 3-D segment types;
see Table 1: TARGE170 3-D Segment Types, Target Shape Codes, and Nodes (p. 681).
Table 1 TARGE170 3-D Segment Types, Target Shape Codes, and Nodes
TSHAP Segment Type Nodes (DOF)[1] R1 R2
TRIA 3-node triangle 1st - 3rd nodes are corner points (UX, None None
UY, UZ) (TEMP) (VOLT) (MAG)
QUAD 4-node quadrilater- 1st - 4th nodes are corner points (UX, None None
al UY, UZ) (TEMP) (VOLT) (MAG)
TRI6 6-node triangle 1st - 3rd nodes are corner points, 4th - None None
6th are midside nodes (UX, UY, UZ)
(TEMP) (VOLT) (MAG)
QUA8 8-node quadrilater- 1st - 4th nodes are corner points, 5th - None None
al 8th are midside nodes (UX, UY, UZ)
(TEMP) (VOLT) (MAG)
LINE 2-node straight line 1st - 2nd nodes are line end points (UX, Target Contact
UY, UZ) Radius[4] Radius[5]
PARA 3-node parabola 1st - 2nd nodes are line end points, 3rd Target Contact
is a midside node (UX, UY, UZ) Radius[4] Radius[5]
TARGE170
TSHAP Segment Type Nodes (DOF)[1] R1 R2

[2]
CYLI Cylinder 1st - 2nd nodes are axial end points (UX, Radius None
UY, UZ) (TEMP) (VOLT) (MAG)
CONE Cone[2] 1st - 2nd nodes are axial end points (UX, Radius Radius
UY, UZ) (TEMP) (VOLT) (MAG) at node at node
1 2
SPHE Sphere[2] Sphere center point (UX, UY, UZ) (TEMP) Radius None
(VOLT) (MAG)
PILO Pilot node[3] 1st point: (UX, UY, UZ, ROTX, ROTY, None None
ROTZ) (TEMP) (VOLT) (MAG)
POINT Point6 1st point: (UX, UY, UZ) None None
1. The DOF available depends on the setting of KEYOPT(1) of the associated contact element. Refer to
the element documentation for either CONTA173, CONTA174, or CONTA175 for more details.
2. When creating a cylinder, cone, or sphere via direct generation, define the real constant set before
creating the element.
3. Only pilot nodes have rotational degrees of freedom (ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ).
4. Input the target radius as a negative value when modeling internal pipe-to-pipe contact (a pipe con-
tacting/sliding inside another pipe). Input a positive value to model external 3-D beam-to-beam contact.
5. Input a positive contact radius when modeling internal pipe-to-pipe contact or external 3-D beam-to-
beam contact.
6. Rigid surface node. This segment type is only used to apply boundary conditions to rigid target surfaces.
Figure 2 (p. 683) shows the 3-D segment shapes.
TARGE170
Figure 2 TARGE170 Segment Types
K
J
K
L
3-Node Triangle
SHAP,TR 4-Node Quadrilateral

I
SHAP,QUD
Cylinder
J
SHAP,CYL
R1 = Radius J
Cone
J SHAP,CONE
R1 = Radius( ) N M
R2 = Radius (J) 6-Node Triangle
SHAP,TR 6
J
phere
O
SHAP,E
R1 = Radius
L K
N 8-Node Quadrilateral
ilot node SHAP,QU8
SHAP, LO
M
J
b

!"
#$%&'*+./0
For simple rigid target surfaces (including line segments), you can define the target segment elements
individually by direct generation. You must first specify the SHAPE argument on the TSHAP command.
When creating cylinders, cones, or spheres through direct generation, you must also define the real
constant R1 (and R2 for cones) before creating the element. Real constants R1 and R2 (see
Table 1: TARGE170 3-D Segment Types, Target Shape Codes, and Nodes (p. 681)) define the dimensions of
the target shape.
For general 3-D rigid surfaces, target segment elements can be defined by area meshing (AMESH). Set
KEYOPT(1) = 0 (the default) to generate low order target elements (3-node triangles and/or 4-node
quadrilaterals) for rigid surfaces. Set KEYOPT(1) = 1 to generate target elements with midside nodes (6-
node triangles and/or 8-node quadrilaterals).
TARGE170
For 3-D rigid lines, target segment elements can be defined by line meshing (LMESH). Set KEYOPT(1)
= 0 (the default) to generate low order target elements (2-node straight lines). Set KEYOPT(1) = 1 to
generate target elements with midside nodes (3-node parabolas).
You can also use keypoint meshing (KMESH) to generate the pilot node.
If the TARGE170 elements will be created via program meshing (AMESH, LMESH, or KMESH commands),
then the TSHAP command is ignored and ANSYS chooses the correct shape automatically.
For rigid-to-flexible contact, by default, ANSYS automatically fixes the structural degree of freedom for
rigid target nodes if they aren't explicitly constrained (KEYOPT(2) = 0). If you wish, you can override the
automatic boundary condition settings by setting KEYOPT(2) = 1 for the target elements. For flexible-
to-flexible contact, no special boundary conditions treatment is performed, and the KEYOPT(2) = 0 setting
should be used.
For each rigid-flexible contact pair, you can assign only one pilot node to an entire rigid target surface
(or none if it is not needed). The pilot node, unlike the other segment types, is used to define the degrees
of freedom for the entire target surface. This node can be any of the target surface nodes, but it does
not have to be. All possible rigid motions of the target surface will be a combination of a translation
and a rotation around the pilot node. The pilot node provides a convenient and powerful way to assign
boundary conditions such as rotations, translations, moments, temperature, voltage, and magnetic po-
tential on an entire rigid target surface. By default (KEYOPT(2) = 0), you can assign the boundary condi-
tions only to the pilot node, eliminating the need to assign boundary conditions to individual target
nodes, thus reducing the chance of errors. ANSYS will also automatically fix the structural degrees of
freedom on the pilot node if they aren't explicitly constrained.
By setting KEYOPT(2) = 1 for the target elements, you can apply boundary conditions on any rigid target
nodes rather than only on the pilot node. It is your responsibility to make sure the rigid target surface
is not under-constrained or over-constrained. It is still recommended that you apply all boundary con-
ditions on the pilot node, even when KEYOPT(2) = 1.
Considerations for Deformable Target Surfaces

For general deformable surfaces, use the ESURF command to overlay the target elements on the
boundary of the existing mesh. By default, the command generates a target element with an external
surface that has the same shape as the underlying element. You can issue ESURF,,,LINE to generate 3-
D line or parabola segments on an exterior of selected 3-D elements (e.g., shell edges). Segment types
(TSHAP command) should not be used prior to ESURF when generating target elements on deformable
target surfaces.
The cylinder, cone, sphere, point, and pilot node target segments should not be used for deformable
target surfaces. However, you can use geometry correction (see below) for deformable target surfaces
that represent (or approximately represent) a sphere, cylinder, or cone.
Considerations for Geometry Correction

In general, curved contact and target surfaces can be well approximated by linear or quadratic contact
and target elements when the mesh is sufficiently refined. However, in certain circumstances (for example,
when linear elements are used or when the midside nodes of quadratic elements do not lie exactly on
the initial curved geometry because a third party mesh generator was used), using a faceted surface in
place of the true curved geometry can significantly affect the accuracy of contact stresses. An optional
geometric correction can be used for two types of curved surfaces (spherical and revolute) via SECTYPE
TARGE170
and SECDATA section commands. The defined geometry correction can be applied to specific contact
elements via a section ID (SECNUM command). For details, see Geometry Correction for Contact and
Target Surfaces in the Contact Technology Guide.
Considerations for Fluid Penetration Loading

Technology Guide.
Considerations for Thermal Contact Analysis

By default, the temperature is set to the value of TUNIF, and if this has no explicit value the temperature
is set to zero. For thermal contact analysis, such as convection and radiation modeling, the behavior of
a thermal contact surface (whether a “near-field” or “free” surface) is usually based on the contact status.
Contact status affects the behavior of the contact surface as follows:
• If the contact surface is outside the pinball region, its behavior is as a far-field of free surface. In this
instance, convection/radiation occurs with the ambient temperature.
• If the contact surface is inside the pinball region, the behavior is as a near-field surface.
However, the thermal contact surface status is ignored if KEYOPT(3) = 1 is set, and the surface is always
treated as a free surface (see CONTA173, CONTA174, or CONTA175 for details).
A summary of the element input is given in "TARGE170 Input Summary" (p. 685). A general description
TARGE170 Input Summary

Nodes
I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P (J - P are not required for all segment types)
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, UZ, TEMP, VOLT, MAG (ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ for pilot nodes only)
Real Constants
R1, R2, [the others are defined through the associated CONTA173, CONTA174, CONTA175, CONTA176,
or CONTA177 elements]
Material Properties
None
Surface Loads
Pressure, Face 1 (I-J-K-L) (opposite to target normal direction)
Body Loads
None
Special Features
Birth and death

Linear perturbation
Nonlinear
TARGE170
KEYOPT(1)
Element order (used by AMESH and LMESH commands only):
0 --
Low order elements
1 --
High order elements
KEYOPT(2)
Boundary conditions for rigid target nodes:
0 --
Automatically constrained by ANSYS
1 --
Specified by user
KEYOPT(3)
Behavior of thermal contact surface:
0 --
Based on contact status
1 --
Treated as free-surface
KEYOPT(4)
DOF set to be constrained on dependent DOF for internally-generated multipoint constraints (MPCs).
This option is used for these situations: solid-solid and shell-shell assemblies; surface-based constraints
that use a single pilot node for the target element; and rigid target surfaces that use the KEYOPT(2) =
1 setting.
n --
Enter a six digit value that represents the DOF set to be constrained. The first to sixth digits represent
ROTZ, ROTY, ROTX, UZ, UY, UX, respectively. The number 1 (one) indicates the DOF is active, and the
number 0 (zero) indicates the DOF is not active. For example, 100011 means that UX, UY, and ROTZ
will be used in the multipoint constraint. Leading zeros may be omitted; for example, you can enter
11 to indicate that UX and UY are the only active DOF. If KEYOPT(4) = 0 (which is the default) or
111111, all DOF are constrained.
KEYOPT(5)
DOF set to be used in internally-generated multipoint constraints (MPCs), with the MPC algorithm and
no separation or bonded behavior (KEYOPT(2) = 2 and KEYOPT(12) = 4, 5, or 6 on the contact element).
Note that this key option is not used for surface-based constraints. (See "Multipoint Constraints and As-
semblies" in the Contact Technology Guide for more information):
0 --
Automatic constraint type detection (default)
1 --
Solid-solid constraint (no rotational DOFs are constrained)
2 --
Shell-shell constraint (both translational and rotational DOFs are constrained independently). Also
used with penalty based shell-shell assembly (KEYOPT(2) = 0 or 1 and KEYOPT(12) = 5 or 6 on the
contact element); see Bonded Contact for Shell-Shell Assemblies in the Contact Technology Guide for
more information.
TARGE170
3 --
Shell-solid constraint - contact normal direction (both translational and rotational DOFs from the
contact surface are included in the constraint set; only translational DOFs from the target surface
are included in the constraint set).
4 --
Shell-solid constraint - all directions. This option acts the same as KEYOPT(5) = 3 if an intersection is
found from the contact normal to the target surface. Otherwise, constraint equations are still built
as long as contact node(s) and target segments are inside the pinball region.
5 --
Shell-solid constraint - anywhere inside pinball region. Constraint equations are always built as long
as contact node(s) and target segments are inside the pinball region, regardless of whether an inter-
section exists between the contact normal and the target surface.
Note
When the no separation option (KEYOPT(12) = 4 on the contact element) is used with
the MPC approach, only the KEYOPT(5) = 0 and 1 options (auto detection or solid-solid
constraint) described above are valid. If the auto detection option is set and the program
finds a shell-shell or shell-solid constraint in this situation, the solution will terminate.
KEYOPT(6)
Symmetry condition of a constrained surface. This option is only used for a force-distributed constraint
that uses a single pilot node for the target element:
n --
Enter a three digit value that represents the symmetry conditions on the constrained surface. Symmetry
is defined with respect to the nodal coordinate system of the pilot node. The first, second, and third
digits represent a symmetry condition with respect to the xy, xz, and yz planes, respectively. The
number 1 (one) indicates a symmetry condition, and the number 0 (zero) indicates no symmetry
condition. For example, KEYOPT(6) = 110 means the force distributed constraint is built on a surface
or edge that has symmetry about the xy and xz planes. Leading zeros may be omitted (e.g., KEYOPT(6)
= 10 indicates symmetry about the xz plane only).
Note
Keep the following points in mind when using this symmetry condition:
• When a symmetry condition is used, the pilot node must be defined on the symmetry
plane/edge.
• KEYOPT(6) = 111 is not valid input.
TARGE170 Output Data

The solution output associated with the element is shown in Table 2: TARGE170 Element Output Defini-
tions (p. 688).
TARGE170
available.
Table 2 TARGE170 Element Output Definitions

Name Definition O R
NODES Nodes I, J, and K Y Y
ITRGET Target surface number (assigned by ANSYS) Y Y
TSHAP Segment shape type Y Y
ISEG Segment numbering 1 1
FPRS Actual applied fluid penetration pressure Y Y
1. An internal segment number determined by ANSYS. ISEG for the target element has a different
meaning than ISEG reported for the contact element.
You can display or list the actual fluid pressure applied to the target element through several POST1
postprocessing commands, as shown below:
PLESOL,CONT,FPRS
PLNSOL,CONT,FPRS
PRESOL,CONT
PRNSOL,CONT
Note that only the FPRS (fluid penetration pressure) output item is meaningful when the PRESOL and
PRNSOL commands are used for target elements.
Table 3: TARGE170 Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 689) lists output available through the ETABLE command
is used in Table 3: TARGE170 Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 689):
Name
output quantity as defined in the Table 2: TARGE170 Element Output Definitions (p. 688)
Item
E
TARGE170
I,J,K,L
Table 3 TARGE170 Item and Sequence Numbers

ity
Name
FPRS SMISC 5 1 2 3 4
TARGE170 Assumptions and Restrictions

• Generally speaking, you should not change real constants R1 or R2, either between load steps or during
restart stages; otherwise ANSYS assumes the radii of the primitive segments varies between the load
steps. When using direct generation, the real constants for cylinders, cones, and spheres may be defined
before the input of the element nodes. If multiple rigid primitives are defined, each having different
radii, they must be defined by different target surfaces.
• For each pilot node, ANSYS automatically defines an internal node and an internal constraint equation.
The rotational DOF of the pilot node is connected to the translational DOF of the internal node by the
internal constraint equation. ANSYS recommends against using external constraint equations or coupling
on pilot nodes; if you do, conflicts may occur, yielding incorrect results.
• For rotation of a rigid body constrained only by a bonded, rigid-flexible contact pair with a pilot node,
use the MPC algorithm or a surface-based constraint as described in "Multipoint Constraints and Assem-
blies" in the Contact Technology Guide. Penalty-based algorithms can create undesirable rotational energies
in this situation.
TARGE170 Product Restrictions

CONTA171
CONTA171 Element Description

CONTA171 is used to represent contact and sliding between 2-D "target" surfaces (TARGE169) and a
deformable surface, defined by this element. The element is applicable to 2-D structural and coupled
field contact analyses. This element is located on the surfaces of 2-D solid, shell, or beam elements
without midside nodes (such as PLANE13, PLANE55, PLANE182, MATRIX50, and SHELL208). It has the
same geometric characteristics as the solid, shell, or beam element face with which it is connected (see
Figure 1 (p. 691)). Contact occurs when the element surface penetrates one of the target segment elements
(TARGE169) on a specified target surface. Coulomb friction, shear stress friction, and user defined friction
with the userfric subroutine are allowed. This element also allows separation of bonded contact to
simulate interface delamination. See CONTA171 in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for more details
about this element. Other surface-to-surface contact elements (CONTA172, CONTA173, CONTA174) are
also available.
Figure 1 CONTA171 Geometry
Associated Target Surface
Contact Element
Contact normal
Surface of Solid/Shell/Beam Element
I
J
CONTA171 Input Data

The geometry and node locations are shown in Figure 1 (p. 691). The element is defined by two nodes
(the underlying solid, shell, or beam element has no midside nodes). If the underlying solid, shell, or
beam elements do have midside nodes, use CONTA172. The element x-axis is along the I-J line of the
element. The correct node ordering of the contact element is critical for proper detection of contact.
The nodes must be ordered such that the target must lie to the right side of the contact element when
moving from the first contact element node to the second contact element node as in Figure 1 (p. 691).
See Generating Contact Elements in the Contact Technology Guide for more information on generating
elements automatically using the ESURF command.
The 2-D contact surface elements are associated with the 2-D target segment elements (TARGE169) via
a shared real constant set. ANSYS looks for contact only between surfaces with the same real constant
set. For modeling either rigid-flexible or flexible-flexible contact, one of the deformable surfaces must
be represented by a contact surface. See Designating Contact and Target Surfaces in the Contact Tech-
nology Guide for more information.
CONTA171
If more than one target surface will make contact with the same boundary of solid elements, you must
define several contact elements that share the same geometry but relate to separate targets (targets
which have different real constant numbers), or you must combine the two target surfaces into one
(targets that share the same real constant numbers).
To model separation of bonded contact with KEYOPT(12) = 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6, use the TB command with
the CZM label. See "Debonding" in the Contact Technology Guide for more information.
To model proper momentum transfer and energy balance between contact and target surfaces, impact
constraints should be used in transient dynamic analysis. See the description of KEYOPT(7) below and
the contact element discussion in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for details.
To model isotropic friction, use the TB,FRIC,,,,ISO command. You can define a coefficient of friction that
is dependent on temperature, time, normal pressure, sliding distance, or sliding relative velocity by using
the TBFIELD command along with TB,FRIC,,,,ISO. See Contact Friction in the Material Reference for more
information.
To implement a user-defined friction model, use the TB,FRIC command with TBOPT = USER to specify
friction properties and write a userfric subroutine to compute friction forces. See User-Defined
Friction in the Material Reference for more information on how to use this feature. See also the Guide
to ANSYS User Programmable Features for a detailed description of the userfric subroutine.
Technology Guide.
This element supports various 2-D stress states, including plane stress, plane strain, and axisymmetric
states. The stress state is automatically detected according to the stress state of the underlying element.
However, if the underlying element is a superelement, you must use KEYOPT(3) to specify the stress
state.
In general, curved contact and target surfaces can be well approximated by linear contact and target
elements when the mesh is sufficiently refined. However, using a straight line in place of the true curved
geometry can significantly affect the accuracy of contact stresses in some contact applications. An op-
tional geometric correction can be used for a circular (or nearly circular) arc via SECTYPE and SECDATA
section commands. The defined geometry correction can be applied to specific contact elements via a
section ID (SECNUM command). For details, see Geometry Correction for Contact and Target Surfaces
in the Contact Technology Guide.
A summary of the element input is given in "CONTA171 Input Summary" (p. 692). A general description
CONTA171 Input Summary

Nodes
I, J
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY (if KEYOPT(1) = 0)

UX, UY, TEMP (if KEYOPT(1) = 1)
TEMP (if KEYOPT(1) = 2)
CONTA171
UX, UY, TEMP, VOLT (if KEYOPT(1) = 3)

TEMP, VOLT (if KEYOPT(1) = 4)
UX, UY, VOLT (if KEYOPT(1) = 5)
VOLT (if KEYOPT(1) = 6)
AZ (if KEYOPT(1) = 7)
Real Constants
R1, R2, FKN, FTOLN, ICONT, PINB,

PMAX, PMIN, TAUMAX, CNOF, FKOP, FKT,
COHE, TCC, FHTG, SBCT, RDVF, FWGT,
ECC, FHEG, FACT, DC, SLTO, TNOP,
TOLS, , PPCN, FPAT, COR, STRM
FDMN, FDMT, , , TBND
See Table 1: CONTA171 Real Constants (p. 698) for descriptions of the real constants.
Material Properties
MU, EMIS (MP command)

FRIC (TB command; see Contact Friction in the Material Reference)
CZM (TB command; see Cohesive Zone Materials Used for Debonding in the Contact Technology
Guide)
Surface Loads
Pressure, Face 1 (I-J) (opposite to contact normal direction); used for fluid pressure penetration
loading. On the SFE command use LKEY = 1 to specify the pressure values, and use LKEY = 2 to
specify starting points and penetrating points.
Convection, Face 1 (I-J)
Heat Flux, Face 1 (I-J)
Special Features
Birth and death

Debonding
Isotropic friction
Large deflection
Linear perturbation
Nonlinear
User-defined friction
KEYOPTs
Presented below is a list of KEYOPTS available for this element. Included are links to sections in the
Contact Technology Guide where more information is available on a particular topic.
KEYOPT(1)
Selects degrees of freedom:
0 --
UX, UY
1 --
UX, UY, TEMP
2 --
TEMP
CONTA171
3 --
UX, UY, TEMP, VOLT
4 --
TEMP, VOLT
5 --
UX, UY, VOLT
6 --
VOLT
7 --
AZ
KEYOPT(2)
Contact algorithm:
0 --
Augmented Lagrangian (default)
1 --
Penalty function
2 --
Multipoint constraint (MPC); see "Multipoint Constraints and Assemblies" in the Contact Technology
Guide for more information
3 --
Lagrange multiplier on contact normal and penalty on tangent
4 --
Pure Lagrange multiplier on contact normal and tangent
KEYOPT(3)
Stress state when superelements are present:
0 --
Use with h-elements (no superelements)
1 --
Axisymmetric (use with superelements only)
2 --
Plane stress/Plane strain (use with superelements only)
3 --
Plane stress with thickness input (use with superelements only)
KEYOPT(4)
Location of contact detection point:
0 --
On Gauss point (for general cases)
1 --
On nodal point - normal from contact surface
2 --
On nodal point - normal to target surface
3 --
On nodal point - normal from contact surface (projection-based method)
CONTA171
When using the multipoint constraint (MPC) approach to define surface-based constraints, use
KEYOPT(4) in the following way: set KEYOPT(4) = 1 for a force-distributed constraint, set KEYOPT(4)
= 2 for a rigid surface constraint. See Surface-based Constraints for more information.
Certain restrictions apply when the surface projection-based method (KEYOPT(4) = 3) is defined.
See Using the Surface Projection Based Contact Method (KEYOPT(4) = 3) for more information.
KEYOPT(5)
CNOF/ICONT Automated adjustment:
0 --
No automated adjustment
1 --
Close gap with auto CNOF
2 --
Reduce penetration with auto CNOF
3 --
Close gap/reduce penetration with auto CNOF
4 --
Auto ICONT
KEYOPT(6)
Contact stiffness variation (used to enhance stiffness updating when KEYOPT(10) > 0):
0 --
Use default range for stiffness updating
1 --
Make a nominal refinement to the allowable stiffness range
2 --
Make an aggressive refinement to the allowable stiffness range
KEYOPT(7)
Element level time incrementation control / impact constraints:
0 --
No control
1 --
Automatic bisection of increment
2 --
Change in contact predictions made to maintain a reasonable time/load increment
3 --
Change in contact predictions made to achieve the minimum time/load increment whenever a
change in contact status occurs
4 --
Use impact constraints for standard or rough contact (KEYOPT(12) = 0 or 1) in a transient dynamic
analysis with automatic adjustment of time increment
CONTA171
Note
KEYOPT(7) = 2, 3, and 4 include an automatic adjustment of the time increment. This is

activated only if the command SOLCONTROL,ON,ON was issued prior to the solution.
KEYOPT(8)
Asymmetric contact selection:
0 --
No action
2 --
ANSYS internally selects which asymmetric contact pair is used at the solution stage (used only when
symmetry contact is defined).
KEYOPT(9)
Effect of initial penetration or gap:
0 --
Include both initial geometrical penetration or gap and offset

1 --
Exclude both initial geometrical penetration or gap and offset
2 --
Include both initial geometrical penetration or gap and offset, but with ramped effects
3 --
Include offset only (exclude initial geometrical penetration or gap)
4 --
Include offset only (exclude initial geometrical penetration or gap), but with ramped effects
5 --
Include offset only (exclude initial geometrical penetration or gap) regardless of the initial contact
status (near-field or closed)
6 --
Include offset only (exclude initial geometrical penetration or gap), but with ramped effects regardless
of the initial contact status (near-field or closed)
Note
The effects of KEYOPT(9) are dependent on settings for other KEYOPTs. For KEYOPT(9) =
1, 3, or 4, the indicated initial gap effect is considered only if KEYOPT(12) = 4 or 5. See
the discussion on using KEYOPT(9) in the Contact Technology Guide for more information.
KEYOPT(10)
Contact stiffness update:
0 --
Each load step if FKN is redefined during load step (pair based).
2 --
Each iteration based on current mean stress of underlying elements (pair based).
CONTA171
KEYOPT(11)
Beam/Shell thickness effect:
0 --
Exclude
1 --
Include
KEYOPT(12)
Behavior of contact surface:
0 --
Standard
1 --
Rough
2 --
No separation (sliding permitted)
3 --
Bonded
4 --
No separation (always)
5 --
Bonded (always)
6 --
Bonded (initial contact)
Note
When KEYOPT(12) = 5 or 6 is used with the MPC algorithm to model surface-based con-
straints, the KEYOPT(12) setting will have an impact on the local coordinate system of
the contact element nodes. See Specifying a Local Coordinate System in the Contact
Technology Guide for more information.
KEYOPT(14)
Behavior of fluid pressure penetration load. KEYOPT(14) is valid only if a fluid pressure penetration load
(SFE,,,PRES) is applied to the contact element:
0 --
Fluid pressure penetration load varies during iterations (default)
1 --
Fluid pressure penetration load remains constant over the substep
KEYOPT(15)
Effect of contact stabilization damping:
0 --
Damping is activated only in the first load step (default).
1 --
Deactivate automatic damping.
CONTA171
2 --
Damping is activated for all load steps.
3 --
Damping is activated at all times regardless of the contact status of previous substeps.
Note
Stabilization damping is only applied to contact pairs in near-field contact. When KEY-
OPT(15) = 0, 1, or 2, stabilization damping will not be applied in the current substep if
any contact detection point had a closed status in the previous substep. However, when
KEYOPT(15) = 3, stabilization damping is always applied as long as the current contact
status is near-field. See Applying Contact Stabilization Damping in the Contact Technology
Guide for more information.
Table 1 CONTA171 Real Constants

No. Name Description For more information, see
this section in the Contact
Technology Guide . . .
1 R1 Target circle radius Defining the Target
Surface
2 R2 Superelement thickness Defining the Target
Surface
3 FKN Normal penalty stiffness factor Determining Contact
Stiffness and Penetra-
tion
4 FTOLN Penetration tolerance factor Determining Contact
tion
5 ICONT Initial contact closure Adjusting Initial Con-
tact Conditions
6 PINB Pinball region Determining Contact
Status and the Pinball
Region
or
Defining Influence
Range (PINB)
7 PMAX Upper limit of initial allowable penetra- Adjusting Initial Con-
tion tact Conditions
8 PMIN Lower limit of initial allowable penetra- Adjusting Initial Con-
9 TAUMAX Maximum friction stress Choosing a Friction
Model
10 CNOF Contact surface offset Adjusting Initial Con-
tact Conditions
CONTA171

11 FKOP Contact opening stiffness Selecting Surface Inter-
action Models
12 FKT Tangent penalty stiffness factor Determining Contact
Stiffness
13 COHE Contact cohesion Choosing a Friction
Model
14 TCC Thermal contact conductance Modeling Conduction
15 FHTG Frictional heating factor Modeling Heat Genera-
tion Due to Friction
16 SBCT Stefan-Boltzmann constant Modeling Radiation
17 RDVF Radiation view factor Modeling Radiation
18 FWGT Heat distribution weighing factor Modeling Heat Genera-
(thermal)
or
Heat Generation Due to

Electric Current (elec-
tric)
19 ECC Electric contact conductance Modeling Surface Inter-
action
20 FHEG Joule dissipation weight factor Heat Generation Due to
Electric Current
21 FACT Static/dynamic ratio Static and Dynamic
Friction Coefficients
22 DC Exponential decay coefficient Static and Dynamic
23 SLTO Allowable elastic slip Using FKT and SLTO
24 TNOP Maximum allowable tensile contact Chattering Control
pressure Parameters
25 TOLS Target edge extension factor Selecting Location of
Contact Detection
27 PPCN Pressure penetration criterion Specifying a Pressure
Penetration Criterion
28 FPAT Fluid penetration acting time Specifying a Fluid Pen-
etration Acting Time
29 COR Coefficient of restitution Impact Between Rigid
Bodies
30 STRM Load step number for ramping penet- Adjusting Initial Con-
ration tact Conditions
31 FDMN Normal stabilization damping factor Applying Contact Stabil-
ization Damping
CONTA171

32 FDMT Tangential stabilization damping factor Applying Contact Stabil-
ization Damping
35 TBND Critical bonding temperature Using TBND
CONTA171 Output Data


• Additional element output as shown in Table 2: CONTA171 Element Output Definitions (p. 700)
available.
Table 2: CONTA171 Element Output Definitions (p. 700) gives element output. In the results file, the nodal
results are obtained from its closest integration point.
Table 2 CONTA171 Element Output Definitions

Name Definition O R
NODES Nodes I, J Y Y
TEMP Temperatures T(I), T(J) Y Y
LENGTH Element length Y -
VOLU AREA Y Y
NPI Number of integration points Y -
ITRGET Target surface number (assigned by ANSYS) Y -
ISOLID Underlying solid, shell, or beam element number Y -
CONT:STAT Current contact statuses 1 1
OLDST Old contact statuses 1 1
NX, NY Surface normal vector components Y -
ISEG Current contacting target element number Y Y
CONTA171
Name Definition O R
OLDSEG Underlying old target number Y -
CONT:PENE Current penetration (gap = 0; penetration = positive value) Y Y
CONT:GAP Current gap (gap = negative value; penetration = 0) Y Y
NGAP New or current gap at current converged substep (gap = neg- Y -
ative value; penetration = positive value)
OGAP Old gap at previously converged substep (gap = negative value; Y -
penetration = positive value)
IGAP Initial gap at start of current substep (gap = negative value; Y Y
GGAP Geometric gap at current converged substep (gap = negative - Y
value; penetration = positive value)
CONT:PRES Normal contact pressure Y Y
CONT:SFRIC Tangential contact stress Y Y
3
KN Current normal contact stiffness (Force/Length ) Y Y
3
KT Current tangent contact stiffness (Force/Length ) Y Y
MU Friction coefficient Y -
CONT:SLIDE Total accumulated sliding (algebraic sum) 3 3
ASLIDE Total accumulated sliding (absolute sum) 3 3
TOLN Penetration tolerance Y Y
CONT:STOTAL Total stress SQRT (PRES**2+SFRIC**2) Y Y
FDDIS Frictional energy dissipation 6 6
ELSI Elastic slip distance for sticking contact within a substep - Y
VREL Slip rate - Y
DBA Penetration variation Y Y
PINB Pinball Region - Y
CONT:CNOS Total number of contact status changes during substep Y Y
TNOP Maximum allowable tensile contact pressure Y Y
SLTO Allowable elastic slip Y Y
CAREA Contacting area - Y
CONT:FPRS Actual applied fluid penetration pressure - Y
FSTART Fluid penetration starting time - Y
DTSTART Load step time during debonding Y Y
DPARAM Debonding parameter Y Y
DENERI Energy released due to separation in normal direction - mode Y Y
I debonding
DENERII Energy released due to separation in tangential direction - Y Y
mode II debonding
CNFX Contact element force-x component - 4
CNFY Contact element force-Y component - Y
CONTA171
Name Definition O R
CONV Convection coefficient Y Y
RAC Radiation coefficient Y Y
TCC Conductance coefficient Y Y
TEMPS Temperature at contact point Y Y
TEMPT Temperature at target surface Y Y
FXCV Heat flux due to convection Y Y
FXRD Heat flux due to radiation Y Y
FXCD Heat flux due to conductance Y Y
CONT:FLUX Total heat flux at contact surface Y Y
FXNP Flux input - Y
CNFH Contact element heat flow - Y
JCONT Contact current density (Current/Unit Area) Y Y
CCONT Contact charge density (Charge/Unit Area) Y Y
HJOU Contact power/area Y Y
ECURT Current per contact element - Y
ECHAR Charge per contact element - Y
ECC Electric contact conductance (for electric current DOF), or Y Y
electric contact capacitance per unit area (for piezoelectric or
electrostatic DOFs)
VOLTS Voltage on contact nodes Y Y
VOLTT Voltage on associated target Y Y
1. The possible values of STAT and OLDST are:
0 = Open and not near contact

1 = Open but near contact
2 = Closed and sliding
3 = Closed and sticking
2. ANSYS will evaluate model to detect initial conditions.
3. Only accumulates the sliding when contact occurs.
4. Contact element forces are defined in the global Cartesian system.
6. FDDIS = (contact friction stress)*(sliding distance of substep)/(time increment of substep)
Note
If ETABLE is used for the CONT items, the reported data is averaged across the element.
CONTA171
Note
Contact results (including all element results) are generally not reported for elements that
have a status of “open and not near contact” (far-field).
Table 3: CONTA171 Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 703) lists output available through the ETABLE command
is used in Table 3: CONTA171 Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 703):
Name
output quantity as defined in the Table 2: CONTA171 Element Output Definitions (p. 700)
Item
E
I,J
Table 3 CONTA171 Item and Sequence Numbers

Quant- Input
ity Item E I J
Name
PRES SMISC 5 1 2
SFRIC SMISC - 3 4
FLUX SMISC - 6 7
FDDIS SMISC - 8 9
FXCV SMISC - 10 11
FXRD SMISC - 12 13
FXCD SMISC - 14 15
FXNP SMISC - 16 17
JCONT SMISC - 18 19
CCONT SMISC - 18 19
HJOU SMISC - 20 21
STAT[1] NMISC 19 1 2
OLDST NMISC - 3 4
PENE[2] NMISC - 5 6
DBA NMISC - 7 8
SLIDE NMISC - 9 10
KN NMISC - 11 12
KT NMISC - 13 14
TOLN NMISC - 15 16
CONTA171

Quant- Input
ity Item E I J
Name
IGAP NMISC - 17 18
PINB NMISC 20 - -
CNFX NMISC 21 - -
CNFY NMISC 22 - -
ISEG NMISC - 23 24
ASLIDE NMISC - 25 26
CAREA NMISC 27 - -
MU NMISC - 29 30
DTSTART NMISC - 31 32
DPARAM NMISC - 33 34
FPRS NMISC - 35 36
TEMPS NMISC - 37 38
TEMPT NMISC - 39 40
CONV NMISC - 41 42
RAC NMISC - 43 44
TCC NMISC - 45 46
CNFH NMISC 47 - -
ECURT NMISC 48 - -
ECHAR NMISC 48 - -
ECC NMISC - 49 50
VOLTS NMISC - 51 52
VOLTT NMISC - 53 54
CNOS NMISC - 55 56
TNOP NMISC - 57 58
SLTO NMISC - 59 60
ELSI NMISC - 67 68
DENERI NMISC - 69 70
DENERII NMISC - 71 72
FSTART NMISC - 73 74
GGAP NMISC - 75 76
VREL NMISC - 77 78
1. Element Status = highest value of status of integration points within the element
2. Penetration = positive value, gap = negative value
You can display or list contact results through several POST1 postprocessor commands. The contact
specific items for the PLNSOL, PLESOL, PRNSOL, and PRESOL commands are listed below:
CONTA171
STAT Contact status

PENE Contact penetration
PRES Contact pressure
SFRIC Contact friction stress
STOT Contact total stress (pressure plus friction)
SLIDE Contact sliding distance
GAP Contact gap distance
FLUX Total heat flux at contact surface
CNOS Total number of contact status changes during sub-
step
FPRS Actual applied fluid penetration pressure
CONTA171 Assumptions and Restrictions

• The 2-D contact element must be defined in an X-Y plane and the Y-axis must be the axis of symmetry
for axisymmetric analyses.
• This 2-D contact element works with any 3-D elements in your model.
• Do not use this element in any model that contains axisymmetric harmonic elements.
• Node numbering must coincide with the external surface of the underlying solid, shell, or beam element,
or with the original elements comprising the superelement.
• This element is nonlinear and requires a full Newton iterative solution, regardless of whether large or
small deflections are specified. An exception to this is when MPC bonded contact is specified (KEYOPT(2)
= 2 and KEYOPT(12) = 5 or 6).
• The normal contact stiffness factor (FKN) must not be so large as to cause numerical instability.
• FTOLN, PINB, and FKOP can be changed between load steps or during restart stages.
• You can use this element in nonlinear static or nonlinear full transient analyses. In addition, you can
use it in modal analyses, eigenvalue buckling analyses, and harmonic analyses. For these analysis types,
the program assumes that the initial status of the element (i.e., the status at the completion of the
static prestress analysis, if any) does not change.
• When nodal detection is used and the contact node is on the axis of symmetry in an axisymmetric
analysis, the contact pressure on that node is not accurate since the area of the node is zero. The contact
force is accurate in this situation.
• The userfric subroutine (user-defined friction) can only be used with penalty-based tangential contact
(KEYOPT(2) = 0, 1, or 3).
CONTA171 Product Restrictions

ANSYS Professional
• The MU material property is not allowed.
CONTA171
ANSYS Structural
• The VOLT DOF (KEYOPT(1) = 3 through 6) is not allowed.

• The AZ DOF (KEYOPT(1) = 7) is not allowed.
ANSYS Mechanical
CONTA172

CONTA172 represents contact and sliding between 2-D "target" surfaces (TARGE169) and a deformable
surface, defined by this element. The element is applicable to 2-D structural and coupled field contact
analyses. This element is located on the surfaces of 2-D solid elements with midside nodes (PLANE35,
PLANE77, PLANE53, PLANE121, PLANE183, SHELL209, PLANE223, PLANE230, or MATRIX50). It has the
same geometric characteristics as the solid element face with which it is connected (see Figure 1 (p. 707)).
Contact occurs when the element surface penetrates one of the target segment elements (TARGE169)
on a specified target surface. Coulomb friction, shear stress friction, and user defined friction with the
USERFRIC subroutine are allowed. This element also allows separation of bonded contact to simulate
interface delamination. See CONTA172 in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for more details about
this element. See Quadratic Elements (Midside Nodes) in the Modeling and Meshing Guide for a discussion
concerning midside nodes. Other surface-to-surface contact elements (CONTA171, CONTA173, CONTA174)
are also available.
Associated Target Surface

Contact normal Contact Element
Surface of Solid Element
J I
Y
CONTA172 Input Data

The geometry and node locations are shown in Figure 1 (p. 707). The element is defined by three nodes
(the underlying solid element has midside nodes). If the underlying solid elements do not have midside
nodes, use CONTA171 (you may still use CONTA172 but you must drop the midside nodes). The element
x-axis is along the I-J line of the element. The correct node ordering of the contact element is critical
for proper detection of contact. The nodes must be ordered such that the target must lie to the right
side of the contact element when moving from the first contact element node to the second contact
element node as in Figure 1 (p. 707). See Generating Contact Elements in the Contact Technology Guide
for more information on generating elements automatically using the ESURF command.
set. For either rigid-flexible or flexible-flexible contact, one of the deformable surfaces must be repres-
ented by a contact surface. See Designating Contact and Target Surfaces in the Contact Technology
CONTA172
with different real constant numbers), or you must combine the two target surfaces into one (both
having the same real constant number).
To model isotropic friction, use the TB,FRIC,,,,ISO command. You can define a coefficient of friction that
is dependent on temperature, time, normal pressure, sliding distance, or sliding relative velocity by using
the TBFIELD command along with TB,FRIC,,,,ISO. See Contact Friction in the Material Reference for more
information.
friction properties and write a USERFRIC subroutine to compute friction forces. See User-Defined Friction
in the Material Reference for more information on how to use this feature. See also the Guide to ANSYS
User Programmable Features for a detailed description of the USERFRIC subroutine.
Technology Guide.
This element supports various 2-D stress states, including plane stress, plane strain, and axisymmetric
states. The stress state is automatically detected according to the stress state of the underlying element.
However, if the underlying element is a superelement, you must use KEYOPT(3) to specify the stress
state.
In general, curved contact and target surfaces can be well approximated by quadratic contact and target
elements when the mesh is sufficiently refined. However, in certain circumstances (for example, when
linear elements are used or when the midside nodes of quadratic elements do not lie exactly on the
initial curved geometry because a third party mesh generator was used) using a straight line in place
of the true curved geometry can significantly affect the accuracy of contact stresses. An optional geo-
metric correction can be used for a circular (or nearly circular) arc via SECTYPE and SECDATA section
commands. The defined geometry correction can be applied to specific contact elements via a section
ID (SECNUM command). For details, see Geometry Correction for Contact and Target Surfaces in the
Contact Technology Guide.

Nodes
I, J, K
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY (if KEYOPT(1) = 0)

UX, UY, TEMP (if KEYOPT(1) = 1)
CONTA172
UX, UY, TEMP, VOLT (if KEYOPT(1) = 3)

UX, UY, VOLT (if KEYOPT(1) = 5)
AZ (if KEYOPT(1) = 7)
Real Constants

TOLS, , PPCN, FPAT, COR, STRM
Material Properties

Guide)
Surface Loads
Pressure, Face 1 (I-J) (opposite to contact normal direction); used for fluid pressure penetration
Convection, Face 1 (I-J-K)
Heat Flux, Face 1 (I-J-K)
Special Features
Birth and death

Debonding
Isotropic friction
Large deflection
Linear perturbation
Nonlinear
KEYOPTs
KEYOPT(1)
0 --
UX, UY
1 --
UX, UY, TEMP
CONTA172
2 --
TEMP
3 --
UX, UY, TEMP, VOLT
4 --
TEMP, VOLT
5 --
UX, UY, VOLT
6 --
VOLT
7 --
AZ
KEYOPT(2)
Contact algorithm:
0 --
1 --
Penalty function
2 --
3 --
4 --
KEYOPT(3)
Stress state when superelements are present:
0 --
Use with h-elements (no superelements)
1 --
Axisymmetric (use with superelements only)
2 --
Plane stress/Plane strain (use with superelements only)
3 --
Plane stress with thickness input (use with superelements only)
KEYOPT(4)
0 --
1 --
2 --
CONTA172
3 --
Note
When using the multipoint constraint (MPC) approach to define surface-based constraints,
use KEYOPT(4) in the following way: set KEYOPT(4) = 1 for a force-distributed constraint,
set KEYOPT(4) = 2 for a rigid surface constraint. See Surface-based Constraints for more
information.
Note
Certain restrictions apply when the surface projection-based method (KEYOPT(4) = 3) is

defined. See Using the Surface Projection Based Contact Method (KEYOPT(4) = 3) for
more information.
KEYOPT(5)
0 --
1 --
2 --
3 --
4 --
Auto ICONT
KEYOPT(6)
0 --
1 --
2 --
KEYOPT(7)
0 --
No control
1 --
2 --
CONTA172
3 --
4 --
Note

KEYOPT(8)
0 --
No action
2 --
KEYOPT(9)
0 --

1 --
2 --
3 --
4 --
5 --
6 --
Note
CONTA172
KEYOPT(10)
0 --
2 --
KEYOPT(11)
Beam/Shell thickness effect:
0 --
Exclude
1 --
Include
KEYOPT(12)
0 --
Standard
1 --
Rough
2 --
3 --
Bonded
4 --
5 --
Bonded (always)
6 --
Note
KEYOPT(14)
0 --
1 --
CONTA172
KEYOPT(15)
0 --
1 --
2 --
3 --
Note

1 R1 Target circle radius Defining the Target
Surface
2 R2 Superelement thickness Defining the Target
Surface
tion
tion
tact Conditions
Region
or
Defining Influence
Range (PINB)
CONTA172

Model
tact Conditions
action Models
Stiffness
Model
(thermal)
or

tric)
action
Electric Current
pressure Parameters
Contact Detection
CONTA172

Bodies
ization Damping
ization Damping


available.

Name Definition O R
NODES Nodes I, J Y Y
LENGTH Element length Y -
VOLU AREA Y Y
CONTA172
Name Definition O R
ISOLID Underlying solid, shell, or beam element number Y -
NX, NY Surface normal vector components Y -
CONT:SFRIC Tangential contact stress Y Y
3
3
MU Friction coefficient Y -
CONT:SLIDE Total accumulated sliding (algebraic sum) 3 3
ASLIDE Total accumulated sliding (absolute sum) 3 3
CONT:STOTAL Total stress SQRT (PRES**2+SFRIC**2) Y Y
VREL Slip rate - Y
CONTA172
Name Definition O R
I debonding
mode II debonding
CNFX Contact element force-x component - 4
FXNP Flux input - Y
electrostatic DOFs)

CONTA172
Note
Note
Name
Item
E
I,J

Quant- Input
ity Item E I J
Name
PRES SMISC 5 1 2
SFRIC SMISC - 3 4
FLUX SMISC - 6 7
FDDIS SMISC - 8 9
FXCV SMISC - 10 11
FXRD SMISC - 12 13
FXCD SMISC - 14 15
FXNP SMISC - 16 17
JCONT SMISC - 18 19
CCONT SMISC - 18 19
HJOU SMISC - 20 21
STAT[1] NMISC 19 1 2
OLDST NMISC - 3 4
PENE[2] NMISC - 5 6
DBA NMISC - 7 8
CONTA172

Quant- Input
ity Item E I J
Name
SLIDE NMISC - 9 10
KN NMISC - 11 12
KT NMISC - 13 14
TOLN NMISC - 15 16
IGAP NMISC - 17 18
PINB NMISC 20 - -
CNFX NMISC 21 - -
CNFY NMISC 22 - -
ISEG NMISC - 23 24
ASLIDE NMISC - 25 26
CAREA NMISC 27 - -
MU NMISC - 29 30
DTSTART NMISC - 31 32
DPARAM NMISC - 33 34
FPRS NMISC - 35 36
TEMPS NMISC - 37 38
TEMPT NMISC - 39 40
CONV NMISC - 41 42
RAC NMISC - 43 44
TCC NMISC - 45 46
CNFH NMISC 47 - -
ECURT NMISC 48 - -
ECHAR NMISC 48 - -
ECC NMISC - 49 50
VOLTS NMISC - 51 52
VOLTT NMISC - 53 54
CNOS NMISC - 55 56
TNOP NMISC - 57 58
SLTO NMISC - 59 60
ELSI NMISC - 67 68
DENERI NMISC - 69 70
DENERII NMISC - 71 72
FSTART NMISC - 73 74
GGAP NMISC - 75 76
VREL NMISC - 77 78
CONTA172
3. Contact element forces are defined in the global Cartesian system
STAT Contact status

step

• The 2-D contact element must be defined in an X-Y plane and the Y-axis must be the axis of symmetry
for axisymmetric analyses.
• This 2-D contact element works with any 3-D elements in your model.
• Do not use this element in any model that contains axisymmetric harmonic elements.
• Node numbering must coincide with the external surface of the underlying solid element or with the
original elements comprising the superelement.
= 2 and KEYOPT(12) = 5 or 6).
• When nodal detection is used and the contact node is on the axis of symmetry in an axisymmetric
analysis, the contact pressure on that node is not accurate since the area of the node is zero. The contact
force is accurate in this situation.
• The USERFRIC subroutine (user-defined friction) can only be used with penalty-based tangential contact
(i.e., KEYOPT(2) = 0, 1, or 3).
CONTA172

ANSYS Professional

ANSYS Structural

ANSYS Mechanical
CONTA173

field contact analyses. This element is located on the surfaces of 3-D solid or shell elements without
midside nodes (SOLID65, SOLID70, SOLID96, SOLID185, SOLID285, SOLSH190, SHELL28, SHELL41,
SHELL131, SHELL157, SHELL181, and MATRIX50). It has the same geometric characteristics as the solid
or shell element face with which it is connected (see Figure 1 (p. 723)). Contact occurs when the element
surface penetrates one of the target segment elements (TARGE170) on a specified target surface. Coulomb
friction, shear stress friction, and user defined friction with the USERFRIC subroutine are allowed. This
element also allows separation of bonded contact to simulate interface delamination. See CONTA173
in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for more details about this element. Other surface-to-surface
contact elements (CONTA171, CONTA172, CONTA174) are also available.
Associated Target Surfaces
Contact Elements
L
S
y K
K,L
I x R
Z xy I
J
Y J
X Surface of Solid/Shell Element
R = Element x-axis for isotropic friction
xo = Element axis for orthotropic friction if ESYS is not supplied (parallel to global X-
axis)
x = Element axis for orthotropic friction if ESYS is supplied
CONTA173 Input Data

The geometry and node locations are shown in Figure 1 (p. 723). The element is defined by four nodes
(the underlying solid or shell element has no midside nodes). If the underlying solid or shell elements
do have midside nodes, use CONTA174. The node ordering is consistent with the node ordering for the
underlying solid or shell element. The positive normal is given by the right-hand rule going around the
CONTA173
nodes of the element and is identical to the external normal direction of the underlying solid or shell
element surface. For shell elements, the same nodal ordering between shell and contact elements
defines upper surface contact; otherwise, it represents bottom surface contact. Remember the target
surfaces must always be on its outward normal direction. See Generating Contact Elements in the
Contact Technology Guide for more information on generating elements automatically using the ESURF
command.
which have different real constant numbers), or you must combine the two target surfaces into one
(targets that share the same real constant numbers).
CONTA173 supports isotropic and orthotropic Coulomb friction. For isotropic friction, specify a single
coefficient of friction, MU, using either TB command input (recommended) or the MP command. For
orthotropic friction, specify two coefficients of friction, MU1 and MU2, in two principal directions using
TB command input. (See Contact Friction in the Material Reference for more information.)
For isotropic friction, the applicable coordinate system is the default element coordinate system (noted
by the R and S axes in the above figure).
For orthotropic friction, the principal directions are determined as follows. The global coordinate system
is used by default, or you may define a local element coordinate system with the ESYS command.
(These are depicted by the xoand x axes in the above figure.) The first principal direction is defined by
projecting the first direction of the chosen coordinate system onto the contact surface. The second
principal direction is defined by taking a cross product of the first principal direction and the contact
normal. These directions also follow the rigid body rotation of the contact element to correctly model
the directional dependence of friction. Be careful to choose the coordinate system (global or local) so
that the first direction of that system is within 45° of the tangent to the contact surface.
If you want to set the coordinate directions for isotropic friction (to the global Cartesian system or an-
other system via ESYS), you can define orthotropic friction and set MU1 = MU2.
To define a coefficient of friction for isotropic or orthotropic friction that is dependent on temperature,
time, normal pressure, sliding distance, or sliding relative velocity, use the TBFIELD command along
with TB,FRIC. See Contact Friction in the Material Reference for more information.
Technology Guide.
CONTA173
In general, curved contact and target surfaces can be well approximated by faceted contact and target
elements when the mesh is sufficiently refined. However, using a faceted surface in place of the true
curved geometry can significantly affect the accuracy of contact stresses in some contact applications.
An optional geometric correction can be used for two types of curved surfaces (spherical and revolute)
via SECTYPE and SECDATA section commands. The defined geometry correction can be applied to
specific contact elements via a section ID (SECNUM command). For details, see Geometry Correction
for Contact and Target Surfaces in the Contact Technology Guide.

Nodes
I, J, K, L
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, UZ (if KEYOPT(1) = 0)

UX, UY, UZ, TEMP (if KEYOPT(1) = 1)
UX, UY, UZ, TEMP, VOLT (if KEYOPT(1) = 3)
UX, UY, UZ, VOLT (if KEYOPT(1) = 5)
MAG (if KEYOPT(1) = 7)
Real Constants

TOLS, MCC, PPCN, FPAT, COR, STRM
FDMN, FDMT, FDMD, FDMS, TBND
Material Properties

Guide)
CONTA173
Surface Loads
Pressure, Face 1 (I-J-K-L) (opposite to contact normal direction); used for fluid pressure penetration
Convection, Face 1 (I-J-K-L)
Heat Flux, Face 1 (I-J-K-L)
Special Features
Birth and death

Debonding
Isotropic friction
Large deflection
Linear perturbation
Nonlinear
Orthotropic friction
KEYOPTs
KEYOPT(1)
0 --
UX, UY, UZ
1 --
UX, UY, UZ, TEMP
2 --
TEMP
3 --
UX, UY, UZ, TEMP, VOLT
4 --
TEMP, VOLT
5 --
UX, UY, UZ, VOLT
6 --
VOLT
7 --
MAG
KEYOPT(2)
Contact algorithm:
0 --
1 --
Penalty function
CONTA173
2 --
3 --
4 --
KEYOPT(4)
0 --
1 --
2 --
3 --
Note
information.
Note
Certain restrictions apply when the surface-projection-based method (KEYOPT(4) = 3) is

more information.
KEYOPT(5)
CNOF/ICONT automated adjustment:
0 --
1 --
2 --
3 --
4 --
Auto ICONT
KEYOPT(6)
CONTA173
0 --
1 --
2 --
KEYOPT(7)
0 --
No control
1 --
2 --
3 --
4 --
Note

KEYOPT(8)
0 --
No action
2 --
KEYOPT(9)
0 --

1 --
2 --
3 --
CONTA173
4 --
5 --
6 --
Note
KEYOPT(10)
0 --
2 --
KEYOPT(11)
Shell thickness effect:
0 --
Exclude
1 --
Include
KEYOPT(12)
0 --
Standard
1 --
Rough
2 --
3 --
Bonded
4 --
5 --
Bonded (always)
6 --
CONTA173
Note
KEYOPT(14)
0 --
1 --
KEYOPT(15)
0 --
1 --
2 --
3 --
Note
KEYOPT(16)
Squeal damping controls for interpretation of real constants FDMD and FDMS:
0 --
FDMD and FDMS are scaling factors for destabilizing and stabilizing damping (default).
1 --
FDMD is a constant friction-sliding velocity gradient. FDMS is the stabilization damping coefficient.
CONTA173
2 --
FDMD and FDMS are the destabilizing and stabilization damping coefficients.

1 R1 Target radius for cylinder, cone, or Defining the Target
sphere Surface
2 R2 Target radius at second node of cone Defining the Target
Surface
tion
tion
tact Conditions
Region
or
Defining Influence
Range (PINB)
Model
tact Conditions
action Models
Stiffness
Model
CONTA173

(thermal)
or

tric)
action
Electric Current
24 TNOP Maximum allowable tensile contact pressure Chattering Control
Parameters
Contact Detection
26 MCC Magnetic contact permeance Modeling Magnetic
Contact
Bodies
ization Damping
ization Damping
33 FDMD Destabilizing squeal damping factor Forced Frictional Slid-
ing Using Velocity Input
34 FDMS Stabilizing squeal damping factor Forced Frictional Slid-
CONTA173


available.
Table 2: CONTA173 Element Output Definitions (p. 733) gives element output at the element level. In the
results file, the nodal results are obtained from its closest integration point.

Name Definition O R
NODES Nodes I, J, K, L Y Y
VOLU AREA Y Y
ISOLID Underlying solid or shell element number Y -
CONTA173
Name Definition O R
TAUR/TAUS[7] Tangential contact stresses Y Y
3
3
MU[8] Friction coefficient Y -
TASS/TASR[7] Total (algebraic sum) sliding in S and R directions 3 3
AASS/AASR[7] Total (absolute sum) sliding in S and R directions 3 3
CONT:SFRIC Frictional stress SQRT (TAUR**2+TAUS**2) Y Y
CONT:STOTAL Total stress SQRT (PRES**2+TAUR**2+TAUS**2) Y Y
CONT:SLIDE Total sliding SQRT (TASS**2+TASR**2) Y Y
VREL Slip rate - Y
I debonding
mode II debonding
CNFX[4] Contact element force-X component - Y
CNFZ Contact element force-Z component - Y
SDAMP Squeal damping coefficient - Y
CONTA173
Name Definition O R
FXNP Flux input - Y
electrostatic DOFs)
MCC Magnetic contact permeance Y Y
MFLUX Magnetic flux density Y Y
MAGS Magnetic potential on contact node Y Y
MAGT Magnetic potential on associated target Y Y

7. For the case of orthotropic friction, components are defined in the global Cartesian system (default)
or in the local element coordinate system specified by ESYS.
8. For orthotropic friction, an equivalent coefficient of friction is output.
Note
CONTA173
Note
Name
Item
E
I,J,K,L

ity
Name
PRES SMISC 13 1 2 3 4
TAUR SMISC - 5 6 7 8
TAUS SMISC - 9 10 11 12
FLUX SMISC - 14 15 16 17
FDDIS SMISC - 18 19 20 21
FXCV SMISC 22 23 24 25
FXRD SMISC - 26 27 28 29
FXCD SMISC - 30 31 32 33
FXNP SMISC - 34 35 36 37
JCONT SMISC - 38 39 40 41
CCONT SMISC - 38 39 40 41
HJOU SMISC - 42 43 44 45
MFLUX SMISC - 46 47 48 49
STAT[1] NMISC 41 1 2 3 4
OLDST NMISC - 5 6 7 8
PENE[2] NMISC - 9 10 11 12
DBA NMISC - 13 14 15 16
TASR NMISC - 17 18 19 20
TASS NMISC - 21 22 23 24
CONTA173

ity
Name
KN NMISC - 25 26 27 28
KT NMISC - 29 30 31 32
TOLN NMISC - 33 34 35 36
IGAP NMISC - 37 38 39 40
PINB NMISC 42 - - - -
CNFX NMISC 43 - - - -
CNFY NMISC 44 - - - -
CNFZ NMISC 45 - - - -
ISEG NMISC - 46 47 48 49
AASR NMISC - 50 51 52 53
AASS NMISC - 54 55 56 57
CAREA NMISC 58 - - - -
MU NMISC - 62 63 64 65
DTSTART NMISC - 66 67 68 69
DPARAM NMISC - 70 71 72 73
FPRS NMISC - 74 75 76 77
TEMPS NMISC - 78 79 80 81
TEMPT NMISC - 82 83 84 85
CONV NMISC - 86 87 88 89
RAC NMISC - 90 91 92 93
TCC NMISC - 94 95 96 97
CNFH NMISC 98 - - - -
ECURT NMISC 99 - - - -
ECHAR NMISC 99 - - - -
ECC NMISC - 100 101 102 103
VOLTS NMISC - 104 105 106 107
VOLTT NMISC - 108 109 110 111
CNOS NMISC - 112 113 114 115
TNOP NMISC - 116 117 118 119
SLTO NMISC - 120 121 122 123
MCC NMISC - 124 125 126 127
MAGS NMISC - 128 129 130 131
MAGT NMISC - 132 133 134 135
ELSI NMISC - 136 137 138 139
DENERI NMISC - 140 141 142 143
CONTA173

ity
Name
DENERII NMISC - 144 145 146 147
FSTART NMISC - 148 140 150 151
GGAP NMISC - 152 153 154 155
VREL NMISC - 156 157 158 159
SDAMP NMISC - 160 161 162 163
STAT Contact status

step

• The 3-D contact element must coincide with the external surface of the underlying solid or shell element
or with the original elements comprising the superelement.
= 2 and KEYOPT(12) = 5 or 6).
(i.e., KEYOPT(2) = 0, 1, or 3).
CONTA173

ANSYS Professional
• The MU material property is not allowed

ANSYS Structural

• The MAG DOF (KEYOPT(1) = 7) is not allowed.
ANSYS Mechanical
CONTA174

field contact analyses.
The element is located on the surfaces of 3-D solid or shell elements with midside nodes (SOLID87,
SOLID90, SOLID98, SOLID122, SOLID123, SOLID186, SOLID187, SOLID226, SOLID227, SOLID231, SOLID232,
SHELL132, SHELL281, and MATRIX50).
The element has the same geometric characteristics as the solid or shell element face with which it is
connected (see Figure 1 (p. 741) below). Contact occurs when the element surface penetrates one of the
target segment elements (TARGE170) on a specified target surface. Coulomb friction, shear stress friction,
and user-defined friction with the USERFRIC subroutine are allowed. The element also allows separation
of bonded contact to simulate interface delamination.
See CONTA174 in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for more details about this element. Other
surface-to-surface contact elements (CONTA171, CONTA172, CONTA173) are also available.
Associated Target Surfaces
Contact Elements
L
O
P y P K,L,O
K N
I x R
x y N I
Z M M J
J
Y
X Surface of Solid/Shell Element
R = Element x-axis for isotropic friction
xo = Element axis for orthotropic friction if ESYS is not supplied (parallel to global X-
axis)
x = Element axis for orthotropic friction if ESYS is supplied
CONTA174
CONTA174 Input Data

The geometry and node locations are shown in Figure 1 (p. 741). The element is defined by eight nodes
(the underlying solid or shell element has midside nodes). It can degenerate to a six node element de-
pending on the shape of the underlying solid or shell elements. If the underlying solid or shell elements
do not have midside nodes, use CONTA173 (you may still use CONTA174 but you must drop all midside
nodes). See Quadratic Elements (Midside Nodes) in the Modeling and Meshing Guide for more information
on the use of midside nodes. The node ordering is consistent with the node ordering for the underlying
solid or shell element. The positive normal is given by the right-hand rule going around the nodes of
the element and is identical to the external normal direction of the underlying solid or shell element
surface. For shell elements, the same nodal ordering between shell and contact elements defines upper
surface contact; otherwise, it represents bottom surface contact. Remember the target surfaces must
always be on its outward normal direction. See Generating Contact Elements in the Contact Technology
Guide for more information on generating elements automatically using the ESURF command.
The 3-D contact surface elements (CONTA173 and CONTA174) are associated with the 3-D target segment
elements (TARGE170) via a shared real constant set. ANSYS looks for contact only between surfaces
with the same real constant set. For either rigid-flexible or flexible-flexible contact, one of the deformable
surfaces must be represented by a contact surface. See Designating Contact and Target Surfaces in the
Contact Technology Guide for more information.
which have different real constant numbers), or you must combine two target surfaces into one (targets
that share the same real constant numbers).
For isotropic friction, the applicable coordinate system is the default element coordinate system (noted
by the R and S axes in the above figure).
is used by default, or you may define a local element coordinate system with the ESYS command.
(These are depicted by the xo and x axes in the above figure.) The first principal direction is defined by
projecting the first direction of the chosen coordinate system onto the contact surface. The second
principal direction is defined by taking a cross product of the first principal direction and the contact
normal. These directions also follow the rigid body rotation of the contact element to correctly model
the directional dependence of friction. Be careful to choose the coordinate system (global or local) so
that the first direction of that system is within 45° of the tangent to the contact surface.
friction properties and write a USERFRIC subroutine to compute friction forces. See User-Defined
CONTA174
Friction in the Material Reference for more information on how to use this feature. See also the Guide
to ANSYS User Programmable Features for a detailed description of the USERFRIC subroutine.
Technology Guide.
In general, curved contact and target surfaces can be well approximated by quadratic order contact
and target elements. However, in certain circumstances (for example, when the midside nodes do not
lie exactly on the initial curved geometry because a third party mesh generator was used), using a faceted
surface in place of the true curved geometry can significantly affect the accuracy of contact stresses.
An optional geometric correction can be used for two types of curved surfaces (spherical and revolute)
via SECTYPE and SECDATA section commands. The defined geometry correction can be applied to
specific contact elements via a section ID (SECNUM command). For details, see Geometry Correction
for Contact and Target Surfaces in the Contact Technology Guide.

Nodes
I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, UZ (if KEYOPT(1) = 0)

UX, UY, UZ, TEMP (if KEYOPT(1) = 1)
UX, UY, UZ, TEMP, VOLT (if KEYOPT(1) = 3)
UX, UY, UZ, VOLT (if KEYOPT(1) = 5)
MAG (if KEYOPT(1) = 7)
Real Constants

TOLS, MCC, PPCN, FPAT, COR, STRM
CONTA174
Material Properties

Guide)
Surface Loads
Pressure, Face 1 (I-J-K-L) (opposite to contact normal direction); used for fluid pressure penetration
Convection, Face 1 (I-J-K-L)
Heat Flux, Face 1 (I-J-K-L)
Special Features
Birth and death

Debonding
Isotropic friction
Large deflection
Linear perturbation
Nonlinear
KEYOPTs
KEYOPT(1)
0 --
UX, UY, UZ
1 --
UX, UY, UZ, TEMP
2 --
TEMP
3 --
4 --
TEMP, VOLT
5 --
UX, UY, UZ, VOLT
6 --
VOLT
7 --
MAG
CONTA174
KEYOPT(2)
Contact algorithm:
0 --
1 --
Penalty function
2 --
3 --
4 --
KEYOPT(4)
0 --
1 --
2 --
3 --
Note
information.
Note
Certain restrictions apply when the surface-projection-based method (KEYOPT(4) = 3) is

more information.
KEYOPT(5)
0 --
1 --
2 --
CONTA174
3 --
4 --
Auto ICONT
KEYOPT(6)
0 --
1 --
2 --
KEYOPT(7)
0 --
No control
1 --
2 --
3 --
4 --
Note

KEYOPT(8)
0 --
No action
2 --
KEYOPT(9)
0 --
CONTA174
1 --
2 --
3 --
4 --
5 --
6 --
Note
KEYOPT(10)
0 --
2 --
KEYOPT(11)
Shell thickness effect:
0 --
Exclude
1 --
Include
KEYOPT(12)
0 --
Standard
1 --
Rough
2 --
3 --
Bonded
CONTA174
4 --
5 --
Bonded (always)
6 --
Note
KEYOPT(14)
0 --
1 --
KEYOPT(15)
0 --
1 --
2 --
3 --
Note
KEYOPT(16)
0 --
CONTA174
1 --
2 --

sphere Surface
Surface
tion
tion
tact Conditions
Region
or
Defining Influence
Range (PINB)
Model
tact Conditions
action Models
Stiffness
Model
CONTA174

(thermal)
or

tric)
action
Electric Current
pressure Parameters
Contact Detection
Contact
Bodies
ization Damping
ization Damping
33 FDMD Destabilization squeal damping factor Forced Frictional Slid-
34 FDMS Stabilization squeal damping factor Forced Frictional Slid-
CONTA174


available.

Name Definition O R
NODES Nodes I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P Y Y
VOLU AREA Y Y
OGAP Old gap from previously converged substep (gap = negative Y -
CONTA174
Name Definition O R
TAUR/TAUS[7] Tangential contact stresses Y Y
3
3
CONT:SFRIC Frictional stress SQRT (TAUR**2+TAUS**2) Y Y
CONT:STOTAL Total stress SQRT (PRES**2+TAUR**2+TAUS**2) Y Y
CONT:SLIDE Total sliding SQRT (TASS**2 + TASR**2) Y Y
VREL Slip rate - Y
I debonding
mode II debonding
CNFX Contact element force-X component - 4
SDAMP Squeal damping coefficient - Y
CONTA174
Name Definition O R
FXNP Flux input - Y
electrostatic DOFs)
MCC Magnetic contact permeance Y Y
MAGS Magnetic potential on contact node Y Y
MAGT Magnetic potential on associated target Y Y

Note
CONTA174
Note
Name
Item
E
I,J,K,L
sequence number for data at nodes I,J,K,L,

ity
Name
PRES SMISC 13 1 2 3 4
TAUR SMISC - 5 6 7 8
TAUS SMISC - 9 10 11 12
FLUX SMISC - 14 15 16 17
FDDIS SMISC - 18 19 20 21
FXCV SMISC 22 23 24 25
FXRD SMISC - 26 27 28 29
FXCD SMISC - 30 31 32 33
FXNP SMISC - 34 35 36 37
JCONT SMISC - 38 39 40 41
CCONT SMISC - 38 39 40 41
HJOU SMISC - 42 43 44 45
MFLUX SMISC - 46 47 48 49
STAT[1] NMISC 41 1 2 3 4
OLDST NMISC - 5 6 7 8
PENE[2] NMISC - 9 10 11 12
DBA NMISC - 13 14 15 16
TASR NMISC - 17 18 19 20
TASS NMISC - 21 22 23 24
CONTA174

ity
Name
KN NMISC - 25 26 27 28
KT NMISC - 29 30 31 32
TOLN NMISC - 33 34 35 36
IGAP NMISC - 37 38 39 40
PINB NMISC 42 - - - -
CNFX NMISC 43 - - - -
CNFY NMISC 44 - - - -
CNFZ NMISC 45 - - - -
ISEG NMISC - 46 47 48 49
AASR NMISC - 50 51 52 53
AASS NMISC - 54 55 56 57
CAREA NMISC 58 - - - -
MU NMISC - 62 63 64 65
DTSTART NMISC - 66 67 68 69
DPARAM NMISC - 70 71 72 73
FPRS NMISC - 74 75 76 77
TEMPS NMISC - 78 79 80 81
TEMPT NMISC - 82 83 84 85
CONV NMISC - 86 87 88 89
RAC NMISC - 90 91 92 93
TCC NMISC - 94 95 96 97
CNFH NMISC 98 - - - -
ECURT NMISC 99 - - - -
ECHAR NMISC 99 - - - -
ECC NMISC - 100 101 102 103
VOLTS NMISC - 104 105 106 107
VOLTT NMISC - 108 109 110 111
CNOS NMISC - 112 113 114 115
TNOP NMISC - 116 117 118 119
SLTO NMISC - 120 121 122 123
MCC NMISC - 124 125 126 127
MAGS NMISC - 128 129 130 131
MAGT NMISC - 132 133 134 135
ELSI NMISC - 136 137 138 139
DENERI NMISC - 140 141 142 143
CONTA174

ity
Name
DENERII NMISC - 144 145 146 147
FSTART NMISC - 148 149 150 151
GGAP NMISC - 152 153 154 155
VREL NMISC - 156 157 158 159
SDAMP NMISC - 160 161 162 163
STAT Contact status

step

• The 3-D contact element must coincide with the external surface of the underlying solid or shell element.
= 2 and KEYOPT(12) = 5 or 6).
• You can use this element in nonlinear static or nonlinear full transient analyses.
• In addition, you can use it in modal analyses, eigenvalue buckling analyses, and harmonic analyses. For
these analysis types, the program assumes that the initial status of the element (i.e., the status at the
completion of the static prestress analysis, if any) does not change.
(i.e., KEYOPT(2) = 0, 1, or 3).
CONTA174

ANSYS Professional
• The MU material property is not allowed

ANSYS Structural

ANSYS Mechanical
CONTA175
2-D/3-D Node-to-Surface Contact

CONTA175 may be used to represent contact and sliding between two surfaces (or between a node
and a surface, or between a line and a surface) in 2-D or 3-D. The element is applicable to 2-D or 3-D
structural and coupled field contact analyses. This element is located on the surfaces of solid, beam,
and shell elements. 3-D solid and shell elements with midside nodes are supported for bonded and no
separation contact. For other contact types, lower order solid and shell elements are recommended.
Contact occurs when the element surface penetrates one of the target segment elements (TARGE169,
TARGE170) on a specified target surface. Coulomb friction, shear stress friction, and user defined friction
with the USERFRIC subroutine are allowed. This element also allows separation of bonded contact to
simulate interface delamination. See CONTA175 in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for more details
about this element.
Y
I
CONTA175
X I X
CONTA175 Z
target normal target normal
2-D associated target 3-D associated target

surface (TARGE169) surface (TARGE170)
CONTA175 Input Data

The geometry is shown in Figure 1 (p. 759). The element is defined by one node. The underlying elements
can be 2-D or 3-D solid, shell, or beam elements. The 3-D underlying solid or shell elements must have
no midside nodes. CONTA175 represents 2-D or 3-D contact depending on whether the associated 2-
D (TARGE169) or 3-D (TARGE170) segments are used. Remember, contact can occur only when the
outward normal direction of the 2-D or 3-D target surface points to the contact surface. See Generating
Contact Elements in the Contact Technology Guide for more information on generating elements auto-
matically using the ESURF command.
For isotropic friction, the default element coordinate system (based on node connectivity of the under-
lying elements) is used. For orthotropic friction, the global coordinate system is used by default, or you
may define a local element coordinate system with the ESYS command. The principal directions are
CONTA175
computed on the target surface and then projected onto the contact element (node). The first principal
direction is defined by projecting the first direction of the chosen coordinate system onto the target
surface. The second principal direction is defined by taking a cross product of the first principal direction
and the target normal. These directions also follow the rigid body rotation of the contact element to
correctly model the directional dependence of friction. Be careful to choose the coordinate system
(global or local) so that the first direction of that system is within 45° of the tangent to the contact
surface.
The contact surface elements are associated with the target segment elements (TARGE169, TARGE170)
via a shared real constant set. ANSYS looks for contact only between surfaces with the same real constant
Guide for more information. If more than one target surface will make contact with the same boundary
of solid elements, you must define several contact elements that share the same geometry but relate
to separate targets (targets which have different real constant numbers), or you must combine the two
target surfaces into one (targets that share the same real constant numbers).
See the Contact Technology Guide for a detailed discussion on contact and using the contact elements.
"Node-to-Surface Contact" discusses CONTA175 specifically, including the use of real constants and
KEYOPTs.
A summary of the element input is given in "CONTAC175 Input Summary" (p. 760). A general description
CONTAC175 Input Summary

Nodes
I
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, (UZ) (if KEYOPT(1) = 0

UX, UY, (UZ), TEMP (if KEYOPT(1) = 1)
UX, UY, (UZ), TEMP, VOLT (if KEYOPT(1) = 3)
CONTA175

UX, UY, (UZ), VOLT (if KEYOPT(1) = 5)
AZ (2-D), MAG (3-D) (if KEYOPT(1) = 7)
Real Constants

TOLS, MCC, , , COR, STRM
Material Properties

Guide)
Special Features
Birth and death

Debonding
Isotropic friction
Large deflection
Linear perturbation
Nonlinear
KEYOPTs
KEYOPT(1)
0 --
UX, UY, UZ
1 --
UX, UY, UZ, TEMP
2 --
TEMP
3 --
4 --
TEMP, VOLT
5 --
UX, UY, UZ, VOLT
CONTA175
6 --
VOLT
7 --
AZ (2-D) or MAG (3-D)
KEYOPT(2)
Contact algorithm:
0 --
1 --
Penalty function
2 --
3 --
4 --
KEYOPT(3)
Contact model:
0 --
Contact force based model (default)
1 --
Contact traction model
KEYOPT(4)
Contact normal direction:
0 --
Normal to target surface (default)
1 --
Normal from contact nodes
2 --
Normal from contact nodes (used for shell/beam bottom surface contact when shell/beam thickness
is accounted for)
3 --
Normal to target surface (used for shell/beam bottom surface contact when shell/beam thickness is
accounted for)
Note
use KEYOPT(4) in the following way: set KEYOPT(4) = 0 for a rigid surface constraint, set
KEYOPT(4) = 1 for a force-distributed constraint. See Surface-based Constraints for more
information.
CONTA175
KEYOPT(5)
0 --
1 --
2 --
3 --
4 --
Auto ICONT
KEYOPT(6)
0 --
1 --
2 --
KEYOPT(7)
0 --
No control
1 --
2 --
Change in contact predictions are made to maintain a reasonable time/load increment
3 --
4 --
Note

KEYOPT(8)
0 --
No action
CONTA175
2 --
KEYOPT(9)
0 --
1 --
2 --
3 --
4 --
5 --
6 --
Note
KEYOPT(10)
Contact Stiffness Update:
0 --
2 --
KEYOPT(11)
Shell Thickness Effect (only for real constant based thickness input):
0 --
Exclude
1 --
Include
KEYOPT(12)
0 --
Standard
CONTA175
1 --
Rough
2 --
3 --
Bonded
4 --
5 --
Bonded (always)
6 --
Note
KEYOPT(15)
0 --
1 --
2 --
3 --
Note
KEYOPT(16)
0 --
1 --
CONTA175
2 --

sphere Surface
Surface
tion
tion
tact Conditions
Region
or
Defining Influence
Range (PINB)
Model
tact Conditions
action Models
Stiffness
Model
CONTA175

(thermal)
or

tric)
action
Electric Current
pressure [1 (p. 767)] Parameters
Contact Detection
Contact
Bodies
ization Damping
ization Damping
33 FDMD Destabilization squeal damping factor Forced Frictional Slid-
34 FDMS Stabilization squeal damping factor Forced Frictional Slid-
1. For the force-based model (KEYOPT(3) = 0), TNOP is the allowable tensile contact force.

CONTA175

• Additional element output as shown in Table 2: CONTA175 Element Output Definitions (p. 768).
available.

Name Definition O R
NODES Nodes I Y Y
XC, YC, (ZC) Location where results are reported (same as nodal location) Y Y
TEMP Temperature T(I) Y Y
VOLU AREA for 3-D, Length for 2-D Y Y
CONT:PRES Normal contact pressure 2 2
TAUR/TAUS[8] Tangential contact stresses 2 2
KN Current normal contact stiffness (units: Force/Length for contact 5 5
force model, units: Force/Length3 for contract traction model)
CONTA175
Name Definition O R
KT Current tangent contact stiffness (same units as KN) 5 5
TASS/TASR[8] Total (algebraic sum) sliding in S and R directions (3-D only) 3 3
AASS/AASR[8] Total (absolute sum) sliding in S and R directions (3-D only) 3 3
CONT:SFRIC Frictional stress SQRT (TAUR**2+TAUS**2) (3-D only) 2 2
CONT:STOTAL Total stress SQRT (PRES**2+TAUR**2+TAUS**2) (3-D only) 2 2
CONT:SLIDE Total sliding SQRT (TASS**2+TASR**2) (3-D only) Y Y
NX, NY Surface normal vector components (2-D only) Y -
CONT:SFRIC Tangential contact stress (2-D only) 2 2
CONT:SLIDE Total accumulated sliding (algebraic sum) (2-D only) 3 3
ASLIDE Total accumulated sliding (absolute sum) (2-D only) 3 3
VREL Slip rate - Y
TNOP Maximum allowable tensile contact pressure 2 2
I debonding
mode II debonding
CNFZ Contact element force-Z component (3-D only) - Y
SDAMP Squeal damping coefficient (3-D only) - Y
TCC Conductance coefficient 6 6
CONTA175
Name Definition O R
FXNP Flux input - Y
ECC Electric contact conductance (for electric current DOF), or 6 6
electrostatic DOFs)
MCC Magnetic contact permeance 6 6
AZS/MAGS 2-D/3-D Magnetic potential on contact node Y Y
AZT/MAGT 2-D/3-D Magnetic potential on associated target Y Y

2. For the force-based model (KEYOPT(3) = 0), the unit of the quantities is FORCE. For the traction-based
model (KEYOPT(3) = 1), the unit is FORCE/AREA.
5. For the force-based model, the unit of stiffness is FORCE/LENGTH. For the traction-ased model, the
unit is FORCE/LENGTH3.
6. The units of TCC, ECC, and MCC in the traction-based model should be the units of TCC, ECC, and MCC
of the force-based model per area.
CONTA175
Note
Table 3: CONTA175 (3-D) Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 771) and Table 4: CONTA175 (2-D) Item and Sequence
Numbers (p. 773) list outputs available through the ETABLE command using the Sequence Number
method. See Creating an Element Table in the Basic Analysis Guide and The Item and Sequence Number
Table (p. 52) in this manual for more information. The following notation is used in the tables below:
Name
output quantity as defined in Table 2: CONTA175 Element Output Definitions (p. 768)
Item
E
I
sequence number for data at nodes I
Table 3 CONTA175 (3-D) Item and Sequence Numbers

Output ETABLE and ESOL
Quant- Command Input
ity Item E I
Name
PRES SMISC 13 1
TAUR SMISC - 5
TAUS SMISC - 9
FLUX SMISC - 14
FDDIS SMISC - 18
FXCV SMISC 22
FXRD SMISC - 26
FXCD SMISC - 30
FXNP SMISC - 34
JCONT SMISC - 38
CCONT SMISC - 38
HJOU SMISC - 42
MFLUX SMISC - 46
STAT[1] NMISC 41 1
OLDST NMISC - 5
PENE[2] NMISC - 9
DBA NMISC - 13
TASR NMISC - 17
TASS NMISC - 21
CONTA175

ity Item E I
Name
KN NMISC - 25
KT NMISC - 29
TOLN NMISC - 33
IGAP NMISC - 37
PINB NMISC 42 -
CNFX NMISC 43 -
CNFY NMISC 44 -
CNFZ NMISC 45 -
ISEG NMISC - 46
AASR NMISC - 50
AASS NMISC - 54
CAREA NMISC 58 -
MU NMISC - 62
DTSTART NMISC - 66
DPARAM NMISC - 70
TEMPS NMISC - 78
TEMPT NMISC - 82
CONV NMISC - 86
RAC NMISC - 90
TCC NMISC - 94
CNFH NMISC 98 -
ECURT NMISC 99 -
ECHAR NMISC 99 -
ECC NMISC - 100
VOLTS NMISC - 104
VOLTT NMISC - 108
CNOS NMISC - 112
TNOP NMISC - 116
SLTO NMISC - 120
MCC NMISC - 124
MAGS NMISC - 128
MAGT NMISC - 132
ELSI NMISC - 136
DENERI NMISC - 140
DENERII NMISC - 144
CONTA175

ity Item E I
Name
GGAP NMISC - 152
VREL NMISC - 156
SDAMP NMISC - 160

ity Item E I
Name
PRES SMISC 5 1
SFRIC SMISC - 3
FLUX SMISC - 6
FDDIS SMISC - 8
FXCV SMISC - 10
FXRD SMISC - 12
FXCD SMISC - 14
FXNP SMISC - 16
JCONT SMISC - 18
CCONT SMISC - 18
HJOU SMISC - 20
MFLUX SMISC - 22
STAT[1] NMISC 19 1
OLDST NMISC - 3
PENE[2] NMISC - 5
DBA NMISC - 7
SLIDE NMISC - 9
KN NMISC - 11
KT NMISC - 13
TOLN NMISC - 15
IPENE NMISC - 17
PINB NMISC 20 -
CNFX NMISC 21 -
CNFY NMISC 22 -
ISEG NMISC - 23
CAREA NMISC 27 -
MU NMISC - 29
CONTA175

ity Item E I
Name
DTSTART NMISC - 31
DPARAM NMISC - 33
TEMPS NMISC - 37
TEMPT NMISC - 39
CONV NMISC - 41
RAC NMISC - 43
TCC NMISC - 45
CNFH NMISC 47 -
ECURT NMISC 48 -
ECHAR NMISC 48 -
ECC NMISC - 49
VOLTS NMISC - 51
VOLTT NMISC - 53
CNOS NMISC - 55
TNOP NMISC - 57
SLTO NMISC - 59
MCC NMISC - 61
AZS NMISC - 63
AZT NMISC - 65
ELSI NMISC - 67
DENERI NMISC - 69
DENERII NMISC - 71
GGAP NMISC - 75
VREL NMISC - 77
STAT Contact status

PRES Contact pressure for the traction-based model. Con-
tact normal force for the force-based model.
SFRIC Contact friction stress for the traction-based model.
Friction force for the force-based model.
CONTA175
STOT Contact total stress (pressure plus friction) for the

traction-based model.Total contact force for the
force-based model.
step

= 2 and KEYOPT(12) = 5 or 6).
• In addition, you can use it in modal analyses, eigenvalue buckling analyses, and harmonic analyses. For
these analysis types, the program assumes that the initial status of the element (i.e., the status at the
completion of the static prestress analysis, if any) does not change.
• When the contact node is on the axis of symmetry in an axisymmetric analysis, the contact pressure on
that node is not accurate since the area of the node is zero. The contact force is accurate in this situation.
(i.e., KEYOPT(2) = 0, 1, or 3).

ANSYS Professional

ANSYS Structural

• The AZ (2-D) and MAG (3-D) DOFs (KEYOPT(1) = 7) are not allowed.
ANSYS Mechanical
• The AZ (2-D) and MAG (3-D) DOFs (KEYOPT(1) = 7) are not allowed.
CONTA176
3-D Line-to-Line Contact
MP ME ST PR PRN <> <> <> EM <> <> PP <> EME MFS

CONTA176 is used to represent contact and sliding between 3-D line segments (TARGE170) and a de-
formable line segment, defined by this element. The element is applicable to 3-D beam-beam structural
contact analyses. This element is located on the surfaces of 3-D beam or pipe elements with or without
midside nodes (such as BEAM188 or BEAM189). Contact occurs when the element surface penetrates
one of the 3-D straight line or parabolic line segment elements (TARGE170) on a specified target surface.
Coulomb friction, shear stress friction, and user defined friction with the USERFRIC subroutine are allowed.
This element also allows separation of bonded contact to simulate interface delamination. See CONTA176
in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for more details about this element. To model beam-to-surface
contact, use the line-to-surface contact element, CONTA177.
CONTA176
Y
J
X
K
Z
I
3-D associated target

line segments (TARGE170)
CONTA176 Input Data

(if the underlying beam element does not have a midside node) or three nodes (if the underlying beam
element has a midside node). The element x-axis is along the I-J line of the element. Correct node or-
dering of the contact element is critical for proper detection of contact. The nodes must be ordered in
a sequence that defines a continuous line. See Generating Contact Elements in the Contact Technology
Guide for more information on generating elements automatically using the ESURF command.
Three different scenarios can be modeled by CONTA176:
• Internal contact where one beam (or pipe) slides inside another hollow beam (or pipe) (see Figure
2 (p. 778))
• External contact between two beams that lie next to each other and are roughly parallel (see Figure
3 (p. 778))
• External contact between two beams that cross (see Figure 4 (p. 779))
Use KEYOPT(3) = 0 for the first two scenarios (internal contact and parallel beams). In both cases, the
contact condition is only checked at contact nodes.
CONTA176
Use KEYOPT(3) = 1 for the third scenario (beams that cross). In this case, the contact condition is checked
along the entire length of the beams. The beams with circular cross sections are assumed to come in
contact in a point-wise manner. Each contact element can potentially contact no more than one target
element.
Figure 2 Beam Sliding Inside a Hollow Beam
TARGE170 rt
n
rc
CONTA176
Figure 3 Parallel Beams in Contact

CONTA176
Figure 4 Crossing Beams in Contact
CONTA176
rc
rt
TARGE170
The 3-D line-to-line contact elements are associated with the target line segment elements (LINE or
PARA segment types for TARGE170) via a shared real constant set. The contact/target surface is assumed
to be the surface of a cylinder. For a general beam cross section, use an equivalent circular beam (see
Figure 5 (p. 779)). Use the first real constant, R1, to define the radius on the target side (target radius rt).
Use the second real constant, R2, to define the radius on the contact side (contact radius rc). Follow
these guidelines to define the equivalent circular cross section:
• Determine the smallest cross section along the beam axis.

• Determine the largest circle embedded in that cross section.
Figure 5 Equivalent Circular Cross Section
ual beam
oa sufae
The target radius can be entered as either a negative or positive value. Use a negative value when
modeling internal contact (a beam sliding inside a hollow beam, or pipe sliding inside another pipe),
with the input value equal to the inner radius of the outer beam (see Figure 2 (p. 778)). Use a positive
value when modeling contact between the exterior surfaces of two cylindrical beams.
CONTA176
For the case of internal contact, the inner beam should usually be considered the contact surface and
the outer beam should be the target surface. The inner beam can be considered as the target surface
only when the inner beam is much stiffer than the outer beam.
Contact is detected when two circular beams touch or overlap each other. The non-penetration condition
for beams with a circular cross section can be defined as follows.
For internal contact:
= t− c − ≤
and for external contact:
= − + ≤
where rc and rt are the radii of the cross sections of the beams on the contact and target sides, respect-
ively; and d is the minimal distance between the two beams which also determines the contact normal
direction (see Figure 4 (p. 779)). Contact occurs for negative values of g.
ANSYS looks for contact only between contact and target surfaces with the same real constant set. For
either rigid-flexible or flexible-flexible contact, one of the deformable surfaces must be represented by
a contact surface. See Designating Contact and Target Surfaces in the Contact Technology Guide for
more information. If more than one target surface will make contact with the same boundary of beam
elements, you must define several contact elements that share the same geometry but relate to separate
targets (targets which have different real constant numbers), or you must combine the two target surfaces
into one (targets that share the same real constant numbers).
For isotropic friction, local element coordinates based on the nodal connectivity are used to define
principal directions. In the case of two crossing beams in contact (KEYPT(3) = 1), the first principal dir-
ection is defined by 1/2(t1 + t2). The first vector, t1, points from the first contact node to the second
contact node, and the second vector, t2, points from the first target node to the second target node.
In the case of two parallel beams in contact (KEYOPT(3) = 0), the first principal direction points from
the first contact node to the second contact node. In both cases, the second principal direction is
defined by taking a cross product of the first principal direction and the contact normal.
is used by default, or you may define a local element coordinate system with the ESYS command. The
first principal direction is defined by projecting the first direction of the chosen coordinate system onto
the contact element. The second principal direction is defined by taking a cross product of the first
principal direction and the contact normal. These directions also follow the rigid body rotation of the
contact element to correctly model the directional dependence of friction. Be careful to choose the
coordinate system (global or local) so that the first direction of that system is within 45° of the tangent
to the contact surface.
CONTA176
"3-D Beam-to-Beam Contact" discusses CONTA176 specifically, including the use of real constants and
KEYOPTs.
The following table summarizes the element input. Element Input (p. 43) gives a general description of
element input.

Nodes
I, J, (K)
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, UZ
Real Constants

COHE, (Blank), (Blank), (Blank), (Blank), (Blank),
(Blank), (Blank), FACT, DC, SLTO, TNOP,
TOLS, (Blank), (Blank), (Blank), COR, STRM
Material Properties
MU (MP command)
FRIC (TB command; see Contact Friction in the Mechanical APDL Material Reference)
Guide)
Special Features
Birth and death

Debonding
Isotropic friction
Large deflection
CONTA176
Linear perturbation
Nonlinear
KEYOPTs
KEYOPT(1)
Selects degrees of freedom. Currently, the default (UX, UY, UZ) is the only valid option:
0 --
UX, UY, UZ
KEYOPT(2)
Contact algorithm:
0 --
1 --
Penalty function
2 --
3 --
4 --
KEYOPT(3)
Beam contact type:
0 --
Parallel beams or beam inside beam
1 --
Crossing beams
KEYOPT(4)
Type of surface-based constraint (see Surface-based Constraints for more information):
0 --
Rigid surface constraint
1 --
Force-distributed constraint
KEYOPT(5)
0 --
1 --
CONTA176
2 --
3 --
4 --
Auto ICONT
KEYOPT(6)
0 --
1 --
2 --
KEYOPT(7)
0 --
No control
1 --
2 --
3 --
4 --
Note

KEYOPT(8)
0 --
No action
2 --
KEYOPT(9)
CONTA176
0 --
1 --
2 --
3 --
4 --
5 --
6 --
Note
KEYOPT(10)
0 --
2 --
KEYOPT(12)
0 --
Standard
1 --
Rough
2 --
3 --
Bonded
4 --
5 --
Bonded (always)
CONTA176
6 --
Note
KEYOPT(15)
0 --
1 --
2 --
3 --
Note

1 R1 Target radius Real Constants R1, R2
2 R2 Contact radius Real Constants R1, R2
3 FKN[1] Normal penalty stiffness factor Determining Contact
tion
tion
tact Conditions
CONTA176

Region
or
Defining Influence
Range (PINB)
Model
tact Conditions
action Models
12 FKT[1] Tangent penalty stiffness factor Determining Contact
Stiffness
Model
force Parameters
25 TOLS Target edge extension factor Real Constant TOLS
Bodies
ization Damping
ization Damping
1. The units of real constants FKN and FKT have a factor of AREA with respect to those used in the surface-
to-surface contact elements. See Performing a 3-D Beam-to-Beam Contact Analysis for more information.
CONTA176


available.

Name Definition O R
NODES Nodes I, J, K Y Y
XC, YC, ZC Location where results are reported (same as nodal location) Y Y
VOLU Length Y Y
ISOLID Underlying beam element number Y -
CONT:PRES Normal contact force 2 2
CONTA176
Name Definition O R
KN Current normal contact stiffness (units: Force/Length) 5 5
CONT:SFRIC Frictional stress SQRT (TAUR**2+TAUS**2) 2 2
CONT:STOTAL Total stress SQRT (PRES**2+TAUR**2+TAUS**2) 2 2
VREL Slip rate - Y
TNOP Maximum allowable tensile contact force 2 2
I debonding
mode II debonding

2. The unit of the quantities is FORCE.
5. The unit of stiffness is FORCE/LENGTH.
CONTA176
7. For the case of orthotropic friction in contact between beams, components are defined in the global
Cartesian system.
Note
The following table lists output available through the ETABLE command using the Sequence Number
Table (p. 52) in this manual for more information.
Name
Item
predetermined item label for ETABLE command
E
NMISC
I, J, K
sequence number for data at nodes I, J, K

Quant- Item E I J K
ity
Name
PRES SMISC 13 1 2 3
TAUR SMISC - 5 6 7
TAUS SMISC - 9 10 11
FDDIS SMISC - 18 19 20
STAT[1] NMISC 41 1 2 3
OLDST NMISC - 5 6 7
PENE[2] NMISC - 9 10 11
DBA NMISC - 13 14 15
TASR NMISC - 17 18 19
TASS NMISC - 21 22 23
KN NMISC - 25 26 27
KT NMISC - 29 30 31
TOLN NMISC - 33 34 35
IGAP NMISC - 37 38 39
PINB NMISC 42 - - -
CONTA176

Quant- Item E I J K
ity
Name
CNFX NMISC 43 - - -
CNFY NMISC 44 - - -
CNFZ NMISC 45 - - -
ISEG NMISC - 46 47 48
AASR NMISC - 50 51 52
AASS NMISC - 54 55 56
CAREA NMISC 58 - - -
MU NMISC - 62 63 64
DTSTART NMISC - 66 67 68
DPARAM NMISC - 70 71 72
CNOS NMISC - 112 113 114
TNOP NMISC - 116 117 118
SLTO NMISC - 120 121 122
ELSI NMISC - 136 137 138
DENERI NMISC - 140 141 142
DENERII NMISC - 144 145 146
GGAP NMISC - 152 153 154
VREL NMISC - 156 157 158

• The main restriction is the assumption of constant circular beam cross section. The contact radius
is assumed to be the same for all elements in the contact pair.
• For KEYOPT(3) = 1 (crossing beams), contact between the beams is pointwise, and each contact
element contacts no more than one target element.
• This element is nonlinear and requires a full Newton iterative solution, regardless of whether large
or small deflections are specified. An exception to this is when MPC bonded contact is specified
(KEYOPT(2) = 2 and KEYOPT(12) = 5 or 6).
• In addition, you can use it in modal analyses, eigenvalue buckling analyses, and harmonic analyses.
For these analysis types, the program assumes that the initial status of the element (i.e., the status
at the completion of the static prestress analysis, if any) does not change.
CONTA176
• The USERFRIC subroutine (user-defined friction) can only be used with penalty-based tangential
contact (i.e., KEYOPT(2) = 0, 1, or 3).

ANSYS Professional
• The MU material property (input via MP,MU or TB,FRIC) is not allowed.

CONTA177
3-D Line-to-Surface Contact

CONTA177 is used to represent contact and sliding between 3-D surface segments (TARGE170) and a
deformable line segment, defined by this element. The element is applicable to 3-D beam-to-solid and
3-D shell edge-to-solid structural contact analyses. This element is located on the surfaces of 3-D beam
or pipe elements with or without midside nodes (such as BEAM188, BEAM189, PIPE288, PIPE289, and
ELBOW290). It can also be located on the edge of 3-D shell elements with or without midside nodes,
such as SHELL181 and SHELL281. Contact occurs when the element surface penetrates one of the target
segment elements (TARGE170) on a specified target surface. Coulomb friction, shear stress friction, and
user defined friction with the USERFRIC subroutine are allowed. This element also allows separation of
bonded contact to simulate interface delamination. See CONTA177 in the Mechanical APDL Theory Ref-
erence for more details about this element. To model beam-to-beam contact, use the line-to-line contact
element, CONTA176.
CONTA177
X
Z
J

Edge of
CONTA177
shell elements
3-D target surface
(TARGE170)
CONTA177 Input Data

(if the underlying beam or shell element does not have a midside node) or three nodes (if the underlying
beam or shell element has a midside node). The element x-axis is along the I-J line of the element.
Correct node ordering of the contact element is critical for proper detection of contact. The nodes must
be ordered in a sequence that defines a continuous line. See Generating Contact Elements in the Contact
Technology Guide for more information on generating elements automatically using the ESURF command.
ANSYS looks for contact only between contact and target surfaces with the same real constant set. For
either rigid-flexible or flexible-flexible contact, one of the deformable "surfaces" (beam or shell edge)
must be represented by a contact surface. See Designating Contact and Target Surfaces in the Contact
Technology Guide for more information. If more than one target surface will make contact with the same
CONTA177
boundary of line elements, you must define several contact elements that share the same geometry
but relate to separate targets (targets which have different real constant numbers), or you must combine
the two target surfaces into one (targets that share the same real constant numbers).
TB command input. (See Contact Friction in the Mechanical APDL Material Reference for more information.)
For isotropic friction, local element coordinates based on the nodal connectivity are used as principal
directions. The first principal direction points from node I to node J. The second principal direction is
defined by taking a cross product of the first principal direction and the contact normal.
is used by default, or you may define a local element coordinate system with the ESYS command. The
first principal direction is defined by projecting the first direction of the chosen coordinate system onto
the contact element. The second principal direction is defined by taking a cross product of the first
principal direction and the contact normal. These directions also follow the rigid body rotation of the
contact element to correctly model the directional dependence of friction. Be careful to choose the
coordinate system (global or local) so that the first direction of that system is within 45° of the tangent
to the contact surface.
with TB,FRIC. See Contact Friction in the Mechanical APDL Material Reference for more information.
in the Mechanical APDL Material Reference for more information on how to use this feature. See also the
Guide to ANSYS User Programmable Features for a detailed description of the USERFRIC subroutine.
"Line-to-Surface Contact" discusses CONTA177 specifically, including the use of real constants and
KEYOPTs.
element input.

Nodes
I, J, (K)
CONTA177
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, UZ
Real Constants

COHE, (Blank), (Blank), (Blank), (Blank), (Blank),
(Blank), (Blank), FACT, DC, SLTO, TNOP,
TOLS, (Blank), (Blank), (Blank), COR, STRM
Material Properties
MU (MP command)
Guide)
Special Features
Birth and death

Debonding
Isotropic friction
Large deflection
Linear perturbation
Nonlinear
KEYOPTs
KEYOPT(1)
Selects degrees of freedom. Currently, the default (UX, UY, UZ) is the only valid option:
0 --
UX, UY, UZ
KEYOPT(2)
Contact algorithm:
0 --
1 --
Penalty function
2 --
3 --
CONTA177
4 --
KEYOPT(4)
Type of surface-based constraint (see Surface-based Constraints for more information):
0 --
Rigid surface constraint
1 --
Force-distributed constraint
KEYOPT(5)
0 --
1 --
2 --
3 --
4 --
Auto ICONT
KEYOPT(6)
0 --
1 --
2 --
KEYOPT(7)
0 --
No control
1 --
2 --
3 --
4 --
CONTA177
Note

KEYOPT(9)
0 --
1 --
2 --
3 --
4 --
5 --
6 --
Note
KEYOPT(10)
0 --
2 --
KEYOPT(11)
Shell thickness effect (target side only):
0 --
Exclude
1 --
Include
KEYOPT(12)
CONTA177
0 --
Standard
1 --
Rough
2 --
3 --
Bonded
4 --
5 --
Bonded (always)
6 --
Note
KEYOPT(15)
0 --
1 --
2 --
3 --
CONTA177
Note

sphere Surface
Surface
3 FKN[1] Normal penalty stiffness factor Determining Contact
tion
tion
tact Conditions
Region
or
Defining Influence
Range (PINB)
Model
10 CNOF Contact surface offset Accounting for Thick-
ness Effect (CNOF and
KEYOPT(11))
action Models
12 FKT[1] Tangent penalty stiffness factor Determining Contact
Stiffness
CONTA177

Model
force Parameters
25 TOLS Target edge extension factor Real Constant TOLS
Bodies
ization Damping
ization Damping
1. The units of real constants FKN and FKT have a factor of AREA with respect to those used in the surface-
to-surface contact elements. See Real Constants FKN and FKT for more information.


CONTA177
available.

Name Definition O R
NODES Nodes I, J, K Y Y
XC, YC, ZC Location where results are reported (same as nodal location) Y Y
VOLU Length Y Y
ISOLID Underlying beam or shell element number Y -
CONT:PRES Normal contact force 2 2
KN Current normal contact stiffness (units: Force/Length) 5 5
CONT:SFRIC Frictional stress SQRT (TAUR**2+TAUS**2) 2 2
CONT:STOTAL Total stress SQRT (PRES**2+TAUR**2+TAUS**2) 2 2
CONTA177
Name Definition O R
VREL Slip rate - Y
TNOP Maximum allowable tensile contact force 2 2
I debonding
mode II debonding

2. The unit of the quantities is FORCE.
5. The unit of stiffness is FORCE/LENGTH.
7. For the case of orthotropic friction in contact between beams (or shell edges) and a 3-D surface,
components are defined in the global Cartesian system.
Note
The following table lists output available through the ETABLE command using the Sequence Number
Table (p. 52) in this manual for more information.
CONTA177
Name
Item
E
I, J, K
sequence number for data at nodes I, J, K

Quant- Item E I J K
ity
Name
PRES SMISC 13 1 2 3
TAUR SMISC - 5 6 7
TAUS SMISC - 9 10 11
FDDIS SMISC - 18 19 20
STAT[1] NMISC 41 1 2 3
OLDST NMISC - 5 6 7
PENE[2] NMISC - 9 10 11
DBA NMISC - 13 14 15
TASR NMISC - 17 18 19
TASS NMISC - 21 22 23
KN NMISC - 25 26 27
KT NMISC - 29 30 31
TOLN NMISC - 33 34 35
IGAP NMISC - 37 38 39
PINB NMISC 42 - - -
CNFX NMISC 43 - - -
CNFY NMISC 44 - - -
CNFZ NMISC 45 - - -
ISEG NMISC - 46 47 48
AASR NMISC - 50 51 52
AASS NMISC - 54 55 56
CAREA NMISC 58 - - -
MU NMISC - 62 63 64
DTSTART NMISC - 66 67 68
DPARAM NMISC - 70 71 72
CNOS NMISC - 112 113 114
CONTA177

Quant- Item E I J K
ity
Name
TNOP NMISC - 116 117 118
SLTO NMISC - 120 121 122
ELSI NMISC - 136 137 138
DENERI NMISC - 140 141 142
DENERII NMISC - 144 145 146
GGAP NMISC - 152 153 154
VREL NMISC - 156 157 158

• The thickness effects of underlying beam elements on the contact side can be taken into account
by specifying the contact surface offset CNOF.
• The thickness effects of underlying shell elements on the target side can be taken into account by
setting KEYOPT(11) = 1.
• This element is nonlinear and requires a full Newton iterative solution, regardless of whether large
or small deflections are specified. An exception to this is when MPC bonded contact is specified
(KEYOPT(2) = 2 and KEYOPT(12) = 5 or 6).
• In addition, you can use it in modal analyses, eigenvalue buckling analyses, and harmonic analyses.
For these analysis types, the program assumes that the initial status of the element (i.e., the status
at the completion of the static prestress analysis, if any) does not change.
• The USERFRIC (user-defined friction) subroutine can only be used with penalty-based tangential
contact (KEYOPT(2) = 0, 1, or 3).

ANSYS Professional
• The MU material property (input via MP,MU or TB,FRIC) is not allowed.

CONTA178
3-D Node-to-Node Contact

CONTA178 represents contact and sliding between any two nodes of any types of elements. The element
has two nodes with three degrees of freedom at each node with translations in the X, Y, and Z directions.
It can also be used in 2-D and axisymmetric models by constraining the UZ degree of freedom. The
element is capable of supporting compression in the contact normal direction and Coulomb friction in
the tangential direction. User-defined friction with the USERFRIC subroutine is also allowed. The element
may be initially preloaded in the normal direction or it may be given a gap specification. A longitudinal
damper option can also be included. See CONTA178 in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for more
details about this element. Other contact elements, such as COMBIN40, are also available.
x z
z x
y
y
Gap J
Y z
X β y
z I
α x
y
x
CONTA178 Input Data

The geometry, node locations, and the coordinate system for this element are shown in the CONTA178
figure above. The element is defined by two nodes, an initial gap or interference (GAP), an initial element
status (START), and damping coefficients CV1 and CV2. The orientation of the interface is defined by
the node locations (I and J) or by a user specified contact normal direction. The interface is assumed
to be perpendicular to the I-J line or to the specified gap direction. The element coordinate system has
its origin at node I and the x-axis is directed toward node J or in the user specified gap direction. The
interface is parallel to the element y-z plane. See Generating Contact Elements in the Contact Technology
Guide for more information on generating elements automatically using the EINTF command.
CONTA178
constraints should be used in transient dynamic analysis. See the description of KEYOPT(7) in the Input
Summary and the contact element discussion in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for details.
Contact Algorithms
Four different contact algorithms can be selected:
• Pure Lagrange multiplier method (KEYOPT(2) = 4)

• Lagrange multiplier on contact normal and penalty on frictional (tangential) direction (KEYOPT(2) = 3)
• Augmented Lagrange method (KEYOPT(2) = 0)
• Pure Penalty method (KEYOPT(2) = 1)
The following sections outline these four algorithms.
Pure Lagrange Multiplier

The pure Lagrange multiplier method does not require contact stiffness FKN, FKS. Instead it requires
chattering control parameters TOLN, FTOL, by which ANSYS assumes that the contact status remains
unchanged. TOLN is the maximum allowable penetration and FTOL is the maximum allowable tensile
contact force.
Note
A negative contact force occurs when the contact status is closed. A tensile contact force
(positive) refers to a separation between the contact surfaces, but not necessarily and open
contact status.
The behavior can be described as follows:
• If the contact status from the previous iteration is open and the current calculated penetration is
smaller than TOLN, then contact remains open. Otherwise the contact status switches to closed and
another iteration is processed.
• If the contact status from the previous iteration is closed and the current calculated contact force is
positive, but smaller than FTOL, then contact remains closed. If the tensile contact force is larger than
FTOL, then the contact status changes from closed to open and ANSYS continues to the next iteration.
ANSYS will provide reasonable defaults for TOLN and FTOL. Keep in mind the following when providing
values for TOLN and FTOL:
• A positive value is a scaling factor applied to the default values.

• A negative value is used as an absolute value (which overrides the default).
The objective of TOLN and FTOL is to provide stability to models which exhibit contact chattering due
to changing contact status. If the values you use for these tolerances are too small, the solution will
require more iterations. However, if the values are too big it will affect the accuracy of the solution,
since a certain amount of penetration or tensile contact force are allowed.
Theoretically, the pure Lagrange multiplier method enforces zero penetration when contact is closed
and "zero slip" when sticking contact occurs. However the pure Lagrange multiplier method adds addi-
CONTA178
tional degrees of freedom to the model and requires additional iterations to stabilize contact conditions.
This will increase the computational cost and may even lead to solution divergence if many contact
points are oscillating between sticking and sliding conditions during iterations.
Lagrange Multiplier on Normal and Penalty on Tangent Plane

An alternative algorithm is the Lagrange multiplier method applied on the contact normal and the
penalty method (tangential contact stiffness) on the frictional plane. This method only allows a very
small amount of slip for a sticking contact condition. It requires chattering control parameters TOLN,
FTOL as well as the maximum allowable elastic slip parameter SLTOL. Again, ANSYS provides default
tolerance values which work well in most cases. You can override the default value for SLTOL by defining
a scaling factor (positive value) or an absolute value (negative value). Based on the tolerance, current
normal contact force, and friction coefficient, the tangential contact stiffness FKS can be obtained
automatically. In a few cases, you can override FKS by defining a scaling factor (positive input) or absolute
value (negative input). Use care when specifying values for SLTOL and FKS. If the value for SLTOL is too
large and the value for FKS too small, too much elastic slip can occur. If the value for SLTOL is too small
or the value for FKS too large, the problem may not converge.
Augmented Lagrange Method

The third contact algorithm is the augmented Lagrange method, which is basically the penalty method
with additional penetration control. This method requires contact normal stiffness FKN, maximum allow-
able penetration TOLN, and maximum allowable slip SLTOL. FKS can be derived based on the maximum
allowable slip SLTOL and the current normal contact force. ANSYS provides a default normal contact
stiffness FKN which is based on the Young's modulus E and the size of the underlying elements. If
Young's modulus E is not found, E = 1x109 will be assumed.
You can override the default normal contact stiffness FKN by defining a scaling factor (positive input)
or absolute value (negative input with unit force/length). If you specify a large value for TOLN, the
augmented Lagrange method works as the penalty method. Use care when specifying values for FKN
and TOLN. If the value for FKN is too small and the value for TOLN too large, too much penetration can
occur. If the value for FKN is too large or the value for TOLN too small, the problem may not converge.
Penalty Method
The last algorithm is the pure penalty method. This method requires both contact normal and tangential
stiffness values FKN, FKS. Real constants TOLN, FTOLN, and SLTOL are not used and penetration is no
longer controlled in this method. Default FKN is provided as the one used in the augmented Lagrange
method. The default FKS is given by MU x FKN. You can override the default values for FKN and FKS by
inputting a scaling factor (positive input) or absolute value (negative input) for these real constants.
Contact Normal Definition

The contact normal direction is of primary importance in a contact analysis. By default [KEYOPT(5) = 0
and NX, NY, NZ = 0], ANSYS will calculate the contact normal direction based on the initial positions of
the I and J nodes, such that a positive displacement (in the element coordinate system) of node J relative
to node I opens the gap. However, you must specify the contact normal direction for any of the following
conditions:
• If nodes I and J have the same initial coordinates.

• If the model has an initial interference condition in which the underlying elements' geometry overlaps.
CONTA178
• If the initial open gap distance is very small.
In the above cases, the ordering of nodes I and J is critical. The correct contact normal usually points
from node I toward node J unless contact is initially overlapped.
You can specify the contact normal by means of real constants NX, NY, NZ (direction cosines related to
the global Cartesian system) or element KEYOPT(5). The following lists the various options for KEYOPT(5):
KEYOPT(5) = 0
The contact normal is either based on the real constant values of NX, NY, NZ or on node locations when
NX, NY, NZ are not defined. For 2-D contact, NZ = 0.
KEYOPT(5) = 1 (2,3)
The contact normal points in a direction which averages the direction cosines of the X (Y, Z) axis of the
nodal coordinates on both nodes I and J. The direction cosines on nodes I and J should be very close.
This option may be supported by the NORA and NORL commands, which rotate the X axis of the nodal
coordinate system to point to the surface normal of solid models.
KEYOPT(5) = 4 (5,6)
The contact normal points to X (Y, Z) of the element coordinate system issued by the ESYS command.
If you use this option, make sure that the element coordinate system specified by ESYS is the Cartesian
system. Otherwise, the global Cartesian system is assumed.
Contact Status
The initial gap defines the gap size (if positive) or the displacement interference (if negative). If KEYOPT(4)
= 0, the default, the gap size can be automatically calculated from the GAP real constant and the node
locations (projection of vector points from node I to J on the contact normal), that is, the gap size is
determined from the additive effect of the geometric gap and the value of GAP.
If KEYOPT(4) = 1, the initial gap size is only based on real constant GAP (node locations are ignored).
By default KEYOPT(9) is set to 0, which means the initial gap size is applied in the first load step. To
ramp the initial gap size with the first load step (to model initial interference problems, for example),
set KEYOPT(9) = 1. Also, set KBC,0 and do not specify any external loads over the first load step.
The force deflection relationships for the contact element can be separated into the normal and tangential
(sliding) directions. In the normal direction, when the normal force (FN) is negative, the contact status
remains closed (STAT = 3 or 2). In the tangential direction, for FN < 0 and the absolute value of the
tangential force (FS) less than µ|FN|, contact "sticks" (STAT = 3). For FN < 0 and FS = µ|FN|, sliding occurs
(STAT = 2). As FN becomes positive, contact is broken (STAT = 1) and no force is transmitted (FN = 0,
FS = 0).
The contact condition at the beginning of the first substep can be determined from the START parameter.
The initial element status (START) is used to define the "previous" condition of the interface at the start
of the first substep. This value overrides the condition implied by the interference specification and can
be useful in anticipating the final interface configuration and reducing the number of iterations required
for convergence. However, specifying unrealistic START values can sometimes degrade the convergence
behavior.
If START = 0.0 or blank, the initial status of the element is determined from either the GAP value or the
KEYOPT(4) setting. If START = 3.0, contact is initially closed and not sliding (µ ≠ 0), or sliding (if µ = 0.0).
If START = 2.0, contact is initially closed and sliding. If START = 1.0, contact is initially open.
CONTA178
Friction
The only material property used is the interface coefficient of friction µ (MU). A zero value should be
used for frictionless surfaces. Temperatures may be specified at the element nodes (for material property
evaluation only). The coefficient of friction µ is evaluated at the average of the two node temperatures.
The node I temperature T(I) defaults to TUNIF. The node J temperature defaults to T(I).
For analyses involving friction, using NROPT,UNSYM is useful (and, in fact, sometimes required if the
coefficient of friction µ is > 0.2) for problems where the normal and tangential (sliding) motions are
strongly coupled.
To define a coefficient of friction for isotropic friction that is dependent on temperature, time, normal
pressure, sliding distance, or sliding relative velocity, use the TBFIELD command along with TB,FRIC.
See Contact Friction in the Material Reference for more information.
This element also supports user-defined friction. To implement a user-defined friction model, use the
TB,FRIC command with TBOPT = USER to specify friction properties and write a USERFRIC subroutine
to compute friction forces. See User-Defined Friction in the Material Reference for more information on
how to use this feature. See also the Guide to ANSYS User Programmable Features for a detailed description
of the USERFRIC subroutine.
Weak Spring
KEYOPT(3) can be used to specify a "weak spring" across an open or free sliding interface, which is
useful for preventing rigid body motion that could occur in a static analysis. The weak spring stiffness
is computed by multiplying the normal stiffness KN by a reduction factor if the real constant REDFACT
is positive (which defaults to 1 x 10-6). The weak spring stiffness can be overridden if REDFACT has a
negative value. Set KEYOPT(3) = 1 to add weak spring stiffness only to the contact normal direction
when contact is open. Set KEYOPT(3) = 2 to add weak spring stiffness to the contact normal direction
for open contact and tangent plane for frictionless or open contact.
The weak spring only contributes to global stiffness, which prevents a "singularity" condition from oc-
curring during the solution phase if KEYOPT(3) = 1,2. By setting KEYOPT(3) = 3,4, the weak spring will
contribute both to the global stiffness and the internal nodal force which holds two separated nodes.
Note
The weak spring option should never be used in conjunction with either the no-separation
or bonded contact options defined by KEYOPT(10).
Contact Behavior
Use KEYOPT(10) to model the following different contact surface behaviors:
KEYOPT(10) = 0
Models standard unilateral contact; that is, normal pressure equals zero if separation occurs.
KEYOPT(10) = 1
Models rough frictional contact where there is no sliding. This case corresponds to an infinite friction
coefficient and ignores the material property input MU.
CONTA178
KEYOPT(10) = 2
Models no separation contact, in which two gap nodes are tied (although sliding is permitted) for
the remainder of the analysis once contact is established.
KEYOPT(10) = 3
Models bonded contact, in which two gap nodes are bonded in all directions (once contact is estab-
lished) for the remainder of the analysis.
KEYOPT(10) = 4
Models no separation contact, in which two gap nodes are always tied (sliding is permitted)
throughout the analysis.
KEYOPT(10) = 5
Models bonded contact, in which two gap nodes are bonded in all directions throughout the ana-
lysis.
KEYOPT(10) = 6
Models bonded contact, in which two gap nodes that are initially in a closed state will remain closed
and two gap nodes that are initially in an open state will remain open throughout the analysis.
Cylindrical Gap
The cylindrical gap option (KEYOPT(1) = 1) is useful where the final contact normal is not fixed during
the analysis, such as in the interaction between concentric pipes. With this option, you define the real
r
constants NX, NY, NZ as the direction cosines of the cylindrical axis ( ) in the global Cartesian coordinate
system. The contact normal direction lies in a cross section that is perpendicular to the cylindrical axis.
The program measures the relative distance |XJ - XI| between the current position of node I and the
current position of node J projected onto the cross section. NX, NY, NZ defaults to (0,0,1), which is the
case for a 2-D circular gap. With the cylindrical gap option, KEYOPT(4) and KEYOPT(5) are ignored and
node ordering can be arbitrary. Real constant GAP is no long referred as the initial gap size and a zero
value is not allowed. The following explanation defines the model based on the sign of the GAP value.
CONTA178
Figure 2 CONTA178 Gap and Nodes
I
J
GAP
→N
I GAP < 0
GAP
J
→N
GAP > 0
• A positive GAP value models contact when one smaller cylinder inserted into another parallel larger
cylinder. GAP is equal to the difference between the radii of the cylinders (|RJ - RI|) and it represents
the maximum allowable distance projected on the cross-section. The contact constraint condition can
≤
be written as :
• A negative GAP value models external contact between two parallel cylinders. GAP is equal to the sum
of the radii of the cylinders (|RJ + RI|) and it represents the minimum allowable distance projected on
≥
the cross-section. The contact constraint condition can be written as:
Damper
The damping capability is only used for modal and transient analyses. By default, the damping capability
is removed from the element. Damping is only active in the contact normal direction when contact is
closed. The damping coefficient units are Force (Time/Length). For a 2-D axisymmetric analysis, the
=− x
x
coefficient should be on a full 360° basis. The damping force is computed as , where Cv
is the damping coefficient given by Cv = Cv1 + Cv2xV. V is the velocity calculated in the previous substep.
The second damping coefficient (Cv2) is available to produce a nonlinear damping effect.
CONTA178
Monitoring Contact Status

By default, ANSYS will not print out contact status and contact stiffness for each individual element.
Use KEYOPT(12) = 1 to print out such information, which may help in solving problems that are difficult
to converge.

Nodes
I, J
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, UZ
Real Constants
FKN, GAP, START, FKS, REDFACT, NX,

NY, NZ, TOLN, FTOL, SLTOL, CV1,
CV2, COR
See Table 1: CONTA178 Real Constants (p. 814) for a description of the real constants
Material Properties
MU (MP command)
Surface Loads
None
Body Loads
Temperatures - T(I), T(J)
Special Features
Isotropic friction
Linear perturbation
Nonlinear gap type
KEYOPT(1)
Gap type:
0 --
Unidirectional gap
1 --
Cylindrical gap
KEYOPT(2)
Contact algorithm:
0 --
Augmented Lagrange method (default)
1 --
Pure Penalty method
CONTA178
3 --
Lagrange multiplier on contact normal and penalty on tangent (uses U/P formulation for normal
contact, non-U/P formulation for tangential contact)
4 --
Lagrange multiplier method
KEYOPT(3)
Weak Spring:
0 --
Not used
1 --
Acts across an open contact (only contributes to stiffness)
2 --
Acts across an open contact or free sliding plane (only contributes to stiffness)
3 --
Acts across an open contact (contributes to stiffness and internal force)
4 --
Acts across an open contact or free sliding plane (contributes to stiffness and force)
KEYOPT(4)
Gap size:
0 --
Gap size based on real constant GAP + initial node locations
1 --
Gap size based on real constant GAP (ignore node locations)
KEYOPT(5)
Basis for contact normal:
0 --
Node locations or real constants NX, NY, NZ
1 --
X - component of nodal coordinate system (averaging on two contact nodes)
2 --
Y - component of nodal coordinate system (averaging on two contact nodes)
3 --
Z - component of nodal coordinate system (averaging on two contact nodes)
4 --
X - component of defined element coordinate system (ESYS)
5 --
Y - component of defined element coordinate system (ESYS)
6 --
Z - component of defined element coordinate system (ESYS)
KEYOPT(7)
Element level time incrementation control / impact control:
0 --
No control.
CONTA178
1 --
Change in contact predictions are made to maintain a reasonable time/load increment. This option
is activated only if the command SOLCONTROL,ON,ON was issued prior to the solution.
2 --
Change in contact predictions are made to achieve the minimum time/load increment whenever a
change in contact status occurs. This option is activated only if the command SOLCONTROL,ON,ON
was issued prior to the solution.
4 --
analysis with automatic adjustment of the time increment. Automatic adjustment of the time increment
is performed only if the command SOLCONTROL,ON,ON was issued prior to the solution.
KEYOPT(9)
Initial gap step size application:
0 --
Initial gap size is step applied
1 --
Initial gap size is ramped in the first load step
KEYOPT(10)
0 --
Standard
1 --
Rough
2 --
3 --
Bonded
4 --
5 --
Bonded (always)
6 --
Bonded (initial)
KEYOPT(12)
Contact Status:
0 --
Does not print contact status
1 --
Monitor and print contact status, contact stiffness

1 FKN Normal stiffness
CONTA178

2 GAP Initial gap size
3 START Initial contact status
4 FKS Sticking stiffness
5 REDFACT KN/KS reduction factor
6 NX Defined gap normal - X component
7 NY Defined gap normal - Y component
8 NZ Defined gap normal - Z component
9 TOLN Penetration tolerance
10 FTOL Maximum tensile contact force
11 SLTOL Maximum elastic slip
12 CV1 Damping coefficient
13 CV2 Nonlinear damping coefficient
14 COR Coefficient of restitution

• Nodal displacements included in the overall nodal solution.

• Additional element output as shown in Element Output Definitions.
The value of USEP is determined from the normal displacement (UN), in the element x-direction, between
the contact nodes at the end of a substep. This value is used in determining the normal force, FN. The
values represented by UT(Y, Z) are the total translational displacements in the element y and z directions.
The maximum value printed for the sliding force, FS, is µ|FN|. Sliding may occur in both the element y
and z directions. STAT describes the status of the element at the end of a substep.
• If STAT = 3, contact is closed and no sliding occurs

• If STAT = 1, contact is open
• If STAT = 2, node J slides relative to node I
For a frictionless surface (µ = 0.0), the converged element status is either STAT = 2 or 1.
The element coordinate system orientation angles α and β (shown in Figure 1 (p. 805)) are computed
by the program from the node locations. These values are printed as ALPHA and BETA respectively. α
ranges from 0° to 360° and β from -90° to +90°. Elements lying along the Z-axis are assigned values of
α = 0°, β = ± 90°, respectively. Elements lying off the Z-axis have their coordinate system oriented as
shown for the general α , β position.
Note
For α = 90°, β → 90°, the element coordinate system flips 90° about the Z-axis. The value of
ANGLE represents the principal angle of the friction force in the element y-z plane. A general
description of solution output is given in Element Solution (p. 51). See the Basic Analysis Guide
CONTA178
available.

Name Definition O R
TEMP T(I), T(J) Y Y
USEP Gap size Y Y
FN Normal force (along I-J line) Y Y
OLDST Old contact status 1 1
ALPHA, BETA Element orientation angles Y Y
MU Coefficient of friction 2 2
UT(Y, Z) Displacement (node J - node I) in element y and z directions 2 2
FS(Y, Z) Tangential (friction) force in element y and z directions 2 2
ANGLE Principal angle of friction force in element y-z plane 2 2
1 - Open contact
2 - Sliding contact
3 - Sticking contact (no sliding)

2. If MU>0.0
for more information. The following notation is used in Table 3: CONTA178 Item and Sequence Num-
bers (p. 817) :
Name
output quantity as defined in the Element Output Definition
Item
CONTA178
E
Output ETABLE and

Quant- ESOL Command
ity Input
Name Item E
FN SMISC 1
FSY SMISC 2
FSZ SMISC 3
STAT NMISC 1
OLDST NMISC 2
USEP NMISC 3
ALPHA NMISC 4
BETA NMISC 5
UTY NMISC 6
UTZ NMISC 7
MU NMISC 8
ANGLE NMISC 9
KN NMISC 10
KS NMISC 11
TOLN NMISC 12
FTOL NMISC 13
SLTOL NMISC 14

• The element operates bilinearly only in static and nonlinear transient dynamic analyses. If used in other
analysis types, the element maintains its initial status throughout the analysis.
• Nonconverged substeps are not in equilibrium.
• Unless the contact normal direction is specified by (NX, NY, NZ) or KEYOPT(5), nodes I and J must not
be coincident or overlapped since the nodal locations define the interface orientation. In this case the
node ordering is not an issue. On the other hand, if the contact normal is not defined by nodal locations,
the node ordering is critical. Use /PSYMB, ESYS to verify the contact normal and use EINTF,,,REVE to
reverse the normal if wrong ordering is detected. To determine which side of the interface contains the
nodes, use ESEL,,ENAM,,178 and then NSLE,,POS,1.
• The element maintains its original orientation in either a small or a large deflection analysis unless the
cylindrical gap option is used.
• For real constants FKN, REDFACT, TOLN, FTOL, SLTOL and FKS, you can specify either a positive or
negative value. ANSYS interprets a positive value as a scaling factor and interprets a negative value as
the absolute value. These real constants can be changed between load steps or during restart stages.
CONTA178
• The Lagrange multiplier methods introduce zero diagonal terms in the stiffness matrix. The PCG solver
may encounter precondition matrix singularity. The Lagrange multiplier methods often overconstrain
the model if boundary conditions, coupling, and constraint equations applied on the contact nodes
overlay the contact constraints. Chattering is most likely to occur due to change of contact status, typ-
ically for contact impact problems. The Lagrange multipliers also introduce more degrees of freedom
which may result in spurious modes for modal and linear eigenvalue bucking analysis. Therefore, the
augmented Lagrange method option is the best choice for: PCG iterative solver, transient analysis for
impact problems, modal, and eigenvalue bucking analysis.
(i.e., KEYOPT(2) = 0, 1, or 3).

PRETS179
Pretension
MP ME ST PR PRN DS DSS <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS
PRETS179 Element Description

PRETS179 is used to define a 2-D or 3-D pretension section within a meshed structure. The structure
can be built from any 2-D or 3-D structural elements (solid, beam, shell, pipe, or link). The PRETS179
element has one translation degree of freedom, UX. (UX represents the defined pretension direction.
ANSYS transforms the geometry of the problem so that, internally, the pretension force is applied in
the specified pretension load direction, regardless of how the model is defined.) Loads can be applied
using the SLOAD command. These loads will overwrite any F or D command specifications on the same
nodes at solution time. Only tension loads can be applied; bending or torsion loads are ignored. See
PRETS179 in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for more details about the element. See Defining
Pretension in a Joint Fastener in the Basic Analysis Guide for a discussion of how to generate PRETS179
elements automatically using the PSMESH command. Keep in mind when creating the PRETS179 elements
that the pretension load direction is specified relative to surface A. (For backward compatibility, it is
also possible to generate such elements using the EINTF command.)
Figure 1 PRETS179 Geometry
efore Adjustment
Pretension
load direction
K
Z J
I B
Y
(surfaces A and are coincident;
X
nodes I and J are coincident)
surface A
After Adjustment
I

J
surface
PRETS179
PRETS179 Input Data

The pretension section is modeled by a set of pretension elements. The geometry, node locations, and
the coordinate system for the pretension element are shown in Figure 1 (p. 819). The pretension element
is defined by three nodes I, J, K and the section data NX, NY, NZ which define the pretension load dir-
ection relative to surface A. The pretension load direction is constant and is not updated for large dis-
placements. Although it is not recommended, the pretension load direction can be changed between
load steps by changing the section data. For large-deflection problems, you could track the deflection
and change the pretension load direction accordingly.
Nodes I and J are initially coincident and they should be defined in the same nodal coordinate system.
No boundary conditions apply on node J. For each pretension section, the node ordering of the preten-
sion elements is critical. The I and J nodes must be ordered so that all nodes I are on surface A and all
nodes J are on surface B.
Node K is the pretension node. This pretension node provides a convenient way to assign boundary
conditions on an entire pretension section. Node K can be anywhere in space; however, its nodal co-
ordinate system must be global Cartesian. Each pretension section has only one pretension node asso-
ciated with it. Node K should only connect to pretension elements that use the same section number.
The pretension node K has only one translation degree of freedom UX, which defines the relative dis-
placement between the two sections A and B in the pretension load direction. Sliding motion is prevented
automatically. If the pretension node and the bolted structure are not well constrained, rigid body
motion can occur. Therefore, in the beginning of each load step, you should verify the boundary condi-
tions for bolt structures carefully.
element input.
PRETS179 Input Summary

Nodes
I, J, K
Degrees of Freedom
UX (tightening adjustment of the pretension section)
Real Constants
None
Material Properties
BETD
Surface Loads
None
Body Loads
None
Special Features
Linear perturbation
Nonlinear
KEYOPTs
None
PRETS179
PRETS179 Output Data

Nodal displacements are included in the overall displacement solution. There is no printed or post ele-
ment data output for the pretension element. ANSYS automatically determines the deformations of the
bolt structure. The underlying elements connected to both sides of cutting surfaces appear overlap
under the pretension load. The displacement of the pretension node gives the adjustment of the pre-
tension. Use PRNSOL to list the adjustment. The reaction force on the pretension node provides the
total normal force across the pretension section. Use PRRSOL or PRRFOR command to list the tension
force. The stress distribution of underlying elements provides a good estimation of the stress across
the pretension section.
PRETS179 Assumptions and Restrictions

• The nodal coordinate system of the pretension node K must be global Cartesian.
• You cannot apply any constraint equations (or coupling) on any pretension element nodes.
• The NROTAT command can not be applied on pretension node K. NROTAT can be applied to the other
nodes I and J in such way that they are rotated into the same nodal coordinate system. If K has been
mistakenly rotated into another coordinate system, ANSYS will issue a warning and will automatically
rotate it back into the global Cartesian system. Similarly, if I and J are rotated into different coordinate
systems, ANSYS will issue a warning and will automatically rotate J to be consistent with I.
• The pretension normal NX, NY, NZ must be specified through section data. You should not change
section data either between load steps or during restart stages; otherwise ANSYS assumes the pretension
normal varies between the load steps.
• The pretension force is actually applied in the direction of the pretension section normal. However, the
pretension force is always specified and displayed in the global X direction since the element has only
one degree of freedom, UX.
• The structure can be composed of superelements. However, all the pretension nodes must remain as
the master nodes.
• Use of this element is limited to structural analyses only.
PRETS179 Product Restrictions

LINK180
3-D Spar (or Truss)
MP ME ST PR PRN <> <> <> <> <> <> PP VT EME MFS

LINK180 is a 3-D spar that is useful in a variety of engineering applications. The element can be used
to model trusses, sagging cables, links, springs, and so on. The element is a uniaxial tension-compression
element with three degrees of freedom at each node: translations in the nodal x, y, and z directions.
Tension-only (cable) and compression-only (gap) options are supported. As in a pin-jointed structure,
no bending of the element is considered. Plasticity, creep, rotation, large deflection, and large strain
capabilities are included.
By default, LINK180 includes stress-stiffness terms in any analysis that includes large-deflection effects.
Elasticity, isotropic hardening plasticity, kinematic hardening plasticity, Hill anisotropic plasticity, Chaboche
nonlinear hardening plasticity, and creep are supported. To simulate the tension-/compression-only
options, a nonlinear iterative solution approach is necessary; therefore, large-deflection effects must be
activated (NLGEOM,ON) prior to the solution phase of the analysis.
See LINK180 in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for more details about this element.
Z
x
Y
I
X
LINK180 Input Data

The element is defined by two nodes, the cross-sectional area (AREA), added mass per unit length
(ADDMAS), and the material properties. The element X-axis is oriented along the length of the element
from node I toward node J.
Element loads are described in Nodal Loading (p. 49). Temperatures may be input as element body
loads at the nodes. The node I temperature T(I) defaults to TUNIF. The node J temperature T(J) defaults
to T(I).
LINK180 allows a change in cross-sectional area as a function of axial elongation. By default, the cross-
sectional area changes such that the volume of the element is preserved, even after deformation. The
default is suitable for elastoplastic applications. By using KEYOPT(2), you may choose to keep the cross
section constant or rigid.
LINK180 offers tension-only or compression-only options. You can specify the desired behavior via the
third real constant. (See "LINK180 Input Summary" (p. 824) for details.) A nonlinear solution procedure is
LINK180
necessary for these options; for more information, see the documentation for the SOLCONTROL com-
mand.
You can apply an initial stress state to this element via the INISTATE command. For more information,
see "Initial State" in the Basic Analysis Guide.
The "LINK180 Input Summary" (p. 824) table summarizes the element input. Element Input (p. 43) gives

Nodes
I, J
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, UZ
Real Constants

ADDMAS - Added mass (mass/length)
TENSKEY - Tension- or compression-only option:
0 -- Tension and compression (default)
1 -- Tension only
-1 -- Compression only
Material Properties
EX, (PRXY or NUXY), ALPX (or CTEX or THSX), DENS, GXY, ALPD, BETD
Surface Loads
None
Body Loads
Temperatures --
T(I), T(J)
Special Features
Birth and death

Initial state
Large deflection
Large strain
Linear perturbation
Nonlinear stabilization
Plasticity
Stress stiffening
Viscoelasticity
Viscoplasticity / Creep
KEYOPT(2)
Cross-section scaling (applies only if large-deflection effects [NLGEOM,ON] apply ):
0 --
Enforce incompressibility; cross section is scaled as a function of axial stretch. (default).
LINK180
1 --
Section is assumed to be rigid.
LINK180 Output Data


• Additional element output as shown in Table 1: LINK180 Element Output Definitions (p. 825).
Several items are illustrated in Figure 2 (p. 825). A general description of solution output is given in
Solution Output (p. 50). Element results can be viewed in POST1 with PRESOL,ELEM. See the Basic
Analysis Guide for details.
Figure 2 LINK180 Stress Output
S(A L)
J
EPEL(A L)
EPPL(A L)
Z I EPTH(A L)
EPCR(A L)
Y EPSW(A L)
X
available.

Name Definition O R
REAL Real constant number Y Y
XC, YC, ZC Center location Y 1
AREA Cross-sectional area Y Y
FORCE Member force in the element coordinate system Y Y
LINK180
Name Definition O R
Sxx Axial stress Y Y
EPELxx Axial elastic strain Y Y
EPTOxx Total strain Y Y
EPEQ Plastic equivalent strain 2 2
Cur.Yld.Flag Current yield flag 2 2
Plwk Plastic strain energy density 2 2
Pressure Hydrostatic pressure 2 2
Creq Creep equivalent strain 2 2
Crwk_Creep Creep strain energy density 2 2
EPPLxx Axial plastic strain 2 2
EPCRxx Axial creep strain 2 2
EPTHxx Axial thermal strain 3 3

2. Available only if the element has an appropriate nonlinear material.
3. Available only if the element temperatures differ from the reference temperature.
The element printout also includes 'INT, SEC PTS' (which are always '1, Y Z' where Y and Z both have
values of 0.0). These values are printed to maintain formatting consistency with the output printouts
of the BEAM188, BEAM189, PIPE288, and PIPE289 elements.
Table 2: LINK180 Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 826) lists output available through ETABLE using the
Sequence Number method. See The General Postprocessor (POST1) in the Basic Analysis Guide and The
Item and Sequence Number Table (p. 52) in this manual for more information. The following notation is
used in Table 2: LINK180 Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 826):
Name
output quantity as defined in Table 1: LINK180 Element Output Definitions (p. 825)
Item
predetermined Item label for ETABLE and
ESOL
E
I,J

Quant- Input
ity Item E I J
Name
Sxx LS - 1 2
LINK180

Quant- Input
ity Item E I J
Name
EPELxx LEPEL - 1 2
EPTOxx LEPTO - 1 2
EPTHxx LEPTH - 1 2
EPPLxx LEPPL - 1 2
EPCRxx LEPCR - 1 2
FORCE SMISC 1 - -
AREA SMISC 2 - -
TEMP LBFE - 1 2

• The spar element assumes a straight bar, axially loaded at its ends, and of uniform properties from end
to end.
• The length of the spar must be greater than zero, so nodes I and J must not be coincident.
• The temperature is assumed to vary linearly along the length of the spar.
• The displacement shape function implies a uniform stress in the spar.
• Stress stiffening is always included in geometrically nonlinear analyses (NLGEOM,ON). Prestress effects
can be activated by the PSTRES command.
• To simulate the tension-/compression-only options, a nonlinear iterative solution approach is necessary.

SHELL181

SHELL181 is suitable for analyzing thin to moderately-thick shell structures. It is a four-node element
with six degrees of freedom at each node: translations in the x, y, and z directions, and rotations about
the x, y, and z-axes. (If the membrane option is used, the element has translational degrees of freedom
only). The degenerate triangular option should only be used as filler elements in mesh generation.
SHELL181 is well-suited for linear, large rotation, and/or large strain nonlinear applications. Change in
shell thickness is accounted for in nonlinear analyses. In the element domain, both full and reduced
integration schemes are supported. SHELL181 accounts for follower (load stiffness) effects of distributed
pressures.
SHELL181 may be used for layered applications for modeling composite shells or sandwich construction.
The accuracy in modeling composite shells is governed by the first-order shear-deformation theory
(usually referred to as Mindlin-Reissner shell theory).
The element formulation is based on logarithmic strain and true stress measures. The element kinematics
allow for finite membrane strains (stretching). However, the curvature changes within a time increment
are assumed to be small.
SHELL181 Input Data

The following figure shows the geometry, node locations, and the element coordinate system for this
element. The element is defined by shell section information and by four nodes (I, J, K, and L).
SHELL181
z
z
5
2
8 7
K
L
y y
x
6 4
x K,L

Z
I
J
Y I J
(not recommended)
xo = Element x-axis if ESYS is not provided.
x = Element x-axis if ESYS is provided.
Single-Layer Definition
To define the thickness (and other information), use section definition, as follows:
SECTYPE,,SHELL
SECDATA,THICKNESS, ...
A single-layer shell section definition provides flexible options. For example, you can specify the number
of integration points used and the material orientation.
Multilayer Definition
The shell section commands allow for layered shell definition. Options are available for specifying the
thickness, material, orientation, and number of integration points through the thickness of the layers.
You can designate the number of integration points (1, 3, 5, 7, or 9) located through the thickness of
each layer when using section input. When only one, the point is always located midway between the
top and bottom surfaces. If three or more points, two points are located on the top and bottom surfaces
respectively and the remaining points are distributed equal distance between the two points. The default
number of integration points for each layer is three; however, when a single layer is defined and plasticity
is present, the number of integration points is changed to a minimum of five during solution.
The following additional capabilities are available when defining shell layers:
• SHELL181 accepts the preintegrated shell section type (SECTYPE,,GENS).
SHELL181
When the element is associated with the GENS section type, thickness or material definitions
are not required.
• You can use the function tool to define thickness as a function of global/local coordinates or node
numbers (SECFUNCTION).
• You can specify offsets (SECOFFSET).
• A section can be partially defined using data from a FiberSIM .xml file (SECTYPE,,SHELL,FIBERSIM).
Other Input
The default orientation for this element has the S1 (shell surface coordinate) axis aligned with the first
parametric direction of the element at the center of the element, which connects the midsides of edges
LI and JK and is shown as xo in Figure 1 (p. 830). In the most general case, the axis can be defined as:
∂  ∂ 
1=  
∂  ∂ 
where:
8
=∑ i i
i=
{x} , {x}J, {x}K, {x}L = global nodal coordinates
I
For undistorted elements, the default orientation is the same as described in Coordinate Systems (p. 56)
(the first surface direction is aligned with the IJ side). For spatially warped or otherwise distorted elements,
the default orientation represents the stress state better because the element uses a single point of
quadrature (by default) in the element domain.
The first surface direction S1 can be rotated by angle θ (in degrees) for the layer via the SECDATA
command. For an element, you can specify a single value of orientation in the plane of the element.
Layer-wise orientation is supported.
You can also define element orientation via the ESYS command. See Coordinate Systems (p. 56).
The element supports degeneration into a triangular form; however, use of the triangular form is not
recommended, except when used as mesh filler elements or with the membrane option (KEYOPT(1) =
1). The triangle form is generally more robust when using the membrane option with large deflections.
To evaluate stresses and strains on exterior surfaces, use KEYOPT(1) = 2. When used as overlaid elements
on the faces of 3-D elements, this option is similar to the surface stress option (described in the Mech-
anical APDL Theory Reference), but is more general and applicable to nonlinear analysis. The element
used with this option does not provide any stiffness, mass, or load contributions. This option should
only be used in single-layer shells. Irrespective of other settings, SHELL181 provides stress and strain
output at the center of the layer.
SHELL181 uses a penalty method to relate the independent rotational degrees of freedom about the
normal (to the shell surface) with the in-plane components of displacements. The program chooses an
appropriate penalty stiffness by default. A drill stiffness factor can be specified via the SECCONTROLS
command.
SHELL181
multiplied by the shell thickness.
Temperatures may be input as element body loads at the corners of the outside faces of the element
and at the corners of the interfaces between layers. The first corner temperature T1 defaults to TUNIF.
If all other temperatures are unspecified, they default to T1. If KEYOPT(1) = 0 and if exactly NL+1 tem-
peratures are input, one temperature is used for the four bottom corners of each layer, and the last
temperature is used for the four top corner temperatures of the top layer. If KEYOPT(1) = 1 and if exactly
NL temperatures are input, one temperature is used for the four corners of each layer. That is, T1 is
used for T1, T2, T3, and T4; T2 (as input) is used for T5, T6, T7, and T8, etc. For any other input pattern,
Using KEYOPT(3), SHELL181 supports uniform reduced integration and full integration with incompatible
modes. By default, this element uses the uniform reduced integration for performance reasons in non-
linear applications.
Using reduced integration with hourglass control creates some usage restrictions, although minimal.
For example, to capture the in-plane bending of a cantilever or a stiffener (see Figure 2 (p. 833)), a
number of elements through the thickness direction is necessary. The performance gains achieved by
using uniform reduced integration are significant enough to offset the need to use more elements. In
relatively well-refined meshes, hourglassing issues are largely irrelevant.
When the reduced integration option is used, you can check the accuracy of the solution by comparing
the total energy (SENE label in ETABLE) and the artificial energy (AENE label in ETABLE) introduced by
hourglass control. If the ratio of artificial energy to total energy is less than 5%, the solution is generally
acceptable. The total energy and artificial energy can also be monitored by using OUTPR,VENG in the
solution phase.
Bilinear elements, when fully integrated, are too stiff in in-plane bending.SHELL181 uses the method
of incompatible modes to enhance the accuracy in bending-dominated problems. This approach is also
called "extra shapes" or "bubble" modes approach. SHELL181 uses the formulation that ensures satisfaction
of the patch test (J. C. Simo and F. Armero, "Geometrically nonlinear enhanced strain mixed methods
and the method of incompatible modes," IJNME, Vol. 33, pp. 1413-1449, 1992).
When including incompatible modes in the analysis, you must use full integration. KEYOPT(3) = 2 implies
the inclusion of incompatible modes and the use of full (2x2) quadrature.
SHELL181, with KEYOPT(3) = 2 specified, does not have any spurious energy mechanisms. This specific
form of SHELL181 is highly accurate, even with coarse meshes. We recommend that you use KEYOPT(3)
= 2 if you encounter any hourglass-related difficulties with the default options. KEYOPT(3) = 2 is also
necessary if the mesh is coarse and in-plane bending of the elements dominate the response. We re-
commend this option with all layered applications.
KEYOPT(3) = 2 imposes the fewest usage restrictions. You can always choose this option. However, you
can improve element performance by choosing the best option for your problem. Consider the problems
illustrated in Figure 2 (p. 833)
SHELL181
Figure 2 SHELL181 Typical Bending Applications
KEYOPT(3) = 2 required for

in-plane bending if only one
element through thickness
is used.
KEYOPT(3) = 0 may be used for

in-plane bending if at least four
elements through thickness
are used.
U
B

U

The cantilever beam and the beam cross-section to be modeled with shells are typical examples of in-
plane bending-dominated problems. The use of KEYOPT(3) = 2 is the most effective choice in these
circumstances. Reduced integration would require refined meshes. For example, reduced integration
for the cantilever beam problem requires four elements through the thickness, whereas the full integ-
ration with incompatible modes only requires one element through the thickness.
For the stiffened shell, the most effective choice is to use KEYOPT(3) = 0 for the shell and KEYOPT(3) =
2 for the stiffener.
When KEYOPT(3) = 0 is specified, SHELL181 uses an hourglass control method for membrane and
bending modes. By default, SHELL181 calculates the hourglass parameters for both metal and hypere-
lastic applications. To specify the hourglass stiffness scaling factors, use the SECCONTROLS command.
SHELL181 includes the linear effects of transverse shear deformation. An assumed shear strain formulation
of Bathe-Dvorkin is used to alleviate shear locking. The transverse shear stiffness of the element is a
2x2 matrix as shown below:
SHELL181
 11 12 
= 
 22 
To define transverse shear stiffness values, use the SECCONTROLS command.
For a single-layer shell with isotropic material, default transverse shear stiffnesses are:
 
=  
 
In the above matrix, k = 5/6, G = shear modulus, and h = thickness of the shell.
SHELL181 can be associated with linear elastic, elastoplastic, creep, or hyperelastic material properties.
Only isotropic, anisotropic, and orthotropic linear elastic properties can be input for elasticity. The von
Mises isotropic hardening plasticity models can be invoked with BISO (bilinear isotropic hardening),
MISO (multilinear isotropic hardening), and NLISO (nonlinear isotropic hardening) options. The kinematic
hardening plasticity models can be invoked with BKIN (bilinear kinematic hardening), MKIN and KINH
(multilinear kinematic hardening), and CHABOCHE (nonlinear kinematic hardening). Invoking plasticity
assumes that the elastic properties are isotropic (that is, if orthotropic elasticity is used with plasticity,
ANSYS assumes the isotropic elastic modulus = EX and Poisson's ratio = NUXY).
Hyperelastic material properties (2, 3, 5, or 9 parameter Mooney-Rivlin material model, Neo-Hookean

model, Polynomial form model, Arruda-Boyce model, and user-defined model) can be used with this
element. Poisson's ratio is used to specify the compressibility of the material. If less than 0, Poisson's
ratio is set to 0; if greater than or equal to 0.5, Poisson's ratio is set to 0.5 (fully incompressible).
Both isotropic and orthotropic thermal expansion coefficients can be input using MP,ALPX. When used
with hyperelasticity, isotropic expansion is assumed.
BETAD command. Similarly, use the TREF command to specify the global value of reference temperature.
value from the TREF command. But if MP,REFT is defined for the material number of the layer, it is used
instead of either the global or element value.
With reduced integration and hourglass control (KEYOPT(3) = 0), low frequency spurious modes may
appear if the mass matrix employed is not consistent with the quadrature rule. SHELL181 uses a projection
scheme that effectively filters out the inertia contributions to the hourglass modes of the element. To
be effective, a consistent mass matrix must be used. We recommend setting LUMPM,OFF for a modal
analysis using this element type. The lumped mass option can, however, be used with the full integration
options (KEYOPT(3) = 2).
KEYOPT(8) = 2 stores midsurface results in the results file for single or multi-layer shell elements. If you
use SHELL,MID, you will see these calculated values, rather than the average of the TOP and BOTTOM
results. You should use this option to access these correct midsurface results (membrane results) for
those analyses where averaging TOP and BOTTOM results is inappropriate; examples include midsurface
stresses and strains with nonlinear material behavior, and midsurface results after mode combinations
that involve squaring operations such as in spectrum analyses.
SHELL181
KEYOPT(9) = 1 reads initial thickness data from a user subroutine.
matrix is needed for pressure load stiffness effects, use NROPT,UNSYM.

Nodes
I, J, K, L
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, UZ, ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ if KEYOPT(1) = 0

Material Properties
EX, EY, EZ, (PRXY, PRYZ, PRXZ, or NUXY, NUYZ, NUXZ),

DENS, GXY, GYZ, GXZ, ALPD
may be provided once for the element, or it may be assigned on a per-layer basis. See the discussion
in "SHELL181 Input Summary" (p. 835) for more details.
Surface Loads
Pressures --
face 1 (I-J-K-L) (bottom, in +N direction),

face 2 (I-J-K-L) (top, in -N direction),
Body Loads
Temperatures --
For KEYOPT(1) = 0 (Bending and membrane stiffness):
T1, T2, T3, T4 (at bottom of layer 1), T5, T6, T7, T8 (between layers 1-2); similarly for between
next layers, ending with temperatures at top of layer NL(4*(NL+1) maximum). Hence, for one-
layer elements, 8 temperatures are used.
For KEYOPT(1) = 1 (Membrane stiffness only):
T1, T2, T3, T4 for layer 1, T5, T6, T7, T8 for layer 2, similarly for all layers (4*NL maximum). Hence,
for one-layer elements, 4 temperatures are used.
Special Features
Birth and death

Elasticity
SHELL181
Element technology autoselect

Hyperelasticity
Initial state
Large deflection
Large strain
Linear perturbation
Plasticity
Section definition for layered shells and preintegrated general shell sections for input of homogenous
section stiffnesses
Stress stiffening
Viscoelasticity
KEYOPT(1)
Element stiffness:
0 --
Bending and membrane stiffness (default)
1 --
Membrane stiffness only
2 --
Stress/strain evaluation only
KEYOPT(3)
Integration option:
0 --
Reduced integration with hourglass control (default)
2 --
Full integration with incompatible modes
KEYOPT(8)
Specify layer data storage:
0 --
Store data for bottom of bottom layer and top of top layer (multi-layer elements) (default)
1 --
Store data for TOP and BOTTOM, for all layers (multi-layer elements)
Note
Volume of data may be excessive.
2 --
Store data for TOP, BOTTOM, and MID for all layers; applies to single- and multi-layer elements
KEYOPT(9)
User thickness option:
0 --
No user subroutine to provide initial thickness (default)
SHELL181
1 --
Read initial thickness data from user subroutine UTHICK
Note
See the Guide to ANSYS User Programmable Features for user written subroutines


KEYOPT(8) controls the amount of data output to the results file for processing with the LAYER command.
Interlaminar shear stress is available as SYZ and SXZ evaluated at the layer interfaces. KEYOPT(8) must
be set to either 1 or 2 to output these stresses in POST1. A general description of solution output is
given in Solution Output (p. 50). See the Basic Analysis Guide for ways to review results.
The element stress resultants (N11, M11, Q13, etc.) are parallel to the element coordinate system, as
are the membrane strains and curvatures of the element. Such generalized strains are available through
the SMISC option at the element centroid only. The transverse shear forces Q13, Q23 are available only
in resultant form: that is, use SMISC,7 (or 8). Likewise, the transverse shear strains, γ13 and γ23, are constant
through the thickness and are only available as SMISC items (SMISC,15 and SMISC,16, respectively).
ANSYS computes moments (M11, M22, M12) with respect to the shell reference plane. By default, ANSYS
adopts the shell midplane as the reference plane. To offset the reference plane to any other specified
location, issue the SECOFFSET command. When there is a nonzero offset (L) from the reference plane
to the midplane, moments with respect to the midplane ( ) can be recovered from stress
resultants with respect to the reference plane as follows:
= − ×
= − ×
= − ×
SHELL181 does not support extensive basic element printout. POST1 provides more comprehensive
output processing tools; therefore, ANSYS suggests using the OUTRES command to ensure that the
required results are stored in the database.
SHELL181
SY
SX
SX(TOP)
SX (MID)
SX (BOT)
y, y
o
Q13
M12
M11
N11
z
o Q23
M22
z x, x
o
N12
N12
M21
N22
L
y

P y
y
o
K
x
x
o
I

available.

Name Definition O R
EL Element number and name Y Y
SHELL181
Name Definition O R
NODES Nodes - I, J, K, L - Y
MAT Material number - Y
THICK Average thickness - Y
VOLU: Volume - Y
XC, YC, ZC Location where results are reported - 4
PRES Pressures P1 at nodes I, J, K, L; P2 at I, J, K, L; P3 at - Y
J,I; P4 at K,J; P5 at L,K; P6 at I,L
TEMP T1, T2, T3, T4 at bottom of layer 1, T5, T6, T7, T8 - Y
between layers 1-2, similarly for between next layers,
ending with temperatures at top of layer
NL(4*(NL+1) maximum)
LOC TOP, MID, BOT, or integration point location - 1
S:1, 2, 3 Principal stresses - 1
S:INT Stress intensity - 1
S:EQV Equivalent stress - 1
EPEL:EQV Equivalent elastic strains [7] - 1
EPTH:X, Y, Z, XY Thermal strains 3 1
EPTH:EQV Equivalent thermal strains [7] - 1
EPPL:X, Y, Z, XY Average plastic strains 3 2
EPPL:EQV Equivalent plastic strains [7] - 2
EPCR:X, Y, Z, XY Average creep strains 3 2
EPCR:EQV Equivalent creep strains [7] - 2
EPTO:X, Y, Z, XY Total mechanical strains (EPEL + EPPL + EPCR) 3 -
EPTO:EQV Total equivalent mechanical strains (EPEL + EPPL + - -
EPCR)
NL:EPEQ Accumulated equivalent plastic strain - 2
NL:CREQ Accumulated equivalent creep strain - 2
NL:SRAT Plastic yielding (1 = actively yielding, 0 = not yield- - 2
ing)
NL:PLWK Plastic work - 2
SEND:ELASTIC, Strain energy densities - 2
PLASTIC, CREEP
N11, N22, N12 In-plane forces (per unit length) - Y
M11, M22, M12 Out-of-plane moments (per unit length) - 8
Q13, Q23 Transverse shear forces (per unit length) - 8
ε11, ε22, ε12 Membrane strains - Y
SHELL181
Name Definition O R
k11, k22, k12 Curvatures - 8
γ13, γ23 Transverse shear strains - 8
LOCI:X, Y, Z Integration point locations - 5
SVAR:1, 2, ... , N State variables - 6
ILSXZ SXZ interlaminar shear stress - Y
ILSYZ SYZ interlaminar shear stress - Y
ILSUM Magnitude of the interlaminar shear stress vector - Y
ILANG Angle of interlaminar shear stress vector (measured - Y
from the element x-axis toward the element y-axis
in degrees)
Sm: 11, 22, 12 Membrane stresses - Y
Sb: 11, 22, 12 Bending stresses - Y
Sp: 11, 22, 12 Peak stresses - Y
St: 13, 23 Averaged transverse shear stresses - Y
1. The following stress solution repeats for top, middle, and bottom surfaces.
2. Nonlinear solution output for top, middle, and bottom surfaces, if the element has a nonlinear mater-
ial, or if large-deflection effects are enabled (NLGEOM,ON) for SEND.
3. Stresses, total strains, plastic strains, elastic strains, creep strains, and thermal strains in the element
coordinate system are available for output (at all section points through thickness). If layers are in use,
the results are in the layer coordinate system.
5. Available only if OUTRES,LOCI is used.
6. Available only if the UserMat subroutine and TB,STATE command are used.
8. Not available if the membrane element option is used (KEYOPT(1) = 1).
Table 2: SHELL181 Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 841) lists output available through ETABLE using the
Sequence Number Table (p. 52) in this manual for more information. The following notation is used in
Table 2: SHELL181 Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 841):
Name
Item
E
SHELL181
I,J,K,L

ity
Name
N11 SMISC 1 - - - -
N22 SMISC 2 - - - -
N12 SMISC 3 - - - -
M11 SMISC 4 - - - -
M22 SMISC 5 - - - -
M12 SMISC 6 - - - -
Q13 SMISC 7 - - - -
Q23 SMISC 8 - - - -
ε11 SMISC 9 - - - -
ε22 SMISC 10 - - - -
ε12 SMISC 11 - - - -
k11 SMISC 12 - - - -
k22 SMISC 13 - - - -
k12 SMISC 14 - - - -
γ13 SMISC 15 - - - -
γ23 SMISC 16 - - - -
THICK SMISC 17 - - - -
P1 SMISC - 18 19 20 21
P2 SMISC - 22 23 24 25
P3 SMISC - 27 26 - -
P4 SMISC - - 29 28 -
P5 SMISC - - - 31 30
P6 SMISC - 32 - - 33
Sm: 11 SMISC 34 - - - -
Sm: 22 SMISC 35 - - - -
Sm: 12 SMISC 36 - - - -
Sb: 11 SMISC 37 - - - -
Sb: 22 SMISC 38 - - - -
Sb: 12 SMISC 39 - - - -
Sp: 11 SMISC 40 - - - -
(at shell
bottom)
SHELL181

ity
Name
Sp: 22 SMISC 41 - - - -
(at shell
bottom)
Sp: 12 SMISC 42 - - - -
(at shell
bottom)
Sp: 11 SMISC 43 - - - -
(at shell
top)
Sp: 22 SMISC 44 - - - -
(at shell
top)
Sp: 12 SMISC 45 - - - -
(at shell
top)
St: 13 SMISC 46 - - - -
St: 23 SMISC 47 - - - -

Quant- Item Bottom of Layer Top of Layer NL
ity i
Name
ILSXZ SMISC 8 * (i - 1) + 51 8 * (NL - 1) + 52
ILSYZ SMISC 8 * (i - 1) + 53 8 * (NL - 1) + 54
ILSUM SMISC 8 * (i - 1) + 55 8 * (NL - 1) + 56
ILANG SMISC 8 * (i - 1) + 57 8 * (NL - 1) + 58

• ANSYS recommends against using this element in triangular form, except as a filler element. Avoid tri-
angular form especially in areas with high stress gradients.
• Zero-area elements are not allowed. (Zero-area elements occur most often whenever the elements are
numbered improperly.)
• Zero thickness elements or elements tapering down to a zero thickness at any corner are not allowed
(but zero thickness layers are allowed).
• If multiple load steps are used, the number of layers may not change between load steps.
• When the element is associated with preintegrated shell sections (SECTYPE,,GENS), additional restrictions
apply. For more information, see Considerations for Using Preintegrated Shell Sections.
• If reduced integration is used (KEYOPT(3) = 0) SHELL181 ignores rotary inertia effects when an unbalanced
laminate construction is used, and all inertial effects are assumed to be in the nodal plane (that is, an
unbalanced laminate construction and offsets have no effect on the mass properties of the element).
SHELL181
• For most composite analyses, ANSYS recommends setting KEYOPT(3) = 2 (necessary to capture the
stress gradients).
• No slippage is assumed between the element layers. Shear deflections are included in the element;
however, normals to the center plane before deformation are assumed to remain straight after deform-
ation.
• Transverse shear stiffness of the shell section is estimated by an energy equivalence procedure (of the
generalized section forces & strains vs. the material point stresses and strains). The accuracy of this
calculation may be adversely affected if the ratio of material stiffnesses (Young's moduli) between adjacent
layers is very high.
• The calculation of interlaminar shear stresses is based on simplifying assumptions of unidirectional,
uncoupled bending in each direction. If accurate edge interlaminar shear stresses are required, shell-to-
solid submodeling should be used.
• The section definition permits use of hyperelastic material models and elastoplastic material models in
laminate definition. However, the accuracy of the solution is primarily governed by fundamental assump-
tions of shell theory. The applicability of shell theory in such cases is best understood by using a com-
parable solid model.
• The layer orientation angle has no effect if the material of the layer is hyperelastic.
• Before using this element in a simulation containing curved thick shell structures with unbalanced
laminate construction or shell offsets, validate the usage via full 3-D modeling with a solid element in
a simpler representative model. This element may underestimate the curved thick shell stiffness, partic-
ularly when the offset is large and the structure is under torsional load.
• The through-thickness stress, SZ, is always zero.
• This element works best with the full Newton-Raphson solution scheme (NROPT,FULL,ON).
• In a nonlinear analysis, the solution process terminates if the thickness at any integration point that
was defined with a nonzero thickness vanishes (within a small numerical tolerance).
• If a shell section has only one layer and the number of section integration points is equal to one, or if
KEYOPT(1) = 1, then the shell has no bending stiffness, a condition that can result in solver and conver-
gence problems.

ANSYS Professional
• The only special features allowed are stress stiffening, large deflections, and plasticity (BISO, BKIN).
PLANE182

PLANE182 is used for 2-D modeling of solid structures. The element can be used as either a plane element
(plane stress, plane strain or generalized plane strain) or an axisymmetric element. It is defined by four
nodes having two degrees of freedom at each node: translations in the nodal x and y directions. The
element has plasticity, hyperelasticity, stress stiffening, large deflection, and large strain capabilities. It
also has mixed formulation capability for simulating deformations of nearly incompressible elastoplastic
materials, and fully incompressible hyperelastic materials.
3
L K
K, L
4
I
Y
(or axial) J
I
1 J
Tngu Optn -
X (or radial) nt ecmmene
PLANE182 Input Data

The geometry and node locations for this element are shown in Figure 1 (p. 845). The element input
data includes four nodes, a thickness (for the plane stress option only), and the orthotropic material
properties. The default element coordinate system is along global directions. You may define an element
coordinate system using ESYS, which forms the basis for orthotropic material directions.
Input the nodal forces, if any, per unit of depth for a plane analysis (except for KEYOPT(3) = 3 or KEY-
OPT(3) = 5) and on a full 360° basis for an axisymmetric analysis.
KEYOPT(3) = 5 is used to enable generalized plane strain. For more information about the generalized
plane strain option, see Generalized Plane Strain (p. 62) in the Element Reference.
PLANE182
KEYOPT(6) = 1 sets the element for using mixed formulation. For details on the use of mixed formulation,
see Applications of Mixed u-P Formulations (p. 67) in the Element Reference.
As described in Coordinate Systems (p. 56), you can use ESYS to orient the material properties and
strain/stress output. Use RSYS to choose output that follows the material coordinate system or the
global coordinate system. For the case of hyperelastic materials, the output of stress and strain is always
with respect to the global Cartesian coordinate system rather than following the material/element co-
ordinate system.
"PLANE182 Input Summary" (p. 846) contains a summary of the element input. For a general description
of element input, see Element Input (p. 43). For axisymmetric applications see Harmonic Axisymmetric
Elements (p. 76).

Nodes
I, J, K, L
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY
Real Constants

HGSTF - Hourglass stiffness scaling factor (used only if KEYOPT(1) = 1); default is 1.0 (if you input
0.0, the default value is used)
Material Properties
DENS, GXY, GYZ, GXZ, ALPD, BETD
Surface Loads
Pressures --
Body Loads
Temperatures --
T(I), T(J), T(K), T(L)
Body force densities --
The element values in the global X, Y, and Z directions.
Special Features --
Birth and death

Elasticity
Hyperelasticity
PLANE182
Initial state
Large deflection
Large strain
Linear perturbation
Plasticity
Rezoning
Stress stiffening
Viscoelasticity
KEYOPT(1)
Element technology:
0 --
Full integration with method
1 --
Uniform reduced integration with hourglass control
2 --
Enhanced strain formulation
3 --
Simplified enhanced strain formulation
KEYOPT(3)
Element behavior:
0 --
Plane stress
1 --
Axisymmetric
2 --
3 --
Plane stress with thickness input
5 --
KEYOPT(6)
0 --
Use pure displacement formulation (default)
1 --
Use mixed u-P formulation (not valid with plane stress)
PLANE182 Element Technology
PLANE182 uses the full-integration method (also known as the selective reduced integration method),
enhanced strain formulation, simplified enhanced strain formulation, or uniform reduced integration.
PLANE182
When enhanced strain formulation (KEYOPT(1) = 2) is selected, the element introduces four internal
(user-inaccessible) degrees of freedom to handle shear locking, and one internal degree of freedom to
handle volumetric locking.
For more information, see Element Technologies.


The element stress directions are parallel to the element coordinate system. A general description of
L 3 K
S
4
S 2
Y
(or axial)
I
X (or radial) 1 J
Stress directions are shown for Global.
available.

Name Definition O R
EL Element number - Y
THICK Thickness - Y
PLANE182
Name Definition O R
VOLU: Volume - Y
PRES Pressures P1 at nodes J,I; P2 at K,J; P3 at L,K; P4 at - Y
I,L
TEMP Temperatures T(I), T(J), T(K), T(L) - Y
S:X, Y, Z, XY Stresses (SZ = 0.0 for plane stress elements) Y Y
S:1, 2, 3 Principal stresses - Y
S:INT Stress intensity - Y
EPEL:X, Y, Z, XY Elastic strains Y Y
EPPL:X, Y, Z, XY Plastic strains[7] 1 1
EPCR:X, Y, Z, XY Creep strains 1 1
EPTO:X, Y, Z, XY Total mechanical strains (EPEL + EPPL + EPCR) Y -
EPTO:EQV Total equivalent mechanical strains (EPEL + EPPL + Y -
EPCR)
NL:EPEQ Accumulated equivalent plastic strain 1 1
NL:CREQ Accumulated equivalent plastic strain 1 1
NL:SRAT Plastic yielding (1 = actively yielding, 0 = not yield- 1 1
ing)
NL:PLWK Plastic work 1 1
NL:HPRES Hydrostatic pressure 1 1
PLASTIC, CREEP
1. Nonlinear solution, output only if the element has a nonlinear material, or if large-deflection effects
are enabled (NLGEOM,ON) for SEND.
2. Output only if element has a thermal load.
PLANE182
7. For the shape memory alloy material model, transformation strains are reported as plasticity strain
EPPL.
Note
For axisymmetric solutions in a global coordinate system, the X, Y, Z, and XY stress and strain
outputs correspond to the radial, axial, hoop, and in-plane shear stresses and strains, respect-
ively.
Table 2: PLANE182 Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 850) lists output available through ETABLE using the
Sequence Number Table (p. 52) in this manual for more information. The following notation is used in
Table 2: PLANE182 Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 850):
Name
Item
E
I,J,K,L

ity
Name
P1 SMISC - 2 1 - -
P2 SMISC - - 4 3 -
P3 SMISC - - - 6 5
P4 SMISC - 7 - - 8
THICK NMISC 1 - - - -

• The area of the element must be nonzero.
• You can form a triangular element by defining duplicate K and L node numbers (see Degenerated Shape
Elements (p. 39)). For triangular elements where the or enhanced strain formulations are specified,
degenerated shape functions and a conventional integration scheme are used.
• If you use the mixed formulation (KEYOPT(6) = 1), you must use the sparse solver.
• For modal cyclic symmetry analyses, ANSYS, Inc. recommends using enhanced strain formulation.
PLANE182

PLANE183
2-D 8-Node or 6-Node Structural Solid

PLANE183 is a higher order 2-D, 8-node or 6-node element. PLANE183 has quadratic displacement be-
havior and is well suited to modeling irregular meshes (such as those produced by various CAD/CAM
systems).
This element is defined by 8 nodes or 6 nodes having two degrees of freedom at each node: translations
in the nodal x and y directions. The element may be used as a plane element (plane stress, plane strain
and generalized plane strain) or as an axisymmetric element. This element has plasticity, hyperelasticity,
creep, stress stiffening, large deflection, and large strain capabilities. It also has mixed formulation
capability for simulating deformations of nearly incompressible elastoplastic materials, and fully incom-
pressible hyperelastic materials. Initial state is supported. Various printout options are also available.

L
3
K
O 2
K, L, O
4 3
P
2
N P N
I I
M
M
J
1 Degenete 1
Y tnge
(or axial) KE OPT = 0 KE OPT =
X (or radial)
PLANE183 Input Data

Although a degenerated triangular-shaped element may be formed by defining the same node number
for nodes K, L and O when KEYOPT(1) = 1, it is better to use KEYOPT(1) = 1 for triangular shaped elements.
In addition to the nodes, the element input data includes a thickness (TK) (for the plane stress option
only) and the orthotropic material properties. Orthotropic material directions correspond to the element
coordinate directions. The element coordinate system orientation is described in Coordinate Sys-
tems (p. 56).
PLANE183
element faces as shown by the circled numbers in Figure 1 (p. 853). Positive pressures act into the element.
to TUNIF. If all other temperatures are unspecified, they default to T(I). If all corner node temperatures
are specified, each midside node temperature defaults to the average temperature of its adjacent corner
nodes. For any other input temperature pattern, unspecified temperatures default to TUNIF.
The nodal forces, if any, should be input per unit of depth for a plane analysis (except for KEYOPT(3) =
3 or KEYOPT(3) = 5) and on a full 360° basis for an axisymmetric analysis.
strain/stress output. Use ESYS to choose output that follows the material coordinate system or the
ordinate system.
KEYOPT(3) = 5 is used to enable generalized plane strain. For more information about the generalized
plane strain option, see Generalized Plane Strain (p. 62) in the Element Reference.
input. For axisymmetric applications see Harmonic Axisymmetric Elements (p. 76).

Nodes
I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P when KEYOPT(1) = 0
I, J, K, L, M, N when KEYOPT(1) = 1)
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY
Real Constants
None, if KEYOPT (3) = 0, 1, or 2

THK - Thickness if KEYOPT (3) = 3
Material Properties
Surface Loads
Pressures --
face 1 (J-I), face 2 (K-J), face 3 (I-K), face 4 (I-L) when KEYOPT(1) = 0
PLANE183
face 1 (J-I), face 2 (K-J), face 3 (I-K) when KEYOPT(1) = 1

Body Loads
Temperatures --
T(I), T(J), T(K), T(L), T(M), T(N), T(O), T(P) when KEYOPT(1) = 0
T(I), T(J), T(K), T(L), T(M), T(N) when KEYOPT(1) = 1

Special Features
Birth and death

Elasticity
Hyperelasticity
Initial state
Large deflection
Large strain
Linear perturbation
Plasticity
Rezoning
Stress stiffening
Viscoelasticity
KEYOPT(1)
Element shape:
0 --
1 --
6-node triangle
KEYOPT(3)
Element behavior:
0 --
Plane stress
1 --
Axisymmetric
2 --
3 --
Plane stress with thickness (TK) real constant input
5 --
KEYOPT(6)
PLANE183
0 --
1 --
Use mixed u-P formulation (not valid with plane stress)


L O K
S
P
Y S N
(or axial)
I
X (or radial) M J
available.

Name Definition O R
NODES Nodes - I, J, K, L (for KEYOPT(1) = 0 and I, J, K (for - Y
KEYOPT(1) = 1)
THICK Thickness - Y
VOLU: Volume - Y
PLANE183
Name Definition O R
PRES Pressures P1 at nodes J, I; P2 at K, J; P3 at L, K; P4 at - Y
I, L (P4 only for KEYOPT(1) = 0
(T(L) only when KEYOPT(1) = 0)

S:X, Y, Z, XY Stresses (SZ = 0.0 for plane stress elements) Y Y
S: INT Stress intensity - Y
S:EQV Equivalent stress - Y
EPPL:X, Y, Z, XY Plastic strains[8] 1 1
EPPL:EQV Equivalent plastic strain [7] - 1
EPCR:X, Y, Z, XY Creep strains 2 2
EPTO:X, Y, Z, XY Total mechanical strains (EPEL + EPPL + EPCR) Y -
EPCR)
NL:CREQ Accumulated equivalent creep strain 1 1
ing)
PLASTIC, CREEP
2. Output only if element has a creep load.
PLANE183
EPPL.
Note
For axisymmetric solutions, the X, Y, XY, and Z stress and strain outputs correspond to the
radial, axial, in-plane shear, and hoop stresses and strains.
Table 2: PLANE183 Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 858) lists output available through ETABLE using the
used in Table 2: PLANE183 Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 858):
Name
output quantity as defined in Table 1: PLANE183 Element Output Definitions (p. 856)
Item
E
I,J,...,P
sequence number for data at nodes I, J, ..., P

ity
Name
P1 SMISC - 2 1 - - - - - -
P2 SMISC - - 4 3 - - - - -
P3 SMISC - - - 6 5 - - - -
P4[1] SMISC - 7 - - 8 - - - -
THICK NMISC 1 - - - - - - - -
1. P4 is only for KEYOPT(1) = 0

• The element must lie in a global X-Y plane as shown in Figure 1 (p. 853) and the Y-axis must be the
axis of symmetry for axisymmetric analyses. An axisymmetric structure should be modeled in the
+X quadrants.
• A face with a removed midside node implies that the displacement varies linearly, rather than
parabolically, along that face. See Quadratic Elements (Midside Nodes) in the Modeling and Meshing
Guide for more information about the use of midside nodes.
PLANE183
• Use at least two elements to avoid hourglass mode for KEYOPT(1) = 0.

• A triangular element may be formed by defining duplicate K-L-O node numbers (see Degenerated
Shape Elements (p. 39)). For these degenerated elements, the triangular shape function is used and
the solution is the same as for the regular triangular 6-node elements, but might be slightly less
efficient for KEYOPT(1) = 0. Since these degenerated elements are less efficient, the triangle shape
option (KEYOPT(1) = 1) is suggested for this case.
• When mixed formulation is used (KEYOPT(6) = 1), no midside nodes can be missed. If you use the
mixed formulation (KEYOPT(6) = 1), you must use the sparse solver (default).
effects can be activated by the PSTRES command.

MPC184
Multipoint Constraint Element
MPC184 Element Description

MPC184 comprises a general class of multipoint constraint elements that apply kinematic constraints
between nodes. The elements are loosely classified here as “constraint elements” (rigid link, rigid beam,
etc.) and “joint elements” (revolute, universal, etc.). The constraint may be as simple as that of identical
displacements between nodes. Constraints can also be more complicated, such as those modeling rigid
parts, or those transmitting motion between flexible bodies in a particular way. For example, a structure
may consist of rigid parts and moving parts connected together by rotational or sliding connections.
The rigid part of the structure may be modeled with the MPC184 link/beam elements, while the moving
parts may be connected with any of the MPC184 joint elements.
The kinematic constraints are imposed using one of the following two methods:
• The direct elimination method, wherein the kinematic constraints are imposed by internally generated
constraint equations. The degrees of freedom of a dependent node in the equations are eliminated in
favor of an independent node.
– The dependent degrees of freedom are eliminated. Therefore, the constraint forces and moments
are not available from the element output table (ETABLE) for output purposes. However, the global
constraint reaction forces are available at independent nodes in the results file, Jobname.rst (PRRSOL
command, etc.).
– The direct elimination method should be used whenever it is available since the degrees of freedom
at the dependent nodes are eliminated, thereby reducing the problem size and solution time.
• The Lagrange multiplier method, wherein the kinematic constraints are imposed using Lagrange
multipliers. In this case, all the participating degrees of freedom are retained.
– The Lagrange multiplier method should be used when the direct elimination method is not available
or not suitable for the analysis purposes.
– In this method, the constraint forces and moments are available from the element output table
(ETABLE).
– The disadvantage of the Lagrange multiplier method is that the Lagrange multipliers are additional
solution variables and, hence, the problem size and solution time become larger when compared
with the direct elimination method.
Currently, the MPC184 rigid link/beam elements can use the direct elimination method or the Lagrange
multiplier method. All other MPC184 element options use the Lagrange multiplier method only.
Constraint Elements
The following types of constraint elements are available:
Rigid link/beam
Slider
MPC184
Joint Elements
Numerical simulations often involve modeling of joints between two parts. These joints or connections
may need simple kinematic constraints such as identical displacements between the two parts at the
junction or more complicated kinematic constraints that allow for transmission of motion between two
flexible bodies. These complex joints may also include some sort of control mechanism like limits or
stops, and locks on the components of relative motion between the two bodies. In many instances,
these joints may also have stiffness, damping, or friction forces based on the unconstrained components
of relative motion between the two bodies. For detailed information on how to use joint elements, see
Connecting Multibody Components with Joint Elements in the Multibody Analysis Guide.
The following types of joint elements are available:
x-axis Revolute joint

z-axis Revolute joint
Universal joint
Slot joint
Point-in-plane joint
Translational joint
x-axis Cylindrical joint
z-axis Cylindrical joint
x-axis Planar joint
z-axis Planar joint
Weld joint
Orient joint
Spherical joint
General joint
Screw joint
These elements are well suited for linear, large rotation, and/or large strain nonlinear applications. If finite
rotations and/or large strain effects are to be considered, the NLGEOM,ON command must be used;
otherwise, linear behavior is assumed. For example, if a revolute joint element is used in an analysis
and NLGEOM,ON is not set, the calculations are carried out in the original configuration and the end
result may not reflect the expected deformed configuration. However, if the NLGEOM,ON command is
used, the calculations will take into account the rotation of the revolute joint element.
Two nodes define these joint elements. Depending on the joint to be defined, the kinematic constraints
are imposed on some of the quantities that define the relative motion between the two nodes. These
kinematic constraints are applied using Lagrange multipliers. In some instances, one of the nodes is
required to be "grounded" or attached to "ground" or some other reference location that is not moving.
In such cases, only one of the two nodes may be specified. The specified node and the "grounded"
node are assumed to be coincident in the element calculations.
The joint element has six degrees of freedom at each node, defining six components of relative motion:
three relative displacements and three relative rotations. These six components of relative motion are
of primary interest in simulations that involve joint elements. Some of these components may be con-
strained by the kinematic constraints relevant to a particular joint element, while the other components
are "free" or "unconstrained". For example, in the case of universal and revolute joint elements the two
nodes are assumed to be connected, and thus the relative displacements are zero. For the revolute
joint only one rotational component of the relative motion (rotation about the revolute axis) is uncon-
strained, while for the universal joint two such components are available.
MPC184
The capabilities of these elements include certain control features such as stops, locks, and actuating
loads/boundary conditions that can be imposed on the components of relative motion between the
two nodes of the element. For example, in a revolute joint, stops can be specified for the rotation about
the revolute axis. This limits the rotation around the revolute axis to be within a certain range. Displace-
ment, force, velocity, and acceleration boundary conditions may be imposed on the components of
relative motion between the two nodes allowing for "actuation" of the joints. The driving force or dis-
placements arise from the actuating mechanisms like an electric or hydraulic system that drives these
joints.
You can impose linear and nonlinear elastic stiffness and damping behavior or hysteretic friction beha-
vior on the available components of relative motion of a joint element. The properties can be made
temperature dependent if necessary.
In addition to the existing output options available in ANSYS, outputs related to the components of
relative motion are available for joint elements.
Joint Input Data

Certain input requirements are common to most MPC184 joint elements. Any specific requirements for
individual joint elements are highlighted in the description for that element.
The following types of input data should be considered:
• Element Connectivity Definition - A joint element is typically defined by specifying two nodes, I and J.
One of these nodes may be a "grounded" node.
• Section Definition - Each joint element must have an associated section definition (SECTYPE command).
• Local Coordinate System Specification - Local coordinate systems at the nodes are often required to
define the kinematic constraints of a joint element (SECJOINT command).
• Stops or Limits - You can impose stops or limits on the available components of relative motion between
the two nodes of a joint element (SECSTOP command).
• Locks - Locking limits may also be imposed on the available components of relative motion between
the two nodes of a joint element to "freeze" the joint in a desired configuration (SECLOCK command).
• Material Behavior - The JOIN material option on the TB command allows you to impose linear and
nonlinear elastic stiffness and damping behavior or hysteretic friction behavior on the available com-
ponents of relative motion of a joint element.
• Reference Lengths and Angles - These correspond to the free relative degrees of freedom in a joint
element for which constitutive calculations are performed and are used when stiffness, damping, or
hysteretic friction are specified for the joint elements (SECDATA command).
• Boundary Conditions - You can impose boundary conditions (DJ command) or apply concentrated forces
(FJ command) on the available components of relative motion of the joint element.
MPC184 Input Data

Use KEYOPT(1) to specify the type of MPC184 constraint or joint element you want to use. The remaining
input data will vary depending on the type of constraint or joint element specified. The individual
MPC184 element descriptions each contain an input summary that applies only to that particular element.
It is recommended that you review these element-specific input summaries after you determine which
constraint or joint element you will be using.
MPC184
KEYOPT(1)
Element behavior:
0 --
Rigid link (default)
1 --
Rigid beam
3 --
Slider element
6 --
x-axis or z-axis revolute joint element
7 --
Universal joint element
8 --
Slot joint element
9 --
Point-in-plane joint element
10 --
Translational joint element
11 --
x-axis or z-axis cylindrical joint element
12 --
x-axis or z-axis planar joint element
13 --
Weld joint element
14 --
Orient joint element
15 --
Spherical joint element
16 --
General joint element
17 --
Screw joint element
MPC184 Output Data

The solution output associated with the constraint and joint elements is in two forms:

• Additional element output as shown in the individual constraint and joint element descriptions. This
output is available via the ETABLE command using the Sequence Number method.
Refer to the individual element descriptions for complete listings of the output for each element.
MPC184
MPC184 Assumptions and Restrictions

The following restrictions apply to all forms of the MPC184element:
• For MPC184, the element coordinate system (/PSYMB,ESYS) is not relevant.

• This element cannot be used with the arc-length method (ARCLEN).
There are additional assumptions and restrictions for each type of constraint and joint element. For
details, see the Assumptions and Restrictions section in the individual constraint and joint element de-
scriptions.
MPC184 Product Restrictions

ANSYS Professional

MPC184-Link/Beam
Multipoint Constraint Element: Rigid Link or Rigid Beam
MPC184 Rigid Link/Beam Element Description

The MPC184 rigid link/beam element can be used to model a rigid constraint between two deformable
bodies or as a rigid component used to transmit forces and moments in engineering applications. This
element is well suited for linear, large rotation, and/or large strain nonlinear applications.
The kinematic constraints are imposed using one of the following two methods:
• The direct elimination method, wherein the kinematic constraints are imposed by internally generated
MPC (multipoint constraint) equations. The degrees of freedom of a dependent node in the MPC
equations are eliminated in favor of an independent node.
• The Lagrange multiplier method, wherein the kinematic constraints are imposed using Lagrange
multipliers. In this case, all the participating degrees of freedom are retained.
Figure 1 MPC184 Rigid Link/Beam Geometry
y
I
Y
x
J
X
Z
MPC184 Rigid Link/Beam Input Data

Figure 1 (p. 867) shows the geometry, node locations, and the coordinate system for this element. Two
nodes define the element. The element x-axis is oriented from node I toward node J. The cross-sectional
area of the element is assumed to be one unit. ANSYS selects the cross-section coordinate system
automatically. The cross-section coordinate system is relevant only for the output of bending moments
when the element is used as a rigid beam.
If KEYOPT(1) = 0 (default), the element is a rigid link with two nodes and three degrees of freedom at
each node (UX, UY, UZ). If KEYOPT(1) = 1, the element is a rigid beam with two nodes and six degrees
of freedom at each node (UX, UY, UZ, ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ).
If KEYOPT(2) = 0 (default), then the constraints are implemented using the direct elimination method.
If KEYOPT(2) = 1, then the Lagrange multiplier method is used to impose the constraints.
MPC184-Link/Beam
The MPC184 rigid link/beam element with KEYOPT(2) = 1 can also be used in applications that call for
thermal expansion on an otherwise rigid structure. The direct elimination method cannot be used for
thermal expansion problems.
Because the element models a rigid constraint or a rigid component, material stiffness properties are
not required. When thermal expansion effects are desired, the coefficient of thermal expansion must
be specified. Density must be specified if the mass of the rigid element is to be accounted for in the
analysis. If density is specified, ANSYS calculates a lumped mass matrix for the element.
The element supports the birth and death options using EALIVE and EKILL.
Nodal Loading (p. 49) describes element loads. You can input temperatures as element body loads at
the nodes. The node I temperature T(I) defaults to TUNIF. The node J temperature defaults to T(I).
MPC184 Rigid Link/Beam Input Summary

This input summary applies to the rigid link and rigid beam options of MPC184: KEYOPT(1) = 0 and 1.
Nodes
I, J
Degrees of Freedom

Real Constants
None
Material Properties
ALPX (or CTEX or THSX), DENS
Surface Loads
None
Body Loads
Temperatures --
T(I), T(J)
Element Loads
None
Special Features
Birth and death

Large deflection
Linear perturbation
KEYOPT(1)
Element behavior:
0 --
Rigid link (default)
1 --
Rigid beam
MPC184-Link/Beam
KEYOPT(2)
Reduction method:
0 --
Direct elimination method (default)
1 --
Lagrange multiplier method
MPC184 Rigid Link/Beam Output Data


• Additional element output as shown in Table 1: MPC184 Rigid Link/Beam Element Output Definitions (p. 869).
Table 1: MPC184 Rigid Link/Beam Element Output Definitions (p. 869) uses the following notation:
[ETABLE, ESOL]. The O column indicates the availability of the items in the file Jobname.OUT. The R
column indicates the availability of the items in the results file.
In either the O or R columns, Y indicates that the item is always available, a number refers to a table
footnote that describes when the item is conditionally available, and a - indicates that the item is not
available.
Table 1 MPC184 Rigid Link/Beam Element Output Definitions

Name Definition O R
Link/Beam Elements (KEYOPT(1) = 0 or 1, and KEYOPT(2) = 0 or 1)
NODES Element node numbers (I and J) - Y
Link/Beam Elements (KEYOPT(1) = 0 or 1, and KEYOPT(2) = 1)
MAT Material number for the element - Y
TEMP Temperature at nodes I and J - Y
FX Axial force - Y
MY, MZ Bending moments - Y
SF:Y, Z Section shear forces - Y
MX Torsional moment - Y
Table 2: MPC184 Rigid Link/Beam Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 870) lists output available via the ETABLE
command using the Sequence Number method. See The General Postprocessor (POST1) in the Basic
Analysis Guide and The Item and Sequence Number Table (p. 52) for further information. The table uses
the following notation:
Name
output quantity as defined in the Element Output Definitions table.
Item
MPC184-Link/Beam
E
Table 2 MPC184 Rigid Link/Beam Item and Sequence Numbers

Output Quantity Name
Item E
Link/Beam Constraint (with KEYOPT(2) = 1)
FX SMISC 1
MY SMISC 2
MZ SMISC 3
MX SMISC 4
SFZ SMISC 5
SFY SMISC 6
MPC184 Rigid Link/Beam Assumptions and Restrictions

The following restrictions apply to both the direct elimination method and the Lagrange multiplier
method (KEYOPT(2) = 0 and 1):
• A finite element model cannot be made up of only rigid elements in a static analysis. At a minimum, a
deformable element (or elements) must be connected to one of the end nodes of a rigid element.
• The cross-sectional area of the element is assumed to be unity.
• The element coordinate system (/PSYMB,ESYS) is not relevant.
Direct Elimination Method (KEYOPT(2) = 0)
These additional restrictions apply to the direct elimination method:
• The MPC184 rigid link/beam using the direct elimination method can be used in static, transient, modal,
and buckling analyses.
• This element cannot be used with Distributed ANSYS when the direct elimination method is used.
• Displacement boundary conditions on the nodes of rigid link/beams must be applied prudently. In a
rigid linkage (structure) made of a number of rigid link/beam elements, if displacement boundary con-
ditions are applied at more than one location, ANSYS will use the first encountered displacement
boundary condition to constrain the entire rigid linkage according to rigid kinematic conditions. In some
cases where the applied displacements may be redundant or self-contradictory, ANSYS will issue warning
or error messages.
• The direct elimination method cannot be used in problems involving thermal expansion. Use the Lagrange
Multiplier method instead.
• Reaction forces at the constrained nodes of a rigid link/beam may not always be available since the
dependent and independent nodes are determined by ANSYS internally. We recommend that you check
the interface nodes which connect rigid and deformable elements since reaction forces are available
on these nodes.
MPC184-Link/Beam
• The nodes of a rigid link/beam using the direct elimination method should not be linked with a node
of an element implemented via the Lagrange multiplier method. For example, a rigid beam implemented
using the direct elimination method (KEYOPT(2) = 0) should not be linked to a rigid beam implemented
via the Lagrange multiplier method (KEYOPT(2) = 1). Or, a rigid beam implemented via the direct elim-
ination method should not be linked to a node of a contact element that is implemented via the Lagrange
multiplier method (KEYOPT(2) = 2 on the contact element).
• Coupling constraints (CP command) cannot be applied to nodes of rigid links/beams using the direct
elimination method.
• Nodes of rigid links/beams cannot be part of the retained nodes (nodes specified by the M command)
in a substructure. However, the rigid links/beams can be entirely within the substructure.
• Rigid links/beams should be not used in cyclic symmetry analyses.
Lagrange Multiplier Method (KEYOPT(2) = 1)
These additional restrictions apply to the Lagrange Multiplier method:
• To employ this feature successfully, use as few of these elements as possible. For example, it may be
sufficient to overlay rigid line elements on a perimeter of a rigid region modeled with shell elements,
as opposed to overlaying rigid line elements along each element boundary of the interior.
• Modeling that avoids overconstraining the problem is necessary. Overconstrained models may result
in trivial solutions, zero pivot messages (in a properly restrained system), or nonlinear convergence
difficulties.
• The temperature is assumed to vary linearly along the spar of the rigid link or rigid beam element.
• If constraint equations are specified for the DOFs of a rigid element, it may be an overconstrained system.
Similarly, prescribed displacements on both ends of the element is an indication of overconstraint.
• When used as a link element, exercise the same precautions that you would when using a truss element
(for example, LINK180).
• The equation solver (EQSLV) must be the sparse solver.
• The element is valid for static and transient analyses (linear and nonlinear), and rigid beam is valid for
harmonic analyses. The element is not supported for buckling analyses or reduced transient analyses.
MPC184 Rigid Link/Beam Product Restrictions

ANSYS Professional
MPC184-Slider
Multipoint Constraint Element: Slider
MPC184 Slider Element Description

The MPC184 slider element can be used to model a slider constraint. The element has three nodes with
three degrees of freedom (translations in X, Y, and Z) at each node. The slider element imposes a kin-
ematic constraint such that a "dependent" node (I) must always lie on a line joining two other "inde-
pendent" nodes (J and K). The I node is allowed to slide on the line joining J and K nodes. The kinematic
constraints are imposed using the Lagrange multiplier method.
Figure 1 MPC184 Slider Geometry
Y J
X
Z
MPC184 Slider Input Data

Set KEYOPT(1) = 3 to define a three-node slider element.
Figure 1 (p. 873) shows the geometry and node locations for this element. Three nodes (I, J, and K) define
the element. The node I is expected to lie initially on the line joining the nodes J and K.
Material stiffness properties are not required for this element. The element currently does not support
birth or death options.
MPC184 Slider Input Summary

This input summary applies to the slider element option of MPC184: KEYOPT(1) = 3.
Nodes
I, J, K
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, UZ
Real Constants
None
Material Properties
None
MPC184-Slider
Surface Loads
None
Body Loads
None
Element Loads
None
Special Features
Large deflection
Linear perturbation
KEYOPT(1)
Element behavior:
3 --
Slider element
MPC184 Slider Output Data


• Additional element output as shown in Table 1: MPC184 Slider Element Output Definitions (p. 874).
Table 1: MPC184 Slider Element Output Definitions (p. 874) uses the following notation:
available.
Table 1 MPC184 Slider Element Output Definitions

Name Definition O R
EL Element Number - Y
NODES Element node numbers (I, J, K) - Y
FY Constraint Force 1 - Y
FZ Constraint Force 2 - Y
Table 2: MPC184 Slider Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 875) lists output available via the ETABLE command
and The Item and Sequence Number Table (p. 52) for further information. The table uses the following
notation:
Name
Item
MPC184-Slider
E
Table 2 MPC184 Slider Item and Sequence Numbers

Item E
FY SMISC 1
FZ SMISC 2
MPC184 Slider Assumptions and Restrictions

• The distance between nodes I and J must be greater than zero.
• Node I must initially lie between the J and K nodes.
• Displacement boundary conditions cannot be applied on the nodes forming the slider element.
• The element currently does not support birth or death options.
• The equation solver (EQSLV) must be the sparse solver or the PCG solver. The command PCGOPT,,,,,,,ON
is also required in order to use the PCG solver.
MPC184 Slider Product Restrictions

ANSYS Professional
MPC184-Revolute
Multipoint Constraint Element: Revolute Joint
MPC184 Revolute Joint Element Description

The MPC184 revolute joint is a two-node element that has only one primary degree of freedom, the
relative rotation about the revolute (or hinge) axis. This element imposes kinematic constraints such
that the nodes forming the element have the same displacements. Additionally, only a relative rotation
is allowed about the revolute axis, while the rotations about the other two directions are fixed.
Figure 1 MPC184 Revolute Joint Geometry
e J2
eJ
1
e J1
eI J
J eJ
2 e3 3
I
J J
eI eI e2
1 1 I
eI eI
3 3
Z
eI
2
Y
I, J - Coincident nodes
X
Local x-axis as axis of revolute Local z-axis as axis of revolute
MPC184 Revolute Joint Input Data

Set KEYOPT(1) = 6 to define a two-node revolute joint element.
Figure 1 (p. 877) shows the geometry and node locations for this element. Two nodes (I and J) define
the element. The two nodes are expected to have identical spatial coordinates initially.
If KEYOPT(4) = 0, then element is an x-axis revolute joint with the local e1 axis as the revolute axis.
If KEYOPT(4) = 1, then element is a z-axis revolute joint with the local e3 axis as the revolute axis.
A local Cartesian coordinate system must be specified at the first node, I, of the element. The specification
of the second local coordinate system at node J is optional. If the local coordinate system is not specified
at node J, then the local coordinate system at node J is assumed to be the same as that at node I.
MPC184-Revolute
Either the local e1 or local e3 direction may be specified as the axis of rotation at the nodes. The spe-
cification of the other two local directions is not critical, but it will be used to determine the relative
rotation between the two nodes during the course of deformation. The orientation of local directions
must follow the convention specified in Figure 1 (p. 877). These local coordinate systems evolve with
the rotations at the respective nodes (if any). Use the SECJOINT command to specify the identifiers of
the local coordinate systems.
The constraints imposed in a revolute joint element with the local e1 axis as the revolute axis are de-
scribed below. Similar constraint conditions are set up when the local e3 axis is the revolute axis.
Consider the two local coordinate systems (Cartesian) attached to node I and node J (see Figure 1 (p. 877)).
At any given instant of time, the constraints imposed in a revolute joint are as described below.
Displacement constraints:
uI = uJ
Where, uI is the displacement vector at node I and uJ is the displacement vector at node J.
Rotation constraints:
e1I ⋅ e2J = 0
e1I ⋅ e3J = 0
eI eJ
If the revolute axes 1 and 1 are not aligned at the start of the analysis, then the angle between the
two is held fixed at the starting value.
The relative position of the local coordinate system at node I with respect to node J is characterized
by the first Cardan (or Bryant) angle given by:
 I J 
−1  e2 ⋅ e3 
φ= − tan
 e I ⋅ eJ 
 3 3 
The change in the relative angular position between the two local coordinate system is given by:
ur = φ − φ0 + m π
Where, φ0 is the initial angular offset (the first Cardan (or Bryant ) angle measured in the reference
configuration) between the two coordinate systems and m is an integer accounting for multiple rotations
about the revolute axis.
The constitutive calculations use the following definition of the joint rotation:
urc = φ + m π − φ1ref
MPC184-Revolute
φref
Where 1 is the reference angle, angle1, specified on the SECDATA command. If this value is not
φref
specified, then φ0 is used in place of 1 .
Other input data that are common to all joint elements (material behavior, stops and limits, locks, etc.)
are described in "Joint Input Data" (p. 863) in the MPC184 element description.
MPC184 Revolute Joint Input Summary

This input summary applies to the revolute joint element option of MPC184: KEYOPT(1) = 6.
Nodes
I, J
Note
For a grounded joint element, specify either node I or node J in the element definition
and leave the other node (the grounded node) blank.
Degrees of Freedom
Real Constants
None
Material Properties
Use the JOIN label on the TB command to define stiffness, damping, and Coulomb friction behavior.
(See MPC184 Joint Material Models in the Material Reference for detailed information on defining joint
materials.)
Surface Loads
None
Body Loads
Temperatures --
T(I), T(J)
Element Loads
Rotations --
ROTX (KEYOPT(4) = 0)
ROTZ (KEYOPT(4) = 1)
Angular velocities --
OMGX (KEYOPT(4) = 0)
OMGZ (KEYOPT(4) = 1)
Angular accelerations --
DMGX (KEYOPT(4) = 0)
DMGZ (KEYOPT(4) = 1)
MPC184-Revolute
Moments --
MX (KEYOPT(4) = 0)
MZ (KEYOPT(4) = 1)
Special Features
Large deflection
Linear perturbation
KEYOPT(1)
Element behavior:
6 --
Revolute joint element
KEYOPT(4)
Element configuration:
0 --
x-axis revolute joint with local 1 direction as the revolute axis.
1 --
z-axis revolute joint with local 3 direction as the revolute axis.
MPC184 Revolute Joint Output Data


• Additional element output as shown in Table 1: MPC184 Revolute Joint Element Output Definitions (p. 880)
and Table 2: MPC184 Revolute Joint Element - NMISC Output (p. 882).
These tables use the following notation:
available.
Table 1 MPC184 Revolute Joint Element Output Definitions

Name Definition O R
x-axis Revolute Joint (KEYOPT(4) = 0)
NODES Element node numbers (I, J) - Y
FX Constraint Force in X direction - Y
FY Constraint Force in Y direction - Y
FZ Constraint Force in Z direction - Y
MY Constraint Moment in Y direction - Y
MPC184-Revolute
Name Definition O R
MZ Constraint Moment in Z direction - Y
CSTOP4 Constraint moment if stop is specified on DOF - Y
4
CLOCK4 Constraint moment if lock is specified on DOF - Y
4
CSST4 Constraint stop status[1] - Y
CLST4 Constraint lock status[2] - Y
JRP4 Joint relative position - Y
JCD4 Joint constitutive rotation - Y
JEF4 Joint elastic moment - Y
JDF4 Joint damping moment - Y
JFF4 Joint friction moment - Y
JRU4 Joint relative rotation - Y
JRV4 Joint relative velocity - Y
JRA4 Joint relative acceleration - Y
JTEMP Average temperature in the element[3] - Y
JFST4 Stick/slip status when friction is specified[4] - Y
JFNF4 Normal moment in friction calculations - Y
z-axis Revolute Joint (KEYOPT(4) = 1)
MX Constraint Moment in X direction - Y
6
6
JCD6 Joint constitutive rotation - Y
JEF6 Joint elastic moment - Y
JDF6 Joint damping moment - Y
JFF6 Joint friction moment - Y
JRU6 Joint relative rotation - Y
MPC184-Revolute
Name Definition O R
JFST6 Slip/stick status when friction is specified[4] - Y
1. Constraint stop status:
0 = stop not active, or deactivated

1 = stopped at minimum value
2 = stopped at maximum value
2. Constraint lock status:
0 = lock not active

1 = locked at minimum value
2 = locked at maximum value
3. Average temperature in the element when temperatures are applied on the nodes of the element using
the BF command, or when temperature are applied on the element using the BFE command.
4. Stick/slip status when friction is active:
0 = friction is not activated

1 = sticking
2 = slipping or sliding
The following table shows additional non-summable miscellaneous (NMISC) output available for all
forms of the revolute joint element.
Note
This output is intended for use in the ANSYS Workbench program to track the evolution of
local coordinate systems specified at the nodes of joint elements.
Table 2 MPC184 Revolute Joint Element - NMISC Output

Name Definition O R
The following output is available for all revolute joint elements (KEYOPT(4) =
0 and 1)
E1X-I, E1Y-I, X, Y, Z components of the evolved e1 axis at - Y
E1Z-I node I
E2Z-I node I
E3Z-I node I
E1X-J, E1Y-J, X, Y, Z components of the evolved e1 axis at - Y
E1Z-J node J
E2Z-J node J
MPC184-Revolute
Name Definition O R
E3Z-J node J
JFX, JFY, JFZ Constraint forces expressed in the evolved co- - Y
ordinate system specified at node I
JMX, JMY, JMZ Constraint moments expressed in the evolved - Y
coordinate system specified at node I
Table 3: MPC184 Revolute Joint Item and Sequence Numbers - SMISC Items (p. 883) and Table 4: MPC184
Revolute Joint Item and Sequence Numbers - NMISC Items (p. 884) list output available via the ETABLE
Name
Item
E
Table 3 MPC184 Revolute Joint Item and Sequence Numbers - SMISC Items
Item E
x-axis Revolute Joint (KEYOPT(4) = 0)
FX SMISC 1
FY SMISC 2
FZ SMISC 3
MY SMISC 5
MZ SMISC 6
CSTOP4 SMISC 10
CLOCK4 SMISC 16
CSST4 SMISC 22
CLST4 SMISC 28
JRP4 SMISC 34
JCD4 SMISC 40
JEF4 SMISC 46
JDF4 SMISC 52
JFF4 SMISC 58
JRU4 SMISC 64
JRV4 SMISC 70
JRA4 SMISC 76
MPC184-Revolute

Item E
JTEMP SMISC 79
JFST4 SMISC 80
JFNF4 SMISC 84
z-axis Revolute Joint (KEYOPT(4) = 1)
FX SMISC 1
FY SMISC 2
FZ SMISC 3
MX SMISC 4
MY SMISC 5
CSTOP6 SMISC 12
CLOCK6 SMISC 18
CSST6 SMISC 24
CLST6 SMISC 30
JRP6 SMISC 36
JCD6 SMISC 42
JEF6 SMISC 48
JDF6 SMISC 54
JFF6 SMISC 60
JRU6 SMISC 66
JRV6 SMISC 72
JRA6 SMISC 78
JTEMP SMISC 79
JFST6 SMISC 82
JFNF6 SMISC 86
Table 4 MPC184 Revolute Joint Item and Sequence Numbers - NMISC Items
Item E
The following output is available for all revolute joint elements (KEYOPT(4) = 0 and
1)
E1X-I NMISC 1
E1Y-I NMISC 2
E1Z-I NMISC 3
E2X-I NMISC 4
E2Y-I NMISC 5
E2Z-I NMISC 6
E3X-I NMISC 7
MPC184-Revolute

Item E
E3Y-I NMISC 8
E3Z-I NMISC 9
E1X-J NMISC 10
E1Y-J NMISC 11
E1Z-J NMISC 12
E2X-J NMISC 13
E2Y-J NMISC 14
E2Z-J NMISC 15
E3X-J NMISC 16
E3Y-J NMISC 17
E3Z-J NMISC 18
JFX NMISC 19
JFY NMISC 20
JFZ NMISC 21
JMX NMISC 22
JMY NMISC 23
JMZ NMISC 24
MPC184 Revolute Joint Assumptions and Restrictions

• The nodes I and J must be coincident.
• The local coordinate systems at the nodes must be specified such that the revolute axis is well defined.
Otherwise, it is possible that the rotational motion might not be what is expected.
• Boundary conditions cannot be applied on the nodes forming the revolute joint.
• Rotational degrees of freedom are activated at the nodes forming the element. When these elements
are used in conjunction with solid elements, the rotational degrees of freedom must be suitably con-
strained. Since boundary conditions cannot be applied to the nodes of the Revolute Joint, a beam or
shell element with very weak stiffness may be used with the underlying solid elements at the nodes
forming the joint element to avoid any rigid body modes.
• If both stops and locks are specified, then lock specification takes precedence. That is, if the degree of
freedom is locked at a given value, then it will remain locked for the rest of the analysis.
• In a nonlinear analysis, the component of relative motion (rotation around the revolute axis) is accumu-
lated over all the substeps. It is essential that the substep size be restricted such that this rotation in a
given substep is less than π for the values to be accumulated correctly.
MPC184-Revolute
MPC184 Revolute Joint Product Restrictions

ANSYS Professional
MPC184-Universal
Multipoint Constraint Element: Universal Joint
MPC184 Universal Joint Element Description

The MPC184 universal joint element is a two-node element that has two free relative rotational degrees
of freedom. The two nodes forming the element must have identical spatial coordinates.
Figure 1 MPC184 Universal Joint Geometry
eI
1
J
e3
eI
2
e J2
eI e J1
1
eI
3 J
e3
eI
2
I
Z J
e J2
Y
X I, J - Coincident nodes
eI e J1
1
eI J
I 3 e3
J
eI
2
e J2
MPC184-Universal
MPC184 Universal Joint Input Data

Set KEYOPT(1) = 7 to define a two-node universal joint element.
the element. The two nodes are expected to have identical spatial coordinates.
A local Cartesian coordinate system must be specified at the first node, I, of the element. The specification
of the second local coordinate system at node J is optional. If the local coordinate system is not specified
at node J, then the local coordinate system at node J is assumed to be the same as that at node I. The
local 2 direction is usually aligned along the shaft axes of the universal joint. The orientation of local
directions must follow the convention specified in Figure 1 (p. 887). These local coordinate systems evolve
with the rotations at the respective nodes (if any). Use the SECJOINT command to specify the identifiers
of the local coordinate systems.
The constraints imposed in a universal joint element are easily described by considering the two local
coordinate systems (Cartesian) attached to node I and node J (Figure 1 (p. 887)). At any given instant of
time, the constraints imposed in a universal joint are as described below.
Displacement constraints:
uI = uJ
Where, uI is the displacement vector at node I, and uJ is the displacement vector at node J.
Rotation constraints:
e1I ⋅ e3J = 0
I eJ
If the axes e2 and 2 are not aligned at the start of the analysis, then the angle between the two is
held fixed at the initial value.
The relative position of the local coordinate system at node I with respect to node J is characterized
by the first and the third Cardan (or Bryant) angles as:
 e I ⋅ eJ 
φ = − tan−1  2 3 
 e I ⋅ eJ 
 3 3
 e I ⋅ eJ 
ψ = − tan−1  1 2 
 e I ⋅ eJ 
 1 1
The change in the relative angular position between the two local coordinate system is given by
ur4 = φ - φ0
ur6 = ψ - ψ0
MPC184-Universal
Where, φ0 and ψ0 are the initial angular offsets between the two coordinate systems (that is, the first
and third Cardan (or Bryant) angles measured in the reference configuration).
urc4 = φ − φ1ref
urc6 = ψ − φref
3
φref φref
Where, 1 , 3 are the reference angles, angle1 and angle3, specified on the SECDATA command.
φref φref
If these values are not specified, then φ0 and ψ0 are used in place of 1 and 3 , respectively.
MPC184 Universal Joint Input Summary

This input summary applies to the universal joint element option of MPC184: KEYOPT(1) = 7.
Nodes
I, J
Note
Degrees of Freedom
Real Constants
None
Material Properties
Use the JOIN label on the TB command to define stiffness, damping, and hysteretic friction behavior.
materials.)
Surface Loads
None
Body Loads
Temperatures --
T(I), T(J)
Element Loads
Rotations --
ROTX, ROTZ
MPC184-Universal
Moments --
MX, MZ
Special Features
Large deflection
Linear perturbation
KEYOPT(1)
Element behavior:
7 --
Universal joint element
MPC184 Universal Joint Output Data


• Additional element output as shown in Table 1: MPC184 Universal Joint Element Output Definitions (p. 890)
and Table 2: MPC184 Universal Joint Element - NMISC Output (p. 892).
available.
Table 1 MPC184 Universal Joint Element Output Definitions

Name Definition O R
FX Constraint force in X direction - Y
FY Constraint force in Y direction - Y
FZ Constraint force in Z direction - Y
MY Constraint moment in Y direction - Y
4
6
4
6
CSST4 Constraint stop status on DOF 4[1] - Y
MPC184-Universal
Name Definition O R
CLST4 Constraint lock status on DOF 4[2] - Y
JRP4 Joint relative position of DOF4 - Y
JCD4 Joint constitutive rotation on DOF4 - Y
JCD6 Joint constitutive rotation on DOF6 - Y
JEF4 Joint elastic moment in direction -4 - Y
JDF4 Joint damping moment in direction -4 - Y
JFF4 Joint friction moment in direction -4 - Y
JRU4 Joint relative rotation of DOF4 - Y
JRU6 Joint relative rotation of DOF6 - Y
JRV4 Joint relative rotational velocity of DOF4 - Y
JRV6 Joint relative rotational velocity of DOF6 - Y
JRA4 Joint relative rotational acceleration of DOF4 - Y
JRA6 Joint relative rotational acceleration of DOF6 - Y

0 = lock not active

The following table shows additional non-summable miscellaneous (NMISC) output available for the
universal joint element.
MPC184-Universal
Note
Table 2 MPC184 Universal Joint Element - NMISC Output

Name Definition O R
E1Z-I node I
E2Z-I node I
E3Z-I node I
E1Z-J node J
E2Z-J node J
E3Z-J node J
Table 3: MPC184 Universal Joint Item and Sequence Numbers - SMISC Items (p. 892) and Table 4: MPC184
Universal Joint Item and Sequence Numbers - NMISC Items (p. 893) list output available via the ETABLE
Name
Item
E
Table 3 MPC184 Universal Joint Item and Sequence Numbers - SMISC Items
Item E
FX SMISC 1
FY SMISC 2
FZ SMISC 3
MY SMISC 5
MPC184-Universal

Item E
MZ SMISC 6
CSTOP4 SMISC 10
CSTOP6 SMISC 12
CLOCK4 SMISC 16
CLOCK6 SMISC 18
CSST4 SMISC 22
CLST4 SMISC 28
CSST6 SMISC 24
CLST6 SMISC 30
JRP4 SMISC 34
JRP6 SMISC 36
JCD4 SMISC 40
JCD6 SMISC 42
JEF4 SMISC 46
JEF6 SMISC 48
JDF4 SMISC 52
JDF6 SMISC 54
JFF4 SMISC 58
JFF6 SMISC 60
JRU4 SMISC 64
JRU6 SMISC 66
JRV4 SMISC 70
JRV6 SMISC 72
JRA4 SMISC 76
JRA6 SMISC 78
JTEMP SMISC 79
Table 4 MPC184 Universal Joint Item and Sequence Numbers - NMISC Items
Item E
E1X-I NMISC 1
E1Y-I NMISC 2
E1Z-I NMISC 3
E2X-I NMISC 4
E2Y-I NMISC 5
E2Z-I NMISC 6
E3X-I NMISC 7
MPC184-Universal

Item E
E3Y-I NMISC 8
E3Z-I NMISC 9
E1X-J NMISC 10
E1Y-J NMISC 11
E1Z-J NMISC 12
E2X-J NMISC 13
E2Y-J NMISC 14
E2Z-J NMISC 15
E3X-J NMISC 16
E3Y-J NMISC 17
E3Z-J NMISC 18
JFX NMISC 19
JFY NMISC 20
JFZ NMISC 21
JMX NMISC 22
JMY NMISC 23
JMZ NMISC 24
MPC184 Universal Joint Assumptions and Restrictions

• The nodes I and J must be coincident.
• The local coordinate systems at the nodes must be specified such that the axes of rotation are well
defined. Otherwise, it is possible that the rotational motion might not be what is expected.
• Boundary conditions cannot be applied on the nodes forming the universal joint.
strained. Since boundary conditions cannot be applied to the nodes of the universal joint, a beam or
• In a nonlinear analysis, the components of relative motion are accumulated over all the substeps. It is
essential that the substep size be restricted such that these rotations in a given substep are less than
π for the values to be accumulated correctly.
MPC184-Universal
MPC184 Universal Joint Product Restrictions

ANSYS Professional
MPC184-Slot
Multipoint Constraint Element: Slot Joint
MPC184 Slot Joint Element Description

The MPC184 slot joint element is a two-node element that has one relative displacement degree of
freedom. The rotational degrees of freedom at nodes I and J are left free.
Figure 1 MPC184 Slot Joint Geometry
J J
eI
2
I I eI
1
eI
3
MPC184 Slot Joint Input Data

Set KEYOPT(1) = 8 to define a two-node slot joint element.
the element.
A local Cartesian coordinate system must be specified at the first node, I, of the element. The second
node, J, is constrained to move on the local e1 axis specified at node I. The local coordinate system
specified at node I evolves with the rotations at node I. Use the SECJOINT command to specify the
identifiers of the local coordinate systems.
The constraints imposed on a slot joint element are easily described by referring to Figure 1 (p. 897). At
any given instant of time, the constraints imposed in a 3-D slot joint are as follows:
I
2 ⋅ ( J − I ) − I2 ⋅ ( J − I ) = 0
I
3 ⋅ ( J − I ) − I3 ⋅ ( J − I ) = 0
Where, xI and xJ are the position vectors of nodes I and J in the current configuration, and XI and XJ
are the position vectors of nodes I and J in the reference configuration. Essentially these constraints
MPC184-Slot
force the node J to move along the e1 axis of the local coordinate system specified at node I. eI are in
the current configuration, while EI are specified in the initial configuration.
The change in the relative position of the nodes I and J is given by:
u1 = ℓ − ℓ 0
Where u is the initial offset computed based on the initial configuration and the local coordinate system
associated with node I, and
ℓ = 1I ⋅ ( J − I ) and ℓ 0 = 1I ⋅ ( J − I )
The constitutive calculations use the following definition of the joint displacement:
u1c = ℓ − ℓref
1
where:
ℓref
1 = reference length, length1, specified on SECDATA command.
If the reference length is not specified, the initial offset is used.
MPC184 Slot Joint Input Summary

This input summary applies to the slot joint element option of MPC184: KEYOPT(1) = 8.
Nodes
I, J
Note
Degrees of Freedom
Real Constants
None
Material Properties
materials.)
Surface Loads
None
MPC184-Slot
Body Loads
Temperatures --
T(I), T(J)
Element Loads
Displacements --
UX
Forces --
FX
Special Features
Large deflection
Linear perturbation
KEYOPT(1)
Element behavior:
8 --
Slot joint element
MPC184 Slot Joint Output Data


• Additional element output as shown in Table 1: MPC184 Slot Joint Element Output Definitions (p. 899) and
Table 2: MPC184 Slot Joint Element - NMISC Output (p. 900).
available.
Table 1 MPC184 Slot Joint Element Output Definitions

Name Definition O R
CSTOP1 Constraint force if stop is specified on DOF 1 - Y
CLOCK1 Constraint force if lock is specified on DOF 1 - Y
MPC184-Slot
Name Definition O R
JCD1 Joint constitutive displacement - Y
JEF1 Joint elastic force - Y
JDF1 Joint damping force - Y
JFF1 Joint friction force - Y
JRU1 Joint relative displacement - Y

0 = lock not active


1 = sticking
slot joint element.
Note
Table 2 MPC184 Slot Joint Element - NMISC Output

Name Definition O R
E1Z-I node I
E2Z-I node I
MPC184-Slot
Name Definition O R
E3Z-I node I
E1Z-J node J
E2Z-J node J
E3Z-J node J
Table 3: MPC184 Slot Joint Item and Sequence Numbers - SMISC Items (p. 901) and Table 4: MPC184 Slot Joint
Item and Sequence Numbers - NMISC Items (p. 902) list output available via the ETABLE command using
the Sequence Number method. See The General Postprocessor (POST1) in the Basic Analysis Guide and
The Item and Sequence Number Table (p. 52) for further information. The table uses the following notation:
Name
Item
E
Table 3 MPC184 Slot Joint Item and Sequence Numbers - SMISC Items
Item E
FY SMISC 2
FZ SMISC 3
CSTOP1 SMISC 7
CLOCK1 SMISC 13
CSST1 SMISC 19
CLST1 SMISC 25
JRP1 SMISC 31
JCD1 SMISC 37
JEF1 SMISC 43
JDF1 SMISC 49
JFF1 SMISC 55
JRU1 SMISC 61
JRV1 SMISC 67
JRA1 SMISC 73
MPC184-Slot

Item E
JTEMP SMISC 79
JFST1 SMISC 80
JFNF1 SMISC 81
Table 4 MPC184 Slot Joint Item and Sequence Numbers - NMISC Items
Item E
E1X-I NMISC 1
E1Y-I NMISC 2
E1Z-I NMISC 3
E2X-I NMISC 4
E2Y-I NMISC 5
E2Z-I NMISC 6
E3X-I NMISC 7
E3Y-I NMISC 8
E3Z-I NMISC 9
E1X-J NMISC 10
E1Y-J NMISC 11
E1Z-J NMISC 12
E2X-J NMISC 13
E2Y-J NMISC 14
E2Z-J NMISC 15
E3X-J NMISC 16
E3Y-J NMISC 17
E3Z-J NMISC 18
JFX NMISC 19
JFY NMISC 20
JFZ NMISC 21
JMX NMISC 22
JMY NMISC 23
JMZ NMISC 24
MPC184 Slot Joint Assumptions and Restrictions

• Boundary conditions cannot be applied on the nodes forming the slot joint.
strained. Since boundary conditions cannot be applied to the nodes of the slot joint, a beam or shell
MPC184-Slot
element with very weak stiffness may be used with the underlying solid elements at the nodes forming
the joint element to avoid any rigid body modes.
• Stops (SECSTOP) and locks (SECLOCK) can only be applied on the relative x-direction. These are not
applicable to the rotational degrees of freedom.
MPC184 Slot Joint Product Restrictions

ANSYS Professional
MPC184-Point
Multipoint Constraint Element: Point-in-plane Joint
MPC184 Point-in-plane Joint Element Description

The MPC184 point-in-plane joint element is a two-node element that has two relative displacement
degrees of freedom. The relative rotational degrees of freedom are not considered and cannot be
controlled.
Figure 1 MPC184 Point-in-plane Joint Geometry
I
e2I
fixed along
local e I axis eI eI
1 3
1
J motion allowed along

I
local e2 and e I axes
3
plane of e2I - e I
3
MPC184 Point-in-plane Joint Input Data

Set KEYOPT(1) = 9 to define a two-node point-in-plane joint element.
the element.
A local Cartesian coordinate system must be specified at the first node, I, of the element. The second
I I
e
node, J, is constrained such that it remains on a plane defined by the local e2 and 3 axes. The normal
distance from this plane containing node J to node I is held fixed. The local coordinate system specified
at node I evolves with the rotations at node I. Use the SECJOINT command to specify the identifiers
of the local coordinate systems.
The constraints imposed on a point-in-plane joint element are easily described by referring to Figure
1 (p. 905). At any given instant of time, the constraint imposed is as follows:
I J
1⋅( − I ) − E1I ⋅ ( J − I ) = 0
MPC184-Point
Where, xI and xJ are the positional vectors of nodes I and J in the current configuration, and XI and XJ
are the position vectors of nodes I and J in the reference configuration. eI are in the current configuration,
while EI are specified in the initial configuration.
The changes in the relative position of the nodes I and J are given by:
u2 = I2 ⋅ ( J − I ) − EI2 ⋅ ( J − I )
u3 = I3 ⋅ ( J − I ) − EI3 ⋅ ( J − I )
uc2 = I2 ⋅ ( J − I ) − ℓref
2
uc3 = I3 ⋅ ( J − I ) − ℓref
3
where:
ℓref
2 = reference length specified on the SECDATA command
ℓref
3 = reference length specified on the SECDATA command
If the reference lengths are not specified, the initial offsets are used.
MPC184 Point-in-plane Joint Input Summary

This input summary applies to the point-in-plane joint element option of MPC184: KEYOPT(1) = 9.
Nodes
I, J
Note
Degrees of Freedom
Real Constants
None
MPC184-Point
Material Properties
materials.)
Surface Loads
None
Body Loads
Temperatures --
T(I), T(J)
Element Loads
None
Special Features
Large deflection
Linear perturbation
KEYOPT(1)
Element behavior:
9 --
Point-in-plane joint element
MPC184 Point-in-plane Joint Output Data


• Additional element output as shown in Table 1: MPC184 Point-in-plane Joint Element Output Defini-
tions (p. 907) and Table 2: MPC184 Point-in-plane Joint Element - NMISC Output (p. 909).
available.
Table 1 MPC184 Point-in-plane Joint Element Output Definitions

Name Definition O R
MPC184-Point
Name Definition O R
JCD2 Joint constitutive displacement on DOF2 - Y
JCD3 Joint constitutive displacement on DOF3 - Y
JEF2 Joint elastic force in direction -2 - Y
JDF2 Joint damping force in direction -2 - Y
JFF2 Joint friction force in direction -2 - Y
JRU2 Joint relative displacement in direction -2 - Y
JRU3 Joint relative displacement in direction -3 - Y
JRV2 Joint relative velocity in direction -2 - Y
JRV3 Joint relative velocity in direction -3 - Y
JRA2 Joint relative acceleration in direction -2 - Y
JRA3 Joint relative acceleration in direction -3 - Y

0 = lock not active

point-in-plane joint element.
MPC184-Point
Note
Table 2 MPC184 Point-in-plane Joint Element - NMISC Output

Name Definition O R
E1Z-I node I
E2Z-I node I
E3Z-I node I
E1Z-J node J
E2Z-J node J
E3Z-J node J
Table 3: MPC184 Point-in-plane Joint Item and Sequence Numbers - SMISC Items (p. 909) and Table 4: MPC184
Point-in-plane Joint Item and Sequence Numbers - NMISC Items (p. 910) list output available via the ETABLE
Name
Item
E
Table 3 MPC184 Point-in-plane Joint Item and Sequence Numbers - SMISC Items
Item E
FX SMISC 1
CSTOP2 SMISC 8
CSTOP3 SMISC 9
CLOCK2 SMISC 14
MPC184-Point

Item E
CLOCK3 SMISC 15
CSST2 SMISC 20
CLST2 SMISC 26
CSST3 SMISC 21
CLST3 SMISC 27
JRP2 SMISC 32
JRP3 SMISC 33
JCD2 SMISC 38
JCD3 SMISC 39
JEF2 SMISC 44
JEF3 SMISC 45
JDF2 SMISC 50
JDF3 SMISC 51
JFF2 SMISC 56
JFF3 SMISC 57
JRU2 SMISC 62
JRU3 SMISC 63
JRV2 SMISC 68
JRV3 SMISC 69
JRA2 SMISC 74
JRA3 SMISC 75
JTEMP SMISC 79
Table 4 MPC184 Point-in-plane Joint Item and Sequence Numbers - NMISC Items
Item E
E1X-I NMISC 1
E1Y-I NMISC 2
E1Z-I NMISC 3
E2X-I NMISC 4
E2Y-I NMISC 5
E2Z-I NMISC 6
E3X-I NMISC 7
E3Y-I NMISC 8
E3Z-I NMISC 9
E1X-J NMISC 10
E1Y-J NMISC 11
MPC184-Point

Item E
E1Z-J NMISC 12
E2X-J NMISC 13
E2Y-J NMISC 14
E2Z-J NMISC 15
E3X-J NMISC 16
E3Y-J NMISC 17
E3Z-J NMISC 18
JFX NMISC 19
JFY NMISC 20
JFZ NMISC 21
JMX NMISC 22
JMY NMISC 23
JMZ NMISC 24
MPC184 Point-in-plane Joint Assumptions and Restrictions

• Boundary conditions cannot be applied on the nodes forming the point-in-plane joint.
strained. Since boundary conditions cannot be applied to the nodes of the point-in-plane joint, a beam
or shell element with very weak stiffness may be used with the underlying solid elements at the nodes
MPC184 Point-in-plane Joint Product Restrictions

ANSYS Professional
MPC184-Trans
Multipoint Constraint Element: Translational Joint
MPC184 Translational Joint Element Description

The MPC184 translational joint element is a two-node element that has one relative displacement degree
of freedom. All other relative degrees of freedom are fixed.
Figure 1 MPC184 Translational Joint Geometry
e J2
eI eJ
2 J 1
eI J J
I 1 e3
eI I
3
MPC184 Translational Joint Input Data

Set KEYOPT(1) = 10 to define a two-node translational joint element.
the element.
A local Cartesian coordinate system must be specified at the first node, I, of the element. The local co-
ordinate system specification at the second node is optional. The second node J is constrained to move
along the e1 axis specified at node I. The local coordinate system specified at node I evolves with the
rotations at node I. Use the SECJOINT command to specify the identifiers of the local coordinate systems.
The constraints imposed on a translational joint element are easily described by referring to Figure
1 (p. 913). At any given instant of time, the constraints imposed are as follows:
I
2 ⋅ ( J − I ) − EI2 ⋅ ( J − I ) = 0
I
3 ⋅ ( J − I ) − EI3 ⋅ ( J − I ) = 0
MPC184-Translational
I J
1⋅ 2 − 1I ⋅ 2J = 0
I
2 ⋅ 3J − I2 ⋅ 3J = 0
I J
1⋅ 3 − 1I ⋅ 3J = 0
Where, xI and xJ are the positional vectors of nodes I and J in the current configuration, and XI and XJ
are the position vectors of nodes I and J in the reference configuration. Essentially these constraints
force the node J to move along the e1 axis of the local coordinate system specified at node I. eI are in
the current configuration, while EI are specified in the initial configuration.
u1 = 1I ⋅ ( J − I ) − 1I ⋅ ( J − I )
u1c = 1I ⋅ ( J − I ) − ℓref
1
where:
ℓref
1 = reference length, length1, specified on SECDATA command
If the reference length is not specified, the initial offset is used.
MPC184 Translational Joint Input Summary

This input summary applies to the translational joint element option of MPC184: KEYOPT(1) = 10.
Nodes
I, J
Note
Degrees of Freedom
Real Constants
None
Material Properties
materials.)
Surface Loads
None
Body Loads
Temperatures --
T(I), T(J)
Element Loads
None
Special Features
Large deflection
Linear perturbation
KEYOPT(1)
Element behavior:
10 --
Translational joint element
MPC184 Translational Joint Output Data


• Additional element output as shown in Table 1: MPC184 Translational Joint Element Output Defini-
tions (p. 915) and Table 2: MPC184 Translational Joint Element - NMISC Output (p. 917).
available.
Table 1 MPC184 Translational Joint Element Output Definitions

Name Definition O R
MX Constraint moment in X direction - Y
Name Definition O R
MZ Constraint moment in Z direction - Y
JCD1 Joint constitutive displacement - Y
JEF1 Joint elastic force - Y
JDF1 Joint damping force - Y
JFF1 Joint friction force - Y
JRU1 Joint relative displacement - Y

0 = lock not active


1 = sticking
translational joint element.
Note
Table 2 MPC184 Translational Joint Element - NMISC Output

Name Definition O R
E1Z-I node I
E2Z-I node I
E3Z-I node I
E1Z-J node J
E2Z-J node J
E3Z-J node J
Table 3: MPC184 Translational Joint Item and Sequence Numbers - SMISC Items (p. 917) and Table 4: MPC184
Translational Joint Item and Sequence Numbers - NMISC Items (p. 918) list output available via the ETABLE
Name
Item
E
Table 3 MPC184 Translational Joint Item and Sequence Numbers - SMISC Items
Item E
FY SMISC 2
FZ SMISC 3
MX SMISC 4
MY SMISC 5

Item E
MZ SMISC 6
CSTOP1 SMISC 7
CLOCK1 SMISC 13
CSST1 SMISC 19
CLST1 SMISC 25
JRP1 SMISC 31
JCD1 SMISC 37
JEF1 SMISC 43
JDF1 SMISC 49
JFF1 SMISC 55
JRU1 SMISC 61
JRV1 SMISC 67
JRA1 SMISC 73
JTEMP SMISC 79
JFST1 SMISC 80
JFNF1 SMISC 81
Table 4 MPC184 Translational Joint Item and Sequence Numbers - NMISC Items
Item E
E1X-I NMISC 1
E1Y-I NMISC 2
E1Z-I NMISC 3
E2X-I NMISC 4
E2Y-I NMISC 5
E2Z-I NMISC 6
E3X-I NMISC 7
E3Y-I NMISC 8
E3Z-I NMISC 9
E1X-J NMISC 10
E1Y-J NMISC 11
E1Z-J NMISC 12
E2X-J NMISC 13
E2Y-J NMISC 14
E2Z-J NMISC 15
E3X-J NMISC 16
E3Y-J NMISC 17

Item E
E3Z-J NMISC 18
JFX NMISC 19
JFY NMISC 20
JFZ NMISC 21
JMX NMISC 22
JMY NMISC 23
JMZ NMISC 24
MPC184 Translational Joint Assumptions and Restrictions

• Boundary conditions cannot be applied on the nodes forming the translational joint.
strained. Since boundary conditions cannot be applied to the nodes of the translational joint, a beam
or shell element with very weak stiffness may be used with the underlying solid elements at the nodes
MPC184 Translational Joint Product Restrictions

ANSYS Professional
MPC184-Cylin
Multipoint Constraint Element: Cylindrical Joint
MPC184 Cylindrical Joint Element Description

The MPC184 cylindrical joint element is a two-node element that has one free relative displacement
degree of freedom and one free relative rotational degree of freedom (around the cylindrical or revolute
axis). All other relative degrees of freedom are fixed.
Figure 1 MPC184 Cylindrical Joint Geometry
e J2
eI eJ
2 J 1 J
eI J
I 1 e3 I
eI
3
Local x-axis as the axis
of cylindrical joint
e J1
eI eJ
1 J 3
J
e2
eI
I 3
Local z-axis as the axis

eI of cylindrical joint
2
MPC184 Cylindrical Joint Input Data

Set KEYOPT(1) = 11 to define a two-node cylindrical joint element.
the element.
If KEYOPT(4) = 0, then the element is an x-axis cylindrical joint element with the local e1 axis as the
cylindrical or revolute axis. Translational motion along this axis is also allowed.
MPC184-Cylindrical
If KEYOPT(4) = 1, then the element is a z-axis cylindrical joint element with the local e3 axis as the cyl-
indrical or revolute axis. Translational motion along this axis is also allowed.
ordinate system specification at the second node is optional. The local coordinate systems specified at
node I and J evolve with the rotations at the respective nodes. Use the SECJOINT command to specify
the identifiers of the local coordinate systems.
The constraints imposed in a cylindrical joint element with local e1 axis as the cylindrical or revolute
axis are described below. Similar constraint conditions are set up when the local e3 axis is the cylindrical
or revolute axis. Referring to Figure 1 (p. 921), with local coordinate systems specified at nodes I and J,
the constraints imposed at any given time are as follows:
I
2 ⋅ ( J − I ) − E2I ⋅ ( J − I ) = 0
I
3 ⋅ ( J − I ) − E3I ⋅ ( J − I ) = 0
I J
1⋅ 2 − 1I ⋅ 2J = 0
I J
1⋅ 3 − 1I ⋅ 3J = 0
u1 = ℓ − ℓ 0
where:
ℓ = 1I ⋅ ( J − I ) and ℓ 0 = 1I ⋅ ( J − I )
The relative rotation between nodes I and J is given by:
 e I ⋅ eJ 
φ = − tan−1  2 3 
 e I ⋅ eJ 
 3 3
The change in the relative angular position between the two local coordinate systems is given by
ur = φ - φ0 + mπ
where φ0 is the initial angular offset between the two coordinate systems and m is an integer accounting
for multiple rotations about the cylindrical axis.
u1c = 1I ⋅ ( J − I ) − ℓref
1
MPC184-Cylindrical
where:
ℓref
1 = reference length specified on SECDATA command.
urc4 = φ + m π − φ1ref
where:
φ1ref
= reference angle, angle1, specified on the SECDATA command. If this value is not specified,
φref
then Φ0 is used in place of 1
MPC184 Cylindrical Joint Input Summary

This input summary applies to the cylindrical joint element option of MPC184: KEYOPT(1) = 11.
Nodes
I, J
Note
Degrees of Freedom
Real Constants
None
Material Properties
materials.)
Surface Loads
None
Body Loads
Temperatures --
T(I), T(J)
Element Loads when KEYOPT(4) = 0:
Displacements/Rotations --
UX, ROTX
MPC184-Cylindrical
Velocities --
VELX, OMGX
Accelerations --
ACCX, DMGX
Force/Moments --
FX, MX
Element Loads when KEYOPT(4) = 1:
UZ, ROTZ
Velocities --
VELZ, OMGZ
Accelerations --
ACCZ, DMGZ
Force/Moments --
FZ, MZ
Special Features
Large deflection
Linear perturbation
KEYOPT(1)
Element behavior:
11 --
Cylindrical joint element
KEYOPT(4)
0 --
x-axis Cylindrical joint with local 1 direction as the cylindrical axis.
1 --
z-axis Cylindrical joint with local 3 direction as the cylindrical axis.
MPC184 Cylindrical Joint Output Data


• Additional element output as shown in Table 1: MPC184 Cylindrical Joint Element Output Definitions (p. 925)
and Table 2: MPC184 Cylindrical Joint Element - NMISC Output (p. 927).
MPC184-Cylindrical
available.
Table 1 MPC184 Cylindrical Joint Element Output Definitions

Name Definition O R
x-axis Cylindrical Joint Element (KEYOPT(4) = 0)
MZ Constraint Moment in Z direction - Y
4
4
JRP1 Joint relative position of DOF 1 - Y
JCD1 Joint constitutive displacement on DOF 1 - Y
JCD4 Joint constitutive rotation on DOF 4 - Y
JRU1 Joint relative displacement of DOF 1 - Y
JRU4 Joint relative rotation of DOF 4 - Y
JRV1 Joint relative velocity of DOF 1 - Y
JRV4 Joint relative rotational velocity of DOF 4 - Y
JRA1 Joint relative acceleration of DOF 1 - Y
JRA4 Joint relative rotational acceleration of DOF 4 - Y
MPC184-Cylindrical
Name Definition O R
z-axis Cylindrical Joint Element (KEYOPT(4) = 1)
6
6

MPC184-Cylindrical
0 = lock not active

forms of the cylindrical joint element.
Note
Table 2 MPC184 Cylindrical Joint Element - NMISC Output

Name Definition O R
The following output is available for all cylindrical joint elements (KEYOPT(4)
= 0 and 1)
E1Z-I node I
E2Z-I node I
E3Z-I node I
E1Z-J node J
E2Z-J node J
E3Z-J node J
Table 3: MPC184 Cylindrical Joint Item and Sequence Numbers - SMISC Items (p. 928) and Table 4: MPC184
Cylindrical Joint Item and Sequence Numbers - NMISC Items (p. 929) list output available via the ETABLE
Name
Item
MPC184-Cylindrical
E
Table 3 MPC184 Cylindrical Joint Item and Sequence Numbers - SMISC Items
Item E
x-axis Cylindrical Joint Element (KEYOPT(4) = 0)
FY SMISC 2
FZ SMISC 3
MY SMISC 5
MZ SMISC 6
CSTOP1 SMISC 7
CSTOP4 SMISC 10
CLOCK1 SMISC 13
CLOCK4 SMISC 16
CSST1 SMISC 19
CSST4 SMISC 22
CLST1 SMISC 25
CLST4 SMISC 28
JRP1 SMISC 31
JRP4 SMISC 34
JCD1 SMISC 37
JCD4 SMISC 40
JEF1 SMISC 43
JEF4 SMISC 46
JDF1 SMISC 49
JDF4 SMISC 52
JFF1 SMISC 55
JFF4 SMISC 58
JRU1 SMISC 61
JRU4 SMISC 64
JRV1 SMISC 67
JRV4 SMISC 70
JRA1 SMISC 73
JRA4 SMISC 76
JTEMP SMISC 79
z-axis Cylindrical Joint Element (KEYOPT(4) = 1)
FX SMISC 1
FY SMISC 2
MPC184-Cylindrical

Item E
MX SMISC 4
MY SMISC 5
CSTOP3 SMISC 9
CSTOP6 SMISC 12
CLOCK3 SMISC 15
CLOCK6 SMISC 18
CSST3 SMISC 21
CSST6 SMISC 24
CLST3 SMISC 27
CLST6 SMISC 30
JRP3 SMISC 33
JRP6 SMISC 36
JCD3 SMISC 39
JCD6 SMISC 42
JEF3 SMISC 45
JEF6 SMISC 48
JDF3 SMISC 51
JDF6 SMISC 54
JFF3 SMISC 57
JFF6 SMISC 60
JRU3 SMISC 63
JRU6 SMISC 66
JRV3 SMISC 69
JRV6 SMISC 72
JRA3 SMISC 75
JRA6 SMISC 78
JTEMP SMISC 79
Table 4 MPC184 Cylindrical Joint Item and Sequence Numbers - NMISC Items
Item E
The following output is available for all cylindrical joint elements (KEYOPT(4) = 0
and 1)
E1X-I NMISC 1
E1Y-I NMISC 2
E1Z-I NMISC 3
E2X-I NMISC 4
MPC184-Cylindrical

Item E
E2Y-I NMISC 5
E2Z-I NMISC 6
E3X-I NMISC 7
E3Y-I NMISC 8
E3Z-I NMISC 9
E1X-J NMISC 10
E1Y-J NMISC 11
E1Z-J NMISC 12
E2X-J NMISC 13
E2Y-J NMISC 14
E2Z-J NMISC 15
E3X-J NMISC 16
E3Y-J NMISC 17
E3Z-J NMISC 18
JFX NMISC 19
JFY NMISC 20
JFZ NMISC 21
JMX NMISC 22
JMY NMISC 23
JMZ NMISC 24
MPC184 Cylindrical Joint Assumptions and Restrictions

• Boundary conditions cannot be applied on the nodes forming the cylindrical joint.
strained. Since boundary conditions cannot be applied to the nodes of the cylindrical joint, a beam or
MPC184-Cylindrical
MPC184 Cylindrical Joint Product Restrictions

ANSYS Professional
MPC184-Planar
Multipoint Constraint Element: Planar Joint
MPC184 Planar Joint Element Description

The MPC184 planar joint element is a two-node element that has two relative displacement degrees of
freedom and one relative rotational degree of freedom. All other relative degrees of freedom are fixed.
Figure 1 MPC184 Planar Joint Geometry
I
J
Fixed in local e I
1
eI eI
1 3
I
eI eI
3 2
e2I e1I
Local x-axis as the Local z-axis as the

axis of rotation axis of rotation
MPC184 Planar Joint Input Data

Set KEYOPT(1) = 12 to define a two-node planar joint element.
the element.
If KEYOPT(4) = 0, the element is an x-axis planar joint element with the local e1 axis as the rotation axis
and also the axis along which the distance is fixed.
If KEYOPT(4) = 1, the element is a z-axis planar joint element with the local e3 axis as the rotation axis
and also the axis along which the distance is fixed.
MPC184-Planar
The constraints imposed on a planar joint element with local e1 axis as the axis of rotation are described
below. Similar constraint conditions are set up when the local e3 axis is the axis of rotation. Referring
to Figure 1 (p. 933), the constraints imposed at any given time are as follows:
I J
1⋅( − I ) − E1I ⋅ ( J − I ) = 0
I J
1⋅ 2 − E1I ⋅ E2J = 0
I J
1⋅ 3 − E1I ⋅ E3J = 0
The changes in the relative position of the nodes I and J are given by:
u2 = 2 ⋅ ( J − I ) − 2 ⋅ ( J − I )
u3 = 3 ⋅ ( J − I ) − 3 ⋅ ( J − I )
The change in the relative angular position between the two local coordinate systems is given by:
ur = φ - φ0 + mπ
u2 = 2 ⋅ ( J − I ) − ℓref
2
u3 = 3 ⋅ ( J − I ) − ℓref
3
where:
ℓref
2 ℓref
and 3 = reference lengths, length2 and length3, specified on the SECDATA command.
urc4 = φ + m π − φ1ref
where:
φ1ref
= reference angle, angle1, specified on the SECDATA command. If this value is not specified,
φref
then φ0 is used in place of 1 .
MPC184-Planar
MPC184 Planar Joint Input Summary

This input summary applies to the planar joint element option of MPC184: KEYOPT(1) = 12.
Nodes
I, J
Note
Degrees of Freedom
Real Constants
None
Material Properties
materials.)
Surface Loads
None
Body Loads
Temperatures --
T(I), T(J)
Element Loads when KEYOPT(4) = 0
UY, UZ, ROTX
Velocities --
VELY, VELZ, OMGX
Accelerations --
ACCY, ACCZ, DMGX
Element Loads when KEYOPT(4) = 1
UX, UY, ROTZ
Velocities --
VELX, VELY, OMGZ
Accelerations --
ACCX, ACCY, DMGZ
Special Features
Large deflection
Linear perturbation
KEYOPT(1)
Element behavior:
MPC184-Planar
12 --
Planar joint element
KEYOPT(4)
0 --
x-axis Planar joint with local 1 direction as the rotation axis.
1 --
z-axis Planar joint with local 3 direction as the rotation axis.
MPC184 Planar Joint Output Data


• Additional element output as shown in Table 1: MPC184 Planar Joint Element Output Definitions (p. 936)
and Table 2: MPC184 Planar Joint Element - NMISC Output (p. 939).
available.
Table 1 MPC184 Planar Joint Element Output Definitions

Name Definition O R
x-axis Planar Joint Element (KEYOPT(4) = 0)
4
4
MPC184-Planar
Name Definition O R
z-axis Planar Joint Element (KEYOPT(4) = 1)
MPC184-Planar
Name Definition O R
6
6
MPC184-Planar

0 = lock not active

forms of the planar joint element.
Note
Table 2 MPC184 Planar Joint Element - NMISC Output

Name Definition O R
The following output is available for all planar joint elements (KEYOPT(4) = 0
and 1)
E1Z-I node I
E2Z-I node I
E3Z-I node I
E1Z-J node J
E2Z-J node J
E3Z-J node J
Table 3: MPC184 Planar Joint Item and Sequence Numbers - SMISC Items (p. 940) and Table 4: MPC184 Planar
Joint Item and Sequence Numbers - NMISC Items (p. 942) list output available via the ETABLE command
notation:
MPC184-Planar
Name
Item
E
Table 3 MPC184 Planar Joint Item and Sequence Numbers - SMISC Items
Item E
x-axis Planar Joint Element (KEYOPT(4) = 0)
FX SMISC 1
MY SMISC 5
MZ SMISC 6
CSTOP2 SMISC 8
CSTOP3 SMISC 9
CSTOP4 SMISC 10
CLOCK2 SMISC 14
CLOCK3 SMISC 15
CLOCK4 SMISC 16
CSST2 SMISC 20
CSST3 SMISC 21
CSST4 SMISC 22
CLST2 SMISC 26
CLST3 SMISC 27
CLST4 SMISC 28
JRP2 SMISC 32
JRP3 SMISC 33
JRP4 SMISC 34
JCD2 SMISC 38
JCD3 SMISC 39
JCD4 SMISC 40
JEF2 SMISC 44
JEF3 SMISC 45
JEF4 SMISC 46
JDF2 SMISC 50
JDF3 SMISC 51
JDF4 SMISC 52
JFF2 SMISC 56
MPC184-Planar

Item E
JFF3 SMISC 57
JFF4 SMISC 58
JRU2 SMISC 62
JRU3 SMISC 63
JRU4 SMISC 64
JRV2 SMISC 68
JRV3 SMISC 69
JRV4 SMISC 70
JRA2 SMISC 74
JRA3 SMISC 75
JRA4 SMISC 76
JTEMP SMISC 79
z-axis Planar Joint Element (KEYOPT(4) = 1)
FZ SMISC 3
MX SMISC 4
MY SMISC 5
CSTOP1 SMISC 7
CSTOP2 SMISC 8
CSTOP6 SMISC 12
CLOCK1 SMISC 13
CLOCK2 SMISC 14
CLOCK6 SMISC 18
CSST1 SMISC 19
CSST2 SMISC 20
CSST6 SMISC 24
CLST1 SMISC 25
CLST2 SMISC 26
CLST6 SMISC 30
JRP1 SMISC 31
JRP2 SMISC 32
JRP6 SMISC 36
JCD1 SMISC 37
JCD2 SMISC 38
JCD6 SMISC 42
JEF1 SMISC 43
JEF2 SMISC 44
JEF6 SMISC 48
MPC184-Planar

Item E
JDF1 SMISC 49
JDF2 SMISC 50
JDF6 SMISC 54
JFF1 SMISC 55
JFF2 SMISC 56
JFF6 SMISC 60
JRU1 SMISC 61
JRU2 SMISC 62
JRU6 SMISC 66
JRV1 SMISC 67
JRV2 SMISC 68
JRV6 SMISC 72
JRA1 SMISC 73
JRA2 SMISC 74
JRA6 SMISC 78
JTEMP SMISC 79
Table 4 MPC184 Planar Joint Item and Sequence Numbers - NMISC Items
Item E
The following output is available for all planar joint elements (KEYOPT(4) = 0 and 1)
E1X-I NMISC 1
E1Y-I NMISC 2
E1Z-I NMISC 3
E2X-I NMISC 4
E2Y-I NMISC 5
E2Z-I NMISC 6
E3X-I NMISC 7
E3Y-I NMISC 8
E3Z-I NMISC 9
E1X-J NMISC 10
E1Y-J NMISC 11
E1Z-J NMISC 12
E2X-J NMISC 13
E2Y-J NMISC 14
E2Z-J NMISC 15
E3X-J NMISC 16
MPC184-Planar

Item E
E3Y-J NMISC 17
E3Z-J NMISC 18
JFX NMISC 19
JFY NMISC 20
JFZ NMISC 21
JMX NMISC 22
JMY NMISC 23
JMZ NMISC 24
MPC184 Planar Joint Assumptions and Restrictions

• Boundary conditions cannot be applied on the nodes forming the planar joint.
strained. Since boundary conditions cannot be applied to the nodes of the planar joint, a beam or shell
MPC184 Planar Joint Product Restrictions

ANSYS Professional
MPC184-Weld
Multipoint Constraint Element: Weld Joint
MPC184 Weld Joint Element Description

The MPC184 weld joint element is a two-node element that has all relative degrees of freedom fixed.
Figure 1 MPC184 Weld Joint Geometry
eI eJ
2 2
I eI J eJ I J
1 1
eI eJ
3 3
Weld Joint
MPC184 Weld Joint Input Data

Set KEYOPT(1) = 13 to define a two-node weld joint element.
the element.
Other input data that are common to all joint elements (material behavior, etc.) are described in "Joint
Input Data" (p. 863) in the MPC184 element description.
Note
The weld joint may also be simulated by using the CE command. See the CE command de-
scription for additional details.
MPC184 Weld Joint Input Summary

This input summary applies to the weld joint element option of MPC184: KEYOPT(1) = 13.
Nodes
I, J
MPC184-Weld
Note
Degrees of Freedom
Real Constants
None
Material Properties
None
Surface Loads
None
Body Loads
None
Element Loads
None
Special Features
Large deflection
Linear perturbation
KEYOPT(1)
Element behavior:
13 --
Weld joint element
MPC184 Weld Joint Output Data


• Additional element output as shown in Table 1: MPC184 Weld Joint Element Output Definitions (p. 947)
and Table 2: MPC184 Weld Joint Element - NMISC Output (p. 947).
MPC184-Weld
available.
Table 1 MPC184 Weld Joint Element Output Definitions

Name Definition O R
weld joint element.
Note
Table 2 MPC184 Weld Joint Element - NMISC Output

Name Definition O R
E1Z-I node I
E2Z-I node I
E3Z-I node I
E1Z-J node J
E2Z-J node J
E3Z-J node J
Table 3: MPC184 Weld Joint Item and Sequence Numbers - SMISC Items (p. 948) and Table 4: MPC184 Weld
MPC184-Weld
notation:
Name
Item
E
Table 3 MPC184 Weld Joint Item and Sequence Numbers - SMISC Items
Item E
FX SMISC 1
FY SMISC 2
FZ SMISC 3
MX SMISC 4
MY SMISC 5
MZ SMISC 6
Table 4 MPC184 Weld Joint Item and Sequence Numbers - NMISC Items
Item E
E1X-I NMISC 1
E1Y-I NMISC 2
E1Z-I NMISC 3
E2X-I NMISC 4
E2Y-I NMISC 5
E2Z-I NMISC 6
E3X-I NMISC 7
E3Y-I NMISC 8
E3Z-I NMISC 9
E1X-J NMISC 10
E1Y-J NMISC 11
E1Z-J NMISC 12
E2X-J NMISC 13
E2Y-J NMISC 14
E2Z-J NMISC 15
E3X-J NMISC 16
E3Y-J NMISC 17
MPC184-Weld

Item E
E3Z-J NMISC 18
JFX NMISC 19
JFY NMISC 20
JFZ NMISC 21
JMX NMISC 22
JMY NMISC 23
JMZ NMISC 24
MPC184 Weld Joint Assumptions and Restrictions

• Boundary conditions cannot be applied on the nodes forming the weld joint.
strained. Since boundary conditions cannot be applied to the nodes of the weld joint, a beam or shell
• Stops (SECSTOP) and locks (SECLOCK) are not applicable to this element.
MPC184 Weld Joint Product Restrictions

ANSYS Professional
MPC184-Orient
Multipoint Constraint Element: Orient Joint
MPC184 Orient Joint Element Description

The MPC184 orient joint is a two-node element. In this joint, the relative rotational degrees of freedom
are fixed while the displacement degrees of freedom are left free.
Figure 1 MPC184 Orient Joint Geometry
e J2
eJ
1
J
eI J
2 e3
eI
1
I
{
Motion unconstrained in
local x, y, and z directions.
I Angles are fixed.
e3
MPC184 Orient Joint Input Data

Set KEYOPT(1) = 14 to define a two-node orient joint element.
the element.
The constraints imposed on an orient joint element are easily described by referring to Figure 1 (p. 951).
At any given instant of time, the constraints imposed are as follows:
I
2 ⋅ 3J − I2 ⋅ 3J = 0
I J
1⋅ 2 − E1I ⋅ E2J = 0
I J
1⋅ 3 − E1I ⋅ E3J = 0
MPC184-Orient
Other input data that are common to all joint elements (material behavior, etc.) are described in "Joint
Input Data" (p. 863) in the MPC184 element description.
MPC184 Orient Joint Input Summary

This input summary applies to the orient joint element option of MPC184: KEYOPT(1) = 14.
Nodes
I, J
Note
Degrees of Freedom
Real Constants
None
Material Properties
None
Surface Loads
None
Body Loads
None
Element Loads
None
Special Features
Large deflection
Linear perturbation
KEYOPT(1)
Element behavior:
14 --
Orient joint element
MPC184 Orient Joint Output Data


• Additional element output as shown in Table 1: MPC184 Orient Joint Element Output Definitions (p. 953)
and Table 2: MPC184 Orient Joint Element - NMISC Output (p. 953).
MPC184-Orient
available.
Table 1 MPC184 Orient Joint Element Output Definitions

Name Definition O R
orient joint element.
Note
Table 2 MPC184 Orient Joint Element - NMISC Output

Name Definition O R
E1Z-I node I
E2Z-I node I
E3Z-I node I
E1Z-J node J
E2Z-J node J
E3Z-J node J
Table 3: MPC184 Orient Joint Item and Sequence Numbers - SMISC Items (p. 954) and Table 4: MPC184 Orient
MPC184-Orient
notation:
Name
Item
E
Table 3 MPC184 Orient Joint Item and Sequence Numbers - SMISC Items
Item E
MX SMISC 4
MY SMISC 5
MZ SMISC 6
Table 4 MPC184 Orient Joint Item and Sequence Numbers - NMISC Items
Item E
E1X-I NMISC 1
E1Y-I NMISC 2
E1Z-I NMISC 3
E2X-I NMISC 4
E2Y-I NMISC 5
E2Z-I NMISC 6
E3X-I NMISC 7
E3Y-I NMISC 8
E3Z-I NMISC 9
E1X-J NMISC 10
E1Y-J NMISC 11
E1Z-J NMISC 12
E2X-J NMISC 13
E2Y-J NMISC 14
E2Z-J NMISC 15
E3X-J NMISC 16
E3Y-J NMISC 17
E3Z-J NMISC 18
JFX NMISC 19
JFY NMISC 20
MPC184-Orient

Item E
JFZ NMISC 21
JMX NMISC 22
JMY NMISC 23
JMZ NMISC 24
MPC184 Orient Joint Assumptions and Restrictions

• Boundary conditions cannot be applied on the nodes forming the orient joint.
strained. Since boundary conditions cannot be applied to the nodes of the orient joint, a beam or shell
MPC184 Orient Joint Product Restrictions

ANSYS Professional
MPC184-Spherical
Multipoint Constraint Element: Spherical Joint
MPC184 Spherical Joint Element Description

The MPC184 spherical joint element is a two-node element with the relative displacement degrees of
freedom constrained. The relative rotational degrees of freedom are left unconstrained. These rotations
cannot be controlled. The kinematic constraints are imposed using the Lagrange multiplier method.
Figure 1 MPC184 Spherical Joint Geometry
J
e2
e J1
J eI
eJ 2
3 I
eI
1
eI
3
Y
X
Z
MPC184 Spherical Joint Input Data

Set KEYOPT(1) = 15 to define a two-node spherical joint element.
Figure 1 (p. 957) shows the geometry and node locations for this element. Two nodes define the element.
The two nodes (I and J) are expected to have identical spatial locations initially. If the two nodes are
not coincident, the relative positions of the two nodes are maintained.
A local Cartesian coordinate system should be specified at the first node, I, of the element. The specific-
ation of the second local coordinate system at node J is optional. If the local coordinate system is not
specified at node J, the local coordinate system at node J is assumed to be the same as that at node I.
Use the SECJOINT command to specify the identifiers of the local coordinate systems.
The constraints imposed in a spherical joint element are described below. Referring to Figure 1 (p. 957),
the constraints imposed at any given time are as follows:
I J
1⋅( − I ) − E1I ⋅ ( J − I ) = 0
I
2 ⋅ ( J − I ) − EI2 ⋅ ( J − I ) = 0
MPC184-Spherical
I
3 ⋅ ( J − I ) − EI3 ⋅ ( J − I ) = 0
For output purposes, the relative rotations between nodes I and J are characterized by the Cardan (or
Bryant) angles as follows:
 I J 
−1  e2 ⋅ e3 
φ= − tan
 e I ⋅ eJ 
 3 3 
ϕ = − sin−1( e1I ⋅ e3J )
 e I ⋅ eJ 
χ = − tan−1  1 2 
 e I ⋅ eJ 
 1 1
Since the output of relative rotations is characterized by the Cardan (or Bryant) angles, the rotation
around the local e2 axis is limited to between -PI/2 to +PI/2 (see the expression for Φ above). When this
rotation value reaches |PI/2|, the other two angles become indeterminate. Therefore, if the accumulated
angles around an axis of rotation is greater than |PI/2|, the axis of rotation should typically be specified
as the local e1 or e3 axis.
Since the relative rotational degrees of freedom cannot be controlled, the spherical joint element does
not allow stops and locks or material behavior specifications. Other input data that are common to all
joint elements are described in "Joint Input Data" (p. 863) in the MPC184 element description.
MPC184 Spherical Joint Input Summary

This input summary applies to the spherical joint element option of MPC184: KEYOPT(1) = 15.
Nodes
I, J,
Note
For a grounded spherical joint element, specify either node I or node J in the element
definition and leave the other node (the grounded node) blank.
Degrees of Freedom
Real Constants
None
Material Properties
None
Surface Loads
None
Body Loads
None
MPC184-Spherical
Element Loads
None
Special Features
Large deflection
Linear perturbation
KEYOPT(1)
Element behavior:
15 --
Spherical joint element
MPC184 Spherical Joint Output Data


• Additional element output as shown in Table 1: MPC184 Spherical Joint Element Output Definitions (p. 959)
and Table 2: MPC184 Spherical Joint Element - NMISC Output (p. 960).
available.
Table 1 MPC184 Spherical Joint Element Output Definitions

Name Definition O R
MPC184-Spherical
Name Definition O R
spherical joint element.
Note
Table 2 MPC184 Spherical Joint Element - NMISC Output

Name Definition O R
E1Z-I node I
E2Z-I node I
E3Z-I node I
E1Z-J node J
E2Z-J node J
E3Z-J node J
Table 3: MPC184 Spherical Joint Item and Sequence Numbers -SMISC Items (p. 961) and Table 4: MPC184
Spherical Joint Item and Sequence Numbers - NMISC Items (p. 961) list output available via the ETABLE
Name
Item
MPC184-Spherical
E
Table 3 MPC184 Spherical Joint Item and Sequence Numbers -SMISC Items
Item E
FX SMISC 1
FY SMISC 2
FZ SMISC 3
JRP4-6 SMISC 34-36
JRU4-6 SMISC 64-66
JRV4-6 SMISC 70-72
JRA4-6 SMISC 76-78
Table 4 MPC184 Spherical Joint Item and Sequence Numbers - NMISC Items
Item E
E1X-I NMISC 1
E1Y-I NMISC 2
E1Z-I NMISC 3
E2X-I NMISC 4
E2Y-I NMISC 5
E2Z-I NMISC 6
E3X-I NMISC 7
E3Y-I NMISC 8
E3Z-I NMISC 9
E1X-J NMISC 10
E1Y-J NMISC 11
E1Z-J NMISC 12
E2X-J NMISC 13
E2Y-J NMISC 14
E2Z-J NMISC 15
E3X-J NMISC 16
E3Y-J NMISC 17
E3Z-J NMISC 18
JFX NMISC 19
JFY NMISC 20
JFZ NMISC 21
JMX NMISC 22
MPC184-Spherical

Item E
JMY NMISC 23
JMZ NMISC 24
MPC184 Spherical Joint Assumptions and Restrictions

• The nodes I and J should be coincident. If the nodes are not coincident, the relative positions between
the two nodes are maintained.
• Boundary conditions cannot be applied on the nodes forming the spherical element.
strained. Since boundary conditions cannot be applied to the nodes of the spherical joint, a beam or
• In a nonlinear analysis, the components of relative motion are accumulated over all the substeps. For
the values to be accumulated correctly, it is essential that the substep size be restricted such that the
rotation in a given substep is less than π.
MPC184 Spherical Joint Product Restrictions

ANSYS Professional
MPC184-General
Multipoint Constraint Element: General Joint
MPC184 General Joint Element Description

The MPC184 general joint is a two-node element. By default, no relative degrees of freedom are fixed.
However, you can specify which relative degrees of freedom need to be constrained. By specifying as
many relative degrees of freedom to be constrained as needed, you can simulate different joint elements.
Figure 1 MPC184 General Joint Geometry
eI
2
eJ
2
I eI
1
eI
3
J eJ
1
eJ
3
By default, a general joint has both displacement and rotational degrees of freedom activated at the
nodes of the element. In some cases only displacement degrees of freedom are needed (as in a model
consisting of only continuum elements). In such cases, you can specify a general joint with only displace-
ment degrees of freedom activated by setting KEYOPT(4) = 1.
MPC184 General Joint Input Data

Set KEYOPT(1) = 16 to define a two-node general joint element.
Use KEYOPT(4) to specify the active degree-of-freedom set:
KEYOPT(4) = 0 (default) - both displacement and rotational degrees of freedom are activated.
KEYOPT(4) = 1 - only displacement degrees of freedom are activated.
For this element, you can specify which relative degrees of freedom need to be constrained. First, define
the section type (SECTYPE command) for this joint. Then define the SECJOINT command as follows:
SECJ,LSYS,local cs1,local cs2 ! Defines the local coordinate systems for the joints.
SECJ,RDOF,dof1,dof2,…,dof6 ! Defines the relative DOFs to be constrained.
Note that the SECJOINT command is issued twice when the general joint is used with some degrees
of freedom constrained. The first SECJOINT command defines the local coordinate systems for the joint.
In the second SECJOINT command, specify as many relative degrees of freedom as needed (a maximum
of 6 may be specified). The general joint element allows you to simulate different joint elements by
MPC184-General
specifying different relative degrees of freedom to be constrained. The following examples highlight
the different joint elements that can be simulated:
SECJ,RDOF,dof1,dof2,dof3,dof5,dof6 ! Simulates a revolute joint with local e_1 axis as the axis of revolute.
SECJ,RDOF,dof2,dof3,dof5,dof6 ! Simulates a cylindrical joint with local e_1 axis as the axis of rotation.
SECJ,RDOF,dof1,dof2,dof3,dof4,dof5,dof6 ! Simulates a weld joint.
When KEYOPT(4) = 1, the local coordinate systems specified at nodes I and J remain fixed in their initial
orientation. The rotation at the nodes, if any, is ignored.
When KEYOPT(4) = 0, the local coordinate systems specified at nodes I and J are assumed to evolve
with the rotations at the nodes.
For an unconstrained general joint (KEYOPT(4) = 0 or 1), the relative displacements between nodes I
and J are as follows:
u1 = 1I ⋅ ( J − I ) − 1I ⋅ ( J − I )
u2 = I2 ⋅ ( J − I ) − EI2 ⋅ ( J − I )
u3 = I3 ⋅ ( J − I ) − EI3 ⋅ ( J − I )
The relative rotations between nodes I and J are characterized by the Cardan (or Bryant) angles as follows
(only if KEYOPT(4) = 0):
 I J 
−1  e2 ⋅ e3 
φ= − tan
 e I ⋅ eJ 
 3 3 
ϕ = − sin−1( e1I ⋅ e3J )
 e I ⋅ eJ 
χ = − tan−1  1 2 
 e I ⋅ eJ 
 1 1
The relative displacements and rotations are suitably constrained when some or all of the relative degrees
of freedom are fixed.
Note that the relative angular positions for the general joint are characterized by the Cardan (or Bryant)
angles. This requires that the rotations about the local e2 axis be restricted between –PI/2 to +PI/2.
Thus, the local e2 axis should not be used to simulate the axis of rotation.
For an unconstrained general joint, the constitutive calculations use the following definitions for relative
displacement:
I J
1 = 1⋅( − I ) − ℓref
1
MPC184-General
2 = I2 ⋅ ( J − I ) − ℓref
2
3 = I3 ⋅ ( J − I ) − ℓref
3
where:
ℓref ref ref

1 , ℓ 2 , and ℓ 3 = reference lengths, length1, length2, and length3, specified on the SECDATA
command.
The following definitions are for relative rotations:
ur 4 = φ − φ1ref
ur 5 = ϕ − φref
2
ur 6 = χ − φref
3
where:
φ1ref φref φref

, 3 , and 2 = reference angle specifications, angle1, angle2, and angle3 on the SECDATA
command.
MPC184 General Joint Input Summary

This input summary applies to the general joint element option of MPC184: KEYOPT(1) = 16.
Nodes
I, J
Note
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, UZ, ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ (KEYOPT(4) = 0)
UX, UY, UZ (KEYOPT(4) = 1)

Real Constants
None
MPC184-General
Material Properties
materials.)
Surface Loads
None
Body Loads
Temperatures --
T(I), T(J)
Element Loads
For an unconstrained general joint:
Displacement (KEYOPT(4) = 0 or 1) --
UX, UY, UZ
Rotation (KEYOPT(4) = 0) --
ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ
For a constrained general joint, loads are based on the free relative degrees of freedom in the joint.
Special Features
Large deflection
Linear perturbation
KEYOPT(1)
Element behavior:
16 --
General joint element
KEYOPT(4)
0 --
General joint with both displacement and rotational degrees of freedom activated.
1 --
General joint with only displacement degrees of freedom activated.
MPC184 General Joint Output Data


• Additional element output as shown in Table 1: MPC184 General Joint Element Output Definitions (p. 967)
and Table 2: MPC184 General Joint Element - NMISC Output (p. 969).
MPC184-General
available.
Table 1 MPC184 General Joint Element Output Definitions

Name Definition O R
General joint with displacement and rotation DOF (KEYOPT(4) = 0)
The constraint force and moment output depends on which of the relative DOFs
are constrained.
The following output depends on which of the relative DOFs are unconstrained.
CSTOP1-6 Constraint force/moment if stop is specified on - Y
DOFs 1-6
CLOCK1-6 Constraint force/moment if lock is specified on - Y
DOFs 1-6
CSST1-6 Constraint stop status on relative DOFs 1-6[1] - Y
CLST1-6 Constraint lock status on relative DOFs 1-6[2] - Y
JRP1-6 Joint relative position of DOFs 1-6 - Y
JCD1-6 Joint constitutive displacement/rotation of DOFs - Y
1-6
JEF1-6 Joint elastic force/moment 1-6 - Y
JDF1-6 Joint damping force/moment 1-6 - Y
JFF1-6 Joint friction force/moment 1-6 - Y
JRU1-6 Joint relative displacement/rotation 1-6 - Y
JRV1-6 Joint relative velocity (or rotational velocity) 1- - Y
6
JRA1-6 Joint relative acceleration (or rotational acceler- - Y
ation) 1-6
General joint with displacement DOF (KEYOPT(4) =1)
The constraint force and moment output depends on which of the relative DOFs
are constrained.
MPC184-General
Name Definition O R
The following output depends on which of the relative DOFs are unconstrained.
CSTOP1-3 Constraint force if stop is specified on DOFs 1- - Y
3
CLOCK1-3 Constraint force if lock is specified on DOFs 1- - Y
3
CSST1-3 Constraint stop status on relative DOFs 1-3[1] - Y
CLST1-3 Constraint lock status on relative DOFs 1-3[2] - Y
JRP1-3 Joint relative position of DOFs 1-3 - Y
JCD1-3 Joint constitutive displacement of DOFs 1-3 - Y
JEF1-3 Joint elastic force 1-3 - Y
JDF1-3 Joint damping force 1-3 - Y
JFF1-3 Joint friction force 1-3 - Y
JRU1-3 Joint relative displacement 1-3 - Y
JRV1-3 Joint relative velocity 1-3 - Y
JRA1-3 Joint relative acceleration 1-3 - Y

0 = lock not active

forms of the general joint element.
MPC184-General
Note
Table 2 MPC184 General Joint Element - NMISC Output

Name Definition O R
The following output is available for all general joint elements (KEYOPT(4) =
0 and 1)
E1Z-I node I
E2Z-I node I
E3Z-I node I
E1Z-J node J
E2Z-J node J
E3Z-J node J
Table 3: MPC184 General Joint Item and Sequence Numbers - SMISC Items (p. 969) and Table 4: MPC184
General Joint Item and Sequence Numbers - NMISC Items (p. 971) list output available via the ETABLE
Analysis Guide and The Item and Sequence Number Table (p. 52) for further information. The tables use
Name
Item
E
Table 3 MPC184 General Joint Item and Sequence Numbers - SMISC Items
Item E
General joint with displacement and rotation DOF (KEYOPT(4) = 0)
(Some of these values may be zero depending on which relative degrees of freedom are constrained.)
MPC184-General

Item E
FX SMISC 1
FY SMISC 2
FZ SMISC 3
MX SMISC 4
MY SMISC 5
MZ SMISC 6
CSTOP1-6 SMISC 7-12
CLOCK1-6 SMISC 13-18
CSST1-6 SMISC 19-24
CLST1-6 SMISC 25-30
JRP1-6 SMISC 31-36
JCD1-6 SMISC 37-42
JEF1-6 SMISC 43-48
JDF1-6 SMISC 49-54
JFF1-6 SMISC 55-60
JRU1-6 SMISC 61-66
JRV1-6 SMISC 67-72
JRA1-6 SMISC 73-78
JTEMP SMISC 79
General joint with displacement DOF (KEYOPT(4) = 1)
(Some of these values may be zero depending on which relative degrees of freedom are constrained.)
FX SMISC 1
FY SMISC 2
FZ SMISC 3
CSTOP1-3 SMISC 7-9
CLOCK1-3 SMISC 13-15
CSST1-3 SMISC 19–21
CLST1-3 SMISC 25-27
JRP1-3 SMISC 31-33
JCD1-3 SMISC 37-39
JEF1-3 SMISC 43-45
JDF1-3 SMISC 49-51
JFF1-3 SMISC 55-57
JRU1-3 SMISC 61-63
JRV1-3 SMISC 67-69
JRA1-3 SMISC 73-78
MPC184-General

Item E
JTEMP SMISC 79
Table 4 MPC184 General Joint Item and Sequence Numbers - NMISC Items
Item E
The following output is available for all general joint elements (KEYOPT(4) = 0 and
1)
E1X-I NMISC 1
E1Y-I NMISC 2
E1Z-I NMISC 3
E2X-I NMISC 4
E2Y-I NMISC 5
E2Z-I NMISC 6
E3X-I NMISC 7
E3Y-I NMISC 8
E3Z-I NMISC 9
E1X-J NMISC 10
E1Y-J NMISC 11
E1Z-J NMISC 12
E2X-J NMISC 13
E2Y-J NMISC 14
E2Z-J NMISC 15
E3X-J NMISC 16
E3Y-J NMISC 17
E3Z-J NMISC 18
JFX NMISC 19
JFY NMISC 20
JFZ NMISC 21
JMX NMISC 22
JMY NMISC 23
JMZ NMISC 24
MPC184 General Joint Assumptions and Restrictions

• Boundary conditions cannot be applied on the nodes forming the general joint.
strained. Since boundary conditions cannot be applied to the nodes of the general joint, a beam or
MPC184-General
MPC184 General Joint Product Restrictions

ANSYS Professional
MPC184-Screw
Multipoint Constraint Element: Screw Joint
MPC184 Screw Joint Element Description

The MPC184 screw joint element is a two-node element which is very similar to the cylindrical joint
element in construction. Whereas the cylindrical Joint element has two free relative degrees of freedom,
the screw Joint has only one. In a screw joint, the “pitch” of the screw relates the relative rotation angle
(around the cylindrical or screw axis) to the relative translational displacement along the axis of the
screw. All other relative degrees of freedom are fixed.
Figure 1 MPC184 Screw Joint Geometry
P
e J1
eJ
eI J 3
1
I eI e2
J
3
eI Local z-axis as the axis

2
of cylindrical joint
MPC184 Screw Joint Input Data

Set KEYOPT(1) = 17 to define a two-node screw joint element.
the element.
nodes I and J evolve with the rotations at the respective nodes. Use the SECJOINT command to specify
MPC184-Screw
the identifiers of the local coordinate systems. The e3 axes of the local coordinate systems specified at
the nodes must align to form the axis of the screw joint.
Note that the SECJOINT command is issued twice for the screw joint element. The first SECJOINT
command defines the local coordinate systems for the joint. The second SECJOINT command specifies
the screw pitch that relates the relative rotation angle to the relative translational displacement along
the axis of the screw.
The basic constraints imposed in a screw joint element are described below:
I J
1⋅( − I ) − E1I ⋅ ( J − I ) = 0
I
2 ⋅ ( J − I ) − EI2 ⋅ ( J − I ) = 0
I
2 ⋅ 3J − I2 ⋅ 3J = 0
I J
1⋅ 3 − 1I ⋅ 3J = 0
The constraint relating the relative rotational angle to the relative translational displacement along the
axis is given by:
e3I ⋅ ( x J − xI ) − E3I ⋅ ( x J − xI ) − p(φ − φ0 ) = 0
where p is the pitch of the screw defined as the ratio of relative axial displacement (length units) to
the relative rotation (in radians) , φ is defined as:
 e I ⋅ eJ 
φ = − tan−1  1 2 
 e I ⋅ eJ 
 1 1
and φ0 is defined in the reference configuration with the same expression given above.
u3 = ( ℓ − ℓ 0 )
where:
ℓ = e3I ⋅ ( x J − xI ) − E3I ⋅ ( x J − xI )
and ℓ 0 is computed in the reference configuration using the same expression above.
The relative rotation between nodes I and J is given by:
MPC184-Screw
 I J 
−1  e1 ⋅ e2 
φ= − tan
 e I ⋅ eJ 
 1 2 
The change in the relative angular position between the two local coordinate systems is given by:
ur = φ − φ0 + m π
where φ0 is the initial angular offset between the two coordinate systems and m is an integer accounting
for multiple rotations about the screw axis.
uc3 = e3I ⋅ ( x J − xI ) − ℓref

3
where:
ℓref
3 = reference length specified on SECDATA command.
urc6 = φ + m π − φref
3
where:
φref
3 = reference angle, angle3, specified on the SECDATA command. If this value is not specified,
φref
then Φ0 is used in place of 3
MPC184 Screw Joint Input Summary

This input summary applies to the screw joint element option of MPC184: KEYOPT(1) = 17.
Nodes
I, J
Note
Degrees of Freedom
MPC184-Screw
Real Constants
None
Material Properties
Use the JOIN label on the TB command to define stiffness and damping. (See MPC184 Joint Material
Models in the Material Reference for detailed information on defining joint materials.)
Surface Loads
None
Body Loads
Temperatures --
T(I), T(J)
Element Loads:
UZ, ROTZ
Velocities --
VELZ, OMGZ
Accelerations --
ACCZ, DMGZ
Force/Moments --
FZ, MZ
Special Features
Large deflection
Linear perturbation
KEYOPT(1)
Element behavior:
17 --
Screw joint element
MPC184 Screw Joint Output Data


• Additional element output as shown in Table 1: MPC184 Screw Joint Element Output Definitions (p. 977)
and Table 2: MPC184 Screw Joint Element - NMISC Output (p. 978).
MPC184-Screw
available.
Table 1 MPC184 Screw Joint Element Output Definitions

Name Definition O R
6
6
MPC184-Screw

0 = lock not active

forms of the screw joint element.
Note
Table 2 MPC184 Screw Joint Element - NMISC Output

Name Definition O R
The following output is available for all screw joint elements (KEYOPT(4) = 0
and 1)
E1Z-I node I
E2Z-I node I
E3Z-I node I
E1Z-J node J
E2Z-J node J
E3Z-J node J
Table 3: MPC184 Screw Joint Item and Sequence Numbers - SMISC Items (p. 979) and Table 4: MPC184 Screw
notation:
Name
MPC184-Screw
Item
E
Table 3 MPC184 Screw Joint Item and Sequence Numbers - SMISC Items
Item E
FX SMISC 1
FY SMISC 2
MX SMISC 4
MY SMISC 5
CSTOP3 SMISC 9
CSTOP6 SMISC 12
CLOCK3 SMISC 15
CLOCK6 SMISC 18
CSST3 SMISC 21
CSST6 SMISC 24
CLST3 SMISC 27
CLST6 SMISC 30
JRP3 SMISC 33
JRP6 SMISC 36
JCD3 SMISC 39
JCD6 SMISC 42
JEF3 SMISC 45
JEF6 SMISC 48
JDF3 SMISC 51
JDF6 SMISC 54
JRU3 SMISC 63
JRU6 SMISC 66
JRV3 SMISC 69
JRV6 SMISC 72
JRA3 SMISC 75
JRA6 SMISC 78
MPC184-Screw

Item E
JTEMP SMISC 79
Table 4 MPC184 Screw Joint Item and Sequence Numbers - NMISC Items
Item E
E1X-I NMISC 1
E1Y-I NMISC 2
E1Z-I NMISC 3
E2X-I NMISC 4
E2Y-I NMISC 5
E2Z-I NMISC 6
E3X-I NMISC 7
E3Y-I NMISC 8
E3Z-I NMISC 9
E1X-J NMISC 10
E1Y-J NMISC 11
E1Z-J NMISC 12
E2X-J NMISC 13
E2Y-J NMISC 14
E2Z-J NMISC 15
E3X-J NMISC 16
E3Y-J NMISC 17
E3Z-J NMISC 18
JFX NMISC 19
JFY NMISC 20
JFZ NMISC 21
JMX NMISC 22
JMY NMISC 23
JMZ NMISC 24
MPC184 Screw Joint Assumptions and Restrictions

• Boundary conditions cannot be applied on the nodes forming the screw joint.
strained. Since boundary conditions cannot be applied to the nodes of the screw joint, a beam or shell
MPC184-Screw
• The pitch of the screw joint is defined as the ratio of relative axial displacement (length units) to relative
rotation (in radians). Note that the relative rotation is expressed in radians and not as “number of re-
volutions.” Thus, the ANSYS definition for the pitch of a screw joint differs from some commonly used
definitions for pitch.
• The relative rotation and relative translation degrees of freedom for this joint are not independent.
Loads or boundary conditions (applied with the FJ or DJ command) can be specified on only one of
these two relative degrees of freedom, while the other relative degree of freedom is automatically
defined via the constraint equations of the element.
MPC184 Screw Joint Product Restrictions

ANSYS Professional
SOLID185

SOLID185 is used for 3-D modeling of solid structures. It is defined by eight nodes having three degrees
of freedom at each node: translations in the nodal x, y, and z directions. The element has plasticity,
hyperelasticity, stress stiffening, creep, large deflection, and large strain capabilities. It also has mixed
formulation capability for simulating deformations of nearly incompressible elastoplastic materials, and
fully incompressible hyperelastic materials.
SOLID185 is available in two forms:
• Homogeneous Structural Solid (KEYOPT(3) = 0, the default) -- See "SOLID185 Homogeneous Structural
Solid Element Description" (p. 983).
• Layered Structural Solid (KEYOPT(3) = 1) -- See "SOLID185 Layered Structural Solid Element Descrip-
tion" (p. 990).
A higher-order version of the SOLID185 element is SOLID186.
SOLID185 Homogeneous Structural Solid Element Description

SOLID185 Structural Solid is suitable for modeling general 3-D solid structures. It allows for prism, tetra-
hedral, and pyramid degenerations when used in irregular regions. Various element technologies such
as B-bar, uniformly reduced integration, and enhanced strains are supported.
SOLID185
Figure 1 SOLID185 Homogeneous Structural Solid Geometry
4 M O,P
P
5 N
O
I K,L
6
J
M Prism Option
N
3 M,N,O,P
2
L I
K,L
K
J
Z Tetrahedral Option -
I not recommended
1
Y J
M,N,O,P
X
L K
I
J
Pyramid Option -
not recommended
SOLID185 Homogeneous Structural Solid Input Data

The geometry and node locations for this element are shown in Figure 1 (p. 984). The element is defined
by eight nodes and the orthotropic material properties. The default element coordinate system is along
global directions. You may define an element coordinate system using ESYS, which forms the basis for
orthotropic material directions.
to TUNIF. If all other temperatures are unspecified, they default to T(I). For any other input temperature
pattern, unspecified temperatures default to TUNIF. Similar defaults occurs for fluence except that zero
is used instead of TUNIF.
SOLID185
ordinate system.
The effects of pressure load stiffness are automatically included for this element. If an unsymmetrical
"SOLID185 Homogeneous Structural Solid Input Summary" (p. 985) contains a summary of element input.
For a general description of element input, see Element Input (p. 43).
SOLID185 Homogeneous Structural Solid Input Summary

Nodes
I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, UZ
Real Constants
None, if KEYOPT(2) = 0,
HGSTF - Hourglass Stiffness Scaling factor if KEYOPT(2) = 1 (Default is 1.0; any positive number is
valid. If set to 0.0, value is automatically reset to 1.0.)
Material Properties
EX, EY, EZ, PRXY, PRYZ, PRXZ (or NUXY, NUYZ, NUXZ), GXY, GYZ, GXZ, ALPX, ALPY, ALPZ (or CTEX,
CTEY, CTEZ or THSX, THSY, THSZ), DENS, ALPD, BETD
Surface Loads
Pressures --

Body Loads
Temperatures --
Special Features
Birth and death

Elasticity
Hyperelasticity
Initial stress import
Large deflection
Large strain
Linear perturbation
Plasticity
SOLID185
Stress stiffening
Viscoelasticity
KEYOPT(2)
Element technology:
0 --
Full integration with B method (default)
1 --
Uniform reduced integration with hourglass control
2 --
3 --
Simplified enhanced strain formulation
KEYOPT(3)
Layer construction:
0 --
Structural Solid (default) -- nonlayered
1 --
Layered Solid (not applicable to SOLID185 Structural Solid)
KEYOPT(6)
0 --
1 --
Use mixed formulation
SOLID185 Homogeneous Structural Solid Element Technology
SOLID185 Homogeneous Structural Solid uses the full-integration B method (also known as the selective
reduced integration method), enhanced strain formulation, simplified enhanced strain formulation, or
uniform reduced integration.
When enhanced strain formulation (KEYOPT(2) = 2) is selected, the element introduces nine internal
(user-inaccessible) degrees of freedom to handle shear locking, and four internal degrees of freedom
to handle volumetric locking.
SOLID185 Homogeneous Structural Solid Output Data


• Additional element output as shown in Table 1: SOLID185 Homogeneous Structural Solid Element
Output Definitions (p. 987)
SOLID185
Several items are illustrated in Figure 2 (p. 987). See Element Table for Variables Identified By Sequence
Number in the Basic Analysis Guide and The Item and Sequence Number Table (p. 52) in this document
for more information.
Figure 2 SOLID185 Homogeneous Structural Solid Stress Output
P
O
SZ
M N
SY
SX
L
K
Z
I
Y
X J
Stress directions shown are for global directions.
available.
Table 1 SOLID185 Homogeneous Structural Solid Element Output Definitions

Name Definition O R
NODES Nodes - I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P - Y
VOLU: Volume - Y
PRES Pressures P1 at nodes J, I, L, K; P2 at I, J, N, M; P3 at - Y
O, P
TEMP Temperatures T(I), T(J), T(K), T(L), T(M), T(N), T(O), T(P) - Y
S:X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, XZ Stresses Y Y
SOLID185
Name Definition O R
XZ
EPEL:EQV Equivalent elastic strains [6] - Y
XZ
EPPL:X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, Plastic strains [7] 1 1
XZ
EPCR:X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, Creep strains 1 1
XZ
EPTO:X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, Total mechanical strains (EPEL + EPPL + EPCR) Y -
XZ
EPCR)
ing)
PLASTIC, CREEP
are enabled (NLGEOM,ON) for SEND..
EPPL.
Table 2: SOLID185 Homogeneous Structural Solid Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 989) lists output available
via ETABLE using the Sequence Number method. See Element Table for Variables Identified By Sequence
SOLID185
for more information. The following notation is used in Table 2: SOLID185 Homogeneous Structural Solid
Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 989):
Name
output quantity as defined in the Table 1: SOLID185 Homogeneous Structural Solid Element Output
Definitions (p. 987)
Item
I,J,...,P
Table 2 SOLID185 Homogeneous Structural Solid Item and Sequence Numbers

ity
Name
P1 SMISC 2 1 4 3 - - - -
P2 SMISC 5 6 - - 8 7 - -
P3 SMISC - 9 10 - - 12 11 -
P4 SMISC - - 13 14 - - 16 15
P5 SMISC 18 - - 17 19 - - 20
P6 SMISC - - - - 21 22 23 24
SOLID185 Homogeneous Structural Solid Assumptions and Restrictions

• Zero-volume elements are not allowed.
• Elements may be numbered either as shown in Figure 1 (p. 984) or may have the planes IJKL and
MNOP interchanged. The element may not be twisted such that the element has two separate
volumes (which occurs most frequently when the elements are not numbered properly).
• All elements must have eight nodes. You can form a prism-shaped element by defining duplicate
K and L and duplicate O and P node numbers. (See Degenerated Shape Elements (p. 39).) Pyramid
and tetrahedral shapes are also available.
• For the degenerated shape elements where the B or enhanced strain formulations are specified,
degenerated shape functions and a conventional integration scheme are used.
• If you use the mixed formulation (KEYOPT(6) = 1), the damped eigensolver is not supported. You
must use the sparse solver (default).
• For modal cyclic symmetry analyses, ANSYS recommends using enhanced strain formulation.
This element has a layered option (KEYOPT(3) = 1). See "SOLID185 Layered Structural Solid Assumptions
and Restrictions" (p. 997) for additional information.
SOLID185
SOLID185 Homogeneous Structural Solid Product Restrictions

None.
SOLID185 Layered Structural Solid Element Description

Use SOLID185 Layered Solid to model layered thick shells or solids. The layered section definition is
given by ANSYS section (SECxxx) commands. A prism degeneration option is also available.
Figure 3 SOLID185 Layered Structural Solid Geometry
TOP 4
P zo
5 O z yo y
6
x
M 3 xo
N
M N O,P
L
I K,L
K
2 J
Z 1 (Prism Option)
I
Y J BOTTOM
X
xo = Element x-axis if ESYS is not supplied.
SOLID185 Layered Structural Solid Input Data

by eight nodes. A prism-shaped element may be formed by defining the same node numbers for nodes
K and L, and O and P.
In addition to the nodes, the element input data includes the anisotropic material properties. Anisotropic
material directions correspond to the layer coordinate directions which are based on the element co-
ordinate system. The element coordinate system follows the shell convention where the z axis is normal
to the surface of the shell. The nodal ordering must follow the convention that I-J-K-L and M-N-O-P
element faces represent the bottom and top shell surfaces, respectively. You can change the orientation
within the plane of the layers via the ESYS command in the same way that you would for shell elements
(as described in Coordinate Systems (p. 56)). To achieve the correct nodal ordering for a volume mapped
(hexahedron) mesh, you can use the VEORIENT command to specify the desired volume orientation
before executing the VMESH command. Alternatively, you can use the EORIENT command after auto-
SOLID185
matic meshing to reorient the elements to be in line with the orientation of another element, or to be
as parallel as possible to a defined ESYS axis.
Layered Section Definition Using Section Commands
You can associate SOLID185 Layered Solid with a shell section (SECTYPE). The layered composite spe-
cifications (including layer thickness, material, orientation, and number of integration points through
the thickness of the layer) are specified via shell section (SECxxx) commands. You can use the shell
section commands even with a single-layered element. ANSYS obtains the actual layer thicknesses used
for element calculations by scaling the input layer thickness so that they are consistent with the thickness
between the nodes. A section can be partially defined using data from a FiberSIM .xml file.
each layer. Two points are located on the top and bottom surfaces respectively and the remaining
points are distributed equal distance between the two points. The element requires at least two points
through the entire thickness. When no shell section definition is provided, the element is treated as
single-layered and uses two integration points through the thickness.
SOLID185 Layered Solid does not support real constant input for defining layer sections.
Other Input
parametric direction of the element at the center of the element and is shown as xo in Figure 3 (p. 990).
The default first surface direction S1 can be reoriented in the element reference plane (as shown in
Figure 3 (p. 990)) via the ESYS command. You can further rotate S1 by angle THETA (in degrees) for each
layer via the SECDATA command to create layer-wise coordinate systems. See Coordinate Systems (p. 56)
for details.
If you specify no element body load for defining temperatures--that is, if you define temperatures with
commands other than BFE--SOLID185 Layered Solid adopts an element-wise temperature pattern and
requires only eight temperatures for the eight element corner nodes. The node I temperature T(I) defaults
to TUNIF. If all other temperatures are unspecified, they default to T(I). `For any other input temperature
pattern, unspecified nodal temperatures default to TUNIF. ANSYS computes all layer interface temper-
atures by interpolating nodal temperatures.
Alternatively, you can input temperatures as element body loads at the corners of the outside faces of
the element and at the corners of the interfaces between layers. In such a case, the element uses a
layer-wise pattern. Temperatures T1, T2, T3, T4 are used for the bottom of layer 1, temperatures T5, T6,
T7, T8 are used for interface corners between layers 1 and 2, and so on between successive layers,
ending with temperatures at the top layer NLayer. If you input exactly NLayer+1 temperatures, one
temperature is used for the four bottom corners of each layer, and the last temperature is used for the
four top corner temperatures of the top layer. The first corner temperature T1 defaults to TUNIF. If all
other corner temperatures are unspecified, they default to T1. For any other input pattern, unspecified
temperatures default to TUNIF.
SOLID185
The effects of pressure load stiffness are automatically included for this element. If an unsymmetrical
The following table summarizes the element input. Element Input (p. 43) provides a general description
of element input.
SOLID185 Layered Structural Solid Input Summary

Nodes
I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, UZ
Real Constants
None
Material Properties
Surface Loads
Pressures --

Body Loads
Temperatures --
T1, T2, T3, T4 at bottom of layer 1; T5, T6, T7, T8 between layers 1-2; similarly for between successive
layers, ending with temperatures at top of layer NLayer (4 * (NLayer + 1) maximum)
Special Features
Birth and death

Creep
Elasticity
Hyperelasticity
Large deflection
Large strain
Linear perturbation
Plasticity
Stress stiffening
SOLID185
Viscoelasticity
KEYOPT(2)
Element technology:
2 --
3 --
Simplified enhanced strain formulation (default)
KEYOPT(3)
Layer construction:
0 --
Structural Solid (not applicable to SOLID185 Layered Solid)
1 --
Layered Solid
KEYOPT(6)
0 --
1 --
KEYOPT(8)
Layer data storage:
0 --
Store data for bottom of bottom layer and top of top layer (default)
1 --
Store top and bottom data for all layers. (The volume of data may be considerable.)
SOLID185 Layered Structural Solid Element Technology

SOLID185 Homogeneous Structural Solid uses enhanced strain formulation or simplified enhanced strain
formulation.
When enhanced strain formulation (KEYOPT(2) = 2) is selected, the element introduces nine internal
(user-inaccessible) degrees of freedom to handle shear locking, and four internal degrees of freedom
to handle volumetric locking.
SOLID185 Layered Structural Solid Output Data


• Additional element output as shown in Table 3: SOLID185 Layered Structural Solid Element Output
SOLID185
Several items are illustrated in Figure 4 (p. 994). See Filling the Element Table for Variables Identified By
Sequence Number in the Basic Analysis Guide and The Item and Sequence Number Table (p. 52) in this
document for more information.
Figure 4 SOLID185 Layered Structural Solid Stress Output
Stresses are in Layer

Coordinate System
SY
P
SX SX(TOP
SX(BOT)
O
M
Reference Plane
N
K x'
I θ x
J
Element and Layer Coordinate Systems shown for KEYOPT(4) = 0*
x - Element Coordinate System
x' - Layer Coordinate System with θ > 0
*Note: Layer Coordinate System x-y plane is parallel to the reference plane (KREF)
Stress directions shown are for global directions.
available.
Table 3 SOLID185 Layered Structural Solid Element Output Definitions

Name Definition O R
SOLID185
Name Definition O R
VOLU: Volume - Y
J, K, O, N; P4 at K, L, P, O; P5 at L, I, M, P; P6 at M,
N, O, P
TEMP T1, T2, T3, T4 at bottom of layer 1; T5, T6, T7, T8 - Y
between layers 1-2; similarly for between successive
layers, ending with temperatures at top of layer NL
(4 * (NL + 1) maximum)
XZ
XZ
XZ
XZ
XZ
EPCR)
ing)
PLASTIC, CREEP
ILSXZ SXZ interlaminar shear stress - 9
ILSYZ SYZ interlaminar shear stress - 9
SOLID185
Name Definition O R
ILSUM Magnitude of the interlaminar shear stress vector - 8,
9
ILANG Angle of interlaminar shear stress vector (measured - 9
in degrees)
EPPL.
σ = (σ xz )2 + ( σ yz )2
8. The components are combined as il and the largest value of σil is output as the
maximum interlaminar shear stress.
9. Available only if a valid shell section (SECTYPE,,SHELL) is defined for the element.
Table 4: SOLID185 Layered Structural Solid Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 996) lists output available via
ETABLE using the Sequence Number method. See Element Table for Variables Identified By Sequence
for more information. The following notation is used in Table 4: SOLID185 Layered Structural Solid Item
and Sequence Numbers (p. 996):
Name
output quantity as defined in Table 3: SOLID185 Layered Structural Solid Element Output Defini-
tions (p. 994)
Item
I,J,...,P
Table 4 SOLID185 Layered Structural Solid Item and Sequence Numbers

ity
Name
P1 SMISC 2 1 4 3 - - - -
P2 SMISC 5 6 - - 8 7 - -
P3 SMISC - 9 10 - - 12 11 -
SOLID185

ity
Name
P4 SMISC - - 13 14 - - 16 15
P5 SMISC 18 - - 17 19 - - 20
P6 SMISC - - - - 21 22 23 24
Quant- Item Bottom of Layer i Top of Layer NL
ity
Name
ILSXZ SMISC 8 * (i - 1) + 41 8 * (NL - 1) + 42
ILSYZ SMISC 8 * (i - 1) + 43 8 * (NL - 1) + 44
ILSUM SMISC 8 * (i - 1) + 45 8 * (NL - 1) + 46
ILANG SMISC 8 * (i - 1) + 47 8 * (NL - 1) + 48
SOLID185 Layered Structural Solid Assumptions and Restrictions

K and L and duplicate O and P node numbers. (See Degenerated Shape Elements (p. 39).)
• If you use the mixed formulation (KEYOPT(6) = 1), the damped eigensolver is not supported. You
must use the sparse solver (default).
• Stress stiffening is always included in geometrically nonlinear analyses (NLGEOM,ON). It is ignored
in geometrically linear analyses (NLGEOM,OFF). Prestress effects can be activated via the PSTRES
command.
• If the material of a layer is hyperelastic, the layer orientation angle has no effect.
SOLID185 Layered Structural Solid Product Restrictions

SOLID186

SOLID186 is a higher order 3-D 20-node solid element that exhibits quadratic displacement behavior.
The element is defined by 20 nodes having three degrees of freedom per node: translations in the
nodal x, y, and z directions. The element supports plasticity, hyperelasticity, creep, stress stiffening, large
deflection, and large strain capabilities. It also has mixed formulation capability for simulating deform-
ations of nearly incompressible elastoplastic materials, and fully incompressible hyperelastic materials.
• Homogenous Structural Solid (KEYOPT(3) = 0, the default) -- See "SOLID186 Homogenous Structural Solid
Element Description " (p. 999).
• Layered Structural Solid (KEYOPT(3) = 1) -- See "SOLID186 Layered Structural Solid Element Descrip-
tion" (p. 1006).
A lower-order version of the SOLID186 element is SOLID185.
SOLID186 Homogenous Structural Solid Element Description

SOLID186 Homogenous Structural Solid is well suited to modeling irregular meshes (such as those
produced by various CAD/CAM systems). The element may have any spatial orientation.
Various printout options are available. See SOLID186 in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for more
details.
SOLID186
Figure 1 SOLID186 Homogenous Structural Solid Geometry
M,N,O,P,U,V,W,X
Y A,B
Z
K,L,S
I T R
5 P 4 Q J
W
X Tetrahedral Option
O
6 M,N,O,P,U,V,W,X
M
B V A
Y B Z
U
N T
A K
L S
Y 2 3 I
R
L S Q J
T Z Pyramid Option
K X
I O,P,W
Z M
R
Q 1 U V A,B
J Y N
Y Z
I K,L,S
X T
Q R
J
Prism Option
SOLID186 Homogenous Structural Solid Input Data

The geometry, node locations, and the element coordinate system for this element are shown in Figure
1 (p. 1000). A prism-shaped element may be formed by defining the same node numbers for nodes K, L,
and S; nodes A and B; and nodes O, P, and W. A tetrahedral-shaped element and a pyramid-shaped
element may also be formed as shown in Figure 1 (p. 1000). SOLID187 is a similar, but 10-node tetrahedron
element.
orientation is as described in Coordinate Systems (p. 56).
ordinate system.
SOLID186
of element input.
SOLID186 Homogenous Structural Solid Input Summary

Nodes
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, UZ
Real Constants
None
Material Properties
EX, EY, EZ, ALPX, ALPY, ALPZ (or CTEX, CTEY, CTEZ or THSX,THSY, THSZ),
PRXY, PRYZ, PRXZ (or NUXY, NUYZ, NUXZ),
Surface Loads
Pressures --

Body Loads
Temperatures --
T(I), T(J),T(K), T(L), T(M), T(N), T(O), T(P), T(Q), T(R), T(S), T(T), T(U), T(V), T(W), T(X), T(Y), T(Z), T(A), T(B)
Special Features
Birth and death

Elasticity
Hyperelasticity
Large deflection
Large strain
Linear perturbation
Plasticity
Stress stiffening
SOLID186
Viscoelasticity
KEYOPT(2)
Element technology:
0 --
Uniform reduced integration (default)
1 --
Full integration
KEYOPT(3)
Layer construction:
0 --
Homogenous Structural Solid (default) -- nonlayered
1 --
Layered Structural Solid (not applicable to SOLID186 Homogenous Structural Solid)
KEYOPT(6)
0 --
1 --
SOLID186 Homogenous Structural Solid Element Technology

SOLID186 uses the uniform reduced integration method or the full integration method, as follows:
• Uniform reduced integration method
Helps to prevent volumetric mesh locking in nearly incompressible cases. However, hourglass mode
might propagate in the model if there are not at least two layers of elements in each direction.
• Full integration
The full integration method does not cause hourglass mode, but can cause volumetric locking in
nearly incompressible cases. This method is used primarily for purely linear analyses, or when the
model has only one layer of elements in each direction.
SOLID186 Homogenous Structural Solid Output Data


• Additional element output as shown in Table 1: SOLID186 Homogenous Structural Solid Element
Output Definitions (p. 1003)
SOLID186
Figure 2 SOLID186 Homogenous Structural Solid Stress Output
5 P 4
W
X
O
SZ 6
M V y
B
y
U N x
A
Y 2 SY 3
L SX
S
x Z
T K
I
Z R
Q 1
J
Y Surface Coordinate System
X
available.
Table 1 SOLID186 Homogenous Structural Solid Element Output Definitions

Name Definition O R
EL Element number and name - Y
VOLU: Volume - Y
J, K, O, N; P4 at K, L, P, O; P5 at L, I, M, P; P6 at M,
N, O, P
SOLID186
Name Definition O R
XZ
EPEL:EQV Equivalent elastic strains [6] Y Y
XZ
XZ
XZ
XZ
EPCR)
ing)
SEND:ELASTIC, Strain energy density - 1
PLASTIC, CREEP
2. Output only if element has a thermal load
EPPL.
Table 2: SOLID186 Homogenous Structural Solid Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 1005) lists output available
through ETABLE using the Sequence Number method. See The General Postprocessor (POST1) in the
Basic Analysis Guide and The Item and Sequence Number Table (p. 52) in this document for more inform-
SOLID186
ation. The following notation is used in Table 2: SOLID186 Homogenous Structural Solid Item and Sequence
Numbers (p. 1005):
Name
output quantity as defined in Table 1: SOLID186 Homogenous Structural Solid Element Output Defini-
tions (p. 1003)
Item
I,J,...,B
sequence number for data at nodes I, J, ..., B
Table 2 SOLID186 Homogenous Structural Solid Item and Sequence Numbers

Quant- Item I J K L M N O P Q,...,B
ity
Name
P1 SMISC 2 1 4 3 - - - - -
P2 SMISC 5 6 - - 8 7 - - -
P3 SMISC - 9 10 - - 12 11 - -
P4 SMISC - - 13 14 - - 16 15 -
P5 SMISC 18 - - 17 19 - - 20 -
P6 SMISC - - - - 21 22 23 24 -
SOLID186 Homogenous Structural Solid Assumptions and Restrictions

• The element must not have a zero volume. Also, the element may not be twisted such that the
element has two separate volumes (which occurs most frequently when the element is not numbered
properly). Elements may be numbered either as shown in Figure 1 (p. 1000) or may have the planes
IJKL and MNOP interchanged.
parabolically, along that edge. See Quadratic Elements (Midside Nodes) in the Modeling and Meshing
Guide for more information on the use of midside nodes.
• Use at least two elements in each direction to avoid hourglass mode if uniform reduced integration
is used (KEYOPT(2) = 0).
• When degenerated into a tetrahedron, wedge, or pyramid element shape (see Degenerated Shape
Elements (p. 39)), the corresponding degenerated shape functions are used. Degeneration to a
pyramidal form should be used with caution. The element sizes, when degenerated, should be
small to minimize the stress gradients. Pyramid elements are best used as filler elements or in
meshing transition zones.
• For mixed formulation (KEYOPT(6) = 1), no midside nodes can be missed, and no degenerated
shapes are recommended. If you use the mixed formulation, you must use the sparse solver (default).
This element has a layered option (KEYOPT(3) = 1). See "SOLID186 Layered Structural Solid Assumptions
SOLID186
SOLID186 Homogenous Structural Solid Product Restrictions

ANSYS Professional
• The only special feature allowed is stress stiffening.
SOLID186 Layered Structural Solid Element Description

Use SOLID186 Layered Structural Solid to model layered thick shells or solids. The layered section
definition is given by ANSYS section (SECxxx) commands. A prism degeneration option is also available.
Figure 3 SOLID186 Layered Structural Solid Geometry
TOP
P W 4 zo
X
5 O z yo
6 y
M V
x
U B N xo
3 X
A M O,P,W
Y U NV
L A,B
Y
Z Z
S T
T I K,L,S
2 K
Z I Q R
R 1 J
Q (Prism Option)
Y J BOTTOM
X
SOLID186 Layered Structural Solid Input Data

and S; nodes A and B; and nodes O, P, and W.
SOLID186
You can associate SOLID186 Layered Structural Solid with a shell section (SECTYPE). The layered com-
posite specifications (including layer thickness, material, orientation, and number of integration points
through the thickness of the layer) are specified via shell section (SECxxx) commands. You can use the
shell section commands even with a single-layered element. ANSYS obtains the actual layer thicknesses
used for element calculations by scaling the input layer thickness so that they are consistent with the
thickness between the nodes. A section can be partially defined using data from a FiberSIM .xml file.
SOLID186 Layered Structural Solid does not support real constant input for defining layer sections.
Other Input
for details.
If you specify no element body load for defining temperatures--that is, if you define temperatures with
commands other than BFE--SOLID186 Layered Structural Solid adopts an element-wise temperature
pattern and requires only eight temperatures for the eight element corner nodes. The node I temperature
T(I) defaults to TUNIF. If all other temperatures are unspecified, they default to T(I). If all corner node
temperatures are specified, each midside node temperature defaults to the average temperature of its
adjacent corner nodes. For any other input temperature pattern, unspecified nodal temperatures default
to TUNIF. ANSYS computes all layer interface temperatures by interpolating nodal temperatures.
ending with temperatures at the top layer NLayer. If you input exactly NLayer+1 temperatures, one
temperature is used for the four bottom corners of each layer, and the last temperature is used for the
four top corner temperatures of the top layer. The first corner temperature T1 defaults to TUNIF. If all
SOLID186
other corner temperatures are unspecified, they default to T1. For any other input pattern, unspecified
temperatures default to TUNIF.
As described in Coordinate Systems (p. 56), you can use the ESYS command to orient the material
properties and strain/stress output. Use RSYS to choose output that follows the material coordinate
system or the global coordinate system. For the case of hyperelastic materials, the output of stress and
strain is always with respect to the global Cartesian coordinate system rather than the material/element
coordinate system.
KEYOPT(6) = 1 sets the element for using u-P mixed formulation. For details about the use of mixed
formulation, see Applications of Mixed u-P Formulations (p. 67) in the Element Reference.
of element input.
SOLID186 Layered Structural Solid Input Summary

Nodes
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, UZ
Real Constants
None
Material Properties
Surface Loads

Body Loads
Temperatures --
T1, T2, T3, T4 at bottom of layer 1; T5, T6, T7, T8 between layers 1-2; similarly for between successive
layers, ending with temperatures at top of layer NLayer (4 * (NLayer + 1) maximum)
Special Features
Birth and death

Creep
Elasticity
SOLID186

Hyperelasticity
Large deflection
Large strain
Linear perturbation
Plasticity
Stress stiffening
Viscoelasticity
KEYOPT(2)
Element technology:
0 --
KEYOPT(3)
Layer construction:
0 --
Homogenous Structural Solid (not applicable to SOLID186 Layered Structural Solid)
1 --
Layered Structural Solid
KEYOPT(6)
0 --
1 --
KEYOPT(8)
Layer data storage:
0 --
Store data for bottom of bottom layer and top of top layer
1 --
Store top and bottom data for all layers. (The volume of data may be excessive.)
SOLID186 Layered Structural Solid Element Technology

SOLID186 Layered Structural Solid supports only the uniform reduced integration method (KEYOPT(2)
= 0), which helps to prevent volumetric mesh locking in nearly incompressible cases. However, hourglass
mode might propagate in the model if there are not at least two layers of elements in each direction.
SOLID186 Layered Structural Solid Output Data


• Additional element output as shown in Table 3: SOLID186 Layered Structural Solid Element Output
SOLID186
Figure 4 SOLID186 Layered Structural Solid Stress Output
Stresses are in Layer

Coordinate System
SY
SX
SX(TOP)
SX (BOT)
Reference Plane
x'
θ
x
Element and Layer Coordinate Systems

x = Element coordinate system
x' = Layer coordinate system with θ > 0
The element stress directions are parallel to the layer coordinate system. A general description of solution
available.
Table 3 SOLID186 Layered Structural Solid Element Output Definitions

Name Definition O R
VOLU: Volume - Y
O, P
SOLID186
Name Definition O R
XZ
EPEL:EQV Equivalent elastic strains [6] Y Y
XZ
XZ
XZ
XZ
EPCR)
ing)
SEND:ELASTIC, Strain energy density - 1
PLASTIC, CREEP
ILSUM Interlaminar shear stress vector sum - 8
in degrees)
SOLID186

EPPL.
Table 4: SOLID186 Layered Structural Solid Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 1012) lists output available via
ETABLE using the Sequence Number method. See The General Postprocessor (POST1) in the Basic
Analysis Guide and The Item and Sequence Number Table (p. 52) in this document for more information.
The following notation is used in Table 4: SOLID186 Layered Structural Solid Item and Sequence Num-
bers (p. 1012):
Name
output quantity as defined in Table 3: SOLID186 Layered Structural Solid Element Output Defini-
tions (p. 1010)
Item
I,J,...,B
Table 4 SOLID186 Layered Structural Solid Item and Sequence Numbers

ity
Name
P1 SMISC 2 1 4 3 - - - - -
P2 SMISC 5 6 - - 8 7 - - -
P3 SMISC - 9 10 - - 12 11 - -
P4 SMISC - - 13 14 - - 16 15 -
P5 SMISC 18 - - 17 19 - - 20 -
P6 SMISC - - - - 21 22 23 24 -
ity
Name
ILSXZ SMISC 8 * (i - 1) + 41 8 * (NL - 1) + 42
ILSYZ SMISC 8 * (i - 1) + 43 8 * (NL - 1) + 44
ILSUM SMISC 8 * (i - 1) + 45 8 * (NL - 1) + 46
ILANG SMISC 8 * (i - 1) + 47 8 * (NL - 1) + 48
SOLID186
SOLID186 Layered Structural Solid Assumptions and Restrictions

element has two separate volumes (which occurs most frequently when the element is not numbered
properly). Elements may be numbered either as shown in Figure 3 (p. 1006) or may have the planes
• Use at least two elements in each direction to avoid hourglass mode.
• When degenerated into a wedge element shape (see Degenerated Shape Elements (p. 39)), the
corresponding degenerated shape functions are used. The element sizes, when degenerated, should
be small to minimize the stress gradients.
• For mixed formulation (KEYOPT(6) = 1), no midside nodes can be missed, and no degenerated
shapes are recommended. If you use the mixed formulation, you must use the sparse solver (default).
command.
SOLID186 Layered Structural Solid Product Restrictions

ANSYS Professional
SOLID187

SOLID187 element is a higher order 3-D, 10-node element. SOLID187 has a quadratic displacement be-
havior and is well suited to modeling irregular meshes (such as those produced from various CAD/CAM
systems).
The element is defined by 10 nodes having three degrees of freedom at each node: translations in the
nodal x, y, and z directions. The element has plasticity, hyperelasticity, creep, stress stiffening, large
deflection, and large strain capabilities. It also has mixed formulation capability for simulating deform-
ations of nearly incompressible elastoplastic materials, and fully incompressible hyperelastic materials.
4
R
P
Q 3
Y 2
O K
X I N
M
Z
1
J
SOLID187 Input Data

In addition to the nodes, the element input data includes the orthotropic or anisotropic material prop-
erties. Orthotropic and anisotropic material directions correspond to the element coordinate directions.
The element coordinate system orientation is as described in Linear Material Properties in the Material
Reference.
SOLID187
ordinate system.
KEYOPT(6) = 1 or 2 sets the element for using mixed formulation. For details on the use of mixed for-
mulation, see Applications of Mixed u-P Formulations (p. 67) in the Element Reference.
see the INISTATE command, and also Initial Stress Loading in the Basic Analysis Guide.
input.

Nodes
I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P, Q, R
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, UZ
Real Constants
None
Material Properties
Surface Loads
Pressures --
Body Loads
Temperatures --
Special Features
Birth and death

Elasticity
Hyperelasticity
Large deflection
Large strain
Linear perturbation
SOLID187
Plasticity
Stress stiffening
Viscoelasticity
KEYOPT(6)
0 --
1 --
Use mixed formulation, hydrostatic pressure is constant in an element (recommended for hyperelastic
materials)
2 --
Use mixed formulation, hydrostatic pressure is interpolated linearly in an element (recommended
for nearly incompressible elastoplastic materials)


coordinate system. The surface stress outputs are in the surface coordinate system and are available
for any face (KEYOPT(6)). The coordinate system for face JIK is shown in Figure 2 (p. 1017). The other surface
coordinate systems follow similar orientations as indicated by the pressure face node description. Surface
stress printout is valid only if the conditions described in Element Solution (p. 51) are met. A general
description of solution output is given in The Item and Sequence Number Table (p. 52). See the Basic
Analysis Guide for ways to view results.
SY
R
P
Y SX
Q
SZ O K
X
I x y N
Z
M
Surface Coordinate System
J
SOLID187
available.

Name Definition O R
VOLU: Volume - Y
PRES Pressures P1 at nodes J, I, K; P2 at I, J, L; P3 at J, K, - Y
L; P4 at K, I, L
XZ
XZ
EPTH: EQV Equivalent thermal strains [6] 1 1
XZ
XZ
XZ
EPCR)
ing)
SOLID187
Name Definition O R
SEND: ELASTIC, Strain energy density - 1
PLASTIC, CREEP
EPPL.
Table 2: SOLID187 Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 1019) lists output available through ETABLE using the
used in Table 2: SOLID187 Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 1019):
Name
Item
I,J,...,R
sequence number for data at nodes I, J, ..., R

Quantity Item I J K L M,...,R
Name
P1 SMISC 2 1 3 - -
P2 SMISC 4 5 - 6 -
P3 SMISC - 7 8 9 -
P4 SMISC 11 - 10 12 -

• Elements may be numbered either as shown in Figure 1 (p. 1015) or may have node L below the I, J,
K plane.
SOLID187
Guide for information about using midside nodes.
• When mixed formulation is used (KEYOPT(6) = 1 or 2), no midside nodes can be missed.
• If you use the mixed formulation (KEYOPT(6) = 1 or 2), the damped eigensolver is not supported.
You must use the sparse solver (default).

ANSYS Professional
BEAM188
3-D 2-Node Beam

BEAM188 is suitable for analyzing slender to moderately stubby/thick beam structures. The element is
based on Timoshenko beam theory which includes shear-deformation effects. The element provides
options for unrestrained warping and restrained warping of cross-sections.
The element is a linear, quadratic, or cubic two-node beam element in 3-D. BEAM188 has six or seven
degrees of freedom at each node. These include translations in the x, y, and z directions and rotations
about the x, y, and z directions. A seventh degree of freedom (warping magnitude) is optional. This
element is well-suited for linear, large rotation, and/or large strain nonlinear applications.
The element includes stress stiffness terms, by default, in any analysis with large deflection. The provided
stress-stiffness terms enable the elements to analyze flexural, lateral, and torsional stability problems
(using eigenvalue buckling, or collapse studies with arc length methods or nonlinear stabilization).
Elasticity, plasticity, creep and other nonlinear material models are supported. A cross-section associated
with this element type can be a built-up section referencing more than one material.
z
1
4 K
2
I 3
y
Y 188
x
X
Z J 5
BEAM188 Element Technology and Usage Recommendations

BEAM188 is based on Timoshenko beam theory, which is a first-order shear-deformation theory: trans-
verse-shear strain is constant through the cross-section (that is, cross-sections remain plane and undis-
torted after deformation).
The element can be used for slender or stout beams. Due to the limitations of first-order shear-deform-
ation theory, slender to moderately thick beams can be analyzed. Use the slenderness ratio of a beam
structure (GAL2 / (EI) ) to judge the applicability of the element, where:
G
Shear modulus
BEAM188
A
Area of the cross-section
L
Length of the member (not the element length)
EI
Flexural rigidity
Calculate the ratio using some global distance measures, rather than basing it upon individual element
dimensions. The following illustration shows an estimate of transverse-shear deformation in a cantilever
beam subjected to a tip load. Although the results cannot be extrapolated to any other application,
the example serves well as a general guideline. A slenderness ratio greater than 30 is recommended.
Figure 2 Transverse-Shear Deformation Estimation
L P
Slenderness Ratio δ Timoshenko / δ Euler-

(GAL2/(EI)) Bernoulli
25 1.120
50 1.060
100 1.030
1000 1.003
The element supports an elastic relationship between transverse-shear forces and transverse-shear
strains. You can override default values of transverse-shear stiffnesses via the SECCONTROLS command.
BEAM188 does not use higher-order theories to account for variation in distribution of shear stresses.
Use solid elements if such effects must be considered.
BEAM188 supports “restrained warping” analysis by making available a seventh degree of freedom at
each beam node. By default, BEAM188 elements assume that the warping of a cross-section is small
enough that it can be neglected (KEYOPT(1) = 0). You can activate the warping degree of freedom by
using KEYOPT(1) = 1. With the warping degree of freedom activated, each node has seven degrees of
freedom: UX, UY, UZ, ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ, and WARP. With KEYOPT(1) = 1, bimoment and bicurvature
are output.
When KEYOPT(3) = 0 (linear, default), BEAM188 is based on linear shape functions. It uses one point of
integration along the length; therefore, all element solution quantities are constant along the length.
For example, when SMISC quantities are requested at nodes I and J, the centroidal values are reported
for both end nodes. This option is recommended if the element is used as stiffener and it is necessary
to maintain compatibility with a first-order shell element (such as SHELL181). Only constant bending
moments can be represented exactly with this option. Mesh refinement is generally required in typical
applications.
BEAM188
When KEYOPT(3) = 2 (quadratic), BEAM188 has an internal node in the interpolation scheme, effectively
making this a beam element based on quadratic shape functions. Two points of integration are used,
resulting in linear variation of element solution quantities along the length. Linearly varying bending
moments are represented exactly.
When KEYOPT(3) = 3 (cubic), BEAM188 has two internal nodes and adopts cubic shape functions.
Quadratically varying bending moments are represented exactly. Three points of integration along the
length are used, resulting in quadratic variation of element solution quantities along the length. Unlike
typical cubic (Hermitian) formulations, cubic interpolation is used for all displacements and rotations.
Quadratic and cubic options are recommended when higher-order element interpolations are desired
in situations where:
• The element is associated with tapered cross-sections.

• Nonuniform loads (including tapered distributed loads) exist within the element; in this case, the
cubic option gives superior results over the quadratic option.
(For partially distributed loads and non-nodal point loads, only the cubic option is valid.)
• The element may undergo highly nonuniform deformation (for example, when individual frame
members in civil engineering structures are modeled with single elements).
In practice, when two elements with “restrained warping” come together at a sharp angle, you need
to couple the displacements and rotations, but leave the out-of-plane warping decoupled. This is normally
accomplished by having two nodes at a physical location and using appropriate constraints. This process
is made easier (or automated) by the ENDRELEASE command, which decouples the out-of plane
warping for any adjacent elements with cross-sections intersecting at an angle greater than 20 degrees.
BEAM188 allows change in cross-sectional inertia properties as a function of axial elongation. By default,
the cross-sectional area changes such that the volume of the element is preserved after deformation.
The default is suitable for elastoplastic applications. By using KEYOPT(2), you can choose to keep the
cross-section constant or rigid. Scaling is not an option for nonlinear general beam sections (SEC-
TYPE,,GENB).
Two limitations are associated with the quadratic and cubic options in BEAM188:
• Although the elements employ higher-order interpolations, the initial geometry of BEAM188 is
treated as straight.
• Because the internal nodes are inaccessible, no boundary/loading/initial conditions are allowed on
these internal nodes.
As a result of the limitations associated with the quadratic and cubic options, you will notice discrepancies
in the results between BEAM189 and the quadratic option of BEAM188 if the midside nodes of the
BEAM189 model have specified boundary/loading/initial conditions and/or the midside nodes are not
located exactly at the element midpoint. Similarly, the cubic option of BEAM188 may not be identical
to a traditional cubic (Hermitian) beam element.
For the mass matrix and evaluation of consistent load vectors, a higher order integration rule than that
used for stiffness matrix is employed. The elements support both consistent and lumped mass matrices.
Use LUMPM,ON to activate lumped mass matrix. Consistent mass matrix is used by default. An added
mass per unit length can be input with the ADDMAS section controls. See "BEAM188 Input Sum-
mary" (p. 1027).
BEAM188
The St. Venant warping functions for torsional behavior are determined in the undeformed state, and
are used to define shear strain even after yielding. No options are available for recalculating in deformed
configuration the torsional shear distribution on cross-sections during the analysis and possible partial
plastic yielding of cross-sections. As such, large inelastic deformation due to torsional loading should
be treated and verified with caution. Under such circumstances, alternative modeling using solid or
shell elements is recommended.
BEAM188 Input Data

The geometry, node locations, coordinate system, and pressure directions for this element are shown
in Figure 1 (p. 1021). BEAM188 is defined by nodes I and J in the global coordinate system.
Node K is a preferred way to define the orientation of the element. For information about orientation
nodes and beam meshing, see Generating a Beam Mesh With Orientation Nodes in the Modeling and
Meshing Guide. See the LMESH and LATT command descriptions for details on generating the K node
automatically.
BEAM188 can also be defined without the orientation node K. In this case, the element x-axis is oriented
from node I (end 1) toward node J (end 2). If no orientation node is used, the default orientation of the
element y-axis is automatically calculated to be parallel to the global X-Y plane. For the case where the
element is parallel to the global Z-axis (or within a 0.01 percent slope of it), the element y-axis is oriented
parallel to the global Y-axis (as shown). To control the element orientation about the element x-axis,
use the orientation-node option. If both are defined, the orientation-node option takes precedence.
The orientation node K, if used, defines a plane (with I and J) containing the element x and z-axes (as
shown). If using this element in a large-deflection analysis, be aware that the location of the orientation
node K is used only to initially orient the element.
The number of degrees of freedom depends on the value of KEYOPT(1). When KEYOPT(1) = 0 (the default),
six degrees of freedom occur at each node. These include translations in the x, y, and z directions and
rotations about the x, y, and z directions. When KEYOPT(1) = 1, a seventh degree of freedom (warping
magnitude) is also considered.
The beam element is a one-dimensional line element in space. The cross-section details are provided
separately via the SECTYPE and SECDATA commands. (See Beam Analysis and cross-sections in the
Structural Analysis Guide for details). A section is associated with the beam elements by specifying the
section ID number (SECNUM). A section number is an independent element attribute. In addition to a
constant cross-section, you can also define a tapered cross-section by using the TAPER option on the
SECTYPE command (see Defining a Tapered Beam).
BEAM188 ignores any real constant data. See the SECCONTROLS command for defining the transverse-
shear stiffness and added mass.
A summary of the element input is given in "BEAM188 Input Summary" (p. 1027).
BEAM188 Cross-Sections
BEAM188 can be associated with these cross-section types:
• Standard library section types or user meshes which define the geometry of the beam cross-section
(SECTYPE,,BEAM). The material of the beam is defined either as an element attribute (MAT), or as part
of section buildup (for multi-material cross-sections).
BEAM188
• Generalized beam cross-sections (SECTYPE,,GENB), where the relationships of generalized stresses to

generalized strains are input directly.
• Tapered beam cross-sections (SECTYPE,,TAPER), where a standard library section or user mesh defines
each end of the beam.
Standard Library Sections
BEAM188 elements are provided with section-relevant quantities (area of integration, position, etc.)
automatically at a number of section points using SECTYPE and SECDATA. Each section is assumed to
be an assembly of a predetermined number of nine-node cells. Each cross-section cell has four integration
points and each can be associated with an independent material type.
Figure 3 Cross-Section Cells
+ + + + + +
+ + + +
+ + + + + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + +
+
+
+ + + +
+
+
+ + + + + +
+ + + +
+ + + + + +
(a) Rectangular section (b) Channel section
Section Nodes
Section Corner Nodes
+ Section Integration Points
The number of cells in the cross-sections influences the accuracy of section properties and ability to
model nonlinear stress-strain relationship through the cross-section. The element has a nested structure
of integration (along the length and in the cross-section).
When the material associated with the elements has inelastic behavior or when the temperature varies
across the section, constitutive calculations are performed at the section integration points. For more
common elastic applications, the element uses precalculated properties of the section at the element
integration points; however, the stresses and strains are calculated in the output pass at the section
integration points. Element output is available at the integration points, as well as values extrapolated
to the element and section nodes.
If the section is assigned the subtype ASEC, only the generalized stresses and strains (axial force,
bending moments, transverse shears, curvatures, and shear strains) are available for output. 3-D contour
plots and deformed shapes are not available. The ASEC subtype is displayed only as a thin rectangle to
verify beam orientation.
BEAM188
BEAM188 is helpful for analyzing built-up beams (that is, those fabricated of two or more pieces of
material joined together to form a single, solid beam). The pieces are assumed to be perfectly bonded
together; therefore, the beam behaves as a single member.
The multi-material cross-section capability is applicable only where the assumptions of a beam behavior
(Timoshenko or Bernoulli-Euler beam theory) holds.
In other words, what is supported is a simple extension of a conventional Timoshenko beam theory. It
can be used in applications such as:
• Bimetallic strips
• Beams with metallic reinforcement
• Sensors where layers of a different material has been deposited
BEAM188 does not account for coupling of bending and twisting at the section stiffness level. The
transverse shears are also treated in an uncoupled manner. This can have a significant effect on layered
composite and sandwich beams if the lay-up is unbalanced.
Always validate the application of BEAM188, either with experiments or other numerical analysis. Use
the restrained warping option with built-up sections after due verification.
KEYOPT(15) specifies the format of the .rst results file. For KEYOPT(15) = 0, the format gives only one
averaged result at each section corner node; therefore, this option typically applies to homogeneous
sections. For KEYOPT(15) = 1, the format gives one result for each section integration point; therefore,
this option typically applies to built-up sections with multiple materials (and generates a larger results
file).
Generalized Beam Cross-Sections
When using nonlinear general beam sections, neither the geometric properties nor the material is ex-
plicitly specified. Generalized stress implies the axial force, bending moments, torque, and transverse-
shear forces. Similarly, generalized strain implies the axial strain, bending curvatures, twisting curvature,
and transverse-shear strains. (For more information, see nonlinear general beam sections.) This is an
abstract method for representing cross-section behavior; therefore, input often consists of experimental
data or the results of other analyses.
Generally, BEAM188 supports an elastic relationship between transverse-shear forces and transverse-
shear strains. You can override default values of transverse-shear stiffnesses via the SECCONTROLS
command.
When the beam element is associated with a generalized beam (SECTYPE,,GENB) cross-section type,
the relationship of transverse-shear force to the transverse-shear strain can be nonlinear elastic or plastic,
an especially useful capability when flexible spot welds are modeled. In such a case, the SECCONTROLS
command does not apply.
Tapered Beam Cross-Sections
A linearly tapered beam is defined by specifying a standard library section or user mesh at each end
of the beam. The section geometries are specified at global coordinates, then linear interpolated and
evaluated at the element. The sections at the end points must be topologically identical. (For more in-
formation, see Defining a Tapered Beam.)
BEAM188
BEAM188 Loads
Forces are applied at the nodes (which also define the element x-axis). If the centroidal axis is not colinear
with the element x-axis, applied axial forces will cause bending. Applied shear forces cause torsional
strains and moment if the centroid and shear center of the cross-section are different. The nodes should
therefore be located at the desired points where you want to apply the forces. Use the OFFSETY and
OFFSETZ arguments of the SECOFFSET command appropriately. By default, the program uses the
centroid as the reference axis for the beam elements.
Element loads are described in Nodal Loading (p. 49). Pressures can be input as surface loads on the
element faces as shown by the circled numbers in Figure 1 (p. 1021). Positive normal pressures act into
the element. Lateral pressures are input as force per unit length. End "pressures" are input as forces.
At both ends of the element, temperatures can be input at these locations:
• At the element x-axis (T(0,0))

• At one unit from the x-axis in the element y-direction (T(1,0))
• At one unit from the x-axis in the element z-direction (T(0,1))
Element locations (T(y,z)) are given according to the convention used in Figure 1 (p. 1021).
For beam elements, element body load commands (BFE) accept an element number and a list of values,
1 through 6 for temperatures TI(0,0), TI(1,0), TI(0,1), TJ(0,0), TJ(1,0), and TJ(0,1). This input can be used to
specify temperature gradients that vary linearly both over the cross section and along the length of the
element.
The following defaults apply to element temperature input:
• If all temperatures after the first are unspecified, they default to the first. This pattern applies a
uniform temperature over the entire element. (The first coordinate temperature, if unspecified,
defaults to TUNIF.)
• If all three temperatures at node I are input, and all temperatures at node J are unspecified, the
node J temperatures default to the corresponding node I temperatures. This pattern applies a
temperature gradient that varies linearly over the cross section but remains constant along the
length of the element.
• For any other input pattern, unspecified temperatures default to TUNIF.
Alternatively, temperatures at nodes I and J can be defined using nodal body loads (BF,NODE,TEMP,VAL1).
When using a nodal body load to define a temperature, a uniform temperature is applied over the cross
section at the specified node.

Nodes
I, J, K (K, the orientation node, is optional but recommended)
BEAM188
Degrees of Freedom

UX, UY, UZ, ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ, WARP if KEYOPT(1) = 1
Section Controls
TXZ, TXY, ADDMAS (See SECCONTROLS)

(TXZ and TXY default to A*GXZ and A*GXY, respectively, where A = cross-sectional area)
Material Properties
EX, (PRXY,or NUXY), GXY, GXZ
ALPX, (or CTEX, or THSX)
DENS, ALPD, BETD

Surface Loads
Pressure --
face 1 (I-J) (-z normal direction)

face 2 (I-J) (-y normal direction)
face 3 (I-J) (+x tangential direction)
face 4 (I) (+x axial direction)
face 5 (J) (-x axial direction)
---
I and J denote the end nodes.
Use a negative value for loading in the opposite direction.
Issue the SFBEAM command to specify surface loads.
For faces 1, 2, and 3, offsets apply only if you are using the cubic option (KEYOPT(3) = 3).
Body Loads
Temperatures --
T(0,0), T(1,0), T(0,1) at each end node
Special Features
Birth and death (requires KEYOPT(11) = 1)

Generalized cross-section
Initial state
Large deflection
Large strain
Linear perturbation
Plasticity
Stress stiffening
Viscoelasticity
KEYOPT(1)
Warping degree of freedom:
BEAM188
0 --
Six degrees of freedom per node, unrestrained warping (default)
1 --
Seven degrees of freedom per node (including warping). Bimoment and bicurvature are output.
KEYOPT(2)
Cross-section scaling, applies only if NLGEOM,ON has been invoked:
0 --
Cross-section is scaled as a function of axial stretch (default)
1 --
Section is assumed to be rigid (classical beam theory)
KEYOPT(3)
Shape functions along the length:
0 --
Linear (default)
2 --
Quadratic
3 --
Cubic
KEYOPT(4)
Shear stress output:
0 --
Output only torsion-related shear stresses (default)
1 --
Output only flexure-related transverse-shear stresses
2 --
Output a combined state of the previous two types
KEYOPT(6), KEYOPT(7), and KEYOPT(9)
active only when OUTPR,ESOL is active:
KEYOPT(6)
Output control for section forces/moments and strains/curvatures:
0 --
Output section forces/moments and strains/curvatures at integration points along the length (default)
1 --
Same as KEYOPT(6) = 0 plus current section area
2 --
Same as KEYOPT(6) = 1 plus element basis directions (X,Y,Z)
3 --
Output section forces/moments and strains/curvatures extrapolated to the element nodes
KEYOPT(7)
Output control at integration points (not available when section subtype = ASEC):
0 --
None (default)
BEAM188
1 --
Maximum and minimum stresses/strains
2 --
Same as KEYOPT(7) = 1 plus stresses and strains at each section point
KEYOPT(9)
Output control for values extrapolated to the element and section nodes (not available when section
subtype = ASEC):
0 --
None (default)
1 --
2 --
Same as KEYOPT(9) = 1 plus stresses and strains along the exterior boundary of the cross-section
3 --
Same as KEYOPT(9) = 1 plus stresses and strains at all section nodes
KEYOPT(11)
Set section properties:
0 --
Automatically determine if preintegrated section properties can be used (default)
1 --
Use numerical integration of section
KEYOPT(12)
Tapered section treatment:
0 --
Linear tapered section analysis; cross-section properties are evaluated at each Gauss point (default).
This is more accurate, but computationally intensive.
1 --
Average cross-section analysis; for elements with tapered sections, cross-section properties are
evaluated at the centroid only. This is an approximation of the order of the mesh size; however, it
is faster.
KEYOPT(15)
Results file format:
0 --
Store averaged results at each section corner node (default).
1 --
Store non-averaged results at each section integration point. (The volume of data may be excessive.
This option is typically useful for built-up sections with multiple materials only.)
BEAM188 Output Data

The solution output associated with these elements is in two forms:
• Nodal displacements and reactions included in the overall nodal solution

• Additional element output as described in Table 1: BEAM188 Element Output Definitions (p. 1032)
BEAM188
To view 3-D deformed shapes for BEAM188, issue an OUTRES,MISC or OUTRES,ALL command for static
or transient analyses. To view 3-D mode shapes for a modal or eigenvalue buckling analysis, you must
expand the modes with element results calculation active (via the MXPAND command's Elcalc = YES
option).
Linearized Stress
It is customary in beam design to employ components of axial stress that contribute to axial loads and
bending in each direction separately; therefore, BEAM188 provides a linearized stress output as part of
its SMISC output record, as indicated in the following definitions:
SDIR is the stress component due to axial load.
SDIR = Fx/A, where Fx is the axial load (SMISC quantities 1 and 14) and A is the area of the cross-section.
SByT and SByB are bending-stress components.
SByT = -Mz * ymax / Izz

SByB = -Mz * ymin / Izz
SBzT = Mz * zmax / Iyy
SBzB = Mz * zmin / Iyy
where My, Mz are bending moments in the beam coordinate system (SMISC quantities 2,15,3,16), as
shown in Figure 1 (p. 1021). Coordinates ymax, ymin, zmax, and zmin are the maximum and minimum y, z
coordinates in the cross-section measured from the centroid. Values Iyy and Izz are moments of inertia
of the cross-section. Except for the ASEC type of beam cross-section, the program uses the maximum
and minimum cross-section dimensions. For the ASEC type of cross-section, the maximum and minimum
in each of y and y direction is assumed to be +0.5 to -0.5, respectively.
Corresponding definitions for the component strains are:
EPELDIR = Ex
EPELByT = -Kz * ymax
EPELByB = -Kz * ymin
EPELBzT = Kz * zmax
EPELBzB = Kz * zmin
where Ex, Ky, and Kz are generalized strains and curvatures (SMISC quantities 7,8,9, 20,21 and 22).
The reported stresses are strictly valid only for elastic behavior of members. BEAM188 always employs
combined stresses in order to support nonlinear material behavior. When the elements are associated
with nonlinear materials, the component stresses can at best be regarded as linearized approximations
and should be interpreted with caution.
When using KEYOPT(7) with the cubic option (KEYOPT(3) = 3), the integration point at the middle of
the element is reported last in the integration-point printout.
BEAM188
available.

Name Definition O R
NODES Element connectivity Y Y
C.G.:X, Y, Z Element center of gravity Y 1
Area Area of cross-section 2 Y
SF:y, z Section shear forces 2 Y
SE:y, z Section shear strains 2 Y
S:xx, xy, xz Section point stresses 3 Y
EPEL:xx, xy, xz Elastic strains 3 Y
EPTO:xx, xy, xz Section point total mechanical strains (EPEL + 3 Y
EPPL + EPCR)
EPTT:xx, xy, xz Section point total strains (EPEL + EPPL + EP- 3 Y
CR+EPTH)
EPPL:xx, xy, xz Section point plastic strains 3 Y
EPCR:xx, xy, xz Section point creep strains 3 Y
EPTH:xx Section point thermal strains 3 Y
NL:SRAT Plastic yielding (1 = actively yielding, 0 = not - 5
yielding)
PLASTIC, CREEP
TQ Torsional moment Y Y
TE Torsional strain Y Y
Ky, Kz Curvature Y Y
Ex Axial strain Y Y
Fx Axial force Y Y
My, Mz Bending moments Y Y
BM Warping bimoment 4 4
BK Warping bicurvature 4 4
SDIR Axial direct stress - 2
SByT Bending stress on the element +Y side of the - Y
beam
BEAM188
Name Definition O R
SByB Bending stress on the element -Y side of the - Y
beam
SBzT Bending stress on the element +Z side of the - Y
beam
SBzB Bending stress on the element -Z side of the - Y
beam
EPELDIR Axial strain at the end - Y
EPELByT Bending strain on the element +Y side of the - Y
beam.
EPELByB Bending strain on the element -Y side of the - Y
beam.
EPELBzT Bending strain on the element +Z side of the - Y
beam.
EPELBzB Bending strain on the element -Z side of the - Y
beam.
TEMP Temperatures at all section corner nodes. - Y

2. See KEYOPT(6) description.
3. See KEYOPT(7) and KEYOPT(9) descriptions.
5. Available if the element has a nonlinear material.
6. Available only if OUTRES,LOCI command is used.
More output is described via the PRESOL and *GET,,SECR commands in POST1.
Table 2: BEAM188 Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 1034) lists output available via ETABLE using the Sequence
Number method. See Creating an Element Table in the Basic Analysis Guide and The Item and Sequence
Number Table (p. 52) in this manual for more information. Table 2: BEAM188 Item and Sequence Num-
bers (p. 1034) uses the following notation:
Name
Item
BEAM188
I,J
Table 2 BEAM188 Item and Sequence Numbers

Name Item I J
Fx SMISC 1 14
My SMISC 2 15
Mz SMISC 3 16
TQ SMISC 4 17
SFz SMISC 5 18
SFy SMISC 6 19
Ex SMISC 7 20
Ky SMISC 8 21
Kz SMISC 9 22
TE SMISC 10 23
SEz SMISC 11 24
SEy SMISC 12 25
Area SMISC 13 26
BM SMISC 27 29
BK SMISC 28 30
SDIR SMISC 31 36
SByT SMISC 32 37
SByB SMISC 33 38
SBzT SMISC 34 39
SBzB SMISC 35 40
EPELDIR SMISC 41 46
EPELByT SMISC 42 47
EPELByB SMISC 43 48
EPELBzT SMISC 44 49
EPELBzB SMISC 45 50
TEMP SMISC 51-53 54-56
S:xx, xy, xz LS CI[1], DI[2] CJ[1], DJ[2]
EPEL:xx, xy, xz LEPEL CI[1], DI[2] CJ[1], DJ[2]
EPTH:xx LEPTH AI[3], BI[4] AJ[3], BJ[4]
EPPL:xx, xy, xz LEPPL CI[1], DI[2] CJ[1], DJ[2]
EPCR:xx, xy, xz LEPCR CI[1], DI[2] CJ[1], DJ[2]
EPTO:xx, xy, xz LEPTO CI[1], DI[2] CJ[1], DJ[2]
EPTT:xx, xy, xz LEPTT CI[1], DI[2] CJ[1], DJ[2]
BEAM188
1. CI and CJ are the sequence numbers for accessing the averaged line element solution
quantities (LS, LEPEL, LEPPL, LEPCR, LEPTO, and LEPTT) at RST section nodes (section
corner nodes where results are available), at element Node I and J respectively. CI and
CJ are applicable only when KEYOPT(15) = 0. For a given section corner node nn, CI
and CJ are given as follows:
CI = (nn - 1) * 3+ COMP
CJ = (nnMax + nn - 1) * 3+ COMP
Where nnMax is the total number of RST section nodes, and COMP is the stress
or strain component (1 - xx, 2 - xy, 3 - xz). Locations of RST section nodes can be
visualized with SECPLOT,,6.
2. DI and DJ are the sequence numbers for accessing the non-averaged line element
solution quantities (LS, LEPEL, LEPPL, LEPCR, LEPTO, and LEPTT) at RST section integration
points (section integration points where results are available), at element Node I and
J respectively. DI and DJ are applicable only when KEYOPT(15) = 1. For the ith integration
point (i = 1, 2, 3, or 4) in section cell nc, DI and DJ are given as follows:
DI = (nc - 1) * 12 + (i - 1) * 3 + COMP
DJ = (ncMax + nc - 1) * 12 + (i - 1) * 3 + COMP
Where ncMax is the total number of RST section cells, and COMP is the stress or
strain component (1 - xx, 2 - xy, 3 - xz). Locations of RST section cells can be visu-
alized with SECPLOT,,7.
3. AI and AJ are the sequence numbers for accessing the averaged line element thermal
strain quantities LEPTH at RST section nodes (section corner nodes where results are
available), at element Node I and J respectively. AI and AJ are applicable only when
KEYOPT(15) = 0. For a given section corner node nn, AI and AJ are given as follows:
AI = nn
AJ = nnMax + nn
Where nnMax is the total number of RST section nodes. Locations of RST section
nodes can be visualized with SECPLOT,,6.
4. BI and BJ are the sequence numbers for accessing the non-averaged line element
thermal strain quantities LEPTH at RST section integration points (section integration
points where results are available), at element Node I and J respectively. BI and BJ are
applicable only when KEYOPT(15) = 1. For the ith integration point (i = 1, 2, 3, or 4) in
section cell nc, BI and BJ are given as follows:
BI = (nc - 1) * 4 + i
BJ = (ncMax + nc - 1) * 4 + i
Where ncMax is the total number of RST section cells. Locations of RST section
cells can be visualized with SECPLOT,,7.
BEAM188
Transverse-Shear Stress Output

The BEAM188 formulation is based on three stress components:
• one axial
• two shear stress
The shear stresses are caused by torsional and transverse loads. BEAM188 is based on first-order shear-
deformation theory, also popularly known as Timoshenko beam theory. The transverse-shear strain is
constant for the cross-section; therefore, the shear energy is based on a transverse-shear force. The
shear force is redistributed by predetermined shear-stress distribution coefficients across the beam
cross-section, and made available for output purposes. By default, the program outputs only the shear
stresses caused by torsional loading. Use KEYOPT(4) to activate output of shear stresses caused by
flexure or transverse loading.
The accuracy of transverse-shear distribution is directly proportional to the mesh density of cross-section
modeling (for determination of warping, shear center and other section geometric properties). The
traction-free state at the edges of a cross-section is met only in a well-refined model of the cross-section.
By default, the program uses a mesh density (for cross-section modeling) that provides accurate results
for torsional rigidity, warping rigidity, inertia properties, and shear-center determination. The default
mesh employed is also appropriate for nonlinear material calculations; however, more refined cross-
section models may be necessary if the shear stress distribution due to transverse loads must be captured
very accurately. Increasing cross-section mesh size does not imply larger computational cost if the asso-
ciated material is linear. Use the SECTYPE and SECDATA commands to adjust cross-section mesh
density.
The transverse-shear distribution calculation ignores the effects of Poisson's ratio. The Poisson's ratio
affects the shear-correction factor and shear-stress distribution slightly, and this effect is ignored.

• The beam must not have zero length.
• By default (KEYOPT(1) = 0), the effect of warping restraint is assumed to be negligible.
• Cross-section failure or folding is not accounted for.
• Rotational degrees of freedom are not included in the lumped mass matrix if offsets are present.
• The element works best with the full Newton-Raphson solution scheme (that is, the default choice
in solution control).
• Only moderately "thick" beams can be analyzed. See "BEAM188 Element Technology and Usage Re-
commendations" (p. 1021) for more information.
• When the element is associated with nonlinear general beam sections (SECTYPE,,GENB), additional
restrictions apply. For more information, see Considerations for Using Nonlinear General Beam
Sections.
• For a random vibration (PSD) analysis, equivalent stress is not calculated.
BEAM188

ANSYS Professional
BEAM189
3-D 3-Node Beam

The BEAM189 element is suitable for analyzing slender to moderately stubby/thick beam structures.
The element is based on Timoshenko beam theory which includes shear-deformation effects. The element
provides options for unrestrained warping and restrained warping of cross-sections.
The element is a quadratic three-node beam element in 3-D. With default settings, six degrees of freedom
occur at each node; these include translations in the x, y, and z directions and rotations about the x, y,
and z directions. An optional seventh degree of freedom (warping magnitude) is available. The element
is well-suited for linear, large rotation, and/or large-strain nonlinear applications.
The element includes stress stiffness terms, by default, in any analysis with NLGEOM,ON. The provided
stress-stiffness terms enable the elements to analyze flexural, lateral, and torsional stability problems
(using eigenvalue buckling, or collapse studies with arc length methods or nonlinear stabilization).
Elasticity, plasticity, creep and other nonlinear material models are supported. A cross-section associated
with this element type can be a built-up section referencing more than one material.
z
1
4 L
2
I 3
y
Y 189
K
x
X
Z J 5
BEAM189 Element Technology and Usage Recommendations

BEAM189 is based on Timoshenko beam theory, which is a first-order shear-deformation theory: trans-
verse-shear strain is constant through the cross-section; that is, cross-sections remain plane and undis-
torted after deformation.
The element can be used for slender or stout beams. Due to the limitations of first-order shear-deform-
ation theory, slender to moderately thick beams can be analyzed. Use the slenderness ratio of a beam
structure (GAL2/(EI)) to judge the applicability of the element, where:
G
Shear modulus
BEAM189
A
L
EI
Flexural rigidity
Calculate the ratio using some global distance measures, rather than basing it upon individual element
dimensions. The following illustration shows an estimate of transverse-shear deformation in a cantilever
beam subjected to a tip load. Although the results cannot be extrapolated to any other application,
the example serves well as a general guideline. A slenderness ratio greater than 30 is recommended.
Figure 2 Transverse-Shear Deformation Estimation
L P

25 1.120
50 1.060
100 1.030
1000 1.003
These elements support an elastic relationship between transverse-shear forces and transverse-shear
strains. You can override default values of transverse-shear stiffnesses using the SECCONTROLS command.
BEAM189 does not use higher-order theories to account for variation in distribution of shear stresses.
Use solid elements if such effects must be considered.
BEAM189 supports “restrained warping” analysis by making available a seventh degree of freedom at
each beam node. By default, BEAM189 elements assume that the warping of a cross-section is small
enough that it may be neglected (KEYOPT(1) = 0). You can activate the warping degree of freedom by
using KEYOPT(1) = 1. With the warping degree of freedom activated, each node has seven degrees of
freedom: UX, UY, UZ, ROTX, ROTZ, ROTY, and WARP. With KEYOPT(1) = 1, bimoment and bicurvature
are output.
Unlike other cubic (Hermitian) polynomial-based elements, BEAM189 is based on quadratic polynomials;
therefore, offsets in specification of distributed pressure loads are not allowed.BEAM189 has linear
bending-moment variation. Refinement of the mesh is recommended in order to accommodate such
loading. BEAM189 is computationally efficient and has super-convergence properties with respect to
mesh refinement. For example, the quadratic beam with a two point Gaussian integration is known to
be of same accuracy as a Hermitian element.
In practice, when two elements with "restrained warping" come together at a sharp angle, you need to
couple the displacements and rotations, but leave the out-of-plane warping decoupled. This is normally
BEAM189
accomplished by having two nodes at a physical location and using appropriate constraints. This process
is made easier (or automated) by the ENDRELEASE command, which decouples the out-of plane
warping for any adjacent elements with cross-sections intersecting at an angle greater than 20 degrees.
BEAM189 allows change in cross-sectional inertia properties as a function of axial elongation. By default,
the cross-sectional area changes such that the volume of the element is preserved after deformation.
The default is suitable for elastoplastic applications. By using KEYOPT(2), you can choose to keep the
cross-section constant or rigid. Scaling is not an option for nonlinear general beam sections (SEC-
TYPE,,GENB).
For the mass matrix and evaluation of consistent load vectors, a higher order integration rule than that
used for stiffness matrix is employed. The elements support both consistent and lumped mass matrices.
Avoid using LUMPM,ON as BEAM189 is a higher-order element. Consistent mass matrix is used by default.
An added mass per unit length may be input with the ADDMAS section controls. See "BEAM189 Input
Summary" (p. 1045).
The St. Venant warping functions for torsional behavior are determined in the undeformed state, and
are used to define shear strain even after yielding. No options are available for recalculating in deformed
configuration the torsional shear distribution on cross-sections during the analysis and possible partial
plastic yielding of cross-sections. As such, large inelastic deformation due to torsional loading should
be treated and verified with caution. Under such circumstances, alternative modeling using solid or
shell elements is recommended.
BEAM189 Input Data

in Figure 1 (p. 1039). BEAM189 is defined by nodes I, J, and K in the global coordinate system.
Node L is a preferred way to define the orientation of the element. For information about orientation
Meshing Guide. Also, see Quadratic Elements (Midside Nodes) in the same manual for the use of midside
nodes. See the LMESH and LATT command descriptions for details on generating the L node automat-
ically. For a description of the low-order beam, see BEAM188.
The element can also be defined without the orientation node L. In this case, the element x-axis is ori-
ented from node I (end 1) toward node J (end 2). When no orientation node is used, the default orient-
ation of the element y-axis is automatically calculated to be parallel to the global X-Y plane. For the
case where the element is parallel to the global Z-axis (or within a 0.01 percent slope of it), the element
y-axis is oriented parallel to the global Y-axis (as shown). For user control of the element orientation
about the element x-axis, use the L node option. If both are defined, the orientation node option takes
precedence. The orientation node L, if used, defines a plane (with I and J) containing the element x and
z-axes (as shown). If using this element in a large-deflection analysis, be aware that the location of the
orientation node L is used only to initially orient the element.
The number of degrees of freedom depends on the value of KEYOPT(1). When KEYOPT(1) = 0 (the default),
six degrees of freedom occur at each node. These include translations in the x, y, and z directions and
rotations about the x, y, and z directions. When KEYOPT(1) = 1, a seventh degree of freedom (warping
magnitude) is also considered.
The element is a one-dimensional line element in space. The cross-section details are provided separately
via the SECTYPE and SECDATA commands. (See Beam Analysis and Cross-Sections in the Structural
Analysis Guide for details.) A section is associated with the beam elements by specifying the section ID
BEAM189
number (SECNUM). A section number is an independent attribute. In addition to a constant cross-section,

you can also define a tapered cross-section by using the TAPER option on the SECTYPE command. (For
more information, see Defining a Tapered Beam.)
BEAM189 ignores any real constant data beginning with Release 6.0. See SECCONTROLS command for
defining the transverse-shear stiffness, and added mass.
A summary of the element input follows in "BEAM189 Input Summary" (p. 1045).
BEAM189 Cross-Sections
BEAM189 can be associated with these cross-section types:
• Standard library section types or user meshes which define the geometry of the beam cross-section
(SECTYPE,,BEAM). The material of the beam is defined either as an element attribute (MAT), or as part
of section buildup (for multi-material cross-sections).
• Generalized beam cross-sections (SECTYPE,,GENB), where the relationships of generalized stresses to
generalized strains are input directly.
• Tapered beam cross-sections (SECTYPE,,TAPER), where a standard library section or user mesh defines
each end of the beam.
Standard Library Sections
BEAM189 is provided with section-relevant quantities (area of integration, position, etc.) automatically
at a number of section points using SECTYPE and SECDATA. Each section is assumed to be an assembly
of a predetermined number of nine-node cells. Each cross-section cell has four integration points and
each can be associated with an independent material type.
Figure 3 Cross-Section Cells
+ + + + + +
+ + + +
+ + + + + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + +
+
+
+ + + +
+
+
+ + + + + +
+ + + +
+ + + + + +
(a) Rectangular section (b) Channel section
Section Nodes
BEAM189
The number of cells in the cross-sections influences the accuracy of section properties and ability to
model nonlinear stress-strain relationship through the cross-section. The element has a nested structure
of integration (along the length and in the cross-section).
When the material associated with the elements has inelastic behavior or when the temperature varies
across the section, constitutive calculations are performed at the section integration points. For more
common elastic applications, the element uses precalculated properties of the section at the element
integration points. However, the stresses and strains are calculated in the output pass at the section
nodes.
If the section is assigned the subtype ASEC, only the generalized stresses and strains (axial force,
bending moments, transverse shears, curvatures, and shear strains) are available for output. 3-D contour
plots and deformed shapes are not available. The ASEC subtype is displayed only as a thin rectangle to
verify beam orientation. BEAM189 treats ASEC as a section type with just one cross-section integration
point.
BEAM189 is helpful for analyzing built-up beams, (that is, those fabricated of two or more pieces of
material joined together to form a single, solid beam). The pieces are assumed to be perfectly bonded
together; therefore, the beam behaves as a single member.
The multi-material cross-section capability is applicable only where the assumptions of a beam behavior
(Timoshenko or Bernoulli-Euler beam theory) holds.
In other words, what is supported is a simple extension of a conventional Timoshenko beam theory. It
may be used in applications such as:
• bimetallic strips
• beams with metallic reinforcement
• sensors where layers of a different material has been deposited
BEAM189 does not account for coupling of bending and twisting at the section stiffness level. The
transverse shears are also treated in an uncoupled manner. This may have a significant effect on layered
composite and sandwich beams if the lay-up is unbalanced.
Always validate the application of BEAM189, either with experiments or other numerical analysis. Use
the restrained warping option with built-up sections after due verification.
KEYOPT(15) specifies the format of the .rst results file. For KEYOPT(15) = 0, the format gives only one
averaged result at each section corner node; therefore, this option typically applies to homogeneous
sections. For KEYOPT(15) = 1, the format gives one result for each section integration point; therefore,
this option typically applies to built-up sections with multiple materials (and generates a larger results
file).
Generalized Beam Cross-Sections
When using nonlinear general beam sections, neither the geometric properties nor the material is ex-
plicitly specified. Generalized stress implies the axial force, bending moments, torque, and transverse-
shear forces. Similarly, generalized strain implies the axial strain, bending curvatures, twisting curvature,
and transverse-shear strains. (For more information, see nonlinear general beam sections.) This is an
abstract method for representing cross-section behavior; therefore, input often consists of experimental
data or the results of other analyses.
BEAM189
Generally, BEAM189 supports an elastic relationship between transverse-shear forces and transverse-
shear strains. You can override default values of transverse-shear stiffnesses via the SECCONTROLS
command.
When the beam element is associated with a generalized beam (SECTYPE,,GENB) cross-section type,
the relationship of transverse-shear force to the transverse-shear strain can be nonlinear elastic or plastic,
an especially useful capability when flexible spot welds are modeled. In such a case, the SECCONTROLS
command does not apply.
Tapered Beam Cross-Sections
A linearly tapered beam is defined by specifying a standard library section or user mesh at each end
of the beam The section geometries are specified at global coordinates, then linear interpolated and
evaluated at the element. The sections at the end points must be topologically identical. (For more in-
formation, see Defining a Tapered Beam.)
BEAM189 Loads
Forces are applied at the nodes (which also define the element x-axis). If the centroidal axis is not colinear
with the element x-axis, applied axial forces will cause bending. Applied shear forces will cause torsional
strains and moment if the centroid and shear center of the cross-section are different. The nodes should
therefore be located at the points where you want to apply the forces. Use the OFFSETY and OFFSETZ
arguments of the SECOFFSET command appropriately.
element faces as shown by the circled numbers on Figure 1 (p. 1039). Positive normal pressures act into
the element. Lateral pressures are input as force per unit length. End "pressures" are input as forces.
At both ends of the element, temperatures can be input at these locations:

• At one unit from the x-axis in the element y-direction (T(1,0))
• At one unit from the x-axis in the element z-direction (T(0,1))
Element locations (T(y,z)) are given according to the convention used in Figure 1 (p. 1039).
For beam elements, element body load commands (BFE) accept an element number and a list of values,
element.
defaults to TUNIF.)
BEAM189
When using a nodal body load to define a temperature, a uniform temperature is applied over the cross
section at the specified node. (BF command input is not accepted at node K.)

Nodes
I, J, K, L (the orientation node L is optional but recommended)
Degrees of Freedom

UX, UY, UZ, ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ, WARP if KEYOPT(1) = 1
Section Controls
TXZ, TXY, ADDMAS (see SECCONTROLS)

(TXZ and TXY default to A*GXZ and A*GXY, respectively, where A = cross-sectional area)
Material Properties
EX, (PRXY,or NUXY), GXY, GXZ
ALPX, (or CTEX, or THSX)
DENS, ALPD, BETD

Surface Loads
Pressure --

---
I and J denote the end nodes.
Issue the SFBEAM command to specify surface loads.
Distributed pressure offsets are not available for faces 1, 2, and 3.
Body Loads
Temperatures --
T(0,0), T(1,0), T(0,1) at each end node
Special Features

BEAM189
Initial state
Large deflection
Large strain
Linear perturbation
Plasticity
Stress stiffening
Viscoelasticity
KEYOPT(1)
Warping degree of freedom:
0 --
Six degrees of freedom per node, unrestrained warping (default)
1 --
Seven degrees of freedom per node (including warping). Bimoment and bicurvature are output.
KEYOPT(2)
Cross-section scaling:
0 --
Cross-section is scaled as a function of axial stretch (default); applies only if NLGEOM,ON has been
invoked
1 --
Section is assumed to be rigid (classical beam theory)
KEYOPT(4)
0 --
Output only torsion-related shear stresses (default)
1 --
2 --
Output a combined state of the previous two types.
KEYOPT(6), KEYOPT(7), and KEYOPT(9)
Active only when OUTPR,ESOL is active:
KEYOPT(6)
0 --
Output section forces/moments and strains/curvatures at integration points along the length (default)
1 --
2 --
3 --
Output section forces/moments and strains/curvatures extrapolated to the element nodes
BEAM189
KEYOPT(7)
Output control at section integration point (not available when section subtype = ASEC):
0 --
None (default)
1 --
2 --
Same as KEYOPT(7) = 1 plus stresses and strains at each section point
KEYOPT(9)
Output control for values extrapolated to the element and section nodes (not available when section
subtype = ASEC):
0 --
None (default)
1 --
2 --
3 --
KEYOPT(11)
Set section properties:
0 --
Automatically determine if preintegrated section properties can be used (default)
1 --
Use numerical integration of section
KEYOPT(12)
Tapered section treatment:
0 --
Linear tapered section analysis; cross-section properties are evaluated at each Gauss point (default).
This is more accurate, but computationally intensive.
1 --
Average cross-section analysis; for elements with tapered sections, cross-section properties are
evaluated at the centroid only. This is an approximation of the order of the mesh size; however, it
is faster.
KEYOPT(15)
0 --
1 --
Store non-averaged results at each section integration point. (The volume of data may be excessive.
This option is typically useful for built-up sections with multiple materials only.)
BEAM189
BEAM189 Output Data


• Additional element output as described in Table 1: BEAM189 Element Output Definitions (p. 1049)
To view 3-D deformed shapes for BEAM189, issue an OUTRES,MISC or OUTRES,ALL command for static
or transient analyses. To view 3-D mode shapes for a modal or eigenvalue buckling analysis, you must
expand the modes with element results calculation active (via the MXPAND command's Elcalc = YES
option).
Linearized Stress
It is customary in beam design to employ components of axial stress that contribute to axial loads and
bending in each direction separately; therefore, BEAM189 provides a linearized stress output as part of
SByT and SByB are bending stress components.

SBzT = My * zmax / Iyy
SBzB = My * zmin / Iyy
where My, Mz are bending moments (SMISC quantities 2,15,3,16). Coordinates ymax, ymin, zmax, and zmin
are the maximum and minimum y, z coordinates in the cross-section measured from the centroid. Values
Iyy and Izz are moments of inertia of the cross-section. Except for the ASEC type of beam cross-section,
the program uses the maximum and minimum cross-section dimensions. For the ASEC type of cross-
section, the maximum and minimum in each of y and z direction is assumed to be +0.5 to -0.5, respect-
ively.
EPELDIR = Ex
EPELBYT = -Kz * ymax
EPELBYB = -Kz * ymin
EPELBZT = Ky * zmax
EPELBZB = Ky * zmin
The reported stresses are strictly valid only for elastic behavior of members. BEAM189 always employs
with nonlinear materials, the component stresses may at best be regarded as linearized approximations
BEAM189
available.

Name Definition O R
C.G.:X, Y, Z Element center of gravity Y Y
SF:y, z Section shear forces 1 Y
SE:y, z Section shear strains 1 Y
S:xx, xy, xz Section point stresses 2 Y
EPEL:xx, xy, xz Elastic strains 2 Y
EPTO:xx, xy, xz Section point total mechanical strains (EPEL + 2 Y
EPPL + EPCR)
EPTT:xx, xy, xz Section point total strains (EPEL + EPPL + EPCR 2 Y
+ EPTH)
EPPL:xx, xy, xz Section point plastic strains 2 Y
EPCR:xx, xy, xz Section point creep strains 2 Y
EPTH:xx Section point thermal strains 2 Y
yielding)
PLASTIC, CREEP
Ex Axial strain Y Y
Fx Axial force Y Y
BM Warping bimoment 3 3
BEAM189
Name Definition O R
BK Warping bicurvature 3 3
beam
beam
beam
beam
beam.
beam.
beam.
beam.
TEMP Temperatures at all section corner nodes. - Y
1. See KEYOPT(6) description

2. See KEYOPT(7) and KEYOPT(9) descriptions
3. See KEYOPT(1) description
4. Available if the element has a nonlinear material.
5. Available only if OUTRES,LOCI command is used.
Table 2: BEAM 189 Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 1051) lists output available via ETABLE using the Sequence
Number Table (p. 52) in this manual for more information. Table 2: BEAM 189 Item and Sequence Num-
bers (p. 1051) uses the following notation:
Name
Item
BEAM189
I,J
Table 2 BEAM 189 Item and Sequence Numbers

Name Item I J
Fx SMISC 1 14
My SMISC 2 15
Mz SMISC 3 16
TQ SMISC 4 17
SFz SMISC 5 18
SFy SMISC 6 19
Ex SMISC 7 20
Ky SMISC 8 21
Kz SMISC 9 22
TE SMISC 10 23
SEz SMISC 11 24
SEy SMISC 12 25
Area SMISC 13 26
BM SMISC 27 29
BK SMISC 28 30
SDIR SMISC 31 36
SByT SMISC 32 37
SByB SMISC 33 38
SBzT SMISC 34 39
SBzB SMISC 35 40
EPELDIR SMISC 41 46
EPELByT SMISC 42 47
EPELByB SMISC 43 48
EPELBzT SMISC 44 49
EPELBzB SMISC 45 50
TEMP SMISC 51-53 54-56
S:xx, xy, xz LS CI[1], DI[2] CJ[1], DJ[2]
EPEL:xx,xz,xy LEPEL CI[1], DI[2] CJ[1], DJ[2]
EPTH:xx LEPTH AI[3], BI[4] AJ[3], BJ[4]
EPPL:xx,xz,xy LEPPL CI[1], DI[2] CJ[1], DJ[2]
EPCR:xx,xz,xy LEPCR CI[1], DI[2] CJ[1], DJ[2]
EPTO:xx, xy, xz LEPTO CI[1], DI[2] CJ[1], DJ[2]
EPTT:xx, xy, xz LEPTT CI[1], DI[2] CJ[1], DJ[2]
BEAM189
quantities (LS, LEPEL, LEPPL, LEPCR, LEPTO, and LEPTT) at RST section nodes (section
corner nodes where results are available), at element Node I and J respectively. CI and
CJ are applicable only when KEYOPT(15) = 0. For a given section corner node nn, CI
and CJ are given as follows:
CI = (nn - 1) * 3+ COMP
CJ = (nnMax + nn - 1) * 3 + COMP
or strain component (1 - xx, 2 - xy, 3 - xz). Locations of RST section nodes can be
visualized with SECPLOT,,6.
solution quantities (LS, LEPEL, LEPPL, LEPCR, LEPTO, and LEPTT) at RST section integration
points (section integration points where results are available), respectively at element
Node I and J. DI and DJ are applicable only when KEYOPT(15) = 1. For the ith integration
point (i = 1, 2, 3, or 4) in section cell nc, DI and DJ are given as follows:
DI = (nc - 1) * 12 + (i - 1) * 3 + COMP
DJ = (ncMax + nc - 1) * 12 + (i - 1) * 3 + COMP
strain component (1 - xx, 2 - xy, 3 - xz). Locations of RST section cells can be visu-
alized with SECPLOT,,7.
3. AI and AJ are the sequence numbers for accessing the averaged line element thermal
strain quantities LEPTH at RST section nodes (section corner nodes where results are
available), at element Node I and J respectively. AI and AJ are applicable only when
KEYOPT(15) = 0. For a given section corner node nn, AI and AJ are given as follows:
AI = nn
AJ = nnMax + nn
Where nnMax is the total number of RST section nodes. Locations of RST section
4. BI and BJ are the sequence numbers for accessing the non-averaged line element
thermal strain quantities LEPTH at RST section integration points (section integration
points where results are available), at element Node I and J respectively. BI and BJ are
applicable only when KEYOPT(15) = 1. For the ith integration point (i = 1, 2, 3, or 4) in
section cell nc, BI and BJ are given as follows:
BI = (nc - 1) * 4 + i
BJ = (ncMax + nc - 1) * 4 + i
Where ncMax is the total number of RST section cells. Locations of RST section
For more usage details, see Plot and Review the Section Results and Example Problem with Cantilever
Beams.
BEAM189

The BEAM189 formulation is based on three stress components:
• one axial
• two shear stress
The shear stresses are caused by torsional and transverse loads. BEAM189 is based on first-order shear-
constant for the cross-section; therefore, the shear energy is based on a transverse-shear force. The
shear force is redistributed by predetermined shear-stress distribution coefficients across the beam
cross-section, and made available for output purposes. By default, the program outputs only the shear
stresses caused by torsional loading. Use KEYOPT(4) to activate output of shear stresses caused by
The accuracy of transverse-shear distribution is directly proportional to the mesh density of cross-section
modeling (for determination of warping, shear center and other section geometric properties). The
traction-free state at the edges of a cross-section is met only in a well-refined model of the cross-section.
for torsional rigidity, warping rigidity, inertia properties, and shear-center determination. The default
very accurately. Increasing cross-section mesh size does not imply larger computational cost if the asso-
ciated material is linear. Use the SECTYPE and SECDATA commands to adjust cross-section mesh
density.

• The beam must not have zero length.
• By default (KEYOPT(1) = 0), the effect of warping restraint is assumed to be negligible.
• Cross-section failure or folding is not accounted for.
• Rotational degrees of freedom are not included in the lumped mass matrix if node-location offsets
are present.
• The element allows curved member definition and linear-bending-moment variation. However, if
a cubic representation for lateral displacement is necessary and the members are initially straight,
ANSYS, Inc. recommends using BEAM188 with the cubic option (KEYOPT(3) = 3).
• The element includes the effects of transverse shear and accounts for the initial curvature of the
beams.
• Only moderately "thick" beams can be analyzed. See the "BEAM189 Element Technology and Usage
Recommendations" (p. 1039) section for more information.
BEAM189
• When the element is associated with nonlinear general beam sections (SECTYPE,,GENB), additional
restrictions apply. For more information, see Considerations for Using Nonlinear General Beam
Sections.

ANSYS Professional
SOLSH190
3-D 8-Node Structural Solid Shell
SOLSH190 Element Description

SOLSH190 is used for simulating shell structures with a wide range of thickness (from thin to moderately
thick). The element possesses the continuum solid element topology and features eight-node connectivity
with three degrees of freedom at each node: translations in the nodal x, y, and z directions. Thus, con-
necting SOLSH190 with other continuum elements requires no extra efforts. A degenerate prism option
is available, but should only be used as filler elements in mesh generation. The element has plasticity,
hyperelasticity, stress stiffening, creep, large deflection, and large strain capabilities. It also has mixed
u-P formulation capability for simulating deformations of nearly incompressible elastoplastic materials,
and fully incompressible hyperelastic materials. The element formulation is based on logarithmic strain
and true stress measures.
You can use SOLSH190 for layered applications such as modeling laminated shells or sandwich construc-
tion. The layered section definition is given by section (SECxxx) commands. Accuracy in modeling
composite shells is governed by the first-order shear-deformation theory (also known as Mindlin-Reissner
shell theory).
See SOLSH190 in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for more details about this element.
Figure 1 SOLSH190 Geometry
P zo 4
5
z
O M O, P
L I K, L
y yo K N
x
6 xo
M
1 J
I N
Prism Option
Z
2 3
J
X Y
SOLSH190 Input Data

1 (p. 1055). The element is defined by eight nodes. The element coordinate system follows the shell
SOLSH190
convention where the z axis is normal to the surface of the shell. The node ordering must follow the
convention that the I-J-K-L and M-N-O-P element faces represent the bottom and top shell surfaces,
respectively. You can change the orientation within the plane of the layers via the ESYS command as
you would for shell elements (as described in Coordinate Systems (p. 56)). To achieve the correct nodal
ordering for a volume mapped (hexahedron) mesh, you can use the VEORIENT command to specify
the desired volume orientation before executing the VMESH command. Alternatively, you can use the
EORIENT command after automatic meshing to reorient the elements to be in line with the orientation
of another element, or to be as parallel as possible to a defined ESYS axis.
You can associate SOLSH190 with a shell section (SECTYPE). The layered composite specifications (in-
cluding layer thickness, material, orientation, and number of integration points through the thickness
of the layer) are specified via shell section (SECxxx) commands. You can use the shell section commands
even with a single-layered SOLSH190 element. ANSYS obtains the actual layer thicknesses used for
element calculations by scaling the input layer thickness so that they are consistent with the thickness
between the nodes. A section can be partially defined using data from a FiberSIM .xml file.
SOLSH190 does not support real constant input for defining layer sections.
Other Input
The axis can be defined as shown:
∂ {x}  ∂ {x} 
S1 = / 
∂s  ∂s 
where:
∂ {x}  1  
=   − { x }I + { x} J + { x }K − { x }L − { x}M + { x}N + { x}O − { x }P 
∂s  8   
{x}I, {x}J, . . . , {x}P = global nodal coordinates
You can reorient the default first surface direction S1 in the element reference plane (see Figure 190.1)
via the ESYS command. You can further rotate S1 by angle THETA (in degrees) for each layer via the
SECDATA command to create layer-wise coordinate systems. See Coordinate Systems (p. 56) for details.
If you specify no element body load for defining temperatures--that is, you define temperatures with
commands other than BFE--SOLSH190 adopts an element-wise temperature pattern and requires only
eight temperatures for the eight element nodes. Unspecified nodal temperatures default to the assigned
SOLSH190
uniform temperature (TUNIF). ANSYS computes all layer interface temperatures by interpolating nodal
temperatures T1 ~ T8.
ending with temperatures at the top layer NL. If you input exactly NL + 1 temperatures, one temperature
is used for the four bottom corners of each layer, and the last temperature is used for the four top
corner temperatures of the top layer. The first corner temperature T1 defaults to TUNIF. If all other
corner temperatures are unspecified, they default to T1. For any other input pattern, unspecified tem-
peratures default to TUNIF.
You can use the MP command to define the isotropic or orthotropic elastic material properties and the
TB,ANEL command to define anisotropic elastic material properties. Other material properties include
density, damping ratios, and coefficients of thermal expansion. You may also use the TB command to
define nonlinear material behavior such as plasticity, hyperelasticity, viscoelasticity, creep, and viscoplas-
ticity.
KEYOPT(2) = 1 activates the internal strain enhancements to the element transverse-shear strains. With
this option, the element is capable of quadratic transverse-shear strain distributions through the entire
thickness of the element.
KEYOPT(6) = 1 sets the element for using u-P mixed formulation. For details on the use of mixed formu-
lation, see Applications of Mixed u-P Formulations (p. 67) in the Element Reference.
"SOLSH190 Input Summary" (p. 1057) contains a summary of element input. For a general description of
element input, see Element Input (p. 43).
SOLSH190 Input Summary

Nodes
I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, UZ
Real Constants
None
Material Properties
SOLSH190
Surface Loads
Pressures --

Body Loads
Temperatures --
Element-wise pattern (no element body load command issued): T1, T2, T3, T4, T5, T6, T7, T8
for 8 element nodes. Temperatures at layer interface corners are computed by interpolating
nodal temperatures.
Layer-wise pattern (element body load command issued): T1, T2, T3, T4 (at bottom of layer 1),
T5, T6, T7, T8 (between layers 1-2); similarly for temperatures between subsequent layers, ending
with temperatures at top of layer NL (4 * (NL + 1) maximum). For a one-layer element, therefore,
8 temperatures are used.
Special Features

Initial state
Large deflection
Large strain
Linear perturbation
Plasticity
Stress stiffening
Viscoelasticity
KEYOPT(2)
Enhanced transverse-shear strains:
0 --
No enhanced transverse-shear strains (default).
1 --
Include enhanced transverse-shear strains.
KEYOPT(6)
0 --
Use pure displacement formulation (default).
1 --
Use mixed u-P formulation.
KEYOPT(8)
Storage of layer data:
SOLSH190
0 --
For multilayer elements, store data for bottom of bottom layer and top of top layer (default).
1 --
For multilayer elements, store data for top and bottom for all layers. (Before using this option, be
aware that the amount of data involved can be very large.)
SOLSH190 Element Technology

SOLSH190 employs incompatible modes to enhance the accuracy in in-plane bending situations. The
satisfaction of the in-plane patch test is ensured. A separate set of incompatible modes is adopted to
overcome the thickness locking in bending dominant problems. The incompatible modes introduce
seven internal DOFs that are inaccessible to users and condensed out at the element level.
SOLSH190 utilizes a suite of special kinematic formulations to avoid locking when the shell thickness
becomes extremely small. However, due to its shell-like behavior, SOLSH190 fails to pass the patch test
if the element is distorted in the thickness direction.
SOLSH190 is fully compatible with 3-D constitutive relations. Compared to classical shell elements that
are based on plane stress assumptions, SOLSH190 usually gives more accurate predictions when the
shell is thick.
SOLSH190 Output Data


• Additional element output as shown in Table 1: SOLSH190 Element Output Definitions (p. 1060)
Several items are illustrated in Figure 2 (p. 1060). See Element Table for Variables Identified By Sequence
Number in the Basic Analysis Guide and The Item and Sequence Number Table (p. 52) in this manual for
more information.
SOLSH190
Figure 2 SOLSH190 Stress Output
Sz Sy
Sx
P
zo
M K z
N
y yo
x
I
xo

available.
Table 1 SOLSH190 Element Output Definitions

Name Definition O R
VOLU: Volume - Y
O, P
SOLSH190
Name Definition O R
XZ
EPTH:X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, Thermal strains Y Y
XZ
EPTH:EQV Equivalent thermal strains [5] - Y
XZ
XZ
XZ
EPCR)
ing)
PLASTIC, CREEP
M11, M22, M12 Out-of-plane moments (per unit length) - Y
Q13, Q23 Transverse-shear forces (per unit length) - Y
ILSUM Magnitude of the interlaminar shear stress vector - 7
SOLSH190
Name Definition O R
in degrees)
St: 13, 23 Averaged transverse-shear stresses - Y
user (MP,NUXY); for plastic and creep this value is set at 0.5.
EPPL.
Table 2: SOLSH190 Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 1062) lists output available through ETABLE using the
Sequence Number method. See Element Table for Variables Identified By Sequence Number in the Basic
Analysis Guide and The Item and Sequence Number Table (p. 52) in this manual for more information.
The following notation is used in Table 2: SOLSH190 Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 1062):
Name
output quantity as defined in the Table 1: SOLSH190 Element Output Definitions (p. 1060)
Item
I,J,...,P
Table 2 SOLSH190 Item and Sequence Numbers

ity
Name
P1 SMISC - 2 1 4 3 - - - -
P2 SMISC - 5 6 - - 8 7 - -
P3 SMISC - - 9 10 - - 12 11 -
P4 SMISC - - - 13 14 - - 16 15
P5 SMISC - 18 - - 17 19 - - 20
P6 SMISC - - - - - 21 22 23 24
SOLSH190

ity
Name
THICK SMISC 27 - - - - - - - -
N11 SMISC 28 - - - - - - - -
N22 SMISC 29 - - - - - - - -
N12 SMISC 30 - - - - - - - -
M11 SMISC 31 - - - - - - - -
M22 SMISC 32 - - - - - - - -
M12 SMISC 33 - - - - - - - -
Q13 SMISC 34 - - - - - - - -
Q23 SMISC 35 - - - - - - - -
Sm: 11 SMISC 36 - - - - - - - -
Sm: 22 SMISC 37 - - - - - - - -
Sm: 12 SMISC 38 - - - - - - - -
Sb: 11 SMISC 39 - - - - - - - -
Sb: 22 SMISC 40 - - - - - - - -
Sb: 12 SMISC 41 - - - - - - - -
Sp: 11 SMISC 42 - - - - - - - -
(at bot-
tom
face)
Sp: 22 SMISC 43 - - - - - - - -
(at bot-
tom
face)
Sp: 12 SMISC 44 - - - - - - - -
(at bot-
tom
face)
Sp: 11 SMISC 45 - - - - - - - -
(at top
face)
Sp: 22 SMISC 46 - - - - - - - -
(at top
face)
Sp: 12 SMISC 47 - - - - - - - -
(at top
face)
St: 13 SMISC 48 - - - - - - - -
St: 23 SMISC 49 - - - - - - - -
SOLSH190

ity
Name
ILSXZ SMISC 8 * (i - 1) + 51 8 * (NL - 1) + 52
ILSYZ SMISC 8 * (i - 1) + 53 8 * (NL - 1) + 54
ILSUM SMISC 8 * (i - 1) + 55 8 * (NL - 1) + 56
ILANG SMISC 8 * (i - 1) + 57 8 * (NL - 1) + 58
SOLSH190 Assumptions and Restrictions

K and L and duplicate O and P node numbers (see Degenerated Shape Elements (p. 39)).
• If you use the mixed u-P formulation (KEYOPT(6) = 1), the damped eigensolver is not supported.
You must use the sparse solver (default).
• Using both hyperelastic and elastoplastic layers in the same element can produce unpredictable
results and is not recommended.
SOLSH190 Product Restrictions

INTER192
2-D 4-Node Gasket
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS

INTER192 is a 2-D four-node linear interface element used for 2-D structural assembly modeling . When
used with 2-D linear structural elements (such as PLANE182), INTER192 simulates gasket joints. The
element can be used either as a plane element (plane stress or plane strain) or as an axisymmetric ele-
ment. It is defined by four nodes having two degrees of freedom at each node: translations in the
nodal x and y directions.
See Gasket Material and INTER192 in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for more details about this
element.
Also see Gasket Joints Simulation in the Structural Analysis Guide for more details on the gasket capab-
ility in ANSYS.
I
x
Y y
K
X J
INTER192 Input Data

The element geometry, node locations, connectivity, and the nodal coordinate system are shown in
Figure 1 (p. 1065). The element geometry is defined by 4 nodes, which form bottom and top lines of the
element. The bottom line is defined by nodes I, J; and the top line is defined by nodes K, L. The element
connectivity is defined as I, J, K, L. This element has 2 integration points. The Gauss integration scheme
is used for the numerical integration.
Temperatures may be input as element body loads at the nodes. The node I temperature T(I), defaults
Input the nodal forces, if any, per unit of depth for a plane analysis (except for KEYOPT(3) = 3) and on
a full 360° basis for an axisymmetric analysis.
By default, the element is capable of both through-thickness and transverse shear deformations (KEY-
OPT(2) = 1). The inclusion of transverse shear stiffness is generally required when the interfaces between
INTER192
the gasket and the mating parts are modeled as sliding contact. However, if the interfaces are modeled
with a matching mesh method (that is, with coincident nodes), ANSYS recommends using through-
thickness deformation only (KEYOPT(2) = 0) to avoid unnecessary in-plane interaction between the
gasket and the mating parts.
The following table summarizes the element input. See the Element Input (p. 43) section in the Element
Reference for a general description of element input.

Nodes
I, J, K, L
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY
Real Constants
None, if KEYOPT(3) = 0, 1, or 2
THK - Plane stress with thickness, if KEYOPT(3) = 3
Material Properties
BETD, ALPX (or CTEX or THSX)
Body Loads
Temperatures --
T(I), T(J), T(K), T(L)
Special Features
Gasket material
Linear perturbation
KEYOPT(2)
Element deformation:
0 --
Through-thickness deformation only
1 --
Through-thickness and transverse shear deformation (default)
KEYOPT(3)
Element behavior:
0 --
Plane stress
1 --
Axisymmetric
2 --
3 --
Plane stress with thickness (THK) real constant input
INTER192

• Nodal items such as nodal displacements are included in the overall nodal solution.
• Element items such as stresses and closures are element outputs as shown in Table 1: INTER192
Element Output Definitions (p. 1067).
The output directions for element items are parallel to the local element coordinate system based on
the element midplane as illustrated in Figure 2 (p. 1067). See Gasket Material in the Mechanical APDL
Theory Reference for details.
for ways to review results.
Figure 2 INTER192 Stress Output
I
x
Y y
K
X J
available.
Table 1 INTER192 Element Output Definitions

Name Definition O R
NODES Node connectivity - I, J, K, L - Y
GKS:X, (XY) Stress (also gasket pressure) Y Y
GKD:X, (XY) Total closure Y Y
INTER192
Name Definition O R
GKDI:X, (XY) Total inelastic closure Y Y
GKTH:X, (XY) Thermal closure Y Y

• This element is not supported for initial stress.
• Pressure as a type of surface load on element faces is not supported by this element.
• This element is based on the local coordinate system. ESYS is not permitted.
• This element is only available for static analyses.

There are no product-specific restrictions on this element.
INTER193
2-D 6-Node Gasket
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS

INTER193 is a 2-D 6-node quadratic interface element used for 2-D structural assembly modeling. When
used in conjunction with 2-D quadratic structural elements (such as PLANE183), INTER193 is used to
simulate gasket joints. The element can be used either as a plane element (plane stress or plane strain)
or as an axisymmetric element. It is defined by six nodes having two degrees of freedom at each node:
translations in the nodal x and y directions.
element.
Also see Gasket Joints Simulation in the Structural Analysis Guide for more details on the gasket capab-
ility in ANSYS.
L
I
x
O
M y
Y
K
X J
INTER193 Input Data

element. The bottom line is defined by nodes I, J, M; and the top line is defined by nodes K, L, O. The
element connectivity is defined as I, J, K, L, M, O. This element has 2 integration points. Dropping mid
side nodes M or O is not permitted.
INTER193
By default, the element adopts a full-integration scheme (KEYOPT(4) = 2), and is capable of both through-
thickness and transverse shear deformations (KEYOPT(2) = 1). The full-integration scheme and the inclu-
sion of transverse shear stiffness are generally required when the interfaces between the gasket and
the mating parts are modeled as sliding contact. However, if the interfaces are modeled with a matching
mesh method (that is, with coincident nodes), ANSYS recommends using the reduced integration scheme
(KEYOPT(4) = 0) and through-thickness deformation only (KEYOPT(2) = 0) to achieve better efficiency
and to avoid unnecessary in-plane interaction between the gasket and the mating parts.
The next table summarizes the element input. See Element Input (p. 43) in the Element Reference for a
general description of element input.

Nodes
I, J, K, L, M, O
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY
Real Constants
Material Properties
Body Loads
Temperatures --
T(I), T(J), T(K), T(L), T(M), T(O)
Special Features
Gasket material
Linear perturbation
KEYOPT(2)
0 --
1 --
KEYOPT(3)
Element behavior:
0 --
Plane stress
1 --
Axisymmetric
2 --
3 --
INTER193
KEYOPT(4)
Element technology:
0 --
Uniform reduced integration
2 --
Full integration (default)

L
I
x
O
M y
Y
K
X J
INTER193
available.

Name Definition O R
NODES Node connectivity - I, J, K, L, M, O - Y
TEMP Temperatures T(I), T(J), T(K), T(L), T(M), T(O) - Y
GKS:X, (XY) Stress (also gasket pressure) Y Y
GKD:X, (XY) Total closure Y Y
GKDI:X, (XY) Total inelastic closure Y Y
GKTH:X, (XY) Thermal closure Y Y


INTER194
3-D 16-Node Gasket
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS

INTER194 is a 3-D 16-node quadratic interface element. When used with 3-D quadratic structural elements
(SOLID96, SOLID186, and SOLID187), INTER194 simulates gasket joints. It is defined by 16 nodes having
three degrees of freedom at each node: translations in the nodal x, y, and z directions.
element.
Also see Gasket Joints Simulation in the Structural Analysis Guide for more details about gasket simulation.
X
L
M T W
x
z S
I
U y
O
Z V K
Q N
R
X Y J
INTER194 Input Data

Figure 1 (p. 1073). The element geometry is defined by 16 nodes, which form bottom and top surfaces of
the element. The bottom surface is defined by nodes, I, J, K, L, Q, R, S, T; and the top surface is defined
by nodes, M, N, O, P, U, V, W, X. As shown, the element connectivity is defined as I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P,
Q, R, S, T, U, V, W, X. The element is degenerated to a wedge (prism) element, when K=L=S and O=P=W,
as shown in Figure 2 (p. 1074).
INTER194
Figure 2 INTER194 3-D 16-Node Degenerated Quadratic Interface
O, P, W
K, L, S
X V
x
y
T R
z
Z
M U N
I J
X Y
Q
For the degenerated element, 3 integration points are used for numerical integration. The degenerated
element can be used in conjunction with 10-node solid tetrahedral elements (such as SOLID187).
Dropping any or some of midside nodes, Q, R, S, T, U, V, W, X is not permitted.
By default, the element adopts a full-integration scheme (KEYOPT(4) = 2) and is capable of both through-
thickness and transverse shear deformations (KEYOPT(2) =1). The full-integration scheme and the inclusion
of transverse shear stiffness are generally required when the interfaces between the gasket and the
mating parts are modeled as sliding contact. However, if the interfaces are modeled with a matching
mesh method (that is, with coincident nodes), ANSYS, Inc. recommends using the reduced-integration
scheme (KEYOPT(4) = 0) and through-thickness deformation only (KEYOPT(2) = 0) to achieve better ef-
ficiency and to avoid unnecessary in-plane interaction between the gasket and the mating parts.
The following table summarizes the element input. See Element Input (p. 43) in the Element Reference
for a general description of element input.

Nodes
I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P, Q, R, S, T, U, V, W, X
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, UZ
Real Constants
None
Material Properties
Body Loads
Temperatures --
T(I), T(J), T(K), T(L) T(M), T(N), T(O), T(P), T(Q), T(R), T(S), T(T), T(U), T(V), T(W), T(X)
INTER194
Special Features
Gasket material
Linear perturbation
KEYOPT(2)
0 --
1 --
KEYOPT(4)
Element technology:
0 --
Uniform reduced integration
2 --
Full integration (default)

X
L
M T W
x
z S
I
U y
O
Z V K
Q N
R
X Y J
INTER194
available.

Name Definition O R
NODES Node connectivity - I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P, Q, R, S, - Y
T, U, V, W, X
TEMP Temperatures T(I), T(J), T(K), T(L), T(M), T(N), T(O), - Y
T(P), T(Q), T(R), T(S), T(T), T(U), T(V), T(W), T(X)
GKS:X, (XY, XZ) Stress (also gasket pressure) Y Y
GKD:X, (XY, XZ) Total closure Y Y
GKDI:X, (XY, XZ) Total inelastic closure Y Y
GKTH:X, (XY, XZ) Thermal closure Y Y


INTER195
3-D 8-Node Gasket
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS

INTER195 is a 3-D 8-node linear interface element. When used with 3-D linear structural elements
(SOLID62, SOLID65, SOLID185, SOLSH190, SOLID272, SOLID273, and SOLID285), INTER195 simulates
gasket joints. It is defined by eight nodes having three degrees of freedom at each node: translations
in the nodal x, y, and z directions.
element.
Also see Gasket Joints Simulation in the Structural Analysis Guide for more details on this ANSYS capab-
ility.
M
x
I
z
y
O
Z
N K
X Y J
INTER195 Input Data

the element. The bottom surface is defined by nodes, I, J, K, L; and the top surface is defined by nodes,
M, N, O, P. As shown, the element connectivity is defined as I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P.
By default, the element is capable of both through-thickness and transverse shear deformations (KEY-
OPT(2) = 1). The inclusion of transverse shear stiffness is generally required when the interfaces between
the gasket and the mating parts are modeled as sliding contact. However, if the interfaces are modeled
with a matching mesh method (that is, with coincident nodes), ANSYS recommends using through-
INTER195
thickness deformation only (KEYOPT(2) = 0) to avoid unnecessary in-plane interaction between the
gasket and the mating parts.

Nodes
I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, UZ
Real Constants
None
Material Properties
Body Loads
Temperatures --
Special Features
Gasket material
Linear perturbation
KEYOPT(2)
0 --
1 --

INTER195
M
x
I
z
y
O
Z
N K
X Y J
available.

Name Definition O R
NODES Node connectivity - I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P - Y
T(P)
GKS:X, (XY, XZ) Stress (also gasket pressure) Y Y
GKD:X, (XY, XZ) Total closure Y Y
GKDI:X, (XY, XZ) Total inelastic closure Y Y
GKTH:X, (XY, XZ) Thermal closure Y Y

INTER195

MESH200
Meshing Facet
MP ME ST PR PRN <> <> <> EM <> DY PP <> EME MFS
MESH200 Element Description

MESH200 is a "mesh-only" element, contributing nothing to the solution. This element can be used for
the following types of operations:
• Multistep meshing operations, such as extrusion, that require a lower dimensionality mesh be used
for the creation of a higher dimensionality mesh
• Line-meshing in 2-D or 3-D space with or without midside nodes,
• Area-meshing or volume-meshing in 3-D space with triangles, quadrilaterals, tetrahedra, or bricks,
with or without midside nodes.
• Temporary storage of elements when the analysis physics has not yet been specified.
MESH200 may be used in conjunction with any other ANSYS element types. After it is no longer needed,
it can be deleted (cleared), or can be left in place. Its presence will not affect solution results.
MESH200 elements can be changed into other element types using EMODIF.
Figure 1 MESH200 Geometry
J J
Y
K
X
I
I
2-D line with 2 nodes 2-D line with 3 nodes
MESH200
X J
J
Z K
I I
3-D line with 2 nodes 3-D line with 3 nodes
K K
N M
I I
J L J
3-D triangle with 3 nodes 3-D triangle with 6 nodes
L
L O
P
K
I K
I
N
J M
J
3-D quadrilateral with 4 nodes 3-D quadrilateral with 8 nodes
L L
P R
Q
K K
I O
I
N
M
J J
tetrahedron with 4 nodes tetrahedron with 10 nodes
P
O P W
X
O
M U B
M N N V A
Y T S
K Z
L I L K
I
J Q R
J
KEYOPT (1) = 10 KEYOPT (1) = 11
brick with 8 nodes brick with 20 nodes
MESH200
MESH200 Input Data

The permissible geometry and node locations for this element are shown in Figure 1 (p. 1081). The element
is defined by two to twenty nodes. It has no degrees of freedom, material properties, real constants, or
loadings.
"MESH200 Input Summary" (p. 1083) summarizes the element input. See Element Input (p. 43) in the Element
Reference for a general description of element input.
MESH200 Input Summary

Nodes
I, J if KEYOPT (1) = 0, 2-D line with 2 nodes

I, J, K if KEYOPT (1) = 1, 2-D line with 3 nodes
I, J if KEYOPT (1) = 2, 3-D line with 2 nodes
I, J, K if KEYOPT (1) = 3, 3-D line with 3 nodes
I, J, K if KEYOPT (1) = 4, 3-D triangle with 3 nodes
I, J, K, L, M, N if KEYOPT (1) = 5, 3-D triangle with 6 nodes
I, J, K, L if KEYOPT (1) = 6, 3-D quadrilateral with 4 nodes
I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P if KEYOPT (1) = 7, 3-D quadrilateral with 8 nodes
I, J, K, L if KEYOPT (1) = 8, tetrahedron with 4 nodes
I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P, Q, R if KEYOPT (1) = 9, tetrahedron with 10 nodes
I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P if KEYOPT (1) = 10, brick with 8 nodes
I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P, Q, R, S, T, U, V, W, X, Y, Z, A, B if KEYOPT (1) = 11, brick with 20 nodes
Degrees of Freedom
None
Real Constants
None
Material Properties
None
Surface Loads
None
Body Loads
None
Special Features
Linear perturbation
KEYOPT(1)
Element shape and number of nodes:
0 --
2-D line with 2 nodes
1 --
2 --
3 --
MESH200
4 --
3-D triangle with 3 nodes
5 --
3-D triangle with 6 nodes
6 --
3-D quadrilateral with 4 nodes
7 --
3-D quadrilateral with 8 nodes
8 --
tetrahedron with 4 nodes
9 --
tetrahedron with 10 nodes
10 --
brick with 8 nodes
11 --
brick with 20 nodes
KEYOPT(2)
Element shape testing:
0 --
Shape testing is done (default)
1 --
No shape testing is done for this element
MESH200 Output Data

This element has no output data.
MESH200 Assumptions and Restrictions

• When this element is a triangle or quadrilateral, it is shape-tested in the same manner as an equivalent
"non-structural shell". When it is a tetrahedron or brick, it is shape-tested like a SOLID185. This is so that
meshing will work to create well-shaped elements. If KEYOPT(2) = 1, no shape testing is done for this
element type.
• MESH200 elements may not be active during result contour plotting (/POST1, PLNSOL, or PLESOL).
The elements are automatically unselected during either operation.
MESH200 Product Restrictions

FOLLW201
Follower Load
FOLLW201 Element Description

FOLLW201 is a one-node 3-D element that can be overlaid onto an existing node with physical rotation
degrees of freedom. The element specifies external forces and moments which follow the deformation
of a structure in a nonlinear analysis. FOLLW201 contributes follower load stiffness terms in a geomet-
rically nonlinear analysis (NLGEOM,ON).
Figure 1 FOLLW201 Geometry
Y
X
Y
X
FOLLW201 overlaid on a node shared by shell or beam elements. The element has two
faces: face 1 for specifying magnitude of force and face 2 for specifying magnitude of
moment.
FOLLW201 Input Data

The element is defined by a single node. The node has three translational and rotational degrees of
freedom each. The element may be defined only at those nodes which are associated with structural
elements having three translational and rotational degrees of freedom; a singularity will result if the
element is used in any other way.
Real constants of the element specify the direction of the force/moment vectors, and the element load
command SFE specifies the magnitude of force/moment.
Element loads are described in Nodal Loading (p. 49). The vectors defined by real constants will evolve
with deformation (follow the displacements) in a geometrically nonlinear analysis.
KEYOPT(1) = 1 provides a means of specifying complex (real and imaginary) point loads via an element
specification. You can consider it as a nodal point equivalent of surface-effect elements (such as SURF154).
When KEYOPT(1) = 1 (intended primarily for use in the ANSYS Workbench interface), the direction of
the load is not updated for geometrically nonlinear analyses, and the element is renamed to (and appears
FOLLW201
in the output as) CLOAD201. In this case, the applied load is the same as that generated via the F
command, except that loads can be simultaneously applied in multiple directions to one node. The
KEYOPT(2) = 1 setting, which can only be used with KEYOPT(1) = 1, enables use of the CLOAD201 element
on nodes that may or may not have active rotational degrees of freedom.
With the exception of follower load effects, the element contributes nothing to the stiffness matrix. By
default, follower (pressure) load stiffness effects are included in a geometrically nonlinear analysis. The
stiffness contribution is usually unsymmetrical and may require an unsymmetrical solution option
(NROPT,UNSYM).
"FOLLW201 Input Summary" (p. 1086) contains a summary of the element input. See Element Input (p. 43)
in the Element Reference for a general description of element input.
FOLLW201 Input Summary

Nodes
I
Degrees of Freedom
Real Constants
FX - Cosine of the angle between force vector and global X direction

FY - Cosine of the angle between force vector and global Y direction
FZ - Cosine of the angle between force vector and global Z direction
MX - Cosine of the angle between moment vector and global X direction
MY - Cosine of the angle between moment vector and global Y direction
MZ - Cosine of the angle between moment vector and global Z direction
Material Properties
None
Surface Loads
face 1 (force magnitude)

face 2 (moment magnitude)
Body Loads
None
Special Features
Birth and death

Large deflection
Linear perturbation
KEYOPT(1)
Direction load:
0 --
Updated direction load (default)
1 --
Constant direction load (intended primarily for use in the ANSYS Workbench interface)
KEYOPT(2)
Degrees of freedom control:
FOLLW201
0 --
Use all (UX, UY, UZ, ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ) degrees of freedom (default)
1 --
Use UX, UY, and UZ degrees of freedom only (valid only when KEYOPT(1) = 1)
FOLLW201 Output Data

The Element Outputs consist of updated direction cosines of the force/moment vectors as Miscellaneous
quantities (SMISC). No other output is provided.
available.
The following table lists output available via the ETABLE command using the Sequence Number
method. See The General Postprocessor (POST1) in the Basic Analysis Guide and The Item and Sequence
Number Table (p. 52) in this manual for more information.
Name
output quantity as defined above
Item
I
sequence number for data at node I
Table 1 FOLLW201 Item and Sequence Numbers for the ETABLE and ESOL Commands
Name Item Location
FX SMISC 1
FY SMISC 2
FZ SMISC 3
MX SMISC 4
MY SMISC 5
MZ SMISC 6
FOLLW201 Assumptions and Restrictions

• Follower load stiffening is ignored in geometrically linear analyses (NLGEOM,OFF), which is equi-
valent to the normal specification of forces and moments (F).
• The element must be overlaid on a node having existing physical stiffness contributions (from
other shell or beam elements).
FOLLW201
• Follower load effects are nonconservative. They often introduce dynamics instability issues (such
as flutter) which may cause convergence difficulties.
FOLLW201 Product Restrictions

INTER202
2-D 4-Node Cohesive
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS

INTER202 is a 2-D 4-node linear interface element used for 2-D structural assembly modeling. When
used with 2-D linear structural elements (such as PLANE182), INTER202 simulates the interface surfaces
and the subsequent delamination process, where the separation is represented by an increasing dis-
placement between nodes, within the interface element itself, that are initially coincident. The element
can be used as either a plane element (plane stress or plane strain) or as an axisymmetric element. It
is defined by four nodes having two degrees of freedom at each node: translations in the nodal x and
y directions.
See Cohesive Zone Material (CZM) Model and INTER202 in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for
more information about this element. Also see Cohesive Zone Material Model in the Material Reference.
For more information about the interface failure/delamination capability, see Interface Delamination
and Failure Simulation in the Structural Analysis Guide .
L
I
x
y
Y
K
X J
INTER202 Input Data

element. The bottom line is defined by nodes I, J; and the top line is defined by nodes K, L. The element
connectivity is defined as I, J, K, L. This element has 2 integration points. The Gauss integration scheme
is used for the numerical integration.
INTER202 is used to simulate interfacial decohesion with the cohesive zone model along an interface
defined by this element. At the outset of the simulation, nodes I,L and J,K are coincident, both with
each other and with the corresponding nodes in the adjacent structural elements. The subsequent
separation of the adjacent elements (usually defined contiguously as components) is represented by
an increasing displacement between the nodes within this element.
INTER202
INTER202 can also be used to simulate interfacial delamination of laminate composite and general crack
growth with VCCT. For more information, see VCCT-Based Crack Growth Simulation in the Structural
Analysis Guide.
The next table summarizes the element input. See the Element Input (p. 43) section in the Element Ref-
erence for a general description of element input.

Nodes
I, J, K, L
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY
Real Constants
Body Loads
Temperatures --
T(I), T(J), T(K), T(L)
The temperature is used only to evaluate the material properties.

Special Features
Cohesive zone materials
KEYOPT(2)
Element option:
0 --
Used with cohesive zone material (TB,CZM)
1 --
Multipoint constraint (MPC) option, used for crack growth simulation with VCCT technology.
KEYOPT(3)
Element behavior:
0 --
Plane stress
1 --
Axisymmetric
2 --
3 --
INTER202

• Element items such as tractions and separations are element outputs as shown in Table 1: INTER202
the element midplane, as illustrated in Figure 2 (p. 1091). See Cohesive Zone Model in the Mechanical
APDL Theory Reference for details.
L
I
x
y
Y
K
X J
available.

Name Definition O R
NODES Node connectivity - I, J, K, L - Y
SS:X, (XY) Interface Traction (stress) Y Y
SD:X, (XY) Interface Separation (displacement) Y Y
INTER202


INTER203
2-D 6-Node Cohesive
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS

INTER203 is a 2-D 6-node quadratic interface element used for 2-D structural assembly modeling. When
used with 2-D quadratic structural elements (such as PLANE183), INTER203 simulates the interface surfaces
and the subsequent delamination process, where the separation is represented by an increasing dis-
placement between nodes, within the interface element itself, that are initially coincident. The element
can be used either as a plane element (plane stress or plane strain) or as an axisymmetric element. It
is defined by six nodes having two degrees of freedom at each node: translations in the nodal x and y
directions.
See Cohesive Zone Material Model and INTER203 in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for more
Also see Interface Delaminaton and Failure Simulation in the Structural Analysis Guide for more details
on the interface failure/delamination capability in ANSYS.
L
I
x
O
Y M y
K
X J
INTER203 Input Data

element. The bottom line is defined by nodes I, J, M; and the top line is defined by nodes K, L, O. This
element has 2 integration points. Dropping mid side nodes M or O is not permitted.
INTER203 is used to simulate a separation along an interface defined by this element. At the outset of
your simulation, nodes I,L, nodes M,O and nodes J,K are coincident, with each other, and with the cor-
responding nodes in the adjacent structural elements. The subsequent separation of the adjacent ele-
ments (usually defined contiguously as components) is represented by an increasing displacement
between the initially coincident nodes within this element.
INTER203

Nodes
I, J, K, L, M, , O
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY
Real Constants
Body Loads
Temperatures --
T(I), T(J), T(K), T(L), T(M), T(O)
Temperature is used only to evaluate the material properties.

Special Features
KEYOPT(3)
Element behavior:
0 --
Plane stress
1 --
Axisymmetric
2 --
3 --

INTER203
the element midplane as illustrated in Figure 2 (p. 1095). See Cohesive Zone Material Model and INTER203
in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for details.
L
I
x
O
Y M y
K
X J
available.

Name Definition O R
NODES Node connectivity - I, J, K, L, M, O - Y
TEMP Temperatures T(I), T(J), T(K), T(L), T(M), T(O) - Y
SS:X, (XY) Interface Traction (Stress) Y Y
SD:X, (XY) Interface Separation Y Y

INTER203

INTER204
3-D 16-Node Cohesive
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS

INTER204 is a 3-D 16-node quadratic interface element. When used with 3-D quadratic structural elements
(SOLID186, and SOLID187), INTER204 simulates an interface between two surfaces and the subsequent
delamination process, where the separation is represented by an increasing displacement between
nodes, within the interface element itself. The nodes are initially coincident.
INTER204 is defined by 16 nodes having three degrees of freedom at each node: translations in the
nodal x, y, and z directions.
See Cohesive Zone Material Model and INTER204 in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for more
Also see Interface Delaminaton and Failure Simulation in the Structural Analysis Guide for more details
about the interface failure/delamination capability.
L
X
T x
M W
z S
I
y
U
O
Q V K
N
Z
R
J
X Y
INTER204 Input Data

the element. The bottom surface is defined by nodes, I, J, K, L, Q, R, S, T; and the top surface is defined
by nodes, M, N, O, P, U, V, W, X. The element may be degenerated to a wedge (prism) element, by setting
nodes K=L=S and O=P=W, as shown in Figure 2 (p. 1098).
INTER204
Figure 2 INTER204 3-D 16-Node Degenerated Quadratic Interface
O, P, W
K, L, S
x V
X y
T R
z
Z
M N
U
I J
X Y Q
For the degenerated element, 3 integration points are used for numerical integration. The degenerated
element can be used in conjunction with 10-node solid tetrahedral elements ( SOLID187). Dropping
any or some of the midside nodes, Q, R, S, T, U, V, W, X is not permitted.

Nodes
I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P, Q, R, S, T, U, V, W, X
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, UZ
Real Constants
None
Body Loads
Temperatures --
T(I), T(J), T(K), T(L) T(M), T(N), T(O), T(P), T(Q), T(R), T(S), T(T), T(U), T(V), T(W), T(X)
Special Features
KEYOPTS
None

INTER204
the element midplane as illustrated in Figure 3 (p. 1099). See Cohesive Zone Material in the Mechanical
APDL Theory Reference for details.
L
X
T x
M W
z S
I
y
U
O
Q V K
N
Z
R
J
X Y
available.

Name Definition O R
NODES Node connectivity - I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P, Q, R, S, - Y
T, U, V, W, X
T(P), T(Q), T(R), T(S), T(T), T(U), T(V), T(W), T(X)
SS:X, (XY, XZ) Interface traction (stress) Y Y
SD:X, (XY, XZ) Interface Separation Y Y
INTER204


INTER205
3-D 8-Node Cohesive
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS

INTER205 is a 3-D 8-node linear interface element. When used with 3-D linear structural elements
(SOLID185, SOLSH190, SOLID272, SOLID273, and SOLID285), INTER205 simulates an interface between
two surfaces and the subsequent delamination process, where the separation is represented by an in-
creasing displacement between nodes, within the interface element itself. The nodes are initially coin-
cident.
The element is defined by eight nodes having three degrees of freedom at each node: translations in
the nodal x, y, and z directions.
See Cohesive Zone Material (CZM) Model and INTER205 in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for
more information about this element. Also see Cohesive Zone Material Model in the Material Reference.
For more information about the interface failure/delamination capability, see "Interface Delamination
and Failure Simulation" in the Structural Analysis Guide.
M
x
I
z
y
O
Z K
N
Y J
X
INTER205 Input Data

the element. The bottom surface is defined by nodes, I, J, K, L; and the top surface is defined by nodes,
M, N, O, P.
INTER205 is used to simulate interfacial decohesion with the cohesive zone model along an interface
defined by this element. At the outset of the simulation, nodes pairs I and M, J and N, K and O, and L
and P are coincident, both with each other and with the corresponding nodes in the adjacent structural
INTER205
elements. The subsequent separation of the adjacent elements (usually defined contiguously as com-
ponents) is represented by an increasing displacement between the nodes within this element.
INTER205 can also be used to simulate interfacial delamination of laminate composite and general crack
growth with VCCT. For more information, see VCCT-Based Crack Growth Simulation in the Structural
Analysis Guide.

Nodes
I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, UZ
Real Constants
None
Body Loads
Temperatures --
The temperature is used only to evaluate the material properties.

Special Features
KEYOPT(2)
Element option:
0 --
Used with cohesive zone material (TB,CZM)
1 --
Multipoint constraint (MPC) option, used for crack growth simulation with VCCT technology.

INTER205
M
x
I
z
y
O
Z K
N
Y J
X
available.

Name Definition O R
NODES Node connectivity - I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P - Y
T(P)
SS:X, (XY, XZ) Interface traction (stress) Y Y
SD:X, (XY, XZ) Interface separation Y Y

INTER205

SHELL208

The SHELL208 element is suitable for modeling thin to moderately thick axisymmetric shell structures,
such as oil tanks, pipes, and cooling towers. It is a two-node element with three degrees of freedom at
each node: translations in the x, and y directions, and rotation about the z-axis. A fourth translational
degree of freedom in z direction can be included to model uniform torsion (KEYOPT(2) = 1). When the
membrane option is used, the rotational degree of freedom is excluded. An extra internal node is
available via KEYOPT(3) = 2. (SHELL209 incorporates this extra node by default.)
SHELL208 allows you to account for large strain effects, transverse shear deformation, hyperelasticity
and layers in your models. The element is intended to model finite strain with pure axisymmetric dis-
placements; transverse shear strains are assumed to be small.
SHELL208 can be used for layered applications for modeling laminated composite shells or sandwich
construction. See SHELL208 in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for more details about this element.
J J
Integration points
2
internal node
x x
1
Y
z z
I I
X
SHELL208 Input Data

Figure 1 (p. 1105) shows the geometry, node locations, and element coordinate system for SHELL208. The
element is defined by two nodes. For material property labels, the local x-direction corresponds to the
meridional direction of the shell element. The local y-direction is the circumferential. The local z-direction
corresponds to the through-the-thickness direction. Element formulation is based on logarithmic strain
and true stress measures. Element kinematics allows for finite membrane strains (stretching). However,
the curvature changes within an increment are assumed to be small.
The shell thickness and more general properties (such as material and number of integration points
through the thickness) are specified via section commands (SECTYPE, SECDATA and SECCONTROLS).
SHELL208
Shell section commands allow for both single-layered and composite shell definitions. You can designate
the number of integration points (1, 3, 5, 7, or 9) located through the thickness of each layer. If only
one, the integration point is always located midway between the top and the bottom surfaces. If three
or more, two points are located on the top and the bottom surfaces respectively and the remaining
points are distributed evenly between these two points. The default for each layer is three integration
points. The element can have variable thickness, as a tabular function of global/local coordinates or
node numbers (SECFUNCTION).
Element loads are described in Nodal Loading (p. 49). Pressure may be input as surface loads on the
and the corners of the interfaces between layers. The first corner temperature T1 defaults to TUNIF. If
all other temperatures are unspecified, they default to T1. If KEYOPT(1) = 0 and exactly NL+1 (where
NL is the number of layers in the shell section) temperatures are input, one temperature is used for the
bottom corners of each layer, and the last temperature is for the top corners of the top layer. If KEYOPT(1)
= 1 and if exactly NL temperatures are input, one temperature is used for the two corners of each layer;
that is, T1 is used for T1 and T2; T2 (as input) is used for T3 and T4, etc. For any other input patterns,
Nodal forces, if any, should be input on a full 360° basis.
KEYOPT(1) is the membrane option. When KEYOPT(1) = 1, the element uses one integration point
through-the-thickness and accounts for only membrane stiffness (that is, the bending and transverse
shear stiffness are ignored).
KEYOPT(2) controls the torsion capability. When KEYOPT(2) = 1, the element allows constant torsion by
allowing a translational degree of freedom UZ in the circumferential direction.
KEYOPT(3) is used to include or suppress internal nodes. When KEYOPT(3) = 2, the element contains an
extra internal node and adopts a two-point integration rule. By default, the element uses one-point in-
tegration scheme (see Figure 1 (p. 1105)). Internal nodes are not accessible to users. Therefore, boundary
conditions/loading can not be specified on those nodes.
SHELL208 includes the effects of transverse shear deformation. The transverse shear stiffness E11 can
be specified using SECCONTROLS. For a single-layered shell with isotropic material, default transverse
shear stiffness is kGh, in which k = 5/6, G is the shear modulus, and h is the thickness of the shell.
Set KEYOPT(8) = 2 to store midsurface results in the results file for single- or multi-layer shell elements.
If you use SHELL,MID, you will see these calculated values, rather than the average of the TOP and
BOTTOM results. You should use this option to access these correct midsurface results (membrane results)
for those analyses where averaging TOP and BOTTOM results is inappropriate. Examples include midsur-
face stresses and strains with nonlinear material behavior, and midsurface results after mode combinations
Set KEYOPT(9) = 1 to read initial thickness data from a user subroutine.
SHELL208

Nodes
I, J
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, ROTZ -- If KEYOPT(1) = 0 and KEYOPT(2) = 0

UX, UY -- If KEYOPT(1) = 1 and KEYOPT(2) = 0
UX, UY, UZ, ROTZ -- If KEYOPT(1) = 0 and KEYOPT(2) = 1
UX, UY, UZ -- If KEYOPT(1) = 1 and KEYOPT(2) = 1
Real Constants
None
Section Controls
E11, ADMSUA
Material Properties
DENS, GXY, GYZ, GXZ,
ALPD, BETD
Surface Loads
Pressures --
face 1 (I-J) (top, in -N direction),

face 2 (I-J) (bottom, in +N direction)
Body Loads
Temperatures --
For KEYOPT(1) = 0:
T1, T2 (corresponding to nodes I and J) at bottom of layer 1, and T3, T4 (corresponding to
nodes I and J) between layers 1-2. A similar relationship exists for all layers, ending with
temperatures at the top of layer NL. Hence, for one-layer elements, four temperatures are
used.
For KEYOPT(1) = 1:
T1, T2 for layer 1; T3, T4 for layer 2; similarly for all layers (2 * NL maximum). Hence, for one-
layer elements, two temperatures are used.
Special Features
Birth and death

Elasticity
Hyperelasticity
Initial state
SHELL208
Large deflection
Large strain
Linear perturbation
Plasticity
Stress stiffening
Viscoelasticity
KEYOPT(1)
Element stiffness:
0 --
Bending and membrane stiffness (default).
1 --
Membrane stiffness only.
KEYOPT(2)
Torsion capability:
0 --
Excluded (default).
1 --
Included.
KEYOPT(3)
Extra internal node option:
0 --
Suppress extra internal node (default).
2 --
Include extra internal node.
KEYOPT(8)
0 --
Store data for BOTTOM of bottom layer and TOP of top layer (default).
1 --
Store data for TOP and BOTTOM for all layers.
2 --
Store data for TOP, BOTTOM, and MID for all layers. (The volume of data may be excessive.)
KEYOPT(9)
User-defined thickness:
0 --
No user subroutine to provide initial thickness (default).
1 --
See the Guide to ANSYS User Programmable Features for information about user-written subroutines
SHELL208


KEYOPT(8) controls the amount of data output on the result file for processing with the LAYER command.
Interlaminar shear stress is available at the layer interfaces. Setting KEYOPT(8) = 1 or 2 is necessary for
these stresses to be output in POST1. A general description of solution output is given in Solution Out-
the SMISC option at the element centroid only. The transverse shear force Q13 is available only in res-
ultant form: that is, use SMISC,5. Likewise, the transverse shear strain γ13 is constant through the
thickness and only available as a SMISC item (SMISC,10).
ANSYS computes moments (M11, M22) with respect to the shell reference plane. By default, ANSYS
to the midplane, moments with respect to the midplane ( M11, M22 ) can be recovered from stress res-
ultants with respect to the reference plane as follows:
M11 = M11 − L × N11
M22 = M22 − L × N22
output processing tools; you should use the OUTRES command to ensure that the required results are
stored in the database.
SHELL208
Figure 2 SHELL208 Element Stress Output
SY
SX (TOP)
SX SX (MID)
SX (BOT)
M11
N11
x
z y M22
I
x J
N22
available.

Name Definition O R
NODES Nodes - I, J - Y
VOLU: Volume - Y
PRES Pressures P1 (top) at NODES I, J; P2 (bottom) at NODES - Y
I, J
TEMP Temperatures T1, T2 at bottom of layer 1, T3, T4 - Y
SHELL208
Name Definition O R
ending with temperatures at top of layer NL (2*(NL+1)
maximum)
S:X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, Stresses 3 1
XZ
EPEL:X, Y, Z, Elastic strains 3 1
XY,YZ,XZ
EPEL:EQV Equivalent elastic strain - 1
EPTH:X, Y, Z, Thermal strains 3 1
XY,YZ,XZ
EPTH:EQV Equivalent thermal strain - 1
EPPL:X, Y, Z, Average plastic strains 3 2
XY,YZ,XZ
EPPL:EQV Equivalent plastic strain - 2
,YZ,XZ
EPCR:EQV Equivalent creep strain - 2
EPTO:X, Y, Z Total mechanical strains (EPEL+EPPL+EPCR) 3 -
,XY,YZ,XZ
EPTO:EQV Total equivalent mechanical strains - -
NL:SRAT Plastic yielding (1 = actively yielding, 0 = not yielding) - 2
SEND:Elastic, Strain energy densities - 2
Plastic, Creep
M11, M22 Out-of-plane moments (per unit length) - Y
Q13 Transverse shear forces (per unit length) - Y
E11, E22, E12 Membrane strains - Y
K11, K22 Curvatures - Y
γ13 Transverse shear strain - Y
SHELL208
Name Definition O R
from the element x-axis toward the element y-axis in
degrees)
Sb: 11, 22 Bending stresses - Y
St: 13 Averaged transverse shear stresses - Y
Name
Item
E
I, J
sequence number for data at nodes I, J.

Quantity Item E I J
Name
N11 SMISC 1 - -
N22 SMISC 2 - -
N12 SMISC 3 - -
M11 SMISC 4 - -
M22 SMISC 5 - -
SHELL208

Quantity Item E I J
Name
Q13 SMISC 6 - -
ε11 SMISC 7 - -
ε22 SMISC 8 - -
ε12 SMISC 9 - -
k11 SMISC 10 - -
k22 SMISC 11 - -
γ13 SMISC 12 - -
THICK SMISC 13 - -
P1 SMISC - 14 15
P2 SMISC - 16 17
Sm: 11 SMISC 18 - -
Sm: 22 SMISC 19 - -
Sm: 12 SMISC 20 - -
Sb: 11 SMISC 21 - -
Sb: 22 SMISC 22 - -
Sp: 11 (at SMISC 23 - -
shell bot-
tom)
Sp: 22 (at SMISC 24 - -
shell bot-
tom)
Sp: 12 (at SMISC 25 - -
shell bot-
tom)
Sp: 11 (at SMISC 26 - -
shell top)
Sp: 22 (at SMISC 27 - -
shell top)
Sp: 12 (at SMISC 28 - -
shell top)
St: 13 SMISC 29 - -
ity
Name
ILSXZ SMISC 8 * (i - 1) + 31 8 * (NL - 1) + 32
ILSYZ SMISC 8 * (i - 1) + 33 8 * (NL - 1) + 34
ILSUM SMISC 8 * (i - 1) + 35 8 * (NL - 1) + 36
ILANG SMISC 8 * (i - 1) + 37 8 * (NL - 1) + 38
SHELL208

• The axisymmetric shell element must be defined in the global X-Y plane with the Y-axis the axis
of symmetry.
• The element cannot have a zero length.
• Zero thickness elements, or elements tapering down to a zero thickness at any corner, are not al-
lowed (but zero thickness layers are allowed).
however, normals to the center plane before deformation are assumed to remain straight after
deformation.
• Transverse shear stiffness of the shell section is estimated by an energy equivalence procedure (of
the generalized section forces & strains vs. the material point stresses and strains). The accuracy of
this calculation may be adversely affected if the ratio of material stiffnesses (Young's moduli)
between adjacent layers is very high.
uncoupled bending in each direction. If accurate edge interlaminar shear stresses are required,
shell-to-solid submodeling should be used.
• The section definition permits use of hyperelastic material models and elastoplastic material models
in laminate definition. However, the accuracy of the solution is primarily governed by fundamental
assumptions of shell theory. The applicability of shell theory in such cases is best understood by
using a comparable solid model.
• For nonlinear applications, this element works best with full Newton-Raphson solution scheme
(NROPT,FULL,ON).
• In a nonlinear analysis, the solution process terminates if the thickness at any integration point
that was defined with a nonzero thickness vanishes (within a small numerical tolerance).
• SHELL208 with an internal node cannot be used in substructures.

ANSYS Professional
SHELL209

The SHELL209 element is suitable for analyzing thin to moderately thick axisymmetric shell structures.
It is a three-node element with three degrees of freedom at each node: translations in the X, Y directions,
and a rotation about the Z-axis. A fourth translational degree of freedom in z direction can be included
to model uniform torsion (KEYOPT(2) = 1). When the membrane option is used, the rotational degree
of freedom is excluded. (For higher efficiency, the two-node element SHELL208 may be more suitable.)
The element is well suited for linear, large rotation, and/or large strain nonlinear applications. Changes
in shell thickness and follower effects of distributed pressures are accounted for in nonlinear analyses,
and it can be used for layered applications for modeling laminated composite shells or sandwich con-
struction. See SHELL209 in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for more details about this element.
1 Integration points
2
K
Y
Integration points
x
z
X I
SHELL209 Input Data

Figure 1 (p. 1115) shows the geometry, node locations, and element coordinate system for this element.
The element is defined by three nodes. For material property labels, the local x-direction corresponds
to the meridional direction of the shell element. The local y-direction is the circumferential. The local
z-direction corresponds to the through-the-thickness direction. Element formulation is based on logar-
ithmic strain and true stress measures. Element kinematics allows for finite membrane strains (stretching).
However, the curvature changes within an increment are assumed to be small.
The shell thickness and more general properties (such as material and number of integration points
through the thickness) are specified via section commands (SECTYPE, SECDATA and SECCONTROLS).
Shell section commands allow for both single-layered and composite shell definitions. You can designate
the number of integration points (1, 3, 5, 7, or 9) located through the thickness of each layer. If only
one, the integration point is always located midway between the top and the bottom surfaces. If three
or more, two points are located on the top and the bottom surfaces respectively and the remaining
SHELL209
points are distributed evenly between these two points. The default for each layer is three integration
points. The element can have variable thickness, as a tabular function of global/local coordinates or
node numbers (SECFUNCTION).
Element loads are described in Nodal Loading (p. 49). Pressure may be input as surface loads on the
Temperatures can be input as element body loads at the corners of the outside faces of the element
and the corners of the interfaces between layers. The first corner temperature T1 defaults to TUNIF. If
all other temperatures are unspecified, they default to T1. If KEYOPT(1) = 0 and exactly NL+1 (where
NL is the number of layers in the shell section) temperatures are input, one temperature is used for the
bottom corners of each layer, and the last temperature is for the top corners of the top layer. If KEYOPT(1)
= 1 and if exactly NL temperatures are input, one temperature is used for the two corners of each layer.
That is, T1 is used for T1, T2, and T3; T2 (as input) is used for T4, T5, and T6, etc. For any other input
patterns, unspecified temperatures default to TUNIF.
Nodal forces, if any, should be input on a full 360° basis.
KEYOPT(1) is the membrane option. When KEYOPT(1) = 1, the element uses one integration point
through-the-thickness and accounts for only membrane stiffness (that is, the bending and transverse
shear stiffness are ignored).
KEYOPT(2) controls the torsion capability. When KEYOPT(2) = 1, the element allows constant torsion by
allowing a translational degree of freedom UZ in the circumferential direction.
SHELL209 includes the effects of transverse shear deformation. The transverse shear stiffness E11 can
be specified with SECCONTROLS. For a single-layered shell with isotropic material, default transverse
shear stiffness is kGh, in which k = 5/6, G is the shear modulus, and h is the thickness of the shell.
Set KEYOPT(8) = 2 to store midsurface results in the results file for single or multi-layer shell elements.
BOTTOM results. You should use this option to access these correct midsurface results (membrane results)
for those analyses where averaging TOP and BOTTOM results is inappropriate. Examples include midsur-
face stresses and strains with nonlinear material behavior, and midsurface results after mode combinations
Set KEYOPT(9) = 1 to read initial thickness data from a user subroutine.
"SHELL209 Input Summary" (p. 1116) gives a summary of the element input. A general description of element
input is given in Element Input (p. 43)

Nodes
I, J, K
SHELL209
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, ROTZ -- If KEYOPT(1) = 0 and KEYOPT(2) = 0

UX, UY -- If KEYOPT(1) = 1 and KEYOPT(2) = 0
UX, UY, UZ, ROTZ -- If KEYOPT(1) = 0 and KEYOPT(2) = 1
UX, UY, UZ -- If KEYOPT(1) = 1 and KEYOPT(2) = 1
Real Constants
None
Section Controls
E11, ADMSUA
Material Properties
DENS, GXY, GYZ,
GXZ, ALPD, BETD
Surface Loads
Pressures --
face 1 (I-J-K) (top, in -N direction),

face 2 (I-J-K) (bottom, in +N direction)
Body Loads
Temperatures --
For KEYOPT(1) = 0:
T1, T2 T3 (corresponding to nodes I, J, and K) at bottom of layer 1, and T4, T5, T6 (corres-
ponding to nodes I, J, and K) between layers 1-2. A similar relationship exists for all layers,
ending with temperatures at the top of layer NL. For one-layer elements, therefore, six
temperatures are used.
For KEYOPT(1) = 1:
T1, T2, T3 for layer 1; T4, T5, T6 for layer 2; similarly for all layers (3 * NL maximum). Hence,
for one-layer elements, three temperatures are used.
Special Features
Birth and death

Elasticity
Hyperelasticity
Initial state
Large deflection
Large strain
Linear perturbation
Plasticity
Stress stiffening
Viscoelasticity
SHELL209
KEYOPT(1)
Element stiffness:
0 --
Bending and membrane stiffness (default).
1 --
Membrane stiffness only.
KEYOPT(2)
Torsion capability:
0 --
Excluded (default).
1 --
Included.
KEYOPT(8)
0 --
Store data for BOTTOM of bottom layer and TOP of top layer (default).
1 --
Store data for TOP and BOTTOM for all layers.
2 --
Store data for TOP, BOTTOM, and MID for all layers. (The volume of data may be excessive.)
KEYOPT(9)
User-defined thickness:
0 --
No user subroutine to provide initial thickness (default).
1 --
See the Guide to ANSYS User Programmable Features for information about user-written sub-
routines.


KEYOPT(8) controls the amount of data output on the result file for processing with the LAYER command.
Interlaminar shear stress is available at the layer interfaces. Setting KEYOPT(8) = 1 or 2 is necessary for
these stresses to be output in POST1. A general description of solution output is given in Solution Out-
SHELL209
the SMISC option at the element centroid only. The transverse shear force Q13 are available only in
resultant form: that is, use SMISC,5. Likewise, the transverse shear strain.
γ13 is constant through the thickness and only available as a SMISC item (SMISC,10).
ANSYS computes moments (M11, M22) with respect to the shell reference plane. By default, ANSYS
to the midplane, moments with respect to the midplane ( M11, M22 ) can be recovered from stress res-
ultants with respect to the reference plane as follows:
M11 = M11 − L × N11
M22 = M22 − L × N22
output processing tools; therefore, we suggest using OUTRES command to ensure that the required
results are stored in the database.
Figure 2 SHELL209 Element Stress Output
SY
SX (TOP)
SX SX (MID)
SX (BOT)
M11
N11
x
z y M22
I K
x J
N22
SHELL209
available.

Name Definition O R
NODES Nodes - I, J, K - Y
VOLU: Volume - Y
PRES Pressures P1 (top) at NODES I, J; P2 (bottom) at NODES - Y
I, J
TEMP Temperatures T1, T2 at bottom of layer 1, T3, T4 - Y
ending with temperatures at top of layer NL (2*(NL+1)
maximum)
XZ
EPEL:X, Y, Z, Elastic strains 3 1
XY,YZ,XZ
EPEL:EQV Equivalent elastic strain - 1
EPTH:X, Y, Z, Thermal strains 3 1
XY,YZ,XZ
EPTH:EQV Equivalent thermal strain - 1
EPPL:X, Y, Z, Average plastic strains 3 2
XY,YZ,XZ
EPPL:EQV Equivalent plastic strain - 2
EPCR:X, Y, Z, Average creep strains 3 2
XY,YZ,XZ
EPCR:EQV Equivalent creep strain - 2
EPTO:X, Y, Z Total mechanical strains (EPEL+EPPL+EPCR) 3 -
,XY,YZ,XZ
EPTO:EQV Total equivalent mechanical strains - -
NL:SRAT Plastic yielding (1 = actively yielding, 0 = not yielding) - 2
SHELL209
Name Definition O R
SEND:Elastic, Strain energy densities - 2
Plastic, Creep
M11, M22 Out-of-plane moments (per unit length) - Y
Q13 Transverse shear forces (per unit length) - Y
E11, E22, E12 Membrane strains - Y
K11, K22 Curvatures - Y
γ13 Transverse shear strain - Y
from the element x-axis toward the element y-axis in
degrees)
Sb: 11, 22 Bending stresses - Y
St: 13 Averaged transverse shear stresses - Y
Name
Item
SHELL209
E
I, J, K
sequence number for data at nodes I, J, K.

Quantity Item E I J K
Name
N11 SMISC 1 - - -
N22 SMISC 2 - - -
N12 SMISC 3 - - -
M11 SMISC 4 - - -
M22 SMISC 5 - - -
Q13 SMISC 6 - - -
ε11 SMISC 7 - - -
ε22 SMISC 8 - - -
ε12 SMISC 9 - - -
k11 SMISC 10 - - -
k22 SMISC 11 - - -
γ13 SMISC 12 - - -
THICK SMISC 13 - - -
P1 SMISC - 14 15 16
P2 SMISC - 17 18 19
Sm: 11 SMISC 18 - - -
Sm: 22 SMISC 19 - - -
Sm: 12 SMISC 20 - - -
Sb: 11 SMISC 21 - - -
Sb: 22 SMISC 22 - - -
Sp: 11 (at SMISC 23 - - -
shell bot-
tom)
Sp: 22 (at SMISC 24 - - -
shell bot-
tom)
Sp: 12 (at SMISC 25 - - -
shell bot-
tom)
Sp: 11 (at SMISC 26 - - -
shell top)
Sp: 22 (at SMISC 27 - - -
shell top)
SHELL209

Quantity Item E I J K
Name
Sp: 12 (at SMISC 28 - - -
shell top)
St: 13 SMISC 29 - - -

Quantity Item Bottom of Layer i Top of Layer NL
Name
ILSXZ SMISC 8 * (i - 1) + 31 8 * (NL - 1) + 32
ILSYZ SMISC 8 * (i - 1) + 33 8 * (NL - 1) + 34
ILSUM SMISC 8 * (i - 1) + 35 8 * (NL - 1) + 36
ILANG SMISC 8 * (i - 1) + 37 8 * (NL - 1) + 38

• The axisymmetric shell element must be defined in the global X-Y plane with the Y-axis the axis
of symmetry.
• The element cannot have a zero length.
• Zero thickness elements, or elements tapering down to a zero thickness at any corner, are not al-
lowed (but zero thickness layers are allowed).
however, normals to the center plane before deformation are assumed to remain straight after
deformation.
• Transverse shear stiffness of the shell section is estimated by an energy equivalence procedure (of
the generalized section forces & strains vs. the material point stresses and strains). The accuracy of
this calculation may be adversely affected if the ratio of material stiffnesses (Young's moduli)
between adjacent layers is very high.
uncoupled bending in each direction. If accurate edge interlaminar shear stresses are required,
shell-to-solid submodeling should be used.
• The section definition permits use of hyperelastic material models and elastoplastic material models
in laminate definition. However, the accuracy of the solution is primarily governed by fundamental
assumptions of shell theory. The applicability of shell theory in such cases is best understood by
using a comparable solid model.
• For nonlinear applications, this element works best with full Newton-Raphson solution scheme
(NROPT,FULL,ON).
• In a nonlinear analysis, the solution process terminates if the thickness at any integration point
that was defined with a nonzero thickness vanishes (within a small numerical tolerance).
SHELL209

ANSYS Professional
CPT212
2-D 4-Node Coupled Pore-Pressure Mechanical Solid
MP ME <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS
CPT212 Element Description

CPT212 is a 2-D four-node coupled pore-pressure mechanical solid element. The element has bilinear
displacement behavior.
The element is defined by four nodes having three degrees of freedom at each node: translations in
the nodal x and y directions, and one pore-pressure degree of freedom at each node.
CPT212 can be used as a plane strain or axisymmetric element. The element has stress stiffening, large
deflection, and large strain capabilities. Various printout options are also available.
See CPT212 in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for more details about this element.
Figure 1 CPT212 Geometry
L 3 K
K, L
4
2
Y I
(or axial) I J
1 J (Triangular Option -
X (or radial) not recommended)
CPT212 Input Data

The geometry and node locations for this element are shown in Figure 1 (p. 1125).
A degenerated triangular-shaped element can be formed by defining the same node number for nodes
K and L. In addition to the nodes, the element input data includes the orthotropic material properties.
Orthotropic material directions correspond to the element coordinate directions. (The element coordinate
system orientation is described in Coordinate Systems (p. 56).)
Temperatures can be input as element body loads at the nodes. The node I temperature T(I) defaults
Input the nodal forces, if any, per unit of depth for a plane analysis and on a full 360° basis for an
axisymmetric analysis.
CPT212
properties and strain/stress output. Use the RSYS command to choose output that follows the material
coordinate system or the global coordinate system.
The effects of pressure load stiffness are automatically included for this element, and the element
generally produces an unsymmetric matrix. To avoid convergence difficulty, issue the NROPT,UNSYM
command to use the unsymmetric solver.
The following table summarizes the element input. For a general description of element input, see Element
Input (p. 43).
CPT212 Input Summary

Nodes
I, J, K, L
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, PRES
Real Constants
None
Material Properties
Surface Loads
Pressures --
face 1 (J-I), face 2 (K-J), face 3 (I-K), face 4 (I-L)
Body Loads
Temperatures --
T(I), T(J), T(K), T(L)
Special Features --
Elasticity
Large deflection
Large strain
Porous Media
Stress stiffening
KEYOPT(3)
Element behavior:
1 --
Axisymmetric
2 --
Plane strain (Z strain = 0.0) (default)
CPT212 Output Data

CPT212
• Nodal displacements and pore pressure included in the overall nodal solution
• Additional element output as shown in Table 1: CPT212 Element Output Definitions (p. 1127)
The element stress directions are parallel to the element coordinate system, as shown in Figure 2 (p. 1127).
Figure 2 CPT212 Stress Output
L 3 K
SY
4
SX 2
Y
(or axial)
I
X (or radial) 1 J
available.
Table 1 CPT212 Element Output Definitions

Name Definition O R
THICK Thickness - Y
VOLU Volume - Y
TEMP Temperatures T(I), T(J), T(K), T(L) - `Y
EPEL:1, 2, 3 Principal elastic strains - Y
CPT212
Name Definition O R
EPEL:EQV Equivalent elastic strain Y Y

For axisymmetric solutions in a global coordinate system, the X, Y, XY, and Z stress and strain outputs
correspond to the radial, axial, in-plane shear, and hoop stresses and strains, respectively.
Table 2: CPT212 Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 1128) lists output available via the ETABLE command using
the Sequence Number method. For more information, see Creating an Element Table in the Basic Ana-
lysis Guide and The Item and Sequence Number Table (p. 52) in this document. The table uses the following
notation:
Name
output quantity as defined in the Table 1: CPT212 Element Output Definitions (p. 1127)
Item
E
I,J,K,L
Table 2 CPT212 Item and Sequence Numbers

ity
Name
P1 SMISC - 2 1 - - - - - -
P2 SMISC - - 4 3 - - - - -
P3 SMISC - - - 6 5 - - - -
P4 SMISC - 7 - - 8 - - - -
CPT212 Assumptions and Restrictions

• You can form a triangular element by defining duplicate K and L node numbers. (For more information,
see Degenerated Shape Elements (p. 39).)
• Stress stiffening is always included in geometrically nonlinear analyses (NLGEOM,ON). It is ignored in
geometrically linear analyses (NLGEOM,OFF). Prestress effects can be activated by the PSTRES command.
CPT212
CPT212 Product Restrictions

CPT213
MP ME <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS

CPT213 is a higher-order 2-D eight-node coupled pore-pressure mechanical solid element. The element
has quadratic displacement behavior and is well suited to modeling curved boundaries.
The element is defined by eight nodes having three degrees of freedom at each corner node:
• The translations in the nodal x and y directions

• One pore-pressure degree of freedom and two degrees of freedom at the midside nodes: the
translations in the nodal x and y directions.
CPT213 can be used as a plane strain or axisymmetric element. The element has stress stiffening, large
deflection, and large strain capabilities. Various printout options are also available. See CPT213 in the
L
3
K
O
K, L, O
4
P
2
N P N
I I
M J
M
J
1 Degenerated
Y triangle
(or axial) KEYOPT(1) = 0
X (or radial)
A higher-order version of this element is CPT217.
CPT213 Input Data

A degenerated triangular-shaped element can be formed by defining the same node number for nodes
K, L and O. In addition to the nodes, the element input data includes the orthotropic material properties.
Orthotropic material directions correspond to the element coordinate directions. (The element coordinate
system orientation is described in Coordinate Systems (p. 56).)
CPT213
The nodal forces, if any, should be input per unit of depth for a plane analysis and on a full 360° basis
for an axisymmetric analysis.
properties and strain/stress output. Use ESYS to choose output that follows the material coordinate
system or the global coordinate system.
element input.

Nodes
I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, PRES
Real Constants
None
Material Properties
Surface Loads
Pressures --
face 1 (J-I), face 2 (K-J), face 3 (I-K), face 4 (I-L)
Body Loads
Temperatures --
Special Features
Elasticity
Large deflection
Large strain
Porous Media
Stress stiffening
CPT213
KEYOPT(3)
Element behavior:
1 --
Axisymmetric
2 --
Plane strain (Z strain = 0.0) (default)
CPT213 Output Data

• Additional element output as shown in Table 1: CPT213 Element Output Definitions (p. 1133).
As illustrated in Figure 2 (p. 1133), the element stress directions are parallel to the element coordinate
system. A general description of solution output is given in Solution Output (p. 50). See the Basic Ana-
lysis Guide for ways to view results.
L O K
SY
P
Y SX N
(or axial)
I
X (or radial) J
M
available.

Name Definition O R
THICK Thickness - Y
VOLU Volume - Y
CPT213
Name Definition O R
S: INT Stress intensity - Y

For axisymmetric solutions, the X, Y, XY, and Z stress and strain outputs correspond to the radial, axial,
in-plane shear, and hoop stresses and strains.
The Item and Sequence Number Table (p. 52) in this document for more information. The following
notation is used in Table 2: CPT213 Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 1134):
Name
output quantity as defined in Table 1: CPT213 Element Output Definitions (p. 1133)
Item
E
I,J,...,P

ity
Name
P1 SMISC - 2 1 - - - - - -
P2 SMISC - - 4 3 - - - - -
P3 SMISC - - - 6 5 - - - -
P4 SMISC - 7 - - 8 - - - -
CPT213

• The element must lie in a global X-Y plane as shown in Figure 1 (p. 1131) and the Y-axis must be the
axis of symmetry for axisymmetric analyses. An axisymmetric structure should be modeled in the
+X quadrants.
• A triangular element can be formed by defining duplicate K-L-O node numbers. (See Degenerated
Shape Elements (p. 39).) For these degenerated elements, the triangular shape function is used and
the solution is the same as for the regular triangular 6-node elements.
command.

COMBI214
2-D Spring-Damper Bearing
COMBI214 Element Description

COMBI214 has longitudinal as well as cross-coupling capability in 2-D applications. It is a tension-com-
pression element with up to two degrees of freedom at each node: translations in any two nodal direc-
tions (x, y, or z). COMBI214 has two nodes plus one optional orientation node. No bending or torsion
is considered.
The spring-damper element has no mass. Masses can be added by using the appropriate mass element
(MASS21). The spring or the damping capability may be removed from the element.
A longitudinal spring/damper with torsion capabilities is available via the COMBIN14 element. A general
spring or damper is also available in the stiffness, damping or mass matrix element MATRIX27. Another
spring-damper element having its direction of action determined by the nodal coordinate directions is
COMBIN40.
For more information about this element, see COMBI214 - 2-D Spring-Damper Bearing in the Mechanical
APDL Theory Reference.
COMBI214
Figure 1 COMBI214 Geometry
K21
Bearing
C21
Rotor
K11
I J
C11
K12
C12
Y K22 C22
X
K (optional)
For linear analyses, I and J can be coincident.
COMBI214 Input Data

The geometry, node locations, and coordinate system for this element are shown in Figure 1 (p. 1138).
The element is defined by two nodes. It has stiffness characteristics K11, K22, K12 and K21 and damping
characteristics C11, C22, C12 and C21. The stiffness coefficients should have units of Force/Length, and
the damping coefficient units are Force*Time/Length. (The damping capability is not used for static or
undamped modal analyses.)
The third node is for orientation and applies to nonlinear analyses only.
For stiffness and damping real constants, either numerical values or tabular array inputs can be specified.
If specifying tabular inputs, enclose the table name within “%” characters (%tabname%).
These real constants can vary with the amplitude of the rotational velocity vector (defined via the
OMEGA or CMOMEGA command). Use the *DIM command and the primary variable OMEGS to dimension
the table and identify the variable. Because the amplitude of the rotational velocity vector is an absolute
value, only positive values of OMEGS in the table parameter are valid.
These real constants can also vary with the eccentricity (the position of the center line of the rotor)
and/or the phase shift between the displacements in the two nodal directions. Use the *DIM command
COMBI214
and the primary variable ECCENT and/or THETA to dimension the table and identify the variables. The
phase shift values unit (THETA) is the degree. ECCENT and THETA only apply to nonlinear analyses.
For more information about using tabular inputs, see Array Parameters in the ANSYS Parametric Design
Language Guide, Applying Loads Using TABLE Type Array Parameters in the Basic Analysis Guide, and
Performing a Thermal Analysis Using Tabular Boundary Conditions in the Thermal Analysis Guide.
KEYOPT(2) = 0 through 2 options define the element plane. The element operates in the nodal coordinate
system.
The KEYOPT(3) = 0 and 1 options specify whether or not the element is symmetric. When symmetric,
cross-coupling terms in stiffness and damping coefficients are equal (that is, K12 = K21 and C12 = C21).
A summary of the element input is given in "COMBI214 Input Summary" (p. 1139). A general description
COMBI214 Input Summary

Nodes
I, J, K (The K orientation node is optional and for nonlinear analyses only.)
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY (KEYOPT (2) = 0)

UY, UZ (KEYOPT (2) = 1)
UX, UZ (KEYOPT (2) = 2)
Real Constants
K11, K22, K12, K21 , C11, C22, C12, C21

Kij - (i=1,2 j=1,2) Stiffness coefficients
Cij - (i=1,2 j=1,2) Damping coefficients
Note
Real constants may be defined as table parameters as a function of the rotational velocity
(using primary variable OMEGS), the eccentricity (using primary variable ECCENT), and/or
the phase shift (using primary variable THETA).
Material Properties
None
Surface Loads
None
Body Loads
None
Special Features
Birth and death

Large deflection
Linear perturbation
Stress stiffening
COMBI214
KEYOPT(2)
Degrees of freedom selection:
0 --
Element lies in a plane parallel to the XY plane. The degrees of freedom are UX and UY. This value
option is the default.
1 --
Element lies in a plane parallel to the YZ plane. The degrees of freedom are UY and UZ.
2 --
Element lies in a plane parallel to the XZ plane. The degrees of freedom are UX and UZ.
KEYOPT(3)
Symmetry:
0 --
Element is symmetric: K12 = K21 and C12 = C21. This option is the default.
1 --
Element is not symmetric.
KEYOPT(4)
Element stiffness and damping matrices output:
0 --
Do not print element matrices.
1 --
Print element matrices at beginning of solution phase.
COMBI214 Output Data


• Additional element output as shown in Table 1: COMBI214 Element Output Definitions (p. 1140).
(1) and (2) indicate the first and second axis of the element plane defined by KEYOPT(2). For example,
if KEYOPT(2) equals 0, then (1) is the X axis and (2) is the Y axis.
available.
Table 1 COMBI214 Element Output Definitions

Name Definition O R
COMBI214
Name Definition O R
FORC1 Spring force along (1) Y Y
FORC2 Spring force along (2) Y Y
STRETCH1 Stretch of spring along (1) Y Y
STRETCH2 Stretch of spring along (2) Y Y
VELOCITY1 Velocity along (1) - Y
VELOCITY2 Velocity along (2) - Y
DAMPING FORCE1 Damping force along (1) -- Zero unless this is a Y Y
transient analysis (ANTYPE,TRANS) and damping is
present
DAMPING FORCE2 Damping force along (2) -- Zero unless this is a Y Y
transient analysis (ANTYPE,TRANS) and damping is
present
Table 2: COMBI214 Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 1141) lists output available via the ETABLE command
using the Sequence Number method. See "The General Postprocessor (POST1)" in the Basic Analysis
Guide and The Item and Sequence Number Table (p. 52) in this document for more information. The fol-
lowing notation is used in Table 2: COMBI214 Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 1141):
Name
Output quantity as defined in Table 1: COMBI214 Element Output Definitions (p. 1140)
Item
Predetermined Item label for the ETABLE command
E
Sequence number for single-valued or constant element data
Output data for COMBI214 consists of the following:
Table 2 COMBI214 Item and Sequence Numbers

Item E
FORC1 SMISC 1
FORC2 SMISC 2
STRETCH1 NMISC 1
STRETCH2 NMISC 2
VELOCITY1 NMISC 3
VELOCITY2 NMISC 4
DAMPING FORCE1 NMISC 5
DAMPING FORCE2 NMISC 6
COMBI214
COMBI214 Assumptions and Restrictions

• Nodes must lie in the plane defined by KEYOPT(2).
• The following applies to a nonlinear analysis:
-- The orientation node K is required.
-- The length of the spring-damper element must not be zero (that is, nodes I, J and K should not
be coincident because the node locations determine the spring orientation).
• Vector (IJ) must be along axis (1). Vector (KJ) must be along axis (2). Directions are considered.
• The element allows only a uniform stress in the springs.
• The following applies when KEYOPT(3) = 0 (symmetric):
-- If K12 is non-zero and K21 is zero, then K21 is set to K12.
-- If C12 is non-zero and C21 is zero, then C21 is set to C12.

• The spring or the damping capability may be deleted from the element by setting all Kij (i=1,2 j=1,2)
or all Cij (i=1,2 j=1,2) equal to zero, respectively.
• The degrees of freedom are specified in the nodal coordinate system and are the same for both nodes.
(For more information, see Elements That Operate in the Nodal Coordinate System (p. 58).) If the nodal
coordinate systems are rotated relative to each other, the same degree of freedom may be in different
directions (thereby giving possibly unexpected results).
• No moment effects are included; that is, if the nodes are offset from the lines of action, moment equi-
librium may not be satisfied.
• The element is defined such that a positive displacement of node J relative to node I tends to stretch
the spring. If, for a given set of conditions, nodes I and J are interchanged, a positive displacement of
node J relative to node I tends to compress the spring.
• Rotating damping effect (RotDamp = ON in the CORIOLIS command) is taken into account if the diag-
onal damping characteristics (C11 and C22) are equal and non zero and cross-terms (C12 and C21) are
zero.
• Rotating damping effect is ignored if the element has a real constant input as a table array.
COMBI214 Product Restrictions

ANSYS Professional
• No damping capability; Cij (i=1,2 j=1,2) are not allowed.

CPT215
MP ME <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS

CPT215 is a 3-D eight-node coupled pore-pressure mechanical solid element. The element is defined
by eight nodes having four degrees of freedom at each node: translations in the nodal x, y, and z direc-
tions, and one pore-pressure degree of freedom at each corner node.
CPT215 has elasticity, stress stiffening, large deflection, and large strain capabilities. Various printout
options are available.
For more details about this element, see CPT215 in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference.
Figure 1 CPT215 Structural Solid Geometry
4 M O,P
P
5 N
O
I K,L
6
J
M Prism Option
N
3 M,N,O,P
2
L I
K,L
K
J
I not recommended
1
Y J
X
A higher-order version of this element is CPT216.
CPT215 Input Data

The geometry and node locations for this element are shown in Figure 1 (p. 1143). A prism-shaped element
can be formed by defining the same node numbers for nodes K and L, and nodes O and P. A tetrahedral-
shaped element and a pyramid-shaped element can also be formed, as shown in the illustration. (CPT217
is a similar element, but is a 10-node tetrahedron.)
In addition to the nodes, the element input data includes the orthotropic material properties. Orthotropic
orientation is described in Coordinate Systems (p. 56).
CPT215
"CPT215 Input Summary" (p. 1144) contains a summary of element input. For a general description of element
input, see Element Input (p. 43).

Nodes
I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, UZ, PRES
Real Constants
None
Material Properties
Surface Loads
Pressures --

Body Loads
Temperatures --
Special Features
Elasticity
Large deflection
Large strain
Porous Media
Stress stiffening
CPT215
CPT215 Technology
CPT215 uses the B method (also known as selective reduced integration). This approach helps to prevent
volumetric mesh locking in nearly incompressible cases. It replaces volumetric strain at the Gauss integ-
ration point with the average volumetric strain of the elements. For more information, see the Mechan-
ical APDL Theory Reference.
CPT215 Output Data

• Additional element output as shown in Table 1: CPT215 Output Definitions (p. 1146)
A general description of solution output is given in The Item and Sequence Number Table (p. 52). See
P
O
SZ
M N
SY
SX
L
K
Z
I
Y
X J
The element stress directions are parallel to the global coordinate system.
CPT215
available.
Table 1 CPT215 Output Definitions

Name Definition O R
VOLU: Volume - Y
XZ
XZ

2. Available only at centroid as a *GET item
Table 2: CPT215 Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 1147) lists output available via ETABLE using the Sequence
Number method. See Element Table for Variables Identified By Sequence Number in the Basic Analysis
Guide and The Item and Sequence Number Table (p. 52) in this document for more information. The fol-
lowing notation is used in Table 2: CPT215 Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 1147):
Name
output quantity as defined in the Table 1: CPT215 Output Definitions (p. 1146)
Item
CPT215
I,J,...,P

ity
Name
P1 SMISC 2 1 4 3 - - - -
P2 SMISC 5 6 - - 8 7 - -
P3 SMISC - 9 10 - - 12 11 -
P4 SMISC - - 13 14 - - 16 15
P5 SMISC 18 - - 17 19 - - 20
P6 SMISC - - - - 21 22 23 24

element has two separate volumes (which occurs most frequently when the element is numbered
improperly). Elements may be numbered either as shown in Figure 1 (p. 1143) or may have the planes
• When degenerated into a tetrahedron, wedge, or pyramid element shape (described in Degenerated
Shape Elements (p. 39)), the corresponding degenerated shape functions are used. Degeneration
to a pyramidal form should be used with caution. The element sizes, when degenerated, should
be small to minimize the stress gradients. Pyramid elements are best used as filler elements or in
in geometrically linear analyses (NLGEOM,OFF). Prestress effects can be activated by the PSTRES
command.

CPT216
MP ME <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS

CPT216 is a higher-order 3-D 20-node coupled pore-pressure mechanical solid element. The element
exhibits quadratic displacement behavior and is well suited to modeling irregular meshes.
The element is defined by twenty nodes having four degrees of freedom at each corner node:
• The translations in the nodal x, y and z directions

• One pore-pressure degree of freedom
• Three degrees of freedom at the mid-side nodes: the translations in the nodal x, y and z directions.
CPT216 has elasticity, stress stiffening, large deflection, and large strain capabilities. The element can
have any spatial orientation. Various printout options are available.
See CPT216 in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for more details about this element.
M,N,O,P,U,V,W,X
Y A,B
Z
K,L,S
I T R
5 P 4 Q J
W
O
6 M,N,O,P,U,V,W,X
M
B V A
Y B Z
U
N T
A K
L S
Y 2 3 I
R
L S Q J
T Z Pyramid Option
K X
I O,P,W
Z M
R
Q 1 U V A,B
J Y N
Y Z
I K,L,S
X T
Q R
J
Prism Option
A lower-order version of this element is CPT215.
CPT216
CPT216 Input Data

element may also be formed as shown in Figure 1 (p. 1000). (CPT217 is similar, but is a 10-node tetrahedral
element.)
of element input.

Nodes
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, UZ, PRES
Real Constants
None
Material Properties
Surface Loads

CPT216
Body Loads
Temperatures --
T(I), T(J),T(K), T(L), T(M), T(N), T(O), T(P), T(Q), T(R), T(S), T(T), T(U), T(V), T(W), T(X), T(Y), T(Z), T(A), T(B)
Special Features
Elasticity
Large deflection
Large strain
Porous Media
Stress stiffening
KEYOPT(2)
Element technology:
0 --
1 --
Full integration
CPT216 Element Technology

CPT216 uses the uniform reduced integration method or the full integration method, as follows:
• Uniform reduced integration method
Helps to prevent volumetric mesh locking in nearly incompressible cases. However, hourglass mode
might propagate in the model if there are not at least two layers of elements in each direction.
• Full integration
The full integration method does not cause hourglass mode, but can cause volumetric locking in
nearly incompressible cases. This method is used primarily for purely linear analyses, or when the
model has only one layer of elements in each direction.
CPT216 Output Data

• Nodal displacements and pore pressures included in the overall nodal solution
• Additional element output as shown in Table 1: CPT216 Output Definitions (p. 1152)
CPT216
5 P 4
W
X
O
SZ 6
M V y
B
y
U N x
A
Y 2 SY 3
L SX
S
x Z
T K
I
Z R
Q 1
J
X
available.
Table 1 CPT216 Output Definitions

Name Definition O R
VOLU: Volume - Y
XZ
CPT216
Name Definition O R
EPEL:EQV Equivalent elastic strains Y Y
XZ
EPTH:EQV Equivalent thermal strains 1 1

notation is used in Table 2: CPT216 Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 1153):
Name
output quantity as defined in Table 1: CPT216 Output Definitions (p. 1152)
Item
I,J,...,B
Table information below to be provided.

ity
Name
P1 SMISC 2 1 4 3 - - - - -
P2 SMISC 5 6 - - 8 7 - -
P3 SMISC - 9 10 - - 12 11 - -
P4 SMISC - - 13 14 - - 16 15 -
P5 SMISC 18 - - 17 19 - - 20 -
P6 SMISC - - - - 21 22 23 24 -

element has two separate volumes (which occurs most frequently when the element is numbered
improperly). Elements may be numbered either as shown in Figure 1 (p. 1149) or may have the planes
CPT216
• Use at least two elements in each direction to avoid the hourglass effect when using reduced in-
tegration (KEYOPT(2) = 0).
• When degenerated into a tetrahedron, wedge, or pyramid element shape (described in Degenerated
Shape Elements (p. 39)), the corresponding degenerated shape functions are used. Degeneration
to a pyramidal form should be used with caution. The element sizes, when degenerated, should
be small to minimize the stress gradients. Pyramid elements are best used as filler elements or in
command.

CPT217
MP ME <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS

CPT217 is a higher-order 3-D 10-node coupled pore-pressure mechanical solid element. The element
has a quadratic displacement, and linear pore-pressure and temperature behavior.
The element is defined by ten nodes having four degrees of freedom at each corner node:
• The translations in the nodal x, y and z directions

• One pore-pressure degree of freedom
• Three degrees of freedom at the midside nodes: the translations in the nodal x, y and z directions.
CPT217 has elasticity, stress stiffening, large deflection, and large strain capabilities. See CPT217 in the
4
R
P
Q 3
Y 2
O K
X I N
M
Z
1
J
CPT217 Input Data

orientation is as described in Linear Material Properties in the Material Reference.
CPT217
properties and strain/stress output. Issue the RSYS command to choose output that follows the mater-
ial coordinate system or the global coordinate system.
The following table summarizes the element input. Element Input (p. 43) gives a general input description.

Nodes
I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P, Q, R
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, UZ, PRES
Real Constants
None
Material Properties
Surface Loads
Pressures --
Body Loads
Temperatures --
Special Features
Elasticity
Large deflection
Large strain
Porous Media
Stress stiffening
CPT217 Output Data

• Additional element output as shown in Table 1: CPT217 Element Output Definitions (p. 1157)
A general description of solution output is given in The Item and Sequence Number Table (p. 52). See
CPT217
SY
R
P
Y SX
Q
SZ O K
X
I x y N
Z
M
Surface Coordinate System
J
available.

Name Definition O R
VOLU: Volume - Y
XZ
XZ
CPT217
Name Definition O R
XZ
EPCR)

notation is used in the table:
Name
Output quantity as defined in Table 1: CPT217 Element Output Definitions (p. 1157)
Item
Predetermined Item label for ETABLE command
I,J,...,R
Sequence number for data at nodes I, J, ..., R

Name
P1 SMISC 2 1 3 - -
P2 SMISC 4 5 - 6 -
P3 SMISC - 7 8 9 -
P4 SMISC 11 - 10 12 -

K plane.
parabolically, along that edge. For information about using midside nodes, see Quadratic Elements
(Midside Nodes) in the Modeling and Meshing Guide.
command.
CPT217

FLUID220
3-D Acoustic Fluid 20-Node Solid Element
MP ME <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS

FLUID220 is a higher order 3-D 20-node solid element that exhibits quadratic pressure behavior. It is
used for modeling the fluid medium and the interface in fluid/structure interaction problems. Typical
applications include sound wave propagation and submerged structure dynamics. The governing
coupling of acoustic pressure and structural motion at the interface. The element node has four degrees
of freedom per node: translations in the nodal x, y and z directions, and pressure. The translations are
only applicable at nodes that are on the interface. Acceleration effects like those in sloshing problems
may be included.
FLUID220 has the capability to include damping of sound absorbing material at the interface as well
unsymmetric or damped modal full harmonic and full transient method analyses (see the description
of the TRNOPT command). When there is no structural motion, the element is also applicable to modal,
and reduced harmonic analyses. See Acoustics in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for more details
about this element. See FLUID221 for a tetrahedral option and FLUID30 for a lower order option.
M,N,O,P,U,V,W,X
Y A,B
Z
K,L,S
I T R
5 P 4 Q J
W
O
6 M,N,O,P,U,V,W,X
M
B V A
Y B Z
U
N T
A K
L S
Y 2 3 I
R
L S Q J
T Z Pyramid Option
K X
I O,P,W
Z M
R
Q 1 U V A,B
J Y N
Y Z
I K,L,S
X T
Q R
J
Prism Option
FLUID220
FLUID220 Input Data

The element is defined by 20 nodes, a reference pressure, and the isotropic material properties. The
N/m2). The speed of sound ( k / ρo ) in the fluid is input by SONC where k is the bulk modulus of the
Nodal flow rates may be specified using the F command, where both the real and imaginary components
may be applied.
Element loads are described in Node and Element Loads. Fluid-structure interfaces (FSI) may be flagged
by surface loads at the element faces as shown by the circled numbers in Figure 1 (p. 1161). Specifying
the FSI label without a value (SF, SFA, SFE) will couple the structural motion and fluid pressure at the
interface. Deleting the FSI specification (SFDELE, SFADELE, SFEDELE) removes the flag. The flag spe-
cification should be on the fluid elements at the interface. See the Coupled-Field Analysis Guide for more
information on the use of the fluid-structure interaction flag.
= CHRGD.
FLUID220

A summary of the element input is given in "FLUID220 Input Summary" (p. 1163).

Nodes
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, UZ, PRES if KEYOPT (2) = 0, 2, or 3

Real Constants

Material Properties
DENS, SONC, VISC
Surface Loads

Body Loads
Special Features
None
KEYOPT(2)
0 --
FLUID220
1 --
2 --
3 --
KEYOPT(4)
0 --
1 --


A general description of solution output is given in "FLUID220 Output Data" (p. 1164). See the Basic Ana-
available.

Name Definition O R
NODES Nodes - I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P, Q, R, S, T, U, V, W, Y Y
X, Y, Z, A, B
VOLU: Volume Y Y
FLUID220
Name Definition O R
lysis
LEVEL
volume

and Table 2: FLUID220 Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 1165) of this manual for more information. The fol-
lowing notation is used in Table 2: FLUID220 Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 1165):
Name
Item
E

ETABLE and
ity Name Input
Item E
PGX SMISC 1
PGY SMISC 2
PGZ SMISC 3
VLX SMISC 4
VLY SMISC 5
VLZ SMISC 6
PL2 SMICS 7
PRESSURE NMISC 1
PGSUM NMISC 2
VLSUM NMISC 3
SOUND PR. NMISC 4
LEVEL
FLUID220

• Element nodes may be numbered either as shown in Figure 1 (p. 1161) or may have planes IJKL and
MNOP interchanged.
• All elements must have 20 nodes. A prism-shaped element may be formed by defining duplicate
L and S and duplicate P and W nodes (see Degenerated Shape Elements (p. 39)). A tetrahedron or
pyramid shape is also available.
assumptions:
viscous material.

FLUID221
3-D Acoustic Fluid 10-Node Solid Element
MP ME <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS

FLUID221 is a higher order 3-D 10-node solid element that exhibits quadratic pressure behavior, and
is used for modeling the fluid medium and the interface in fluid-structure interaction problems. Typical
applications include sound wave propagation and submerged structure dynamics. The governing
equation for acoustics, namely the 3-D wave equation, has been discretized, taking into account the
coupling of acoustic pressure and structural motion at the interface. The element has four degrees of
freedom per node: translations in the nodal x, y and z directions, and pressure. The translations are
applicable only at nodes that are on the interface. Acceleration effects such as in sloshing problems
may be included.
The element has the capability to include damping of sound absorbing material at the interface as well
unsymmetric or damped modal, full harmonic , and full transient method analyses (see the description
of the TRNOPT command). When there is no structural motion, the element is also applicable to modal,
and reduced harmonic analyses. See Acoustics in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for more details
about this element. See FLUID220 for a hexahedral option and FLUID30 for a lower order option.
4
R
P
Q 3
Y 2
O K
X I N
M
Z
1
J
FLUID221 Input Data

The element is defined by ten nodes, a reference pressure, and the isotropic material properties. The
N/m2). The speed of sound ( k / ρo ) in the fluid is input by SONC where k is the bulk modulus of the
FLUID221
Nodal flow rates may be specified using the F command, where both the real and imaginary components
may be applied.
Element loads are described in Node and Element Loads. Fluid-structure interfaces (FSI) may be flagged
by surface loads at the element faces as shown by the circled numbers in Figure 1 (p. 1167). Specifying
the FSI label without a value (SF, SFA, SFE) will couple the structural motion and fluid pressure at the
interface. Deleting the FSI specification (SFDELE, SFADELE, SFEDELE) removes the flag. The flag spe-
cification should be on the fluid elements at the interface. See Acoustics in the Coupled-Field Analysis
Guide for more information on the use of the fluid-structure interaction flag.
= CHRGD.
FLUID221
element input is given in "FLUID221 Input Data" (p. 1167).

Nodes
I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P, Q, R
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, UZ, PRES if KEYOPT (2) = 0,2, or 3

Real Constants

Material Properties
DENS, SONC, VISC
Surface Loads

Body Loads
Special Features
None
KEYOPT(2)
0 --
1 --
2 --
3 --
KEYOPT(4)
FLUID221
0 --
1 --


A general description of solution output is given in "FLUID221 Output Data" (p. 1170). See the Basic Ana-
available.

Name Definition O R
NODES odes - I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P, Q, R Y Y
VOLU: Volume Y Y
lysis
LEVEL
FLUID221
Name Definition O R
volume

and Table 2: FLUID221 Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 1171) of this manual for more information. The fol-
lowing notation is used in Table 2: FLUID221 Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 1171):
Name
Item
E

ETABLE and
ity Name Input
Item E
PGX SMISC 1
PGY SMISC 2
PGZ SMISC 3
VLX SMISC 4
VLY SMISC 5
VLZ SMISC 6
PL2 SMICS 7
PRESSURE NMISC 1
PGSUM NMISC 2
VLSUM NMISC 3
SOUND PR. NMISC 4
LEVEL

• Element nodes may be numbered either as shown in Figure 1 (p. 1167).
FLUID221
assumptions:
viscous material.

PLANE223
MP ME <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS

PLANE223 has the following capabilities:
• Structural-Thermal
• Piezoresistive
• Electroelastic
• Piezoelectric
• Thermal-Electric
• Structural-Thermoelectric
• Thermal-Piezoelectric
• Structural-Diffusion
• Thermal-Diffusion
• Structural-Thermal-Diffusion
The element has eight nodes with up to four degrees of freedom per node. Structural capabilities include
elasticity, plasticity, viscoelasticity, viscoplasticity, creep, large strain, large deflection, stress stiffening
effects, and prestress effects. Thermoelectric capabilities include Seebeck, Peltier, and Thomson effects,
as well as Joule heating. In addition to thermal expansion, structural-thermal capabilities include the
piezocaloric effect in dynamic analyses. The Coriolis effect is available for analyses with structural degrees
of freedom. The thermoplastic effect is available for analyses with structural and thermal degrees of
freedom. The diffusion expansion effect is available for analyses with structural and diffusion degrees
of freedom. See PLANE223 in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for more details about this element.
L
3
K K, L, O
O
4
Y P P N
(or axial) 2
N I
M J
I
X (or radial) M Tri Option
J
1
PLANE223
PLANE223 Input Data

The element input data includes eight nodes and structural, thermal, and electrical material properties.
The type of units (MKS or user defined) is specified through the EMUNIT command. EMUNIT also de-
termines the value of free-space permittivity EPZRO. The EMUNIT defaults are MKS units and EPZRO =
8.85e-12 Farads/meter.
KEYOPT(1) determines the element DOF set and the corresponding force labels and reaction solution.
KEYOPT(1) is set equal to the sum of the field keys shown in Table 1: PLANE223 Field Keys (p. 1174). For
example, KEYOPT(1) is set to 11 for a structural-thermal analysis (structural field key + thermal field key
= 1 + 10). For a structural-thermal analysis, UX, UY, and TEMP are the DOF labels and force and heat
flow are the reaction solution.
Table 1 PLANE223 Field Keys

Field Field DOF Label Force Label Reaction Solution
Key
Structural 1 UX, UY FX, FY Force
Thermal 10 TEMP HEAT Heat Flow
Electric Conduction 100 VOLT AMPS Electric Current
Electrostatic 1000 VOLT CHRG Electric Charge
Diffusion 100000 CONC RATE Diffusion Flow Rate
The coupled-field analysis KEYOPT(1) settings, DOF labels, force labels, reaction solutions, and analysis
types are shown in the following table.
Table 2 PLANE223 Coupled-Field Analyses

Coupled-Field Analys- KEY- DOF Label Force La- Reaction Analysis Type
is OPT(1) bel Solution
Structural-Thermal [1], 11 UX, FX, FY, Force, Static
[2] UY, HEAT Heat
TEMP Flow Full Har-
monic
Full Transi-
ent
Piezoresistive 101 UX, FX, FY, Force, Static
UY, AMPS Elec-
VOLT tric Full Transi-
Cur- ent
rent
Electroelastic 1001 [3] UX, FX, FY, Force, Static
UY, CHRG Elec-
VOLT tric Full Transi-
Charge ent
(posit-
ive)
PLANE223
Piezoelectric 1001 [3] UX, FX, FY, Force, Static
UY, CHRG Elec-
VOLT tric Modal
Charge
(negat- Full Har-
ive) monic
Full Transi-
ent
Thermal-Electric 110 TEMP, HEAT, Heat Static
VOLT AMPS Flow,
Elec- Full Transi-
tric ent
Cur-
rent
Structural-Thermoelec- 111 UX, FX, FY, Force, Static
tric [1] UY, HEAT, Heat
TEMP, AMPS Flow, Full Transi-
VOLT Elec- ent
tric
Cur-
rent
Thermal-Piezoelectric 1011 UX, FX, FY, Force, Static
[1], [2] UY, HEAT, Heat
TEMP, CHRG Flow, Full Har-
VOLT Elec- monic
tric
Charge Full Transi-
(negat- ent
ive)
Structural-Diffusion [1] 100001 UX, FX, FY, Force, Static
UY, FZ,
UZ, Diffu- Full Transi-
RATE sion ent
CONC Flow
Rate
Thermal-Diffusion 100010 TEMP, HEAT, Heat Static
Flow,
CONC RATE Full Transi-
Diffu- ent
sion
Flow
Rate
Structural-Thermal-Dif- 100011 UX, FX, FY, Force, Static
fusion [1] UY, FZ,
UZ, Heat Full Transi-
HEAT, Flow, ent
TEMP,
PLANE223
CONC RATE Diffu-
sion
Flow
Rate
1. For static and full transient analyses, KEYOPT(2) can specify a strong (matrix) or weak (load vector)
structural-thermal coupling and/or structural-diffusion coupling.
2. For full harmonic analyses, strong structural-thermal coupling only applies.
3. The electrostatic-structural analysis available with KEYOPT(1) = 1001 defaults to an electroelastic ana-
lysis (electrostatic force coupling) unless a piezoelectric matrix is specified on TB,PIEZ.
As shown in the following table, material property requirements consist of those required for the indi-
vidual fields (structural, thermal, electric conduction, electrostatic, or diffusion) and those required for
field coupling. Material properties are defined with the MP, MPDATA, and TB commands.
Table 3 PLANE223 Material Properties

ALL ANALYSES WITH A STRUCTURAL FIELD
Structural EX, EY, EZ, PRXY, PRYZ, PRXZ (or NUXY, NUYZ, NUXZ), GXY, GYZ, GXZ,
ELASTIC, ANEL, DENS, ALPD, BETD, DMPR, SDAMP
ALPX, ALPY, ALPZ (or CTEX, CTEY, CTEZ, or THSX, THSY, THSZ), REFT
Plasticity (PLASTIC, BISO, MISO, NLISO, BKIN, MKIN, KINH, CHABOCHE, HILL,
SMA, CAST, EDP, GURSON) [1]
Viscoelasticity (PRONY,SHIFT) [1]
Viscoplasticity/Creep (CREEP, RATE) [1]
ADDITIONAL MATERIAL PROPERTIES FOR STRUCTURAL-THERMAL ANALYSES
Thermal KXX, KYY, DENS, C, ENTH, HF
Coupling ALPX, ALPY, ALPZ (or CTEX, CTEY, CTEZ, or THSX, THSY, THSZ), REFT, QRATE
ADDITIONAL MATERIAL PROPERTIES FOR PIEZORESISTIVE ANALYSES
Electric RSVX, RSVY, PERX, PERY
Coupling PZRS
ADDITIONAL MATERIAL PROPERTIES FOR ELECTROELASTIC ANALYSES
Electric PERX, PERY, DPER
ADDITIONAL MATERIAL PROPERTIES FOR PIEZOELECTRIC ANALYSES
Electric PERX, PERY, DPER, LSST (and/or RSVX, RSVY)
Coupling PIEZ
ADDITIONAL MATERIAL PROPERTIES FOR STRUCTURAL-DIFFUSION ANALYSES
Diffusion DXX, DYY, DZZ, CSAT
Coupling BETX, BETY, BETZ, CREF
MATERIAL PROPERTIES FOR THERMAL-ELECTRIC ANALYSES
PLANE223

Coupling SBKX, SBKY
ADDITIONAL MATERIAL PROPERTIES FOR STRUCTURAL-THERMOELECTRIC ANALYSES
Coupling ALPX, ALPY, ALPZ (or CTEX, CTEY, CTEZ, or THSX, THSY, THSZ), SBKX, SBKY,
PZRS, QRATE
ADDITIONAL MATERIAL PROPERTIES FOR THERMAL-PIEZOELECTRIC ANALYSES
Electric PERX, PERY, DPER, LSST (and/or RSVX, RSVY)
Coupling ALPX, ALPY, ALPZ (or CTEX, CTEY, CTEZ, or THSX, THSY, THSZ), PIEZ, QRATE
MATERIAL PROPERTIES FOR THERMAL-DIFFUSION ANALYSES
ADDITIONAL MATERIAL PROPERTIES FOR STRUCTURAL-THERMAL-DIFFUSION ANALYSES
1. These material properties are not applicable to the piezoelectric analyses (KEYOPT(1)=1001 or 1011
with TB,PIEZ) and coupled structural-diffusion analyses (KEYOPT(1) = 100001 and 100011).
value). Nodal loads are defined with the D and the F commands. Nodal forces, if any, should be input
per unit of depth for a plane analysis and on a full 360° basis for an axisymmetric analysis.
Element loads are described in Nodal Loading (p. 49). Surface loads may be input on the element faces
indicated by the circled numbers in Figure 1 (p. 1173) using the SF and SFE commands. Positive pressures
act into the element. Body loads may be input at the element's nodes or as a single element value using
the BF and BFE commands.
PLANE223 surface and body loads are given in the following table.
Table 4 PLANE223 Surface and Body Loads

Coupled-Field Ana- KEY- Load Load Command Label
lysis OPT(1) Type
Structural-Thermal 11 Sur- Pressure PRES
face Convection CONV
Heat Flux HFLUX
Radiation RDSF
Body Force Density FORC
Heat Generation -- HGEN
Nodes I through P
PLANE223

lysis OPT(1) Type
Piezoresistive 101 Sur- Pressure PRES
face
Temperature -- TEMP
Nodes I through P
Electroelastic and 1001 Sur- Pressure PRES
Piezoelectric face Surface Charge CHRGS[1 (p. 1179)]
Density
Temperature -- TEMP
Nodes I through P
Volume Charge CHRGD[1 (p. 1179)]
Density -- Nodes I
through P
Thermal-Electric 110 Sur- Convection CONV
face Heat Flux HFLUX
Radiation RDSF
Body Heat Generation -- HGEN
Nodes I through P
Structural-Thermo- 111 Sur- Pressure PRES
electric face Convection CONV
Heat Flux HFLUX
Radiation RDSF
Nodes I through P
Thermal-Piezoelec- 1011 Sur- Pressure PRES
tric face Surface Charge CHRGS[1 (p. 1179)]
Density
Convection CONV
Heat Flux HFLUX
Radiation RDSF
Nodes I through P
Volume Charge CHRGD[1 (p. 1179)]
Density -- Nodes I
through P
Structural-Diffusion 100001 Sur- Pressure PRES
face
Temperature -- TEMP
PLANE223

lysis OPT(1) Type
Nodes I, J, ..., A, B
Thermal-Diffusion 100010 Sur- Convection CONV
Radiation RDSF
Structural-Thermal- 100011 Sur- Pressure PRES
Diffusion face Convection CONV
Heat Flux HFLUX
Radiation RDSF
1. CHRGS and CHRGD are interpreted as negative surface charge density and negative volume charge
density, respectively.
Automatic element technology selections are given in the following table.
Table 5 Automatic Element Technology Selection

Coupled-Field Analysis ETCONTROL Command
Suggestions/Resettings
Structural-Thermal KEYOPT(2) =1 for nonlinear
(KEYOPT(1) = 11) inelastic materials
Structural-Thermoelact-
ric (KEYOPT(1) = 111)

Nodes
I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P
Degrees of Freedom
Set by KEYOPT(1). See Table 2: PLANE223 Coupled-Field Analyses (p. 1174).
Real Constants
None
Material Properties
See Table 3: PLANE223 Material Properties (p. 1176).
Surface Loads
See Table 4: PLANE223 Surface and Body Loads (p. 1177).
PLANE223
Body Loads
See Table 4: PLANE223 Surface and Body Loads (p. 1177).
Special Features
Elasticity
Large deflection
Large strain
Plasticity
Stress stiffening
Viscoelasticity
KEYOPT(1)
Element degrees of freedom. See Table 2: PLANE223 Coupled-Field Analyses (p. 1174).
KEYOPT(2)
Structural-thermal coupling method in structural-thermal, structural-thermoelectric, thermal-piezoelectric,
or structural-thermal-diffusion analyses (KEYOPT(1) = 11, 111, 1011, or 100011) or structural-diffusion
coupling method in structural-diffusion or structural-thermal-diffusion analyses (KEYOPT(1)=100001 or
100011).
0 --
Strong (matrix) coupling – produces an unsymmetric matrix. In a linear analysis, a coupled response
is achieved after one iteration.
1 --
Weak (load vector) coupling – produces a symmetric matrix and requires at least two iterations to
achieve a coupled response.
KEYOPT(3)
Element behavior:
0 --
Plane stress
1 --
Axisymmetric
2 --
Plane strain
KEYOPT(4)
Electrostatic force in electroelastic analysis (KEYOPT(1) = 1001):
0 --
Applied to every element node.
1 --
Applied to the air-structure interface or to element nodes that have constrained structural degrees
of freedom.
2 --
Not applied.
For more information, see Electroelastic Analysis in the Coupled-Field Analysis Guide.
PLANE223
KEYOPT(9)
Thermoelastic damping (piezocaloric effect) in structural-thermal, structural-thermoelastic, or thermal-
piezoelectric analyses (KEYOPT(1) = 11, 111, or 1011). Applicable to harmonic and transient analyses
only.
0 --
Active
1 --
Suppressed (recommended in a coupled-field analysis with structural nonlinearities)
KEYOPT(10)
Specific heat matrix in structural-thermal, thermal-electric, structural-thermoelectric, thermal-piezoelectric,
thermal-diffusion, structural-thermal-diffusion analyses (KEYOPT(1) = 11, 110, 111, 1011, 100001, or
100011), and damping matrix in structural-diffusion, thermal-diffusion, and structural-thermal-diffusion
analyses (KEYOPT(1) = 100001, 100010, and 100011).
0 --
Consistent
1 --
Diagonalized


available.

Name Definition O R
ALL ANALYSES
VOLU: Volume - Y
XC, YC Location where results are reported - 2
PLANE223
Name Definition O R
S:X, Y, Z, XY Stresses (SZ = 0.0 for plane stress elements) - 1
EPEL:X, Y, Z, XY Elastic strains - 1
EPTH:X, Y, Z, XY Thermal strains - 1
EPPL:X, Y, Z, XY Plastic strains - 1
EPCR:X, Y, Z, XY Creep strains - 1
EPCR:EQV Equivalent creep strain [3] - 1
EPTO:X, Y, Z, XY Total mechanical strains (EPEL + EPPL + EPCR) - -
EPTO:EQV Total equivalent mechanical strain (EPEL + EPPL + EPCR) - -
ADDITIONAL OUTPUT FOR STRUCTURAL-THERMAL ANALYSES (KEYOPT(1) = 11)
TG:X, Y, SUM Thermal gradient components and vector magnitude - 1
TF:X, Y, SUM Thermal flux components and vector magnitude - 1
UT Total strain energy [7] - 1
PHEAT Plastic heat generation rate per unit volume - 1
ADDITIONAL OUTPUT FOR PIEZORESISTIVE ANALYSES (KEYOPT(1) = 101)
TEMP Input temperatures - Y
EF:X, Y, SUM Electric field components (X, Y) and vector magnitude - 1
JC:X, Y, SUM Conduction current density components (X, Y) and - 1
vector magnitude
JS:X, Y, SUM Current density components (in the global Cartesian - 1
coordinate system) (X, Y) and vector magnitude [4]
JHEAT Joule heat generation per unit volume [5] - 1
ADDITIONAL OUTPUT FOR ELECTROELASTIC ANALYSES (KEYOPT(1) = 1001)
D:X, Y, SUM Electric flux density components (X, Y) and vector - 1
magnitude
FMAG:X, Y, SUM Electrostatic force components (X, Y) and vector mag- - 1
nitude
UE, UD Stored elastic and dielectric energies - 1
ADDITIONAL OUTPUT FOR PIEZOELECTRIC ANALYSES (KEYOPT(1) = 1001)
D:X, Y, SUM Electric flux density components (X, Y) and vector - 1
magnitude
PLANE223
Name Definition O R
JHEAT Joule heat generation per unit volume [5], [6] - 1
ADDITIONAL OUTPUT FOR STRUCTURAL-DIFFUSION ANALYSES (KEYOPT(1)=100001)
EPDI:X, Y, Z, XY Diffusion strains - 1
CG:X, Y, SUM Concentration gradient components and vector mag- - 1
nitude
DF:X, Y, SUM Diffusion flux components and vector magnitude - 1
ADDITIONAL OUTPUT FOR THERMAL-ELECTRIC ANALYSES (KEYOPT(1) = 110)
EF:X, Y, SUM Electric field components and vector magnitude - 1
JC:X, Y, SUM Conduction current density components and vector - 1
magnitude
ADDITIONAL OUTPUT FOR STRUCTURAL-THERMOELECTRIC ANALYSES (KEYOPT(1) =
111)
JC:X, Y, SUM Conduction current density components and vector - 1
magnitude
ADDITIONAL OUTPUT FOR THERMAL-PIEZOELECTRIC ANALYSES (KEYOPT(1) = 1011)
D:X, Y, SUM Electric flux density components and vector magnitude - 1
THERMAL-DIFFUSION ANALYSES (KEYOPT(1) = 100010)
PLANE223
Name Definition O R
nitude
ADDITIONAL OUTPUT FOR STRUCTURAL-THERMAL-DIFFUSION ANALYSES (KEYOPT(1)
= 100011)
EPDI:X, Y, Z, XY Diffusion strains - 1
nitude
1. Solution values are output only if calculated (based on input values).

4. JS represents the sum of element conduction and displacement current densities.
thermal analysis with companion thermal elements.
6. For a time-harmonic analysis, Joule losses (JHEAT) are time-averaged. These values are stored in both
the real and imaginary data sets. For more information, see Quasistatic Electric Analysis in the Mechan-
7. For a time-harmonic analysis, total strain energy (UT) is time-averaged. These values are stored in both
the real and imaginary data sets. For more information, see Thermoelasticity in the Mechanical APDL
Theory Reference.
Name
Item
PLANE223
E
Output ETABLE Com-

Quantity mand Input
Name Item E
UE NMISC 1
UD NMISC 2
UT NMISC 4
PHEAT NMISC 5

• PLANE223 assumes a unit thickness.
• PLANE223 uses 2 x 2 and 3 point integration rules to calculate the element matrices and load vectors
for the quad and triangle geometries, respectively.
• In a piezoelectric analysis, electric charge loading is interpreted as negative electric charge or negative
charge density.
• In a coupled-field analysis with structural degrees of freedom, the model should have at least two ele-
ments in each direction to avoid the hourglass mode.
• The optimized nonlinear solution defaults (SOLCONTROL) are not available in coupled-field analyses.
• A face with a removed midside node implies that the degrees-of-freedom vary linearly, rather than
• This element does not support fully incompressible materials.
• Graphical Solution Tracking (/GST) is not supported with the coupled-diffusion analyses (KEY-
OPT(1)=100001, 100010, and 100011).

SOLID226
MP ME <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS

SOLID226 has the following capabilities:
• Piezoresistive
• Electroelastic
• Piezoelectric
The element has twenty nodes with up to five degrees of freedom per node. Structural capabilities include
of freedom. See SOLID226 in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for more details about this element.
SOLID226
M,N,O,P,U,V,W,X
Y A,B
Z
K,L,S
I T R
5 P 4 Q J
W
O
6 M,N,O,P,U,V,W,X
M
B V A
Y B Z
U
N T
A K
L S
Y 2 3 I
R
L S Q J
T Z Pyramid Option
K X
I O,P,W
Z M
R
Q 1 U V A,B
J Y N
Y Z
I K,L,S
X T
Q R
J
Prism Option
SOLID226 Input Data

The element input data includes twenty nodes and structural, thermal, and electrical material properties.
KEYOPT(1) is set equal to the sum of the field keys shown in Table 1: SOLID226 Field Keys (p. 1188). For
Table 1 SOLID226 Field Keys

Key
Structural 1 UX, UY, UZ FX, FY, FZ Force
SOLID226

Key
Table 2 SOLID226 Coupled-Field Analyses

Coupled-Field KEY- DOF Label Force La- Reaction Analysis Type
Analysis OPT(1) bel Solution
Structural-Thermal 11 UX, FX, FY, Force, Static
[1], [2] UY, FZ, Heat
UZ, HEAT Flow Full Harmonic
TEMP
Full Transient
UY, FZ, Electric
UZ, AMPS Current Full Transient
VOLT
UY, FZ, Electric
UZ, CHRG Charge Full Transient
VOLT (posit-
ive)
UY, FZ, Electric
UZ, CHRG Charge Modal
VOLT (negat-
ive) Full Harmonic
Full Transient
Thermal-Electric 110 TEMP, VOLT HEAT, Heat Flow, Static
AMPS Electric Cur-
rent Full Transient
Structural-Thermo- 111 UX, FX, FY, Force, Static
electric [1] UY, FZ, Heat
UZ, HEAT, Flow, Full Transient
TEMP, AMPS Electric
VOLT Current
Thermal-Piezoelec- 1011 UX, FX, FY, Force, Static
tric [1], [2] UY, FZ, Heat
UZ, HEAT, Flow, Full Harmonic
TEMP, CHRG Electric
VOLT Charge Full Transient
(negat-
ive)
SOLID226
Coupled-Field KEY- DOF Label Force La- Reaction Analysis Type

Analysis OPT(1) bel Solution
Structural-Diffu- 100001 UX, FX, FY, Force, Static
sion [1] UY, FZ,
UZ, Diffu- Full Transient
RATE sion
CONC Flow
Rate
Flow,
CONC RATE Full Transient
Diffu-
sion
Flow
Rate
Structural- 100011 UX, FX, FY, Force, Static
Thermal-Diffusion UY, FZ,
[1] UZ, Heat Full Transient
HEAT, Flow,
TEMP,
RATE Diffu-
CONC sion
Flow
Rate
Table 3 SOLID226 Material Properties

Thermal KXX, KYY, KZZ, DENS, C, ENTH, HF
SOLID226

Electric RSVX, RSVY, RSVZ, PERX, PERY, PERZ
Coupling PZRS
Electric PERX, PERY, PERZ, DPER
Electric PERX, PERY, PERZ, DPER, LSST (and/or RSVX, RSVY, RSVZ)
Coupling PIEZ
Coupling SBKX, SBKY, SBKZ
SBKZ, PZRS, QRATE
value). Nodal loads are defined with the D and the F commands.
Element loads are described in Nodal Loading (p. 49). Loads may be input on the element faces indicated
by the circled numbers in Figure 1 (p. 1188) using the SF and SFE commands. Positive pressures act into
SOLID226
the element. Body loads may be input at the element's nodes or as a single element value using the
BF and BFE commands.
SOLID226 surface and body loads are given in the following table. CHRGS and CHRGD are interpreted
as negative surface charge density and negative volume charge density, respectively.
Table 4 SOLID226 Surface and Body Loads

lysis OPT(1) Type
Heat Flux HFLUX
Radiation RDSF
face
Temperature -- TEMP
Piezoelectric face Surface Charge Density CHRGS[1 (p. 1193)]
Temperature -- TEMP
Volume Charge Density CHRGD[1 (p. 1193)]
--
Radiation RDSF
Heat Flux HFLUX
Radiation RDSF
tric face Surface Charge Density CHRGS[1 (p. 1193)]
Convection CONV
SOLID226

lysis OPT(1) Type
Heat Flux HFLUX
Radiation RDSF
Volume Charge Density CHRGD[1 (p. 1193)]
--
face
Temperature -- TEMP
Radiation RDSF
Heat Flux HFLUX
Radiation RDSF

Structural-Thermoelec-
tric (KEYOPT(1) = 111)
All analyses with a structural KEYOPT(6) =1 for linear
field elastic materials with Pois-
son's ratio >0.49 or nonlin-
ear inelastic materials
SOLID226

Nodes
Degrees of Freedom
Set by KEYOPT(1). See Table 2: SOLID226 Coupled-Field Analyses (p. 1189).
Real Constants
None
Material Properties
See Table 3: SOLID226 Material Properties (p. 1190).
Surface Loads
See Table 4: SOLID226 Surface and Body Loads (p. 1192).
Body Loads
Special Features
Elasticity
Large deflection
Large strain
Plasticity
Stress stiffening
Viscoelasticity
KEYOPT(1)
Element degrees of freedom. See Table 2: SOLID226 Coupled-Field Analyses (p. 1189).
KEYOPT(2)
100011).
0 --
1 --
KEYOPT(4)
0 --
SOLID226
1 --
of freedom.
2 --
Not applied.
KEYOPT(6)
Integration method (applicable to the brick-shaped elements with structural DOFs).
0 --
Full integration - uses 14 integrations points. This method can cause volumetric locking in the
models with nearly incompressible materials. It is primary employed for purely linear analyses.
1 --
Uniform reduced integration - uses a 2 x 2 x 2 integration scheme. This method helps prevent volu-
metric mesh locking in the models with nearly incompressible materials. It is recommended for
analyses with structural nonlinearities. To avoid the propagation of hourglass mode associated with
the reduced integration, the model must have at least two layers of elements in each direction.
KEYOPT(9)
only.
0 --
Active
1 --
KEYOPT(10)
0 --
Consistent
1 --
Diagonalized


SOLID226
available.

Name Definition O R
ALL ANALYSES
NODES Nodes - I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P, Q, R, S, T, U, V, W, X, Y, Z, - Y
A, B
VOLU: Volume - Y
S:X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, Stresses (SZ = 0.0 for plane stress elements) - 1
XZ
EPEL:X, Y, Z, XY, Elastic strains - 1
YZ, XZ
EPTH:X, Y, Z, XY, Thermal strains - 1
YZ, XZ
EPPL:X, Y, Z, XY, Plastic strains - 1
YZ, XZ
EPCR:X, Y, Z, XY, Creep strains - 1
YZ, XZ
EPTO:X, Y, Z, XY, Total mechanical strains (EPEL + EPPL + EPCR) - -
YZ, XZ
TG:X, Y, Z, SUM Thermal gradient components and vector magnitude - 1
TF:X, Y, Z, SUM Thermal flux components and vector magnitude - 1
SOLID226
Name Definition O R
ALL ANALYSES
EF:X, Y, Z, SUM Electric field components (X, Y, Z) and vector magnitude - 1
JC:X, Y, Z, SUM Conduction current density components (X, Y, Z) and - 1
vector magnitude
JS:X, Y, Z, SUM Current density components - 1
(in the global Cartesian coordinate system)

and vector magnitude [4]
D:X, Y, Z, SUM Electric flux density components (X, Y, Z) and vector - 1
magnitude
FMAG:X, Y, Z, Electrostatic force components (X, Y, Z) and vector - 1
SUM magnitude
magnitude
EPDI:X, Y, Z, XY, Diffusion strains - 1
YZ, XZ
CG:X, Y, Z, SUM Concentration gradient components and vector mag- - 1
nitude
DF:X, Y, Z, SUM Diffusion flux components and vector magnitude - 1
THERMAL-ELECTRIC ANALYSES (KEYOPT(1) = 110)
EF:X, Y, Z, SUM Electric field components and vector magnitude - 1
JC:X, Y, Z, SUM Conduction current density components and vector - 1
magnitude
SOLID226
Name Definition O R
ALL ANALYSES

ADDITIONAL OUTPUT FOR STRUCTURAL-THERMOELECTRIC ANALYSES (KEYOPT(1) = 111)
magnitude
components (in the global Cartesian coordinate

system)
D:X, Y, Z, SUM Electric flux density components and vector magnitude - 1
nitude
ADDITIONAL OUTPUT FOR STRUCTURAL-THERMAL-DIFFUSION ANALYSES (KEYOPT(1) =
100011)
YZ, XZ
SOLID226
Name Definition O R
ALL ANALYSES
nitude

Theory Reference.
Table 6: SOLID226 Element Output Definitions (p. 1196) lists output available through the ETABLE command
Name
Item
E
Output ETABLE Com-

Quantity mand Input
Name Item E
UE NMISC 1
UD NMISC 2
UT NMISC 4
PHEAT NMISC 5

charge density.
SOLID226
• An edge with a removed midside node implies that the degrees-of-freedom varies linearly, rather than
• The model should have at least two layers of elements in each direction when uniform reduced integ-
ration (KEYOPT(6) = 1) is used.
• Graphical Solution Tracking (/GST) is not supported with coupled-diffusion analyses (KEYOPT(1)=100001,
100010, and 100011).

SOLID227
MP ME <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS

SOLID227 has the following capabilities:
• Piezoresistive
• Electroelastic
• Piezoelectric
The element has ten nodes with up to five degrees of freedom per node. Structural capabilities include
of freedom. See SOLID227 in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for more details about this element.
4
R
P
Q 3
Y 2
O K
X I N
M
Z
1
J
SOLID227
SOLID227 Input Data

The element input data includes ten nodes and structural, thermal, and electrical material properties.
KEYOPT(1) is set equal to the sum of the field keys shown in Table 1: SOLID227 Field Keys (p. 1202). For
Table 1 SOLID227 Field Keys

Key
Structural 1 UX, UY, UZ FX, FY, FZ Force
Table 2 SOLID227 Coupled-Field Analyses

Coupled-Field Ana- KEY- DOF Label Force La- Reaction Analyses
lysis OPT(1) bel Solution Type
Structural-Thermal 11 UX, FX, FY, Force, Static
[1], [2] UY, FZ, Heat
UZ, HEAT Flow Full
TEMP Harmon-
ic
Full
Transi-
ent
UY, FZ, Electric
UZ, AMPS Current Full
VOLT Transi-
ent
UY, FZ, Electric
UZ, Charge Full
Transi-
ent
SOLID227

VOLT CHRG (posit-
ive)
UY, FZ, Electric
UZ, CHRG Charge Modal
VOLT (negat-
ive) Full
Harmon-
ic
Full
Transi-
ent
Thermal-Electric 110 TEMP, VOLT HEAT, Heat Flow, Static
AMPS Electric Cur-
rent Full
Transi-
ent
Structural-Thermo- 111 UX, FX, FY, Force, Static
electric [1] UY, FZ, Heat
UZ, HEAT, Flow, Full
TEMP, AMPS Electric Transi-
VOLT Current ent
Thermal-Piezoelec- 1011 UX, FX, FY, Force, Static
tric [1], [2] UY, FZ, Heat
UZ, HEAT, Flow, Full
TEMP, CHRG Electric Harmon-
VOLT Charge ic
(negat-
ive) Full
Transi-
ent
Structural-Diffusion 100001 UX, FX, FY, Force, Static
[1] UY, FZ,
UZ, Diffu- Full
RATE sion Transi-
CONC Flow ent
Rate
Flow,
CONC RATE Full
Diffu- Transi-
sion ent
Flow
Rate
SOLID227

Structural-Thermal- 100011 UX, FX, FY, Force, Static
Diffusion [1] UY, FZ,
UZ, Heat Full
HEAT, Flow, Transi-
TEMP, ent
RATE Diffu-
CONC sion
Flow
Rate
Table 3 SOLID227 Material Properties

Coupling PZRS
Electric PERX, PERY, PERZ, DPER
Coupling PIEZ
SOLID227

Coupling SBKX, SBKY, SBKZ
SBKZ, PZRS, QRATE
value). Nodal loads are defined with the D and the F commands.
Element loads are described in Nodal Loading (p. 49). Loads may be input on the element faces indicated
by the circled numbers in Figure 1 (p. 1201) using the SF and SFE commands. Positive pressures act into
the element. Body loads may be input at the element's nodes or as a single element value using the
BF and BFE commands.
SOLID227 surface and body loads are given in the following table.
Table 4 SOLID227 Surface and Body Loads

lysis OPT(1) Type
Heat Flux HFLUX
Radiation RDSF
SOLID227

lysis OPT(1) Type
Nodes I through R
face
Temperatures -- Nodes TEMP
I through R
Piezoelectric face Surface Charge Dens- CHRGS [1 (p. 1207)]
ity
Temperatures -- Nodes TEMP
I through R
Volume Charge Dens- CHRGD [1 (p. 1207)]
ity -- Nodes I through
R
Radiation RDSF
Nodes I through R
Heat Flux HFLUX
Radiation RDSF
Nodes I through R
tric face Surface Charge Dens- CHRGS [1 (p. 1207)]
ity
Convection CONV
Heat Flux HFLUX
Radiation RDSF
Nodes I through R
Volume Charge Dens- CHRGD [1 (p. 1207)]
ity -- Nodes I through
R
face
SOLID227

lysis OPT(1) Type
Temperature -- TEMP
Radiation RDSF
Heat Flux HFLUX
Radiation RDSF

Structural-Thermoelec-
tric (KEYOPT(1) = 111)

Nodes
I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P, Q, R
Degrees of Freedom
Set by KEYOPT(1). See Table 2: SOLID227 Coupled-Field Analyses (p. 1202).
Real Constants
None
Material Properties
See Table 3: SOLID227 Material Properties (p. 1204).
SOLID227
Surface Loads
Body Loads
Special Features
Elasticity
Large deflection
Large strain
Plasticity
Stress stiffening
Viscoelasticity
KEYOPT(1)
Element degrees of freedom. See Table 2: SOLID227 Coupled-Field Analyses (p. 1202).
KEYOPT(2)
100011).
0 --
1 --
KEYOPT(4)
0 --
1 --
of freedom.
2 --
Not applied.
KEYOPT(9)
only.
0 --
Active
1 --
SOLID227
KEYOPT(10)
0 --
Consistent
1 --
Diagonalized


available.

Name Definition O R
ALL ANALYSES
NODES Nodes - I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P, Q, R - Y
VOLU: Volume - Y
S:X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, Stresses (SZ = 0.0 for plane stress elements) - 1
XZ
EPEL:X, Y, Z, XY, Elastic strains - 1
YZ, XZ
SOLID227
Name Definition O R
EPTH:X, Y, Z, XY, Thermal strains - 1
YZ, XZ
EPPL:X, Y, Z, XY, Plastic strains - 1
YZ, XZ
EPCR:X, Y, Z, XY, Creep strains - 1
YZ, XZ
EPTO:X, Y, Z, XY, Total mechanical strains (EPEL + EPPL + EPCR) - -
YZ, XZ
JC:X, Y, Z, SUM Conduction current density components (X, Y, Z) and - 1
vector magnitude
JS:X, Y, Z, SUM Current density components (in the global Cartesian - 1
magnitude
FMAG:X, Y, Z, Electrostatic force components (X, Y, Z) and vector - 1
SUM magnitude
magnitude
SOLID227
Name Definition O R
YZ, XZ
nitude
THERMAL-ELECTRIC ANALYSES (KEYOPT(1) = 110)
magnitude
ADDITIONAL OUTPUT FOR STRUCTURAL-THERMOELECTRIC ANALYSES (KEYOPT(1) =
111)
magnitude
SOLID227
Name Definition O R
nitude
ADDITIONAL OUTPUT FOR STRUCTURAL-THERMAL-DIFFUSION ANALYSES (KEYOPT(1)
= 100011)
YZ, XZ
nitude

Theory Reference.
Table 6: SOLID227 Element Output Definitions (p. 1209) lists output available through the ETABLE command
Name
Item
SOLID227
E
Output ETABLE Com-

Quantity mand Input
Name Item E
UE NMISC 1
UD NMISC 2
UT NMISC 4
PHEAT NMISC 5

charge density.
• An edge with a removed midside node implies that the degrees-of-freedom varies linearly, rather than
compatible, the elements must have the same through reaction solution for the VOLT DOF. Elements
that have an electric charge reaction solution must all have the same electric charge reaction sign. For
more information, see Element Compatibility in the Low-Frequency Electromagnetic Analysis Guide.
• Graphical Solution Tracking (/GST) is not supported with coupled-diffusion analyses (KEYOPT(1)=100001,
100010, and 100011).

PLANE230
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> EM <> <> PP <> EME <>

PLANE230 is a 2-D, 8-node, current-based electric element. The element has one degree of freedom,
voltage, at each node. The 8-node elements have compatible voltage shapes and are well suited to
model curved boundaries.
This element is based on the electric scalar potential formulation and it is applicable to the following
low frequency electric field analyses: steady-state electric conduction, time-harmonic quasistatic and
transient quasistatic. See PLANE230 - 2-D 8-Node Electric Solid in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference
L
3
K K, L, O
O
4
Y P P N
(or axial) 2
N I
M J
I
X (or radial) M Tri Option
J
1
PLANE230 Input Data

The element is defined by eight nodes and orthotropic material properties. The type of units (MKS or
user defined) is specified through the EMUNIT command. EMUNIT also determines the value of EPZRO.
The EMUNIT defaults are MKS units and EPZRO = 8.854 x 10-12 Farad/meter. A triangular-shaped element
Nodal loads are defined with the D (Lab = VOLT) and F (Lab = AMPS) commands. The nodal forces, if
any, should be input per unit of depth for a plane analysis and on a full 360° basis for an axisymmetric
analysis.
PLANE230

Nodes
I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P
Degrees of Freedom
VOLT
Real Constants
Material Properties
RSVX, RSVY, PERX, PERY, LSST
Surface Loads
None
Body Loads
Temperature --
Special Features
Birth and death
KEYOPT(3)
Element behavior:
0 --
Plane
1 --
Axisymmetric
3 --
Plane with thickness input, specified via real constant THK.


Basic Analysis Guide for ways to view results. The element output directions are parallel to the element
coordinate system as shown in Figure 2 (p. 1217).
PLANE230
Figure 2 PLANE230 Output
L
O K
y
EFy, JCy
P
x
Y EFx, JCx N
(or axial)
I
X (or radial) M J
available.

Name Definition O R
VOLU: Volume Y Y
EF:X, Y, SUM Electric field components and vector magnitude 1 1
JC:X, Y, SUM Nodal conduction current density components and 1 1
vector magnitude
JS:X, Y, SUM Current density components - 1

JT:X, Y, SUM Element conduction current density components and - 1
magnitude [3]
JHEAT: Joule heat generation rate per unit volume [4] [5] [6] - 1
SENE: Stored electric energy [6] - 1
D:X, Y, SUM Electric flux density components and vector magnitude - 1
PLANE230
centroid.
3. JS represents the sum of element conduction and displacement current densities. JT represents the
element conduction current density. The element displacement current density (JD) can be derived
from JS and JT as JD = JS-JT.
Name
Item
E
Output ETABLE and

Quant- ESOL Command
ity Input
Name Item E
DX NMISC 1
DY NMISC 2
DSUM NMISC 3
JTX NMISC 4
JTY NMISC 5
JTSUM NMISC 6

PLANE230
• This element is only compatible with elements having a VOLT degree of freedom and an electric current
reaction solution. See Element Compatibility in the Low-Frequency Electromagnetic Analysis Guide) for
more information.

ANSYS Emag
SOLID231
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> EM <> <> PP <> EME <>

SOLID231 is a 3-D 20-node, current-based electric element. The element has one degree of freedom,
voltage, at each node. It can tolerate irregular shapes without much loss of accuracy. SOLID231 elements
have compatible voltage shapes and are well suited to model curved boundaries.
transient quasistatic. See SOLID231 - 3-D 20-Node Electric Solid in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference
M,N,O,P,U,V,W,X
Y A,B
Z
K,L,S
I T R
5 P 4 Q J
W
O
6 M,N,O,P,U,V,W,X
M
B V A
Y B Z
U
N T
A K
L S
Y 2 3 I
R
L S Q J
T Z Pyramid Option
K X
I O,P,W
Z M
R
Q 1 U V A,B
J Y N
Y Z
I K,L,S
X T
Q R
J
Prism Option
SOLID231 Input Data

The element is defined by 20 node points and the material properties. The type of units (MKS or user
defined) is specified through the EMUNIT command. EMUNIT also determines the value of EPZRO. The
EMUNIT defaults are MKS units and EPZRO = 8.854 x 10-12 Farad/meter. A prism-shaped element may
SOLID231
Nodal loads are defined with the D (Lab = VOLT) and F (Lab = AMPS) commands. The temperature (for
material property evaluation only) body loads may be input based on their value at the element's nodes
or as a single element value [BF, BFE]. In general, unspecified nodal values of temperatures default to
the uniform value specified with the BFUNIF or TUNIF commands.

Nodes
Degrees of Freedom
VOLT
Real Constants
None
Material Properties
RSVX, RSVY, RSVZ, PERX, PERY, PERZ, LSST
Surface Loads
None
Body Loads
Temperature --
T(I), T(J), ..., T(Z), T(A), T(B)
Special Features
Birth and death
KEYOPT
None


SOLID231
available.

Name Definition O R
VOLU: Volume Y Y
TEMP Temperatures T(I), T(J), ..., T(Z), T(A), T(B) Y Y
EF:X, Y, Z, SUM Electric field components and vector magnitude 1 1
JC:X, Y, Z, SUM Nodal conduction current density components and 1 1
vector magnitude
JT:X, Y, Z, SUM Element conduction current density components and - 1
magnitude [3]
centroid.
from JS and JT as JD = JS-JT. JS can be used as a source current density for a subsequent magnetostatic
analysis with companion elements [LDREAD].
SOLID231
Name
Item
E
Output ETABLE and

Quant- ESOL Command
ity Input
Name Item E
DX NMISC 1
DY NMISC 2
DZ NMISC 3
DSUM NMISC 4
JTX NMISC 5
JTY NMISC 6
JTZ NMISC 7
JTSUM NMISC 8

in meshing transition zones.
more information.

ANSYS Emag
SOLID231
SOLID232
3-D 10-Node Tetrahedral Electric Solid
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> EM <> <> PP <> EME <>

SOLID232 is a 3-D, 10-node, current-based electric element. It is well suited to model irregular meshes
(such as produced from various CAD/CAM systems). The element has one degree of freedom, voltage,
at each node.
transient quasistatic. See SOLID232 - 3-D 10-Node Tetrahedral Electric Solid in the Mechanical APDL
4
R
P
Q 3
Y 2
O K
X I N
M
Z
1
J
SOLID232 Input Data

The element is defined by 10 node points and the material properties. The type of units (MKS or user
defined) is specified through the EMUNIT command. EMUNIT also determines the value of EPZRO. The
EMUNIT defaults are MKS units and EPZRO = 8.854 x 10-12 Farad/meter.
Nodal loads are defined with the D (Lab = VOLT) and F (Lab = AMPS) commands. The temperature (for
material property evaluation only) body loads may be input based on their value at the element's nodes
or as a single element value [BF, BFE]. In general, unspecified nodal values of temperatures default to
the uniform value specified with the BFUNIF or TUNIF commands.
SOLID232

Nodes
I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P, Q, R
Degrees of Freedom
VOLT
Real Constants
None
Material Properties
RSVX, RSVY, RSVZ, PERX, PERY, PERZ, LSST
Surface Loads
None
Body Loads
Temperature --
Special Features
Birth and death
KEYOPTS
None


available.

Name Definition O R
SOLID232
Name Definition O R
VOLU: Volume Y Y
TEMP Temperatures T(I), T(J), T(K), T(L), T(M), T(N), T(O), T(P), Y Y
T(Q), T(R)
EF:X, Y, Z, SUM Electric field components and vector magnitude 1 1
JC:X, Y, Z, SUM Nodal conduction current density components and 1 1
vector magnitude
JT:X, Y, Z, SUM Element conduction current density components and - 1
magnitude [3]
centroid.
from JS and JT as JD = JS-JT. JS can be used as a source current density for a subsequent magnetostatic
analysis with companion elements [LDREAD].
Name
Item
SOLID232
E
Output ETABLE and

Quant- ESOL Command
ity Input
Name Item E
DX NMISC 1
DY NMISC 2
DZ NMISC 3
DSUM NMISC 4
JTX NMISC 5
JTY NMISC 6
JTZ NMISC 7
JTSUM NMISC 8

more information.

ANSYS Emag
PLANE233
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> EM <> <> PP <> EME <>

PLANE233 is a 2-D element capable of modeling planar or axisymmetric electromagnetic fields. The
element is defined by 8 or 6 nodes, and has up to 2 degrees of freedom per node: Z-component of the
magnetic vector potential (AZ) and electric scalar potential (VOLT). The element also has an option to
perform an electromagnetic analysis with time-integrated electric potential (VOLT) as a degree of freedom.
In an electromagnetic analysis, the electric degree of freedom is the electric potential (VOLT) defined
at each node. The element also has an option to perform an electromagnetic analysis with time-integrated
electric potential.
In a stranded coil analysis, the electric degrees of freedom are the voltage drop across the coil (VOLT)
and the electromotive force (EMF). In a coil region, all the VOLT and EMF degrees of freedom must be
coupled using the CP command. The element has the option to perform a stranded coil analysis with
time-integrated voltage drop or time-integrated electromotive force.
PLANE233 is applicable to 2-D static, time-harmonic and time-transient electromagnetic analyses. The
magnetic analysis option typically is used to model air, iron, nonferrous materials and permanent
magnets. The analysis is driven by the current density applied as an element body load. The electromag-
netic analysis option is suitable for modeling solid (massive) conductors. This analysis may be voltage
or current driven, as well as circuit fed. The electromagnetic analysis has the option to suppress the
eddy current effect in time-varying analyses to model stranded conductors. The stranded coil analysis
option is suitable for modeling a stranded winding with a prescribed current flow direction vector. The
stranded coil may be voltage- or current-driven, as well as circuit-fed.
The following command macros can be used with PLANE233 for solution postprocessing: CURR2D,
EMAGERR, EMFT, FLUXV, MMF, PLF2D, POWERH. See "Electric and Magnetic Macros" in the Low-Fre-
quency Electromagnetic Analysis Guide for more details.
See PLANE233 theory in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for more details about this element. The
element has nonlinear magnetic capability for modeling B-H curves or permanent magnet demagnetiz-
ation curves for static and time-transient analyses.
PLANE233
PLANE233 Input Data

A triangular-shaped element may be formed by defining the same node number for nodes K, L and O.
termines the value of MUZRO and EPZRO. The EMUNIT defaults are MKS units and MUZRO = 4π10-7
Henry/meter and EPZRO = 8.854 x 10-12 Farad/meter. In addition to MUZRO and EPZRO, orthotropic
relative permeability is specified through the MURX and MURY material property labels. The Z-depth
resistivity and permittivity are specified using the RSVZ and PERZ material property labels respectively.
polarization directions correspond to the element coordinate directions. The element coordinate system
orientation is as described in Coordinate Systems (p. 56). Nonlinear magnetic B-H properties are entered
with the TB command as described in "Material Models" in the Material Reference. Nonlinear orthotropic
magnetic properties may be specified with a combination of a B-H curve and linear relative permeability.
The B-H curve will be used in each element coordinate direction where a zero value of relative permeab-
ility is specified. Only one B-H curve may be specified per material.
For the plane option (KEYOPT(3) = 0), you can also define the element thickness (Z-depth) using the
real constant THK. For the axisymmetric option (KEYOPT(3) = 1), you can specify the fraction of the 360°
basis using the same real constant.
Nodal loads are defined with the D and F commands. The nodal forces, if any, should be input per unit
of depth for a plane analysis and on a full 360° basis for an axisymmetric analysis unless the THK real
constant is specified. For edge-based analysis, the D command with Lab = AZ applies the edge-flux
constraint to the node. Flux-parallel boundary conditions are prescribed by setting AZ to zero. No AZ
constraint is required to set flux-normal boundary conditions.
For massive conductors (KEYOPT(1) = 1), Lab = VOLT is valid with the D command and VALUE defines
the electric potential. Note that electric potential is time-integrated if KEYOPT(2) = 2. With the F command,
Lab = AMPS and VALUE corresponds to the total current.
For stranded coils (KEYOPT(1) = 2), Lab = VOLT is valid with the D command and VALUE defines the
voltage drop across the coil. The D command with Lab = EMF can be used to apply constraints on the
electromotive force. Note that voltage drop and the electromotive force are time-integrated if KEYOPT(2)
= 2. The total current through the coil can be applied with the F command using Lab = AMPS.
temperatures default to the uniform value specified with the BFUNIF or TUNIF commands. For modeling
stranded conductors with KEYOPT(1) = 0, source current density may be applied to an area [BFA] or
input as an element value [BFE].
A summary of the element input is given in "PLANE233 Input Summary". A general description of element
input is given in Element Input.

Nodes
I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P
PLANE233
Degrees of Freedom
Set by KEYOPT(1).
Real Constants
Thickness (THK) is the only real constant for KEYOPT(1) = 0 or 1.
The following are the real constants for KEYOPT(1) = 2:
THK, SC, NC, RAD, TZ, R

SYM
See Table 1: PLANE233 Real Constants (p. 1235) for more information.
Material Properties
MURX, MURY
MGXX, MGYY
Nonlinear B-H curve (TB,BH)
RSVZ
PERZ (See ""PLANE233 Assumptions and Restrictions" (p. 1237)")

Surface Loads
None
Body Loads
Temperature --
T(I), T(J), ..., T(O), T(P)
Source Current Density (valid for KEYOPT(1) = 0 only) --
spare, spare, JSZ(I), PHASE(I),
spare, spare, JSZ(J), PHASE(J),
...
spare, spare, JSZ(O), PHASE(O),
spare, spare, JSZ(P), PHASE(P)

Special Features
Magnetic materials
KEYOPT(1)
Element capability and degrees of freedom:
0 --
Magnetic:
AZ
1 --
Electromagnetic:
AZ, VOLT
PLANE233
2 --
Stranded coil:
AZ, VOLT, EMF

KEYOPT(2)
Coupling method between magnetic and electric degrees of freedom (KEYOPT(1) = 1 or 2); also defines
the meaning of the VOLT and EMF degrees of freedom for KEYOPT(1) = 1 or 2:
0 --
Strong (matrix) coupling. Produces an unsymmetric matrix. In a linear analysis, a coupled response
is achieved after one iteration. Applicable to all analysis types.
1 --
Weak (load vector). Produces a symmetric matrix and requires at least two iterations to achieve a
coupled response. Applicable to static and transient analyses only. (See "PLANE233 Assumptions and
Restrictions" (p. 1237))
2 --
Strong (matrix) coupling with time-integrated electric potential (VOLT) for KEYOPT(1) = 1 (electro-
magnetic analysis). Produces a symmetric matrix.
Strong (matrix) coupling with time-integrated voltage drop (VOLT) and time-integrated electro-
motive force (EMF) for KEYOPT(1) = 2 (stranded coil analysis). Produces a symmetric matrix if
the coil symmetry factor is 1; produces a nonsymmetric matrix if the coil symmetry factor is
greater than 1.
In a linear analysis, a coupled response is achieved after one iteration. Applicable to harmonic
and transient analyses only.
KEYOPT(3)
Element behavior:
0 --
Plane
1 --
Axisymmetric
KEYOPT(5)
Eddy currents in electromagnetic (KEYOPT(1) =1) harmonic or transient analyses:
0 --
Active
1 --
Suppressed
KEYOPT(7)
Electromagnetic force output:
0 --
At each element node (corner and midside)
1 --
At element corner nodes only (midside node forces are condensed to the corner nodes)
KEYOPT(8)
Electromagnetic force calculation:
PLANE233
0 --
Maxwell
1 --
Lorentz
Table 1 PLANE233 Real Constants

No. Name Description Default Definition
1 THK Thickness (plane) or frac- 1 Applicable to all KEYOPT(1) = 0,
tion of the 360° basis 1, or 2.
(axisymmetric)
2 SC Coil cross-sectional area none True physical cross-section of
the coil regardless of symmetry
modeling considerations. It in-
cludes the cross-sectional area
of the wire and the non-con-
ducting material filling the
space between the winding.
3 NC Number of coil turns 1 Total number of winding turns
in a coil regardless of any sym-
metry modeling considerations.
4 RAD Mean radius of the coil none Mean radius of the axisymmet-
(axisymmetric) ric coil model. If the mean radi-
us is not known, input
VC/((2π)(SC)(THK)) , where VC is
the full symmetry true physical
volume of the coil. VC includes
the volume occupied by the
wire and the non-conducting
material filling the space
between the winding.
5 TZ Current polarity 1 (plane) The current flow direction (1 or
-1) with respect to Z-axis
-1
(axisym-
metric)
6 R Coil resistance none Total coil DC resistance regard-
less of any symmetry modeling
considerations.
7 SYM Coil symmetry factor 1 Ratio of the full symmetry coil
cross-sectional area (SC) to the
modeled coil area. The input
should be greater or equal to 1.

PLANE233
available.

Name Definition O R
NODES Nodes - I, J,…, O,P - Y
THICK Thickness - Y
VOLU: Volume - Y
XC, YC Location where results are reported - 2
TEMP Input temperatures T(I), T(J), ..., T(O), T(P) - Y
LOC Output location (X, Y) - -
B: X, Y, SUM Magnetic flux density components and vector magnitude - 1
H: X, Y, SUM Magnetic field intensity components and vector magnitude - 1
EF: Z, SUM Electric field intensity Z-component and vector magnitude - 1
[7]
JC: Z, SUM Conduction current density Z-component and vector mag- - 1
nitude [7]
FMAG: X, Y, SUM Electromagnetic force components and magnitude [3] - 1
JT: Z, SUM Conduction current density Z-component (in the global - 1
Cartesian coordinate system) and vector magnitude [6]
JS: Z, SUM Current density Z-component (in the global Cartesian co- - 1
ordinate system) and vector magnitude [4] [6]
SENE: Stored electromagnetic energy [3] - 1
centroid.
3. For a time-harmonic analysis, electromagnetic forces (FMAG), Joule losses (JHEAT) and stored energy
(SENE) represent time-average values. These values are stored in both the real and imaginary data sets.
PLANE233

6. For the stranded coil analysis option (KEYOPT(1) = 2), JT and JS are the effective current densities as
they are calculated based on the coil cross-sectional area (SC) that includes the wire and the non-
conducting material filling the space between the winding. JHEAT represents the effective Joule heat
generation rate per unit volume as it is calculated based on the modeled coil volume that includes
the wire and the non-conducting material filling the space between the winding.
7. Not available with the stranded coil option (KEYOPT(1) = 2).
using the Sequence Number method. See "The General Postprocessor (POST1)" in the Basic Analysis
Guide and Table 3: PLANE233 Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 1237) in this manual for more information.
The following notation is used in Table 3: PLANE233 Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 1237):
Name: output quantity as defined in Table 2: PLANE233 Element Output Definitions (p. 1236)
Item: predetermined Item label for ETABLE command
E: sequence number for single-valued or constant element data

Output Quantity Name ETABLE and ESOL Command Input
Item E
JTZ NMISC 1

• A face with a removed midside node implies that the potentials vary linearly, rather than parabolically,
• It is not recommended to use the weak coupling option (KEYOPT(2) = 1) in a transient electromagnetic
analysis with eddy currents or a transient stranded coil analysis because multiple iterations may be re-
quired to achieve convergence.
PLANE233
• In a transient analysis, the THETA integration parameter defaults to the values shown in the following
table. You can use the TINTP command to modify the default setting.
Table 4 THETA Default Values

THETA De-
Analysis Type KEYOPT Values
fault Value
Strongly coupled transient electromagnetic KEYOPT(1) = 1 or 2 and KEYOPT(2) = 0 1.0
analysis with electric potential or stranded
coil analysis with voltage drop (VOLT)
analysis with time-integrated electric poten-
tial or stranded coil analysis with time-integ-
rated voltage drop (VOLT)
• The electrical permittivity material input (MP,PERZ) is applicable to electromagnetic harmonic analyses
(KEYOPT(1) = 1) only.
• In a stranded coil (KEYOPT(1) = 2) domain, all VOLT and EMF degrees of freedom must be coupled (CP
command).
• Unlike the 2-D magnetic elements PLANE53 and PLANE13 that model the eddy current effects with the
AZ option (KEYOPT(1) = 0) when BFE,,JS is not specified, PLANE233 always acts as a stranded conductor
in a harmonic or transient analysis with KEYOPT(1) = 0. In this respect, the PLANE233 behavior is con-
sistent with the 3-D electromagnetic elements (e.g. SOLID236) behavior.
• This element may not be compatible with other elements having a VOLT degree of freedom. See Element
Compatibility in the Low-Frequency Electromagnetic Analysis Guide) for more information. The electro-
magnetic analysis with time-integrated electric potential (KEYOPT(2) = 2) cannot be used with current-
based circuit (e.g. CIRCU124) or low-frequency electric (e.g. PLANE230) elements.

ANSYS Emag: The birth and death special feature is not allowed
SOLID236
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> EM <> <> PP <> EME <>

SOLID236 is a 3-D 20-node element capable of modeling electromagnetic fields. The element has
magnetic and electric degrees of freedom. Magnetic degrees of freedom are based on the edge-flux
formulation.
The edge-flux (AZ) degrees of freedoms are the line integrals of the magnetic vector potential along
the element edges. They are defined at the midside nodes only, and there are no magnetic degrees of
freedom associated with the corner nodes. The edge-flux formulation uses tree gauging (see the GAUGE
command) to produce a unique solution.
electric potential.
The element is applicable to 3-D static, time-harmonic and time-transient electromagnetic analyses.
The magnetic analysis option typically is used to model air, iron, nonferrous materials and permanent
netic analysis option is suitable for modeling solid (massive) conductors. The solid (massive) conductor
may be voltage- or current-driven, as well as circuit-fed. The electromagnetic analysis has the option
to suppress the eddy current effect in time-varying analyses to model stranded conductors. The stranded
coil analysis option is suitable for modeling a stranded winding with a prescribed current flow direction
vector. The stranded coil may be voltage- or current-driven, as well as circuit-fed.
The following command macros can be used with SOLID236 for solution postprocessing: EMAGERR,
EMFT, MMF, POWERH. See Electric and Magnetic Macros in the Low-Frequency Electromagnetic Analysis
Guide for more details.
See SOLID236 theory in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for more details about this element. The
element has nonlinear magnetic capability for modeling B-H curves or permanent magnet demagnetiz-
ation curves for static and time-transient analyses.
SOLID236
M,N,O,P,U,V,W,X
Y A,B
Z
K,L,S
I T R
5 P 4 Q J
W
O
6 M,N,O,P,U,V,W,X
M
B V A
Y B Z
U
N T
A K
L S
Y 2 3 I
R
L S Q J
T Z Pyramid Option
K X
I O,P,W
Z M
R
Q 1 U V A,B
J Y N
Y Z
I K,L,S
X T
Q R
J
Prism Option
SOLID236 Input Data

relative permeability and permittivity is available and is specified through the MURX, MURY, and MURZ
and PERX, PERY, PERZ material options, respectively. Orthotropic resistivity is specified through RSVX,
RSVY, and RSVZ material property labels. MGXX, MGYY, and MGZZ represent vector components of the
coercive force for permanent magnet materials. The magnitude of the coercive force is the square root
of the sum of the squares of the components. The direction of polarization is determined by the com-
ponents MGXX, MGYY, and MGZZ. Permanent magnet polarization directions correspond to the element
coordinate directions. The element coordinate system orientation is as described in Coordinate Sys-
tems (p. 56). Nonlinear magnetic B-H properties are entered with the TB command as described in
SOLID236
Nodal loads are defined with the D and F commands. For edge-based analysis, the D command with
Lab = AZ applies the edge-flux constraint to the node. Flux-parallel boundary conditions are prescribed
by setting AZ to zero. No AZ constraint is required to set flux-normal boundary conditions.
For modeling stranded conductors with KEYOPT(1) = 0, source current density may be applied to an
area or volume [BFA or BFV] or input as an element value [BFE]. The vector components of the current
density are with respect to the element coordinate system. See "SOLID236 Assumptions and Restric-
tions" (p. 1246) for a description of the solenoidal condition.

Nodes
Degrees of Freedom
See KEYOPT(1)
Real Constants
There are no real constants for KEYOPT(1) = 0 or 1.
SC, NC, VC, TX, TY, TZ

R, SYM
See Table 1: SOLID 236 Real Constants (p. 1243) for more information.
Material Properties
MURX, MURY, MURZ,
MGXX, MGYY, MGZZ
RSVX, RSVY, RSVZ
PERX, PERY, PERZ (see "SOLID236 Assumptions and Restrictions" (p. 1246))
Surface Loads
None
SOLID236
Body Loads
Temperature --
T(I), T(J), ..., T(Z), T(A), T(B)
Source Current Density (valid for KEYOPT(1) = 0 only)
JSX(I), JSY(I), JSZ(I), PHASE(I),
JSX(J), JSY(J), JSZ(J), PHASE(J),
...
JSX(Z), JSY(Z), JSZ(Z), PHASE(Z),
JSX(A), JSY(A), JSZ(A), PHASE(A),
JSX(B), JSY(B), JSZ(B), PHASE(B)

Special Features
Magnetic materials
KEYOPT(1)
0 --
Magnetic:
AZ
1 --
Electromagnetic:
AZ, VOLT
2 --
Stranded coil:
AZ, VOLT, EMF

KEYOPT(2)
0 --
is achieved after one iteration. Applicable to all analysis types.
1 --
coupled response. Applicable to static and transient analyses only. (see "SOLID236 Assumptions and
2 --
SOLID236
greater than 1.
KEYOPT(5)
0 --
Active
1 --
Suppressed
KEYOPT(7)
0 --
1 --
At element corner nodes only (midside node forces are condensed to the corner nodes)
KEYOPT(8)
0 --
Maxwell
1 --
Lorentz
Table 1 SOLID 236 Real Constants

No. Name Description De- Definition
fault
3 VC Coil volume none True physical volume of the coil
regardless of symmetry model-
ing considerations. It includes
SOLID236

fault
4 TX Coil winding X-directional 0 The coil direction vector T = {TX,
cosine TY, TZ}T is a unit vector tangent
5 TY Coil winding Y-directional 1 to the coil winding. It desig-
cosine nates the current flow direction.
6 TZ Coil winding Z-directional 0
cosine
considerations.
8 SYM Coil symmetry factor 1 Ratio of the true physical
volume of the coil (real constant
VC) to the modeled coil volume.
The input should be greater or
equal to 1.


available.

Name Definition O R
NODES Nodes - I, J,…, Z, A, B - Y
VOLU: Volume - Y
TEMP Input temperatures T(I), T(J), ..., T(Z), T(A), T(B) - Y
LOC Output location (X, Y, Z) - -
SOLID236
Name Definition O R
B: X, Y, Z, SUM Magnetic flux density components and vector mag- - 1
nitude
H: X, Y, Z, SUM Magnetic field intensity components and vector mag- - 1
nitude
EF: X, Y, Z, SUM Electric field intensity components and magnitude [7] - 1
JC: X, Y, Z, SUM Nodal conduction current density components and - 1
magnitude [7]
FMAG: X, Y, Z, Electromagnetic force components and magnitude [3] - 1
SUM
JT: X, Y, Z, SUM Element conduction current density components (in - 1
the global Cartesian coordinate system) and vector
magnitude [6
JS: X, Y, Z, SUM Element current density components (in the global - 1
[6
centroid.
they are calculated based on the coil cross-sectional area (SC) that includes the wire and the non-
conducting material filling the space between the winding. JHEAT represents the effective Joule heat
generation rate per unit volume as it is calculated based on the modeled coil volume that includes
the wire and the non-conducting material filling the space between the winding.
Name
Item
SOLID236
E
Output ETABLE and

Quant- ESOL Command
ity Input
Name Item E
JTX NMISC 1
JTY NMISC 2
JTZ NMISC 3
JTSUM NMISC 4

• Midside nodes may not be removed.
in meshing transition zones.
• The magnetic analysis option (KEYOPT(1) = 0) requires the source current density specified with the
BFE,,JS command to be solenoidal.

THETA De-
fault Value
• The electrical permittivity material input (MP,PERX, also PERY, PERZ) is applicable to electromagnetic
harmonic analyses (KEYOPT(1) = 1) only.
SOLID236
• In a stranded coil (KEYOPT(1) = 2) domain, the winding direction vector T = {TX, TY, TZ}T must be specified
in the element coordinate system and all VOLT and EMF degrees of freedom must be coupled (CP
command).
based circuit (e.g. CIRCU124) or low-frequency electric (e.g. SOLID231) elements.

ANSYS Emag
SOLID237
MP <> <> <> <> <> <> <> EM <> <> PP <> EME <>

SOLID237 is a 3-D 10-node, element capable of modeling electromagnetic fields. The element has
magnetic and electric degrees of freedom. Magnetic degrees of freedom are based on the edge-flux
formulation.
The edge-flux (AZ) degrees of freedoms are the line integrals of the magnetic vector potential along
the element edges. They are defined at the midside nodes only and there are no magnetic degrees of
freedom associated with the corner nodes. The edge-flux formulation uses tree gauging (see the GAUGE
command) to produce a unique solution.
electric potential.
The element is applicable to 3-D static, time-harmonic and time-transient electromagnetic analyses.
The magnetic analysis option typically is used to model air, iron, nonferrous materials and permanent
netic analysis option is suitable for modeling solid (massive) conductors. The solid (massive) conductor
may be voltage- or current-driven, as well as circuit-fed. The electromagnetic analysis has the option
to suppress the eddy current effect in time-varying analyses to model stranded conductors. The stranded
coil analysis option is suitable for modeling a stranded winding with a prescribed current flow direction
vector. The stranded coil may be voltage- or current-driven, as well as circuit-fed.
The following command macros can be used with SOLID237 for solution postprocessing: EMAGERR,
EMFT, MMF, POWERH. See Electric and Magnetic Macros in the Low-Frequency Electromagnetic Analysis
Guide for more details.
The element has nonlinear magnetic capability for modeling B-H curves or permanent magnet demag-
netization curves for static and time-transient analyses. See SOLID237 in the Mechanical APDL Theory
Reference for more details about this element.
SOLID237
4
R
P
Q 3
Y 2
O K
X I N
M
Z
1
J
SOLID237 Input Data

The element is defined by 10 node points and the material properties.
relative permeability and permittivity is available and is specified through the MURX, MURY, and MURZ
and PERX, PERY, PERZ material options, respectively. Orthotropic resistivity is specified through RSVX,
RSVY, and RSVZ material property labels. MGXX, MGYY, and MGZZ represent vector components of the
coercive force for permanent magnet materials. The magnitude of the coercive force is the square root
of the sum of the squares of the components. The direction of polarization is determined by the com-
ponents MGXX, MGYY, and MGZZ. Permanent magnet polarization directions correspond to the element
coordinate directions. The element coordinate system orientation is as described in Coordinate Sys-
tems (p. 56). Nonlinear magnetic B-H properties are entered with the TB command as described in
Nodal loads are defined with the D and F commands. For edge-based analysis, the D command with
Lab = AZ applies the edge-flux constraint to the node. Flux-parallel boundary conditions are prescribed
by setting AZ to zero. No AZ constraint is required to set flux-normal boundary conditions.
SOLID237
For modeling stranded conductors KEYOPT(1) = 0, source current density may be applied to an area or
volume [BFE or BFV] or input as an element value [BFE]. The vector components of the current density
are with respect to the element coordinate system. See "SOLID237 Assumptions and Restrictions" (p. 1256)
for a description of the solenoidal condition.

Nodes
I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P, Q, R
Degrees of Freedom
See KEYOPT(1)
Real Constants
There are no real constants for KEYOPT(1) = 0 or 1.
SC, NC, VC, TX, TY, TZ

R, SYM
See Table 1: SOLID 237 Real Constants (p. 1253) for more information.
Material Properties
MURX, MURY, MURZ,
MGXX, MGYY, MGZZ
RSVX, RSVY, RSVZ
PERX, PERY, PERZ (see "SOLID237 Assumptions and Restrictions" (p. 1256))
Surface Loads
None
Body Loads
Temperature --
T(I), T(J), ..., T(P), T(Q), T(R)
Source Current Density (valid for KEYOPT(1) = 0 only)
JSX(I), JSY(I), JSZ(I), PHASE(I),
JSX(J), JSY(J), JSZ(J), PHASE(J),
...
JSX(P), JSY(P), JSZ(P), PHASE(P),
SOLID237
JSX(Q), JSY(Q), JSZ(Q), PHASE(Q),
JSX(R), JSY(R), JSZ(R), PHASE(R)

Special Features
Magnetic materials
KEYOPT(1)
0 --
Magnetic:
AZ
1 --
Electromagnetic:
AZ, VOLT
2 --
Stranded coil:
AZ, VOLT, EMF

KEYOPT(2)
0 --
is achieved after one iteration. Applicable to all analysis types
1 --
coupled response. Applicable to static and transient analyses only. (see "SOLID237 Assumptions and
2 --
greater than 1.
KEYOPT(5)
0 --
Active
1 --
Suppressed
SOLID237
KEYOPT(7)
0 --
1 --
At element corner nodes only (midside nodes forces are condensed to the corner nodes)
KEYOPT(8)
0 --
Maxwell
1 --
Lorentz
Table 1 SOLID 237 Real Constants

fault
3 VC Coil volume none True physical volume of the coil
regardless of symmetry model-
ing considerations. It includes
4 TX Coil winding X-directional 0 The coil direction vector T = {TX,
cosine TY, TZ}T is a unit vector tangent
5 TY Coil winding Y-directional 1 to the coil winding. It desig-
cosine nates the current flow direction.
6 TZ Coil winding Z-directional 0
cosine
considerations.
8 SYM Coil symmetry factor 1 Ratio of the true physical
volume of the coil (real constant
VC) to the modeled coil volume.
SOLID237

fault
The input should be greater or
equal to 1.


available.

Name Definition O R
NODES Nodes - I, J,…, P, Q, R - Y
VOLU: Volume - Y
TEMP Input temperatures T(I), T(J), ..., T(P), T(Q), T(R) - Y
LOC Output location (X, Y, Z) - -
B: X, Y, Z, SUM Magnetic flux density components and vector mag- - 1
nitude
H: X, Y, Z, SUM Magnetic field intensity components and vector mag- - 1
nitude
EF: X, Y, Z, SUM Electric field intensity components and magnitude [7] - 1
JC: X, Y, Z, SUM Nodal conduction current density components and - 1
magnitude [7]
FMAG: X, Y, Z, Electromagnetic force components and magnitude [3] - 1
SUM
JT: X, Y, Z, SUM Element conduction current density components (in - 1
the global Cartesian coordinate system) and vector
magnitude [6]
SOLID237
Name Definition O R
JS: X, Y, Z, SUM Element current density components (in the global - 1
[6]
centroid.
they are calculated based on the coil cross-sectional (SC) that includes the wire and the non-conducting
material filling the space between the winding. JHEAT represents the effective Joule heat generation
rate per unit volume as it is calculated based on the modeled coil volume that includes the wire and
the non-conducting material filling the space between the winding.
Name
Item
E
Output ETABLE and

Quant- ESOL Command
ity Input
Name Item E
JTX NMISC 1
JTY NMISC 2
JTZ NMISC 3
JTSUM NMISC 4
SOLID237

• Midside nodes may not be removed.
• The magnetic analysis option (KEYOPT(1) = 0) requires the source current density specified with the
BFE,,JS command to be solenoidal.

THETA De-
fault Value
• The electrical permittivity material input (MP,PERX, also PERY, PERZ) is applicable to electromagnetic
harmonic analyses (KEYOPT(1) = 1) only.
• In a stranded coil (KEYOPT(1) = 2) domain, the winding direction vector T = {TX, TY, TZ}T must be specified
in the element coordinate system and all VOLT and EMF degrees of freedom must be coupled (CP
command).
based circuit (e.g. CIRCU124) or low-frequency electric (e.g. SOLID232) elements.

ANSYS Emag
HSFLD241
MP ME <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS
HSFLD241 Element Description

HSFLD241 is used to model fluids that are fully enclosed by solids (containing vessels). The hydrostatic
fluid element is well suited for calculating fluid volume and pressure for coupled problems involving
fluid-solid interaction. The pressure in the fluid volume is assumed to be uniform (no pressure gradients),
so sloshing effects cannot be included. Temperature effects and compressibility may be included, but
fluid viscosity cannot be included.
Hydrostatic fluid elements are overlaid on the faces of 2-D solid elements enclosing the fluid volume.
See HSFLD241 in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for more details about this element. See HSFLD242
for a 3-D version of this element.
Figure 1 HSFLD241 Geometry
HSFLD241 Input Data

The hydrostatic fluid element is defined by three or four nodes. Nodes I, J and K on the surface (face
1) are shared with the solid element and have two degrees of freedom at each node: translation in x
and y directions. Node K is not used if the underlying solid element does not have a midside node. For
the case of a degenerate solid element sharing the collapsed face with the hydrostatic fluid element,
the surface nodes of the hydrostatic fluid element will be coincident. Node L is a pressure node with a
hydrostatic pressure degree of freedom. Hydrostatic fluid elements can be generated automatically
using the ESURF command.
The pressure node (L) can be located anywhere in the fluid volume, except when the fluid volume has
symmetry boundaries; in this case the pressure node must be located on the symmetry line or on the
intersection point of multiple symmetry lines. The pressure node is automatically moved to the centroid
of the fluid volume if there are no displacement degree-of-freedom constraints specified. To keep the
pressure node on a symmetry line, you must specify symmetry boundary conditions at this node. (The
displacement degrees of freedom at the pressure node do not have any displacement solution associated
with them. They are only available for applying displacement degree of freedom constraints.) The
pressure node is shared by all the hydrostatic fluid elements used to define the fluid volume. It is also
used to apply temperature loads, fluid mass flow rate, or hydrostatic pressure degree-of-freedom con-
straints for the fluid.
HSFLD241
You can define a hydrostatic fluid element without an underlying solid element in situations where the
underlying solid has a discontinuity. In this case, the surface nodes (I and J) of the hydrostatic fluid
element must be shared with adjacent solid elements, or the displacement degrees of freedom at the
surface nodes should be constrained. For example, the gap between the cylinder and piston in a cylinder-
piston assembly with fluid may be bridged with a hydrostatic fluid element by sharing one of its surface
nodes (I) with a solid element on the cylinder and its other surface node (J) with a solid element on the
piston (see Example Model Using Hydrostatic Fluid Elements in the Structural Analysis Guide).
You can define material properties for hydrostatic fluid elements using MP or TB commands. All hydro-
static fluid elements sharing a pressure node must use the same material property definition and must
have the same real constant values (THK and PREF).
You can input element thickness and reference pressure (must be specified for compressible gas defined
via TB command with Lab = FLUID and TBOPT = GAS) as real constants THK and PREF. The THK value
is used to calculate element volume.
You can define the initial state of the hydrostatic fluid by defining initial pressure (input via the IC
command with Lab = HDSP) at the pressure node. Specify the reference temperature by using the
TREF command or the MP,REFT command. For compressible gas (defined via the TB command with
Lab = FLUID and TBOPT = GAS), the initial pressure and the reference pressure (input as real constant
PREF) are added internally to get the total initial pressure for the Ideal Gas Law. Internal force corres-
ponding to initial pressure is calculated internally and applied over the first load step.
You can prescribe uniform pressure for the fluid as a hydrostatic pressure degree-of-freedom constraint
at the pressure node (input on D command with Lab = HDSP). The change in hydrostatic pressure
value is assumed to occur as a result of the addition or removal of fluid mass to or from the containing
vessel. Applying a hydrostatic pressure degree-of-freedom constraint is equivalent to applying a surface
load on the underlying solid element surface. Element loads are described in Nodal Loading (p. 49).
You can apply fluid mass flow rate as a load on the pressure node (input via F command with Lab =
DVOL); a positive value indicates fluid mass flowing into the containing vessel. You can also input fluid
temperature as an element body load at the pressure node (input via BF command with Lab = TEMP).
The nodal temperature defaults to TUNIF.
You can model fluid flow between two fluid volumes in two containing vessels by using FLUID116
coupled thermal-fluid pipe elements to connect the pressure nodes of the fluid volumes. You must ac-
tivate the PRES degree of freedom (KEYOPT(1) = 1) on pressure nodes of the hydrostatic fluid elements.
In addition, you must set KEYOPT(1) = 3 on the FLUID116 element.
KEYOPT(1) defines degrees of freedom for the hydrostatic fluid element:
Use KEYOPT(1) = 0 (default) to activate UX and UY degrees of freedom on the surface nodes
(I, J, K) and HDSP degree of freedom on the pressure node (L).
Use KEYOPT(1) = 1 to activate UX, and UY degrees of freedom on surface nodes (I, J, K) and
HDSP and PRES degrees of freedom on the pressure node (L). You must activate the PRES degree
of freedom if the pressure node of the hydrostatic fluid element is shared with a coupled
thermal-fluid pipe (FLUID116) element to model fluid flow.
KEYOPT(3) defines the hydrostatic fluid element behavior:
Use KEYOPT(3) = 0 (default) to model planar behavior. The choice of plane stress or plane strain
is made automatically based on the attached solid element.
Use KEYOPT(3) = 1 to model 2-D axisymmetric behavior.
HSFLD241
KEYOPT(5) specifies how mass is computed for the hydrostatic fluid element:
Use KEYOPT(5) = 0 (default) to ignore the mass contribution from the fluid element. However,
you can attach MASS21 elements to the nodes of the underlying 2-D solid elements to account
for the fluid mass.
Use KEYOPT(5) = 1 to distribute the fluid element mass to the surface nodes (I, J, K) based on
the volume of the fluid element. No mass is added to the surface nodes if the volume of the
fluid element becomes negative.
Use KEYOPT(5) = 2 to distribute the fluid element mass to the surface nodes (I, J, K) based on
the ratio of element surface area (area of face 1) to the total fluid surface area.
KEYOPT(6) defines the hydrostatic fluid element compressibility:
Use KEYOPT(6) = 0 (default) to model the hydrostatic fluid element as compressible. You need
to define a fluid material property (use the TB command with Lab = FLUID) to relate changes
in fluid pressure to fluid volume.
Use KEYOPT(6) = 1 to model the hydrostatic fluid element as incompressible. The fluid volume
is kept constant, even as the solid enclosing the fluid undergoes large deformations. The fluid
volume, however, can change when fluid mass is added to or taken out of the containing vessel;
this is achieved by applying a fluid mass flow rate or by prescribing a non-zero hydrostatic
pressure degree-of-freedom constraint at the pressure node. The fluid volume can also change
when a temperature load is applied at the pressure node for a fluid with a non-zero coefficient
of thermal expansion.
You can define contact and target surfaces on the attached 2-D solid elements to model self-contact
between walls of the containing vessel after the fluid has been removed. Note that contact should not
cause a single fluid region to be separated into two since the pressure-volume calculations are performed
assuming a single cavity.
For more information on using hydrostatic fluid elements to model fluids enclosed by solids, see
"Modeling Hydrostatic Fluids" in the Structural Analysis Guide.
"HSFLD241 Input Summary" (p. 1259) contains a summary of the element input. See Element Input (p. 43)
in this document for a general description of element input.
HSFLD241 Input Summary

Nodes
I, J, K, L
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY for surface nodes (I, J, K)
HDSP and PRES for pressure node (L)

Real Constants
THK - Thickness
PREF - Reference pressure for compressible gas defined via TB command with Lab = FLUID and
TBOPT = GAS
Material Properties
ALPX, DENS (MP command), ALPD
FLUID (TB command)
HSFLD241
Surface Loads
None
Body Loads
Temperatures --
T(L)
Special Features
Large deflection
Linear perturbation
Nonlinear
KEYOPT(1)
Degrees of freedom:
0 --
UX and UY degrees of freedom at surface nodes, HDSP degree of freedom at pressure node (default)
1 --
UX and UY degrees of freedom at surface nodes, HDSP and PRES degrees of freedom at pressure
node
KEYOPT(3)
Element behavior:
0 --
Planar (default)
1 --
Axisymmetric
KEYOPT(5)
Fluid mass:
0 --
No fluid mass (default)
1 --
Fluid mass calculated based on the volume of the fluid element
2 --
Fluid mass calculated based on the surface area of the fluid element
KEYOPT(6)
Fluid compressibility:
0 --
Compressible (default)
1 --
Incompressible
HSFLD241 Output Data


• Additional element output as shown in Table 1: HSFLD241 Element Output Definitions (p. 1261)
HSFLD241
available.
Table 1 HSFLD241 Element Output Definitions

Name Definition O R
AREA Element surface area (face 1) Y Y
VOLU Element volume Y Y
XC, YC Location on the surface (face 1) where results are repor- Y 1
ted
DENSITY Fluid density Y Y
TEMP Temperature at nodes: T(I), T(J), T(K), T(L) Y Y
TVOL Total volume of the fluid in the containing vessel 2 2
TMAS Total mass of the fluid in the containing vessel 3 3
MFLO Fluid mass flow rate 4 4
TVOLO Total original volume of the fluid in the containing 2 2
vessel

2. Elements that share a pressure node have the same TVOL and TVOLO output value.
3. Elements that share a pressure node have the same TMAS output value.
4. Elements that share a pressure node have the same MFLO output value.
Table 2: HSFLD241 Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 1262) lists output available through the ETABLE command
notation is used in Table 2: HSFLD241 Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 1262):
Name
output quantity as defined in Table 1: HSFLD241 Element Output Definitions (p. 1261)
Item
HSFLD241
E
Table 2 HSFLD241 Item and Sequence Numbers

ETABLE and
Name Input
Item E
DENSITY NMISC 1
AREA NMISC 2
TVOL NMISC 3
TMAS NMISC 4
MFLO NMISC 5
TVOLO NMISC 6
HSFLD241 Assumptions and Restrictions

• The fluid volume has no free surface; it is completely enclosed by the solid (containing vessel).
• The fluid volume has uniform pressure, temperature, and density without any gradients.
• All elements used to define a fluid volume share a pressure node with a hydrostatic pressure degree
of freedom.
• The pressure node can be located anywhere within the fluid volume; it is automatically moved to the
centroid of the fluid volume if there are no displacement degree-of-freedom constraints specified.
However, if the fluid volume is bounded by one or more symmetry lines, the pressure node must be
on the symmetry line or intersecting corner of multiple symmetry lines, and it must have symmetry
boundary conditions.
• The fluid may be modeled as incompressible or compressible without any viscosity.
• The PRES degree of freedom must be active (KEYOPT(1) = 1) on the pressure node of the hydrostatic
fluid element to model fluid flow with FLUID116 coupled thermal-fluid pipe elements. In this case, the
PRES (pressure) and HDSP (hydrostatic pressure) degrees of freedom are made to be the same at the
pressure node.
• Inertial effects such as sloshing cannot be included, but fluid mass can be added to the surface nodes
(I, J, K) shared with the underlying 2-D solid by using KEYOPT(5).
• This element can be used in linear and nonlinear static and transient analyses and modal analyses.
HSFLD241 Product Restrictions

HSFLD242
MP ME <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS
HSFLD242 Element Description

HSFLD242 is used to model fluids that are fully enclosed by solids (containing vessels). The hydrostatic
fluid element is well suited for calculating fluid volume and pressure for coupled problems involving
fluid-solid interaction. The pressure in the fluid volume is assumed to be uniform (no pressure gradients),
so sloshing effects cannot be included. Temperature effects and compressibility may be included, but
fluid viscosity cannot be included.
Hydrostatic fluid elements are overlaid on the faces of 3-D solid or shell elements enclosing the fluid
volume. See HSFLD242 in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for more details about this element.
See HSFLD241 for a 2-D version of this element.
Figure 1 HSFLD242 Geometry
HSFLD242 Input Data

The hydrostatic fluid element is defined by five to nine nodes. Nodes I, J, K, L, M, N, O, and P on the
surface (face 1) are shared with the solid or shell element and have three degrees of freedom at each
node: translation in x, y, and z directions. Nodes M, N, O, and P are not used if the underlying solid or
shell element does not have midside nodes. For the case of a degenerate solid or shell element sharing
the collapsed face with the hydrostatic fluid element, some of the surface nodes of the hydrostatic fluid
element will be coincident. Node Q is a pressure node with a hydrostatic pressure degree of freedom.
Hydrostatic fluid elements can be generated automatically using the ESURF command.
The pressure node (Q) can be located anywhere in the fluid volume, except when the fluid volume has
symmetry boundaries; in this case the pressure node must be located on the symmetry plane or on the
intersection point or edge of multiple symmetry planes. The pressure node is automatically moved to
the centroid of the fluid volume if there are no displacement degree-of-freedom constraints specified.
To keep the pressure node on a symmetry line, you must specify symmetry boundary conditions at this
node. (The displacement degrees of freedom at the pressure node do not have any displacement
solution associated with them. They are only available for applying displacement degree of freedom
constraints.) The pressure node is shared by all the hydrostatic fluid elements used to define the fluid
HSFLD242
volume. It is also used to apply temperature loads, fluid mass flow rate, or hydrostatic pressure degree-
of-freedom constraints for the fluid.
You can define a hydrostatic fluid element without an underlying solid or shell element in situations
where the underlying solid has a discontinuity. In this case, the surface nodes (I through P) of the hy-
drostatic fluid element must be shared with adjacent solid or shell elements, or the displacement degrees
of freedom at the surface nodes should be constrained. For example, the gap between the cylinder and
piston in a cylinder-piston assembly with fluid may be bridged with a hydrostatic fluid element by
sharing some of its surface nodes with a solid or shell element on the cylinder and sharing its other
surface nodes with a solid or shell element on the piston (see Example Model Using Hydrostatic Fluid
Elements in the Structural Analysis Guide).
You can define material properties for hydrostatic fluid elements using MP or TB commands. All hydro-
static fluid elements sharing a pressure node must use the same material property definition and must
have the same real constant values (PREF).
You can input a reference pressure (must be specified for compressible gas defined via TB command
with Lab = FLUID and TBOPT = GAS) as real constant PREF.
You can define the initial state of the hydrostatic fluid by defining initial pressure (input via the IC
command with Lab = HDSP) at the pressure node. Specify the reference temperature by using the
TREF command or the MP,REFT command. For compressible gas (defined via the TB command with
Lab = FLUID and TBOPT = GAS), the initial pressure and the reference pressure (input as real constant
PREF) are added internally to get the total initial pressure for the Ideal Gas Law. Internal force corres-
ponding to initial pressure is calculated internally and applied over the first load step.
You can prescribe uniform pressure for the fluid as a hydrostatic pressure degree-of-freedom constraint
at the pressure node (input via the D command with Lab = HDSP). The change in hydrostatic pressure
value is assumed to occur as a result of the addition or removal of fluid mass to or from the containing
vessel. Applying a hydrostatic pressure degree-of-freedom constraint is equivalent to applying a surface
load on the underlying solid or shell element surface. Element loads are described in Nodal Load-
ing (p. 49). You can apply a fluid mass flow rate as a load on the pressure node (input via the F command
with Lab = DVOL); a positive value indicates fluid mass flowing into the containing vessel. You can also
input fluid temperature as an element body load at the pressure node (input via the BF command with
Lab = TEMP). The nodal temperature defaults to TUNIF.
You can model fluid flow between two fluid volumes in two containing vessels by using FLUID116
coupled thermal-fluid pipe elements to connect the pressure nodes of the fluid volumes. You must ac-
tivate the PRES degree of freedom (KEYOPT(1) = 1) on pressure nodes of the hydrostatic fluid elements.
In addition, you must set KEYOPT(1) = 3 on the FLUID116 element.
KEYOPT(1) defines degrees of freedom for the hydrostatic fluid element:
Use KEYOPT(1) = 0 (default) to activate UX, UY, and UZ degrees of freedom on the surface nodes
(I through P) and HDSP degree of freedom on the pressure node (Q).
Use KEYOPT(1) = 1 to activate UX, UY, and UZ degrees of freedom on surface nodes (I through
P) and HDSP and PRES degrees of freedom on the pressure node (Q). You must activate the
PRES degree of freedom if the pressure node of the hydrostatic fluid element is shared with a
coupled thermal-fluid pipe (FLUID116) element to model fluid flow. In this case, you must also
set KEYOPT(1) = 3 on the FLUID116 element.
KEYOPT(5) specifies how mass is computed for the hydrostatic fluid element:
HSFLD242
Use KEYOPT(5) = 0 (default) to ignore the mass contribution from the fluid element. However,
you can attach MASS21 elements to the nodes of the underlying 3-D solid or shell elements to
account for the fluid mass.
Use KEYOPT(5) = 1 to distribute the fluid element mass to the surface nodes (I through P) based
on the volume of the fluid element. No mass is added to the surface nodes if the volume of
the fluid element becomes negative.
Use KEYOPT(5) = 2 to distribute the fluid element mass to the surface nodes (I through P) based
on the ratio of element surface area (area of face 1) to the total fluid surface area.
KEYOPT(6) defines the hydrostatic fluid element compressibility:
Use KEYOPT(6) = 0 (default) to model the hydrostatic fluid element as compressible. You need
to define a fluid material property (use the TB command with Lab = FLUID) to relate changes
in fluid pressure to fluid volume.
Use KEYOPT(6) = 1 to model the hydrostatic fluid element as incompressible. The fluid volume
is kept constant, even as the solid enclosing the fluid undergoes large deformations. The fluid
volume, however, can change when fluid mass is added to or taken out of the containing vessel;
this is achieved by applying a fluid mass flow rate or by prescribing a non-zero hydrostatic
pressure degree-of-freedom constraint at the pressure node. The fluid volume can also change
when a temperature load is applied at the pressure node for a fluid with a non-zero coefficient
of thermal expansion.
You can define contact and target surfaces on the underlying 3-D solid or shell elements to model self-
contact between walls of the vessel after the fluid has been removed. Note that contact should not
cause a single fluid region to be separated into two since the pressure-volume calculations are performed
assuming a single cavity.
For more information on using hydrostatic fluid elements to model fluids enclosed by solids, see
"Modeling Hydrostatic Fluids" in the Structural Analysis Guide.
"HSFLD242 Input Summary" (p. 1265) contains a summary of the element input. See Element Input (p. 43)
HSFLD242 Input Summary

Nodes
I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P, Q
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, UZ for surface nodes (I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P)
HSDP and PRES for pressure node (Q)

Real Constants
PREF - Reference pressure for compressible gas defined via TB command with Lab = FLUID and TBOPT
= GAS
Material Properties
ALPX, DENS (MP command), ALPD
FLUID (TB command)

Surface Loads
None
HSFLD242
Body Loads
Temperatures --
T(Q)
Special Features
Large deflection
Linear perturbation
Nonlinear
KEYOPT(1)
Degrees of freedom:
0 --
UX, UY, and UZ degrees of freedom at surface nodes, HDSP degree of freedom at pressure node
(default)
1 --
UX, UY, and UZ degrees of freedom at surface nodes, HDSP and PRES degrees of freedom at pressure
node
KEYOPT(5)
Fluid mass:
0 --
No fluid mass (default)
1 --
Fluid mass calculated based on the volume of the fluid element
2 --
Fluid mass calculated based on the surface area of the fluid element
KEYOPT(6)
Fluid compressibility:
0 --
Compressible (default)
1 --
Incompressible
HSFLD242 Output Data


• Additional element output as shown in Table 1: HSFLD242 Element Output Definitions (p. 1267)
HSFLD242
available.
Table 1 HSFLD242 Element Output Definitions

Name Definition O R
AREA Element surface area (face 1) Y Y
VOLU Element volume Y Y
XC, YC, ZC Location on the surface (face 1) where results are repor- Y 1
ted
DENSITY Fluid density Y Y
TEMP Temperature at nodes: T(I), T(J), T(K), T(L), T(M), T(N), Y Y
T(O), T(P), T(Q)
TVOL Total volume of the fluid in the containing vessel 2 2
TMAS Total mass of the fluid in the containing vessel 3 3
MFLO Fluid mass flow rate 4 4
TVOLO Total original volume of the fluid in the containing 2 2
vessel

2. Elements that share a pressure node have the same TVOL and TVOLO output values.
3. Elements that share a pressure node have the same TMAS output value.
4. Elements that share a pressure node have the same MFLO output value.
Table 2: HSFLD242 Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 1268) lists output available through the ETABLE command
notation is used in Table 2: HSFLD242 Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 1268):
Name
output quantity as defined in Table 1: HSFLD242 Element Output Definitions (p. 1267)
Item
HSFLD242
E
Table 2 HSFLD242 Item and Sequence Numbers

ETABLE and
Name Input
Item E
DENSITY NMISC 1
AREA NMISC 2
TVOL NMISC 3
TMAS NMISC 4
MFLO NMISC 5
TVOLO NMISC 6
HSFLD242 Assumptions and Restrictions

• The fluid volume has no free surface; it is completely enclosed by the solid (containing vessel).
• The fluid volume has uniform pressure, temperature, and density without any gradients.
• All elements used to define a fluid volume share a pressure node with a hydrostatic pressure degree
of freedom.
• The pressure node can be located anywhere within the fluid volume; it is automatically moved to the
centroid of the fluid volume if there are no displacement degree-of-freedom constraints specified.
However, if the fluid volume is bounded by one or more symmetry lines, the pressure node must be
on the symmetry plane, intersecting point, or edge of multiple symmetry planes, and it must have
symmetry boundary condition.
• The fluid may be modeled as incompressible or compressible without any viscosity.
• The PRES degree of freedom must be active (KEYOPT(1) = 1) on the pressure node of the hydrostatic
fluid element to model fluid flow with FLUID116 coupled thermal-fluid pipe elements. In this case, the
PRES (pressure) and HDSP (hydrostatic pressure) degrees of freedom are made to be the same at the
pressure node.
• Inertial effects such as sloshing cannot be included, but fluid mass can be added to the surface nodes
(I through P) shared with the underlying 3-D solid or shell elements by using KEYOPT(5).
• This element can be used in linear and nonlinear static and transient analyses and modal analyses.
HSFLD242 Product Restrictions

SURF251

SURF251 is used for radiation surface loads and can be used only with the radiosity solver method. It
can be overlaid onto a face of any 2-D thermal solid element that supports temperature DOF, except
FLUID141 elements. This element is applicable to 2-D thermal analyses (planar or axisymmetric). Various
other loads and surface effects may exist simultaneously (e.g., SURF151 and SURF153 and SURF251 may
be applied on the same solid element faces to support convection heat flux and radiation heat flux
loads).
This element can be created only by the RSURF command. The underlying solid surface must also have
the RDSF flag.
Y
I
X
SURF251 Input Data

The element is defined by two nodes, regardless of the underlying solid element.
You would typically generate SURF251 elements via the RSURF command, creating elements which are
coincident with the solid element surface. However, if you are using decimation (RDEC), then the surface
elements created will not coincide with the underlying solid element topology. See Figure 2 (p. 1270).
Symmetrical SURF251 elements (produced when using the symmetry options [RSYMM]) can have no
underlying solid elements. The RSURF command always produces extra nodes to define the SURF251
topology as shown in Figure 2 (p. 1270), regardless if RDEC is used.
SURF251
Figure 2 SURF251 Elements Without Coincident Nodes
SF ,,RDSF flags
PLANE55 PLANE55 SURF251
RDEC,
⇒ ⇒
PLANE55 RSURF PLANE55
You cannot apply any loads on this element. During solution, the element extracts the temperature of
the solid element and computes the radiation heat flux, which is transferred back as a surface load to
the solid element.
input.

Element Name
SURF251
Nodes
I, J
Degrees of Freedom
None
Real Constants
None
Material Properties
None
Surface Loads
None
Body Loads
None
Special Features
None
KEYOPTS
None
SURF251 Output Data

Table 1: SURF251 Item and Sequence Numbers for the ETABLE and ESOL Commands (p. 1271) lists output
available through the ETABLE command using the Sequence Number method. See The General Post-
processor (POST1) in the Basic Analysis Guide and The Item and Sequence Number Table (p. 52) in this
manual for more information. The following notation is used in Table 3: SURF151 Item and Sequence
Numbers (p. 564):
SURF251
Name
output quantity as defined in Table 1: SURF251 Item and Sequence Numbers for the ETABLE and ESOL
Commands (p. 1271)
Item
E
I,J
Table 1 SURF251 Item and Sequence Numbers for the ETABLE and ESOL Commands
Name Item E
CENTROID X NMISC 1
CENTROID Y NMISC 2
CENTROID Z NMISC 3
AREA NMISC 4
TEMP NMISC 5
EMISSIVITY NMISC 6
Net radiation heat flux NMISC 7
Emitted radiation heat flux NMISC 8
Reflected radiation heat flux NMISC 9
Incident radiant heat flux NMISC 10
Enclosure No. NMISC 18
The net radiation heat flux is the sum of the directly emitted radiation flux [εσT4] plus the reflected ra-
diation flux [(1–ε)qi] minus the incoming radiation [qi], as shown in Figure 3 (p. 1272).
SURF251
Figure 3 Net Radiation Heat Flux
εσT4
(1 - ε) qi
qi
Net outgoing radiant heat flux = εσT4+(1-ε)qi-qi
emitted incident
reflected


None
SURF252

SURF252 is used for radiation surface loads and can be used only with the radiosity solver method. It
can be overlaid onto a face of any 3-D thermal solid or shell element that supports temperature DOF,
except FLUID142 elements. This element is applicable to 3-D thermal analyses. Various other loads and
surface effects may exist simultaneously (e.g., SURF152 and SURF154 and SURF252 may be applied on
the same solid element faces to support convection heat flux and radiation heat flux loads).
This element can be created only by the RSURF command. The surface must also have the RDSF flag.
L K
K,L
I J
I J
Z (Triangular Option)
Y
X
SURF252 Input Data

The element is defined by three or four nodes, regardless of the underlying solid element.
You would typically generate SURF252 elements via the RSURF command, creating elements which are
coincident with the solid element surface. However, if you are using decimation (RDEC), then the surface
elements created will not coincide with the underlying solid element topology. See Figure 2 (p. 1274).
Symmetrical SURF252 elements (produced when using the symmetry options [RSYMM]) will have no
underlying solid elements. The RSURF command always produces extra nodes to define the SURF252
topology as shown in Figure 2 (p. 1274), regardless if RDEC is used.
SURF252
Figure 2 SURF252 Elements Without Coincident Nodes
SF,,,RDSF
SURF252
RDEC, ⇒
⇒
R UR
SOLID70
You cannot apply any loads on this element. During solution, the element extracts the temperature of
the solid element and computes the radiation heat flux, which is transferred back as a surface load to
the solid element.
input.

Element Name
SURF252
Nodes
I, J, K, L
Degrees of Freedom
None
Real Constants
None
Material Properties
None
Surface Loads
None
Body Loads
None
Special Features
None
KEYOPTS
None
SURF252
SURF252 Output Data

Table 1: SURF252 Item and Sequence Numbers for the ETABLE and ESOL Commands (p. 1275) lists output
available through the ETABLE command using the Sequence Number method. See The General Post-
processor (POST1) in the Basic Analysis Guide and The Item and Sequence Number Table (p. 52) in this
manual for more information. The following notation is used in Table 3: SURF151 Item and Sequence
Numbers (p. 564):
Name
output quantity as defined in Table 1: SURF252 Item and Sequence Numbers for the ETABLE and ESOL
Commands (p. 1275)
Item
E
I,J
Table 1 SURF252 Item and Sequence Numbers for the ETABLE and ESOL Commands
Name Item E
CENTROID X NMISC 1
CENTROID Y NMISC 2
CENTROID Z NMISC 3
AREA NMISC 4
TEMP NMISC 5
EMISSIVITY NMISC 6
Net radiation heat flux NMISC 7
Emitted radiation heat flux NMISC 8
Reflected radiation heat flux NMISC 9
Incident radiant heat flux NMISC 10
Enclosure No. NMISC 18
The net radiation heat flux is the sum of the directly emitted radiation flux [εσT4] plus the reflected ra-
diation flux [(1–ε)qi] minus the incoming radiation [qi], as shown in Figure 3 (p. 1276).
SURF252
Figure 3 Net Radiation Heat Flux
εσT4
(1 - ε) qi
qi
Net outgoing radiant heat flux = εσT4+(1-ε)qi-qi
emitted incident
reflected


None
REINF263
REINF263 Element Description

Use REINF263 with standard 2-D solid and shell elements (referred to here as the base elements) to
provide extra reinforcing to those elements.
The element uses a smeared approach and is suitable for modeling evenly spaced reinforcing fibers
that appear in layered form. Each reinforcing layer contains a cluster of fibers with unique orientation,
material, and cross-section area, and is simplified as a homogenous membrane having unidirectional
stiffness. You can specify multiple layers of reinforcing in one REINF263 element. The nodal locations,
degrees of freedom, and connectivity of the REINF263 element are identical to those of the base element.
REINF263 has plasticity, stress stiffening, creep, large deflection, and large strain capabilities. See REINF263
Figure 1 REINF263 Geometry
K ∂ JJ K
JJ O
L L
P KK N
I I
J M J
II II
2-D 4-Node Solid 2-D 8-Node Solid

KK
II JJ II JJ
K
I J I J
Z 2-D 2-Node Axisymmetric Shell 2-D 3-Node Axisymmetric Shell
Y
X
REINF263
Figure 2 REINF263 Coordinate System
K
JJ
L
X0
X
θ
X
J Z
II
I
X = Layer x-axis if layer orientation angle θ is specified (SECDATA,,,,THETA)

X0 = Layer x-axis if layer orientation angle θ is not specified
REINF263 Input Data

The geometry and nodal locations for this element are shown in Figure 1 (p. 1277). The REINF263 element
and its base element share the same nodes and element connectivity.
You can easily create REINF263 elements from the selected base elements via the EREINF command.
Section commands (SECTYPE and SECDATA) define the material ID, cross-section area, spacing, location,
and orientation of reinforcing fibers.
The equivalent thickness h of the smeared reinforcing layer is given by
h=A/S
where A is the cross-section area of a single fiber, and S is the distance between two adjacent fibers.
The coordinate systems for one reinforcing layer are shown in Figure 2 (p. 1278). Each reinforcing layer is
indicated by its intersection points (II, JJ for linear base elements, and II, JJ, KK, for quadratic base ele-
ments) with the base elements. Fibers in this layer are always parallel to the first coordinate axis x. The
x axis is default to the first parametric direction S1 at the center of the layer. The default axis is defined
as
∂ {x}  ∂ {x} 
S1 = / 
∂s  ∂s 
where
{x} = h1{x}II + h2{x}JJ + h3{x}KK

{x}II, {x}JJ, {x}KK = global coordinates of intersection points
REINF263
h1, h2, h3 = line shape functions
You can reorient the layer coordinate system by angle θ (in degrees) for each layer. The value of θ is
also provided for each layer via the SECDATA command. For more information about visualizing fiber
orientations, see the /PSYMB command documentation.
You can use REINF263 to reinforce 2-D solid elements with plane stress, plane strain, axisymmetric, and
generalized plane strain behaviors, and axisymmetric shells/membranes with or without uniform torsion
capability. The element accounts for various base element behaviors automatically.
REINF263 allows tension-only or compression-only reinforcing fibers. You can specify the desired fiber
behavior (SECCONTROLS).
The REINF263 element does not accept element loading. Apply element loading only to the base element.
The temperature of the REINF263 element is identical to the temperature of the base element.
You can import an initial stress state for this element (INISTATE). For more information, see "Initial
State" in the Basic Analysis Guide.
A summary of the element input follows.
REINF263 Input Summary

Nodes
Same as those of the base element, as shown:
Base Element REINF263 Nodes

2-D 4-Node Solid I,J,K,L
2-D 8-Node Solid I,J,K,L,M,N,O,P
2-D 2-Node Axisymmetric Shell I,J
2-D 3-Node Axisymmetric Shell I,J,K
Degrees of Freedom
Base Element REINF263 DOFs

2-D 4-Node or 8-Node Solid UX, UY
2-D 2-Node Axisymmetric Shell UX, UY, ROTZ
2-D 2-Node Axisymmetric Membrane UX, UY
2-D 2-Node Axisymmetric Shell Allowing UX, UY, UZ, ROTX
Uniform Torsion
2-D 2-Node Axisymmetric Membrane Al- UX, UY, UZ
lowing Uniform Torsion
Real Constants
None
REINF263
Material Properties
Surface Loads
None
Body Loads
Temperatures --
Same as those of the base element
Special Features
Birth and death

Creep
Initial state
Large deflection
Large strain
Plasticity
Stress stiffening
Viscoelasticity
Viscoplasticity
KEYOPTS
None
REINF263 Output Data


• Additional element output as shown in Table 1: REINF263 Element Output Definitions (p. 1281).
The following figure illustrates the axial stress component:
REINF263
Figure 3 REINF263 Stress Output
K
JJ
L Sx
II
I
Unlike layered solid or shell elements (such as SHELL181), REINF263 always outputs the element solution
for all reinforcing layers. You can select solution items for a specific reinforcing layer (LAYER) for listing
and visualization by using full graphics (/GRAPHICS,FULL). Visualization via PowerGraphics (/GRAPH-
ICS,POWER) is not affected by the LAYER command; all reinforcing layers are displayed simultaneously.
See the Basic Analysis Guide for ways to review results.
To inspect REINF263 element results, select only REINF263 element results or adjust translucency level
of the base elements before executing any plotting command. REINF263 display options are also available
directly via the GUI (Main Menu> Preprocessor> Sections> Reinforcing> Display Options).
available.
Table 1 REINF263 Element Output Definitions

Name Definition O R
NODES Nodes (as shown in "REINF263 Input Summary") - Y
AREA Averaged cross-section area of reinforcing fibers - Y
SPACING Averaged distance between two adjacent fibers - Y
VOLU: Volume - Y
XC, YC, ZC Center location - 3
REINF263
Name Definition O R
TEMP T1, T2 for reinforcing layer 1; T3, T4 for reinfor- - Y
cing layer 2; ending with temperatures for the
last reinforcing layer NL (2*NL maximum)
S:X Axial stresses 2 Y
EPEL:X Axial elastic strains 2 Y
EPTH:X Axial thermal strains 2 Y
EPPL:X Axial plastic strains 2 1
EPCR:X Axial creep strains 2 1
EPTO:X Total axial mechanical strains (EPEL + EPPL + EPCR) Y -
EPTT:X Total axial strains (EPEL + EPPL + EPCR + EPTH) Y -
ing)
N11 Averaged axial force - Y
1. Nonlinear solution output if the element has a nonlinear material.

coordinate system are available for output.
Table 2: REINF263 Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 1282) lists output available via ETABLE using the Sequence
Number Table (p. 52) in this document for more information. The following notation is used in
Table 2: REINF263 Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 1282):
Name
output quantity as defined in Table 1: REINF263 Element Output Definitions (p. 1281)
Item
E
Table 2 REINF263 Item and Sequence Numbers

Quant- Input
ity Item E
Name
N11 SMISC (i - 1) * 3 + 1
REINF263

Quant- Input
ity Item E
Name
AREA SMISC (i - 1) * 3 + 2
SPA- SMISC (i - 1) * 3 + 3
CING
The i value (where i = 1, 2, 3, ..., NL) represents the reinforcing layer number of the element. NL is the
maximum reinforcing layer number.
REINF263 Assumptions and Restrictions

• Zero-volume elements are invalid.
• This element can be used only with base element types SHELL208, SHELL209, PLANE182, and PLANE183.
• A valid base element must be present for each REINF263 element.
• The reinforcing element is firmly attached to its base element. No relative movement between the rein-
forcing element and the base is allowed.
• Through-thickness reinforcing is not permitted in shells and layered solid elements.
• Stress stiffening is always included in geometrically nonlinear analyses (NLGEOM,ON). You can also ac-
tivate prestress effects (PSTRES).
• To simulate tension-/compression-only reinforcing fibers, a nonlinear iterative solution approach is ne-
cessary.
REINF263 Product Restrictions

None.
REINF264
3-D Discrete Reinforcing

Use REINF264 with standard 3-D link, beam, shell and solid elements (referred to here as the base ele-
ments) to provide extra reinforcing to those elements.
The element is suitable for simulating reinforcing fibers with arbitrary orientations. Each fiber is modeled
separately as a spar that has only uniaxial stiffness. You can specify multiple reinforcing fibers in one
REINF264 element. The nodal locations, degrees of freedom, and connectivity of the REINF264 element
are identical to those of the base element.
For smeared reinforcing modeling options, use the REINF263 and REINF265 elements.
P
P W
O
X
O
M
M N B V
U
KK N
A
II JJ Y II JJ
L S
L T Z
K
K
I
I R
Q
J
J
3-D 20-Node Solid
3-D 8-Node Solid or Solid Shell
REINF264
L L
R
P KK
Q JJ
II JJ II
K O K
I I
N
M
J J
3-D 4-Node Tetrahedral Solid 3-D 10-Node Tetrahedral Solid
L L O
K K
II JJ JJ
II P KK
N
I I
J J
M
3-D 4-Node Shell 3-D 8-Node Shell

II II
KK
I JJ I JJ
K
J J
3-D 2-Node Beam 3-D 3-Node Beam

II
I
JJ
J
3-D 2-Node Spar
REINF264
JJ
Z
x
Y II
X
REINF264 Input Data

and its base element share the same nodes and element connectivity. Each reinforcing fiber is indicated
by its intersection points (II, JJ for linear base elements, and II, JJ, KK for quadratic base elements) with
the base elements.
You can easily create REINF264 elements from the selected base elements (EREINF). Section commands
(SECTYPE and SECDATA) define the material ID, cross-section area, and location of reinforcing fibers.
The coordinate system for one reinforcing fiber is shown in Figure 2 (p. 1287). The coordinate system is
solely determined by intersection points II, JJ, and KK; therefore, the element coordinate system
(/PSYMB,ESYS) is not relevant for this element.

Nodes

3-D 8-Node Solid or Solid Shell I,J,K,L,M,N,O,P
3-D 20-Node Solid I,J,K,L,M,N,O,P,Q,R,S,T,U,V,W,X,Y,Z,A,B
3-D 4-Node Tetrahedral Solid I,J,K,L
3-D 10-Node Tetrahedral Solid I,J,K,L,M,N,O,P,Q,R
3-D 4-Node Shell I,J,K,L
3-D 8-Node Shell I,J,K,L,M,N,O,P
3-D 2-Node Beam I,J,K (K is an optional orientation node)
3-D 3-Node Beam I,J,K,L (L is an optional orientation node)
REINF264
3-D 2-Node Spar I,J
Degrees of Freedom

3-D 8-Node Solid or Solid Shell UX, UY, UZ
3-D 20-Node Solid UX, UY, UZ
3-D 14-Node Tetrahedral Solid UX, UY, UZ
3-D 4-Node Shell UX, UY, UZ, ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ
3-D 2-Node Beam UX, UY, UZ, ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ
3-D 3-Node Beam UX, UY, UZ, ROTX, ROTY, ROTZ
3-D 2-Node Spar UX, UY, UZ
Real Constants
None
Material Properties
Surface Loads
None
Body Loads
Temperatures --
Special Features
Birth and death

Creep
Initial state
Large deflection
Large strain
Plasticity
Stress stiffening
Viscoelasticity
Viscoplasticity
KEYOPTS
None

REINF264
The axial stress component is illustrated in Figure 3 (p. 1289).
S(AXL)
EPEL(AXL)
EPPL(AXL)
Z EPTH(AXL)
I
EPCR(AXL)
Y EPTO(AXL)
X
To inspect REINF264 element results, select only REINF264 element results or adjust the translucency
level of the base elements before executing any plotting command. REINF264 display options are also
available directly via the GUI (Main Menu> Preprocessor> Sections> Reinforcing> Display Options).
available.

Name Definition O R
VOLU: Volume - Y
TEMP T1, T2 for reinforcing fiber 1; T3, T4 for reinfor- - Y
cing fiber 2; ending with temperatures for the
last reinforcing fiber NL (2 * NL maximum)
REINF264
Name Definition O R
ing)

Table 2: REINF264 Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 1290) lists output available via the ETABLE command
notation is used in Table 2: REINF264 Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 1290):
Name
Item
E

Quant- Input
ity Item E
Name
N11 SMISC (i - 1) * 2 + 1
AREA SMISC (i - 1) * 2 + 2
The i value (where i = 1, 2, 3, ..., NL) represents the reinforcing fiber number of the element. NL is the
maximum reinforcing fiber number.
REINF264

• This element can be used only with base element types LINK180, SHELL181, SHELL281, SOLID185,
SOLID186, SOLID187, BEAM188, BEAM189, SOLSH190, and SOLID285.
• Stress stiffening is always included in geometrically nonlinear analyses (NLGEOM,ON). You can activate
prestress effects via the PSTRES command.
• The warping degree of freedom in beam base elements are not accounted for.
• REINF264 does not support BEAM188 with the quadratic or cubic interpolation option (KEYOPT(3)).
• To simulate the tension-/compression-only reinforcing fibers, a nonlinear iterative solution approach is
necessary.

None.
REINF265

Use REINF265 with standard 3-D solid and shell elements (referred to here as the base elements) to
provide extra reinforcing to those elements.
The element uses a smeared approach and is suitable for modeling evenly spaced reinforcing fibers
that appear in layered form. Each reinforcing layer contains a cluster of fibers with unique orientation,
material, and cross-section area, and is simplified as a homogenous membrane having unidirectional
stiffness. You can specify multiple layers of reinforcing in one REINF265 element. The nodal locations,
degrees of freedom, and connectivity of the REINF265 element are identical to those of the base element.
For discrete reinforcing modeling options, see the documentation for the REINF264 element.
P
O P W
X
O
LL M
M N B V
KK U
N
A
Y PP LL OO
II KK
L S
L
JJ K II T Z
NN
MM JJ K
I
I R
Q
J J
3-D 8-Node Solid or 3-D 20-Node Solid

Solid Shell
REINF265
LL
KK
R L
P K
PP KK, LL, OO
Q
II
O NN K
MM
N II
I M JJ JJ
I
J
J
3-D 4-Node Shell
3-D 10-Node Tetrahed-
ral Solid
LL OO KK
L O K
PP
NN
P
Z N
II JJ
MM
I
Y
J
X M
3-D 8-Node Shell
REINF265
zo
LL
KK
y
yo
x
xo
Z
II JJ
Y
X
X = Layer x-axis if the local coordinate system reference number (SECDATA,,,KCN)

for the layer is specified
X0 = Layer x-axis if the local coordinate system reference number is not specified
REINF265 Input Data

and its base element share the same nodes and element connectivity.
You can easily create REINF265 elements from the selected base elements via the EREINF command.
Section commands (SECTYPE and SECDATA) define the material ID, cross-section area, spacing, location,
and orientation of reinforcing fibers.
The equivalent thickness h of the smeared reinforcing layer is given by
h=A/S
where A is the cross-section area of a single fiber, and S is the distance between two adjacent fibers.
The coordinate systems for one reinforcing layer are shown in Figure 2 (p. 1295). Each reinforcing layer is
indicated by its intersection points (II, JJ, KK, LL for linear base elements, and II, JJ, KK, LL, MM, NN, OO,
PP for quadratic base elements) with the base elements. Fibers in this layer are always parallel to the
first coordinate axis x. The x axis is default to the first parametric direction S1 at the center of the layer.
The default axis is defined as
∂ {x}  ∂ {x} 
S1 = / 
∂s  ∂s 
where
REINF265
∂ {x}  1  
=   − { x}II + { x}JJ + { x}KK − { x}LL 
∂s  4 
{x}II, {x}JJ, {x}KK, {x}LL = global nodal coordinates
You can reorient the default layer coordinate system by projecting a local coordinate system (LOCAL)
to the layer plane. One local coordinate system is allowed for each layer. The local coordinate system
reference number is given via the SECDATA command.
You can further rotate the layer coordinate system by angle θ (in degrees) for each layer. The value of
θ is also provided for each layer via SECDATA. For more information about visualizing fiber orientations,
see the /PSYMB command documentation.

Nodes

3-D 8-Node Solid or Solid Shell I,J,K,L,M,N,O,P
3-D 20-Node Solid I,J,K,L,M,N,O,P,Q,R,S,T,U,V,W,X,Y,Z,A,B
3-D 10-Node Tetrahedral Solid I,J,K,L,M,N,O,P,Q,R
3-D 4-Node Shell I,J,K,L
3-D 8-Node Shell I,J,K,L,M,N,O,P
Degrees of Freedom

3-D 8-Node Solid or Solid Shell UX, UY, UZ
3-D 20-Node Solid UX, UY, UZ
Real Constants
None
REINF265
Material Properties
Surface Loads
None
Body Loads
Temperatures --
Special Features
Birth and death

Creep
Initial state
Large deflection
Large strain
Plasticity
Stress stiffening
Viscoelasticity
Viscoplasticity
KEYOPTS
None


The following figure illustrates the axial stress component:
REINF265
zo
SX
z
LL
y yo
KK
x
II xo
JJ
X = Layer x-axis if the local coordinate system reference number (SECDATA,,,,KCN)

for the layer is specified
X0 = Layer x-axis if the local coordinate system reference number is not specified
To inspect REINF265 element results, select only REINF265 element results or adjust translucency level
of the base elements before executing any plotting command. REINF265 display options are also available
directly via the GUI (Main Menu> Preprocessor> Sections> Reinforcing> Display Options).
REINF265
available.

Name Definition O R
SPACING Averaged distance between two adjacent fibers - Y
VOLU: Volume - Y
TEMP T1, T2, T3, T4 for reinforcing layer 1; T5, T6, T7, - Y
T8 for reinforcing layer 2; ending with temper-
atures for the last reinforcing layer NL (4*NL
maximum)
ing)

Table 2: REINF265 Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 1300) lists output available through ETABLE using the
in Table 2: REINF265 Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 1300):
REINF265
Name
Item
E

Quant- Input
ity Item E
Name
N11 SMISC (i - 1) * 3 + 1
AREA SMISC (i - 1) * 3 + 2
SPA- SMISC (i - 1) * 3 + 3
CING
The i value (where i = 1, 2, 3, ..., NL) represents the reinforcing layer number of the element. NL is the
maximum reinforcing layer number (1 ≤ NL ≤ 250).

• This element can be used only with base element types SHELL181, SHELL281, SOLID185, SOLID186,
SOLID187, and SOLSH190.
• Stress stiffening is always included in geometrically nonlinear analyses (NLGEOM,ON). You can activate
prestress effects via the PSTRES command.
• To simulate tension-/compression-only reinforcing fibers, a nonlinear iterative solution approach is ne-
cessary.

None.
SOLID272
General Axisymmetric Solid with 4 Base Nodes
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS

Use SOLID272 to model axisymmetric solid structures. It is defined by four nodes on the master plane,
and nodes created automatically in the circumferential direction based on the four master plane nodes.
The total number of nodes depends on the number of nodal planes (KEYOPT(2)). Each node has three
degrees of freedom: translations in the nodal x, y and z directions. The element allows a triangle as the
degenerated shape on the base plane to simulate irregular areas. The element has plasticity, hyperelasti-
city, stress stiffening, large deflection, and large strain capabilities. It also has mixed-formulation capab-
ility for simulating deformations of nearly incompressible elastoplastic materials, and nearly and fully
incompressible hyperelastic materials.
For more details about this element, see SOLID272 in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference, and General
Axisymmetric Elements (p. 70) in this document.
Figure 1 SOLID272 Geometry (KEYOPT(2) = 3)
K2
7
L2
3
L1 K1
L3
6
11
2
u z (w)
K3 12 u θ (v)
8 4
J2
10
5 θ
I2 r
I3 I1 1 J1 u r (u)
9
J3
SOLID272 Input Data

The element input data includes nodes and the orthotropic material properties. The total number of
nodes is the four base nodes times the number of nodal planes. (For information about how Fourier
nodes are generated, see the NAXIS command documentation.) The default element coordinate system
SOLID272
is the cylindrical coordinate system with the z axis as the axisymmetric axis (defined via the SECDATA
command) and the circumferential direction as θ. (See General Axisymmetric Elements (p. 70) for details.)
Use the ESYS command to define an element coordinate system, which forms the basis for orthotropic
material directions.
Element loads are described in Nodal Loading (p. 49). Pressures must be input as element surface loads
on the element edges of the nodal planes as shown by the circled numbers in Figure 1 (p. 1301). Positive
pressures act into the element and the maximum face edge is 4n, where n is the number of nodal
planes. If pressure is applied on the element edge with face numbers less than or equal to 4 and no
load on other edges, the pressure loads are the same on the 360 degrees of circumferential surfaces.
(If pressure is applied on a single element edge with a face number greater than 4, the pressure is ig-
nored.) If pressure is applied on the element edges with faces p and 4q+p (where q = 1 . . . n-1), the
pressure changes linearly with respect to θ within the part of the surface bounded by the edges p and
4q+p; on the rest of the surface, the pressure is zero.
Temperatures may be input as element body loads at the nodes. For the four nodes on the master
plane, the node I1 temperature T(I1) defaults to TUNIF. If all other temperatures are unspecified, they
default to T(I1). For any other input pattern, unspecified temperatures default to TUNIF. For the nodes
generated in the circumferential direction based on the master node, they default to the value of their
base nodes (T(I1), T(J1), T(K1) or T(L1), depending on their location) if all other temperatures are unspe-
cified. For any other input pattern, unspecified temperatures default to TUNIF.
see Applications of Mixed u-P Formulations in this document.
As described in Coordinate Systems, you can use the ESYS command to orient the material properties
and strain/stress output. Use RSYS to choose output that follows the material coordinate system or the
global coordinate system.
"SOLID272 Input Summary" (p. 1302) contains a summary of the element input. See Element Input (p. 43)

Nodes
I1, J1, K1, L1, I2, J2, K2, L2, . . . , In, Jn, Kn, Ln (where n = KEYOPT(2), the number of nodal planes)
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, UZ
Real Constants
None
Material Properties
SOLID272
Surface Loads
Pressures --
edge 1 (J1-I1), edge 2 (K1-J1), edge 3 (L1-K1), edge 4 (I1-L1), edge 5 (J2-I2), edge 6 (K2-J2), . . . , edge
4n-3(Jn-In), edge 4n-2 (Kn-Jn), edge 4n-1 (Ln-Kn), edge 4n (In-Ln)
Body Loads
Temperatures --
T(I1), T(J1), T(K1), T(L1), T(I2), T(J2), T(K2), T(L2), . . . , T(In), T(Jn), T(Kn), T(Ln)
Special Features
Birth and death

Creep
Elasticity
Hyperelasticity
Large deflection
Large strain
Plasticity
Stress stiffening
Viscoelasticity
Viscoplasticity
KEYOPT(2)
1 --
Axisymmetric deformation (may have torsion)
3 - 12 --
General 3-D deformation
This KEYOPT has no default. You must specify a valid value. (0 is not valid.)
For large-rotation not about the axisymmetric axis, KEYOPT(2) ≥ 5 is recommended.
For information about specifying the number of Fourier nodes, see General Axisymmetric Elements
in this document.
KEYOPT(6)
0 --
1 --
Use mixed u-P formulation

SOLID272

As shown in Figure 2 (p. 1304), the element stress directions are parallel to the element coordinate system.
SZ
K2
L2
L1 K1
L3
u z (w)
K3 u θ (v)
J2 SY
Z
θ
I2 r
I3 I1 J1 u r (u)
Y
J3
X SX
Element stress directions SX, SY, and SZ shown in the global coordinate system.
SOLID272
available.

Name Definition O R
NODES Nodes - I1, J1, K1, L1, I2, J2, K2, L2, . . . - Y
VOLU Volume - Y
PRES Pressures P1 at nodes J,I; P2 at K,J; P3 at L,K; P4 - Y
at I,L
See Table 2: SOLID272 Item and Sequence Num-

bers (p. 1306) for more output.
TEMP Temperatures T(I1), T(J1), T(K1), T(L1), T(I2), T(J2), T(K2), - Y
T(L2), . . .
XZ
XZ
EPPL:X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, Plastic strains[7] 1 1
XZ
XZ
XZ
EPCR)
SOLID272
Name Definition O R
ing)
PLASTIC, CREEP
SVAR:1, 2, . . . , N State variables - 5
1. Nonlinear solution, output only if the element has a nonlinear material.

6. The equivalent strains use an effective Poisson's ratio: for elastic and thermal strains, this value is set
by the user (MP,PRXY); for plastic and creep strains, this value is set at 0.5.
EPPL.
Name
Item
I1, J1, K1, L1, I2, J2, K2, L2, . . .
sequence number for data at nodes I1, J1, K1, L1, I2, J2, K2, L2, . . .

Quant- Item I1 J1 K1 L1 I2 J2 K2 L2 --- In Jn Kn Ln
ity
Name
P1 SMISC 2 1 ---
P2 SMISC 4 3 ---
P3 SMISC 6 5 ---
P4 SMISC 7 8 ---
P5 SMISC 10 9 ---
P6 SMISC 12 11 ---
SOLID272

Quant- Item I1 J1 K1 L1 I2 J2 K2 L2 --- In Jn Kn Ln
ity
Name
P7 SMISC 14 13 ---
P8 SMISC 15 16 ---
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
P4n-3 SMISC --- 8n- 8n-
6 7
P4n-2 SMISC --- 8n- 8n-
4 5
P4n-1 SMISC --- 8n- 8n-
2 3
P4n SMISC --- 8n- 8n
1

• The area of the base element must be nonzero.
• You can form a triangular base element by defining duplicate K1 and L1 node numbers. (See De-
generated Shape Elements (p. 39) in this document.)
• You cannot apply a pressure load via the SFA command.
• Incompressible and nearly incompressible material behavior should be modeled with the mixed
u-P formulation.
• If you specify mixed formulation (KEYOPT(6) = 1), you must use the sparse solver.
• The element does not support the expansion pass of a superelement with large rotation.
• You cannot display surface load symbols (/PSF) when displaying this element in 3-D via the /ESHAPE
command.
• When specifying more than one facet per element edge for PowerGraphics displays (NAXIS,EFA-
CET,NUM, where NUM > 1), ANSYS plots additional results on some planes between the nodal and
integration planes. The results on these planes are interpolated based on the nodal and integration
plane values. and are therefore less accurate than the values on the nodal and interpolation planes.
SOLID272
If you do not wish to plot the interpolated values, set NUM = 1 to plot only the values on nodal
and integration planes.
• Print commands in postprocessing print the nodal plane results only.
• To model axisymmetric solid surface loads acting on this element, use general axisymmetric surface
element SURF159. (You cannot use this element with surface-effect elements SURF153 and SURF154.)
• You cannot generate surface-based contact pairs (contact elements CONTA171 through CONTA174
paired with target elements TARGE169 and TARGE170) on this element.
• You can generate node-to-surface contact pairs (contact elements CONTA175 paired with target
elements TARGE170) and node-to-node contact elements (CONTA178) on this element, with the
following restrictions:
– When TARGE170 is on the surface of SOLID272, you may have accuracy and convergence issues
if the loading causes large rotations about the axisymmetric axis of SOLID272; you may also
have those issues if the two sides of the contact boundaries have different mesh patterns in
the circumferential direction (caused by different KEYOPT(2) values of SOLID272).
– You cannot define CONTA175 with the multipoint constraint (MPC) approach using a force-
distributed constraint (that is, you cannot set KEYOPT(2) = 2, KEYOPT(4) = 1, and KEYOPT(12)
= 5 or 6 simultaneously for the CONTA175 elements).
– In the case of a true axisymmetric condition (SOLID272 with KEYOPT(2) = 1), you should use 2-
D node-to-surface contact pairs (CONTA175 contact elements paired with TARGE169 target
elements).

SOLID273
General Axisymmetric Solid with 8 Base Nodes
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS

Use SOLID273 to model axisymmetric solid structures. The element has quadratic displacement behavior
on the master plane and is well suited to modeling irregular meshes on the master plane. It is defined
by eight nodes on the master plane, and nodes created automatically in the circumferential direction
based on the eight master plane nodes. The total number of nodes depends on the number of nodal
planes (KEYOPT(2)). Each node has three degrees of freedom: translations in the nodal x, y and z direc-
tions. The element allows a triangle as the degenerated shape on the base plane to simulate irregular
areas. The element has plasticity, hyperelasticity, stress stiffening, large deflection, and large strain
capabilities. It also has mixed-formulation capability for simulating deformations of nearly incompressible
elastoplastic materials, and nearly and fully incompressible hyperelastic materials.
For more details about this element, see SOLID273 in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference, and General
Axisymmetric Elements (p. 70) in this document.
Figure 1 SOLID273 Geometry (KEYOPT(2) = 3)
7
K2
O2
L2 3
11 O1
6 L1 K1
L3
N2
O3 2
8
u z (w)
P2 K3 4 u θ (v)
12
P1 N1
P3
J2
N3
θ
M2
5
I2 r
I3 M1 J1 u r (u)
I1
M3 1
J3
10
9
SOLID273 Input Data

The element input data includes nodes and the orthotropic material properties. The total number of
SOLID273
nodes is the 8 base nodes times the number of nodal planes. (For information about how Fourier node
are generated, see the NAXIS command documentation.) The default element coordinate system is the
cylindrical coordinate system with the Z axis as the axisymmetric axis (defined via the SECDATA com-
mand) and the circumferential direction as θ. (See General Axisymmetric Elements (p. 70) for details.) Use
the ESYS command to define an element coordinate system, which forms the basis for orthotropic
material directions.
Element loads are described in Nodal Loading (p. 49). Pressures must be input as element surface loads
on the element edge of nodal planes as shown by the circled numbers in Figure 1 (p. 1309). Positive
pressures act into the element and the maximum face edge is 4n, where n is the number of nodal
planes. If pressure is applied on the element edge with face numbers less that or equal to 4 and no
load on other edges, the pressure loads are the same on the 360 degrees of circumferential surfaces.
(If pressure is applied on a single element edge with a face number greater than 4, the pressure is ig-
nored.) If pressure is applied on the element edges with faces p and 4q+p (where q = 1 . . . n-1), the
pressure changes linearly with respect to θ within the part of the surface bounded by the edges p and
4q+p; on the rest of the surface, the pressure is zero.
Temperatures may be input as element body loads at the nodes. For the eight nodes on the master
plane, the node I1 temperature T(I1) defaults to TUNIF. If all other temperatures are unspecified, they
default to T(I1). If all corner node temperatures are specified, each midside node temperature defaults
to the average temperature of its adjacent corner nodes. For any other input pattern, unspecified tem-
peratures default to TUNIF. For the nodes generated in circumferential direction based on the master
node, if all other temperatures are unspecified, they default to the value of their base nodes (T(I1), T(J1),
T(K1), T(L1), T(M1), T(N1), T(O1) and T(P1), depending on their location). For any other input pattern, un-
specified temperatures default to TUNIF.
see Applications of Mixed u-P Formulations in this document.
As described in Coordinate Systems, you can use the ESYS command to orient the material properties
and strain/stress output. Use RSYS to choose output that follows the material coordinate system or the
global coordinate system.
"SOLID273 Input Summary" (p. 1310) contains a summary of the element input. See Element Input (p. 43)

Nodes
I1, J1, K1, L1, M1, N1, O1, P1 , I2, J2, K2, L2, M2, N2, O2, P2, . . . , In, Jn, Kn, Ln, Mn, Nn, On, Pn (where n = KEY-
OPT(2), the number of nodal planes)
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, UZ
Real Constants
None
SOLID273
Material Properties

Surface Loads
Pressures --
edge 1 (J1-I1), edge 2 (K1-J1), edge 3 (L1-K1), edge 4 (I1-L1), edge 5 (J2-I2), edge 6 (K2-J2), . . . , edge
4n-3(Jn-In), edge 4n-2 (Kn-Jn), edge 4n-1 (Ln-Kn), edge 4n (In-Ln)
Body Loads
Temperatures --
T(I1), T(J1), T(K1), T(L1), T(M1), T(N1), T(O1), T(P1), T(I2), T(J2), T(K2), T(L2), T(M2), T(N2), T(O2), T(P2), . . . ,
T(In), T(Jn), T(Kn), T(Ln), T(Mn), T(Nn), T(On), T(Pn)
Special Features
Birth and death

Creep
Elasticity
Hyperelasticity
Large deflection
Large strain
Plasticity
Stress stiffening
Viscoelasticity
Viscoplasticity
KEYOPT(2)
1 --
Axisymmetric deformation (may have torsion)
3 - 12 --
General 3-D deformation
This KEYOPT has no default. You must specify a valid nonzero value.
For large-rotation not about the axisymmetric axis, KEYOPT(2) ≥ 5 is recommended.
For information about specifying the number of Fourier nodes, see General Axisymmetric Elements
in this document.
KEYOPT(6)
SOLID273
0 --
1 --
Use mixed u-P formulation


As shown in Figure 2 (p. 1312), the element stress directions are parallel to the element coordinate system.
SZ
K2
O2
L2
O1
L1 K1
L3
N2
O3
u z(w)
P2 K3 u θ (v)
P1 N1
P3
J2 SY
N3
θ
Z M2
I2 r
I3 M1 J1 u r (u)
I1
M3
J3
Y
SX
X
Element stress directions SX, SY, and SZ shown in the global coordinate system.
SOLID273
available.

Name Definition O R
NODES Nodes - I1, J1, K1, L1, I2, J2, K2, L2, . . . - Y
VOLU Volume - Y
PRES Pressures P1 at nodes J,I; P2 at K,J; P3 at L,K; P4 - Y
at I,L
See Table 2: SOLID273 Item and Sequence Num-

bers (p. 1314) for more output.
TEMP Temperatures T(I1), T(J1), T(K1), T(L1), T(I2), T(J2), T(K2), - Y
T(L2), . . .
XZ
XZ
EPPL:X, Y, Z, XY, YZ, Plastic strains[7] 1 1
XZ
XZ
XZ
EPCR)
SOLID273
Name Definition O R
ing)
PLASTIC, CREEP
1. Nonlinear solution, output only if the element has a nonlinear material.

6. The equivalent strains use an effective Poisson's ratio: for elastic and thermal strains, this value is set
by the user (MP,PRXY); for plastic and creep strains, this value is set at 0.5.
EPPL.
Name
Item
I1, J1, K1, L1, M1, N1, O1, P1 , I2, J2, K2, L2, M2, N2, O2, P2 . . .
sequence number for data at nodes I1, J1, K1, L1, M1, N1, O1, P1 , I2, J2, K2, L2, M2, N2, O2, P2, . . .

Quant- Item I1 J1 K1 L1 M1 N1 O1 P1 --- In Jn Kn Ln Mn Nn On Pn
ity
Name
P1 SMISC 2 1 ---
P2 SMISC 4 3 ---
P3 SMISC 6 5 ---
P4 SMISC 7 8 ---
SOLID273

Quant- Item I1 J1 K1 L1 M1 N1 O1 P1 --- In Jn Kn Ln Mn Nn On Pn
ity
Name
P5 SMISC ---
P6 SMISC ---
P7 SMISC ---
P8 SMISC ---
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
P4n-3 SMISC --- 8n- 8n-
6 7
P4n-2 SMISC --- 8n- 8n-
4 5
P4n-1 SMISC --- 8n- 8n-
2 3
P4n SMISC --- 8n- 8n
1

• The area of the base element must be nonzero.
parabolically, along that edge. For more information about the use of midside nodes, see Quadratic
Elements (Midside Nodes) in the Modeling and Meshing Guide.
• Use at least two elements to avoid the hourglass effect.
• You can form a triangular base element by defining duplicate K1 - L1 - O1 node numbers. (See De-
generated Shape Elements (p. 39) in this document.)
• You cannot apply a pressure load via the SFA command.
• If you specify mixed formulation (KEYOPT(6) = 1), do not miss any midside nodes. You must also
use the sparse solver.
• You cannot display surface load symbols (/PSF) when displaying this element in 3-D via the /ESHAPE
command.
SOLID273
• When specifying more than one facet per element edge for PowerGraphics displays (NAXIS,EFA-
CET,NUM, where NUM > 1), ANSYS plots additional results on some planes between the nodal and
integration planes. The results on these planes are interpolated based on the nodal and integration
plane values. and are therefore less accurate than the values on the nodal and interpolation planes.
If you do not wish to plot the interpolated values, set NUM = 1 to plot only the values on nodal
and integration planes.
• Print commands in postprocessing print the nodal plane results only.
• To model axisymmetric solid surface loads acting on this element, use general axisymmetric surface
element SURF159. (You cannot use this element with surface-effect elements SURF153 and SURF154.)
• You cannot generate surface-based contact pairs (contact elements CONTA171 through CONTA174
paired with target elements TARGE169 and TARGE170) on this element.
• You can generate node-to-surface contact pairs (contact elements CONTA175 paired with target
elements TARGE170) and node-to-node contact elements (CONTA178) on this element, with the
following restrictions:
– When TARGE170 is on the surface of SOLID273, you may have accuracy and convergence issues
if the loading causes large rotations about the axisymmetric axis of SOLID273; you may also
have those issues if the two sides of the contact boundaries have different mesh patterns in
the circumferential direction (caused by different KEYOPT(2) values of SOLID273).
– You cannot define CONTA175 with the multipoint constraint (MPC) approach using a force-
distributed constraint (that is, you cannot set KEYOPT(2) = 2, KEYOPT(4) = 1, and KEYOPT(12)
= 5 or 6 simultaneously for the CONTA175 elements).
– In the case of a true axisymmetric condition (SOLID273 with KEYOPT(2) = 1), you should use 2-
D node-to-surface contact pairs (CONTA175 contact elements paired with TARGE169 target
elements).

SOLID278

SOLID278 has a 3-D thermal conduction capability. The element has eight nodes with a single degree
of freedom, temperature, at each node. The element is applicable to a 3-D, steady-state or transient
thermal analysis. If the model containing the conducting solid element is also to be analyzed structurally,
the element should be replaced by an equivalent structural element (such as SOLID185). See SOLID279
for a similar thermal element, with mid-edge node capability.
• Homogeneous Thermal Solid (KEYOPT(3) = 0, the default) -- See "SOLID278 Homogeneous Thermal Solid
Element Description" (p. 1317).
• Layered Thermal Solid (KEYOPT(3) = 1) -- See "SOLID278 Layered Thermal Solid Element Description" (p. 1321).
A higher-order version of the SOLID278 element is SOLID279.
SOLID278 Homogeneous Thermal Solid Element Description

SOLID278 Thermal Solid is suitable for modeling general 3-D solid heat conduction. It allows for prism
and tetrahedral degenerations when used in irregular regions. SOLID278 is designed to be a companion
element for SOLID185.
SOLID278
Figure 1 SOLID278 Homogeneous Thermal Solid Geometry
4 M O,P
P
5 N
O
I K,L
6
J
M Prism Option
N
3 M,N,O,P
2
L I
K,L
K
J
I not recommended
1
Y J
M,N,O,P
X
L K
I
J
Pyramid Option -
not recommended
SOLID278 Homogeneous Thermal Solid Input Data

by eight nodes and the orthotropic material properties. The default element coordinate system is along
global directions. You may define an element coordinate system using ESYS, which forms the basis for
orthotropic material directions (namely, for thermal conductivity). Specific heat and density are ignored
Material Reference.
As described in Coordinate Systems (p. 56), you can use ESYS to orient the material properties and the
temperature gradient and heat flux output. Use RSYS to choose output that follows the material co-
ordinate system or the global coordinate system.
"SOLID278 Homogeneous Thermal Solid Input Summary" (p. 1319) contains a summary of element input.
For a general description of element input, see Element Input (p. 43).
SOLID278
SOLID278 Homogeneous Thermal Solid Input Summary

Nodes
I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P
Degrees of Freedom
TEMP
Material Properties
KXX, KYY, KZZ, DENS, C
Surface Loads

Body Loads
Heat Generations --
Special Features
Birth and death
KEYOPT(3)
Layer construction:
0 --
Homogenous Solid (default) -- nonlayered
1 --
Layered Solid
KEYOPT(8)
Layer data storage. Only applicable for Layered Solid (KEYOPT(3) = 1).
SOLID278 Homogeneous Thermal Solid Output Data

• Additional element output as shown in Table 1: SOLID278 Homogeneous Thermal Solid Output
SOLID278
available.
Table 1 SOLID278 Homogeneous Thermal Solid Output Definitions

Name Definition O R
VOLU: Volume Y Y
HG(N), HG(O), HG(P)
TG:X, Y, Z Thermal gradient components Y Y
TF:X, Y, Z Thermal flux (heat flow rate/cross-sectional area) com- Y Y
ponents
FACE Face label 1 -
AREA Face area 1 1
RATE/AREA
heat flux

Table 2: SOLID278 Homogenous Thermal Solid Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 1321) lists output available
via ETABLE using the Sequence Number method. See Element Table for Variables Identified By Sequence
more information. The following notation is used in Table 2: SOLID278 Homogenous Thermal Solid Item
and Sequence Numbers (p. 1321):
Name
output quantity as defined in the Table 1: SOLID278 Homogeneous Thermal Solid Output Defini-
tions (p. 1320)
SOLID278
Item
FCn
Table 2 SOLID278 Homogenous Thermal Solid Item and Sequence Numbers

Name
AREA NMISC 1 7 13 19 25 31
HFAVG NMISC 2 8 14 20 26 32
TAVG NMISC 3 9 15 21 27 33
TBAVG NMISC 4 10 16 22 28 34
SOLID278 Homogeneous Thermal Solid Assumptions and Restrictions

K and L and duplicate O and P node numbers. (See Degenerated Shape Elements (p. 39).) A tetra-
hedron shape is also available.
• If the thermal element is to be replaced by a SOLID185 structural element with surface stresses
requested, the thermal element should be oriented such that face I-J-N-M and/or face K-L-P-O is a
free surface.
• A free surface of the element (that is, not adjacent to another element and not subjected to a
boundary constraint) is assumed to be adiabatic.
This element has a layered option (KEYOPT(3) = 1). See "SOLID278 Layered Thermal Solid Assumptions
SOLID278 Homogeneous Thermal Solid Product Restrictions

None.
SOLID278 Layered Thermal Solid Element Description

Use SOLID278 Layered Thermal Solid to model heat conduction in layered thick shells or solids. The
layered section definition is given by ANSYS section (SECxxx) commands. A prism degeneration option
is also available.
SOLID278
Figure 2 SOLID278 Layered Thermal Solid Geometry
TOP 4
P zo
5 O z yo y
6
x
M 3 xo
N
M N O,P
L
I K,L
K
2 J
Z 1 (Prism Option)
I
Y J BOTTOM
X
SOLID278 Layered Thermal Solid Input Data

by eight nodes. A prism-shaped element may be formed by defining the same node numbers for nodes
K and L, and O and P.
within the plane of the layers via the SECDATA command in the same way that you would for shell
elements (as described in Coordinate Systems (p. 56)). To achieve the correct nodal ordering for a volume
mapped (hexahedron) mesh, you can use the VEORIENT command to specify the desired volume ori-
entation before executing the VMESH command. Alternatively, you can use the EORIENT command
after automatic meshing to reorient the elements to be in line with the orientation of another element,
or to be as parallel as possible to a defined ESYS axis.
You can associate SOLID278 Layered Solid with a shell section (SECTYPE). The layered composite spe-
cifications (including layer thickness, material, orientation, and number of integration points through
between the nodes.
SOLID278
SOLID278 Layered Thermal Solid does not support real constant input for defining layer sections.
Other Input
for details.
The element is defined by eight nodes and the orthotropic material properties. A prism-shaped element
may also be formed as shown in Figure 2 (p. 1322). Orthotropic material directions correspond to the
layer coordinate directions. The element coordinate system orientation is as described in Coordinate
Systems (p. 56). Specific heat and density are ignored for steady-state solutions. Properties not input
default as described in Linear Material Properties in the Material Reference.
are unspecified, they default to HG(1).
of element input.
SOLID278 Layered Thermal Solid Input Summary

Nodes
I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P
Degrees of Freedom
TEMP
Material Properties
Surface Loads

Body Loads
Heat Generations --
HG(1), HG(2), HG(3), . . . , HG(number of layers)
SOLID278
Special Features
Birth and death
KEYOPT(3)
Layer construction:
0 --
1 --
Layered Solid
KEYOPT(8)
Layer data storage:
0 --
Store data for bottom of bottom layer and top of top layer (default)
1 --
Store top and bottom data for all layers. (The volume of data may be considerable.)
SOLID278 Layered Thermal Solid Output Data


• Additional element output as shown in Table 3: SOLID278 Layered Thermal Solid Element Output
element output directions are parallel to the layer coordinate system. A general description of solution
Figure 3 SOLID278 Layered Thermal Solid Heat Flux/Temperature Gradient Output
Heat fluxes are in Layer

Coordinate System
TFY
TFX
TFX(TOP)
TFX (BOT)
Reference Plane
x'
θ
x

SOLID278
Heat flux directions shown are for global directions.
available.
Table 3 SOLID278 Layered Thermal Solid Element Output Definitions

Name Definition O R
VOLU: Volume Y Y
HGEN Heat generations HG(1), HG(2), HG(3), . . . Y -
ponents
FACE Face label 1 -
AREA Face area 1 1
RATE/AREA
heat flux

Table 4: SOLID278 Layered Thermal Solid Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 1326) lists output available via
ETABLE using the Sequence Number method. See Element Table for Variables Identified By Sequence
SOLID278
more information. The following notation is used in Table 4: SOLID278 Layered Thermal Solid Item and
Sequence Numbers (p. 1326):
Name
output quantity as defined in Table 3: SOLID278 Layered Thermal Solid Element Output Definitions (p. 1325)
Item
FCn
Table 4 SOLID278 Layered Thermal Solid Item and Sequence Numbers

Name
AREA NMISC 1 7 13 19 25 31
HFAVG NMISC 2 8 14 20 26 32
TAVG NMISC 3 9 15 21 27 33
TBAVG NMISC 4 10 16 22 28 34
SOLID278 Layered Thermal Solid Assumptions and Restrictions

K and L and duplicate O and P node numbers. (See Degenerated Shape Elements (p. 39).)
requested, the thermal element should be oriented such that face I-J-N-M and/or face K-L-P-O is a
free surface.
• A free surface of the element (that is, not adjacent to another element and not subjected to a
SOLID278 Layered Thermal Solid Product Restrictions

SOLID279

SOLID279 is a higher order 3-D 20-node solid element that exhibits quadratic thermal behavior. The
element is defined by 20 nodes with a temperature degree of freedom at each node.
• Homogenous Thermal Solid (KEYOPT(3) = 0, the default) -- See "SOLID279 Homogenous Thermal Solid
Element Description " (p. 1327).
• Layered Thermal Solid (KEYOPT(3) = 1) -- See "SOLID279 Layered Thermal Solid Element Description" (p. 1332).
A lower-order version of the SOLID279 element is SOLID278.
SOLID279 Homogenous Thermal Solid Element Description

SOLID279 Homogenous Thermal Solid is well suited to modeling irregular meshes (such as those produced
by various CAD/CAM systems). The element may have any spatial orientation.
Various printout options are available. See SOLID279 in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference for more
details.
SOLID279
Figure 1 SOLID279 Homogenous Thermal Solid Geometry
M,N,O,P,U,V,W,X
Y A,B
Z
K,L,S
I T R
5 P 4 Q J
W
O
6 M,N,O,P,U,V,W,X
M
B V A
Y B Z
U
N T
A K
L S
Y 2 3 I
R
L S Q J
T Z Pyramid Option
K X
I O,P,W
Z M
R
Q 1 U V A,B
J Y N
Y Z
I K,L,S
X T
Q R
J
Prism Option
SOLID279 Homogenous Thermal Solid Input Data

element may also be formed as shown in Figure 1 (p. 1328). SOLID278 is a similar element, without mid-
side nodes.
As described in Coordinate Systems (p. 56), you can use ESYS to orient the material properties and the
temperature gradient and heat flux output. Use RSYS to choose output that follows the material co-
ordinate system or the global coordinate system.
Material Reference.
SOLID279
of element input.
SOLID279 Homogenous Thermal Solid Input Summary

Nodes
Degrees of Freedom
TEMP
Real Constants
None
Material Properties
Surface Loads

Body Loads
Heat Generations --
HG(I), HG(J), HG(K), HG(L), HG(M), HG(N), HG(O), HG(P), HG(Q), HG(R),
HG(S), HG(T), HG(U), HG(V), HG(W), HG(X), HG(Y), HG(Z), HG(A), HG(B)
Special Features
Birth and death
KEYOPT(3)
Layer construction:
0 --
1 --
Layered Solid
KEYOPT(8)
Layer data storage. Only applicable for Layered Solid (KEYOPT(3) = 1).
SOLID279 Homogenous Thermal Solid Output Data


SOLID279
Figure 2 SOLID279 Homogenous Thermal Solid Temperature Gradient/Heat Flux Output
5 P 4
W
X
O
SZ 6
M V y
B
y
U N x
A
Y 2 SY 3
L SX
S
x Z
T K
I
Z R
Q 1
J
X
The element heat flux directions are parallel to the element coordinate system. A general description
available.

VOLU: Volume Y Y
HG(N), HG(O), HG(P), HG(Q), ..., HG(Z), HG(A), HG(B)
ponents
FACE Face label 1 -
SOLID279
AREA Face area 1 1
RATE/AREA
heat flux

Item and Sequence Number Table (p. 52) in this document for more information. The following notation
Name
Item
FCn

Name
AREA NMISC 1 7 13 19 25 31
HFAVG NMISC 2 8 14 20 26 32
TAVG NMISC 3 9 15 21 27 33
TBAVG NMISC 4 10 16 22 28 34
SOLID279 Homogenous Thermal Solid Assumptions and Restrictions

numbered properly.
SOLID279
MNOP interchanged.
• The specific heat is evaluated at each integration point to allow for abrupt changes (such as melting)
within a coarse grid of elements.
requested, the thermal element should be oriented such that face IJNM and/or face KLPO is a free
surface.
• A free surface of the element (i.e., not adjacent to another element and not subjected to a
• An edge with a removed midside node implies that the temperature varies linearly, rather than
parabolically, along that edge.
• See Quadratic Elements (Midside Nodes) in the Modeling and Meshing Guide for more information
about the use of midside nodes.
• For transient solutions using the THOPT,QUASI option, the program removes the midside nodes
from any face with a convection load. A temperature solution is not available for them. Do not use
the midside nodes on these faces in constraint equations or with contact. If you use these faces
for those situations, remove the midside nodes first.
• Degeneration to the form of pyramid should be used with caution.
• The element sizes, when degenerated, should be small in order to minimize the field gradients.
This element has a layered option (KEYOPT(3) = 1). See "SOLID279 Layered Thermal Solid Assumptions
SOLID279 Homogenous Thermal Solid Product Restrictions

None.
SOLID279 Layered Thermal Solid Element Description

Use SOLID279 Layered Thermal Solid to model heat conduction in layered thick shells or solids. The
layered section definition is given by ANSYS section (SECxxx) commands. A prism degeneration option
is also available.
SOLID279
Figure 3 SOLID279 Layered Thermal Solid Geometry
TOP
P W 4 zo
X
5 O z yo
6 y
M V
x
U B N xo
3 X
A M O,P,W
Y U NV
L A,B
Y
Z Z
S T
T I K,L,S
2 K
Z I Q R
R 1 J
Q (Prism Option)
Y J BOTTOM
X
SOLID279 Layered Thermal Solid Input Data

and S; nodes A and B; and nodes O, P, and W.
You can associate SOLID279 Layered Thermal Solid with a shell section (SECTYPE). The layered composite
specifications (including layer thickness, material, orientation, and number of integration points through
between the nodes.
SOLID279
SOLID279 Layered Thermal Solid does not support real constant input for defining layer sections.
Other Input
for details.
Material Reference.
are unspecified, they default to HG(1).
properties and temperature gradient/heat flux output. Use RSYS to choose output that follows the
material coordinate system or the global coordinate system.
of element input.
SOLID279 Layered Thermal Solid Input Summary

Nodes
Degrees of Freedom
TEMP
Real Constants
None
Material Properties
Surface Loads

SOLID279
Body Loads
Heat Generations --
HG(1), HG(2), HG(3), . . . , HG(number of layers)
Special Features
Birth and death
KEYOPT(3)
Layer construction:
0 --
1 --
Layered Solid
KEYOPT(8)
Layer data storage:
0 --
Store data for bottom of bottom layer and top of top layer
1 --
Store top and bottom data for all layers. (The volume of data may be excessive.)
SOLID279 Layered Thermal Solid Output Data


• Additional element output as shown in Figure 4 (p. 1335)
Figure 4 SOLID279 Layered Thermal Solid Temperature Gradient/Heat Flux Output
Heat fluxes are in Layer

Coordinate System
TFY
TFX
TFX(TOP)
TFX (BOT)
Reference Plane
x'
θ
x

SOLID279
The element heat flux directions are parallel to the layer coordinate system. A general description of
available.

VOLU: Volume Y Y
ponents
FACE Face label 1 -
AREA Face area 1 1
RATE/AREA
heat flux

SOLID279
Table 4: SOLID279 Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 1337) lists output available via ETABLE using the Sequence
Number method. See The General Postprocessor (POST1) in the Basic Analysis Guide and The Item and
in Table 4: SOLID279 Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 1337):
Name
Item
FCn

Name
AREA NMISC 1 7 13 19 25 31
HFAVG NMISC 2 8 14 20 26 32
TAVG NMISC 3 9 15 21 27 33
TBAVG NMISC 4 10 16 22 28 34
SOLID279 Layered Thermal Solid Assumptions and Restrictions

numbered properly.
MNOP interchanged.
• The specific heat is evaluated at each integration point to allow for abrupt changes (such as melting)
within a coarse grid of elements.
requested, the thermal element should be oriented such that face IJNM and/or face KLPO is a free
surface.
• A free surface of the element (i.e., not adjacent to another element and not subjected to a
• An edge with a removed midside node implies that the temperature varies linearly, rather than
parabolically, along that edge.
• See Quadratic Elements (Midside Nodes) in the Modeling and Meshing Guide for more information
about the use of midside nodes.
SOLID279
• For transient solutions using the THOPT,QUASI option, the program removes the midside nodes
from any face with a convection load. A temperature solution is not available for them. Do not use
the midside nodes on these faces in constraint equations or with contact. If you use these faces
for those situations, remove the midside nodes first.
SOLID279 Layered Thermal Solid Product Restrictions

None.
SHELL281

SHELL281 is suitable for analyzing thin to moderately-thick shell structures. The element has eight nodes
with six degrees of freedom at each node: translations in the x, y, and z axes, and rotations about the
x, y, and z-axes. (When using the membrane option, the element has translational degrees of freedom
only.)
SHELL281 is well-suited for linear, large rotation, and/or large strain nonlinear applications. Change in
shell thickness is accounted for in nonlinear analyses. The element accounts for follower (load stiffness)
effects of distributed pressures.
SHELL281 may be used for layered applications for modeling composite shells or sandwich construction.
The accuracy in modeling composite shells is governed by the first-order shear-deformation theory
(usually referred to as Mindlin-Reissner shell theory).
The element formulation is based on logarithmic strain and true stress measures. The element kinematics
allow for finite membrane strains (stretching). However, the curvature changes within a time increment
are assumed to be small.
SHELL281 Input Data

The following figure shows the geometry, node locations, and the element coordinate system for this
element. The element is defined by shell section information and by eight nodes (I, J, K, L, M, N, O and
P).
Midside nodes may not be removed from this element. See Quadratic Elements (Midside Nodes) in the
Modeling and Meshing Guide for more information about the use of midside nodes.
A triangular-shaped element may be formed by defining the same node number for nodes K, L and O.
SHELL281
8
L 5
6 P 4 O
zo 7
yo
5 K
I xo 3
N
1
M
4
3 6 K, L, O
P
J 1
2
I N
xo = Element x-axis if element orientation (ESYS) is not provided.
x = Element x-axis if element orientation is provided.
Single-Layer Definition
To define the thickness (and other information), use section definition, as follows:
SECTYPE,,SHELL
SECDATA,THICKNESS, ...
A single-layer shell section definition provides flexible options. For example, you can specify the number
of integration points used and the material orientation.
Multilayer Definition
The shell section commands allow for layered shell definition. Options are available for specifying the
thickness, material, orientation, and number of integration points through the thickness of the layers.
each layer when using section input. When only one, the point is always located midway between the
top and bottom surfaces. If three or more points, two points are located on the top and bottom surfaces
respectively and the remaining points are distributed at equal distances between the two points. The
default number of integration points for each layer is three; however, when a single layer is defined
and plasticity is present, the number of integration points is changed to a minimum of five during
solution.
The following additional capabilities are available when defining shell layers:
• SHELL181 accepts the preintegrated shell section type (SECTYPE,,GENS).
SHELL281
When the element is associated with the GENS section type, thickness or material definitions
are not required.
• You can use the function tool to define thickness as a function of global/local coordinates or node
numbers (SECFUNCTION).
• You can specify offsets (SECOFFSET).
• A section can be partially defined using data from a FiberSIM .xml file (SECTYPE,,SHELL,FIBERSIM).
Other Input
parametric direction of the element at the four in-plane integration points:
∂ {x}  ∂ {x} 
S1 = / 
∂s  ∂s 
Where element geometry {x} is given as follows:
8
{ x} = ∑ hi ( s, r ){ x }i
i =1
(s,r) = two isoparametric element coordinates
hI (s,r) = shape functions associated with eight element nodes (see Mechanical APDL Theory
Reference for more details)
{x}i = global coordinates of eight element nodes
For undistorted elements, the default orientation is the same as described in Coordinate Systems (p. 56)
(the first surface direction is aligned with the IJ side).
The first surface direction S1 can be rotated by angle θ (in degrees) for the layer via the SECDATA
command. For an element, you can specify a single value of orientation in the plane of the element.
Layer-wise orientation is supported.
You can also define element orientation via the ESYS command. For more information, see Coordinate
Systems (p. 56).
The element supports degeneration into a triangular form. For better accuracy, however, ANSYS, Inc.
recommends quadrilateral shaped elements. The triangle form is generally more robust when using the
membrane option with large deflections.
To evaluate stresses and strains on exterior surfaces, use KEYOPT(1) = 2. When used as overlaid elements
on the faces of 3-D elements, this option is similar to the surface stress option (described in the Mech-
anical APDL Theory Reference), but is more general and applicable to nonlinear analysis. The element
used with this option does not provide any stiffness, mass, or load contributions. This option should
only be used in single-layer shells. Irrespective of other settings, SHELL281 provides stress and strain
output at the four in-plane integration points of the layer.
SHELL281uses a penalty method to relate the independent rotational degrees of freedom about the
normal (to the shell surface) with the in-plane components of displacements. The program chooses an
appropriate penalty stiffness by default. A drill stiffness factor can be specified via the SECCONTROLS
command.
SHELL281
multiplied by the shell thickness.
and at the corners of the interfaces between layers. The first corner temperature T1 defaults to TUNIF.
If all other temperatures are unspecified, they default to T1. If KEYOPT(1) = 0 and if exactly NL+1 tem-
peratures are input, one temperature is used for the four bottom corners of each layer, and the last
temperature is used for the four top corner temperatures of the top layer. If KEYOPT(1) = 1 and if exactly
NL temperatures are input, one temperature is used for the four corners of each layer. That is, T1 is
used for T1, T2, T3, and T4; T2 (as input) is used for T5, T6, T7, and T8, etc. For any other input pattern,
SHELL281 includes the effects of transverse shear deformation. The transverse shear stiffness of the
element is a 2x2 matrix as shown below:
 E11 E12 
E= 
sym E22 
To define transverse shear stiffness values, use the SECCONTROLS command .
For a single-layer shell with isotropic material, default transverse shear stiffnesses are:
 kGh 0 
E =  
 0 kGh 
In the above matrix, k = 5/6, G = shear modulus, and h = thickness of the shell.
Only isotropic, anisotropic, and orthotropic linear elastic properties can be input for elasticity. The von
Mises isotropic hardening plasticity models can be invoked with BISO (bilinear isotropic hardening),
MISO (multilinear isotropic hardening), and NLISO (nonlinear isotropic hardening) options. The kinematic
hardening plasticity models can be invoked with BKIN (bilinear kinematic hardening), MKIN and KINH
(multilinear kinematic hardening), and CHABOCHE (nonlinear kinematic hardening). Invoking plasticity
assumes that the elastic properties are isotropic (that is, if orthotropic elasticity is used with plasticity,
ANSYS assumes the isotropic elastic modulus = EX and Poisson's ratio = NUXY).
Hyperelastic material properties (2, 3, 5, or 9 parameter Mooney-Rivlin material model, Neo-Hookean

model, Polynomial form model, Arruda-Boyce model, and user-defined model) can be used with this
element. Poisson's ratio is used to specify the compressibility of the material. If less than 0, Poisson's
ratio is set to 0; if greater than or equal to 0.5, Poisson's ratio is set to 0.5 (fully incompressible).
Both isotropic and orthotropic thermal expansion coefficients can be input using MP,ALPX. When used
with hyperelasticity, isotropic expansion is assumed.
BETAD command. Similarly, use the TREF command to specify the global value of reference temperature.
SHELL281
value from the TREF command. But if MP,REFT is defined for the material number of the layer, it is used
instead of either the global or element value.
SHELL281 uses an advanced shell formulation that accurately incorporates initial curvature effects. The
calculation for effective shell curvature change accounts for both shell-membrane and thickness strains.
The new formulation generally offers improved accuracy in curved shell structure simulations, especially
when thickness strain is significant or the material anisotropy in the thickness direction cannot be ignored.
KEYOPT(8) = 2 is used to store midsurface results in the results file for single or multi-layer shell elements.
BOTTOM results. Use this option to access these correct midsurface results (membrane results) for those
analyses where averaging TOP and BOTTOM results is inappropriate; examples include midsurface
stresses and strains with nonlinear material behavior, and midsurface results after mode combinations
KEYOPT(9) = 1 is used to read initial thickness data from a user subroutine.

Nodes
I, J, K, L, M, N, O, P
Degrees of Freedom

Material Properties

may be provided once for the element, or may be assigned on a per layer basis. See the discussion
in "SHELL281 Input Summary" (p. 1343) for more details.
Surface Loads
Pressures --
face 1 (I-J-K-L) (bottom, in +N direction),

face 2 (I-J-K-L) (top, in -N direction),
Body Loads
Temperatures --
For KEYOPT(1) = 0 (Bending and membrane stiffness):
SHELL281
T1, T2, T3, T4 (at bottom of layer 1), T5, T6, T7, T8 (between layers 1-2); similarly for between
next layers, ending with temperatures at top of layer NL(4*(NL+1) maximum). Hence, for one-
layer elements, eight temperatures are used.
For KEYOPT(1) = 1 (Membrane stiffness only):
T1, T2, T3, T4 for layer 1, T5, T6, T7, T8 for layer 2, similarly for all layers (4*NL maximum). Hence,
for one-layer elements, four temperatures are used.
Special Features
Birth and death

Plasticity
Elasticity
Hyperelasticity
Initial state
Large deflection
Large strain
Linear perturbation
Section definition for layered shells and preintegrated general shell sections for input of homogenous
section stiffnesses
Viscoelasticity
KEYOPT(1)
Element stiffness:
0 --
Bending and membrane stiffness (default)
1 --
Membrane stiffness only
2 --
Stress/strain evaluation only
KEYOPT(8)
0 --
Store data for bottom of bottom layer and top of top layer (multi-layer elements) (default)
1 --
Store data for TOP and BOTTOM, for all layers (multi-layer elements). (The volume of data may be
considerable.)
2 --
Store data for TOP, BOTTOM, and MID for all layers; applies to single- and multi-layer elements
KEYOPT(9)
User thickness option:
0 --
No user subroutine to provide initial thickness (default)
SHELL281
1 --
See the Guide to ANSYS User Programmable Features for information about user-written subroutines


Interlaminar shear stress is available as SYZ and SXZ evaluated at the layer interfaces. KEYOPT(8) must
be set to either 1 or 2 to output these stresses in the POST1 postprocessor. A general description of
solution output is given in Solution Output (p. 50). See the Basic Analysis Guide for ways to review results.
the SMISC option at the element centroid only. The transverse shear forces Q13, Q23 are available only
in resultant form: that is, use SMISC,7 (or 8). Likewise, the transverse shear strains, γ13 and γ23, are constant
through the thickness and are only available as SMISC items (SMISC,15 and SMISC,16, respectively).
ANSYS computes moments (M11, M22, M12) with respect to the shell reference plane. By default, ANSYS
to the midplane, moments with respect to the midplane ( M11, M22, M12 ) can be recovered from stress
resultants with respect to the reference plane as follows:
M11 = M11 − L × N11
M22 = M22 − L × N22
M12 = M12 − L × N12
output processing tools; therefore, ANSYS suggests issuing the OUTRES command to ensure that the
required results are stored in the database.
SHELL281
SY
SX
SX(TOP)
SX (MID)
SX (BOT)
y, yo
Q13
M12
M11
zo N11
Q23
z M22 x, xo
N12
N12 M21
N22
L yIJ
P y yo
K
x
xo
I

available.

Name Definition O R
EL Element number and name Y Y
SHELL281
Name Definition O R
VOLU: Volume - Y
PRES Pressures P1 at nodes I, J, K, L; P2 at I, J, K, L; P3 at - Y
J,I; P4 at K,J; P5 at L,K; P6 at I,L
TEMP T1, T2, T3, T4 at bottom of layer 1, T5, T6, T7, T8 - Y
ending with temperatures at top of layer
NL(4*(NL+1) maximum)
EPCR)
ing)
PLASTIC, CREEP
M11, M22, M12 Out-of-plane moments (per unit length) - 8
Q13, Q23 Transverse shear forces (per unit length) - 8
ε11, ε22, ε12 Membrane strains - Y
SHELL281
Name Definition O R
k11, k22, k12 Curvatures - 8
γ13, γ23 Transverse shear strains - 8
in degrees)
St: 13, 23 Averaged transverse shear stresses - Y
8. Not available if the membrane element option is used (KEYOPT(1) = 1).
Table 2: SHELL281 Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 1349) lists output available through ETABLE using the
in Table 2: SHELL281 Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 1349):
Name
Item
E
SHELL281
I,J,K,L

ity
Name
N11 SMISC 1 - - - -
N22 SMISC 2 - - - -
N12 SMISC 3 - - - -
M11 SMISC 4 - - - -
M22 SMISC 5 - - - -
M12 SMISC 6 - - - -
Q13 SMISC 7 - - - -
Q23 SMISC 8 - - - -
ε11 SMISC 9 - - - -
ε22 SMISC 10 - - - -
ε12 SMISC 11 - - - -
k11 SMISC 12 - - - -
k22 SMISC 13 - - - -
k12 SMISC 14 - - - -
γ13 SMISC 15 - - - -
γ23 SMISC 16 - - - -
THICK SMISC 17 - - - -
P1 SMISC - 18 19 20 21
P2 SMISC - 22 23 24 25
P3 SMISC - 27 26 - -
P4 SMISC - - 29 28 -
P5 SMISC - - - 31 30
P6 SMISC - 32 - - 33
P1 SMISC - 18 19 20 21
P2 SMISC - 22 23 24 25
P3 SMISC - 27 26 - -
P4 SMISC - - 29 28 -
P5 SMISC - - - 31 30
P6 SMISC - 32 - - 33
Sm: 11 SMISC 34 - - - -
Sm: 22 SMISC 35 - - - -
Sm: 12 SMISC 36 - - - -
SHELL281

ity
Name
Sb: 11 SMISC 37 - - - -
Sb: 22 SMISC 38 - - - -
Sb: 12 SMISC 39 - - - -
Sp: 11 SMISC 40 - - - -
(at shell
bottom)
Sp: 22 SMISC 41 - - - -
(at shell
bottom)
Sp: 12 SMISC 42 - - - -
(at shell
bottom)
Sp: 11 SMISC 43 - - - -
(at shell
top)
Sp: 22 SMISC 44 - - - -
(at shell
top)
Sp: 12 SMISC 45 - - - -
(at shell
top)
St: 13 SMISC 46 - - - -
St: 23 SMISC 47 - - - -
Quant- Item Bottom of Layer Top of Layer
ity i NL
Name
ILSXZ SMISC 8 * (i - 1) + 51 8 * (NL - 1) +
52
ILSYZ SMISC 8 * (i - 1) + 53 8 * (NL - 1) +
54
ILSUM SMISC 8 * (i - 1) + 55 8 * (NL - 1) +
56
ILANG SMISC 8 * (i - 1) + 57 8 * (NL - 1) +
58

• ANSYS recommends against using this element in triangular form, except as a filler element. Avoid tri-
angular form especially in areas with high stress gradients.
SHELL281
• Zero-area elements are not allowed. (Zero-area elements occur most often whenever the elements are
numbered improperly.)
• Zero thickness elements or elements tapering down to a zero thickness at any corner are not allowed
(but zero thickness layers are allowed).
• When the element is associated with preintegrated shell sections (SECTYPE,,GENS), additional restrictions
apply. For more information, see Considerations for Using Preintegrated Shell Sections.
however, normals to the center plane before deformation are assumed to remain straight after deform-
ation.
• Transverse shear stiffness of the shell section is estimated by an energy equivalence procedure (of the
generalized section forces and strains vs. the material point stresses and strains). The accuracy of this
calculation may be adversely affected if the ratio of material stiffnesses (Young's moduli) between adjacent
layers is very high.
uncoupled bending in each direction. If accurate edge interlaminar shear stresses are required, shell-to-
solid submodeling should be used.
• The section definition permits use of hyperelastic material models and elastoplastic material models in
laminate definition. However, the accuracy of the solution is primarily governed by fundamental assump-
tions of shell theory. The applicability of shell theory in such cases is best understood by using a com-
parable solid model.
• The layer orientation angle has no effect if the material of the layer is hyperelastic.
• Before using this element in a simulation containing curved thick shell structures with unbalanced
laminate construction or shell offsets, validate the usage via full 3-D modeling with a solid element in
a simpler representative model. This element may underestimate the curved thick shell stiffness, partic-
ularly when the offset is large and the structure is under torsional load.
• The through-thickness stress, SZ, is always zero.
• This element works best with full Newton-Raphson solution scheme (NROPT,FULL,ON).
can be activated via the PSTRES command.
• In a nonlinear analysis, the solution process terminates if the thickness at any integration point that
was defined with a nonzero thickness vanishes (within a small numerical tolerance).
• If a shell section has only one layer and the number of section integration points is equal to one, or if
KEYOPT(1) = 1, then the shell has no bending stiffness, a condition that can result in solver and conver-
gence problems.

ANSYS Professional
SOLID285
3-D 4-Node Tetrahedral Structural Solid with Nodal Pressures
MP ME ST <> <> <> <> <> <> <> <> PP <> EME MFS

SOLID285 element is a lower-order 3-D, 4-node mixed u-P element. The element has a linear displacement
and hydrostatic pressure behavior. The element is suitable for modeling irregular meshes (such as those
generated by various CAD/CAM systems) and general materials (including incompressible materials).
The element is defined by four nodes having four degrees of freedom at each node: three translations
in the nodal x, y, and z directions, and one hydrostatic pressure (HDSP) for all materials except nearly
incompressible hyperelastic materials. For nearly incompressible materials, instead of hydrostatic pressure,
the volume change rate is used at each node together with the three translation degrees of freedom.
In a nonlinear analysis, you can control the tolerance of HDSP separately via the CNVTOL command.
The element has plasticity, hyperelasticity, creep, stress stiffening, large deflection, and large strain
capabilities. It is capable of simulating deformations of nearly incompressible elastoplastic materials,
nearly incompressible hyperelastic materials, and fully incompressible hyperelastic materials.
For more details about this element, see SOLID285 in the Mechanical APDL Theory Reference.
3
Y 2
K
X I
Z
1
J
SOLID285 Input Data

In addition to the nodes, the element input data includes the orthotropic or anisotropic material prop-
erties. Orthotropic and anisotropic material directions correspond to the element coordinate directions.
The element coordinate system orientation is as described in Linear Material Properties in the Material
Reference.
Element loads are described in Nodal Loading (p. 49). Pressure loads may be input as surface loads on
the element faces as shown by the circled numbers on Figure 1 (p. 1353). Positive pressures act into the
SOLID285
element. Temperatures may be input as element body loads at the nodes. The node I temperature T(I)
defaults to TUNIF. If all other temperatures are unspecified, they default to T(I). For any other input
temperature pattern, unspecified temperatures default to TUNIF.
ordinate system.
input.

Nodes
I, J, K, L
Degrees of Freedom
UX, UY, UZ, HDSP
Real Constants
None
Material Properties
Surface Loads
Pressures --
Body Loads
Temperatures --
T(I), T(J), T(K), T(L)
Special Features
Birth and death

Plasticity
Elasticity
Hyperelasticity
Initial state
Large deflection
SOLID285
Large strain
Linear perturbation
Viscoelasticity
Solid 285 Element Technology

This element has only a mixed u-P formulation with pressure stabilization. For more information, see
Element Technologies.

• Nodal displacements and hydrostatic pressure included in the overall nodal solution
coordinate system. A general description of solution output is given in The Item and Sequence Number
Table (p. 52). See the Basic Analysis Guide for ways to view results.
SY
Y
SX K
SZ
X I
Z
SOLID285
available.

Name Definition O R
VOLU: Volume - Y
PRES Pressures P1 at nodes J, I, K; P2 at I, J, L; P3 at J, K, - Y
L; P4 at K, I, L
XZ
XZ
XZ
XZ
XZ
EPCR)
ing)
SEND: ELASTIC, Strain energy density - 1
PLASTIC, CREEP
SOLID285
Name Definition O R
EPPL.
Item and Sequence Number Table (p. 52) in this document for more information. The following notation
Name
Item
I,J,...,R
sequence number for data at nodes I, J, ..., R

Name
P1 SMISC 2 1 3 - -
P2 SMISC 4 5 - 6 -
P3 SMISC - 7 8 9 -
P4 SMISC 11 - 10 12 -

K plane.
• Only the sparse solver is valid when using this element.
• Support is available for static and transient analyses.
• The element may not offer sufficient accuracy for bending-dominant problems, especially if the
mesh is not fine enough.
SOLID285
• On the interfaces of different materials, the elements should not share nodes because the hydro-
static pressure value is not continuous at those nodes. This behavior can be overcome in either of
two ways:
– Coupling the displacements of the nodes on the interface but leaving HDSP unconstrained.
– Adding bonded contact elements on the interfaces.
• The element is not computationally efficient when the model uses compressible material. In such
cases, ANSYS recommends using a more suitable (pure displacement) element such as SOLID185
or SOLID187.

ANSYS Professional
PIPE288
3-D 2-Node Pipe
PIPE288 Element Description

The PIPE288 element is suitable for analyzing slender to moderately stubby/thick pipe structures. The
element is based on Timoshenko beam theory. Shear-deformation effects are included.
PIPE288 is a linear, quadratic, or cubic two-node pipe element in 3-D. The element has six degrees of
freedom at each node (the translations in the x, y, and z directions and rotations about the x, y, and z
directions). The element is well-suited for linear, large rotation, and/or large strain nonlinear applications.
PIPE288 includes stress stiffness terms, by default, in any analysis with NLGEOM,ON. The provided stress-
stiffness terms enable the elements to analyze flexural, lateral, and torsional stability problems (using
eigenvalue buckling, or collapse studies with arc length methods or nonlinear stabilization).
Elasticity, hyperelasticity, plasticity, creep, and other nonlinear material models are supported. Internal
fluid and external insulation are supported. Added mass, hydraulic added mass, and hydrodynamic and
buoyant loading are available.
Figure 1 PIPE288 Geometry
z
7 4
K
I
5
Y 6 y
x
X
Z J
8
PIPE288 Element Technology and Usage Recommendations

PIPE288 is based on Timoshenko beam theory, a first-order shear-deformation theory. Transverse-shear
strain is constant through the cross-section; that is, cross-sections remain plane and undistorted after
deformation.
The element can be used for slender or stout pipes. Due to the limitations of first-order shear-deformation
theory, only moderately "thick" pipes can be analyzed. The slenderness ratio of a pipe structure (GAL2
/ (EI) ) can be used to judge the applicability of the element, where:
PIPE288
G
Shear modulus
A
L
EI
Flexural rigidity
For pipes, (GAL2 / EI) can be reduced to: 2L2 / ((1 + ν) (Ro2 + Ri2)), or for thin-walled pipes: L2 / ((1 + ν)
R2), where ν = Poisson's ratio, Ro = outer radius, Ri = inner radius, and R = average radius.
The following illustration provides an estimate of transverse-shear deformation in a cantilever pipe

subjected to a tip load. Although the results cannot be extrapolated to other applications, the example
serves generally. ANSYS, Inc. recommends a slenderness ratio greater than 30.
Figure 2 Transverse-Shear-Deformation Estimation
L P

25 1.120
50 1.060
100 1.030
1000 1.003
The PIPE288 element supports an elastic relationship between transverse-shear forces and transverse-
shear strains.
When KEYOPT(3) = 0 (linear, default), PIPE288 is based on linear shape functions. It uses one point of
integration along the length; therefore, all element solution quantities are constant along the length.
For example, when SMISC quantities are requested at nodes I and J, the centroidal values are reported
for both end nodes. This option is recommended if the element is used as stiffener and it is necessary
to maintain compatibility with a first-order shell element (such as SHELL181). Only constant bending
moments can be represented exactly with this option. Mesh refinement is generally required in typical
applications.
When KEYOPT(3) = 2 (quadratic), PIPE288 has an internal node in the interpolation scheme, effectively
making this a beam element based on quadratic shape functions. Two points of integration are used,
resulting in linear variation of element solution quantities along the length. Linearly varying bending
moments are represented exactly.
PIPE288
When KEYOPT(3) = 3 (cubic), PIPE288 has two internal nodes and adopts cubic shape functions. Quad-
ratically varying bending moments are represented exactly. Three points of integration along the length
are used, resulting in quadratic variation of element solution quantities along the length. Unlike typical
cubic (Hermitian) formulations, cubic interpolation is used for all displacements and rotations.
In general, the more complex the element, the fewer elements are needed. Quadratic and cubic options
are recommended when higher-order element interpolations are desired in situations where:
• Nonuniform loads (including tapered distributed loads) exist within the element; in this case, the
cubic option gives superior results over the quadratic option.
(For partially distributed loads and non-nodal point loads, only the cubic option is valid.)
• The element may undergo highly nonuniform deformation (for example, when individual frame
members in civil engineering structures are modeled with single elements).
PIPE288 supports both the thin-pipe (KEYOPT(4) = 1) and the thick-pipe (KEYOPT(4) = 2) options. The
thin-pipe option assumes a plain stress state in the pipe wall and ignore the stress in the wall thickness
direction. The thick-pipe option accounts for the full 3-D stress state and generally leads to more accurate
results in thick-walled pipes where through-the-thickness stress can be significant. The element allows
change in cross-sectional area in large-deflection analysis. While the thick-pipe option can accurately
determine the cross-section area change from the actual material constitutive properties, the thin-pipe
option calculates the approximate area change based on a simple material incompressibility assumption.
The thick pipe option is required for a “solid” pipe section (inner radius Ri = 0); for more information,
see the SECDATA command.
Two limitations are associated with the quadratic and cubic options in PIPE288:
• Although the elements employ higher-order interpolations, the initial geometry of PIPE288 is treated
as straight.
• Because the internal nodes are inaccessible, no boundary/loading/initial conditions are allowed on
these internal nodes.
As a result of the limitations associated with the quadratic and cubic options, you will notice discrepancies
in the results between PIPE289 and the quadratic option of PIPE288 if the midside nodes of the PIPE289
model have specified boundary/loading/initial conditions and/or the midside nodes are not located
exactly at the element midpoint. Similarly, the cubic option of PIPE288 may not be identical to a tradi-
tional cubic (Hermitian) beam element.
For the mass matrix and load vectors, a higher order integration rule than that used for stiffness matrix
is employed. The elements support both consistent and lumped mass matrices. The LUMPM,ON command
activates lumped mass matrix. Consistent mass matrix is the default behavior. You can add mass per
unit length using the SECCONTROLS command's ADDMAS values. See "PIPE288 Input Summary" (p. 1365).
When ocean loading is applied (SOCEAN), the loading is nonlinear (that is, based on the square of the
relative velocity between the structure and the water). Accordingly, the full Newton-Raphson option
(NROPT,FULL) may be necessary to achieve optimal results. (Full Newton-Raphson is applied automat-
ically in an analysis involving large-deflection effects [NLGEOM,ON].)
PIPE288 Input Data

in Figure 1 (p. 1359). PIPE288 is defined by nodes I and J in the global coordinate system. If ocean loading
PIPE288
is present, the global origin must be at the mean sea level, with the global Z-axis pointing away from
the center of the earth.
Because the section is round, the element orientation is important only for defining offsets and temper-
atures, and interpreting bending moment directions and stress locations.
Node K is the preferred way to define the orientation of the element. For information about orientation
automatically.
PIPE288 can also be defined without the orientation node. The element x-axis is oriented from node I
toward node J. When no orientation node is used, the default orientation of the element y-axis is
automatically calculated to be parallel to the global X-Y plane. If the element is parallel to the global
Z-axis (or within a 0.01 percent slope of it), the element y-axis is oriented parallel to the global Y-axis.
To control the element orientation about the element x-axis, use the orientation-node option. If both
are defined, the orientation-node option takes precedence. The orientation node K, if used, defines a
plane (with I and J) containing the element x and z-axes (as shown). If this element is used in a large-
deflection analysis, the location of the orientation node K only initially orients the element.
The pipe element is a one-dimensional line elements in space. The cross-section details are provided
separately via the SECTYPE and SECDATA commands. A section is associated with the pipe elements
by specifying the section ID number (SECNUM). A section number is an independent element attribute.
PIPE288 Cross-Sections
PIPE288 can be associated only with the pipe cross-section (SECTYPE,,PIPE). The material of the pipe
is defined as an element attribute (MAT).
PIPE288 is provided with section-relevant quantities (area of integration, position, etc.) automatically at
a number of section points via the SECDATA command. Each section is assumed to be an assembly of
a predetermined number of nine-node cells. Each cross-section cell has four integration points.
Section integration points and section corner nodes are shown in Figure 3 (p. 1363).
PIPE288
Figure 3 Typical Cross-Section Cell
x
x
x
x
Section Nodes
Section Flexibility
To apply section flexibility factors, use the SFLEX command. The command is valid only for linear ma-
terial properties and small strain analyses, and does not support offsets, temperature loading, or initial
state loading.
PIPE288 Loads
Internal fluid and external insulation are supported. Added mass, hydraulic added mass, and hydro-
dynamic and buoyant loading, are available via the SOCEAN, OCDATA, and OCTABLE commands. See
the SECCONTROLS command for defining added mass.
Forces are applied at the nodes I and J. If the centroidal axis is not colinear with the element x-axis
because of offsets, applied axial forces will cause bending. The nodes should therefore be located at
the desired points where you want to apply the forces. Use the OFFSETY and OFFSETZ arguments of
the SECOFFSET command appropriately. By default, the program uses the centroid as the reference
axis for the pipe elements.
element faces as shown by the circled numbers in Figure 1 (p. 1359). Internal and external pressures are
input on an average basis over the element. Lateral pressures are input as force per unit length. End
"pressures" are input as forces.
On the first and second faces, pressures are the internal and external pressures, respectively.
The pressure input on the third face is the global Z coordinate location of the free surface of the fluid
internal to the pipe. This input pressure is used only for the applied mass and pressure effects. If this
value is zero, no fluid inside of the pipe is considered. If the internal fluid free surface should be at Z =
0, use a very small number instead. The pressure calculation presumes that the fluid density above an
element to the free surface is uniform. If not, the free surface location needs to be adjusted to account
for the less dense fluid above the element. The free surface location is stepped, even if you issue a
KBC,0 command.
PIPE288
When KEYOPT(1) = 0, temperatures can be input as element body loads at the inner and outer surfaces
at both ends of the pipe element so that the temperature varies linearly through the wall thickness. If
only two temperatures are specified, those two temperatures are used at both ends of the pipe element
(that is, there is no gradient along the length). If only the first temperature is specified, all others default
to the first. The following graphic illustrates temperature input at a node when KEYOPT(1) = 0:
TIN
TOUT
When KEYOPT(1) = 1, temperatures can be input as element body loads at three locations at both nodes
of the pipe element so that the temperature varies linearly in the element y and z directions. At either
end of the element, temperatures can be input at these locations:

• At the outer radius from the x-axis in the element y-direction (T(Ro,0))
• At the outer radius from the x-axis in the element z-direction (T(0,Ro))
The following graphic illustrates temperature input at a node when KEYOPT(1) = 1:

z
Tz
Ty
y
TAVG
Element locations (T(Y,Z)) are given according to the convention used in Figure 1 (p. 1359).
For pipe elements, element body load commands (BFE) accept an element number and a list of values,
element.
defaults to TUNIF.)
PIPE288
This specifies a uniform temperature over the cross section at the specified node.
matrix is needed for pressure load stiffness effects, issue an NROPT,UNSYM command.
PIPE288 Input Summary

Nodes
I, J, K (an optional orientation node)
Degrees of Freedom

Section Information
Accessed via SECTYPE,,PIPE and SECDATA commands.

Material Properties
Surface Loads
Pressure --
face 1 - Internal pressure

face 2 - External pressure
face 3 - Height of free surface of fluid on inside of pipe
---
I and J denote end nodes.
Input pressure values for faces 1, 2, and 3 via the SFE command. Input pressure values for faces
4 through 8 via the SFBEAM command.
For faces 4, 5, and 6, offsets apply only if you are using the cubic option (KEYOPT(3) = 3).
Body Loads
Temperatures --
TOUT(I), TIN(I), TOUT(J), TIN(J) if KEYOPT(1) = 0.
TAVG(I), Ty(I), Tz(I), TAVG(J), Ty(J), Tz(J) if KEYOPT(1) = 1.
PIPE288
Special Features
Birth and death

Hyperelasticity
Large deflection
Linear perturbation
Ocean loading
Plasticity
Stress stiffening
Viscoelasticity
KEYOPT(1)
Temperature input
0 --
Through wall gradient
1 --
Diametral gradient
KEYOPT(3)
Shape functions along the length:
0 --
Linear
2 --
Quadratic
3 --
Cubic
KEYOPT(4)
Hoop strain treatment
1 --
Thin pipe theory
2 --
Thick pipe theory
KEYOPT(6)
End cap loads
0 --
Internal and external pressures cause loads on end caps
1 --
Internal and external pressures do not cause loads on end caps
KEYOPT(7), KEYOPT(9), KEYOPT(11), and KEYOPT(12)
Active only when OUTPR,ESOL is active:
KEYOPT(7)
PIPE288
0 --
Output section forces/moments, strains/curvatures, internal and external pressures, effective tension,
and maximum hoop stress (default)
1 --
2 --
3 --
and maximum hoop stress extrapolated to the element nodes
KEYOPT(8)
0 --
Output a combined state of the following two types (default)
1 --
Output only torsion-related shear stresses
2 --
KEYOPT(9)
Output control at integration points:
0 --
None (default)
1 --
2 --
Same as KEYOPT(9) = 1 plus stresses and strains at each section node
KEYOPT(11)
Output control for values extrapolated to the element and section nodes:
0 --
None (default)
1 --
2 --
3 --
KEYOPT(12)
Hydrodynamic output (not available in harmonic analyses that include ocean wave effects (HROCEAN)):
0 --
None (default)
1 --
Additional centroidal hydrodynamic printout
PIPE288
KEYOPT(15)
0 --
1 --
Store non-averaged results at each section integration point. (The volume of data may be excessive.)
PIPE288 Output Data


• Additional element output as described in Table 1: PIPE288 Element Output Definitions (p. 1369)
For ways to view results, see the Basic Analysis Guide.
To view 3-D deformed shapes for PIPE288, issue an OUTRES,MISC or OUTRES,ALL command for static
or transient analyses. To view 3-D mode shapes for a modal or eigenvalue buckling analysis, expand
the modes with element results calculation active (via the MXPAND command's Elcalc = YES option).
Linearized Stress
It is customary in pipe design to employ components of axial stress that contribute to axial loads and
bending in each direction separately; therefore, PIPE288 provides a linearized stress output as part of
SByT = -Mz * R0 / I
SByB = Mz * R0 / I
SBzT = My * R0 / I
SBzB = -My * R0 / I
where My, Mz are bending moments in the beam coordinate system (SMISC quantities 2,15,3,16) as
shown in Figure 1 (p. 1359), R0 is the outside radius, and I is the moment of inertia of the cross-section.
The program uses the maximum and minimum cross-section dimensions.
EPELDIR = Ex
EPELByT = -Kz * R0
EPELByB = Kz * R0
EPELBzT = Ky * R0
EPELBzB = -Ky * R0
PIPE288
The reported stresses are strictly valid only for elastic behavior of members. PIPE288 always employs
available.
For the stress and strain components, X refers to axial, Y refers to hoop, and Z refers to radial.
Table 1 PIPE288 Element Output Definitions

Name Definition O R
S:x, y, z, xy, yz, Section point stresses 3 Y
xz
EPEL:x, y, z, xy, Elastic strains 3 Y
yz, xz
EPTO:x,y,z xy, yz, Section point total mechanical strains (EPEL + 3 Y
xz EPPL + EPCR)
EPTT:x,y,z xy, yz, Section point total strains (EPEL + EPPL + EPCR 3 Y
xz + EPTH)
EPPL:x, y, z, xy, Section point plastic strains 3 Y
yz, xz
EPCR:x, y, z, xy, Section point creep strains 3 Y
yz, xz
EPTH:x, y, z, xy, Section point thermal strains 3 Y
yz, xz
yielding)
PIPE288
Name Definition O R
PLASTIC, CREEP
SFy, SFz Section shear forces 2 Y
SEy, SEz Section shear strains 2 Y
Ex Axial strain Y Y
Fx Axial force Y Y
INT PRESS Internal pressure at integration point Y Y
EXT PRESS External pressure at integration point Y Y
EFFECTIVE TENS Effective tension on pipe Y Y
MAX HOOP Maximum hoop stress at integration point Y Y
STRESS
SByT Bending stress on the element +Y side of the - 2
pipe
SByB Bending stress on the element -Y side of the - 2
pipe
SBzT Bending stress on the element +Z side of the - 2
pipe
SBzB Bending stress on the element -Z side of the - 2
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
TEMP Temperatures at all section corner nodes - Y
The following values apply to ocean loading only:
GLOBAL COORD Element centroid location 7 Y
PIPE288
Name Definition O R
VR, VZ Radial and vertical fluid particle velocities (VR 7 Y
is always > 0)
AR, AZ Radial and vertical fluid particle accelerations 7 Y
PHDYN Dynamic fluid pressure head 7 Y
ETA Wave amplitude over integration point 7 Y
TFLUID Fluid temperature (printed if VISC is nonzero) 7 Y
VISC Viscosity (output if VISC is nonzero) 7 Y
REN, RET Normal and tangential Reynolds numbers (if 7 Y
VISC is nonzero)
CT Input tangential drag coefficients evaluated at 7 Y
Reynolds numbers
CDY, CDZ Input normal drag coefficients evaluated at 7 Y
Reynolds numbers
CMY, CMZ Input inertia coefficients evaluated at Reynolds 7 Y
numbers
URT, URN Tangential (parallel to element axis) and normal 7 Y
relative velocities
ABURN Vector sum of normal (URN) velocities 7 Y
AN Accelerations normal to element 7 Y
FX, FY, FZ Hydrodynamic tangential and normal forces in 7 Y
element coordinates
ARGU Effective position of wave (radians) 7 Y
1. Available only at the centroid as a *GET item, or on the NMISC record for ocean loading.
4. Available if the element has a nonlinear material, or if large-deflection effects are enabled
(NLGEOM,ON) for SEND.
6. Available only if the UserMat subroutine and the TB,STATE command are used.
Table 2: PIPE288 Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 1372) lists output available for the ETABLE command using
the Sequence Number method. See Creating an Element Table in the Basic Analysis Guide and The Item
and Sequence Number Table (p. 52) for more information. The output tables use the following notation:
Name
output quantity as defined in Table 1: PIPE288 Element Output Definitions (p. 1369)
Item
PIPE288
E,I,J
sequence number for data at nodes E, I and J
Table 2 PIPE288 Item and Sequence Numbers

Name Item E I J
Fx SMISC -- 1 14
My SMISC -- 2 15
Mz SMISC -- 3 16
TQ SMISC -- 4 17
SFz SMISC -- 5 18
SFy SMISC -- 6 19
Ex SMISC -- 7 20
Ky SMISC -- 8 21
Kz SMISC -- 9 22
TE SMISC -- 10 23
SEz SMISC -- 11 24
SEy SMISC -- 12 25
Area SMISC -- 13 26
BM SMISC -- 27 29
BK SMISC -- 28 30
SDIR SMISC -- 31 36
SByT SMISC -- 32 37
SByB SMISC -- 33 38
SBzT SMISC -- 34 39
SBzB SMISC -- 35 40
EPELDIR SMISC -- 41 46
EPELByT SMISC -- 42 47
EPELByB SMISC -- 43 48
EPELBzT SMISC -- 44 49
EPELBzB SMISC -- 45 50
TEMP SMISC -- 51-53 54-56
INT PRESS [1] SMISC -- 61 65
EXT PRESS [1] SMISC -- 62 66
EFFECTIVE TENS [1] SMISC -- 63 67
MAX HOOP STRESS SMISC -- 64 68
[1]
S:x, y, z, xy, yz, xz LS -- CI[2], DI[3] CJ[2], DJ[3]
EPEL:x, y, z, xy, yz, xz LEPEL -- CI[2], DI[3] CJ[2], DJ[3]
PIPE288

Name Item E I J
EPTH:x, y, z, xy, yz, LEPTH -- CI[2], DI[3] CJ[2], DJ[3]
xz
EPPL:x, y, z, xy, yz, xz LEPPL -- CI[2], DI[3] CJ[2], DJ[3]
EPCR:x, y, z, xy, yz, LEPCR -- CI[2], DI[3] CJ[2], DJ[3]
xz
EPTO:x, y, z, xy, yz, LEPTO -- CI[2], DI[3] CJ[2], DJ[3]
xz
EPTT:x, y, z, xy, yz, xz LEPTT -- CI[2], DI[3] CJ[2], DJ[3]
The following output quantities are valid for ocean loading only:
GLOBAL COORD NMISC 1, 2, 3 -- --
VR, VZ NMISC 4, 5 -- --
AR, AZ NMISC 6, 7 -- --
PHDYN NMISC 8 -- --
ETA NMISC 9 -- --
TFLUID NMISC 10 -- --
VISC NMISC 11 -- --
REN, RET NMISC 12, 13 -- --
CT NMISC 14 -- --
CDY, CDZ NMISC 15, 16 -- --
CMY, CMZ NMISC 17, 18 -- --
URT, URN NMISC 19, 20, 21 -- --
ABURN NMISC 22 -- --
AN NMISC 23, 24 -- --
FX, FY, FZ NMISC 25, 26, 27 -- --
ARGU NMISC 28 -- --
1. Internal pressure (INT PRESS), external pressure (EXT PRESS), effective tension (EFFECTIVE
TENS), and maximum hoop stress (MAX HOOP STRESS) occur at integration points, and
not at end nodes.
quantities (LS, LEPEL, LEPTH, LEPPL, LEPCR, LEPTO, and LEPTT) at RST section nodes
(section corner nodes where results are available), at element Node I and J respectively.
CI and CJ are applicable only when KEYOPT(15) = 0. For a given section corner node
nn, CI and CJ are given as follows:
CI = (nn - 1) * 6 + COMP
or strain component (1 - x, 2 - y, 3 - z, 4 - xy, 5 - yz, 6 - xz). Locations of RST section
PIPE288
solution quantities (LS, LEPEL, LEPTH, LEPPL, LEPCR, LEPTO, and LEPTT) at RST section
integration points (section integration points where results are available), at element
Node I and J respectively. DI and DJ are applicable only when KEYOPT(15) = 1. For the
ith integration point (i = 1, 2, 3, or 4) in section cell nc, DI and DJ are given as follows:
DI = (nc - 1) * 24 + (i - 1) * 6 + COMP
DJ = (ncMax + nc - 1) * 24 + (i - 1) * 6 + COMP
strain component (1 - x, 2 - x, 3 - z, 4 - xy, 5 - yz, 6 - xz). Locations of RST section
Beams.

The shear stresses are caused by torsional and transverse loads. PIPE288 is based on first-order shear-
constant for the cross-section; therefore, the shear energy is based on a transverse-shear force. This
shear force is redistributed by predetermined shear stress distribution coefficients across the pipe cross-
section, and made available for output purposes. Use KEYOPT(8) to activate output of shear stresses
caused by flexure or transverse loading.
for torsional rigidity, warping rigidity, inertia properties, and shear center determination. The default
very accurately. Use the SECDATA command to adjust cross-section mesh density.
The traction-free state at the edges of the cross-section is met only in a well-refined model of the cross-
section.
affects the shear correction factor and shear stress distribution slightly, and this effect is ignored.
PIPE288 Assumptions and Restrictions

• The pipe cannot have zero length.
• Cross-section distortion or collapse is not considered.
• Rotational degrees of freedom are not included in the lumped mass matrix if offsets are present.
• The element works best with the full Newton-Raphson solution scheme (the default option in
solution control).
• Only moderately "thick" pipes can be analyzed. See "PIPE288 Element Technology and Usage Recom-
mendations" (p. 1359) for more information.
PIPE288
• Hydrodynamic output via KEYOPT(12) is not available in harmonic analyses that include ocean
wave effects (HROCEAN).
PIPE288 Product Restrictions

ANSYS Professional
PIPE289
3-D 3-Node Pipe
PIPE289 Element Description

The PIPE289 element is suitable for analyzing slender to moderately stubby/thick pipe structures. The
element is based on Timoshenko beam theory. Shear deformation effects are included.
PIPE289 is a quadratic three-node pipe element in 3-D. The element has six degrees of freedom at each
node (the translations in the x, y, and z directions and rotations about the x, y, and z directions). The
element is well-suited for linear, large rotation, and/or large strain nonlinear applications.
PIPE289 includes stress stiffness terms, by default, in any analysis with NLGEOM,ON. The provided stress-
stiffness terms enable the elements to analyze flexural, lateral, and torsional stability problems (using
eigenvalue buckling, or collapse studies with arc length methods or nonlinear stabilization).
Elasticity, hyperelasticity, plasticity, creep, and other nonlinear material models are supported. Internal
fluid and external insulation are supported. Added mass, hydraulic added mass, and hydrodynamic and
buoyant loading are available.
Figure 1 PIPE289 Geometry
z
7 4
L
I 5
6 y
Y
K
x
X
Z J
PIPE289 Element Technology and Usage Recommendations

PIPE289 is based on Timoshenko beam theory, a first-order shear-deformation theory. Transverse-shear
strain is constant through the cross-section; that is, cross-sections remain plane and undistorted after
deformation. (For cases where cross-section distortion must be considered, it is preferable to use EL-
BOW290.)
PIPE289
The element can be used for slender or stout pipes. Due to the limitations of first-order shear-deformation
theory, only moderately "thick" pipes can be analyzed. The slenderness ratio of a pipe structure (GAL2
/ (EI) ) can be used to judge the applicability of the element, where:
G
Shear modulus
A
L
EI
Flexural rigidity
For pipes, (GAL2 / EI) can be reduced to: 2L2 / ((1 + ν) (Ro2 + Ri2)), or for thin-walled pipes: L2 / ((1 + ν)
R2), where ν = Poisson's ratio, Ro = outer radius, Ri = inner radius, and R = average radius.
The following illustration provides an estimate of transverse-shear deformation in a cantilever pipe

subjected to a tip load. Although the results cannot be extrapolated to other applications, the example
serves generally. ANSYS, Inc. recommends a slenderness ratio greater than 30.
Figure 2 Transverse-Shear-Deformation Estimation
L P

25 1.120
50 1.060
100 1.030
1000 1.003
The element supports an elastic relationship between transverse-shear forces and transverse-shear
strains.
Unlike other cubic (Hermitian) polynomial-based elements, PIPE289 is based on quadratic polynomials;
therefore, offsets in specification of distributed pressure loads are not allowed. The element has linear
bending-moment variation. Refinement of the mesh is recommended in order to accommodate such
loading. The element is computationally efficient and has super-convergence properties with respect
to mesh refinement. For example, the quadratic beam with a two point Gaussian integration is known
to be of same accuracy as a Hermitian element.
PIPE289 supports both the thin-pipe (KEYOPT(4) = 1) and the thick-pipe (KEYOPT(4) = 2) options. The
thin-pipe option assumes a plain stress state in the pipe wall and ignore the stress in the wall thickness
direction. The thick-pipe option accounts for the full 3-D stress state and generally leads to more accurate
PIPE289
results in thick-walled pipes where through-the-thickness stress can be significant. The element allows
change in cross-sectional area in large-deflection analysis. While the thick-pipe option can accurately
determine the cross-section area change from the actual material constitutive properties, the thin-pipe
option calculates the approximate area change based on a simple material incompressibility assumption.
For the mass matrix and load vectors, a higher order integration rule than that used for stiffness matrix
is employed. The elements support both consistent and lumped mass matrices. Avoid using LUMPM,ON
as PIPE289 is a higher-order element. Consistent mass matrix is the default behavior. You can add mass
per unit length using the SECCONTROLS command's ADDMAS values. See "PIPE289 Input Summary" (p. 1382).
When ocean loading is applied (SOCEAN), the loading is nonlinear (that is, based on the square of the
relative velocity between the structure and the water). Accordingly, the full Newton-Raphson option
(NROPT,FULL) may be necessary to achieve optimal results. (Full Newton-Raphson is applied automat-
ically in an analysis involving large-deflection effects [NLGEOM,ON].)
PIPE289 Input Data

in Figure 1 (p. 1377). PIPE289 is defined by nodes I, J, and K in the global coordinate system. If ocean
loading is present, the global origin must be at the mean sea level, with the global Z-axis pointing away
from the center of the earth.
Because the section is round, the element orientation is important only for defining offsets and temper-
atures, and interpreting bending moment directions and stress locations.
Node L is the preferred way to define the orientation of the element. For information about orientation
automatically.
You can define PIPE289 without the orientation node. The element x-axis is oriented from node I toward
node J. When no orientation node is used, the default orientation of the element y-axis is automatically
calculated to be parallel to the global X-Y plane. If the element is parallel to the global Z-axis (or within
a 0.01 percent slope of it), the element y-axis is oriented parallel to the global Y-axis. To control the
element orientation about the element x-axis, use the L (orientation) node option. If both are defined,
the orientation node option takes precedence.
The orientation node L, if used, defines a plane (with I and J) containing the element x and z-axes (as
shown). If this element is used in a large-deflection analysis, the location of the orientation node only
initially orients the element.
The pipe element is a one-dimensional line elements in space. The cross-section details are provided
separately via the SECTYPE and SECDATA commands. A section is associated with the pipe elements
by specifying the section ID number (SECNUM). A section number is an independent element attribute.
PIPE289
PIPE289 Cross-Sections
PIPE289 can be associated only with the pipe cross-section (SECTYPE,,PIPE). The material of the pipe
is defined as an element attribute (MAT).
PIPE289 is provided with section-relevant quantities (area of integration, position, etc.) automatically at
a number of section points using the SECDATA command. Each section is assumed to be an assembly
of a predetermined number of nine-node cells. Each cross-section cell has four integration points.
Figure 3 Typical Cross-Section Cell
x
x
x
x
Section Nodes
Section Flexibility
To apply section flexibility factors, use the SFLEX command. The command is valid only for linear ma-
terial properties and small strain analyses, and does not support offsets, temperature loading, or initial
state loading.
PIPE289 Loads
Forces are applied at nodes I, J, and K. If the centroidal axis is not colinear with the element x-axis because
of node-location offsets, applied axial forces will cause bending. The nodes should therefore be located
at the desired points where you want to apply the forces. Use the OFFSETY and OFFSETZ arguments
of the SECOFFSET command appropriately. By default, the program uses the centroid as the reference
axis for the pipe elements.
element faces as shown by the circled numbers in Figure 1 (p. 1377). Internal and external pressures are
input on an average basis over the element. Lateral pressures are input as force per unit length. End
"pressures" are input as forces.
PIPE289
On the first and second faces, pressures are the internal and external pressures, respectively.
The pressure input on the third face is the global Z coordinate location of the free surface of the fluid
internal to the pipe. This input pressure is used only for the applied mass and pressure effects. If this
value is zero, no fluid inside of the pipe is considered. If the internal fluid free surface should be at Z =
0, use a very small number instead. The pressure calculation presumes that the fluid density above an
element to the free surface is uniform. If not, the free surface location needs to be adjusted to account
for the less dense fluid above the element. The free surface location is stepped, even if you issue a
KBC,0 command.
When KEYOPT(1) = 0, temperatures can be input as element body loads at the inner and outer surfaces
at both ends of the pipe element so that the temperature varies linearly through the wall thickness. If
only two temperatures are specified, those two temperatures are used at both ends of the pipe element
(that is, there is no gradient along the length). If only the first temperature is specified, all others default
to the first. The following graphic illustrates temperature input at a node when KEYOPT(1) = 0:
TIN
TOUT
When KEYOPT(1) = 1, temperatures can be input as element body loads at three locations at both nodes
of the pipe element so that the temperature varies linearly in the element y and z directions. At either
end of the element, temperatures can be input at these locations:

• At the outer radius from the x-axis in the element y-direction (T(Ro,0))
• At the outer radius from the x-axis in the element z-direction (T(0,Ro))
The following graphic illustrates temperature input at a node when KEYOPT(1) = 1:

z
Tz
Ty
y
TAVG
Element locations (T(Y,Z)) are given according to the convention used in Figure 1 (p. 1377).
PIPE289
For pipe elements, element body load commands (BFE) accept an element number and a list of values,
element.
defaults to TUNIF.)
This specifies a uniform temperature over the cross section at the specified node. (BF command input
is not accepted at node K.)
matrix is needed for pressure load stiffness effects, issue an NROPT,UNSYM command.
The end-cap pressure effect is included by default. The end-cap effect can be deactivated via KEYOPT(6).
When subjected to internal and external pressures, PIPE289 with end caps (KEYOPT(6) = 0) is always in
equilibrium; that is, no net forces are produced. Because the element curvature is not considered for
the end-cap orientations, the element is also in equilibrium without end caps (KEYOPT(6) = 1), even
when the element is curved.
PIPE289 Input Summary

Nodes
I, J, K, and L (the optional, but recommended, orientation node)
Degrees of Freedom

Section Information

Material Properties
Surface Loads
Pressure --
face 1- Internal pressure

face 2 - External pressure
face 3 - Height of free surface of fluid on inside of pipe
PIPE289

---
I and J denote end nodes.
Input pressure values for faces 1, 2, and 3 via the SFE command. Input pressure values for faces
4 through 8 via the SFBEAM command
Distributed pressure offsets are not available for faces 4, 5, and 6.
Body Loads
Temperatures --
TOUT(I), TIN(I), TOUT(J), TIN(J) if KEYOPT(1) = 0.
TAVG(I), Ty(I), Tz(I), TAVG(J), Ty(J), Tz(J) if KEYOPT(1) = 1.

Special Features
Birth and death

Hyperelasticity
Large deflection
Linear perturbation
Ocean loading
Plasticity
Stress stiffening
Viscoelasticity
KEYOPT(1)
Temperature input
0 --
Through wall gradient
1 --
Diametral gradient
KEYOPT(4)
Hoop strain treatment
1 --
Thin pipe theory
2 --
Thick pipe theory
KEYOPT(6)
End cap loads
0 --
PIPE289
1 --
KEYOPT(7), KEYOPT(9), KEYOPT(11), and KEYOPT(12)
Ative only when OUTPR,ESOL is active:
KEYOPT(7)
0 --
and maximum hoop stress (default)
1 --
2 --
3 --
and maximum hoop stress extrapolated to the element nodes
KEYOPT(8)
0 --
Output a combined state of the following two types (default)
1 --
Output only torsion-related shear stresses
2 --
KEYOPT(9)
Output control at integration points:
0 --
None (default)
1 --
2 --
Same as KEYOPT(9) = 1 plus stresses and strains at each section node
KEYOPT(11)
Output control for values extrapolated to the element and section nodes:
0 --
None (default)
1 --
2 --
3 --
PIPE289
KEYOPT(12)
Hydrodynamic output (not available in harmonic analyses that include ocean wave effects (HROCEAN)):
0 --
None (default)
1 --
Additional centroidal hydrodynamic printout
KEYOPT(15)
0 --
1 --
Store non-averaged results at each section integration point. (The volume of data may be excessive.)
PIPE289 Output Data


• Additional element output as described in Table 1: PIPE289 Element Output Definitions (p. 1386)
For ways to view results, see the Basic Analysis Guide.
To view 3-D deformed shapes for PIPE289, issue an OUTRES,MISC or OUTRES,ALL command for static
or transient analyses. To view 3-D mode shapes for a modal or eigenvalue buckling analysis, expand
the modes with element results calculation active (via the MXPAND command's Elcalc = YES option).
Linearized Stress
bending in each direction separately; therefore, PIPE289 provides a linearized stress output as part of
SByT = -Mz * R0 / I
SByB = Mz * R0 / I
SBzT = My * R0 / I
SBzB = -My * R0 / I
where My, Mz are bending moments (SMISC quantities 2,15,3,16), R0 is the outside radius, and I is the
moment of inertia of the cross-section. The program uses the maximum and minimum cross-section
dimensions.
EPELDIR = Ex
PIPE289
EPELByT = -Kz * R0
EPELByB = Kz * R0
EPELBzT = Ky * R0
EPELBzB = -Ky * R0
The reported stresses are strictly valid only for elastic behavior of members. PIPE289 always employs
available.
For the stress and strain components, X refers to axial, Y refers to hoop, and Z refers to radial.
Table 1 PIPE289 Element Output Definitions

Name Definition O R
S:x, y, z, xy, yz, Section point stresses 3 Y
xz
EPEL:x, y, z, xy, Elastic strains 3 Y
yz, xz
EPTO:x, y, z, xy, Section point total mechanical strains (EPEL + 3 Y
yz, xz EPPL + EPCR)
EPTT:x, y, z, xy, Section point total strains (EPEL + EPPL + EPCR 3 Y
yz, xz + EPTH)
EPPL:x, y, z, xy, Section point plastic strains 3 Y
yz, xz
EPCR:x, y, z, xy, Section point creep strains 3 Y
yz, xz
PIPE289
Name Definition O R
EPTH:x, y, z, xy, Section point thermal strains 3 Y
yz, xz
yielding)
PLASTIC, CREEP
SFy, SFz Section shear forces 2 Y
SEy, SEz Section shear strains 2 Y
Ex Axial strain Y Y
Fx Axial force Y Y
INT PRESS Internal pressure at integration point Y Y
EXT PRESS External pressure at integration point Y Y
EFFECTIVE TENS Effective tension on pipe Y Y
MAX HOOP Maximum hoop stress at integration point Y Y
STRESS
SDIR Axial direct stress - Y
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
PIPE289
Name Definition O R
pipe
TEMP Temperatures at all section corner nodes - Y
The following values apply to ocean loading only:
GLOBAL COORD Element centroid location 7 Y
VR, VZ Radial and vertical fluid particle velocities (VR 7 Y
is always > 0)
AR, AZ Radial and vertical fluid particle accelerations 7 Y
PHDYN Dynamic fluid pressure head 7 Y
ETA Wave amplitude over integration point 7 Y
TFLUID Fluid temperature (printed if VISC is nonzero) 7 Y
VISC Viscosity (output if VISC is nonzero) 7 Y
REN, RET Normal and tangential Reynolds numbers (if 7 Y
VISC is nonzero)
CT Input tangential drag coefficients evaluated at 7 Y
Reynolds numbers
CDY, CDZ Input normal drag coefficients evaluated at 7 Y
Reynolds numbers
CMY, CMZ Input inertia coefficients evaluated at Reynolds 7 Y
numbers
URT, URN Tangential (parallel to element axis) and normal 7 Y
relative velocities
ABURN Vector sum of normal (URN) velocities 7 Y
AN Accelerations normal to element 7 Y
FX, FY, FZ Hydrodynamic tangential and normal forces in 7 Y
element coordinates
ARGU Effective position of wave (radians) 7 Y
1. Available only at the centroid as a *GET item, or on the NMISC record for ocean loading.
4. Available if the element has a nonlinear material, or if large-deflection effects are enabled
(NLGEOM,ON) for SEND.
6. Available only if the UserMat subroutine and the TB,STATE command are used.
PIPE289
Table 2: PIPE289 Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 1389) lists output available for the ETABLE command using
the Sequence Number method. See Creating an Element Table in the Basic Analysis Guide and The Item
and Sequence Number Table (p. 52) in this document for more information. The output tables use the
following notation:
Name
output quantity as defined in Table 1: PIPE289 Element Output Definitions (p. 1386).
Item
E,I,J
Table 2 PIPE289 Item and Sequence Numbers

Name Item E I J
Fx SMISC -- 1 14
My SMISC -- 2 15
Mz SMISC -- 3 16
TQ SMISC -- 4 17
SFz SMISC -- 5 18
SFy SMISC -- 6 19
Ex SMISC -- 7 20
Ky SMISC -- 8 21
Kz SMISC -- 9 22
TE SMISC -- 10 23
SEz SMISC -- 11 24
SEy SMISC -- 12 25
Area SMISC -- 13 26
BM SMISC -- 27 29
BK SMISC -- 28 30
SDIR SMISC -- 31 36
SByT SMISC -- 32 37
SByB SMISC -- 33 38
SBzT SMISC -- 34 39
SBzB SMISC -- 35 40
EPELDIR SMISC -- 41 46
EPELByT SMISC -- 42 47
EPELByB SMISC -- 43 48
EPELBzT SMISC -- 44 49
EPELBzB SMISC -- 45 50
TEMP SMISC -- 51-53 54-56
PIPE289

Name Item E I J
INT PRESS [1] SMISC -- 61 65
EXT PRESS [1] SMISC -- 62 66
EFFECTIVE TENS [1] SMISC -- 63 67
MAX HOOP STRESS SMISC -- 64 68
[1]
S:x, y, z, xy, yz, xz LS -- CI[2], DI[3] CJ[2], DJ[3]
EPEL:x, y, z, xy, yz, xz LEPEL -- CI[2], DI[3] CJ[2], DJ[3]
EPTH:x, y, z, xy, yz, LEPTH -- CI[2], DI[3] CJ[2], DJ[3]
xz
EPPL:x, y, z, xy, yz, xz LEPPL -- CI[2], DI[3] CJ[2], DJ[3]
EPCR:x, y, z, xy, yz, LEPCR -- CI[2], DI[3] CJ[2], DJ[3]
xz
EPTO:x, y, z, xy, yz, LEPTO -- CI[2], DI[3] CJ[2], DJ[3]
xz
EPTT:x, y, z, xy, yz, xz LEPTT -- CI[2], DI[3] CJ[2], DJ[3]
The following output quantities are valid for ocean loading only:
GLOBAL COORD NMISC 1, 2, 3 -- --
VR, VZ NMISC 4, 5 -- --
AR, AZ NMISC 6, 7 -- --
PHDYN NMISC 8 -- --
ETA NMISC 9 -- --
TFLUID NMISC 10 -- --
VISC NMISC 11 -- --
REN, RET NMISC 12, 13 -- --
CT NMISC 14 -- --
CDY, CDZ NMISC 15, 16 -- --
CMY, CMZ NMISC 17, 18 -- --
URT, URN NMISC 19, 20, 21 -- --
ABURN NMISC 22 -- --
AN NMISC 23, 24 -- --
FX, FY, FZ NMISC 25, 26, 27 -- --
ARGU NMISC 28 -- --
1. Internal pressure (INT PRESS), external pressure (EXT PRESS), effective tension (EFFECTIVE
TENS), and maximum hoop stress (MAX HOOP STRESS) occur at integration points, and
not at end nodes.
quantities (LS, LEPEL, LEPTH, LEPPL, LEPCR, LEPTO, and LEPTT) at RST section nodes
(section corner nodes where results are available), at element Node I and J respectively.
PIPE289
CI and CJ are applicable only when KEYOPT(15) = 0. For a given section corner node
nn, CI and CJ are given as follows:
CI = (nn - 1) * 6 + COMP
or strain component (1 - x, 2 - y, 3 - z, 4 - xy, 5 - yz, 6 - xz). Locations of RST section
solution quantities (LS, LEPEL, LEPTH, LEPPL, LEPCR, LEPTO, and LEPTT) at RST section
integration points (section integration points where results are available), respectively
at element Node I and J. DI and DJ are applicable only when KEYOPT(15) = 1. For the
ith integration point (i = 1, 2, 3, or 4) in section cell nc, DI and DJ are given as follows:
DI = (nc - 1) * 24 + (i - 1) * 6 + COMP
DJ = (ncMax + nc - 1) * 24 + (i - 1) * 6 + COMP
strain component (1 - x, 2 - x, 3 - z, 4 - xy, 5 - yz, 6 - xz). Locations of RST section
Beams.

The shear stresses are caused by torsional and transverse loads. PIPE289 is based on first-order shear-
constant for the cross-section; therefore, the shear energy is based on a transverse-shear force. This
shear force is redistributed by predetermined shear stress distribution coefficients across the pipe cross-
section, and made available for output purposes. Use KEYOPT(8) to output shear stresses caused by
for torsional rigidity, warping rigidity, inertia properties, and shear center determination. The default
very accurately. Use the SECDATA command to adjust cross-section mesh density.
The traction-free state at the edges of the cross-section is met only in a well-refined model of the cross-
section.
PIPE289 Assumptions and Restrictions

• The pipe cannot have zero length.
PIPE289
• Cross-section distortion or collapse is not considered; therefore, section ovalization associated with
a curved pipe undergoing bending cannot be modeled. Curved pipes are best modeled using EL-
BOW290.
• Rotational degrees of freedom are not included in the lumped mass matrix if node-location offsets
are present.
• Only moderately "thick" pipes can be analyzed. See "PIPE289 Element Technology and Usage Recom-
mendations" (p. 1377) for more information.
• Hydrodynamic output via KEYOPT(12) is not available in harmonic analyses that include ocean
wave effects (HROCEAN).
PIPE289 Product Restrictions

ANSYS Professional
ELBOW290
3-D 3-Node Elbow
ELBOW290 Element Description

The ELBOW290 element is suitable for analyzing pipe structures with initially circular cross-sections and
thin to moderately thick pipe walls. The element accounts for cross-section distortion, which can be
commonly observed in curved pipe structures under loading.
ELBOW290 is a quadratic (three-node) pipe element in 3-D. The element has six degrees of freedom at
each node (the translations in the x, y, and z directions and rotations about the x, y, and z directions).
The element is well-suited for linear, large rotation, and/or large strain nonlinear applications. Change
in pipe thickness is accounted for in geometrically nonlinear analyses. The element accounts for follower
(load stiffness) effects of distributed pressures.
ELBOW290 can be used in layered applications for modeling laminated composite pipes. The accuracy
in modeling composite pipes is governed by the first-order shear-deformation theory (generally referred
to as Mindlin-Reissner shell theory).
ELBOW290 supports the pipe cross-section defined via SECTYPE, SECDATA, and SECOFFSET commands.
For more detailed information about this element, see ELBOW290 - 3-D 3-Node Elbow in the Mechanical
APDL Theory Reference.
Figure 1 ELBOW290 Geometry
K
I J
A general description of the element coordinate system is available in Coordinate Systems (p. 56) in this
document. Following is information about specific coordinate systems as they apply to ELBOW290.
Beam Coordinate Systems

The beam coordinate systems (x-y-z) are used for defining beam offsets and diametral temperature
gradients.
ELBOW290
z y z z
y y
y L
z
x K x x
J I K x J
I
Z
Z
Y
Y
X
X
No orientation node (default) Using orientation node L
The x axis is always the axial direction pointing from node I to node J. The optional orientation node
L, if used, defines a plane containing the x and z axes at node K. If this element is used in a large-deflec-
tion analysis, the location of the orientation node L is used only to initially orient the element.
When no orientation node is used, z is perpendicular to the curvature plane, uniquely determined by
the I, J, and K nodes. If I, J, and K are colinear, the y axis is automatically calculated to be parallel to the
global X-Y plane. In cases where the element is parallel to the global Z axis (or within a 0.01 percent
slope of the axis), the element y axis is oriented parallel to the global Y axis.
For information about orientation nodes and beam meshing, see Generating a Beam Mesh With Orient-
ation Nodes in the Modeling and Meshing Guide. See Quadratic Elements (Midside Nodes) in the same
document for information about midside nodes. For details about generating the optional orientation
node L automatically, see the LMESH and LATT command descriptions.
Local Cylindrical Coordinate Systems

The cylindrical coordinate systems (A-R-T) are used for defining internal section motions (that is, axial-
A, radial-R, and hoop-T displacements and rotations).
z R y
K
T
I
J
x
A
Y
X
ELBOW290
The cylindrical systems are always created from the default beam coordinate systems (beam system
without orientation node L), with A being the same as beam axis x, and an angle α (0 < α < 360 degrees)
from R to the beam axis y.

The element coordinate systems (e1-e2-e3) are defined at the mid-surfaces of the pipe wall. The e1, e2,
and e3 axes are parallel respectively to cylindrical axes A, T, and R in the undeformed configuration.
Each element coordinate system is updated independently to account for large material rotation during
a geometrically nonlinear analysis. Support is not available for user-defined element coordinate systems.
L3
e2
e3
e2
L1
L2
e1 θ e1
e3
e2 Z
e1
I Y
K J X
The layer coordinate systems (L1-L2-L3) are identical to the element coordinate system if no layer ori-
entation angles are specified; otherwise, the layer coordinate system can be generated by rotating the
corresponding element coordinate system about the shell normal (axis e3). Material properties are
defined in the layer systems; therefore, the layer system is also called the material coordinate system.
ELBOW290 Input Data

The geometry and node locations for ELBOW290 are shown in Figure 1 (p. 1393). The element is defined
by nodes I, J, and K in the global coordinate system.
I
ϕ J
When using ELBOW290, the subtended angle φ should not exceed 45 degrees:
ELBOW290 Cross Sections
ELBOW290
The element is a one-dimensional line element in space. The cross-section details are provided separately
(via the SECDATA command). A section is associated with the element by specifying the section ID
number (SECNUM). A section number is an independent element attribute.
ELBOW290 can only be associated with the pipe cross section (SECTYPE,,PIPE). For elements with ho-
mogenous materials, the material of the pipe is defined as an element attribute (MAT).
The layup of a composite pipe can be defined with a shell section (SECTYPE). Shell section commands
provide the input options for specifying the thickness, material, orientation and number of integration
points through the thickness of the layers. ANSYS obtains the actual layer thicknesses used for ELBOW290
element calculations (by scaling the input layer thickness) so that they are consistent with the total wall
thickness given by the pipe section. A single-layer shell section definition is possible, allowing flexibility
with regard to the number of integration points used and other options.
For shell section input, you can designate the number of integration points (1, 3, 5, 7, or 9) located
through the thickness of each layer. When only one integration point is specified, the point is always
located midway between the top and bottom surfaces. If three or more points are specified, one point
is located on the top surface, one point is located on the bottom surface, and the remaining points are
distributed at equal distances between the top and bottom points. The default number of integration
points for each layer is 3. When a single layer is defined and plasticity is present, however, the number
of integration points is changed to a minimum of five during solution.
In "Element and Layer Coordinate Systems" (p. 1395), the layer coordinate system can be obtained by rotating
the corresponding element coordinate system about the shell normal (axis e3) by angle θ (in degrees).
The value of θ for each layer is given by the SECDATA command input for the shell section.
For details about associating a shell section with a pipe section, see the SECDATA command document-
ation.
Cross-Section Deformation
The level of accuracy in elbow cross-sectional deformation is given by the number of Fourier terms
around the circumference of the cross section. The accuracy can be adjusted via KEYOPT(2) = n, where
n is an integer value from 0 through 8, as follows:
KEYOPT(2) = 0 -- Only uniform radial expansion and transverse shears through the pipe wall are al-
lowed. Suitable for simulating straight pipes without undergoing bending.
KEYOPT(2) = 1 -- Radial expansion and transverse shears are allowed to vary along the circumference
to account for bending. Suitable for straight pipes in small-deformation analysis.
KEYOPT(2) = 2 through 8 -- Allow general section deformation, including radial expansion, ovalization,
and warping. Suitable for curved pipes or straight pipes in large-deformation analysis. The default
is KEYOPT(2) = 2. Higher values for KEYOPT(2) may be necessary for pipes with thinner walls, as they
are more susceptible to complex cross-section deformation than are pipes with thicker walls.
Element computation becomes more intensive as the value of KEYOPT(2) increases. Use a KEYOPT(2)
value that offers an optimal balance between accuracy and computational cost.
Cross-Section Constraints
The constraints on the elbow cross-section can be applied at the element nodes I, J, and K with the
following section degrees of freedom labels:
SE – section radial expansion
ELBOW290
SO – section ovalization
SW – section warping
SRA – local shell normal rotation about cylindrical axis A
SRT – local shell normal rotation about cylindrical axis T
SECT – all section deformation
x x z x
z z
y y y
z
Tangential
Radial Expansion
Component of Warping (SW)
(SE)
Ovalization (SO)
x z x z
y y
Local Rotation Local Rotation

(SRA) (SRT)
Only fixed cross-section constraints are allowed via the D command. Delete section constraints via the
DDELE command. For example, to constrain the warping and ovalization of the cross-section at node
n, issue this command:
D,n,SW,,,,,SO
To allow only the radial expansion of the cross-section, use the following commands:
D,n,SECT
DDELE,n,SE
It is not practical to maintain the continuity of cross-section deformation between two adjacent elements
joined at a sharp angle. For such cases, ANSYS recommends coupling the nodal displacements and ro-
tations but leaving the cross-section deformation uncoupled. The ELBOW command can automate the
process by uncoupling the cross-section deformation for any adjacent elements with cross-sections in-
tersecting at an angle greater than 20 degrees.
Element loads are described in Nodal Loading (p. 49). Forces are applied at the nodes. By default, EL-
BOW290 element nodes are located at the center of the cross-section. Use the SECOFFSET command's
ELBOW290
OFFSETY and OFFSETZ arguments for the pipe section to define locations other than the centroid for
force application.
Pressures may be input as surface loads on the element faces as shown by the circled numbers in the
following illustration. Positive pressures act into the pipe wall.
The end-cap pressure effect is included by default. The end-cap effect on one or both ends of the element
can be deactivated via KEYOPT(6). When subjected to internal and external pressures, ELBOW290 with
end caps (KEYOPT(6) = 0) is always in equilibrium; that is, no net forces are produced. Without end caps
(KEYOPT(6) = 1), the element is also in equilibrium except for the case when the element is curved.
With end caps only at one end (KEYOPT(6) = 2 or 3), the element is obviously not in equilibrium.
Pressure Load Stiffness
The effects of pressure load stiffness are included by default for this element. If an unsymmetric matrix
is needed for pressure load stiffness effects, issue an NROPT,UNSYM command.
Temperatures
When KEYOPT(1) = 0, a layer-wise pattern is used. T1 and T2 are temperatures at inner wall, T3 and T4
and the interface temperatures between layer 1 and layer 2, ending with temperatures at the exterior
of the pipe. All undefined temperatures are default to TUNIF. If exactly (NL + 1) temperatures are given
(where NL is the number of layers), then one temperature is taken as the uniform temperature at the
bottom of each layer, with the last temperature for the exterior of the pipe.
T1 T3 T2 T4
Layer 1 Layer 1
Layer2 Layer2
Node I Node J
When KEYOPT(1) = 1, temperatures can be input as element body loads at three locations at both end
nodes of the element so that the temperature varies linearly in the beam y axis and z axis directions.
At both ends, the element temperatures are input at the section centroid (TAVG), at the outer radius
from the centroid in the element y direction (Ty), and at the outer radius from the centroid in the element
z-direction (Tz). The first coordinate temperature TAVG defaults to TUNIF. If all temperatures after the
ELBOW290
first are unspecified, they default to the first. If all temperatures at node I are input, and all temperatures
at node J are unspecified, the node J temperatures default to the corresponding node I temperatures.
For any other input pattern, unspecified temperatures default to TUNIF. The following graphic illustrates
temperature input when KEYOPT(1) = 1:
z z
Tz(I) Tz(J)
Ty(I) Ty(J)
y y
TAVG(I) TAVG(J)
Node I Node J
Transverse Shear Stiffness
ELBOW290 includes the effects of transverse shear deformation through the pipe wall. The transverse
shear stiffness of the element is a 2 x 2 matrix, as shown:
 E11 E12 
E= 
sym E22 
For a single-layer elbow with isotropic material, default transverse shear stiffnesses are as follows:
 kGh 0 
E =  
 0 kGh 
where k = 5/6, G = shear modulus, and h = pipe wall thickness.
You can override the default transverse shear stiffness values by assigning different values via the
SECCONTROLS command for the shell section.
ELBOW290 Input Summary

Nodes
I, J, K, and L (the optional orientation node)
Degrees of Freedom

Section Information

Material Properties
ELBOW290
Specify BETD only once for the element (use MAT command to assign the material property set).
REFT may be provided once for the element, or it may assigned on a per-layer basis.
Surface Loads
Pressure --
Internal pressure
External pressure
Body Loads
Temperatures --
For KEYOPT(1) = 0 -- T1, T2 (at bottom of layer 1), T3, T4 (between layers 1-2); similarly for
between next layers, ending with temperatures at top of layer NL (2 * (NL + 1) maximum).
For KEYOPT(1) = 1 -- TAVG(I), Ty(I), Tz(I), TAVG(J), Ty(J), Tz(J)
Special Features
Birth and death

Elasticity
Hyperelasticity
Large deflection
Large strain
Plasticity
Stress stiffening
Viscoelasticity
KEYOPT(1)
Temperature input
0 --
Layerwise input
1 --
Diametral gradient
KEYOPT(2)
Number of Fourier terms (used for cross-sectional flexibility)
0 --
Uniform radial expansion
1 --
Nonuniform radial expansion to account for bending
2 through 8 --
General section deformation (default = 2)
KEYOPT(6)
End cap loads
0 --
ELBOW290
1 --
2 --
Internal and external pressures cause loads on element node I
3 --
Internal and external pressures cause loads on element node J
KEYOPT(8)
0 --
Store data for bottom of bottom layer and top of top layer (multilayer elements) (default)
1 --
Store data for TOP and BOTTOM, for all layers (multilayer elements)
2 --
Store data for TOP, BOTTOM, and MID for all layers; applies to single-layer and multilayer elements.
(The volume of data may be considerable.)
ELBOW290 Output Data


• Additional element output as described in Table 1: ELBOW290 Element Output Definitions (p. 1403)
Integration Stations
Integration stations along the length and within the cross-section of the elbow are shown in Figure
2 (p. 1401).
Figure 2 ELBOW290 Element Integration Stations

x
Integration points x
along the length x
La
(g = ±0.5773503)
x ye
x La r2
ye
r1
x
xx
xx
36
0°
x /nc
x J
K (g = 1) Within the cross-section
I
Along the length (nc = number of circumferential
(g = -1) divisions, given by pipe section
input)
Element solution is available at all integration points through element printout (OUTPR). Solution via
the POST1 postprocessor is available at element nodes and selected section integration locations (see
KEYOPT(8) settings for more details).
ELBOW290
Stress Output
Several items are illustrated in Figure 3 (p. 1402):
Figure 3 ELBOW290 Stress Output
SY
SX
SX(TOP)
SX (MID)
SX (BOT)
e2
Q13
M12
M11
N11 Q23
M22
e1
N12
N12 M21
e3 N22
L3 yIJ
L2 Z
e2
L1
Y
e1 X
Interlaminar shear stress is available at the layer interfaces. KEYOPT(8) must be set to either 1 or 2 to
output these stresses in the POST1 postprocessor. A general description of solution output is given in
Solution Output (p. 50). See the Basic Analysis Guide for ways to review results.
The element shell stress resultants (N11, M11, Q13, etc.) are parallel to the element coordinate system
(e1-e2-e3), as are the shell membrane strains and curvatures (ε11, κ11, γ13, etc.) of the element. Shell
stress resultants and generalized shell strains are available via the SMISC option at the element end
nodes I and J only.
ELBOW290
ELBOW290 also outputs beam-related stress resultants (Fx, My, TQ, etc) and linearized stresses (SDIR,
SByT, SByB, etc) at two element end nodes I and J to SMISC records. Beam stress resultants and linearized
stresses are parallel to the beam coordinate system (x-y-z).
Linearized Stress
bending in each direction separately. Therefore, ELBOW290 provides a linearized stress output as part
of its SMISC output record, as indicated in the following definitions:
SDIR = Fx/A, where Fx is the axial load (SMISC quantities 1 and 36) and A is the area of the cross section
(SMISC quantities 7 and 42).

SBzT = My * zmax / Iyy
SBzB = My * zmin / Iyy
where My, Mz are bending moments (SMISC quantities 2,37,3,38). Coordinates ymax, ymin, zmax, and zmin
are the maximum and minimum y, z coordinates in the cross section measured from the centroid. Values
Iyy and Izz are moments of inertia of the cross section.
The reported stresses are strictly valid only for elastic behavior of members. ELBOW290 always employs
ELBOW290 does not provide extensive element printout. Because the POST1 postprocessor provides
more comprehensive output processing tools, ANSYS suggests issuing the OUTRES command to ensure
that the required results are stored in the database. To view 3-D deformed shapes for ELBOW290, issue
an OUTRES,MISC or OUTRES,ALL command for static or transient analyses. To view 3-D mode shapes
for a modal or eigenvalue buckling analysis, expand the modes with element results calculation active
via the MXPAND command's Elcalc = YES option.
available.
Table 1 ELBOW290 Element Output Definitions

Name Definition O R
ELBOW290
Name Definition O R
NODES Element connectivity - Y
THICK Average wall thickness - Y
AREA Area of cross-section - Y
TEMP T1, T2 at bottom of layer 1, T3, T4 between - Y
layers 1-2, similarly for between next layers,
ending with temperatures at top of layer NL (2
* (NL + 1) maximum)
XZ
EPTO:EQV Total equivalent mechanical strains (EPEL + EPPL - -
+ EPCR)
yielding)
PLASTIC, CREEP
Fx Section axial force - Y
My, Mz Section bending moments - Y
TQ Section torsional moment - Y
SFy, SFz Section shear forces - Y
SDIR Axial direct stress - Y
ELBOW290
Name Definition O R
SByT Bending stress on the element +y side of the - Y
pipe
SByB Bending stress on the element -y side of the - Y
pipe
SBzT Bending stress on the element +z side of the - Y
pipe
SBzB Bending stress on the element -z side of the - Y
pipe
N11, N22, N12 Wall in-plane forces (per unit length) - Y
M11, M22, M12 Wall out-of-plane moments (per unit length) - Y
Q13, Q23 Wall transverse shear forces (per unit length) - Y
ε11, ε22, ε12 Wall membrane strains - Y
κ11, κ22, κ12 Wall curvatures - Y
γ13, γ23 Wall transverse shear strains - Y
1. The subsequent stress solution repeats for top, middle, and bottom surfaces.
5. Available via an OUTRES,LOCI command only.
7. The equivalent strains use an effective Poisson's ratio. For elastic and thermal, you set the value
(MP,PRXY). For plastic and creep, ANSYS sets the value at 0.5.
Table 2: ELBOW290 Item and Sequence Numbers (p. 1406) lists output available for the ETABLE command
The Item and Sequence Number Table (p. 52) in this document for more information. The output tables
use the following notation:
Name
output quantity as defined in Table 1: ELBOW290 Element Output Definitions (p. 1403)
Item
ELBOW290
I,J
Table 2 ELBOW290 Item and Sequence Numbers

Name Item I J
Fx SMISC 1 36
My SMISC 2 37
Mz SMISC 3 38
TQ SMISC 4 39
SFz SMISC 5 40
SFy SMISC 6 41
Area SMISC 7 42
SDIR SMISC 8 43
SByT SMISC 9 44
SByB SMISC 10 45
SBzT SMISC 11 46
SBzB SMISC 12 47
N11 SMISC 14 49
N22 SMISC 15 50
N12 SMISC 16 51
M11 SMISC 17 52
M22 SMISC 18 53
M12 SMISC 19 54
Q13 SMISC 20 55
Q23 SMISC 21 56
ε11 SMISC 22 57
ε22 SMISC 23 58
ε12 SMISC 24 59
κ11 SMISC 25 60
κ22 SMISC 26 61
κ12 SMISC 27 62
γ13 SMISC 28 63
γ23 SMISC 29 64
THICK SMISC 30 65
ELBOW290 Assumptions and Restrictions

• The element cannot have zero length.
• Zero wall thickness is not allowed. (Zero thickness layers are allowed.)
ELBOW290
• In a nonlinear analysis, the solution is terminated if the thickness at any integration point vanishes
(within a small numerical tolerance).
• This element works best with the full Newton-Raphson solution scheme (the default behavior in
solution control).
however, normals to the center wall surface before deformation are assumed to remain straight
after deformation.
• If multiple load steps are used, the number of layers must remain unchanged between load steps.
• If the layer material is hyperelastic, the layer orientation angle has no effect .
• Stress stiffening is always included in geometrically nonlinear analyses (NLGEOM,ON). Apply prestress
effects via a PSTRES command.
• The through-thickness stress SZ is always zero.
• The effects of fluid motion inside the pipe are ignored.
ELBOW290 Product Restrictions

ANSYS Professional
USER300
User-Defined Element
USER300 Element Description

ANSYS offers a convenient way create your own custom element named USER300. You can create vir-
tually any element type.
The UserElem subroutine provides an interface to ANSYS code above the element level, passing all
data needed to create your user-defined element, then returning all data and results from the element
to update the database and files. Because access to database and file information occurs through the
interface, an understanding of ANSYS database routines and file structures is rarely necessary. The inter-
face also provides access to ANSYS code at the material level, allowing you to call ANSYS standard
material subroutines from your element coding.
For detailed instructions, see Creating a New Element via the User-Defined Ele-
ment API in the Guide to ANSYS User Programmable Features.
USER300 Input Data

Use the USRELEM and USRDOF commands to input basic element characteristics. All other character-
istics default automatically.
Special features include element convergence criteria and cutback control via the element.
The element supports parallel processing and Distributed ANSYS.
USER300 Assumptions and Restrictions

The following capabilities are not available for user-defined elements:
• Birth and death

• Superelement stress pass
• Initial stress
• Section input
• Input of fluences
• Swelling
USER300 Product Restrictions

Bibliography
[1] Nuclear Systems Material Handbook. Vol. 1: Design Data, Part 1: Structural Materials, Group 1: High
Alloy Steels . U. S. Department of Energy, Office of Scientific and Technical Information. Oak
Ridge, TN.
[2] Nuclear Systems Material Handbook. Vol. 1: Design Data, Part 1: Structural Materials, Group 2: Low
Alloy Steels, Section 2-2 1/4 CR - 1 Mo. . U. S. Department of Energy, Office of Scientific and
Technical Information. Oak Ridge, TN.
[3] F. Barlat and J. Lian. "Plastic Behavior and Stretchability of Sheet Metals. Part I: A Yield Function for
Orthotropic Sheets Under Plane Stress Conditions". Int. Journal of Plasticity, 5. pg. 51-66.
[4] F. Barlat, D. J. Lege, and J. C. Brem. "A Six-Component Yield Function for Anistropic Materials". Int.
Journal of Plasticity, 7. pg. 693-712.
[5] R. Hill. "A Theory of the Yielding and Plastic Flow of Anisotropic Metals". Proceedings of the Royal Society
of London, Series A., Vol. 193. 1948.
[6] F. K. Chang and K. Y. Chang. "A Progressive Damage Model for Laminated Composites Containing Stress
Concentration”. Journal of Composite Materials, 21. pg. 834-855. 1987a.
[7] R. G. Dean. Evaluation and Development of Water Wave Theories for Engineering Application. Volume
2, Tabulation of Dimensionless Stream Function Theory Variables, Special Report No. 1, . U. S.
Army Corps of Engineers, Coastal Engineering Research Center. Fort Belvoir, VA. November 1974.
[8] Michael E. McCormick. Ocean Engineering Wave Mechanics. Wiley & Sons. New York. 1973.
user-defined, 42
Index elements
acoustic, 96
automatic selection of, 84
A coupled-physics, 91
axisymmetric elements
current-technology , 38
general, 70
legacy vs. current, 39
harmonic, 76
supporting linear perturbation, 87
harmonic with nonaxisymmetric loads, 77
thermal, 94
user-defined, 42
B
beam elements, 82 F
BEAM161, 619
failure criteria, 54
BEAM188, 1021
FLUID116, 411
BEAM189, 1039
FLUID129, 489
FLUID130, 493
C FLUID136, 513
Cantilever beams, 1040 FLUID138, 523
CIRCU124, 461 FLUID139, 527
CIRCU125, 473 FLUID141, 533
CIRCU94, 359 FLUID142, 543
COMBI165, 657 FLUID220, 1161
COMBI214, 1137 FLUID221, 1167
COMBIN14, 133 FLUID29, 163
CONTA171, 691 FLUID80, 329
CONTA172, 707 FLUID81, 335
CONTA173, 723 FOLLW201, 1085
CONTA174, 741
CONTA175, 759 G
CONTA176, 777
generalized plane strain, 62
CONTA177, 793
CONTA178, 805
CPT212, 1125 H
CPT213, 1131 HF118, 421
CPT215, 1143 HF119, 427
CPT216, 1149 HF120, 435
CPT217, 1155 HSFLD241, 1257
HSFLD242, 1263
D
degenerated shape elements, 39 I
INFIN110, 395
INFIN111, 401
E INFIN47, 233
ELBOW290, 1393
INFIN9, 115
element loading, 45
INTER115, 407
body loads, 47
INTER192, 1065
inertial loads, 48
INTER193, 1069
initial stresses, 48
INTER194, 1073
surface loads, 46
INTER195, 1077
element types
Index
INTER202, 1089 PLANE121, 443

INTER203, 1093 PLANE13, 123
INTER204, 1097 PLANE162, 633
INTER205, 1101 PLANE182, 845
PLANE183, 853
L PLANE223, 1173
linear perturbation PLANE230, 1215
material behavior, 88 PLANE233, 1231
supported elements, 87 PLANE25, 143
LINK11, 119 PLANE35, 187
LINK160, 615 PLANE53, 241
LINK167, 663 PLANE55, 251
LINK180, 823 PLANE75, 307
LINK31, 175 PLANE77, 313
LINK33, 179 PLANE78, 319
LINK34, 183 PLANE83, 341
LINK68, 293 PRETS179, 819
prism elements, 39
M
MASS166, 661 R
MASS21, 139 REINF263, 1277
MASS71, 303 REINF264, 1285
MATRIX27, 151 REINF265, 1293
MATRIX50, 237 reinforcing, 1277, 1285, 1293
MESH200, 1081 reinforcing elements, 83
mixed u-P formulation elements, 65 ROM144, 553
MPC184, 861
MPC184 cylindrical joint, 921 S
MPC184 general joint, 963 shell elements, 81
MPC184 orient joint, 951 SHELL131, 497
MPC184 planar joint, 933 SHELL132, 505
MPC184 point-in-plane joint, 905 SHELL157, 599
MPC184 revolute joint, 877 SHELL163, 639
MPC184 rigid link/beam, 867 SHELL181, 829
MPC184 screw joint, 973 SHELL208, 1105
MPC184 slider, 873 SHELL209, 1115
MPC184 slot joint, 897 SHELL28, 157
MPC184 spherical, 957 SHELL281, 1339
MPC184 translational joint, 913 SHELL41, 225
MPC184 universal joint, 887 SHELL61, 257
MPC184 weld joint, 945 SOLID122, 449
SOLID123, 455
N SOLID164, 651
nodal loading, 49 SOLID168, 667
SOLID185, 983
SOLID186, 999
P SOLID187, 1015
pipe elements, 82 SOLID226, 1187
PIPE288, 1359 SOLID227, 1201
PIPE289, 1377 SOLID231, 1221
plane strain SOLID232, 1227
generalized, 62 SOLID236, 1239
SOLID237, 1249
SOLID272, 1301
SOLID273, 1309
SOLID276, 1327
SOLID278, 1317
SOLID285, 1353
SOLID5, 105
SOLID62, 273
SOLID65, 283
SOLID70, 297
SOLID87, 349
SOLID90, 353
SOLID96, 367
SOLID97, 373
SOLID98, 385
SOLSH190, 1055
SOURC36, 191
substructuring, 41
superelements, 41
SURF151, 557
SURF152, 567
SURF153, 577
SURF154, 585
SURF156, 593
SURF159, 605
SURF251 element, 1269
SURF252 element, 1273
T
TARGE169, 671
TARGE170, 679
tetrahedral elements, 39
TRANS126, 479
triangle elements, 39
U
user-defined elements, 42
USER300, 1409
USER300 custom element, 42

Ansys 14 Element Reference

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ansys 14 Element Reference

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ansys 14 Element Reference

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ANSYS Mechanical APDL Element Reference

ANSYS, Inc. Release 14.0

U.S. Government Rights

Published in the U.S.A.

3.1.9.1. Element KEYOPT Defaults .............................................................................................. 49

4.1.5.2. Harmonic Axisymmetric Elements .................................................................................. 76

COMBIN39: Nonlinear Spring ............................................................................................................... 209

SURF154: 3-D Structural Surface Effect ................................................................................................. 585

INTER195: 3-D 8-Node Gasket ............................................................................................................ 1077

4.4. Bending and Shear Loading (ISYM = 1) .................................................................................................. 79

1.2. Conventions Used in This Reference

Type style or Indicates

Bold uppercase indicates a command name (such as K or

One or more angle brackets (>) separate menu items in a menu

Type style or Indicates

In some cases (where indicated in the documentation), non-

1.2.1. Applicable Products

Element Option Availability

Connections and High Performance Computing

1.2.2. Product Codes

MP ME ST PR PRN DS DSS FL EM EH DY PP VT EME MFS

1.3. Product Capabilities

2.1. Overview of Element Characteristics

2.1.1. Identifying Element Types

2.1.2. 2-D vs. 3-D Elements

2.1.3. Element Shape Characteristics

• A point element is typically defined by one node, such as a mass element.

2.1.4. Element Degrees of Freedom and Discipline

2.1.5. User-Defined Elements

2.2. Summary of Element Types

BEAM Elements HF Elements MESH Elements SHELL Elements

BEAM Elements Graphic Pictorials

BEAM Elements Graphic Pictorials

CIRCU Elements Graphic Pictorials

COMBIN Elements Graphic Pictorials

COMBIN Elements Graphic Pictorials

CONTAC Elements Graphic Pictorials

CPT Elements Graphic Pictorials

FLUID Elements Graphic Pictorials

FLUID Elements Graphic Pictorials

FLUID Elements Graphic Pictorials

FOLLW Elements Graphic Pictorials

HF Elements Graphic Pictorials

HSFLD Elements Graphic Pictorials

INFIN Elements Graphic Pictorials

INTER Elements Graphic Pictorials

INTER Elements Graphic Pictorials

LINK Elements Graphic Pictorials

MASS Elements Graphic Pictorials

MATRIX Elements Graphic Pictorials

MESH Elements Graphic Pictorials

MPC Elements Graphic Pictorials

PIPE Elements Graphic Pictorials

PIPE Elements Graphic Pictorials

PLANE Elements Graphic Pictorials

PLANE Elements Graphic Pictorials

PRETS Elements Graphic Pictorials

REINF Elements Graphic Pictorials

REINF Elements Graphic Pictorials

ROM Elements Graphic Pictorials